JP7201928B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

It relates to a pachinko game machine.

As a recent pachinko game machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is triggered when a game ball enters the starting hole on the game board (game area), and if you win the jackpot lottery, you win a big hit (special game ) state, and a large winning opening provided on the game board can be opened to win a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines constructed in this way, there are a probability variable game state for increasing the probability of winning in the big win lottery and a time shortening game state for increasing the efficiency of pattern variation for notifying the lottery result in the big win lottery. There is also a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player by these game states.

JP 2016-106755 A JP 2016-120225 A JP 2016-120230 A JP 2017-086528 A JP 2016-135246 A JP 2018-064626 A JP 2018-086140 A JP 2018-094061 A

However, since many such gaming machines have existed in the past, there is a problem that the development of a machine capable of realizing even more novel game characteristics is desired.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game section that controls the performance display on the performance display section
with
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode;
with
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the plurality of first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit in the one performance period, the final first performance symbols are displayed. A combination is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit, and after variably displaying a plurality of second effect symbols on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final design of the second effect pattern production pattern display control means for controlling the combination to be displayed on the production display unit;
with
In a situation where there is a specific hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, a performance symbol prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation degree of the special game related to the specific suspension using the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit. and
When executing the performance symbol prefetch effect, the first performance symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination and a special performance can be executed for the first performance symbols, while the second performance symbols are displayed in the predetermined combination. and is configured so that the special effect is not executed for the second effect pattern,
Multiple holds are triggered by the ball entering the starting port during the execution of the variable display of identification information in a situation where no holds remain, and the hold other than the hold that is digested first among the multiple holds If one is a specific hold, and the first hold to be digested after the end of the variable display is completed, the number of holds to be digested before the specific hold is the first number of holds In the first symbol variation that can be executed, the first performance symbols can be displayed in the predetermined combination as the performance symbol look-ahead effect, and the number of suspensions to be digested before the specific suspension is the first. Even in the second pattern variation that can be executed under the condition that the second reservation number is larger than the reservation number, the first production pattern can be displayed in the predetermined combination as the production pattern look-ahead production, When the first performance symbols are displayed in the predetermined combination as the performance symbol look-ahead effect in the first symbol variation, the first performance symbols in the first symbol variation are the predetermined combination. A production process until display, and a first production in the second pattern fluctuation when the first production pattern is displayed in the predetermined combination as the production pattern look-ahead production in the second pattern fluctuation. The design is configured to be different from the production process until the symbols are displayed in the predetermined combination,
As game states during non-execution of the special game, there are a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
During the normal game state and during the variable standby in which the identification information is not variably displayed, the power cutoff occurs in a situation where the predetermined standby display is displayed on the effect display section, and then the power cutoff is displayed after the power cutoff. In the display mode of the design for one effect, and in the state where the predetermined standby display is displayed on the effect display part during the specific game state and the variable standby in which the identification information is not displayed, the power supply is cut off. It is configured to be different from the display mode of the first effect pattern displayed after the power is turned off,
In a situation where a predetermined effect mode is set when the special game is not executed, a predetermined effect sound can be output at least during the variable display of the first effect symbols,
A plurality of types of the predetermined effect sound are provided, and the type of the predetermined effect sound can be switched during the variable display of the identification information,
As the display mode of the first effect symbol when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode are provided, and the display mode of the first effect symbol is the first display mode. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the identification information was stopped and displayed, the display mode of the first effect pattern can be the second display mode different from the first display mode,
The predetermined standby display is started in a situation where the display mode of the first effect symbol is the second display mode, and even after the predetermined standby display is finished, the display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed. is configured to remain in the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first effect symbol is started to be displayed in the second display mode after the predetermined period has passed since the stop display of the identification information, the display mode of the first effect symbol is changed to the second display mode. While the predetermined effect sound is output for at least a specific period of the period from the start of the display to the start of the predetermined standby display, the displayed after the predetermined standby display ends The predetermined effect sound is not output during the display of the first effect pattern in the second display mode,
It is configured to be able to form a reach state with a plurality of first production patterns,
In a predetermined situation, it is configured to be able to form a superimposed state in which a certain first effect pattern and the certain first effect pattern are superimposed on each other,
The period during which the superimposed state is formed in the first variable display pattern, which is the pattern of the variable display that forms the ready-to-reach state, is longer than the period in which the superimposed state is formed in the second variable display pattern, which is the pattern of the variable display that does not form the ready-to-reach state. configured to be long,
The specific type of first effect pattern is configured to be displayable with a special element indicating that it is highly advantageous to the player in a specific situation,
The first effect pattern of a type different from the specific type of first effect pattern is configured not to be displayed with the special element attached in the specific situation,
The second effect pattern is configured not to be displayed with the special element attached in the specific situation, regardless of the type of the second effect pattern,
The final combination of the first effect pattern and the final combination of the second effect pattern are the final combination of the first effect pattern and Regardless of the display mode of the final combination of the second effect symbols, it is configured to be displayed in a predetermined display mode,
Having at least a specific display mode as the predetermined display mode related to the final combination of the first effect symbols,
The first effect pattern is configured to be displayed by combining a specific display element and a predetermined display element,
The specific display element in a certain first performance pattern among the plurality of first performance symbols constituting the specific display mode after recovery from the power failure is set as the first display element, and the power failure occurs. The specific display element in a certain first effect pattern among the plurality of first effect patterns constituting the final combination of the preceding first effect patterns is defined as a second display element, and the first display element and the second display element are the same type of the specific display element, a first effect among the plurality of first effect patterns that constitute the specific display mode after recovery from power failure One of a plurality of first performance symbols constituting a final combination of the predetermined display element combined with the first display element in the design, and the first performance symbol before the power failure occurs. The predetermined display element combined with the second display element in the first effect pattern is configured to be of a different type.
It is a pachinko game machine characterized by
<Appendix>
Other aspects different from this aspect will be listed below, but the present invention can be implemented without being limited to these.
The pachinko machine according to this alternative aspect is
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode in the main game identification information display part, a variable winning hole opening game capable of making the variable winning hole advantageous can be executed. A special game control means capable of executing a special game when a game ball enters a specific area during execution of an open game,
The execution period of the variable winning opening open game includes a start demonstration period that is a waiting period and a unit game execution period that is a period during which the variable winning opening can be opened,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed, the starting demonstration period starts from the start of the variable winning opening opening game, and when the starting demonstration period ends, the unit game execution period starts,
When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the unit game execution period, the variable winning opening is configured to perform a specific opening that facilitates entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening,
The predetermined period includes at least a first predetermined period and a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period,
Having at least a first specific mode and a second specific mode as the stop display mode of the specific mode,
The predetermined period of the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode in a predetermined game state is the first predetermined period,
The predetermined period of the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stop-displayed in the stop display mode of the second specific mode in a predetermined game state is the second predetermined period,
The main game identification information is displayed in the second specific mode in a predetermined game state rather than the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode in the predetermined game state. The variable winning opening opening game that is executed after being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of , has a higher easiness of entering the game ball into the specific area,
Part of the period from the start of the start demo period to the end of the variable winning slot open game, or part of the period from the start of the unit game execution period to the elapse of the predetermined period , is configured to be able to execute an operation presentation prompting the player to operate the operation member,
When the vibration is detected, it can be determined that a predetermined vibration error has occurred, and when it is determined that the predetermined vibration error has occurred, an error notification regarding the predetermined vibration error can be executed,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, it is not determined that a predetermined vibration error has occurred from the start of the unit game execution period to a first timing before the predetermined period elapses, while the first timing is not determined. After that, it is configured so that it can be determined that a predetermined vibration error has occurred,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that, in a variable winning opening opening game in which the stop display mode of the specific mode is different, the time from the start of the unit game execution period to the first timing may differ. be.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize a further innovative gaming property in the gaming machine that employs the concept of creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the first big winning hole C10 in the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game from the jackpot symbol on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game from the small winning symbols on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the V winning hole entry ball determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of second decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flow chart of second main game win time prefetch determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flow chart of prefetch suspension content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flow chart of decoration design content determination processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the notice effect/design stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is an image diagram showing the notice effect/design stop symbol display in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a configuration diagram of the variation mode determination table T0 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the non-reduced time gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. is. FIG. 42 is a configuration diagram of a variation mode determination table T1 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the time shortening game state in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. be. FIG. 43 is a configuration diagram of the variation mode determination table T2 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the time-reduced gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. be. FIG. 44 is a configuration diagram of the variation mode determination table T3 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the time shortening gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. be. FIG. 45 is a configuration diagram of the variation mode determination table T4 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the non-reduced time gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. is. FIG. 46 is a configuration diagram of the variation mode determination table T5 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the non-time shortening gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. is. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the number of times of the high base state set in the time shortening game state in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing table transition using the variation mode determination tables T0 to T5 in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the performance symbols and V performance when power is interrupted during symbol fluctuation for the first and second main game symbols in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment and power is restored. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an effect stage in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment when power is cut off during a small winning game or a special game, and power is restored. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a game flow in a non-time reduction game state in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a game flow of the second pseudo variation and the third pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous variation in the non-time shortening gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a game flow in the production stages of RUSH1 and RUSH2 in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a rotating body having a specific area provided inside the first big winning hole in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is an image diagram of a flow from SP reach (M chance) to a special game and a V increase effect in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is an image diagram of SP reach (M chance) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the small winning symbols and the look-ahead effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is an image diagram of an effect using the rotator icon displayed on the effect display device in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is an image diagram of a result screen in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 60 is an image diagram of a puncture effect in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an effect flow of continuous effect in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an effect scenario of the continuous effect A in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment when the pre-reading lottery is not won. FIG. 63 is an image diagram of the continuous effect A in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment when the prefetching lottery is not won. FIG. 64 is an image diagram of the continuous effect B in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment when the prefetching lottery is won. FIG. 65 is an image diagram of a continuous effect B (scenario) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment when the prefetching lottery is won. FIG. 66 is an image diagram of the continuous effect C in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 67 is an image diagram of the super M chance effect in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 68 is an image diagram of the on-hold Renso look-ahead effect in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 69 is an image diagram showing a charge promotion effect in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 70 is an image diagram of the continuous effect D in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the operation timing of the shutter when closing the "outside" hole with the shutter in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the basic structure of the front side of the game machine in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the sorting ball entrance in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flow chart of distribution member operation control processing in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flow chart of the first non-electric accessary product operation control process in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the second non-electric accessary product operation control process in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing winning symbols and a game flow in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing winning symbols and a game flow in a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing winning symbols and a game flow in a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a screen display during variable standby. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a screen display for volume adjustment or light amount adjustment. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a screen display during normal fluctuation. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a screen display during SP reach. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing transition of update of pending display. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the final display mode. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the display of hitting warnings (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display). FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability of displaying the pseudo consecutive symbols. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the relationship between the probability that pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed during the look-ahead effect display and the probability that pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed during trigger variation. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the relationship between power shutdown (not RAM clear) and decorative designs after power shutdown recovery. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the relationship between the power off (RAM clear) and the decoration pattern after power off and recovery. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the relationship between the reach voice and the probability of displaying the pseudo consecutive symbols. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a full-rotation effect. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing how decorative symbols change for each stage. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the display contents of decorative symbols during variation. FIG. 99 is an image diagram showing the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design when re-fluctuation is executed. FIG. 100 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific symbol is displayed and a super ready-to-win effect is produced. FIG. 101 is an image diagram showing a display transition when advanced symbols are displayed corresponding to the advance notice type and a super ready-to-win effect is produced. FIG. 102 is an image diagram showing display transition when a super ready-to-win effect is produced when different display modes are performed for the same advance notice type. FIG. 103 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a different look-ahead effect is performed and a super ready-to-win effect is obtained. FIG. 104 is an image diagram showing display transition when a different display mode is performed for the same look-ahead effect type, resulting in a super ready-to-win effect. FIG. 105 is an image diagram showing display transition when developing to the same super ready-to-win effect via different displays. FIG. 106 is an image diagram showing the display transition when developing into the super ready-to-win effect via the button effect. FIG. 107 is an image diagram showing display transitions when a super ready-to-win effect occurs in different effect stages. FIG. 108 is an image diagram showing display transition when re-fluctuation is executed in different production stages. FIG. 109 is an image diagram showing display transition when pseudo consecutive symbols and specific symbols are displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. FIG. 110 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the pseudo consecutive symbols and the specific symbols are displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. FIG. 111 is an image diagram showing display transition when the first decorative symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner. FIG. 112 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative design and the second decorative design. FIG. 113 is an image diagram relating to a case where a power failure occurs during execution of a loss variation. FIG. 114 is an image diagram relating to the case where a power failure occurs during execution of winning variation. FIG. 115 is an image diagram relating to a case where a power failure occurs while the look-ahead effect is not being executed. FIG. 116 is an image diagram relating to the case where a power failure occurs during execution of the look-ahead effect. FIG. 117 is an image diagram regarding execution of the performance of the role product. FIG. 118 is an image diagram regarding the action of the non-time reduction game state. FIG. 119 is an image diagram regarding the final variation in the time shortening game state. FIG. 120 is an image diagram regarding display priority at the time of error. FIG. 121 is an image diagram regarding the display priority when executing the button effect. FIG. 122 is an image diagram regarding the first decorative symbols and the game state. FIG. 123 is an image diagram regarding the features of the first decorative symbols depending on the game state. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each action etc. in the specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time reduction game state. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing execution timings of actions, etc. in the variable standby state. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the execution timing and execution time of each action of the first decoration symbols in the left row, right row, and middle row in the specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-reduced time gaming state. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing execution timing and execution time of each action of the first decoration symbols in the left row, right row, and middle row in the specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-reduced time gaming state. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the execution timing and execution time of each action of the left, right, and middle row first decorative symbols in a specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state. FIG. 129 is an image diagram from the determination stop of the losing symbols to the first re-fluctuation of the pseudo-continuous symbols. FIG. 130 is an image diagram from action 2 at the start of fluctuation to fixed position action 2 of pseudo continuous symbols. FIG. 131 is an image diagram from the fixed position action 2 to the shaking action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row. FIG. 132 is an image diagram from the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row to the fixed stop. Fig. 133 shows the first decoration whose symbols are changed in response to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols in a state where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side in the non-reduced time game state. FIG. 10 is an image diagram of a display from a mode in which a symbol is determined and stopped as a losing symbol to a second shaking action, and a display from a winning game end demonstration to the second shaking action. FIG. 134 is an image diagram showing the overlap relationship between the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns and the first decorative symbols in the middle column in the normal symbol fluctuation on the first main game side and the reach fluctuation in the non-reduced time gaming state. be. FIG. 135 is an image diagram showing a fixed-position action when executing the chance look-ahead effect with the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols in the non-time-reduction gaming state. FIG. 136 is an image diagram showing a fixed-position action in response to the trigger hold when executing the chance look-ahead effect with the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols. FIG. 137 is an image diagram showing a fixed-position action when executing the chance look-ahead effect with the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time reduction game state. FIG. 138 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the flow of the big winning mouth control process performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the flow of motor control processing performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting control processing performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the flow of the direct V shutter operation control process performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the flow of storage section operation control processing performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the flow of shutter normal operation control processing performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the flow of the shutter normal operation pattern setting process performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the flow of interference member normal operation control processing performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the flow of rotating drum normal operation control processing performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the flow of stopper normal operation control processing performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the flow of shutter termination operation control processing performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the flow of the interference member termination operation control process performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the flow of the rotating drum end operation control process performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the flow of stopper termination operation control processing performed by the main control board M according to the third embodiment. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing operation timings of the large winning opening and the internal movable body according to the third embodiment. FIG. 155 is a working diagram during a small winning game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 156 is a table relating to time values and effects to be executed during a small winning game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 157 is an image diagram regarding an effect during a small winning game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a table relating to time values and effects to be executed during the small winning game in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 159 is an image diagram regarding an effect during a small winning game in a pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a table relating to time values and effects to be executed during the small winning game in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a table relating to time values and effects to be executed during a small winning game in a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a table relating to time values during a small winning game in a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a table relating to the number of time reductions when passing V in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game is finished on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a table relating to time values during a small winning game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.

First, the meaning of each term used in this specification will be explained. "Entering a ball" includes not only winning a prize in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a gate where prize balls are not paid out. "Open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. Easy state. Also, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (on the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as a retracted state) ) (so-called tongue-type attacker), advance state=easy-win state, retreat state=non-easy-win state. “Random numbers” are random numbers used in lotteries (computer-based lotteries) to determine game content in pachinko machines, and include pseudo-random numbers in addition to strictly-defined random numbers (for example, random numbers are hard soft random numbers as random numbers, pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the results of games, specifically, "random numbers (random numbers for lottery)" related to the transition to special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of identification information are determined. ``variation mode determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, ``symbol determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, and ``hit pattern determination random number'' for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, etc., but at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In addition, in this specification, the number of random numbers is sometimes expressed in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. ) is called one random number obtained by one ball entry. called). Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, winning random number) may serve as another type of random number (for example, symbol determination random number). The "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which the large winning port can be open, a non-probability variable game state (low probability state) in which the lottery probability of transition to the special game state is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state (high probability state) with a high transition lottery probability to the game state, auxiliary game state (so-called high base state, for example, start In the case where the variable member is attached to the mouth, it is possible to lengthen the open period of the variable member, increase the winning probability of opening the variable member, and shorten the time for notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member. Optional, such as a state in which all of these are valid or a state in which at least one is valid), a non-assisted game state (low base state) without assistance for winning a prize at the starting gate that triggers the transition to a special game lottery is a combination of one or more of "Variable display stop time" means the time to hold the identification information in a stopped state when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. After the lapse of time, the change related to the remaining suspension is started (the change start condition and the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition are satisfied). In addition, in this specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game pattern (special pattern) or a decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design). The main game symbols (special symbols) are identification information whose display is controlled on the main control board side, and the decorative symbols (designs for production, design) are identification information as effects displayed on the sub control board side. is. The term “identification information can be displayed” is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission from light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color), physical typical display (for example, a pattern drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Production” refers to display content that enhances the interest of the game, such as changes, stops, notices, etc. of identification information, moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc. A combination of The "decorative pattern" may be in any form as long as the type of pattern can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.). Visual items, such as figures (including Chinese numerals), alphabets, letters, symbols, pictures, patterns, etc., are described. By finally stopping and displaying the image object on the active line in a combination of the same numbers and symbols, it is notified that a hit (big win or small win) has occurred. "First decorative design (first design for production)" and "second decorative design (second design for production)" are both "decorative designs (design for production, design)". However, it corresponds to those configured so that each of them can independently notify the occurrence of a hit (big win, small win) (for example, "first decorative pattern (first effect pattern)" becomes "777" It is also possible to notify the occurrence of a hit (big hit, small hit), or it is possible to notify the occurrence of a hit (big hit, small hit) with the "second decorative pattern (second design for performance)" becoming "777". be). "Variation mode" means, for example, variation time (variation time of main game pattern (special pattern), variation time of decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design), fluctuation time of normal pattern), decorative pattern A decoration pattern that can be visually recognized by the player by scrolling display (drawing pattern, design) from top to bottom (otherwise, scrolling display from bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc. is also possible) A decorative design (design design, design) that can be visually recognized by the player by switching the type of design (design design, design), rotating and displaying the decorative design (design design, design) on the spot and rotating it halfway or once. , binding) (Such scrolling display, rotating display, etc. may be referred to as "switching display mode") and the like. ``Temporarily stop (or temporarily stop) / not to temporarily stop (or temporarily stop) decorative patterns (drawing patterns, design)'' means that ``temporarily stop → change again'' is one set, and this one set is performed / It is synonymous with not doing it. "Re-fluctuation" refers to the situation of "temporarily stopping decorative patterns (drawing patterns, layout) → re-fluctuation", "starting fluctuation → temporarily changing decorative patterns (drawing patterns, layout) It is a term that includes the situation such as "stop" and "start of re-fluctuation → temporarily stop the decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design) (temporary stop after the second time)", and in pseudo-continuous production Pseudo fluctuations and revival fluctuations in the revival production (for example, during the super reach production, the combination of decorative patterns (drawing patterns, design) that indicate a loss are temporarily stopped, and the production stage that shifts after the super reach production ends. It is a term that indicates a variation that stops deterministically after temporarily stopping to a decorative pattern that indicates a hit after performing a re-fluctuation in . In addition, the final stop display timing (typically, after that, the so-called main game symbols are stop-displayed together with the stop-display of the so-called main game symbols) should be excluded to notify the occurrence or non-occurrence of a win (big win, small win). is synonymous with In addition, the "decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design)" is based on the second element (for example, numbers), and the first element (presence/content of accompanying information such as characters and "SUPER") and the third element (For example, a color effect) or the like may be attached. In addition, "decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design)", when the production mode is different, even if the second element is the same (same number, same alphabet, same letter, same symbol, etc.), the first The element and/or the third element may be configured differently. In addition, due to the difference in the first element and / or the third element, the degree of expectation that the reach variation will be a hit (big hit, small hit), pattern variation related to the look-ahead effect when a specific symbol combination is stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect The profit rate for the player, such as the degree of expectation of winning (big win, small win), the number of rounds in the special game, the game state after the special game is finished, etc., may be configured to be different. In addition, when configured in such a way, a high probability state and high base state (high probability high base state), a low probability state and high base state (low probability high base state), a high probability state and low base state (high In the low probability base state), the first element and / or the third element is advantageous for the player compared to the case of the low probability state and low base state (low probability low base state) which is the normal game state It may be configured to be In addition, the "information display unit" is for displaying information including an advance notice effect, etc., and is, for example, a effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of display media (entire unit) such as effect display device + 7-segment LED + LED lamp may be shown. In addition, the "effect display section" is for displaying effects including advance notice effects, etc., and includes, for example, effect display devices, 7-segment LEDs, LED lamps, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of display media (entire unit) such as effect display device + 7-segment LED + LED lamp may be shown.

The following embodiment is a model (first class first class compound machine) in which two conventional first class pachinko game machines are mixed. However, it is not limited to this in any way, and it is within the scope even if it is applied to other game machines (for example, conventional type 1, type 2, type 3, pachinko game machines such as general electric players) . Note that this embodiment is only an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. Moreover, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described. Further, in this embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limiting, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, referring to FIG. 1, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. A pachinko machine mainly consists of a machine frame and a game board. These will be described in order below.

First, the game machine frame of the pachinko game machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball tray D20, a lower ball tray D22 and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko game machine to a position to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame that matches the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for shooting game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering game balls to the launch rail, extracting game balls to the lower ball tray D22, and the like. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the game machine, and output sounds (sound effects) according to the game state and the like.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, First big prize gate C10, second big prize gate C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out port D36 is installed. Each element will be described in detail below.

Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start opening detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information.

Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start port corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start opening B10 includes a second main game start opening ball detection device B11s and a second main game start electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information. Next, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d changes between a closed state in which game balls are less likely to enter the second main game starter B10 and an open state in which game balls are easier to enter than in the normal game state.

Here, in this embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap vertically, and due to the presence of the first main game start port A10, the The upper part of the 2 main game start port B10 is blocked. In addition, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are the first main game start opening A10 And it is configured to be guided to the second main game start port B10.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the side of the second main game start port B10, but it is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the side of the first main game start port A10. may Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starter A10 and the second main game starter B10 are arranged so as to overlap vertically, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starter is arranged. A10 and the second main game start port B10 may be arranged apart from each other. In such a configuration, a member may be provided to cover the upper portion of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. In addition, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. A game ball flowing down the right side (with reference to the center of the game area) may be configured to be easily guided to the second main game start port B10 while being less likely to be guided to the first main game start port A10. It should be noted that "easily guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined, for example, by the number of incoming balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting port entering ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start hole H10, and generates auxiliary game start entrance ball information indicating the entrance ball at the time of entrance. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starter H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game starter electric accessory B11d of the second main game starter B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game start opening H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is easily guided. It is configured so as not to be easily guided {However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10. (For example, the auxiliary game start openings H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

Next, on the upper right side of the out-port D36, the first big prize-winning port C10 and the second big prize-winning port C20 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and flow down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are arranged before reaching the out hole D36.

Next, when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops at the winning symbol (big winning symbol, small winning symbol), the first big winning slot C10 is opened. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is in a horizontal rectangular shape and is positioned above the right side of the out opening D36 and below the second big winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a first large winning opening detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a discharge of the game ball that has entered the first large winning opening C10. It is provided with a first big winning hole discharge detection device C13s for detection and a first big winning hole electric accessory C11d (and a first big winning hole solenoid C13). Here, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the first big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering the first big winning hole C10. is generated, and the generated first big winning hole entry information is counted by the entry counter. In addition, the first big winning hole discharge detection device C13s is a sensor that detects the discharge of the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10, and generates the first big winning hole discharge information indicating the discharge at the time of discharge. , the generated first big winning hole discharge information is counted by the discharge counter. The first big winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 between a normal game state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first big winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins ( The first big prize opening solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal game state in which the game ball is in a horizontal rectangular shape and it is impossible or difficult to win a prize, and an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, a state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the big prize opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted toward the player side (so-called It may be a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10). In addition, inside the first big winning opening C10, a specific area (hereinafter referred to as V area , V winning opening) C12-1 and a specific area C12-2. It is preferable that the first big winning hole C10 is opened when the small winning symbols stop instead of the big winning symbols, but it may be opened when the big winning symbols stop.

FIG. 3(a) is a diagram showing the internal structure of the first big winning hole C10. FIG. 3(b) is a diagram showing the external appearance of the internal structure of the first big prize winning opening C10. Inside the first big winning hole C10, there are a storage part C12-5 for temporarily storing game balls that first entered the first big winning hole C10, and game balls other than those stored in the storage part C12-5. When the game ball that entered the first big winning port C10 flows down the general route without being stored in the storage part C12-5, the general area C12-3 and the game stored in the storage part C12-5 A specific area C12-1 (direct V specific area) into which the ball flows when it flows down the direct V route after being discharged from the storage part C12-5, and a position that allows the ball to flow down to the specific area C12-1. A direct V shutter C12-1-1 that can be displaced to an unacceptable position; An interference member C12-6 that flips toward the challenge route, a rotating drum C12-7 that attracts the game ball flowing down the V challenge route by magnetic force and mails the game ball downstream, and a downstream of the rotating drum C12-7. There are provided a stopper C12-8 for stopping a playing ball, and a rotating body C17 having one specific area 12-2 and four general areas C12-3.

Also, the rotating body C17 is provided with one specific area C12-2 (specific area for V challenge) and four general areas C12-3. One V-shutter C12-2-1 is provided corresponding to the specific region C12-3, which can be shifted between a position that allows and a position that does not allow the ball to enter the specific region C12-2, and the general region C12. Four shutters C12-3-1 are provided corresponding to the four general areas C12-3 so as to allow the ball to enter into -3 and not to allow it.

Here, when the direct V small winning pattern is won, the probability that the game ball entering the first winning hole C10 will enter the specific area C12-1 after flowing down the direct V route is (Omitted) is 100%, and in the V challenge, when the small winning pattern of the V challenge is won, the game ball entering the first winning hole C10 flows down the V challenge route, and then the specific area C12 The probability of entering -2 is 1/5 to 5/5.

In the first big prize-winning hole C10, there are a direct V route that guides the game ball that entered the first big prize-winning hole C10 to the specific area C12-1 side, and a V challenge route that guides it to the specific area C12-2 side. is provided. When the small winning pattern for executing the direct V effect is stopped and displayed, the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game flows down the direct V route and is guided to the specific area C12-1. is configured as On the other hand, when the small winning pattern for executing the V challenge effect is stopped and displayed, the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game passes through the direct V route but is guided to the specific area C12-1. A game ball that has passed through the direct V route flows down the V challenge route and is guided to the specific area C12-2.

Next, the second big winning slot C20 is opened when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops with a winning symbol (big winning symbol, small winning symbol). This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is in an open state, has a horizontal rectangular shape, is positioned to the upper right of the out opening D36, and is located above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20 includes a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second large winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second large winning opening and a solenoid C23). Here, the second large winning opening detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry ball information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. to generate A game ball entered into the second large winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d is placed in a normal game state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second big winning hole C20, and an open state in which the game ball tends to win the second big winning hole C20. variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal game state in which the game ball is in a horizontal rectangular shape and it is impossible or difficult to win a prize, and an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize. It is not limited to this. In that case, for example, a state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the big prize opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted toward the player side (so-called It may be a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10). It is preferable that the first big winning hole C10 is opened when the big-hit symbols are stopped instead of the small-hit symbols, but it may be opened when the small-hit symbols are stopped.

A first big prize opening C10 and a second big prize opening C20 are installed as second big prize openings (special electric accessories). If not, it will be activated only when the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) are stopped and displayed with a predetermined small winning symbol (excluding those related to the operation of the condition device) is configured to

When the activation trigger of the accessory continuous operation device occurs (for example, when the conditional device operation flag is turned on), the accessory continuous operation device is immediately operated (the special game transition permission flag is immediately turned on ) is configured as In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is from the time when the trigger for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device occurs (for example, from the time when the jackpot starts, when the jackpot pattern stops). After the state in which the big prize mouth related to the special electric accessory is continuously opened (for example, after the jackpot is being executed), until the state ends (for example, when the jackpot ends) up to).

In addition, "activation of the condition device" means that the main game symbol that causes the condition device to be activated is displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), or the accessory continuous activation device When the game ball passes through a specific area inside the big winning opening that is opened when the is not operating (for example, when it is determined that the ball entered the specific area inside the big winning opening after the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed) From there, the state is terminated (for example, a big win is end).

In addition, the operation of the special electric accessory means that, in the case where the accessory continuous operation device is operating, after the activation opportunity by the accessory continuous operation device is generated, the special winning opening related to the special electric accessory starts opening (for example, the start of the jackpot), the state ends after the state in which the big prize opening related to the special electric role is open (for example, the jackpot is in progress) (For example, until the end of the jackpot), except when the accessory continuous operation device is operating, after the special electric accessory triggers the operation, From the time when the winning opening starts to open (for example, the small winning game starts), through the state in which the big winning opening related to the special electric role is open (for example, during the execution of the small winning game) , until the state ends (for example, the small winning game ends). It should be noted that, with the stop display of the small winning pattern as a trigger, the small winning game is started, and the first big winning opening C10 (special electric accessory) is opened based on the small winning game. In addition, it may be configured such that a small winning game starts when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, and the second big winning opening C20 (special electric accessory) opens based on the small winning game.

Clearly distinguish between the pattern that activates the special electric accessory only once (for example, the small winning pattern) and the pattern that activates the condition device (for example, the big winning pattern), and operate them at the same time (when the pattern is displayed There is no combination of specific symbols such that a small hit and a big hit occur at the same time. On the other hand, the accessory continuous actuating device arbitrarily operates two special electric accessories within a range not exceeding 10 times in total during its operation. Specifically, in the case where there are two big winning holes, a first big winning hole C10 and a second big winning hole C20, when executing a 10-round big win, "1 round to 5 rounds: 1st big prize opening C10 is open, 6th to 10th round: 2nd big prize opening C10 is open", so that the 1st big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20 are not operated at the same time, In addition, the number of operations of the two special electric accessories is set within a range not exceeding 10 times in total. In addition, it is set so that one operation of the accessory continuous actuating device (jackpot) is always accompanied by two or more special electric accessories, and a clear distinction is made between the small winning game and the big winning game. (In the small winning game, the special electric accessory operates only once).

In addition, inside the second big winning opening C20, a specific area C22-1, which is an area that triggers a transition to a special game by entering a small winning game state (during operation of a special electric role), is specified. A region C22-2 may be provided. When configured in this way, inside the second big winning hole C20, there are a direct V route in which the entering game ball is guided to the specific area C22-1 side, and a V route that is guided to the specific area C22-2 side. A challenge route is provided. When the small winning pattern for executing the direct V effect is stopped and displayed, the game ball entering the second big winning hole C20 in the small winning game flows down the direct V route and is guided to the specific area C22-1 side. When the game ball entering the second big winning hole C20 during the small winning game passes through the straight V route, it is configured to be able to enter the specific area C22-1. On the other hand, when the small winning pattern for executing the V challenge effect is stopped and displayed, the game ball entering the second big winning hole C20 in the small winning game flows down the V challenge route and is guided to the specific area C22-2 side. When a game ball entering the second big winning hole C20 during a small winning game passes through the V challenge route, it is configured to be able to enter the specific area C22-2. In the present embodiment, two big winning holes (first big winning hole C10 and second big winning hole C20) are provided. Only the winning opening C10) may be provided. In this case, a specific area (a specific area guided from the direct V route and a specific area guided from the V challenge route) is provided in this one big winning opening, When the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops with a winning symbol (big winning symbol, small winning symbol), it becomes an open state, and when the big winning symbol stops. Even if it is a special game to be executed, even if it is a special game to be executed by entering a specific area in the small winning game state executed by stopping the small winning pattern, this one big It is configured such that the winning opening is in an open state.

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is associated with the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes display, etc. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) and a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g). A symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is provided. Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is equal to the first main game (second main game). It corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". ” and ``-'' for failure {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game pattern is displayed. It is preferable to display by a symbol or the like using In addition, the display of the number of holds is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display the number of holds for up to four (for example, it is composed of one lamp, number 1: lighting, number of holds 2: flashing at low speed, number of holds 3: flashing at medium speed, number of holds 4: flashing at high speed}.

It should be noted that the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a role in production, so in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is used. is set to an inconspicuous size. However, a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a role in production and the decorative symbol of the first main game side (decorative symbol of the second main game side) is not displayed. In this case, the first main game symbols (second main game symbols) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG, which will be described later.

Next, the performance display device SG executes the display of performance images including decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols) that fluctuate and stop interlocking with the first main game symbols and second main game symbols. It is a device that Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which effects including variable display of decorative symbols are executed. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first reservation display area SG12 (and a second reservation display area SG13) that displays the main game reservation information, and a plurality of lines of decoration patterns (first decorations) imitating a slot machine game, for example. and a decorative design display area SG11 for displaying moving images of patterns and second decorative patterns). In this embodiment, the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display, but may be composed of other display means such as mechanical drums or LEDs. Next, the first reservation display area SG12 (and the second reservation display area SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the reservation lamps of the main game symbols.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding auxiliary game symbols. Specifically, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol reserve display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol reservation display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol variations pending (the number of auxiliary game symbol variations that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the performance display device SG, and has functions such as the passage of game balls, the protection of the performance display device SG, decoration, and the like. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and controls the overall game operation (i.e., the game A main control board M that performs control directly related to the interests of players), and a sub-main control unit SM that performs display control etc. related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content. Supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the prize winning holes, the sub control board S having a sub-sub control unit SS for executing the performance display and controlling the overall performance. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 for paying out game balls to an upper ball tray D20, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation of the payout unit KE10, and a game of the upper ball tray D20. A launching device D42 that shoots balls (stored balls) into the game area D30 one by one, a launch control board D40 that controls the shooting operation of the launching device D42, and a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine. , a power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko game machine, is provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (opposite side to the game side).

Next, a schematic electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, and pays out game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. On the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) based on the information (signal, command, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to control and the main control board M , sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc. (In this example, the sub-main control unit SM and sub-sub control unit SS are one board ) and a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards. Here, the sub-control board S performs various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation and stoppage of the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), sound from the speaker D24, and lighting of the game effect lamp D26. , a sub-main control unit SM that controls error notification, and display processing such as variable display, stop display, pending display, notice display, etc. of decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) on the effect display device SG. It comprises two controls of a sub-sub-control SS for execution. In addition, the main control board M, prize ball payout control board KH, sub-main control unit SM and sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU for performing various arithmetic processing, a ROM for pre-storing a program defining the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. Equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by (various data generated during games, computer programs read from ROM, etc.). Here, although not shown, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to have an unused area in order to prevent a modified program or the like from being written by fraud. It is preferable (eg, filling unused areas with all 0's, writing used areas down to younger addresses, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or fraud, unused data (for example, data referenced by game machines with different specifications, or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable to configure so as not to provide data such as data for Similarly, when using the RAM area, it is preferable to use the area at a lower address so as not to provide an unused program area. Schematic configurations of the substrates and electrical connections between the substrates and devices will be described below.

First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game starting entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, the second 1 large winning entrance winning detection device C11s, 2nd large winning winning winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (although not shown, a general winning entrance is an entrance that has prize balls but does not carry out a symbol lottery. )}, drive solenoids (not shown above, first big winning opening solenoid C13, second big winning opening solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc., input and output essential for progress of the game It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub-control board S (sub-main control section SM, sub-sub control section SS), and prize ball payout is performed based on the game progress. etc. to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) to the sub control board S about the performance/game progress and the like. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown). It is configured to be able to output game-related information from to an external device.

In addition, in this embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used for the communication method). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE for executing game ball payout, and a device operable by the player that accepts a game ball lending request and sends the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R that transmits. In addition, although not shown, in this embodiment, a control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (shooting handle, launching motor, ball feeding device etc.) are also connected. In this embodiment, the game ball lending device R is a separate unit adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. Control and management control of recording media for lending electronic money or the like may be performed in an integrated manner.

Next, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), etc., a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other effects for effects, as described above. It is connected to a drive (not shown). In this embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS. Lighting control of the illumination lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. is configured to In this embodiment, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as separate boards). (Although it may be possible to do so, there are merits such as a space merit and a reduction in the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Also, the division of work between the two controllers can be appropriately changed, for example, the sub-sub-controller SS executes voice control (preferable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Also, instead of giving physical prize balls as prize balls, electronic values may be given.

Next, various functions of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M includes game peripherals related to games (first main game peripheral A, second main game peripheral B, first and second main game shared peripheral C, auxiliary game peripheral H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the production, and a prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on payout instructions from the main control board M, and are connected so that information can be transmitted. ing. In addition, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE having a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub-control section SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It consists of elements such as a ROM and a RAM used for processing, a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. Incidentally, each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. FIG. The details of each means (apparatus) will be described below.

First, the main control board M comprises game information control means MJ for controlling acquisition of game information, game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, and progress of the game such as a special game or a specific game. and the game progress means MP that controls the current and past game states [for example, states related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability fluctuation game state, time shortened game state), special game state}, state related to the auxiliary game (easy open state, non-easy open state), stop pattern information and variation mode information related to main game patterns and auxiliary game patterns, on/off status of various flags, game state during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information ), set value information], etc., and various game information {for example, stop pattern information {for example, 10R jackpot with probability variation pattern, 10R jackpot with normal pattern, 8R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 6R jackpot, variable pattern 4R jackpot, normal pattern 4R jackpot, 3R jackpot, small win A (small win when the big prize opening with no specific area opens), small win B ( A small win that opens a big winning hole in a specific area when it becomes a small hit, and when the ball enters the specific area, it becomes a big win), loss}, variation mode information (for example, variation time, variation pattern command), variation Stop information (fluctuation stop command), success/failure information of main game symbols (losing in low probability state and winning in high probability state, winning in low probability state and winning in high probability state, losing. Look-ahead information), main game pattern symbols Information (10R jackpot with variable pattern, 10R jackpot with normal pattern, 8R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 6R jackpot, 4R jackpot with variable pattern, 4R jackpot with normal pattern, 3R jackpot, small hit A, small hit B. Look-ahead information), Main game pattern variation pattern information (variation pattern determination random number; look-ahead information), auxiliary game pattern win/loss information (for example, hit, lose), auxiliary game pattern pattern information (for example, short open, long open), Variation mode information of auxiliary game symbols (variation pattern information), start information of special game, state information of special game, end information of special game, start signal of small winning game, state information of small winning game, end of small winning game Information, pending number information, time saving number of times information, effect selection state information (variation mode determination table selection state information), power failure return information (special game information, small winning game information), power failure return pattern information (No. 1 main game pattern return information, 2nd main game pattern return information), launch position information (left-handed information, right-handed information), error information, sensor information (various input Information transmission control means MT (and command transmission buffer MT10 for accumulating unsent commands) for transmitting specific area passage information, set value information, hold information, etc.), various It has prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling a prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out predetermined prize balls based on the winning of game balls into the prize winning opening.

Here, the game information control means MJ includes a ball entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls into each ball entrance (starting opening, etc.), and determines whether or not each random number can be obtained, and determines the result of the determination. Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the number of balls entered into each starting hole during variable display as holding balls within the upper limit number. are doing. In addition, the game progress means MP directly determines the opening and closing of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d of the second main game starter B10, and the display control means MP10 for controlling the variation and stop display of each pattern. A second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, a special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and a first main Regarding the game, the second main game and the auxiliary game, it has a specific game control means MP50 for determining to which game state the current game state is to be shifted, and for performing processing for shifting the game state based on the decision. are doing. Each means will be described in detail below.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 includes a first main game start entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-A for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start opening A10, and a second main game start opening. A second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and an auxiliary game start opening for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start opening H10. A ball entry determining means MJ11-H, a first big winning hole entering ball determining means MJ11-C10 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first big winning hole C10, and a second big winning hole C20 It has a second big winning hole entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, and according to the determination result, To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the second main game start port B10 It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number according to the determination result (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B that acquires game pattern determination random numbers, etc.), and an auxiliary game for determining whether or not to acquire the auxiliary game side selection random number and acquiring the random number based on the determination result and random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H.

Here, the "random number" in the claims and this specification including the above is, for example, "0" to "65535" or " A value randomly selected from a predetermined range of 0 to 255. Moreover, the random numbers may not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method of expressing values in order along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed (initial value ) is determined by an accidental value (initial value update method), a combination of these methods, and the like. Obtaining random numbers in this way makes it possible to generate non-periodic random numbers that are difficult for the player to predict. Conversely, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number using the random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating random numbers, it is preferable to generate new random numbers without using the random numbers used in the previous lottery.

Next, the holding control means MJ30 controls the holding digestion control means MJ31 that controls the processing related to holding digestion and fluctuation start, and the first main game side random number obtained in the situation where the first main game symbol fluctuation permission is not granted. A first main game symbol reservation means MJ32 for determining whether or not to temporarily store the random number in the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the permission for symbol variation is obtained based on the determination result. - A, in a situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been granted, it is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number obtained, and based on the determination result, symbol variation permission is granted for the random number. Second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the second main game pattern holding information temporary storage means MJ32-B, and auxiliary game side random numbers obtained in the situation where auxiliary game pattern fluctuation permission is not granted are temporarily stored. Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for judging whether or not to store, and holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission is granted based on the judgment result. have.

Here, the pending digestion control means MJ31 has a variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not the conditions for starting the variation are satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol reservation means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol reservation means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H are combined with a reservation order of random numbers that can store up to four numbers. 1st main game symbol reserved information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, 2nd main game symbol reserved information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and auxiliary game symbol reserved information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporarily storing in the form of are doing.

Next, the game content determining means MN includes a lottery lottery means MN10 for determining whether the special game is successful and whether or not the second main game starter electric accessory B11d can be opened. special game transition determining means MN20 (for example, turning on the winning flag internally), symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number and a variation mode determination means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on. Here, the success/failure lottery means MN10 consist of a first main game success/failure lottery means MN11-A that performs a success/failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbols, and a second main game success/failure lottery means that performs a success/failure lottery with respect to the second main game symbols. It has MN11-B and an auxiliary game success/failure lottery means MN11-H for performing a success/failure lottery for the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success/failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game success/failure lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success/failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a success/failure lottery for the first main game symbols. a first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A, a second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a success/failure lottery for the second main game symbols, and a success/failure lottery for the auxiliary game symbols. Each has an auxiliary game success or failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, when executing the win/loss lottery based on the main game random numbers, the win/fail lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same value as any of all the winning random number values, or determines whether or not the winning random number value is When part or all of the random numbers are continuous numbers, the winning/failure judgment is executed by judging whether or not the main game random number is equal to or less than the upper limit of the winning random number and equal to or more than the lower limit. . Accurate determination processing can be performed by executing such a right/wrong determination. Conversely, if the success/fail judgment is performed by comparing only the upper limit of the hit random number range or comparing only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, if the range of random numbers is 0 to 1023, 0 or 1023) as a random value, it is vulnerable to fraud (for example, it is a fraudulent act of flowing current to the main control board M, and all the bits in the storage area are likely to be 0 or 1). There is a danger of being lost. In addition, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery. }.

Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 includes a first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining a stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), A second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining a stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the game content determination random number (second main game random number) obtained, and an auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. and an auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H for determining the stop symbols of the MN41-H.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining stop symbols related to the first main game symbols, The lottery table MN41ta-A for determining the first main game pattern includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game state → the first main game normal game state lottery table for variable probability game → lottery table for first main game probability variable game state, time reduction game → lottery table for first main game time reduction game state). In addition, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining stop symbols related to the second main game symbols. The lottery table MN41ta-B for determining the second main game pattern includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game state → second main game normal game state lottery table, probability variable game → lottery table for second main game probability variable game state, time reduction game → lottery table for second main game time reduction game state). An example of detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H referred to when determining the stop symbols related to the auxiliary game symbols, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H has various winning tables that differ according to the game state (normal game state → normal auxiliary game lottery table, probability variable game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the variation mode determination means MN50 is the first main game variation mode determination means for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbols based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, a second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game pattern based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), It has an auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbols. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game state → first main game lottery table for normal game state, probability variable game→first main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game→lottery table for first main game time reduction game state). In addition, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbols. The lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game state → second main game normal lottery table for game state, probability variable game→second main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game→second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game pattern, and the auxiliary game variation mode The determination lottery table MN51ta-H has various winning tables that differ according to the game state (normal game state → normal auxiliary game lottery table, probability variable game and time shortening game → lottery table for shortening auxiliary game time). .

Next, the display control means MP10 displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display portion B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. 1st and 2nd main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling the stop display after changing the 1st main game symbol, and on the auxiliary game symbol display part H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, the auxiliary game symbol for a predetermined time. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that performs control to stop and display after varying the game symbols.

Here, the first/second main game symbol control means MP11-C has a first/second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes a timer MP11t-H for managing auxiliary game symbol variations capable of measuring time.

Next, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B is used to determine whether or not the conditions for opening and closing the second main game starter electric accessory B11d are satisfied. The second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B and the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t that measures the driving (opening) time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. -B.

Next, the special game control means MP30 determines the conditions for shifting to the special game (for example, the big hit pattern is confirmed and stopped and the condition device operation flag is turned on, the small winning symbol is confirmed and stopped and the special electric role product operation flag (Also called a small hit flag), the passage of the game ball was detected in the specific area of the big winning opening during operation), and a condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the special game transition condition is satisfied. If so, determine the contents of the special game (specifically, the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.), and determine the special game contents to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. A means MP32, a special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (jackpot game) for opening the first big winning hole C10 or the second big winning hole C20 under a predetermined condition, and time for various processes related to the special game. It has a special game time management means MP34 for managing (for example, the opening and closing times of the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20). Here, the special game executing means MP33 includes the first and second big winning opening electric role opening/closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first big winning opening electric role C11d and the second big winning opening electric role C21d. , and a winning ball counter MP33c for counting winning balls to the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. In addition, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table details are not shown).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 includes probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition of the probability variable game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition of the time reduction game state is satisfied. It has a time saving game end condition determination means MP52 for determining. Here, the time saving game end condition determination means MP52 has a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the number of times of time saving. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability variable game in which the lottery probability to the special game is higher than in the normal game state, or a time reduction in which the fluctuation time of the main game pattern is relatively shorter than in the normal game state. refers to gaming.

Here, in this embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols is relatively shortened (time reduction function). Furthermore, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols is relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game pattern and the number of fluctuations of the second main game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (a probability fluctuation game without time reduction number limit except for). That is, the number of times of time saving is configured to be subtracted each time the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern change (stop). In addition, the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 and the time reduction game end condition determination means MP52 are, for example, a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) with a predetermined probability every time the pattern changes. A lottery function may be provided (in the case of a so-called pachinko game machine having a fall lottery function). It should be noted that the time-reduction gaming state according to this example may be that the main game time-reduction flag is on, or that the auxiliary game time-reduction flag is on, that is, the time-reduction gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is operating (including high probability high base state, low probability high base state), and non-time reduction game state is open time extension function is not operating (low probability low base state is included). It should be noted that the time-reduced game state may be referred to as a specific game state, and the non-time-reduced game state may be referred to as a normal game state. Also, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state. In addition, the high-probability-low base state as another game state is a time-reduced game state when executing a time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbols is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state, and the main game symbols. If the variation time is not a time shortening game relatively shorter than the normal game state, it is preferable to set it as a non-time shortening game state.

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB stores the first main game (the game from the fluctuation of the first main game symbols to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the fluctuation of the second main game symbols to the stop). first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game), and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game H and special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, ON/OFF of various flags related to the special game, etc.) MB20b, and a specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of times of time saving, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) .

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C stop the currently varying first or second main game symbol (the first or second main game symbol for which the variation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

In addition, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game pattern information for temporarily storing information such as stop patterns related to currently fluctuating auxiliary game patterns (auxiliary game patterns in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configuration of some peripheral devices has already been described, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are the first main game peripheral device A, which is the peripheral device on the first main game side, the second main game peripheral device B, which is the peripheral device on the second main game side, and the first main game side. And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control section SM are the decorative patterns (the first decorative patterns and the second decorative It relates to the display of only information that does not affect the outcome of the game, including variations in symbols). These peripheral devices will be described in order below.

First, the first main game peripheral device A consists of a first main game starting port A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that is capable of displaying the first main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game starting port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that is capable of displaying the second main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner. and have

Next, the shared peripheral device C for the first and second main games is in the closed state during the normal game, and in the special game (jackpot game) is opened under predetermined conditions. It has a C10 and a second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H is the auxiliary game start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start electric accessory B11d of the second main game start opening B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of.

Next, sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, determination processing and display control processing of the effect content related to the effect display and an information transmission/reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-sub control unit SS. Each of the above means will be described in detail below.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing pattern information and display instruction information relating to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

Next, the effect display control means SM20 includes a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that governs the variation mode of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the determination process of the stop symbol, and the display control process, and the decorative symbol display control means SM21. 1 decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) reserved number management and reserved display processing; background effect display control means SM23 responsible for background image determination processing and display control processing; It has an advance notice effect display control means SM24 that controls content determination processing and display control processing, and a ready-to-win effect display control means SM25 that controls reach effect content determination processing and display control processing.

Here, the decorative design display control means SM21, based on the information from the main control board M side, the decorative design (in this embodiment, two types of decorative design (hereinafter referred to as the first decorative design, the second decorative design The first decorative design and the second decorative design are independent from each other, and a big hit is achieved by combining three numerical designs of the first decorative design or the second decorative design. A design display content determining means SM21n for determining stop patterns and variation modes of game results such as small hits, losses, etc.}, and patterns of decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern). Design display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information related to fluctuation (variation mode information, stop design information, various flags, etc.), and fluctuation of decorative patterns (first decorative design and second decorative design) It has a first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 for measuring time. Here, the design display content determination means SM21n is a lottery (reference) table for determining the content of design variation referred to when determining the stop design and variation mode of the decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design). SM21ta (details of the table are not shown) and decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) effect content, display update timing, display update content are determined (or set) decorations that are referred to It further has a symbol effect table SM21ta-2. Both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed and controlled independently by the performance display control means SM20 based on the information from the main control board M side. By making good use of the decorative patterns, it is configured to enhance the interest in the performance and to make it easier to grasp the progress of the game, but this point will be described later.

Next, the design reservation information display control means SM22 has a design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding the reservation related to the decorative design (the first decorative design and the second decorative design). .

Next, based on the information from the main control board M side, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the background effect display content determination means SM23n for determining the display contents of the background effect and the information related to the background effect display. and background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b.

Next, based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect display control means SM24 includes the notice effect display content determination means SM24n for determining the display contents and display timing of the notice effect, and the information relating to the notice effect display. and a temporary storage means SM24b for information related to the advance notice effect for temporarily storing the.

Next, the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25, based on the information from the main control board M side, the ready-to-win effect display content determining means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the ready-to-win effect, and information related to the ready-to-win effect display. and a ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing.

The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS includes sub-information transmission/reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-main control unit SM, and image display for displaying an image in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. and a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further has an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control section SM side and information relating to various image displays.

The performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS is electrically connected to a performance display device SG that displays an image related to the performance based on information from the performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative design display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative designs (first decorative design and second decorative design), and a first reservation display area SG12 (and second display area) for displaying main game reservation information. 2 reserved display area SG13).

In addition, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be capable of transmitting information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is a sub-game control. means controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. It should be noted that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by the main control board M and one-way communication (one-way communication).

An example of the flow of general processing in the gaming machine according to this embodiment will now be described using a flowchart. The flowchart mainly consists of processing steps (indicated by rectangles), judgments (indicated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (indicated by rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, etc. . Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in a separate flowchart, those referring to the separate flowchart are shown as subroutines (indicated by rectangles with double lines on the left and right sides). . Here, in the development stage of a game machine, game machines with different specifications are sometimes developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (subroutines that are not normally used) are configured not to be left behind, thereby preventing execution of processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraud.

First, FIG. 6 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. As shown in FIG. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. 1(a) is executed. That is, after turning on the power of the game machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and presses the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation to clear the contents of the RAM has been intentionally carried out by the manager of the game arcade or the like. In the case of Yes at step 1002, at step 1004, the main control board M executes a RAM clearing process for clearing all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, at step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing (Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process, which will be described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the contents stored in the RAM area). compare with the amount of information available). Next, at step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clearing process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M will store (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M. An information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (they may be transmitted at that timing, or the command may be set at that timing and a control command (to be described later) may be sent). may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every approximately 4.0 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) is permitted {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing arrives, (b) in the figure is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (for example, random number counter incrementing process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

In addition, it is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value that causes a special game to be executed (immediately after the start of processing of the program, noise and fraudulent behavior may occur). to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process for determining the execution of the special game is executed.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing shown in FIG. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt cycle T (for example, hardware interrupt at approximately 4.0 ms intervals), at step 1100, the main control board M executes auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessary product drive determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1300, the main control board M executes main game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process which will be described later. Next, at step 1500, the main control board M executes special game operation condition determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process which will be described later. Next, at step 1700, the main control board M executes a small winning game control process which will be described later. Next, at step 1950, the main control board M executes V winning hole entry ball determination processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the prize winning opening into which the game ball has entered. The payout control board KH is caused to execute and the processing for managing the results, etc.) is executed. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes external signal output processing (output of information to an external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes control command transmission processing (transmits the command set in each processing described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before execution of this interrupt processing. Return to the processing that was in progress. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received by the sub-main control unit SM is important (for example, by receiving another command after receiving a certain command, the process is normally executed). Therefore, the commands are transmitted in the order in which the main control board M side decided to transmit the commands (in the order in which the commands were set).

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the game machine is powered off, the process of FIG. be done. That is, at step 1020, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, at NMI interrupt), the main control board M sets power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, at step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 7 is a flow chart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start opening ball determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start opening H10 (inflow, passage in the case of a gate). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (for example, 4). determine whether In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition judgment executing means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information indicating how many balls are reserved. is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Incidentally, even if No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start opening electric accessary product opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessary product open flag is off. Determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol fluctuating flag is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbols. . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and sets the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). Along with acquiring, referring to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, the stop symbol is determined based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the holding ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when is off) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). A predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H updates the reservation information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the relevant reservation ball related to the auxiliary game symbols. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols has been reached. do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired auxiliary game symbol. The stop symbols of the game symbols are fixedly displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, at step 1230, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit". In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B, based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag), the second main game A predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory to the starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, 0.5 when the auxiliary game short time flag is off seconds). Next, in step 1234, the second main game start opening electric accessary product opening/closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessary product open flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and at the opening time of the electric accessory It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in steps 1240 and 1242, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, and the auxiliary game state temporary The electric accessary product open flag in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 1300).

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238; if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224; (Processing of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, the process proceeds to the next step immediately after displaying the stop symbol in step 1226, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixing time of about 500 ms (for example, this process may be performed by branching using the stop display fixing flag and timer. achievable).

Auxiliary game content determination random numbers (for example, auxiliary game symbol winning random numbers) are acquired in response to game balls entering (flowing in, passing in the case of a gate) into the auxiliary game start port H10, and the acquired auxiliary game symbol random numbers Although an example of determining the stop pattern based on the Winning random number) may be acquired, and the stop design may be determined based on the success judgment of the acquired auxiliary game design random number.

In the case of such a configuration, if the determination of whether or not the acquired auxiliary game pattern random number is lost and the number of lost symbols is set to one, the stop symbol is determined for one lost symbol, and there are a plurality of lost symbols. If the setting is , one losing pattern is determined by lottery from among a plurality of losing patterns. On the other hand, if the winning determination of the acquired auxiliary game symbol random number is a win and the winning symbol is set to one, the stop symbol is determined for one winning symbol, and there are multiple winning symbols (auxiliary game symbol_ In the case of the setting of win A, auxiliary game symbol_win B, etc.), one winning symbol is determined by lottery from among a plurality of winning symbols. In the time reduction game state, if the winning symbol is the auxiliary game symbol_winning A, the opening mode of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d as the predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric accessory is "0.2 seconds open. → Closed for 0.2 seconds → Open for 0.2 seconds → Closed for 3.0 seconds → Open for 4.0 seconds → Closed. The opening mode of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d as the predetermined time related to the opening mode is "open for 3.0 seconds→close for 0.2 seconds→open for 0.2 seconds→close for 0.2 seconds→0. It is configured to be “open for 2 seconds→closed”. In the non-time shortening game state, the opening mode of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d when the winning symbol is the auxiliary game symbol_win A and the winning symbol is the auxiliary game symbol_win B is the time shortening game state. It may be the same mode as or a different mode (open for 0.5 seconds→closed).

In addition, the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern may be determined by lottery according to the game ball entering the auxiliary game starting port H10 (flowing in, passing in the case of a gate). When configured in this way, it is set so that the stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols are in the mode of variation of the auxiliary game symbols.

For example, in the non-time shortening game state, it is set to select the variation mode 1, the variation mode 2, and the variation mode 3 as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols.

The variation mode 1 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbols are lost symbols, and the variation time is set to be long (for example, 30 seconds).

The variation mode 2 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, the auxiliary game symbol_win A, and the variation time is set to be long (it may be the same as or different from the variation mode 1). , The predetermined time related to the open state of the electric accessory is configured to be set to 0.5 seconds (0.5 seconds open→closed) when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off, for example.

Variation mode 3 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, auxiliary game symbol_win B, and the variation time is long (it may be the same as or different from variation mode 1 and variation mode 2). It is set, and the predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric accessory is configured to be set to, for example, 0.5 seconds (open for 0.5 seconds → closed) when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off. Although it is configured to operate the electric accessory in the same operation pattern as the variation mode 2, it may be a different pattern.

In the time shortening game state, it is set to select the variation mode 4, the variation mode 5, and the variation mode 6 as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols.

Variation mode 4 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbols are lost symbols, and the variation time is set shorter than the variation modes 1 to 3 (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Variation mode 5 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, auxiliary game symbol_win A, and the variation time is set to be short (it may be the same as or different from variation mode 4). , The predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric role product is, for example, the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric role product B11d when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, "0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds Closed→Opened for 0.2 seconds→Closed for 3.0 seconds→Opened for 4.0 seconds→Closed".

The variation mode 6 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, the auxiliary game symbol_hit B, and the variation time is short (it may be the same as or different from the variation mode 4 and the variation mode 5). It is set, and the predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory is set to, for example, "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed", and the electric accessory is operated in an operation pattern different from the variation mode 5. may be the same.

Further, in the non-time-reduced game state, only the variation mode 1 is selected as the variation mode of the auxiliary game symbols, and in the time-reduced game state, the variation mode 5 and the variation mode are selected as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols. You may set so that the aspect 6 may be acquired. That is, in the non-time-reduced game state, only the losing patterns are selected and the winning patterns are not selected, and in the time-reduced game state, only the winning patterns are selected and the losing patterns are not selected. It is designed to configure

In addition, at the timing when the reserve of the auxiliary game pattern occurs, as the pre-reading information of the auxiliary game pattern to the sub side, the number of auxiliary game patterns held information, the success or failure information of the auxiliary game pattern (losing in a low probability state and in a high probability state Hit, hit in low probability state and hit in high probability state, lose), pattern information of auxiliary game pattern (hit pattern 1: short open, hit pattern 2: long open), change mode information of auxiliary game pattern It is configured.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flow chart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-A detects first main game start entrance ball information from the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10. is received. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the main game (especially the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1304, at step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning lottery random number for determining winning or losing, the symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, the variation pattern of the main game symbol (special symbol) ( Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for determining the variation time) are obtained. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are obtained in succession at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the obtained first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, at step 1310, the suspension control means MJ30 sends the command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been obtained (first main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. FIG. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1312 also in the case of No in step 1302 or step 1304 .

Next, in step 1312, the second main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B detects the second main game start entrance ball from the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s of the second main game start entrance B10. Determine whether information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (especially the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1314, at step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers are obtained as in the case of the first main game content determination means: win/fail lottery random number, symbol lottery random number, and variation mode lottery random number. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number for the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range for each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game acquisition range) are set to the same. Next, at step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the obtained second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, at step 1320, the suspension control means MJ30 sends information indicating that the second main game random number has been obtained (second main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in the MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). It should be noted that even if No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

In this embodiment, as the information to be transmitted to the sub-main control section SM in steps 1310 and 1320, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted. The pending number may be sent together, and these pieces of information can be used as information indicating that the random number has been acquired.

Next, FIG. 10 is a flow chart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the pending digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not there is a pending second main game symbol. In the case of Yes at step 1401, at step 1400 (1), the game content determining means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No at step 1401, at step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 1500).

Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the second main game pattern, regardless of the presence of a reserved ball of the first main game pattern (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game pattern). ), the second main game symbol is preferentially held and digested, but it is not limited to this. For example, when there is a reserved ball of the first main game pattern, regardless of the existence of a reserved ball of the second main game pattern (even if the winning order is the second main game pattern reserved first), the second It may be constituted so as to preferentially execute reserved consumption of one main game pattern, or may be constituted so as to execute reserved consumption based on the winning order, and both main game patterns are simultaneously drawn in parallel. It may be configured to perform parallel lotteries.

Next, FIG. 11 is a flow chart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) relating to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this process is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, at step 1403, the pending digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the conditional device is in operation), the main game symbols are not fluctuating, and the main game symbols are held. Although not shown in this example, if a variable fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display pattern after the main game pattern is confirmed and displayed) is provided, during the variable fixed time, the next fluctuation start condition may be configured so as not to satisfy

If Yes at step 1403, at steps 1405 and 1406, the pending digestion control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). While reading the temporarily stored first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol change, the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game Deletion from the design reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and shift the remaining information temporarily stored (holding digestion process). Next, at step 1410-1, the success/failure lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each game state, A main game pattern winning lottery is executed based on a main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, a winning lottery random number).

Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variable gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability variable gaming state. It should be noted that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this at all.

In addition, the small hit that cannot cause the game state to shift can be configured as follows.
(1) The probability of winning a small hit is different between the first main game side and the second main game side, and the first main game side is easier to win than the second main game side (the second main game side may not be provided).
(2) The probability of winning a small hit is different between the first main game side and the second main game side, and the second main game side is easier to win than the first main game side (the first main game side may not be provided).
(3) If a small win is won, the game state after the small win ends remains the same as the game state before the small win starts (if a small win is won, the game state after the small win ends) The state may be different from the game state before the start of the small win).
(4) The winning probability of the big win is the same on the first main game side and the second main game side, and the probability of winning increases due to the probability fluctuation game state, whereas the small win is the first. Winning probabilities can be different between the main game side and the second main game side, and the winning probabilities are not changed by the probability variable game state.
(5) As the stop pattern of the decorative pattern of the pattern variation that has been won as a small hit, three sets of the same pattern can be stopped.
(6) As a stop pattern of the decorative pattern of the pattern variation that won the small hit, a "special pattern" dedicated to the time of winning the small hit (for example, ★ such as "2 * 2" or "3 * 9" is a "special pattern") ) can stop.
(7) As a stop pattern of the decorative pattern of the pattern variation that won the small hit, a specific combination of numbers with a certain regularity (for example, "234") is not a set of three identical patterns. reverse rolls such as "432", odd rolls such as "131" and "537", even rolls such as "246", etc.) can be stopped.
(8) From the player's point of view, the same (or similar) opening mode of the big win opening as the small win (The small win is only one round, and the big win is opened multiple times in that one round, and the big win is opened the same number of times as the multiple times in multiple rounds.) } is provided (in such a configuration, it is preferable to stop and display a combination of decorative symbols that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between a small win and a big win).
(9) Even in the second decorative design, the "special design" dedicated to the small hit may stop.
(10) In the second decorative design, the "special design" dedicated to the small winning does not stop (or may not stop).
(11) Even in a structure in which a combination of decorative symbols that is difficult for a player to distinguish between a small win and a big win is displayed in a stopped state, a small win or a big win depends on the type of the combination of decorative patterns that the player cannot distinguish. (For example, by arranging three, it is not included if the decorative pattern that makes it definite to shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the special game is included in the stop pattern more likely to be a jackpot).
(12) The probability of winning a small win (probability of winning a small win on the second main game side) is higher than the probability of a game ball entering a specific area of the big winning hole {for example, the probability of winning a small win = 1023/ 1024 (approximately 1/1), probability of a game ball entering a specific area=1/10}.
(13) The probability of winning a small win (probability of winning a small win on the second main game side) is lower than the probability of a game ball entering a specific area of the big winning hole {for example, the probability of winning a small win = 1/ 7. Probability of a game ball entering a specific area=approximately 100% (if a game ball enters a large winning opening, it will enter the specific area unless there is an error or other problem)}.
(14) Probability of winning a small win (probability of winning a small win on the second main game side) = 1023/1024 (approximately 1/1), probability of a game ball entering a specific area = approximately 100% If a game ball enters the ball, it will enter the specific area unless there is an error or other problem)}.

Next, at step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) selects the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbols are related based on the main game symbol lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols are determined and temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) draws the lottery for determining the first main game variation mode corresponding to each game state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode), the main game pattern win-or-fail lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially the variation A variation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on the mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, FIGS. 12 and 13 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, both the first main game side and the second main game side are based on the lottery result of the main game pattern, the main game time saving flag state, and the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation, It is configured to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbols. That is, if the winning lottery result of the main game pattern is a hit (big win, small win), it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and if the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction In the game state), it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short. It is configured so that the fluctuation mode in which the time is short is easily determined (only when losing). It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the types of stop symbols, the selection rate, and the like are not limited at all. Also, it may be configured so that the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time shortening flag is ON) is relatively long {symbol variation on the second main game side is configured to be advantageous to the player, the pattern fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side is reduced, and the second main game side is likely to be suspended (which is advantageous to the player). (because it is intended to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the first main game side start opening and the second main game side start opening cannot be separated). In addition, an example of the effect executed when each variation mode is selected is shown in the "effect mode executed on the sub side". In addition, as an effect mode executed on the sub-side, a pseudo-continuous variation (effect in which multiple symbol variations appear to occur during one time variation display of the main game symbols), which will be described later, is performed. After prompting the player whether or not, a "pseudo continuous failure effect (pseudo continuous change)", which is an effect that notifies that the pseudo continuous variation is not executed, may be provided. , When the number of holds is 0 to 1, the random number distribution (execution frequency) of "Pseudo-running → Stop of losing" in the same game state at the time of loss is better when the number of holds is 0 to 3. It may be configured to be more than (it may be configured in either the non-time-reduced gaming state or the time-reduced gaming state). In such a case, it may be configured such that the execution of the pseudo-continuous variation described later is notified to the player after prompting the player as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous variation is to be performed. In addition, "pseudo-continuous gase" and "pseudo-continuous success effect" are "special patterns" described later ("special patterns" that are different from the "special patterns" dedicated to small hits described above) or effects using specific dots For example, when the "pseudo-continuous gag" is executed, after prompting the player as to whether or not the "special symbol" will temporarily stop in the middle row, a decoration one frame after the "special symbol" is displayed. When the symbol stops (temporarily stops) in the middle row and the "pseudo continuous success effect" is executed, after inciting the player whether or not the "special symbol" will temporarily stop in the middle row, the "special Design" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the middle row. In addition, in order to cause the second main game suspension during the variation of the first main game symbols in the time shortened game state, which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbols related to the loss in the time shortened game state The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that short-time variation modes are not selected regardless of the number of holds (for example, the variation time is all five seconds or longer). In addition, the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main game It is the game pending number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, at step 1414, the game content determination means MN outputs the symbol variation display start instruction command (variation mode information, stop symbol information, reserved symbol information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Information related to the determined main game symbols such as number information, variation mode information, commands related to the current game state, etc.) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control at step 1999 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the command transmission process). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time period related to the main game symbol variation time to the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. do. Next, at step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g ( On the second main game symbol display section B21g), the main game symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the variation modes stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, at step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Go to step 1420 .

On the other hand, if No at step 1403, at step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and change It is determined whether or not the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, at step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbols has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 1420, at step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation will end to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g ( The variable display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, at step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

Next, at step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. do. Big hit (if the stop pattern of the main game pattern is a jackpot pattern, Yes if the stop pattern of the main game pattern is a big hit pattern, No if the stop pattern of the main game pattern is a losing pattern. The stop pattern of the main game pattern is small. In the case of a winning pattern, the stop pattern of the main game pattern is a small winning pattern, and the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12 during the operation flag operation of the special electric role that is in the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning. Yes, if the passage of the game ball is detected in -2, the game ball in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 during the operation flag operation of the special electric role which is in the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning is not detected, it is determined whether or not No.). In the case of Yes at step 1430, at step 1432, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430 (if the stopped symbol is not a big hit symbol), in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped symbol is a small winning symbol. In the case of Yes at step 1434 , at step 1436 , the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag and proceeds to step 1450 . On the other hand, if No in step 1434, the process proceeds to step 1450 without turning on the small hit flag. Skip step 1432 .

Next, at step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). Note that even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flow chart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1470, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes at step 1470, at step 1472, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c by 1 (decrement). Next, at step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time saving number) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in steps 1476 and 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then (process of step 1500). Incidentally, even if No in step 1452, step 1470 or step 1474, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flow chart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, at step 1502, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 is in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, the specific game flag (main game probability variation flag, main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction flag). Next, at step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, at step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1522, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Incidentally, even if No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flow chart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, at step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 1602, at steps 1604 and 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game shift permission flag and the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. to turn on. Next, in step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to the initial value ("1" in the case of a special game from the big win pattern, small win In the case of a special game developed from the pattern, set "2"). Next, at step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612. FIG.

On the other hand, if No at step 1602, at step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is ON. Then, if Yes in step 1610 , the process proceeds to step 1612 . Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1610, the special game executing means MP33 determines that the special game is not permitted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, at step 1612, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether or not the round continuation flag is off. Determine whether or not there is If Yes in step 1612, that is, if it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 sets the release pattern in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, at step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big winning mouth electric accessory C11d (or the second big winning mouth electric role C21d) of the first big winning mouth C10 to make the first big winning. The opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and started. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614-1620.

Next, at step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the side of the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, at step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, 10 It is determined whether or not there is a prize-winning ball. If Yes at step 1624 , go to step 1628 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1624, at step 1626, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) and determines that the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) relating to the opening of the big winning opening is Determine whether or not it has passed. If Yes at step 1626 , the process also proceeds to step 1628 . If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 executes the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second big winning opening C20). The drive is stopped to close the first big winning hole C10 (or the second big winning hole C20). Next, at step 1630, the special game executing means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer). Next, at step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). (not shown) has exceeded the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes at step 1634, at step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 sets the information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is to end in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, at step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). Incidentally, even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game from the jackpot symbols (flow chart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game with the jackpot symbols) according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. be. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probability variable jackpot symbol (after the execution of the special game, the probability variable game state It is determined whether it is a big hit pattern to shift). In the case of Yes at step 1652, at step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652, that is, in the case that the stop symbol is a non-probability variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the probability variation game state after the execution of the special game), in step 1656, the specific game control means MP50 saves time. A predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) is set in the counter value of the number counter MP52c, and step 1658 is entered.

Next, in steps 1658 and 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time saving flag and auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (step 1997 process).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game from the small winning design, according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. It is a flowchart of a game state determination process). First, in step 1651-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game triggered by the ball entering the specific area has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1651-1, in step 1651-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped pattern is a jackpot pattern (a jackpot pattern that shifts to the time reduction game state after the execution of the special game is finished). judge. If Yes in step 1651 - 2 , go to step 1656 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1651-1, in step 1651-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays a small winning symbol (to the special game that will shift to the time reduction game state after execution of the special game It is determined whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by the small winning pattern that triggers the transition. If Yes in step 1685-4, step 1656 is entered.

Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number (in this example, one of 1, 6, and 10 is set). Next, in steps 1658 and 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1700}. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1651-2, in other words, in the case that the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the time-reduction game state after the execution of the special game, or in the case of No in step 1651-4, in other words, Also in the case of a small winning symbol that does not shift to the time reduction game state after the execution of the special game is completed, the next process {process of step 1700} is performed.

Next, FIG. 19 is a flow chart of small hit game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1701, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a discharge standby flag {a flag that is turned on in step 1722 to be described later, that is, a scheduled small winning game (especially, a scheduled first After the execution of the opening pattern of the winning opening C10) is completed, the flag that is turned on during the discharge waiting period (discharging waiting time) of the game balls remaining in the first big winning opening C10 is turned off. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1701, in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag.

Next, in step 1705, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the opening pattern of the first big winning hole C10 of the round (in this example, for example, in all the small winning symbols, "0.048 seconds open→0. 648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds Close → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 3.1 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0. 048 seconds open→closed", and if game balls continue to be shot toward the first big winning hole C10, a plurality of game balls enter the first big winning hole C10). set. The opening pattern (opening mode) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole C10) during execution of the small win can be arbitrarily set. The total open time may be configured to be a predetermined time or less (for example, 1.8 seconds or less) {for example, "0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 1 second open → closed" (total open time = 1.2 seconds)}.

Next, at step 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a small winning execution start command (a command to the effect that a small winning game has started), and sends a game ball toward the first big winning hole C10 to the player. ) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first big winning hole C10 and starts the small winning game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, at step 1709, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts an ejection standby timer MP41t-2 (ejection ball timer MP41t-2), and proceeds to step 1712. In the present embodiment, the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 measures the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game, and waits for discharge after a predetermined time (240 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the small winning. {Of course, the method of measuring the discharge standby time is not limited to this, and for example, the scheduled small winning game (especially, the scheduled opening of the first big winning opening C10 The measurement may be started after execution of pattern) is completed}. The discharge standby timer MP41t-2 may be an increment timer or a decrement timer.

On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is ON. If Yes in step 1710 , go to step 1712 . Next, at step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize (entered a ball) in the first big prize winning opening C10. In the case of Yes at step 1712, at step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there are a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the first big winning hole C10. If Yes in step 1714 , go to step 1718 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1712 or step 1714, in step 1716, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the small winning game timer MP41t for a predetermined time (for example, 11.548 seconds) related to opening the big winning opening. determines whether or not has elapsed. If Yes at step 1716 , go to step 1718 .

Next, at step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops the driving of the first big prize winning port electric accessory C11d to close the first big prize winning port C10. Next, at step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge standby flag (the discharge standby time starts from the execution timing of this process), and the process proceeds to step 1724. It should be noted that even if No in step 1701 , the process proceeds to step 1724 .

Next, at step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value has reached the discharge waiting time end value (240 seconds in this example). If Yes at step 1724, at step 1725, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, at step 1726, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge standby flag. Next, at step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops and resets the timer MP41t for the small hit game. Next, at step 1730, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1750}. Incidentally, even if No in step 1710, step 1716 or step 1724, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1750}.

Here, in this example, the maximum number of winning prizes set as a program in one small win is 10, and the maximum opening time of the big winning hole in one small win is 1.8 seconds or less. .672 seconds (more specifically, as the opening mode of the big winning opening when executing one small hit, "0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds Close → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open→3.1 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0. Open for 048 seconds → Close for 0.648 seconds → Open for 0.048 seconds → Close for 0.648 seconds → Open for 0.048 seconds → Close for 0.648 seconds → Open for 0.048 seconds → Close. , and is controlled to close the big winning opening when any of the closing conditions is achieved. Here, in order to suppress excessive prize winning and minimize the divergence from the design value of paid balls, it is desirable to perform control so as to close immediately after the closing conditions are met. On the other hand, even if such processing is performed, the ball enters the big prize hole immediately after the closing condition is met, or the winning ball stays in front of the count sensor (the winning ball is detected by the count sensor after the closing condition is met). to do) is also considered. Therefore, in either case after the maximum opening time has passed or after the maximum number of winnings has been exceeded, the winning is processed as a valid winning only under predetermined conditions (within a predetermined period after closing). It is desirable to

Next, FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the V winning hole entrance ball determination process according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the condition device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1960, which will be described later). It is determined whether or not a flag that is turned on when a game ball enters the ball) is off. In the case of Yes at step 1952, at step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not game balls have entered the V winning openings C12-1 and C12-2. In the case of Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M is within the V winning opening effective period (period from the start timing of the small winning game to the end timing of the discharge standby time related to the small winning game) Determine whether or not there is In the case of Yes at step 1956, at step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a V winning detection command (a command for executing a V winning detection effect, which will be described later) to the sub-main control unit SM side. command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1960, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation reservation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1952, in step 1962, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the V winning opening valid period (from the start timing of the small winning game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small winning game) is finished. In the case of Yes at step 1962, at step 1964, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). Note that even if No in step 1954, step 1956, or step 1962, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). In addition, in the case of No in step 1956, in other words, there is a risk of illegal entry such as game balls entering the V winning openings C12-1 and C12-2 even though the small winning game is not executed. is preferably configured to execute error processing as appropriate. The number of rounds of the special game related to the ball entering the V winning openings C12-1 and C12-2 is "2R", "3R", "5R", "6R", "7R" and "9R". For example, in the case of "9R", summing up a series of flows of "small hit game → special game related to entering ball to V winning opening C12-1, C12-2", the number of rounds related to small hit game '1R' and the number of rounds related to the special game '9R' make '10R'. In addition, in this example, the round to enter the V winning opening C12-1, C12-2 (specific area) was set as 1R (that is, the rounds in which the ball can be obtained are the rounds after the 2nd round. There is), but it may be designed as 1R after entering the V winning openings C12-1 and C12-2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29, control processing executed by the sub-main control unit SM will be described. First, FIG. 21 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-control board S (especially on the side of the sub-main control unit SM) in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 1(a) is the process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after reset such as when power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the game machine is powered on, in step 2002, the sub-main control section SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is When received → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, When various information commands are received → Reset the information related to the performance at the time of power failure in the RAM on the sub side).

Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM restores the number of holdings (for example, the value of the binding holding counter) based on the power failure recovery information received from the main side (main control board M side). As power restoration information, the following information is configured to be transmitted from the main side (main control board M side) to the sub-main control section SM.
(1) Stopped pattern information (2) Number of reservations information (3) Time saving number of times information (4) Production selection state information (variation mode determination table selection state information)
(5) power-off recovery hit information (special game information, small winning game information)
(6) Power interruption recovery symbol information (recovery information of first main game symbols, recovery information of second main game symbols)
(7) Launch position information (left-handed information, right-handed information)
(8) Setting value information (9) Movable accessory initial operation information

In addition, the information related to the effect being executed and the prefetch effect will not be restored (and the information related to the contents of the hold will not be resent from the main side), and the "preparing" screen will be displayed until the start of the next change. . By configuring in this way, if a power outage occurs when the background effect is the "angel zone background", the information stored on the sub side will be lost, so after the power outage is restored, , there is no information indicating that the trigger is pending, and the background effect is changed from the "angel zone background" to another background effect (for example, the background effect of the effect stage A, etc.). As a result, even if there is a discrepancy between the hold number information stored on the main side and the hold number information stored on the sub side due to a power outage (for example, due to noise when the power is cut off or when the power is restored). Even if there is, it is possible to avoid a situation where the main side is fluctuating with a low expectation while the sub side executes a high-expectation zone effect. It should be noted that the processing after power failure recovery is not limited to this. It may be configured to maintain the "Angel Zone Background". In the case of such a configuration, for example, an evacuation area is provided on the sub side so that information can be maintained even during a power outage, and in the event of a power outage, the information related to the presentation is backed up in the evacuation area, and the power outage is restored. It may be configured to restore backed-up information from time to time.

Further, it is also possible to receive again the information on the content of the hold from the main side at the time of restoration from power failure, the start of fluctuation, the stop of fluctuation, and the occurrence of hold (also for hold other than the newly generated hold). good. In this example, the prefetch information is not transmitted from the main side when power is restored. Therefore, since the prefetch information that existed at the time of the power failure does not exist after the power failure is restored, the prefetch effect cannot be executed for the trigger hold before the power failure. In addition, it may be configured to receive pre-reading information from the main side at the time of power failure recovery, and may be configured to execute the pre-reading effect for suspension after power failure recovery, or it may be configured to be stored at the time of power failure recovery. A prefetching lottery on the sub side may be performed after all of the suspension is consumed, and a new prefetching effect may be executed. It should be noted that in the event that a power failure occurs while the main game symbols and performance symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols) are fluctuating, if there is no function to maintain the information at the time of the power failure, It is preferable to display a black screen (for example, a screen displaying "preparing", etc.) until the end command of the change is received from the main side. Note that switching the background effect to display the "angel zone background" as the background effect may be referred to as shifting to the "angel zone". Note that recovery from power failure may be referred to as power recovery, recovery from power failure, or the like.

After that, the process shifts to loop processing for repeatedly executing (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. to run. Next, at step 2200, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2300, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a first decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2350, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a second decorative symbol display control process which will be described later. Next, at step 2400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a special game-related display control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a background effect control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub-control unit SS side), and this End the iterative processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode of performing loop processing of the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) after resetting. Further, the processing of FIG. 4(c) is the interrupt processing of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line of the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM receives the command input port ( Check the input port of the data signal line described above). Then, in step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM stores the command sent from the main control board M in the RAM (for example, main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) of the sub-main control unit SM based on the confirmation result. is temporarily stored, and the process executed immediately before this interrupt process is resumed.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main control board M side, a command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) related to new reservation occurrence It is determined whether or not the reservation information related to the game design has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 controls the binding reservation counter in the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game, Add "1" to the maximum of 4 for the second main game). Next, in step 2106, the binding reservation information display control means SM22, based on the reservation generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, the reservation information (especially, the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second Information on the number of reservations on the main game side (reservation number information), information on the winning result based on the prefetch judgment of the main control unit (hit or fail information), the main game of the first main game or the second main game based on the prefetch judgment of the main control unit The game pattern stop pattern information (symbol information) and variation mode information based on the pre-reading determination of the main control unit are temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2118. In addition, the variation mode information based on the look-ahead determination of the main control unit is the variation mode determination random number range (group) acquired when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 (Also referred to as fluctuation mode random number delimiter information or fluctuation mode group). Further, the main control board M side transmits to the sub-main control unit SM the variation mode information based on the pre-reading judgment of the main control unit, which is the information indicating the range (group) of the variation mode determination random number. may be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2111, the design reserve information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to see if it has received a pattern variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. determine whether or not In the case of Yes at step 2111, at step 2112, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, at step 2114, the design reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the design reservation information related to the pattern variation (particularly, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) from the design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. , to shift the remaining pending information. Next, at step 2116, the design reservation information display control means SM22 turns on the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 2118 also in the case of No in step 2111 .

Next, in step 2118, the design reservation information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS to display the display on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first reservation display area SG12 and the second reservation display area SG13). The same number of reserved images as the drawing reservation counter value in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2200).

Next, FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, at step 2202, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination permission flag is ON. If Yes at step 2202, at step 2204, the design display content determination means SM21n turns off the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2206, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n) determine the pattern information ( The first decorative symbol (as described above, displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) by referring to the stop symbol/variation mode related to the main game symbol and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation. is a so-called decorative symbol to be controlled, and details of its display size and operation contents will be described later). Numbers such as 777", and if it is a small winning pattern, a number such as ``131'' and ``246'' will also be displayed, and if it is a losing pattern, ``375'' etc. ] and the variation mode {for example, if the variation mode related to the main game pattern is a short-time variation, non-reach, if it is a long-term variation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined and installed. It is temporarily stored in the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and the ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row. ) is one line, and if the same number patterns are aligned on the effective line, it means a win (big hit or small win) (conversely, if the same number patterns are not aligned on the effective line, it means a small hit or a loss. ). In addition, in the left, middle and right rows (or only in the middle row), in addition to the number patterns, "special patterns" However, after that, it is a pattern that foretells that a hit (big hit or small win) may occur, and the display size and details of the operation will be described later). Also, it is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped during the symbol variation. It should be noted that the temporary stop is to temporarily stop and display the decorative symbols of all rows during the period from the start of the variable display of the main game symbols to the stop display, and the temporarily stopped and displayed decorative symbols are , refers to a state in which variable display can be started again during the relevant period (hereinafter used with the same meaning). In addition, although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" in the pseudo continuous variation is a stop mode that can be temporarily stopped (provisional stop), does not stop fixed, and announces a hit (big hit, small hit). , and the "special pattern" at the time of execution of the look-ahead effect can be temporarily stopped (temporary stop), can be fixedly stopped, and informs the hit (big hit, small hit) It is configured not to be included in the stop mode.

Next, at step 2208, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n and the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n) determine the pattern information ( With reference to the stop symbol/variation mode related to the main game symbol and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation, the second decorative symbol (as described above, the display is controlled based on the information from the main control board M side. (The details of the display size and operation contents will be described later.) (For example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a winning (big win, small winning) symbol, Numbers such as "777" (hit), if it is a small winning pattern, numbers such as "131", "246", etc. If it is a losing pattern, numbers such as "375" } and variation mode {for example, if the variation mode related to the main game pattern is a short-time variation, non-reach, if it is a long-time variation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined and related to the design display It is temporarily stored in the information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and the ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row. If the same number patterns are aligned on the effective line, it means a win (big hit or small win) (conversely, if the same number patterns are not aligned on the effective line, it means a loss). In addition, only number patterns can be stopped in the left, middle, and right columns (the "special pattern" does not stop like the first decorative pattern), and it is configured so as not to temporarily stop during the pattern fluctuation. . In this way, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are configured to independently determine the display contents for notifying the success or failure of the main game symbols, that is, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols The decorative symbols have, as their basic properties, the property that they can independently notify the win/loss results related to the main game symbols.

Next, at step 2216, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the winning/failure result of the main game symbols and the decorative symbols (first and second decorative symbols) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, determine the details of the decorative design performance by referring to the decorative design performance table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative design performance table 1 to the decorative design performance table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the design variation details, The display update timing and display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2218, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (step 2300). Transition. Note that even if No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300).

In the above description, the main game symbols whose display is controlled on the main control board M side are those on the first main game side (first main game symbols) or those on the second main game side ( Although it is not mentioned whether it is the second main game symbol), basically, even if the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol Alternatively, the display contents of both the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols may be determined in correspondence with the second main game symbols. Regardless of which of the variable displays is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be executed in conjunction with it. However, in the time shortened game state (state accompanied by so-called power supply state), this is not the case. It is possible to exemplify a state in which only one of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is allowed to perform the variable display in conjunction with any of the display.

Here, FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (decorative symbol effect table 1, decorative symbol effect table 2) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 1; And, it is an example of the decorative symbol production table 2, especially part of the case where the winning result is winning (big win, small win). In the drawings, for simplicity, the first decorative design may be referred to as the first design, and the second decorative design may be referred to as the second design (the same shall apply hereinafter). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the result of the main game pattern winning (illustrated in the leftmost column, in this example, "losing" or "hit (big hit, small hit)") and decoration Patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) variation mode (illustrated in the second column on the left), in this example, "Pseudo continuous gase (total production time 30 seconds)" "Super reach (total production time 60 seconds)”) and the acquired random number value (the random number value acquired on the sub-main board SM side, and a part of the random number value is shown in the third column on the left). (Shown in the fourth column on the left, in this example, "main effect A-1 (losing) pseudo-run 1", "main effect B-1 (hit) no pseudo-run", etc.) can be determined. It is Then, when the content of the decorative pattern effect is determined, the "display update timing" and the "display update content" can be uniquely determined. For example, when the decorative pattern effect content = “A-1 (losing) pseudo-continuation 1”, “display update timing” = “at the start of fluctuation (after 0 seconds)” and “display update content” = “equipment Figure fluctuation start (all columns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern)", "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "first drawing temporary stop display (left column), 2nd binding non-display". Then, as will be described later, according to the elapsed time related to the variation time of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the "display update content" reaching the "display update timing" is the first decorative symbol. It will be executed sequentially with respect to each of the second decorative symbols. That is, when "A-1 (losing) pseudo run 1" is determined, after all columns of the first decorative symbols and all columns of the second decorative symbols are variably displayed, "display update timing" = "variation start 12 seconds later", if display control is performed so that all rows of the first decorative pattern are hidden (not displayed even if they are being variably displayed), then the second decorative pattern is , Display is controlled so that all columns are variably displayed (variable display is visible), and when the "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of variation" is reached, the first decorative symbol , the display is controlled so that only the left column is stopped, while the display of the second decorative pattern is controlled so that all columns are not displayed (even the variable display is not displayed). . Thus, the basic operation in the example of this example is that when the first decorative symbol is visible (easily visible) to the player, the second decorative symbol is visible to the player. While being in a state of being invisible (difficult to see), when the first decorative pattern is in a state of being invisible (difficult to see) to the player, the second decorative pattern is visible to the player ( In other words, in order to ensure that the player is notified that the symbols are changing, the second decorative symbols are displayed complementarily. In addition, the production pattern (series of display contents) defined by "A-1 (losing) pseudo-continuation 1" and the production pattern defined by the name of other decorative pattern production contents are different (that is, the display contents are different ). In addition, the random number range is "0 to 1023" in all variation modes, and this figure extracts a part of the random number range in the design variation mode (therefore, it corresponds to a certain design variation mode The random number range of the acquired random number value and the random number range of the acquired random number value corresponding to the different illustration variation mode are different from each other, but both are "0 to 1023". range).

Here, in the present embodiment, so-called pseudo-continuous variation can be executed. (Losing) Pseudo-run 2” and “B-2 (winning) Pseudo-run 2”. For example, in the decorative pattern effect content “A-2 (losing) pseudo-continuation 2”, “display update timing” = “at the start of fluctuation (after 0 seconds)”, “display update content” = “start of fluctuation (after 0 seconds)” 1 decorative design and all rows of the second decorative design)" is executed, "Display update timing" = "12 seconds after start of fluctuation", "13 seconds after start of fluctuation", "14 seconds after start of fluctuation" Display update content” = “1st drawing temporary stop display (left column)” (left column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “1st drawing temporary stop display (right column)” (1st decorative pattern The right column is the stop display), and the "first design special design temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decoration design is the above-mentioned "special design" stop display) are sequentially executed. Then, after that, in the "display update timing" = "15 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "first decoration fluctuation start (all columns)" (only the first decoration pattern is displayed again with fluctuation) After execution, "display update timing" = "26 seconds after start of fluctuation", "27 seconds after start of fluctuation", "28 seconds after start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "1st layout temporary stop display ( left column)” (the left column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “first binding temporary stop display (right column)” (the right column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “first binding special pattern "Temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decorative symbols is stopped and displayed with the above-mentioned "special symbols") is sequentially executed, so that for the player, during the one-time fluctuation display of the main game symbols, the As for one decorative pattern, it seems as if a plurality of pattern fluctuations have occurred.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first decorative pattern is not displayed (a state in which the stationary display/variable display is not displayed), and the middle row of the first decorative pattern is the above-mentioned "special pattern" The second decorative pattern is variably displayed when the game is temporarily stopped by pressing the second decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is not displayed in other cases. That is, when the player can visually recognize the first decorative symbol or can determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is hidden (the first decorative symbol If the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol or cannot determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol {for example, When the "special symbol" is stopped and the numbers in the middle row (or all rows) cannot be distinguished}, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed, so that the player can always choose one of them. The decoration pattern (either the first decoration pattern or the second decoration pattern) can be visually recognized, and the progress of the game can be easily grasped. In this embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the "special symbol" does not temporarily stop. Since the main purpose is to increase Symbols that may make it difficult to grasp the progress of the game, such as symbols that do not mean big wins or small wins, but which foretell that a win (big win or small win) may occur later, are not displayed. This is because it is configured as follows. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned "non-display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), it may include a state of being displayed fluctuating at high speed (a fluctuating state in which an afterimage is visible). In the case of "display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the state of being displayed fluctuating at a low speed (in the case of a display mode that fluctuates from top to bottom, slowly from above and (temporary) fluctuation state toward the planned stop position) may be included.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second decorative design is configured so as not to temporarily stop in the middle of the fluctuation (and the "special design" does not stop), but is not limited to this, the second decorative design also As in the case of the first decorative symbol, it may be configured such that a temporary stop can be made in the middle of the fluctuation (or a pseudo fluctuation can occur). That is, in the case of such a configuration, all the rows of the first decorative symbols and all the rows of the second decorative symbols have substantially the same operation contents of the variable display and the stop display (including the temporary stop), and the stop display is performed. It is configured so that the types of symbols to be displayed are different.

Further, the second decorative symbols need not always be displayed during the variable display of the main game symbols, and the display conditions and display mode of the second decorative symbols may be changed as appropriate. For example, (1) During the occurrence of a specific effect (instead of making the first decorative pattern invisible, an effect such as playing a movie moving image using the entire display area on the effect display device SG, or a so-called effect (2) At the time of a specific ready-to-win effect (the second decorative pattern can be displayed), 1. It is the execution time of the ready-to-win performance in which the expectation of winning (big win, small win) is remarkably increased instead of making the decorative pattern invisible, and for example, the display contents of the performance performed on the performance display device SG are forced. The second decorative pattern is displayed only when executing a so-called freeze reach production that temporarily stops, and in other reach productions (especially when executing a reach production with a low expectation of winning (big hit, small hit)) , the second decorative pattern is hidden, and (3) the appearance position of the second decorative pattern on the production display device SG is changed according to the production pattern (for example, the above-mentioned movable accessory for production is displayed on the production display device In the case of an effect that advances to a state in which the display area on the SG is covered, it is moved to the display area on the effect display device SG that is not covered by the movable accessory for this effect), (4) First decorative pattern can be moved/reduced/enlarged, while the second decorative pattern cannot be moved/reduced/enlarged; , the reduction rate, the enlargement rate, etc. may be lower than the first decorative pattern.

In addition, during a specific ready-to-win effect or in a situation where the first decorative pattern forms a ready-to-win state (for example, in a situation where the left row and the right row are temporarily stopped with the same pattern), the second decorative pattern fluctuates. It may be configured as shown.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, at step 2302, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination flag is ON. If Yes at step 2302, at step 2304, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design content decision flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2306, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2309, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2310. It should be noted that even if No in step 2302 , the process proceeds to step 2310 .

Next, at step 2310, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the design changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2310, at step 2312, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, at step 2314, the decorative design display control means SM21 performs the first decoration based on the first decoration variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the pattern variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative design (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and go to step 2330 .

On the other hand, if No at step 2314, at step 2318, the decorative design display control means SM21 changes the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative pattern has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2318, at step 2320, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not it is time to stop the above-mentioned "special design" ( In this example, the "special symbol" is configured to temporarily stop only in the middle symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative design display control means SM21 increases the expectation of the angel zone flag (hit (big hit, small hit)) in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. A flag serving as a trigger for displaying a background image for notifying the fact is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2324 . On the other hand, if the answer to step 2320 is No, the process proceeds to step 2324 as well. Next, at step 2324, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the first decorative design (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process at step 2999). is executed) and the process proceeds to step 2330 . In the present embodiment, when the angel zone flag is turned on, an "angel zone background" is displayed as a background effect. , (1) hits (big hits, small hits) during design fluctuations with relatively high expectations (for example, design fluctuations that become reach), (2) hits (big hits, small hits) ahead of design fluctuations with high expectations 2. When the pattern fluctuation stops related to the reservation of the scheduled digestion, etc. can be mentioned. In addition, although details will be described later, the "special symbol" that triggers the angel zone flag to turn on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) described above, or may be temporarily stopped in the case of (2) described above. You may stop after confirming.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2318, in step 2326, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) store the first composition variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (and the ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the ready-to-win image has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2326, at step 2328, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command for the notice image and reach image (display command transmission control process at step 2999). , the data is transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2330 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2326 , the process proceeds to step 2330 .

Next, in step 2330, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first decorative design is normally displayed (as described above, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative design). or when it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, and when the second decorative symbol is hidden). In the case of Yes at step 2330, at step 2332, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second design display flag (with respect to the second decorative design to the non-display state) in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. flag for switching between ON=OFF and display=ON) is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step 2336 . On the other hand, if No at step 2330, at step 2334, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the second design display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2336. .

Next, at step 2336, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 refers to the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbols are to be stopped and displayed has been received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes at step 2336, at step 2338, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (determined display command) of the first decorative design (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side sent to). Next, at step 2340, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, at step 2342, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350). do. Note that even if No in step 2310 or step 2336, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350).

In this embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM uses the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 to manage the timing related to the variation display of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, and the like. However, the method of managing the timing related to the variation of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, etc. is not limited to this. Timing, notice image/reach image display timing, background effect display timing (background effect display switching timing), etc. are all determined and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS, and the sub-sub control unit SS follows the received content. The effect may be executed (displayed) at any time (the same applies to the second decorative pattern).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, at step 2352, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first design fluctuating flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second design display flag is ON. . In the case of Yes at step 2354, at step 2356, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display execution command for the second decorative design (command for variably displaying the second decorative design) (display command transmission at step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2354, at step 2358, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second decorative design variable display erase command (command for hiding the second decorative design) (step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360 .

Next, at step 2360, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 refers to the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbols are to be stopped and displayed has been received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (determined display command) of the second decorative design (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side sent to). Next, at step 2364, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the second design display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Transition. Incidentally, even if No in step 2352 or step 2360, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area. As shown in the figure, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern and the pending display (the pending regarding the first main game pattern and the pending regarding the second main game pattern may be displayed at the same time) are the effects display device. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the SG, and in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the fixed display timing (timing when the main game symbols are stopped and displayed). Since the first decorative design is the main decorative design, the first decorative design has higher visibility than the second decorative design (the display area is presumably larger). Further, in the present embodiment, the variation start timing and the variation end timing (determined display timing) of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the same timing.

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes at step 2402, at step 2404, background effect display control means SM23 refers to main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in steps 2406 and 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. A special game start demonstration display is performed on the SG (display is performed appropriately based on the type of the big win pattern or the type of the small win pattern when the small win develops into a big win), and the process moves to step 2412 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2402 , the process proceeds to step 2412 .

Next, at step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (game performance and jackpot pattern). or if it develops from a small hit to a big hit, it may be executed as necessary based on the type of small hit pattern etc.).

Next, in step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 determines the game state at the time of winning the big win or the game state at the time of winning the small win being executed, and the winning pattern displayed stopped (big winning pattern or small winning pattern). Based on, to set a command to display the effect related to the special game being executed (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) (for example, a special game related to latent probability variable jackpot design In the case of , an effect is executed such that the player cannot recognize the transition to the probability variable game state after the special game ends). Next, at step 2414, background effect display control means SM23 refers to main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a special game end demonstration display on the effect display device SG (if the type of jackpot pattern or a small win develops into a big win, the background effect display control means SM23 Appropriate display based on the type of design). Next, at step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). . Note that even if No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500).

Next, FIG. 29 is a flow chart of background effect control processing relating to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the angel zone flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2502, at step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "angel zone background" (background effect that can be displayed when the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped) as the background effect, and step 2506. transition to Next, at step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the change (a part of the pseudo-continuous change) that triggered the transition to the "Angel Zone" has ended. determine whether If Yes at step 2506, at step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2509, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect that was set before the "angel zone background" was set), and proceeds to step 2520. do.

On the other hand, if No at step 2502, at step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main side. . If Yes at step 2512, at step 2514, a stage transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/20 in this example) is executed (stage transition lottery is executed at the start of each fluctuation). . Next, at step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result of step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2516, at step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 follows a predetermined stage transition pattern (for example, for looping each stage in the order of effect stage A → effect stage B → effect stage C → effect stage A). ), the background effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520 . It should be noted that step 2520 is also executed when the result of step 2506, step 2512 or step 2516 is No.

Next, at step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display the set background effect on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the command is sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side). is transmitted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are provided, and the first decorative pattern is hidden (stopped). By configuring the second decorative pattern to be displayed (variable display) in a state where the display/variation display is not displayed) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, the player can always select one of the decorative symbols. A user-friendly game machine can be provided that can be visually recognized, and stopped patterns, and whether or not a big winning pattern or a small winning pattern is stopped can be accurately discriminated.

Here, when the pseudo-continuous variation is executed, the temporary stop symbol in the middle row is configured to stop the "special symbol", but the display control method of the decorative symbol is not limited to this. For example, at the time of execution of pseudo continuous variation such as "A-2 (losing) pseudo run 2 (specific outcome)", at the timing of temporary stop of the medium symbol, the specific outcome can be stopped in addition to the "special symbol". may be configured as follows. Here, a specific pattern is different from a "special pattern" in that all columns (left, middle, and right) are stopped with numbers, but are stopped according to a certain rule. (For example, an order such as "345"), and is configured to inform the player that the pseudo-continuous variation is being executed by stopping the specific number. Also, during the pseudo-continuous variation execution, in the case of losing, at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, it is easier to stop the specific number than the "special pattern", while the hit (big hit, small hit) In this case, at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, it is easier to stop the "special design" than the specific eye, that is, when the "special design" stops more than when the specific eye stops There is a high degree of expectation that the player will win (big win, small win). In addition, it is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if it is configured so that the expectation of winning (big win, small win) is higher when the specific number stops than when the "special symbol" stops. Absent. Also, when the pseudo-variation is executed in the pseudo-continuous variation, all the symbols are changed again, that is, after the three symbols are temporarily stopped, the three symbols are changed again, but in such a case , If the "special pattern" is temporarily stopped in the middle row and then the middle row changes again, the decoration pattern in the middle row at the start of the re-fluctuation is no longer a "special pattern" {for example, "6 7 (★ = special symbol), it will change again in the state of "667" (it is desirable that the middle symbol is the right symbol or the left symbol "± 1" frame)} Alternatively, when the "special pattern" is temporarily stopped in the middle row, three patterns of "667" are temporarily stopped behind the "special pattern", and then the "special pattern" is changed again. The first decorative pattern in the left row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row, and the first decorative pattern in the right row may be changed again when they are erased. In such a case, by setting the display priority of the image of the "special symbol" in the middle row higher than the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the "special symbol" is displayed in the form of a pseudo continuous variation that displays the specific number. Since it is only necessary to display it, it is possible to prevent the method of determining the first decorative pattern from becoming complicated.

With the configuration as described above, a plurality of types of stop modes at the time of temporary stop can be provided at the time of execution of pseudo-continuous variation by configuring so that the specific outcome can be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. At the same time, by differentiating the degree of expectation for winning (big win, minor win) depending on the stopping mode, the player will pay attention to which of the stopping modes is, and the interest of the game will be enhanced. becomes.

In addition, although it was configured so that the specific eye (or "special symbol") can be temporarily stopped at the timing of the temporary stop in the middle row, the left and right columns when the specific eye (or "special symbol") is displayed The display mode of the columns may be changed. For example, (1) the left column and the right column have the same number, and the middle column has the same number ±1 (for example, "4.5・ 4” or a “special symbol” is placed at the position of 5 in the middle row), (2) It is the same stopping mode as a losing eye that is not a specific eye, but it is a specific eye due to a change in sound or color. (3) Temporarily stop all rows at the same time (4) Numbers in left and/or right rows are changed at timing of temporary stop in middle row (5) Left row and right row If the decorative pattern in the row is a number that is "2" or more apart, if the decorative pattern in the middle row is a number that is "2" or more apart from the left and/or right row, and the number is temporarily stopped due to a failure. good too. In addition, the appearance condition of the specific outcome may also be changed. For example, it is likely to appear when the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left column and the right column are the same (or appear only when they are the same). For example, it may be configured to differ from the appearance condition of the "special symbol". Also, the appearance of "special symbols" (or specific eyes) after reach is more expected than the appearance of "special symbols" (or specific eyes) when it is not reach (big hits, small hits) or there is a high possibility that the "special symbol" will temporarily stop again during the symbol change {for example, "7★7" is better than "7★8" (★ = special symbol) It may be configured such that there is a high expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) or there is a high possibility of a temporary stop again. In addition, as shown in (1), the left column and the right column are the same number, and the middle column is the number of ± 1 of the same number, or the middle column and the right column are the numbers of the left column. In the case of numbers such as ±1 or ±2, in other words, when the numbers in the middle and right columns are predetermined based on the numbers in the left column, only the numbers displayed in the left column are determined by lottery. For the numbers displayed in the middle and right columns, the same numbers as the numbers displayed in the left column determined by lottery or the numbers displayed in the left column determined by lottery are ±1 or ±2. (that is, the numbers to be displayed in the middle and right columns are not determined by lottery or the like, but the numbers corresponding to the numbers to be displayed in the left column are determined). For example, if the left column is N (N is a number from 1 to 8, for example), the middle column is N+1, and the right column is N, the numbers displayed in the left column are determined by lottery or the like from 1 to 8. . If the number in the left column is determined to be "4", the middle column will be 4 + 1 = "5", the right column will be the same "4" as the left column, and the specific outcome will be "4, 5, 4" set. By configuring in this way, a specific number is set using a table in which only the numbers in the left column are set without using a table in which a plurality of specific numbers are set as a combination of the left column, the middle column, and the right column. is possible, there is an effect that it is possible to easily determine the specific number in the decorative symbol display content determination process of step 2200 . In the above example, the numbers in the left column are determined by lottery, and the numbers in the middle and right columns are determined based on the numbers in the left column. For column numbers, left and right column numbers may be determined, and for right column numbers, left and middle column numbers may be determined.

There are two types of "special symbols", "special symbol A" and "special symbol B", which are displayed while the first decorative symbol is fluctuating and can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation. may Here, the "special symbol A" is configured to be temporarily stopped from the first middle row temporary stop timing (even after this timing) in the pseudo continuous variation, while the "special symbol B" is a pseudo continuous variation. It is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the second middle row temporary stop timing in the fluctuation. Further, the specific number is configured so that a temporary stop can be made from the first middle row temporary stop timing in the pseudo-continuous variation (even after this timing). That is, at the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous variation, two types of "special symbol A" and the specific outcome can be temporarily stopped as the stop mode, while the second middle row in the pseudo continuous variation At the temporary stop timing, as a stop mode, "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are configured so that three types of specific numbers can be temporarily stopped. There are more types of stop modes that can be stopped at the second middle row temporary stop timing in the pseudo continuous variation than at the temporary stop timing. In this way, in the temporary stop timings in the middle row of the pseudo-continuous variation, the number of types of stop modes may be increased toward the second half of the temporary stop timings, or the number of types of stop modes may be increased toward the second half of the temporary stop timings. may be configured to reduce In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes increases as the temporary stop timing in the second half is reached, it is expected that the variation will be a hit (big win, small win) as the type of selection candidate each time the pseudo variation is executed. A new high degree stop mode may be added, and with such a configuration, the player's attention will be focused every time a pseudo-fluctuation is performed. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes decreases as the second half of the temporary stop timing comes, it is expected that the variation will be a hit (big win, small win) as the type of selection candidate each time the pseudo variation is executed. It may be configured so that the stop mode with a low degree of degree is deleted, and by such a configuration, it is possible to secure the degree of expectation that the variation will be a hit (big win, small win) every time the pseudo variation is executed. becomes.

By configuring as described above, in the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo-continuous variation, the more the temporary stop timing is in the latter half, the more stop modes that can be temporarily stopped. Attention will be paid to the number of times the middle row makes a temporary stop and the stop mode at the time of temporary stop, and the interest of the game will be enhanced.

The second decorative symbols are configured to always be displayed while the main game symbols are fluctuating. Further, in the case of ready-to-win, the second decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the same time as the temporary stop timing of the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is also confirmed and displayed at the same time as the fixed display timing of the first decorative pattern. (The same symbol is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). In addition, the variable display mode of the second decorative pattern is not limited to this. In this case, the second decorative pattern is hidden, that is, during the variable display of the first decorative pattern, during the temporary stop of the left and right columns, and at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the specific number is stopped. In the case of middle row, the second decorative pattern is hidden, while when the "special pattern" is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed (or temporarily stop display). In addition, all the second decorative symbols may be stopped and temporarily stopped in accordance with the stop and temporary stop of the first decorative symbols. Also, the second decorative pattern may be always changed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first decorative pattern, and only when the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the second decorative pattern may be fixed and stopped.

Also, the display modes of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols may be configured to differ depending on whether or not the game is in the probability varying gaming state. In this case, when the display mode of the first decorative pattern changes (for example, when the non-probability variable gaming state shifts to the probability variable gaming state), the display mode of the second decorative pattern also changes along with the change. may be configured as follows. It should be noted that the display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not limited to a configuration in which they differ only depending on whether the state is a variable probability game state. It may be configured so as to differ depending on which production (production stage) is.

Next, the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern (in this example, the display color, the color scheme pattern, the shape , size, etc.) can be different. In the non-probability variation gaming state, only the "7" pattern is displayed in "white" together with the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and all patterns other than "7" are displayed in "black". (becomes a non-variable display mode), while in the probability variation gaming state, the "3" design and the "7" design along with the first decorative design and the second decorative design are "outline , and all symbols other than "3" and "7" are displayed in "black". That is, together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the "3" symbol is configured so that the display mode can be different (probability variable display mode) depending on the game state. The condition that the display mode is different is not limited to whether it is in the probability variable game state, but it may be in the time reduction game state or not, and it is different depending on which background production (production stage) is being executed. It may be configured to allow The pattern whose display attribute can be changed depending on whether or not it is in the probability variable gaming state is the "3" pattern. is included in the combination of predetermined losing symbols (in this example, "345") (becomes the stop symbol in the left column), and in the non-probability variable gaming state, the second decorative symbol stops at the time of losing While all the symbols are displayed in "black", in the probability variation game state, the stop symbols of the second decorative pattern at the time of losing are displayed in "white", "black", and "black" from the left column. It will be done.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing relating to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. The difference from FIG. 9 is steps 1326 to 1344, the purpose of which is to transmit variation mode information, which is information to be referred to when determining the content of the prefetch effect, to the sub side, that is, step At 1308, after storing the first main game content determination random number, at step 1326, the suspension control means MJ30, based on the suspension information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number), determines the win/fail result and stop symbol for the stored suspension. is determined in advance. Next, at step 1328, the suspension control means MJ30 sets a command relating to the newly generated suspension validity result and stop symbol information to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step 1999) to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process.

Next, in step 1330, the suspension control means MJ30 determines in advance the stored variation mode information (variation mode group) related to the suspension based on the suspension information (fluctuation mode determination random number), and proceeds to step 1332. One variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, at step 1332, the hold control means MJ30 transmits a command related to the occurrence of a new hold (a hold generation command of the first main game content determination random number, a command related to variation mode information, etc.) to the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. FIG. In addition, when the pattern information is configured to be transmitted to the sub-side, the sub-side may execute a performance suggesting a hit (big win, small win) as a performance to be executed. It is desirable to have a configuration that can notify the player of the stop pattern of the main game pattern that will be a hit (big hit, small win) (stop only when the stop pattern of the main game pattern is a hit (big hit, small win)) design).

Thus, in this embodiment (an embodiment in which a prefetching lottery can be executed), when the main game content determination random number (first main game content determination random number or second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when a hold occurs) ) to determine the variation mode information.

In addition, at the timing when the reservation occurs, the reservation number information (even if only the number of reservations on the winning side of the first main game side or the second main game side, the first main game side and the second It may be configured to transmit winning/failure information, pattern information (information related to the stop pattern of the main game pattern), and variation mode information. Furthermore, the information to be transmitted to the sub side is not limited to this, and information related to the profit mode of the main game pattern that will be a hit (big hit, small win) (number of special game rounds related to the jackpot pattern scheduled to be stopped, Number of rounds of special game after small winning game related to small winning pattern, etc.), winning/failing random number separator information (each game state on the first main game side (second main game side), random value (or random value range ) and the lottery results are grouped by linking them. It is also possible to transmit information related to grouping, such as winning even in a probability state and winning in a high probability state but losing in a low probability state.

Next, in step 1318, after storing the second main game content determination random number, in step 1338, the suspension control means MJ30, based on the suspension information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number) Pre-determine results and stop symbols. Next, in step 1340, the suspension control means MJ30 sets a command related to the newly generated suspension validity result and stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step 1999) to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process.

Next, in step 1342, the suspension control means MJ30 determines in advance the stored variation mode information related to suspension based on the suspension information (fluctuation mode determination random number), and proceeds to step 1344. FIG. Next, at step 1344, the hold control means MJ30 transmits a command related to the occurrence of a new hold (a hold generation command of the second main game content determination random number, a command related to variation mode information, etc.) to the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

In steps 1308 and 1318, the first main game content determination random number and the second main game content determination random number are stored. is stored, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers It is preferable to configure it so that other information such as value is not stored (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise etc.). to prevent it from being lost). In addition, regarding the success or failure lottery random number, the change in the game state (the change in the game state related to the already recorded suspension) from the acquisition of the success or failure random number to the execution of the success or failure lottery related to the success or failure lottery random number Not only the change, but also the possibility that the game state will change due to the newly generated hold, the game state at the time of execution of the lottery lottery related to the lottery random number is unpredictable). is configured to store the lottery random number until it is executed.

The commands to the sub-main control unit SM related to the pending number information, winning information, pattern information, and variation mode information as look-ahead information are any game state {low probability low base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state, high accuracy base state, small winning game state (including small winning game start demonstration and small winning game end demonstration as well as special electric role product operation), special game state (special game start demonstration, special game It may be configured so that the command can be transmitted regardless of whether it is a hold related to the first main game or a hold related to the second main game. In such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether or not to use the received command. Also, in a non-time-reduced gaming state (eg, low-probability-low base state) or high-probability-low-base state, it can be transmitted only when a hold related to the first main game occurs, while a time-reduced gaming state (eg, high-probability-high base State, low probability base state) may be configured to be able to transmit only when a hold related to the second main game occurs. Furthermore, during the small winning game (including the small winning game start demo and the small winning game ending demo) and during the special game (including the special game starting demo and the special game ending demo), only when the hold related to the second main game occurs It may be configured to be able to transmit the look-ahead information related to the second main game.

A specific example of the command related to the success/failure information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is "D000H: Lost, D001H: Lost if low probability, Big hit if high probability, D002H: Big hit at both low probability and high probability, D003H: First The main game symbol is a small win, D004G: The second main game symbol is a small win," and a specific example of the command related to the symbol information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is, 10R jackpot of normal pattern, D102H: 8R jackpot, D103H: 7R jackpot, D104H: 6R jackpot, D105H: 4R jackpot of variable pattern, D106H: 4R jackpot of normal pattern, D107H: 3R jackpot, D108H: 3R hit (from small hit In the case of a developed jackpot), D109H: 4R hit (in the case of a jackpot developed from a small hit), D10AH: 6R hit (in the case of a jackpot developed from a small hit), D10BH: 7R hit (in the case of a jackpot developed from a small hit) ), D10CH: 8R win (in the case of a big win developed from a small win), D10DH: 10R win (in the case of a big win developed from a small win)”, and commands related to variation mode information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM A specific example is "D200H: Separation 1 (group 1), D201H: Separation 2 (group 2), D202H: Separation 3 (group 3)".

It should be noted that the hold control means MJ30, in step 1332, commands related to the occurrence of a new hold (a command to generate a hold of the first main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode information, etc.), and in step 1344, to the occurrence of a new hold. Such commands (second main game content determination random number pending generation command, variation mode information command, etc.) are configured to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM, but the information indicated by the variation mode random number instead of the variation mode information is transmitted. It may be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM.

Next, FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 (main game table 3) are the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game It is an example of the lottery table MN51ta-B) for determining the variation mode. In this embodiment (an embodiment in which a prefetching lottery can be executed), the variation mode random number delimiter information is determined for a certain random value (or random value range). Depending on the result, the number of variation mode groups (the number in which the random numbers are separated), the variation time, and the random value range of the variation mode group may differ (for example, the same group 1 may have different random value ranges). By transmitting variation mode random number delimiter information to the sub side, the sub side can derive a variation mode group corresponding to these game states. That is, when the game state transitions between when the suspension occurred and when the suspension was completed, the variation mode group scheduled when the suspension occurred and the variation mode group executed when the suspension was completed may differ. (For example, when the hold occurred, the variation mode group was scheduled to be Group 1 because it was a non-time-reduced gaming state, but when the hold was completed, the time-reduced gaming state occurred, so the actual variation mode group became Group 2. However, with respect to variation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned across all game states, when the sub-side receives the variation mode random number delimiter information (subsequent game state Without considering the transition), it is possible to normally execute the so-called pending look-ahead effect. In addition, the variation mode random number division information indicates whether the variation is on the first main game side or on the second main game side, whether the result of the win/loss lottery is a win or a loss, and whether the game state is a time-reduced game state. or a non-time-reduced game state, but it is not limited to this. It is configured to form one variation mode random number division information including whether it is a variation, whether the result of the lottery is a win or a loss, and whether the game state is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state. You may In addition, in order to cause the second main game suspension during the variation of the first main game symbols in the time shortened game state, which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbols related to the loss in the time shortened game state The content of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that a short-time variation mode is not selected regardless of the number of holds (for example, the variation time is all five seconds or longer). It should be noted that the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main game It is the game pending number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 21 in this embodiment (an embodiment in which a prefetch lottery can be executed). 22 are steps 2120 to 2128, step 2550, step 2600 and step 2650. That is, in step 2104, after adding 1 to the drawing pending counter, in step 2120, the drawing pending information The display control means SM22 temporarily stores the command related to the new pending decision result and the stopped pattern information transmitted from the main control board M side in the temporary storage means SM22b for binding pending information. Next, at step 2122, the drawing pending information display control means SM22, based on the pending generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, displays the pending information (in particular, variation mode information, etc.) Temporarily stored in the storage means SM22b. It should be noted that, if the information related to the win/fail result, the stop pattern, and the variation mode information is not transmitted from the main side, the information is not temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area in step 2120 or step 2122. Become. Next, at step 2124, the binding hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new hold is the hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes at step 2124, at step 2550, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 executes a first main game win time look-ahead determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2126. FIG. On the other hand, if No at step 2124, at step 2600, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 executes second main game winning time look-ahead determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2126. FIG.

Next, at step 2126, the binding pending information display control means SM22 refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the new pending has information indicating that the pending is the trigger pending. (Information indicating that the trigger is pending is added in step 2576 or step 2622). In the case of Yes at step 2126, at step 2650, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes prefetch pending content determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2118. FIG. On the other hand, if step 2126 is No, the process also proceeds to step 2118 .

On the other hand, after subtracting 1 from the design reservation counter in step 2112, in step 2128, the design reservation information display control means SM22 displays the reservation information related to the design variation (especially, winning result, stop design information, variation mode information). is deleted from the temporary storage means for book binding pending information SM22b, the remaining pending information is shifted, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 in FIG. This process will be described by dividing it into two processes, ie, the process related to the prefetch lottery prohibition condition and the process related to the prefetch lottery. In the former prefetching lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2552, the pending prefetching effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the second main game pending (first main game pending) It is determined whether or not there is a hold that is digested with priority over the game side. In the case of Yes at step 2552, at step 2554, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes at step 2554, at step 2558, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and if there is a pending having information indicating trigger pending in the pending. Determine whether or not there is Here, the trigger suspension is a suspension of winning the prefetching lottery at the time of winning (first prefetching lottery at the time of winning the first main game, prefetching lottery at the time of the second main game winning). In the case of Yes at step 2558, at step 2560, the suspension look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and the suspension before the new suspension becomes a hit (big win, small win). Determine if there are no holds. If Yes at step 2560 , go to step 2562 .

Next, in the latter prefetch lottery process, first, in step 2562, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the temporary storage means SM22b for the pending prefetch effect, and the new pending is a hit (jackpot, It is determined whether or not it is a hold that will be a small hit. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k executes a win-time prefetch lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) for the new pending, Go to step 2574 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2562, at step 2568, the pending look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the new pending variation mode group is group 3. determine whether Thus, in this embodiment (an embodiment in which the prefetching lottery can be executed), when determining whether the prefetching lottery can be executed, it is configured to determine whether the prefetching lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode group. are doing. When determining whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode information. In the case of Yes at step 2568, at step 2570, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a win-time prefetch lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/10) for the new pending, Go to step 2574 . On the other hand, if step 2568 is No, the process also proceeds to step 2574 .

Next, at step 2574, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2574, at step 2576, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k puts "trigger pending" in the new hold that has been won in the prefetch lottery at the time of winning in the temporary storage means SM22b for the design reserve information. The information to the effect that it exists is added and stored temporarily, and the next process {process of step 2126} is performed.

On the other hand, if No at step 2552 (if there is a second main game hold in the hold), at step 2578, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k temporarily stores the binding hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information to the effect that it is a "trigger hold" from the information related to the stored hold (if there is no hold that has information to the effect that it is a trigger hold, this process is not executed and the next ), and proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126}. Incidentally, even if No in step 2554, step 2558, step 2560, or step 2574, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126}. In the process of step 2578, when there is (occurs) a hold on the second main game side, the second main game preferentially digests the second main game side like this embodiment (an embodiment in which a prefetching lottery can be executed). In , since the newly generated hold on the second main game side is digested first, the planned order of fluctuations will not be obtained, and the situation where the look-ahead effect over multiple fluctuations will not be executed normally. is. In addition, as a prohibition condition for the prefetching lottery, the condition whether or not there is no suspension of a specific variation mode group (or suspension of specific variation mode information) in the suspension before the new suspension may be a prohibition condition. .

Next, FIG. 35 is a flow chart of the second main game win time look-ahead determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. This process will be described by dividing it into two processes, ie, the process related to the prefetch lottery prohibition condition and the process related to the prefetch lottery. In the former prefetch lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2602, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether the current game state is the time reduction game state. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the suspension prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and if there is a suspension having information indicating that it is a trigger suspension in the suspension. Determine whether or not there is In the case of Yes at step 2604, at step 2606, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determining means SM26k refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the pending before the new pending becomes a hit (big win, small win). Determine if there are no holds. If Yes in step 2606 , go to step 2608 .

Next, in the latter prefetch lottery processing, first, in step 2608, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b. It is determined whether or not it is a hold that will be a small hit. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k, for the new hold, a predetermined probability is also a low probability. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the pending look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new pending variation mode group is group C. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k, for the new hold, a predetermined probability Yes, in this example, a win-time look-ahead lottery that wins on 1/15) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620 . On the other hand, if No in step 2612, the process proceeds to step 2620 as well.

Next, at step 2620, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k determines whether or not the win-time look-ahead lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2620, at step 2622, the pending look-ahead effect executability determination means SM26k puts "trigger pending" in the new hold that has been won in the win-time look-ahead lottery in the design hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The information to the effect that it exists is added and temporarily stored, and the next process {process of step 2126} is performed. Note that even if No in step 2602, step 2604, step 2606, or step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126}.

Thus, in the present embodiment (an embodiment in which a prefetching lottery can be executed), the second main game side It is easier to win the prefetch lottery for the hold on the 1st main game side than the prefetch lottery for the hold on the 1st main game side. Rate = 1/3> Prefetching lottery winning rate when the second main game hold is a hit (big hit, small win) hold = 1/5, lookahead when the first main game hold is a loss hold Lottery winning rate = 1/10> Prefetching lottery winning rate when the second main game hold is a hit (jackpot, minor win) = 1/15). By configuring in this way, even in the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as a look-ahead effect, the "special symbol" related to the first main game side appears more than the "special symbol" related to the second main game side. It's getting easier.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the prefetch pending content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2650 in FIG. First, in step 2652, the binding pending information display control means SM22 refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger pending is a winning (big win, small win) pending. In the case of Yes at step 2652, at step 2654, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of trigger pending with reference to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of winning), and proceeds to the next process (step 2118). process). On the other hand, if No at step 2652, at step 2656, the display mode of the pending trigger is determined by referring to the pending display mode determination table (when lost), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118).

Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are a pending display mode determination table (at the time of winning (at the time of big win, at the time of small win)) and a pending display mode determination table (at the time of losing). In this embodiment (an embodiment in which a prefetching lottery can be executed), the display mode of the trigger suspension that can be changed during the execution of the suspension change effect is referred to the suspension display mode determination table (at the time of winning (at the time of big win, at the time of small win)). There are four types of display modes that can be selected when making a decision, i.e., rainbow color, red, green, and blue. There are three kinds of modes, red, green, and blue, which are selected by lottery using random numbers exclusively for determining the pending display mode. It should be noted that red is most likely to be selected when referring to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of hit (at the time of big hit, at the time of small hit)), while blue is the most selected when referring to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of loss). It has become easier, and the expectation of winning (big hit, small hit) for each display mode of holding when the holding change effect occurs Rainbow colors are selected only when winning (big wins, small wins), and the colors other than rainbow colors are red, green, and blue in descending order of expectation. It should be noted that the changeable display mode is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the types are increased or decreased, or the changeable colors are changed. In addition, in this example, it is configured so that the degree of expectation of winning (big win, small win) can be suggested by the display color of the pending, but it is not limited to this, and for example, a win (big win, small win) has been made. In some cases (or together with the degree of expectation for winning (big win, small win)), it may be configured to suggest the game state after execution of the special game. In the case of such a configuration, especially in the time shortening game state, when a win (big win, small win) is achieved in the hold due to the display color of the hold, the transition to the time shortening game state is made after the execution of the special game. (For example, if the pending display color is red, the expectation for the time-reduced game state is high, if it is blue, the expectation for the time-reduced game state is small, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to execute an effective performance to encourage the player to continue or end the time-reduced game state advantageous to the player.

In this way, in the present embodiment (an embodiment in which a foreseeing lottery can be executed), when executing the pending change effect, a hit (big win, small win) is expected according to a display mode selected from a plurality of types of pending display modes. It is configured so that the degree can be different. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a plurality of suspension change performances during execution of the look-ahead performance (from the timing of winning the look-ahead lottery to the end of the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the trigger suspension). With this configuration, for example, when the pending change effect is executed twice during the execution of the look-ahead effect, if the display mode of the pending change in the first pending change effect is blue, the second time The display mode of the suspension that changes in the suspension change performance is made to be green or red, that is, every time the suspension change performance is executed, the display mode of the suspension changes to a high expectation of winning (big hit, small win). (Rank up) is desirable (in order not to impair the player's sense of expectation). In addition, the production related to the pending display change is not limited to this, and as a result, a production mode that does not involve the pending display change may be provided. An effect mode (so-called false pattern) in which an effect occurs and the pending display does not change as it is, and an effect mode in which the pending display change is executed after that may be provided.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. The difference from FIG. 23 is about steps 2206 and 2250, the purpose of which is to stop symbols of the first decorative symbol (including temporary stop), especially the above-mentioned "special symbol" (that is, hit (big hit)). To change a factor for determining a win (symbol that foretells that a big win, a small win) can occur after that, although it does not mean a small win. That is, at step 2204, after turning on the symbol content determination permission flag, at step 2206, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n) move to the main side. By referring to the symbol information (variation mode related to the main game symbol) temporarily stored in the information temporary storage means SM11b and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol {for example, the main If the variation mode related to the game pattern is a short-time variation, non-reach, if it is a long-time variation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined, and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b Related information temporary storage means SM24b, ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b) are temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2208.

Also, in step 2216, after determining the contents of the decorative design effect and setting the display update timing and the display update contents, in step 2250, the design display content determination means SM21n decides the notice effect/design stop design, which will be described later. Execute the process and move to step 2218 . That is, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (including the time of temporary stop) is determined by the advance notice effect/design stop symbol determination process, which will be described later.

Next, FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the notice effect/design stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, in step 2252, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the change is related to trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the announcement effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, at step 2260, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the "special notice effect candidates". Here, the "special notice effect candidate" is a notice effect candidate referred to when determining the notice effect when the background effect is the "angel zone background" described later. Next, at step 2262, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines the stop design (temporary stop design) of the first decorative design based on the information regarding the stop design of the main game design, and performs the next processing (the processing of step 2218). ). Here, in step 2262, it is desirable that the aforementioned "special symbol" is not selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol. In the case of "background" (that is, the state in which the existence of a hold with a high degree of expectation for a hit (big hit, small hit) has already been notified), the above-mentioned "special pattern" (that is, a hit (big hit, small hit) means However, after that, if a symbol that foretells that a win (a big win or a small win) is possible) is stopped and displayed, similar information will be double reported, which is incomprehensible to the player. This is because there is a risk of becoming

On the other hand, if No at step 2252, at step 2256, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not there is a trigger pending in the pending. If Yes at step 2256, at step 2258, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the angel zone entering flag is off. If Yes at step 2258 , go to step 2264 . On the other hand, if No in step 2258 , go to step 2260 .

Next, at step 2264, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the "normal notice effect candidates". Here, the “normal notice effect candidate” is a notice effect candidate referred to when determining the notice effect when the background effect is other than the “angel zone background” described later. Next, at step 2266, the notice effect display control means SM24 turns on the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, at step 2268, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol in the middle row of the first decorative symbol to be the "special symbol", and based on the information regarding the stopped symbol of the main game symbol, the first decorative symbol is displayed. Designs to be temporarily stopped in the left and right columns are determined (symbols different from those in the left and right columns are to be temporarily stopped), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2218).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2256, in step 2270, the announcement effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the variation mode group of the variation is group 3. In addition to being excluded from the lottery of the angel zone transition lottery described later, the change related to the hold of Group 3 who did not win the look-ahead lottery (the look-ahead lottery at the time of winning) (did not become a trigger hold) will be subject to lottery}. In the case of Yes in step 2270, in step 2272, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines that the variation is a pseudo-continuous variation (a variation in which the pseudo-variation is executed at least once. In this example, FIGS. 24 and 25 are examples. A-1, A-2, B-2, etc.) is determined as a variation to be executed. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2274, the announcement effect display control means SM24 selects an angel zone transition lottery (changing the background effect to or not) is executed. Next, at step 2276, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the angel zone transfer lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2276, at step 2278, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from among "candidates for normal notice effect→candidates for special notice effect after the special symbol temporary stop timing" (for example, In the case of A-1 and A-2, until 14 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the content of the notice effect is determined from the "normal notice effect candidate", and after 14 seconds from the start of the change, which is the first middle row temporary stop timing , determines the contents of the notice effect from the "candidates for the special notice effect"). Next, at step 2280, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the temporary stop symbol in the middle row of the main game symbol for the first time (the first time in the pseudo-continuous variation) to the "special symbol" (the background effect is changed to the angel zone). (decorative pattern that informs the player that the stop mode), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2218). Incidentally, the temporary stop symbol is a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo variation in the pseudo continuous variation, and may be hereinafter referred to as a pseudo continuous symbol.

On the other hand, if No at step 2270, step 2272 or step 2276, at step 2282, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the "normal notice effect candidates". Next, at step 2284, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stopped symbol (temporary stopped symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information about the stopped symbol of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (the process of step 2218). ).

In addition, in this embodiment (an embodiment in which a prefetching lottery can be executed), in step 2274, an angel zone transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not the transition to the variable angel zone pattern", and whether or not to move to the angel zone with the temporary suspension of the special pattern) is determined, but not limited to this, the first pseudo-continuous pattern (in the first A plurality of combination candidates of the row temporary stop pattern) and the advance notice performance may be provided, and the combination of the pseudo consecutive symbols and the notice performance may be determined from among the combination candidates at the time of pseudo continuous variation. Specifically, as the combination candidates, "pseudo-continuous pattern A, notice effect 1", "pseudo-consecutive pattern A, notice effect 2", "pseudo-consecutive pattern A, notice effect 3", "pseudo-consecutive pattern A, notice effect" Effect 4”, “Special pattern, notice effect 1” and “Special pattern, notice effect 2” are provided, and six combination candidates are provided. It may be configured such that when the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the advance notice effect in which the symbol is the "special symbol" is selected, the transition to the angel zone is made during the fluctuation. Incidentally, the method of determining the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbols and the advance notice effect is not limited to the case of the pseudo-continuous variation, and may be used in the case of other variation modes as well. Further, the combination is not limited to the pseudo-continuous pattern and the advance notice effects, and may include background effects, sound modes, and the like.

In addition, as a method of determining the notice effect, the basic notice effect of the notice effect (executable notice effect regardless of the background effect being executed, effect to be executed in the first half of the fluctuation, etc.) was decided first. After that, based on the determined basic notice effect, decide the effect that is not the notice effect such as background effect, execute the decided effect (notice effect, background effect, etc.), and then decide An undetermined effect of the advance notice effects may be determined based on the basic advance notice effects and the effects other than the advance notice effects such as the determined background effects (the determination method may be repeated a plurality of times). , may be configured to determine all of the advance notice effects to be executed in the variation). By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the notice effect to be executed with the variation at a plurality of timings, and all the notice effects to be executed with the variation are determined at one timing. Defects and the like in production can be reduced. In this example, (1) "fixed stop": the fixed stop is executed after a temporary stop, and if the pattern combination that is fixed and stopped is a big hit (three of the same pattern are aligned), the game shifts to a special game. , in the specific area C12-1 or in the specific area C12-2 during the operation flag operation of the special electric role based on the small hit (three of the same pattern or not three of the same pattern) If the passage of the game ball is detected, it shifts to a special game, and if it is a loss (not three of the same pattern), it does not shift to a special game. (2) "Temporary stop": Temporary stop is before fixed stop. (for example, shaking fluctuation), pseudo-variation can be executed by re-fluctuation after temporarily stopping in the middle of the fluctuation in one pattern fluctuation, (3) “Special pattern” is displayed when executing the look-ahead effect In this case, the "special symbol" is not only displayed as a fixed stop, but is also configured to be displayed as a temporary stop before the fixed stop. Also, in this example, fixed stop and final stop are synonymous, and "stop" is used for both fixed stop and temporary stop. , and the stop pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern is used for both the temporary stop pattern and the fixed stop pattern (if the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is "777", etc., the stop pattern = It is a fixed stop pattern).

Next, FIG. 39 is an image diagram showing an example of the notice effect/arrangement stop symbol display. As shown in the image diagram, in this example, when moving to the angel zone in the change, as the background effect, the normal background effect (an example of the background effect not the angel zone background effect) is executed. "Special design" stops as a middle row temporary stop design. Also, with the temporary stop of the "special symbol" as a trigger, an angel zone background effect is executed as a background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped. In addition, in this example, the case of hitting (big hit, small hit) is illustrated, but the background effect is configured to switch in the same way when losing Regarding the stop, the decorative patterns on the left and right may be barakeme (different patterns), but there are cases where they are not (the same pattern) (= "special pattern" may temporarily stop after reaching)}} .

Also, as shown in the middle row, when other pseudo-continuous fluctuations without transition to the angel zone are performed (when the lottery for transition to the angel zone is not won), the normal background effect is executed as the background effect. Bottom, "Pseudo-continuous symbol A" (a temporary stop symbol that informs the player that a pseudo-continuous variation is being executed, which is different from the "special symbol") is temporarily stopped as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. Next, even after the "pseudo continuous symbol A" is temporarily stopped, the normal background effect is executed as the background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped.

In addition, as shown in the lower part, under the situation where the background effect is normally executed as the background effect, during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, if the winning lottery is won, the stopping pattern will be a losing pattern (barake) when the fluctuation is stopped. eyes) stop. After that, the next variation is started, and the "special symbol" is stopped as the stop symbol of the variation (that is, the variation is the pre-reading angel zone entry variation). Next, when the "special symbol" stops, the angel zone background effect is executed as the background effect from the next change (that is, the next change is the first change in the look-ahead zone). In this example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the symbol variation related to the suspension scheduled to be consumed before the trigger suspension, it is not temporarily stopped except for the fixed stop (previous temporary stop). (It is not used when changing again after temporarily stopping as a stop symbol of pseudo fluctuation). That is, in the symbol variation related to the suspension scheduled to be consumed before the trigger suspension, the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension from "the timing when the special symbol is temporarily stopped → the pseudo variation is executed and the symbol variation becomes a loss" It cannot be done until the Angel Zone background is displayed. In this way, in the present embodiment (an embodiment in which a prefetching lottery can be executed), the stop (or temporary stop) of the "special pattern" is used as a trigger to execute the angel zone background effect. By visually recognizing the stop (or temporary stop) of the "special symbol", the player can recognize that it will move to the angel zone, and can Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation for the stop (or temporary stop) of the "special symbol" even at the time of the temporary stop during fluctuation.

As shown in the figure, when the "special symbol" stops as a temporary stop symbol during pseudo continuous fluctuation, the same number on the left column and the right column stops (temporary stop) (at the time of reach (Same as the stop mode) On the other hand, when the "special pattern" stops as the final stop pattern of the next change after winning the prefetch lottery, different numbers (discrete eyes) in the left and right columns are configured to stop. there is

Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the background effect control process related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 21 in this embodiment (an embodiment in which a prefetch lottery can be executed). The difference from FIG. 29 is step 2506. That is, after setting the "angel zone background" as the background effect at step 2504, at step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the background effect related information. The means SM23b is referred to, the main side information temporary storage means SM11b is referred to, and the fluctuation (a part of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation) (or the fluctuation related to the suspension) that triggered the transition of the "Angel Zone" { The change that triggered the transition (or the change related to suspension) is determined as to whether or not the change related to the trigger suspension or the variation related to the transition to the variable angel zone} has ended. If Yes in step 2506 , go to step 2508 ; if No, go to step 2520 .

With the configuration as described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (embodiment in which a prefetching lottery can be executed) has the first decorative design and the second decorative design as the decorative patterns, and the so-called It is configured to be able to execute the pending look-ahead effect, and when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol, the background change effect indicating that the degree of expectation for transition to the special game increases is executed. It is configured. Then, regarding the hold that is the order of digestion before the hold (trigger hold) that triggers the hold look-ahead effect, the "special pattern" is stopped and displayed as the fixed stop pattern when the pattern of the first decorative pattern changes at the time of digestion of the hold. Therefore, the significance of the stop display of the "special symbol" in this case is that "symbol variation has ended" and "the degree of expectation for transition to the special game has increased". On the other hand, regarding the trigger hold, when the pattern of the first decorative pattern changes at the time of the hold digestion, the "special design" can be stop-displayed as a temporary stop design. , ``symbol fluctuation re-fluctuation'' and ``expectation for shift to special game increased''. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (an embodiment in which a prefetching lottery can be executed), the same type of "special symbol" differs depending on the timing (or situation) when it is stopped and displayed. It will be possible to create a novel production method that has meaning.

In addition, in this embodiment (an embodiment in which a prefetching lottery can be executed), regarding the hold that is the order of digestion before the trigger hold, when the pattern of the first decorative pattern changes at the time of digestion of the hold, the fixed stop symbol is " The same kind of " Although it is configured to be a "special pattern", it is not limited to this, and the "special pattern" in the former case is set to "special pattern A", and the "special pattern" in the latter case is set to "special pattern B". good too. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly convey to the player the meaning of the stop display of the "special symbols" in both. Also, the probability of displaying the "special symbol" in the former case may be lower than the probability of displaying the "special symbol" in the latter case.

In addition, although the number of symbol rows for the first and second decorative symbols is three, and the number of effective lines is one, there is no problem even if these are changed. As a trigger, the symbol row and/or effective lines increase (for example, the effective lines become 9 lines). For example, when the number of symbol rows becomes two and one of the symbols stops, the ready-to-win state is reached. The difference in the profit rate to be displayed may be notified by the type of the symbol that is stopped and displayed).

<<Significance of terms>>
The meaning of each term in this embodiment will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configurations and effects related to the following terms can be applied to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Non-time reduction game state>
The non-time shortening gaming state is a gaming state showing a low-probability base state (normal gaming state). It should be noted that the high-probability-low base state in which the variation time of the main game symbols is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state and the time-reduced game is not executed may be set as the non-time-reduced game state.
<Effect of non-time reduction game state>
(1) Mainly, the game can be played on the first main game side.

<Time reduction game state>
The time shortening gaming state is a gaming state showing a high certainty-high base state and a low certainty-high base state. It should be noted that the time reduction game state may be a high-probability low base state in which a time reduction game is executed in which the variation time of the main game symbols is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state.
<Effect of non-time reduction game state>
(1) Mainly, the game can be played on the second main game side.

<Decorative design (design for production)>
The decorative symbols are images that are controlled by the sub-control board S and suggest or notify the result of the winning lottery on the main game side, and have a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol. After starting the variation of the decorative pattern, it is temporarily stopped, and then fixedly stopped. In addition, it is configured to be capable of suggesting or notifying the result of the winning lottery on the main game side by the stop display mode (stop symbol) at the time of fixed stop.
<Effect of decorative pattern>
(1) It is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the game is in the process of changing, that the game is waiting for a change, and the result of the lottery.

<First decorative pattern (first production pattern)>
The first decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed so as to be easily visible to the player. It is a decorative pattern composed of image objects such as characters, symbols, and patterns. In addition, as a third element in the first decorative pattern, a color effect of the character-type image object itself (first element) such as a character-type image object, a color effect attached to the outside of the character-type image object, and a number image A color effect of the number image object itself such as an object (second element) or a color effect attached to the outside of the number image object may be provided. Furthermore, the first decorative pattern displays only the first element or the second element according to the game state (low probability low base state, high probability high base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state) It may be an aspect. In addition, depending on the game state, the aspect of each element may be configured to be different. For example, in the first decorative pattern of "7", in the low probability low base state, the image object of the lion facing the front ( 1st element), but in other game states (for example, high probability high base state or low probability high base state), it is a sideways lion image object (first element), or in a low probability low base state An image object of the number "7" (second element), but in other game states (for example, high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state), an image object of the Chinese character "seven" (second element) Or, in the low-probability-low base state, the "7" image object or the effect around the "7" image object is red (third element), but other game states (for example, high-probability-high base state or In the low-probability-high base state), the image object of "7" or the effect around the image object of "7" is gold (third element), and in the low-probability-low base state, the lion image object is yellow (third element ), but in other game states (for example, high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state), the lion image object may be gold (third element). Also, depending on the game state, the presence or absence of each element may be different. ), but does not have a lion image object (first element) in other gaming states (for example, high probability base state or low probability height base state) (that is, only the second element and the third element, or , only the second element), or in the low-probability-low base state, it has a color effect (third element) attached to the outside of the "7" image object or the character-type image object, but other game states ( For example, high probability high base state or low probability high base state) does not have a color effect (third element) attached to the outside of the “7” image object or character type image object (that is, the first element and the first element 2 elements only, or only the second element). It should be noted that, like the game state, it may be configured such that the mode and presence/absence of each element are different depending on the stage or mode.
<Effect of the first decorative pattern>
(1) The first decorative pattern can improve the interest of the production during fluctuation.
(2) The result of the game can be notified by stopping the display of the first decorative symbol.

<Second decorative pattern (second production pattern)>
The second decorative design is a decorative design that indicates that it is changing at all times or when the player is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative design or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative design, and is the first decorative design. A decorative pattern composed of image objects such as numbers (including Chinese numerals), alphabets, letters, symbols, and patterns that are the same or similar to the second element of the second element, and is smaller than the second element of the first decorative pattern ing. Although the second decorative pattern is composed only of the second element and does not include the first element or the third element, the second decorative pattern is the same as or similar to the first element of the first decorative pattern. However, a first element smaller than the first element of the first decorative pattern may be attached. Also, a third element that is the same as or similar to the third element of the first decorative pattern may be attached.
<Effect of second decorative pattern>
(1) In the case of constant display: The second decorative symbol can notify the result of the game by definitely stop-displaying it.
(2) When the first decorative design is difficult or invisible 1: When the first decorative design is definitely stopped and displayed, the second decorative design may also be definitely stopped and displayed, but the second decorative design is preferably displayed (temporary stop) only when it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative pattern or the first decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized without definitely stopping display. In this case, the game is played with this temporary stop display. can report the results of
(3) When the first decorative pattern is difficult to see or cannot be seen 2: The second decorative pattern is only variable display without temporary stop display and definite stop display, and the first decorative pattern is difficult or visible. Even if it is not possible, it is possible to clearly notify that it is changing.

<Pattern variation of the first decorative pattern>
The first decorative symbol is in a form that is temporally synchronized with the fluctuations of the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol), and is faster than the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The change is performed in the display area SG10 in an easily visible manner. In addition, the fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern or the start of the re-fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time is called an accelerated fluctuation, and the fluctuation after the elapse of the predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern or the start of the re-fluctuation is called high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation from high-speed fluctuation to temporary stop or definite stop is called deceleration fluctuation. In the case of high-speed fluctuation, the first decorative pattern is in a transparent state (for example, the transparency of the first decorative pattern is set to 50, which is semi-transparent out of 0 to 100, and is displayed behind the first decorative pattern. In addition, the background image of the production stage, which has a lower display priority than the first decorative symbol, can be visually recognized through the first decorative symbol). When fluctuating and decelerating fluctuating, the first decorative pattern is in a non-transmissive state (for example, the transparency of the first decorative pattern is set to 0, which is completely opaque from 0 to 100, and the first decorative pattern A background image of a performance stage displayed on the rear surface and having a lower display priority than the first decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized through the first decorative pattern), and the player can easily visually recognize the background image. During the above-described high-speed fluctuation period, the decorative pattern may be hidden, and in this case, it may be called a "non-display state" because it does not substantially fluctuate.
<Effect of design variation of the first decorative design>
(1) The first decorative symbol can make it easier for the player to recognize that it is changing.

<Pattern variation of the second decorative pattern>
The second decorative symbols fluctuate in synchronization with the fluctuations of the main game symbols (the first main game symbols, the second main game symbols) and the first decorative symbols. The second decorative symbols are variably displayed at a constant speed without acceleration or deceleration so that the player can confirm that the main game symbols and the first decorative symbols are always changing during the variation, and are displayed in a transparent state. However, similar to the first decorative pattern, acceleration fluctuation, high-speed fluctuation, and deceleration fluctuation may be performed, and it may be in a transparent state.
<Effect of design variation of the second decorative design>
(1) The second decorative pattern can clearly notify that the first decorative pattern is fluctuating even when it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize it, and the player can recognize that it is fluctuating. can be made easier.

<Main area>
The main area is a display area (first decorative design display area SG15) for displaying the first decorative design. The first decorative pattern is variably displayed or statically displayed within the main area.
<Effect of main area>
(1) A first decorative pattern can be displayed.
(2) It is possible to perform variable display rich in performance.

<Sub-area>
The sub-region is a display region (second decorative design display region SG14) for displaying the second decorative design. The second decorative pattern is variably displayed or statically displayed within the sub-region.
<Effect of sub-area>
(1) A second decorative pattern can be displayed.

<Waiting for change>
The variable waiting state is a state in which the main game symbols and the decorative symbols are not changed. During the fluctuation stop, it may also be referred to as a fluctuation stop state.
<Effects during variable standby>
(1) During variable standby, it is possible to notify that the game is not in progress.

<Standby movie (standby demo screen)>
The waiting movie is a display of a moving image showing the player that there is no change.
<Effect of standby movie>
(1) By displaying a waiting movie, it is possible to suggest that the table is empty and that a game can be played.

<Hold display>
The pending display is an image that is controlled by the sub-control board S and shows the number of variations that have not been executed on the main game side.
<Effect of pending display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the unchanged number.

<First hold display>
The first pending display is a pending display that is displayed so as to be easily recognized by the player.
<Effect of the first hold display>
(1) Players can perceive unchanging numbers.
(2) The possibility of winning can be suggested by changing the display mode of the first pending display.

<Second hold display>
The second reserved display is a reserved display which is displayed so as to be visible to the player at all times or when the player has difficulty in visually recognizing the first reserved display or when the player cannot visually recognize the first reserved display.
<Effect of second hold display>
(1) Players can perceive unchanging numbers.

<First reserved display area>
The first reserved display area SG12 is an area for displaying the first reserved display. A display indicating the upper limit number of the first pending display may be performed.
<Effect of the first reserved display area>
(1) A first pending display can be displayed.
(2) It is possible to display the upper limit number of the first pending display.

<Second reserved display area>
The second pending display area SG13 is an area for displaying the second pending display.
<Effect of second reserved display area>
(1) A second pending display can be displayed.

<Shift Display (Shift Animation)>
A shift display (shift animation) is a display of a moving image when moving the first pending display displayed when the number of pending is reduced.
<Effect of shift display (shift animation)>
(1) It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the number of reservations has decreased.

<Pending Occurrence Display (Pending Occurrence Animation)>
A pending occurrence display (a pending occurrence animation) is a display of a moving image when a new first pending display is displayed when the pending number increases.
<Effect of Occurrence Display (Pending Occurrence Animation)>
(1) It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the number of reservations has increased.

<Reservation display for production of the relevant fluctuation (reservation digestion transmission image, fluctuation corresponding image)>
The suspension display for effecting the variation is also referred to as a suspension digestion transmission image or a variation corresponding image, and is an image displayed when a certain suspension is digested.
<Effect of pending display for production of the change>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning with respect to fluctuations that are currently fluctuating.

<Reserved display area for effecting the change>
The suspension display area for effecting the change is an area for displaying an image to be displayed when a certain suspension is completed.
<Effect of the reserved display area for effecting the change>
(1) It is possible to display a pending display for effecting the change.
(2) It can be suggested that the pending display for effecting the change is displayed.

<Display Priority>
The display priority indicates the priority of the images and moving images displayed on the effect display device (the order in which they are displayed from the front side of the effect display device).
<Effect of display priority>
(1) When a plurality of images or moving images are displayed in an overlapping manner, it can be configured so that the player can easily see the images or moving images.

<Volume adjustment screen display>
The volume adjustment screen display is a screen display that indicates that the volume can be adjusted, and displays an image that indicates the currently set volume, the volume adjustment method, and the like.
<Effect of volume adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that volume adjustment is possible.
(2) A player can easily adjust the volume.

<Light intensity adjustment screen display>
The light amount adjustment screen display indicates that the light amount can be adjusted, and displays an image showing the currently set light amount, the light amount adjustment method, and the like.
<Effect of light intensity adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the amount of light can be adjusted.
(2) A player can easily adjust the amount of light.

<Stage (production stage)>
A stage (production stage) is also called a mode (production mode), and is a production mode indicated by a background image.
<Effect of stage (production stage)>
(1) Display corresponding to the stage (first decorative pattern, advance notice, etc.) can be performed.

<Concealment Mode (Concealment Stage)>
The latent mode (latent stage) is a production stage (production mode) in which it is unclear whether the game state is a variable probability game state or a non-variable probability game state.
<Effect of latent mode>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not it is in the probability variation gaming state.

<Tempai>
Tenpai is also known as reach or reach state, and the symbol rows other than the symbol row scheduled to be stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end among multiple symbol rows are the same decorative symbols, and are scheduled to be stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end. It is a state in which the symbol row of is fluctuating.
<Effect of Tenpai>
(1) If the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol stopped in another symbol row is stopped in one more symbol row, it can be indicated that it is a win.

<Reach production>
The ready-to-win effect is a effect that indicates the expected degree of winning of the variation, and is a effect that occurs mainly after tenpai. The reach effects include normal reach (normal reach effect), super reach (super reach effect, SP reach effect, SP reach effect, first half of super reach, latter half of super reach), and the like. Mainly, after reach is established before it develops into super reach (or, if it does not become super reach, all pattern rows are stopped (temporary stop) after reach is established) Normal reach is developed after reach is established The production is called super reach (also called post-reach development production).
<Effect of reach performance>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of hit expectation of the variation.

<Notice (notice display, production)>
The notice (notice display, production) is mainly to suggest the degree of expectation of the hit (big hit, small hit) of the change, but to suggest that there is a hit (big hit, small hit) in the hold ( For example, it may be used as a pre-reading notice, pre-reading effect, etc.).
<Effect of notice (notice display, effect)>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not the variation is a hit (big win, small win).
(2) It is possible to incite whether or not there is a hit (big hit, small hit) in the hold.

<Temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
Temporary stop (temporary stop display) means that the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and it appears that the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, but in fact, the decorative pattern is slightly moving (also called shaking fluctuation). is).
<Effect of temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
(1) It is possible to make it appear as if multiple variations are being performed.
(2) It is possible to influence whether or not to make a definite stop (in other words, whether to change again without making a definite stop, or whether to win without making a definite stop, etc.).

<Pseudo Ren>
Pseudo-run, which is also called re-fluctuation in a broad sense, is an effect that makes it appear that the decorative pattern is fluctuating multiple times in one fluctuation.
<Effect of pseudo-ream>
(1) It is possible to make it appear as if the decorative pattern is changing multiple times within one change.

<Pseudo-ream suggestion pattern>
The pseudo-run suggestive symbol is one of the special decorative symbols displayed when prompting whether or not a pseudo-run will occur.
<Effect of pseudo-ream suggestion pattern>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not a pseudo-run will occur.

<Pseudo consecutive (re-fluctuation) pattern>
The pseudo-run (re-fluctuation) symbol is one of the special decorative symbols indicating that a pseudo-run (re-fluctuation) will occur.
<Effect of pseudo consecutive (re-fluctuation) pattern>
(1) It is possible to deterministically notify the occurrence of pseudo-running (re-fluctuation).

<Development pattern>
The development pattern is one of the special decorative patterns indicating that the ready-to-win effect will occur.
<Effect of development pattern>
(1) It is possible to definitely notify that the ready-to-win effect will occur.

<Look-ahead performance>
The look-ahead effect is a effect that suggests that there is a hit (big hit, small hit) in the hold. On the condition that the trigger suspension has occurred (when it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect for the suspension that has occurred), the look-ahead effect is executed.
<Effect of look-ahead effect>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not there is a hit (big hit, small hit) in the hold.

<Trigger pending>
Trigger suspension is a suspension that triggered execution of a look-ahead effect (determined to perform a look-ahead effect for the suspension that has occurred).
<Effect of holding trigger>
(1) It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect.
(2) It is possible to suggest the possibility of a win (big win, small win) due to the variation of the pending trigger.

<Right shot instruction display>
The right-handed instruction display is based on the premise that the second main game start opening or the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the board surface, but is mainly displayed in the time-reduced game state, indicating that the right-handed instruction should be executed. is displayed.
<Effect of right-handed instruction display>
(1) In the time shortening game state, the player can be urged to hit to the right.

<Hitting method warning display (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display)>
The hitting warning display is a display that indicates the recommended hitting when the hitting is different from the recommended hitting in the current game state.
(1) It is possible to urge the player to perform a beating method corresponding to the game state.

<Default display>
The default display is a display mode determined in advance as an initial state.
<Effect of default display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the display is in the initial state.

<Effect display>
The effect display is a special effect displayed on the performance display device for the image itself, the movement of the character in the moving image, the movement of the movable accessory, and the like.
<Effect display effect>
(1) It is possible to emphasize the image itself, the motion of a character in a moving image, the motion of a movable accessory, and the like.

<Full rotation>
The full-rotation effect is a state in which the first decorative symbols or the second decorative symbols are scrolled at a low speed while the symbols are aligned.
<Effect of full-rotation production>
(1) It is possible to definitely notify that the variation will be a hit.

<Promotion performance>
The promotion production is a production that incites whether or not it is changed from a non-probability variation pattern to a probability variation pattern or whether it is changed from a low round per (for example, 4R per) to a high round per (for example, 10R per). It is a performance. A promotion performance can occur not only during fluctuation but also during a special game. The promotion effect that incites whether or not to change from a non-probable pattern to a probable pattern is called a probable promotion effect, and the promotion effect that incites whether or not a low round hit is changed to a high round hit is sometimes called a round promotion effect.
<Effect of promotion>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not the non-probability variation pattern is changed to the probability variation pattern.
(2) It is possible to incite whether or not to change from a low round hit to a high round hit.

<Reach Voice>
A reach voice is an announcement suggesting the degree of expectation of winning or the like by a sound generated when a reach is established or after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has passed since the reach is established.
<Effect of Reach Voice>
(1) When it becomes a reach, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning in combination with image display, movement of movable accessories, and the like.

<Action at start of fluctuation (operation at start)>
The first decorative pattern is a special pattern action (first element such as a character, second element such as a number, third element such as a color effect, etc.) , a combination of these or any one or more elements, compared to immediately before the start of fluctuation (at the time of display of stoppage of fluctuation), enlarges, shrinks, rotates, emits light, or adds one or more elements to any one or more elements Or, operation such as deleting one or more elements from a combination of a plurality of elements) can start pattern variation. And, the action at the start of fluctuation is action A at the start of fluctuation, action with a flashier pattern than action A at the start of fluctuation (the action execution time is long, the display area used in the action is large, the magnification is high, the rotation is There are multiple types such as action B at the start of fluctuation, which is fast, strong light emission, etc.), and it is better to have a pattern change with a high degree of expectation, such as pseudo-continuity or reach production, and normal low-expectation It is configured such that the action B at the start of variation is more likely to occur than the pattern variation. In other words, the action B at the start of fluctuation is configured as an action with a higher degree of expectation than the action A at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in the time shortening game state, it is preferable to start without an action at the start of fluctuation, but it may be accompanied with an action at the start of fluctuation. It is preferable to configure so that the possibility of an action at the start of variation is lower than in the non-time-reduced gaming state in order to proceed. In addition, when starting the pattern change that becomes a pseudo-continuation or reach effect, or when starting the normal pattern change of the losing before the trigger suspension of the look-ahead effect, the first decoration of the left column, the middle column, and the right column The pattern is configured to start fluctuation with an action at the start of the fluctuation, and in the normal pattern fluctuation of the losing pattern without the pseudo-running or the ready-to-win production, the pseudo-running fake, the ready-to-win production, or the losing pattern fluctuation without the look-ahead production. may be configured so as not to accompany the action at the start of variation when starting the symbol variation. As for the second decorative design, it is preferable not to execute the action at the time of starting the fluctuation, but the same action at the time of starting the fluctuation as for the first decorative design may be executed.
<Effect of action at the start of fluctuation (action at start)>
(1) The start timing of fluctuation can be clearly indicated by starting the fluctuation with the action at the start of fluctuation. In addition, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for winning or the like at the timing of the start of variation.

A specific example of adding one or more elements to any one or more elements as an action at the start of fluctuation is as follows.
(1) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed only of the first element, but when the fluctuation starts, the second element is added, and the first decorative pattern is composed of the first element and the second element. Executes the action at start of fluctuation.
(2) The first decorative design just before the start of fluctuation consists of only the first element, but when the fluctuation starts, the third element is added, and the first decorative design consists of the first element and the third element. Executes the action at start of fluctuation.
(3) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed only of the second element, but when the fluctuation starts, the first element is added, and the first decorative pattern is composed of the first element and the second element. Executes the action at start of fluctuation.
(4) The first decorative design immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed only of the second element, but when the fluctuation starts, the third element is added, and the first decorative design composed of the second element and the third element Executes the action at start of fluctuation.
(5) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the first element and the second element, but when the fluctuation starts, the third element is added, and the first element, the second element, and the third element Execute the action at the start of fluctuation with the first decorative pattern composed of.
(6) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the first element and the third element, but when the fluctuation starts, the second element is added, and the first element, the second element, and the third element Execute the action at the start of fluctuation with the first decorative pattern composed of.
(7) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the second element and the third element, but when the fluctuation starts, the first element is added, and the first element, the second element, and the third element. Execute the action at the start of fluctuation with the first decorative pattern composed of.
The above (1) to (7) may be actions at the start of fluctuation by all the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns, or any of the left, middle, and right columns. The action at the start of fluctuation may be by one column, or the action at the start of fluctuation may be by any two of the left, middle, and right columns.

As the action at the start of fluctuation, a third element such as a color effect may be used to execute a step-up presentation. For example, a blue color effect could be step up 1, a green color effect could be step up 2, a red color effect could be step up 3, and a gold color effect could be step up 4. Then, step-up 2, which is a green color effect, is a notice effect that suggests (notifies) reach or more, and step-up 3, which is a red color effect, is a notice effect that suggests (notifies) weak SP reach or more, It is also possible to make step-up 4, which is a gold color effect, an advance notice effect suggesting (informing) that SP reach or higher is achieved. In addition, by enlarging the pattern, it is possible to make an announcement effect suggesting (announcing) a long reach or more.

<Fixed position action (Fixed position operation)>
For any of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column, when the pattern variation is temporarily stopped after starting (at the timing of the temporary stop immediately after the temporary stop), a special Symbol actions can be executed. And the fixed position action is a fixed position action A, and a more flashy pattern action than the fixed position action A (action execution time is long, the display area used in the action is large, the magnification is high, the rotation is fast, the light is emitted There are multiple types such as fixed-position action B, which is strong, etc.), and high-expected pattern variations such as pseudo-runs and reach effects are better than low-expectation normal symbol variations that do not lead to pseudo-runs and reach effects. , and the fixed-position action B is configured to occur easily. That is, the fixed-position action B is configured as an action with a higher degree of expectation than the fixed-position action A. The fixed position action may be executed at a timing different from that of the action at the start of variation, and the action may be the same action as the action at the start of variation, or may be similar to or different from the action at the start of variation. In the case of an action different from the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action may be such that the first decorative pattern is enlarged at a lower position than the first decorative pattern of the action at the start of fluctuation and then returned to the upper position. Also, as for the fixed position action, different fixed position actions may be executed according to the pattern row of the first decorative pattern, or the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element , first element type, second element type). When performing a positional action corresponding to the type of the first decorative symbol (e.g., the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), if the first element is a lion , a lion performs a pounce action, and if the first element is a chick, the chick performs an action of waving both hands. Further, a fixed-position action dedicated to the chance look-ahead effect may be provided to be used when fixing and stopping the chance symbol combination in the chance look-ahead effect. An example of the fixed-position action dedicated to the look-ahead effect of the chance is to perform an action to make the first decorative pattern jump, and then perform an action to expand it. In addition, in the time reduction game state, it is preferable to temporarily stop without a fixed position action, but it may be accompanied by a fixed position action. It is preferable to configure so that the possibility of accompanying the fixed position action is lower than the non-time shortening game state. In addition, when temporarily stopping the first decorative pattern of the pattern fluctuation that becomes a pseudo-continuation or ready-to-win production, or when temporarily stopping the first decorative pattern in a losing pattern fluctuation before the trigger suspension of the look-ahead production, left column, right In the display area (fixed position display area) where the first decorative pattern of the row is temporarily stopped, it is configured to be temporarily stopped with a fixed position action, and pseudo-continuous and ready-to-win effects are not produced. The first decorative symbols in the left column and the right column may be configured so as not to be accompanied by the fixed position action in the normal pattern variation of the losing pattern which is not accompanied by the pattern variation of the losing pattern or the look-ahead effect. Although it is preferable not to execute the fixed position action for the second decorative pattern, the same fixed position action as for the first decorative pattern may be executed. In the pattern variation that becomes a pseudo run, when the first decorative symbols in the middle row temporarily stop and then change again, the first decorative symbols in the middle row may also perform the fixed position action in the fixed position display area. .
<Effect of fixed position action (fixed position operation)>
(1) Temporary stop timing can be clearly indicated by temporarily stopping the first decorative symbol with a fixed position action. In addition, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning and the like.

<Shaking action (shaking motion)>
The first decorative symbol can execute a swing action, which is a special symbol action, during symbol fluctuation or during a fluctuation standby state (fixed stop state). A state in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped and neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held is referred to as a variable standby state. For example, if the pattern is fluctuating, the shaking action (also referred to as shaking fluctuation) is executed after the first decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped, and if the fluctuation is in the standby state, the left row, A shaking action is executed when a predetermined time elapses after the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are fixed and stopped. The shaking action may be executed at a different timing than the action at the start of fluctuation and the fixed position action, and the action may be the same action as the action at the start of fluctuation and the fixed position action, or may be a similar action, or a different action. It's okay. Further, the shaking action may be different depending on the pattern row of the first decorative pattern, or the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the first It may be configured to perform an action corresponding to a two-factor type). When executing a shaking action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), if the first element is a lion, An example would be a lion performing a head bobbing action, and if the first element is a chick, the chick would perform a head bobbing action. Further, the shaking action during the super ready-to-win production or the battle ready-to-win production may be configured to be different from the shaking action during the normal ready-to-win production. For example, the shaking action during the Super Reach production and the Battle Reach production has a smaller first decorative pattern than the shaking action during the Normal Reach production, and the first element is erased and the shaking action is performed with only the second element. , the width of the swing is small, and the swing motion is slow (the period of one swing is longer than in the normal ready-to-win effect). In addition, although it is preferable not to execute the shaking action for the second decorative design, the same shaking action as for the first decorative design may be executed. In addition, in the state before the temporary stop, that is, the acceleration fluctuation, the high speed fluctuation, and the deceleration fluctuation, this shaking action is not accompanied (the fluctuation display is performed without performing any pattern action). In addition, in the time shortening game state, the swing action is executed during the pattern fluctuation, but the swing action is not executed during the variable standby state (determined stop state). In addition, the shaking action includes shaking action A and shaking action B, which is a flashier pattern action than shaking action A (the display area used in the action is large, the magnification is high, the rotation is fast, the light is strong, etc.). A plurality of types may be provided. In the case of such a configuration, pattern changes with high expectations such as pattern changes with a large number of pseudo-runs and super reach effects are better than pattern changes with low expectations such as pattern changes with a small number of pseudo-runs and normal reach effects. It is configured such that the shaking action B is more likely to occur than the fluctuation. That is, swing action B is configured as an action with a higher degree of expectation than swing action A.
<Effect of shaking action>
(1) By executing the shaking action, it is possible to indicate that the game is temporarily stopped, in other words, that the game is in a state before the fixed stop (a situation in which it is not yet decided whether the game is a hit or a loss). In addition, the effect for the first decorative symbol can be executed not only during the variation but also after the fixed stop.

<Tenpai action (special action)>
The first decorative pattern is the first temporarily stopped first decorative pattern (for example, the first decorative pattern in the left column) and the second temporarily stopped first decorative pattern (for example, the first decorative pattern in the right column), or When the first decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped at the same time (for example, the first decorative symbol in the left row and the first decorative symbol in the right row) are the same symbol Tenpai (a state in which a reach state is formed), a special symbol action You can perform a tenpai action. A tenpai action can be executed at a different timing than an action at the start of a change, a fixed position action, or a swing action, and the action can be the same action as the action at the start of a change, a fixed position action, or a swing action, or a similar action. or a different action. As for the tenpai action, different tenpai actions may be executed according to the pattern row of the first decorative pattern, or the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first 1 element type, 2nd element type, etc.). When executing a tenpai action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), if the first element is a lion, An example might be a lion performing a roaring action, and if the first element is a chick, the chick performs an action of blowing off the upper and lower shells. Also, in the time reduction game state, it is preferable to execute the tenpai action when the tenpai (the state in which the ready-to-win state is formed) is performed, but the tenpai action does not have to be executed. Here, in the case of configuring so as to execute the tenpai action when tenpai (a state in which the ready-to-win state is formed) is performed in the time-reduced gaming state, when tenpai (a state in which the ready-to-reach state is formed) is performed in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the tenpai It is preferable to configure so that the possibility of accompanying the tenpai action when tenpai (a state in which the reach state is formed) is lower than when the action is executed. In addition, Tenpai Action is a flashier pattern action than Tenpai Action A and Tenpai Action A. ) may be provided. In the case of such a configuration, pattern changes with high expectations such as pattern changes with a large number of pseudo-runs and super reach effects are better than pattern changes with low expectations such as pattern changes with a small number of pseudo-runs and normal reach effects. It is configured such that tenpai action B is more likely to occur than variation. In other words, the tenpai action B is configured as an action with a higher degree of expectation than the tenpai action A. As for the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to perform the tenpai action during the fluctuation, but the same tenpai action as the first decorative symbol may be performed.
<Effect of Tenpai Action (special action)>
(1) It is possible to highlight the type of the tened first decorative pattern to the player.

<Decisive Action (Decisive Action)>
The first decorative pattern is a special special pattern by the first decorative pattern of the left row, middle row, and right row when displaying the hit (big hit, small hit) pattern via the reach production (normal reach production, super reach production, etc.) A deciding action, which is a pattern action, can be executed. The decision action can be executed at a different timing than the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action, the swing action, and the tenpai action. It can be similar actions or different actions. Also, in the time shortening game state, it is preferable to execute the deciding action, but it is not necessary to execute the deciding action. Here, in the case of performing a decision action when displaying a hit (big win, small win) pattern via a reach performance (normal reach performance, super reach performance, etc.) in the time reduction game state, non-time reduction In the game state, the reach performance (normal reach performance, super reach performance, etc.) is higher than the case of executing the decision action when displaying the hit (big hit, small win) pattern via the reach performance (normal reach performance, super reach performance, etc.) ) to display the winning (big win, small win) symbols through the ), it is preferable to reduce the possibility of the decision action being involved. In addition, the decisive action is a decisive action A, and a flashier pattern action than the decisive action A (action execution time is long, the display area used in the action is large, the magnification is high, the rotation is fast, the light emission is strong, etc. ) may be provided. When configured in this way, it corresponds to a symbol combination (or a special game with a relatively large number of rounds) that shifts to a probability variable game state or a time reduction game state after a hit (big hit, small hit) such as "777" In the case of stopping display with a symbol combination that does), the symbol combination (or the number of rounds is The decision action B is more likely to occur than in the case of stop display with a symbol combination corresponding to a relatively small number of special games. Also, in a pattern combination (or a pattern combination corresponding to a special game with a relatively large number of rounds) that shifts to a probability variable game state or a time reduction game state after a hit (big hit, small hit) such as "777" In the case of stop display, a decision action occurs, but after a hit (big hit, small hit) such as "222", a symbol combination that shifts to a non-probability variable game state or a non-time reduction game state (or if the number of rounds is It may be configured so that the decision action does not occur when the symbol combination corresponding to a relatively small number of special games is stopped and displayed. Although it is preferable not to execute the deciding action for the second decorative pattern, the deciding action similar to that for the first decorative pattern may be executed.
<Effect of decision action (decision action)>
(1) Winning (big win, minor win) When displaying symbols, it is possible to highlight to the player that a win (big win, minor win) will occur.

FIG. 41 shows the configuration of the variation mode determination table T0 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the normal mode in the non-time reduction game state (low probability/low base state). It is a diagram. The variation mode determination table T0 is a table used in a non-reduced time gaming state (low probability/low base state), and variation mode numbers (variation pattern numbers) 1 to 19 are used when the first main game pattern is lost. It is a variation pattern, variation mode numbers (variation pattern numbers) 22 and 23 are variation patterns used when the second main game pattern is lost, and variation mode numbers (variation pattern numbers) 35 to 97 are the first. It is a variation pattern used at the time of the small hit of the main game symbol, and the variation mode numbers (variation pattern numbers) 99 and 101 are the variation patterns used at the time of the second main game symbol hit.

Variation pattern number 1 is a variation mode showing super shortened variation with a variation time of 3 seconds, and the selection ratio is 0 when there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side. If there is one hold on the first main game side and there is no hold on the second main game side, the selection rate is 0, and there are two holds on the first main game side and the second main game side. The selection ratio is 2679/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the game side, and there are three holds on the first main game side, and the second main game symbol is The selection ratio is 37429/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the game side.

Variation pattern number 2 is a variation mode showing super shortened variation with a variation time of 7 seconds, and the selection ratio is 0 when there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side. If there is one hold on the first main game side and there is no hold on the second main game side, the selection rate is 0, and there are two holds on the first main game side and the second main game side. The selection ratio is 34000/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no reserve on the game side, and there are three reserves on the first main game side and the second main game symbol The selection ratio is 0 when there is no hold on the game side.

Variation pattern number 3 is a variation mode showing normal variation A with a variation time of 14 seconds, and the first main game in a situation where there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side. The first main game in a situation where the selection ratio is 34679/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied, there is one hold on the first main game side and there is no hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio is 35179/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the selection ratio is 0 when there are two reservations on the first main game side and no reservations on the second main game side, The selection ratio is 0 when there are three reservations on the first main game side and no reservations on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 4 is a variation mode showing a normal variation B with a variation time of 14 seconds, and the first main game in a situation where there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side. The first main game in a situation where the selection ratio is 2500/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied, there is one hold on the first main game side and there is no hold on the second main game side. The first main game in a situation where the selection ratio is 2500/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied, there are two reserves on the first main game side and there is no reserve on the second main game side. The first main game in a situation where the selection ratio is 1250/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and there are three reserves on the first main game side and no reserves on the second main game side. The selection ratio is 625/50000 when the symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied.

Variation pattern number 5 is a variation mode showing a normal variation C with a variation time of 14 seconds, and the first main game in a situation where there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side. The first main game in a situation where the selection ratio is 1000/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied, there is one hold on the first main game side and there is no hold on the second main game side. The first main game in a situation where the selection ratio is 500/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied, there are two reserves on the first main game side and there is no reserve on the second main game side. The first main game in a situation where the selection ratio is 250/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and there are three reserves on the first main game side and no reserves on the second main game side. The selection ratio is 125/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied.

Variation pattern number 6 is a variation mode showing a normal variation D with a variation time of 14 seconds, and the selection ratio is 0 in a situation where there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side. , the selection ratio is 0 in the situation where there is one hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and there are two holds on the first main game side and the second The selection ratio is 0 in a situation where there is no hold on the second main game side, and the first in a situation where there are three holds on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio is 500/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the main game symbols is satisfied.

Variation pattern number 7 is a variation mode showing a normal variation E with a variation time of 14 seconds, and the selection rate is 0 in a situation where there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side. , the selection ratio is 0 in the situation where there is one hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and there are two holds on the first main game side and the second 2. In the situation where there is no hold on the main game side, the selection ratio is 1000/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the 1st main game pattern is satisfied, and there are 3 holds on the 1st main game side. The selection ratio is 1250/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there is no hold on the side of the second main game.

Variation pattern number 8 is a variation mode showing a normal variation F with a variation time of 14 seconds, and the first main game in a situation where there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side. The first main game in a situation where the selection ratio is 5000/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied, there is one hold on the first main game side and there is no hold on the second main game side. The first main game in a situation where the selection ratio is 5000/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied, there are two reserves on the first main game side and there is no reserve on the second main game side. The first main game in a situation where the selection ratio is 4000/50000 when the pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and there are three reserves on the first main game side and no reserves on the second main game side. The selection ratio is 3250/50000 when the symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied.

Variation pattern number 9 is a variation mode showing normal reach-4 with a variation time of 17 seconds. It is a variation mode in which normal reach is executed in a tense state, and then the first decorative pattern in the middle row is determined and stopped at a pattern with a figure smaller by 4 than the first decorative symbols in the left and right rows. The selection ratio is 1500/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 10 is a variation mode showing normal reach-1 with a variation time of 20 seconds, and after a predetermined time has passed since the pattern variation was started, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are changed. It is a variation mode in which normal reach is executed in a tense state, and then the first decorative pattern in the middle row is determined and stopped at a pattern with a number smaller by 1 than the numbers indicated by the first decorative patterns in the left and right rows. The selection ratio is 800/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbols is satisfied in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side.

The variation pattern numbers 11 to 16 are variation modes showing normal reach + 1 with a variation time of 22 seconds, and after a predetermined time has passed since the pattern variation was started, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column. is in a tense state and normal reach is executed, and then the first decorative pattern in the middle row is determined and stopped at a pattern with a number larger by one than the first decorative patterns in the left and right rows. The selection ratio is 1815/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side.

Variation pattern numbers 17 to 19 are variation modes showing a weak SP reach A with a variation time of 55 seconds. It is a variation mode in which the decoration pattern becomes a tenpai state and a normal reach is executed, then it develops into a weak SP reach A, and is fixed and stopped in a mode indicating a loss. The selection ratio is 2706/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbols is satisfied in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side.

The variation pattern number 22 is a variation mode of normal variation showing the second variation and after with a variation time of 34 seconds, and before the final symbol variation such as "summary variation" after the time shortening game state is completed. This is the variation mode of the second main game symbols used in the symbol variation. The selection ratio is 0 in a situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, and a second main game symbol in a situation where there is one hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 50000/50000, and the selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied in the situation where there are two reservations on the second main game side 50000/50000, and the selection ratio is 50000/50000 when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in a situation where there are three reserves on the second main game side.

The variation pattern number 23 is a variation mode of normal variation showing the final variation with a variation time of 40 seconds, and is the second variation used in the final symbol variation such as "summary variation" after the time shortening game state is completed. It is a variation mode of the main game pattern. In the situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, the selection ratio when the second main game symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 50000/50000, and the second main game side The selection ratio is 0 when there is one hold, the selection ratio is 0 when there are two holds on the second main game side, and there are three holds on the second main game side. The selection ratio is 0 in the situation where

Variation pattern numbers 35 to 45 are variation modes showing SP reach M battle from weak SP reach with variation time of 121 seconds. The first decorative pattern in the row is in a tenpai state and normal reach is executed, then it develops to weak SP reach, further develops from weak SP reach to SP reach M battle, and then fixed and stopped in a small hit mode. This is a variation mode in which the first main game symbol is fixed and stopped at the 1st_4R symbol 1. The selection ratio is 48000/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side.

Variation pattern numbers 46 to 53 are variations in which a weak SP reach with a variation time of 127 seconds, an SP reach M battle, and a chance-up effect are executed once, and the left column after a predetermined time has elapsed since the pattern variation was started. The first decorative pattern of and the first decorative pattern of the right column become tenpai state and execute normal reach, then develop into weak SP reach, further develop from weak SP reach into SP reach M battle and then chance up It is a variation mode in which the effect is executed once and fixed and stopped in a small win mode, and the first main game symbol is a variation mode in which the first main game symbol is fixed and stopped at any of the 1_4R symbol 2, 1_4R symbol 4, and 1_4R symbol 5. . The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 2 has a selection ratio of 48000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 4 has a selection ratio of 14557/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 5 has a selection ratio of 15983/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side.

Variation pattern numbers 54 to 77 are variations in which a weak SP reach with a variation time of 133 seconds, an SP reach M battle, and a chance-up effect are executed twice, and the left column after a predetermined time has elapsed since the pattern variation was started. The first decorative pattern of and the first decorative pattern of the right column become tenpai state and execute normal reach, then develop into weak SP reach, further develop from weak SP reach into SP reach M battle and then chance up It is a variation mode in which the effect is executed twice and fixed and stopped in a small win mode, and the first main game symbol is a variation mode in which the first main game symbol is fixed and stopped at any of the 1_4R symbol 3, 1_4R symbol 4, and 1_4R symbol 5. . The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 3 has a selection ratio of 48000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 4 has a selection ratio of 13609/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 5 has a selection ratio of 13609/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side.

Variation pattern numbers 78 to 93 are variations in which a weak SP reach with a variation time of 133 seconds, an SP reach M battle, and a chance-up effect are executed twice, and the left column after a predetermined time has elapsed after the pattern variation is started. The first decorative pattern of and the first decorative pattern of the right column become tenpai state and execute normal reach, then develop into weak SP reach, further develop from weak SP reach into SP reach M battle and then chance up It is a variation mode in which the effect is executed twice and fixed and stopped in a small hit mode, and the first main game symbol is a variable mode in which the first main game symbol is fixed and stopped at either the 1_4R symbol 4 or the 1_4R symbol 5. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 4 has a selection ratio of 19438/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 5 has a selection ratio of 18077/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side.

The variation pattern number 94 is a variation mode in which a weak SP reach with a variation time of 127 seconds, an SP reach M battle, and a chance-up effect are executed once, and after a predetermined time has elapsed after the pattern variation is started, the left column is displayed. 1 decorative pattern and the first decorative pattern in the right column are in a tense state and execute normal reach, then develop into weak SP reach, further develop from weak SP reach to SP reach M battle, and then create a chance up effect. It is a variation mode in which the first main game symbol is determined and stopped in either the 4th 1_4R symbol or the 5th 1_4R symbol. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 4 has a selection ratio of 196/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 5 has a selection ratio of 150/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side.

The variation pattern number 95 is a variation mode in which a weak SP reach with a variation time of 133 seconds, an SP reach M battle, and a chance-up effect are executed twice, and after a predetermined time has passed since the pattern variation is started, the left column is displayed. 1 decorative pattern and the 1st decorative pattern in the right column become tenpai state and execute normal reach, then develop into weak SP reach, further develop from weak SP reach into SP reach M battle, and then perform chance up production It is a variation mode in which the first main game symbol is fixed and stopped in either the 4th 1_4R symbol or the 5th 1_4R symbol. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 4 has a selection ratio of 200/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbol 5 has a selection ratio of 181/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side.

The variation pattern number 96 is a variation mode in which a notice performance with a variation time of 133 seconds is executed and then the SP ready-to-win MS is executed. It is a variation mode in which the first main game symbol is fixed and stopped in any of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5 after developing into SP reach MS. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5 has a selection ratio of 1000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. .

Variation pattern number 97 is a variation mode in which long reach with a variation time of 133 seconds is executed and then M chance is executed. It is a variation mode in which the first main game symbol is fixed and stopped in any of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5 after developing into a chance. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5 has a selection ratio of 1000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. .

The variation pattern number 99 is a variation mode in which the variation time is 43 seconds and is a small hit after the second variation. It is a variation mode of the main game pattern. 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern 2 The selection ratio is 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 2 main game symbols is satisfied.

The variation pattern number 101 is a variation mode in which a super M chance small hit is obtained after the second variation with a variation time of 58 seconds, and is used in symbol variation such as "summary variation" after the time shortening game state is completed. It is a variation mode of the second main game symbol to be played. 2_10R symbol 3, 2_10R symbol 4, 2_10R symbol 5, 2_10R symbol 6, and 2_10R symbol 7 have a selection ratio of 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. It's becoming

The weak SP reach, which is a variation mode of variation mode numbers 17 to 19, is set so as not to be a variation mode in which a small hit is determined. The variation pattern of the sub-control unit corresponding to the weak SP reach, which is the variation mode of variation mode numbers 17 to 19, also corresponds to the weak SP reach, and is a reach using a character, SP reach (especially, SP reach M It is a reach that will be an opportunity for development to battle). It should be noted that the variation mode determination table T0 is a table used in the non-time shortened gaming state (low probability low base state), but may be used in the limited frequency state.

FIG. 42 is a configuration diagram of a variation mode determination table T1 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side of the RUSH1 mode in the time reduction game state (low probability base state). is. The variation mode determination table T1 is a table used only in the first variation of RUSH1 in the time shortening game state (low probability base state). The variation mode determination table T1 is a table used in a limited frequency state.

Variation pattern number 20 is a variation mode showing the first variation normal variation with a variation time of 14 seconds, and in RUSH1 in the time shortened gaming state (low probability high base state) after the special game is completed, the second main This is a variation mode of the normal variation of losing selected when the variation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in a state where there is no hold on the game side. The selection ratio is 50000/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 21 is a variation mode of loss indicating the first variation (SP reach) with a variation time of 68 seconds, and in RUSH1 in the time shortened gaming state (low probability high base state) after the special game ends , is a variation mode of the SP reach of the lost selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. The selection ratio is 50000/50000 in a situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, and a second main game in a situation where there is one hold on the second main game side The selection ratio when the game pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 50000/50000, and the selection when the second main game pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied in the situation where there are two reserves on the second main game side. The ratio is 50000/50000, and the selection ratio is 50000/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there are three reservations on the second main game side.

The variation pattern number 102 is a variation mode in which the variation time is 26 seconds to execute a super M chance, and in RUSH1 in the time-reduced game state (low-probability-high base state) after the special game is finished, the second main game. It is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied and a small win is won in a state where there is no holding on the side. This variation mode is a variation mode in which super M chance is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the symbol variation is started, and then fixed and stopped in a small hit mode, and the first main game symbol is the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5. It is a variation mode in which the determination stops at either one. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5 has a selection ratio of 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. .

The variation pattern number 98 is a variation mode in which the first variation with a variation time of 77 seconds is a small hit, and in RUSH1 in the time shortening game state (low probability high base state) after the special game is completed, the second This is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the main game symbols is satisfied and when a small win for executing a direct V effect is won. 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern 2 The selection ratio is 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 2 main game symbols is satisfied.

Variation pattern number 100 is a variation mode in which the variation time is 73 seconds and the first variation is a small hit of super M chance, and RUSH 1 in the time shortening game state (low probability high base state) after the special game is completed. , this is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbols is satisfied and a small win for executing the V challenge effect is won. 2_10R symbol 3, 2_10R symbol 4, 2_10R symbol 5, 2_10R symbol 6, and 2_10R symbol 7 have a selection ratio of 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. It's becoming

FIG. 43 is a configuration diagram of the variation mode determination table T2 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side of the RUSH2 mode in the time reduction game state (low probability base state) is. The variation mode determination table T2 is a table used in the first variation to the ninth variation of RUSH2 in the time shortening gaming state (low probability height base state). The variation mode determination table T2 is a table used in a limited frequency state.

Variation pattern number 20 is a variation mode showing normal variation with a variation time of 14 seconds, and in RUSH2 in the time-reduced game state (low probability base state) after the special game ends, the second main game side This is a variation mode of the normal variation of losing selected when the variation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in a state where there is no hold. The selection ratio is 50000/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 24 is a variation mode of loss indicating a shortened variation with a variation time of 9 seconds, and in RUSH2 in the time shortened game state (low probability high base state) after the special game ends, the second main game It is a variation mode of a loss shortening variation selected when the symbol variation start condition is satisfied. The selection ratio is 1/50000 in a situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, and a second main game in a situation where there is one hold on the second main game side 1/50000 selection rate when the game symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and selection when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in a situation where there are two reserves on the second main game side. The ratio is 1/50000, and the selection ratio is 1/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there are 3 reservations on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 25 is a variation mode of loss indicating normal variation with a variation time of 14 seconds, and in RUSH2 in the time shortened game state (low probability high base state) after the special game ends, the second main game It is a variation mode of the normal variation of the loss selected when the symbol variation start condition is satisfied. The selection ratio is 5000/50000 in the situation where there is neither hold on the second main game side nor hold on the first main game side, and the second main game in the situation where there is one hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio when the game symbol variation start condition is satisfied is 5000/50000, and the selection when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in the situation where there are two reserves on the second main game side. The ratio is 5000/50000, and the selection ratio is 5000/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied in the situation where there are three reservations on the second main game side.

Variation pattern numbers 26 to 28 are a variation mode of losing showing reach swing variation with a variation time of 20 seconds. It is a variation mode of reach swing variation of loss selected when the variation start condition of the 2 main game symbols is satisfied. The selection ratio is 7499/50000 in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side nor the hold on the first main game side, and the second main game in the situation where there is one hold on the second main game side The selection ratio when the game pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 7499/50000, and the selection when the second main game pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied in the situation where there are two reserves on the second main game side. The ratio is 7499/50000, and the selection ratio is 7499/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there are three reservations on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 29 is a variation mode of loss indicating SP reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 50 seconds, and in RUSH2 in the time shortened gaming state (low probability high base state) after the special game is completed, 2 This is a variation mode of the SP reach of the lost selected when the variation start condition of the main game pattern is satisfied. The selection ratio is 32500/50000 in a situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, and a second main game in a situation where there is one hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio when the game pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 32500/50000, and the selection when the second main game pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied in the situation where there are two reserves on the second main game side. The ratio is 32500/50000, and the selection ratio is 32500/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there are three reservations on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 30 is a variation mode of losing showing a battle reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 58 seconds, and in RUSH2 in the time shortened gaming state (low probability high base state) after the special game ends, 2 This is a variation mode of the lost battle reach selected when the variation start condition of the main game symbols is satisfied. The selection ratio is 5000/50000 in the situation where there is neither hold on the second main game side nor hold on the first main game side, and the second main game in the situation where there is one hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio when the game symbol variation start condition is satisfied is 5000/50000, and the selection when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in the situation where there are two reserves on the second main game side. The ratio is 5000/50000, and the selection ratio is 5000/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied in the situation where there are three reservations on the second main game side.

Variation pattern numbers 115 to 120 are variations in which a super M chance is executed with a variation time of 43 seconds, and in RUSH2 in the time shortened gaming state (low probability high base state) after the special game is completed, the second This is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied and a small win is won in a state where there is no hold on the main game side. This variation mode is a variation mode in which a super M chance is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the symbol variation is started, and then fixed and stopped in a small hit mode, and the first main game symbol is the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5. It is a variation mode in which the determination stops at any one of them. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5 has a selection ratio of 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. .

Variation pattern number 103 is a variation mode in which the variation time is a small hit of SP reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 52 seconds, and in RUSH2 in the time shortened gaming state (low probability high base state) after the special game is completed, This is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied and when a small win for executing a non-rank-up direct V effect is won. It is a variation mode in which the 2_10R symbol 2 is determined as a small winning symbol. The variation mode of the 2_10R symbol 2 has a selection ratio of 1334/50000 when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied.

Variation pattern numbers 104 to 109 are variation modes in which SP reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 52 seconds is a small hit, and RUSH2 in the time-reduced gaming state (low-probability base state) after the special game is completed. , this is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied and a small win for executing a direct V effect is won. 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1 The variation mode of the second main game pattern The selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 43869/50000. The variation mode of the 2_10R symbol 2 has a selection ratio of 42535/50000 when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied.

Variation pattern numbers 110 to 114 are variation modes in which a battle reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 64 seconds is hit, and RUSH2 in a time-reduced gaming state (low-probability base state) after the special game is completed. , this is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied and a small win for executing a direct V effect is won. 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern 2 The selection ratio is 6131/50000 when the variation start condition of the 2 main game symbols is satisfied.

The variation pattern numbers 115 to 120 are variation modes in which the variation time is 43 seconds, and the super M chance hit is a small hit. This is a variation mode selected when the condition for starting variation of the second main game symbols is satisfied and a small win for executing the V-challenge effect is won. 2_10R symbol 3, 2_10R symbol 4, 2_10R symbol 5, 2_10R symbol 6, and 2_10R symbol 7 have a selection ratio of 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. It's becoming

FIG. 44 is a configuration diagram of the variation mode determination table T3 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side of the RUSH2 mode in the time reduction game state (low probability base state) is. The variation mode determination table T3 is a table used only in the 10th variation of RUSH2 in the time shortening gaming state (low probability height base state). The variation mode determination table T3 is a table used in a limited frequency state.

Variation pattern number 20 is a variation mode showing normal variation with a variation time of 14 seconds, and in the 10th variation of RUSH2 in the time shortened gaming state (low probability high base state) after the special game is completed, the second This is a variation mode of the normal variation of losing selected when the variation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in a state where there is no hold on the main game side. The selection ratio is 50000/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 29 is a variation mode of loss indicating SP reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 50 seconds, and 10 variations of RUSH2 in the time shortened gaming state (low probability high base state) after the special game is completed. In the eye, it is a variation mode of the SP reach of losing selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. The selection ratio is 32500/50000 in a situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, and a second main game in a situation where there is one hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio when the game symbol variation start condition is satisfied is 32500/50000, and the selection when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in a situation where there are two reserves on the second main game side. The ratio is 32500/50000, and the selection ratio is 32500/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there are three reserves on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 30 is a variation mode of losing showing a battle reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 58 seconds, and 10 variations of RUSH2 in the time shortened gaming state (low probability high base state) after the special game ends This is the variation mode of the losing battle reach selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. The selection ratio is 17500/50000 in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side nor the hold on the first main game side, and the second main game in the situation where there is one hold on the second main game side The selection ratio when the game pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 17500/50000, and the selection when the second main game pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied in the situation where there are two reserves on the second main game side. The ratio is 17,500/50,000, and the selection ratio is 17,500/50,000 when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbols is satisfied in a situation where there are three reservations on the second main game side.

Variation pattern numbers 115 to 120 are variation modes for executing a super M chance with a variation time of 43 seconds, and the 10th variation of RUSH2 in the time-reduced gaming state (low probability high base state) after the special game ends , in a state where there is no hold on the side of the second main game, it is a variation mode selected when the condition for starting variation of the first main game symbols is satisfied and a small win is won. It is a variation mode in which super M chance is executed after a predetermined time elapses from the start of symbol variation and then fixed and stopped in a small win mode, and the first main game symbol is fixed and stopped when any of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5. It is a variation mode to do. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5 has a selection ratio of 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. .

Variation pattern number 103 is a variation mode in which the variation time is a small hit of SP reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 52 seconds, and 10 of RUSH2 in the time shortening game state (low probability high base state) after the special game is completed This is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied and a small win for executing a non-rank-up direct V effect is won in the variation eye. It is a variation mode in which the 2_10R symbol 2 is determined as a small winning symbol. The variation mode of the 2_10R symbol 2 has a selection ratio of 1334/50000 when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied.

Variation pattern numbers 104 to 109 are variation modes in which SP reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 52 seconds is a small hit, and RUSH2 in the time-reduced gaming state (low-probability base state) after the special game is completed. 10th variation, it is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied and a small win for executing a direct V effect is won. 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1 The variation mode of the second main game pattern The selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 43869/50000. The variation mode of the 2_10R symbol 2 has a selection ratio of 42535/50000 when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied.

Variation pattern numbers 111 to 114 are variation modes in which the variation time is 64 seconds of battle reach (RUSH) with a small hit, and RUSH2 in the time-reduced gaming state (low-probability base state) after the special game is completed. 10th variation, it is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied and a small win for executing a direct V effect is won. 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern 2 The selection ratio is 6131/50000 when the variation start condition of the 2 main game symbols is satisfied.

Variation pattern numbers 115 to 120 are variation modes in which the variation time is 43 seconds and a small hit of super M chance, and 10 of RUSH2 in the time shortened gaming state (low probability high base state) after the special game ends This is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied and a small win for executing the V challenge effect is won in the variation eye. The variation mode of 2_10R symbol 3, 2_10R symbol 4, 2_10R symbol 5, 2_10R symbol 6, and 2_10R symbol 7 has a selection ratio of 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 2nd main game symbol is satisfied. It's becoming

FIG. 45 shows the configuration of the variation mode determination table T4 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side of the RUSH2 mode in the non-time shortening game state (low probability/low base state). It is a diagram. The variation mode determination table T4 is a table used in the 11th to 14th variations of RUSH2 in the non-time shortened gaming state (low probability low base state) after the time shortening gaming state (low probability high base state) ends It has become. The variation mode determination table T4 is a table used in a limited frequency state.

Variation pattern number 20 is a variation mode showing normal variation with a variation time of 14 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low-probability-low base state) after the time-reduction gaming state (low-probability-high base state) ends In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2, in the state where there is no hold on the second main game side, the fluctuation mode of the normal fluctuation of the loss selected when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern is satisfied be. The selection ratio is 50000/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 24 is a variation mode of loss indicating a shortened variation with a variation time of 9 seconds, and a non-time shortened gaming state (low probability low base) after the time shortening gaming state (low probability high base state) ends State) in the 11th to 14th variations of RUSH2, this is the variation mode of the shortened variation of loss selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. The selection ratio is 0 in a situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, and a second main game symbol in a situation where there is one hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio is 1/50000 when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and the selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied in the situation where there are two reservations on the second main game side 1/50000, and the selection ratio when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in a situation where there are three reservations on the second main game side is 1/50000.

Variation pattern number 25 is a variation mode of loss indicating normal variation with a variation time of 14 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low-probability-based base state) after the time-reduced gaming state (low-probability-high base state) ends State) in the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2, this is the fluctuation mode of the normal fluctuation of loss selected when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. The selection ratio is 0 in a situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, and a second main game symbol in a situation where there is one hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 7499/50000, and the selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there are two reservations on the second main game side 7499/50000, and the selection ratio is 7499/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there are 3 reservations on the second main game side.

Variation pattern numbers 26 to 28 are a variation mode of loss indicating a reach swing variation with a variation time of 20 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2 in the probability low base state), it is the fluctuation mode of the reach swing of losing selected when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied. The selection ratio is 0 in a situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, and a second main game symbol in a situation where there is one hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 7000/50000, and the selection ratio is 7000/50000, and the selection ratio is 7000/50000 when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in a situation where there are three reserves on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 29 is a variation mode of loss indicating SP reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 50 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2 in the probability low base state), it is the fluctuation mode of SP reach of losing selected when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied. The selection ratio is 0 in a situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, and a second main game symbol in a situation where there is one hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 32500/50000, and the selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there are two reservations on the second main game side 32500/50000, and the selection ratio is 32500/50000 when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in a situation where there are three reserves on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 30 is a variation mode of loss indicating battle reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 58 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2 in the low probability base state), it is the fluctuation mode of the lost battle reach selected when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied. The selection ratio is 0 in a situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, and a second main game symbol in a situation where there is one hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 5000/50000, and the selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition of the 2nd main game pattern is satisfied in the situation where there are 2 reservations on the 2nd main game side 5000/50000, and the selection ratio is 5000/50000 when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in a situation where there are three reserves on the second main game side.

Variation pattern numbers 31 and 32 are a variation mode of loss indicating a battle reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 58 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state after the time-reduced gaming state (low-probability-high base state) ends. In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2 in (low-probability-low base state), it is the variation mode of the lost battle reach selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. In the situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, the selection ratio when the second main game pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 1000/50000, and the second main game side The selection ratio is 0 when there is one hold, the selection ratio is 0 when there are two holds on the second main game side, and there are three holds on the second main game side. The selection ratio is 0 in the situation where

Variation pattern number 33 is a variation mode of loss indicating SP reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 57 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2 in the probability low base state), it is the fluctuation mode of SP reach of losing selected when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied. In the situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, the selection ratio when the second main game pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 44000/50000, and the second main game side The selection ratio is 0 when there is one hold, the selection ratio is 0 when there are two holds on the second main game side, and there are three holds on the second main game side. The selection ratio is 0 in the situation where

Variation pattern number 34 is a variation mode of loss indicating a battle reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 65 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2 in the low probability base state), it is the fluctuation mode of the lost battle reach selected when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied. In the situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, the selection ratio when the second main game pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 5000/50000, and the second main game side The selection ratio is 0 when there is one hold, the selection ratio is 0 when there are two holds on the second main game side, and there are three holds on the second main game side. The selection ratio is 0 in the situation where

Variation pattern numbers 115 to 120 are variation modes in which a super M chance with a variation time of 43 seconds is executed, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low probability base state) after the time-reduced gaming state (low probability high base state) ends In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2 in the low base state), a small win is won in the state where there is no hold on the side of the second main game and the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game pattern is satisfied. It is a variation mode selected in the case. This variation mode is a variation mode in which a super M chance is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the symbol variation is started, and then fixed and stopped in a small hit mode, and the first main game symbol is the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5. It is a variation mode in which the determination stops at any one of them. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5 has a selection ratio of 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. .

Variation pattern number 103 is a variation mode that becomes a small hit of SP reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 52 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state ( In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2 in low-probability-low base state), when the fluctuation start condition of the 2nd main game pattern is satisfied and a small hit to execute a non-rank-up direct V effect is won. It is a variation mode selected for It is a variation mode in which the 2_10R symbol 2 is determined as a small winning symbol. The variation mode of the 2_10R symbol 2 has a selection ratio of 1334/50000 when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied.

Variation pattern numbers 104 to 109 are variation modes in which SP reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 52 seconds is a small hit, and a non-time shortening game after the time shortening game state (low probability high base state) is completed. In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2 in the state (low-probability-low base state), when the fluctuation start condition of the 2nd main game pattern is satisfied and the small hit to execute the direct V effect is won. It is a variation mode. 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1 The variation mode of the second main game pattern The selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 43869/50000. The variation mode of the 2_10R symbol 2 has a selection ratio of 42535/50000 when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied.

Variation pattern numbers 110 to 114 are variation modes in which a battle reach (RUSH) with a variation time of 64 seconds is a small hit, and a non-time-reduced game after the time-reduced game state (low-probability-high base state) is completed. In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2 in the state (low-probability-low base state), when the fluctuation start condition of the 2nd main game pattern is satisfied and the small hit to execute the direct V effect is won. It is a variation mode. 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern 2 The selection ratio is 6131/50000 when the variation start condition of the 2 main game symbols is satisfied.

Variation pattern numbers 115 to 120 are variation modes in which the variation time is 43 seconds and a small hit of super M chance, and a non-time-reduced gaming state ( In the 11th to 14th fluctuations of RUSH2 in the low-probability/low-probability base state), it is selected when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied and when the small win for executing the V challenge performance is won. It is a variation mode. 2_10R symbol 3, 2_10R symbol 4, 2_10R symbol 5, 2_10R symbol 6, and 2_10R symbol 7 have a selection ratio of 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. It's becoming

FIG. 46 is a configuration diagram of a variation mode determination table T5 used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side of the normal mode in the non-time shortening gaming state (low-probability-low base state) is. The variation mode determination table T5 is a table used in the second to fifth variations of RUSH1 in the non-time shortened gaming state (low probability low base state) after the time shortening gaming state (low probability high base state) ends It has become. The variation mode determination table T5 is a table used in a limited frequency state.

Variation pattern number 20 is a variation mode showing normal variation with a variation time of 14 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low-probability-low base state) after the time-reduction gaming state (low-probability-high base state) ends In the 2nd to 5th fluctuations of RUSH1, in the state where there is no hold on the second main game side, the fluctuation mode of the normal fluctuation of the loss selected when the fluctuation start condition of the 1st main game pattern is satisfied. be. The selection ratio is 50000/50000 when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 22 is a variation mode of normal variation showing the second variation and later with a variation time of 34 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low In RUSH1 in the probability low base state), it is a variation mode of the normal variation of the loss selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. This variation mode is the variation mode of the second main game symbols used in the symbol variation prior to the final symbol variation such as "summary variation" after the time shortening game state is completed. The selection ratio is 0 in a situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, and a second main game symbol in a situation where there is one hold on the second main game side. The selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 50000/50000, and the selection ratio when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied in the situation where there are two reservations on the second main game side 50000/50000, and the selection ratio is 50000/50000 when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in a situation where there are three reserves on the second main game side.

Variation pattern number 23 is a variation mode of normal variation showing the final variation with a variation time of 40 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low In RUSH1 in the base state), it is a variation mode of the normal variation of the loss selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. This variation mode is the variation mode of the second main game symbols used in the final symbol variation such as "summary variation" after the time shortening game state is finished. In the situation where there is neither a hold on the second main game side nor a hold on the first main game side, the selection ratio when the second main game symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied is 50000/50000, and the second main game side The selection ratio is 0 when there is one hold, the selection ratio is 0 when there are two holds on the second main game side, and there are three holds on the second main game side. The selection ratio is 0 in the situation where

Variation pattern number 102 is a variation mode that performs a super M chance with a variation time of 26 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low-probability-low base state) after the time-reduced gaming state (low-probability-high base state) ends state) in RUSH1, in a state where there is no hold on the second main game side, it is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the first main game pattern is satisfied and when a small win is won. This variation mode is a variation mode in which super M chance is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the symbol variation is started, and then fixed and stopped in a small hit mode, and the first main game symbol is the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5. It is a variation mode in which the determination stops at any one of them. The variation mode of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5 has a selection ratio of 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied in a situation where there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. .

Variation pattern number 99 is a variation mode that becomes a small hit after the second variation with a variation time of 43 seconds, and a non-time-reduced gaming state (low In RUSH1 in the probability low base state), it is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied and when a small hit to execute a direct V effect is won. 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern 2 The selection ratio is 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the 2 main game symbols is satisfied.

Variation pattern number 101 is a variation mode that becomes a small hit of super M chance after the second variation with a variation time of 58 seconds, and is a non-time reduction after the time reduction gaming state (low probability high base state) ends. In RUSH1 in the game state (low-probability-low base state), it is a variation mode selected when the variation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied and when a small win for executing the V challenge performance is won. 2_10R symbol 3, 2_10R symbol 4, 2_10R symbol 5, 2_10R symbol 6, and 2_10R symbol 7 have a selection ratio of 50000/50000 when the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied. It's becoming

Here, RUSH1 and RUSH2, which are stages set after the special game, will be described. In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, a low-probability-low base state), the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game pattern is satisfied, and the first main game pattern is stopped and displayed at the 1_4R patterns 1 to 5 indicating a small hit, and this During the small winning game based on the small winning (during the operation flag of the special electric role product), when the passing of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10, the special game is executed. RUSH1 stage is used as the stage (stage after the first hit) used after the special game is finished. Then, this RUSH1 stage ends when the variation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied a total of 6 times in a situation where the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is not satisfied once. Or, in a situation where the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern has not been satisfied a total of 6 times, the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern has been satisfied a total of 5 times (the second main game symbol in the time shortened game state Satisfaction of the condition to start the fluctuation of the game symbols is once, and then satisfaction of the condition to start the fluctuation of the second main game symbols in the non-shortened game state that shifts to Digestion in the pending non-time-reduced gaming state) ends with a total of 4 times and a total of 5 times), and it seems to move to the production stage A, which is one of the production stages in the low-probability-low base state. is set. In addition, the maximum number of stays in the RUSH1 stage when the satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern is also taken into account is "After the satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern reaches a total of 5 times, Until the satisfaction of the variation start condition of the second main game symbol reaches 5 times in total.” 10 times.

On the other hand, in the time-reduced gaming state (for example, low probability base state), the condition for starting the variation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the second main game pattern is a small winning pattern indicating a small winning (all small winning patterns are targeted). ) is stopped (or the condition for starting the variation of the first main game symbol is satisfied, and the first main game symbol is a small winning symbol indicating a small winning (all small winning symbols are targeted)), and this During the small winning game based on the small winning (during the operation flag of the special electric role product), when the passing of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10, the special game is executed. After the end of this special game, the stage is set to RUSH2, which is the stage used in consecutive games. More specifically, in the RUSH1 stage or the RUSH2 stage corresponding to the time-reduced gaming state (for example, the low fixed height base state), the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol) indicates a small hit. A winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and a special game is executed when passage of a game ball is detected in a specific area C12-1 or a specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during a small winning game based on this small winning. After the end of the special game, the stage becomes RUSH2. In the RUSH2 stage, the total number of times the first main game symbols are satisfied is 6, while the second main game symbols are not satisfied 10 times in total. , or in a situation where the total number of times that the first main game symbols have not met the fluctuation start conditions has not reached 6 times, the number of times that the second main game symbols have met the fluctuation start conditions a total of 14 times (time reduction game 10 times in total, satisfaction of the second main game pattern fluctuation start condition in the state, and satisfaction of the second main game pattern fluctuation start condition in the non-time-reduced game state that shifts after that (up to the upper limit during the time-reduced game state) It is set to end when the second main game side's pending non-time-reduced game state digestion) reaches 4 times in total, 14 times in total), and shift to production stage A. In addition, the maximum number of stays in the RUSH2 stage when the satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern is also taken into account is "After the satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern reaches a total of 5 times, Until the satisfaction of the variation start condition of the second main game symbol reaches 14 times in total.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the number of high base states set in the time shortening game state (low probability high base state). The 1_4R symbol 1 of symbol number 1 is a symbol indicating a small hit of the first main game symbol, and during a small win game based on the small win (while the operation flag of the special electric role is operating), the first big winning opening C10 When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or specific area C12-2 of 4 rounds (1 round in the small hit game, 3 rounds in the big hit developed from the small hit) with a pattern that develops into a special game be. In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, a low-probability-low base state), the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern is satisfied, and the first main game pattern is stopped and displayed at the 1_4R symbol 1 indicating a small win, and this small win. During the small winning game based on (during the operation flag of the special electric role product), when the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10, a special game is executed, After the end of this special game, it is configured to be in a time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state). In this time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state), the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is not met once, and the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is not satisfied. Ends when the total is 6 times, or fulfillment of the fluctuation start condition of the 2nd main game symbol is 1 time in a situation where the total of 6 times has not been met. It is set to end when

In other words, ``In a situation where the second main game symbol has not satisfied the variation start condition once, the first main game symbol has satisfied the variation start condition six times'', ``the first main game In a situation where the total number of times that the condition for starting the fluctuation of the symbols has not been satisfied has not reached 6 times, the conditions for starting the fluctuation of the second main game pattern will be satisfied only once. It is configured to shift the game state from the shortened game state (eg, low-probability-high base state) to the non-time-reduction game state (eg, low-probability-low base state). Therefore, ``the total number of satisfactions of the variation start condition of the first main game symbol reaches 6 times in a situation where the variation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied 0 times'' or ``the variation of the first main game symbol After the total number of satisfaction of the start conditions reaches 5 times, the fluctuation start condition of the 2nd main game symbol reaches 1 time”, that is, the total number of times of the fluctuation start condition of the 1st main game symbol and the 2nd main game symbol. The maximum number of times of maintaining the time-reduced game state corresponding to the stage of RUSH1 is until the number of times reaches 6 times.

On the other hand, in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state), the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied, and the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the 1_4R symbol 1 indicating a small hit, and this small game symbol is displayed. A special game is executed when the passage of a game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during a small winning game based on a hit (during the operation flag of a special electric role). , It is configured to be in a time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state) after the end of this special game. Then, this time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state) is a condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbols in a situation where the total number of times that the conditions for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols have not been satisfied has reached 10 times. is satisfied 6 times in total, or in a situation where the total number of satisfactions of the first main game symbol fluctuation start condition has not reached 6 times, the second main game symbol's fluctuation start condition is satisfied. is set to end when the total number of times reaches 10.

In other words, ``in a situation where the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions for the second main game symbols has not reached 10 times, the total number of times that the fluctuation start conditions for the first main game symbols have been satisfied is six''; In a situation where the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions for the first main game symbol has not reached 6 times, the total number of times the fluctuation start conditions for the second main game symbol are satisfied is 10 times. By having satisfied, it is configured to shift the game state from the time shortened game state (eg, low probability high base state) to the non-time shortened game state (eg, low probability low base state). Therefore, ``after the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions of the second main game symbols reaches nine times, the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions of the first main game symbols reaches six times'' or ``the number of times of the first main game symbols satisfied After the total number of satisfactions of the variation start condition reaches 5 times, the total number of times the variation start condition of the 2nd main game pattern is satisfied reaches 6 times. Until the total number of times of the start conditions reaches 15, the maximum number of times of maintaining the time-reduced game state corresponding to the RUSH2 stage is reached. It should be noted that the number of times of the high base state of the symbol numbers 2 to 5 is the same as the 1_4R symbol 1 of the symbol number 1.

The 2_10R symbol 1 of symbol number 6 is a symbol indicating a small hit of the second main game symbol, and during a small win game based on the small win (while the operation flag of the special electric role is operating), the first big prize opening C10 When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or C12-2 of the special game of 10 rounds (1 round in the small hit game, 9 rounds in the big hit developed from the small hit) with a pattern that develops into a special game be. In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, a low-probability-low base state), the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbol is satisfied, and the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the 2_10R symbol 1 indicating a small win, and this small win. During the small winning game based on (during the operation flag of the special electric role product), when the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10, a special game is executed, After the end of this special game, it is configured to be in a time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state). Then, this time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state) is a condition for starting fluctuation of the first main game symbols in a situation where the total number of times the conditions for starting fluctuation of the second main game symbols have not been satisfied has reached 10 times. is satisfied 6 times in total, or the condition for starting the fluctuation of the 2nd main game pattern is satisfied in a situation where the total of the conditions for starting the fluctuation of the 1st main game pattern has not reached 6 times. is set to end when the total number of times reaches 10.

In other words, ``In a situation where the second main game symbol has not satisfied the variation start condition 10 times, the first main game symbol has satisfied the variation start condition a total of 6 times'', ``the first main game In a situation where the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions of the symbols has not reached 6 times, the total number of times of the satisfaction of the fluctuation start conditions of the second main game symbols is 10 times. By, it is configured to shift the game state from the time shortened game state (eg, low probability high base state) to the non-time shortened game state (eg, low probability low base state). Therefore, ``after the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions of the second main game symbols reaches nine times, the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions of the first main game symbols reaches six times'' or ``the number of times of the first main game symbols satisfied After the total number of satisfactions of the variation start condition reaches 5 times, the total number of times the variation start condition of the 2nd main game pattern is satisfied reaches 6 times. Until the total number of times of the start conditions reaches 15, the maximum number of times of maintaining the time-reduced game state corresponding to the RUSH2 stage is reached.

On the other hand, in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state), the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbol is satisfied, and the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the 2_10R symbol 1, which indicates a small hit, and this small game symbol is displayed. A special game is executed when the passage of a game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the winning (during the operation flag of the special electric role). , It is configured to be in a time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state) after the end of this special game. Then, this time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state) is a condition for starting fluctuation of the first main game symbols in a situation where the total number of times the conditions for starting fluctuation of the second main game symbols have not been satisfied has reached 10 times. is satisfied 6 times in total, or the condition for starting the fluctuation of the 2nd main game pattern is satisfied in a situation where the total of the conditions for starting the fluctuation of the 1st main game pattern has not reached 6 times. is set to end when the total number of times reaches 10.

In other words, ``in a situation where the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions for the second main game symbols has not reached 10 times, the total number of times that the fluctuation start conditions for the first main game symbols have been satisfied is six''; In a situation where the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions for the first main game symbol has not reached 6 times, the total number of times the fluctuation start conditions for the second main game symbol are satisfied is 10 times. By having satisfied, it is configured to shift the game state from the time shortened game state (eg, low probability high base state) to the non-time shortened game state (eg, low probability low base state). Therefore, ``after the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions of the second main game symbols reaches nine times, the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions of the first main game symbols reaches six times'' or ``the number of times of the first main game symbols satisfied After the total number of satisfactions of the variation start condition reaches 5 times, the total number of times the variation start condition of the 2nd main game pattern is satisfied reaches 6 times. Until the total number of times of the start conditions reaches 15, the maximum number of times of maintaining the time-reduced game state corresponding to the RUSH2 stage is reached. It should be noted that the number of high base states of symbol numbers 7 to 19 is the same as the 2_10R symbol 1 of symbol number 6.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing table transitions using the variation mode determination tables T0 to T5. The 1_4R symbol 1 of symbol number 1 is a symbol indicating a small hit of the first main game symbol, and during a small win game based on the small win (while the operation flag of the special electric role is operating), the first big winning opening C10 When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or specific area C12-2 of 4 rounds (1 round in the small hit game, 3 rounds in the big hit developed from the small hit) with a pattern that develops into a special game be. In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, a low-probability-low base state), the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern is satisfied, and the first main game pattern is stopped and displayed at the 1_4R symbol 1 indicating a small win, and this small win. During the small winning game based on (during the operation flag of the special electric role product), when the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10, a special game is executed, After the end of this special game, it is configured to be in a time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state). In this time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state), the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is not met once, and the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is not satisfied. Ends when the total is 6 times, or fulfillment of the fluctuation start condition of the 2nd main game symbol is 1 time in a situation where the total of 6 times has not been met. It is set to end when

Here, the variation mode determination table of the variation pattern when the variation start condition of the first main game symbols is satisfied is constructed so as to use the table T1, and the variation start condition of the second main game symbols is satisfied only once. In the situation where it is not reached, the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied 6 times (1st to 6th symbol variation that satisfies the first main game symbol variation start condition after the end of the special game). It is configured to use the table T1 until the When the satisfaction of the first main game symbol's variation start condition reaches a total of six times, the variation mode determination table of the variation pattern when the next first main game symbol's variation start condition is satisfied uses the table T0. is configured to In addition, in the situation after the second main game symbol has satisfied the variation start condition once, the total number of times the first main game symbol has not satisfied the variation start condition has not reached 6 times. Also, the table T0 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next first main game symbol is satisfied. It should be noted that before the satisfaction of the variation start condition for the first main game symbols using the table T1 reaches 6 times (1st to 6th variation after the end of the special game), the variation start condition for the 2nd main game symbol has reached one time in total, the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next first main game symbol is satisfied is configured to use the table T0. . After switching to the table T0, the table T0 is used until the next special game is executed.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition of the second main game symbols is satisfied is configured to use the table T1, and the variation start condition of the second main game symbols is satisfied once (special The table T1 is used until the first symbol variation that satisfies the variation start condition of the second main game symbol after the end of the game. When the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game pattern has not been satisfied six times in total, and the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game pattern is satisfied once, the next second main game pattern starts to fluctuate. The variation mode determination table of the variation pattern when the condition is satisfied is configured to use the table T5. Satisfaction of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols using the table T5 is 4 times (2nd to 5th fluctuations of the symbol fluctuations that satisfy the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols after the end of the special game). Then, the table T0 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next second main game symbol is satisfied. After switching to the table T0, the table T0 is used until the next special game is executed. It should be noted that before the satisfaction of the variation start condition for the second main game symbols using the table T5 reaches 4 times (2nd to 5th variations after the end of the special game), the variation start condition for the first main game symbols is satisfied six times in total, the fluctuation mode determination table of the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation start condition of the next second main game symbol is satisfied is configured to use the table T5. there is The conditions for switching from the table T5 to the table T0 are configured so that the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbols using the table T5 is satisfied four times.

On the other hand, in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state), the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied, and the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the 1_4R symbol 1, which indicates a small hit, and this small game symbol is displayed. A special game is executed when the passage of a game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the winning (during the operation flag of the special electric role). , It is configured to be in a time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state) after the end of this special game. Then, this time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state) is a condition for starting fluctuation of the first main game symbols in a situation where the total number of times the conditions for starting fluctuation of the second main game symbols have not been satisfied has reached 10 times. is satisfied 6 times in total, or the condition for starting the fluctuation of the 2nd main game pattern is satisfied in a situation where the total of the conditions for starting the fluctuation of the 1st main game pattern has not reached 6 times. is set to end when the total number of times reaches 10.

Here, the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the first main game symbols is satisfied is configured to use the table T2, and the variation start condition for the second main game symbols is satisfied 10 times. In the situation where it is not reached, the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied 6 times (1st to 6th symbol variation that satisfies the first main game symbol variation start condition after the end of the special game). It is configured to use the table T2 until the When the satisfaction of the variation start condition of the first main game symbol reaches six times in total, the variation mode determination table of the variation pattern when the variation start condition of the next first main game symbol is satisfied uses the table T0. is configured to In addition, in the situation after the second main game symbols have satisfied the fluctuation start condition ten times, the total number of times the first main game symbol has not reached six times. Also, the table T0 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next first main game symbol is satisfied. It should be noted that before the satisfaction of the variation start condition for the first main game symbols using the table T2 reaches 6 times (the 1st to 6th variation after the end of the special game), the variation start condition for the 2nd main game symbols has reached 10 times in total, the table T0 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next first main game symbol is satisfied. . After switching to the table T0, the table T0 is used until the next special game is executed.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition of the second main game symbols is satisfied is configured to use the table T2, and the variation start condition of the second main game symbols is satisfied nine times (special The table T2 is used until the 1st to 9th variation of the symbol variation that satisfies the variation start condition of the second main game symbol after the end of the game. When the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions of the first main game symbols has not reached 6 times, and the total number of times of the satisfaction of the fluctuation start conditions of the second main game symbols is 9 times, the next second main game symbol. Table T3 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied. In a situation where the total number of times the first main game symbols have not met the fluctuation start conditions has not reached six times, the second main game symbols using the table T3 have met the fluctuation start conditions once When it comes to the 10th variation of the pattern variation that satisfies the variation start condition of the second main game symbol, table T4 is used as the variation pattern determination table of the variation pattern when the variation start condition of the next second main game symbol is satisfied. is configured as Satisfaction of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols using the table T4 is 4 times (the 11th to 14th fluctuations of the symbol fluctuations that satisfy the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols after the end of the special game). Then, the table T0 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next second main game symbol is satisfied. After switching to the table T0, the table T0 is used until the next special game is executed. It should be noted that the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols using the table T4 is satisfied four times (the 11th to 14th fluctuations of the symbol fluctuation that satisfies the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols after the special game is finished). ), even in a situation where the satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol has reached six times in total, the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation start condition of the next second main game symbol is satisfied. The variation mode determination table is configured to use table T4. The condition for switching from the table T4 to the table T0 is configured so that the variation start condition for the second main game symbols using the table T4 is satisfied four times. The transition of the variation mode determination table of symbol numbers 2 to 5 is the same as the 1_4R symbol 1 of symbol number 1.

The 2_10R symbol 1 of symbol number 6 is a symbol indicating a small hit of the second main game symbol, and during a small win game based on the small win (while the operation flag of the special electric role is operating), the first big prize opening C10 When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or C12-2 of the special game of 10 rounds (1 round in the small hit game, 9 rounds in the big hit developed from the small hit) with a pattern that develops into a special game be. In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, a low-probability-low base state), the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbol is satisfied, and the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the 2_10R symbol 1 indicating a small win, and this small win. During the small winning game based on (during the operation flag of the special electric role product), when the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10, a special game is executed, After the end of this special game, it is configured to be in a time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state). In this time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state), the first main game symbol does not meet the variation start condition in a situation where the variation start condition for the second main game symbol has not been satisfied 10 times. Ends when the total is 6 times, or 10 times the 2nd main game symbol's variation start condition is satisfied in a situation where the total of the 1st main game symbol's variation start condition has not reached 6 times It is set to end when

Here, the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the first main game symbols is satisfied is configured to use the table T2, and the variation start condition for the second main game symbols is satisfied 10 times. In the situation where it is not reached, the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied 6 times (1st to 6th symbol variation that satisfies the first main game symbol variation start condition after the end of the special game). It is configured to use the table T2 until the When the satisfaction of the first main game symbol's variation start condition reaches a total of six times, the variation mode determination table of the variation pattern when the next first main game symbol's variation start condition is satisfied uses the table T0. is configured to In addition, in the situation after the second main game symbols have satisfied the fluctuation start condition ten times, the total number of times the first main game symbol has not reached six times. Also, the table T0 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next first main game symbol is satisfied. It should be noted that before the satisfaction of the variation start condition for the first main game symbols using the table T2 reaches 6 times (the 1st to 6th variation after the end of the special game), the variation start condition for the 2nd main game symbols has reached 10 times in total, the table T0 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next first main game symbol is satisfied. . After switching to the table T0, the table T0 is used until the next special game is executed.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition of the second main game symbols is satisfied is configured to use the table T2, and the variation start condition of the second main game symbols is satisfied nine times (special The table T2 is used until the 1st to 9th variation of the symbol variation that satisfies the variation start condition of the second main game symbol after the end of the game. When the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions of the first main game symbols has not reached 6 times, and the total number of times of the satisfaction of the fluctuation start conditions of the second main game symbols is 9 times, the next second main game symbol. Table T3 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied. In a situation where the total number of times the first main game symbols have not met the fluctuation start conditions has not reached six times, the second main game symbols using the table T3 have met the fluctuation start conditions once When it comes to the 10th variation of the pattern variation that satisfies the variation start condition of the second main game symbol, table T4 is used as the variation pattern determination table of the variation pattern when the variation start condition of the next second main game symbol is satisfied. is configured as Satisfaction of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols using the table T4 is 4 times (the 11th to 14th fluctuations of the symbol fluctuations that satisfy the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols after the end of the special game). Then, the table T0 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next second main game symbol is satisfied. After switching to the table T0, the table T0 is used until the next special game is executed. It should be noted that the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols using the table T4 is satisfied four times (the 11th to 14th fluctuations of the symbol fluctuation that satisfies the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols after the special game is finished). ), even in a situation where the satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol has reached six times in total, the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation start condition of the next second main game symbol is satisfied. The variation mode determination table is configured to use table T4. The condition for switching from the table T4 to the table T0 is configured so that the variation start condition for the second main game symbols using the table T4 is satisfied four times.

On the other hand, in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state), the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbol is satisfied, and the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the 2_10R symbol 1, which indicates a small hit, and this small game symbol is displayed. A special game is executed when the passage of a game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the winning (during the operation flag of the special electric role). , It is configured to be in a time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state) after the end of this special game. Then, this time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state) is a condition for starting fluctuation of the first main game symbols in a situation where the total number of times the conditions for starting fluctuation of the second main game symbols have not been satisfied has reached 10 times. is satisfied 6 times in total, or the condition for starting the fluctuation of the 2nd main game pattern is satisfied in a situation where the total of the conditions for starting the fluctuation of the 1st main game pattern has not reached 6 times. is set to end when the total number of times reaches 10.

Here, the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the first main game symbols is satisfied is configured to use the table T2, and the variation start condition for the second main game symbols is satisfied 10 times. In the situation where it is not reached, the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied 6 times (1st to 6th symbol variation that satisfies the first main game symbol variation start condition after the end of the special game). It is configured to use the table T2 until the When the satisfaction of the variation start condition of the first main game symbol reaches six times in total, the variation mode determination table of the variation pattern when the variation start condition of the next first main game symbol is satisfied uses the table T0. is configured to In addition, in the situation after the second main game symbols have satisfied the fluctuation start condition ten times, the total number of times the first main game symbol has not reached six times. Also, the table T0 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next first main game symbol is satisfied. It should be noted that before the satisfaction of the variation start condition for the first main game symbols using the table T2 reaches 6 times (the 1st to 6th variation after the end of the special game), the variation start condition for the 2nd main game symbols has reached 10 times in total, the table T0 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next first main game symbol is satisfied. . After switching to the table T0, the table T0 is used until the next special game is executed.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition of the second main game symbols is satisfied is configured to use the table T2, and the variation start condition of the second main game symbols is satisfied nine times (special The table T2 is used until the 1st to 9th variation of the symbol variation that satisfies the variation start condition of the second main game symbol after the end of the game. When the total number of satisfactions of the fluctuation start conditions of the first main game symbols has not reached 6 times, and the total number of times of the satisfaction of the fluctuation start conditions of the second main game symbols is 9 times, the next second main game symbol. Table T3 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied. In a situation where the total number of times the first main game symbols have not met the fluctuation start conditions has not reached six times, the second main game symbols using the table T3 have met the fluctuation start conditions once When it comes to the 10th variation of the pattern variation that satisfies the variation start condition of the second main game symbol, table T4 is used as the variation pattern determination table of the variation pattern when the variation start condition of the next second main game symbol is satisfied. is configured as Satisfaction of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols using the table T4 is 4 times (the 11th to 14th fluctuations of the symbol fluctuations that satisfy the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols after the end of the special game). Then, the table T0 is used as the variation mode determination table for the variation pattern when the variation start condition for the next second main game symbol is satisfied. After switching to the table T0, the table T0 is used until the next special game is executed. It should be noted that the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols using the table T4 is satisfied four times (the 11th to 14th fluctuations of the symbol fluctuation that satisfies the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbols after the special game is finished). ), even in a situation where the satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol has reached six times in total, the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation start condition of the next second main game symbol is satisfied. The variation mode determination table is configured to use table T4. The condition for switching from the table T4 to the table T0 is configured so that the variation start condition for the second main game symbols using the table T4 is satisfied four times. The transition of the variation mode determination table of the main game symbols of symbol numbers 7 to 19 is the same as that of the 2_10R symbol 1 of symbol number 6.

The condition for switching the variation mode determination table on the first main game side to the variation mode determination table T0 of the non-time-reduced gaming state (eg, low-probability-low base state) is the time-reduced gaming state (eg, low-probability-high base state) The condition is that it switches from to a non-time-reduced gaming state (eg, low-probability-low base state), but the variation mode determination table on the second main game side is a non-time-reduction gaming state (eg, low-probability-low base state) The condition for switching to the variation mode determination table T0 is not conditional on switching from the time shortening gaming state (eg, low probability high base state) to the non-time shortening gaming state (eg, low probability low base state), and the second The condition is that the satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the main game symbols is a predetermined number of times. With this configuration, in a pachinko game machine that mainly uses pattern variations of the second main game symbols, a predetermined effect is produced over a predetermined number of pattern variations of the second main game symbols. can be executed, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine capable of continuing the performance without spoiling the interest.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing performance symbols (first decorative symbols, second decorative symbols) and V performance when power is interrupted during symbol fluctuation for the first and second main game symbols and power is restored. .

When the power is turned off and the power is restored, from the main control unit to the sub control unit. Power failure recovery per information (special game information, small winning game information), power failure recovery pattern information (first main game pattern return information, second main game pattern return information), launch position information (left-handed information) , right-handed information), set value information, movable accessory initial action information, etc.). The sub-control section that receives the power failure recovery information is configured to determine the performance symbols to be displayed on the performance display device SG based on the received power failure recovery information.

If the power is turned off while the first main game symbols are changing and the power is restored while the symbols are changing, when the first main game symbols are stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are respectively "375". ” is configured to display. If the power is turned off while the second main game symbols are changing and the power is restored while the symbols are changing, when the second main game symbols are stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are set to "375" respectively. ” is configured to display. As a modification, if the power is turned off while the first main game symbol or second main game symbol is changing, and the power is restored during the symbol change, the next first main game symbol or second main game symbol At the start of the symbol variation, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be configured to display "375" respectively. It should be noted that if there is a hold on the first main game side and a hold on the second main game side when the pattern fluctuation that resumes after the power is restored is stopped, as described above, the next first main game pattern or second main game pattern When the game pattern starts to fluctuate, "375" is displayed in each of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, but when the power supply is restored and the restarted pattern fluctuation stops, the first main game side is held and the second main game side is displayed. When there is no suspension on the game side, "375" may be displayed in each of the first decorative design and the second decorative design at the time of stopping the restarted design variation after the power is restored.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 1_4R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 1 of the first main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed, The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "131" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small hit is won in the 1_4R pattern 1, it is configured to execute a V challenge effect (also referred to as a V challenge pattern) as a V effect, and the V challenge effect of the rotating body 1/5 (the rotating body C17 (a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion, rotator 1/5 V challenge effect as effect on effect display device SG) is executed.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 1_4R symbol 2 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 2 of the first main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol variation, when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed, The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "131" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small hit is won in the 1_4R pattern 2, it is configured to execute a V challenge effect as a V effect, and the V challenge effect of the rotating body 2/5 (the operation mode of the rotating body C17 is (b) 2 /5 pattern of V challenge motion, and a V challenge performance of rotating body 2/5 as a performance on the performance display device SG.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 1_4R symbol 3 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 3 of the first main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed, The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "131" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small hit is won in the 1_4R pattern 3, it is configured to execute a V challenge effect as a V effect, and the V challenge effect of the rotating body 3/5 (the operation mode of the rotating body C17 is (c) 3 /5 pattern of V challenge motion, and a V challenge performance of rotating body 3/5 as a performance on the performance display device SG.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 1_4R symbol 4 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 4 of the first main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed, The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "131" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small hit is won in the 1_4R pattern 4, it is configured to execute a V challenge effect as a V effect, and the V challenge effect of the rotating body 4/5 (the operation mode of the rotating body C17 is (d) 4 /5 pattern of V challenge motion, and the V challenge performance of rotating body 4/5) is executed as the performance by the performance display device SG.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 1_4R symbol 5 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 5 of the first main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed, The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "131" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small hit is won in the 1_4R pattern 5, it is configured to execute a V challenge effect as a V effect, and the V challenge effect of the rotating body 5/5 (the operation mode of the rotating body C17 is (e) 5 /5 pattern of V challenge motion, and the V challenge performance of rotating body 5/5) is executed as the performance on the performance display device SG.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_10R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 6 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "222" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small win is won in the 2_10R pattern 1, it is configured to execute a rank-up direct V effect (rank-up effect A, B, C, D) as a direct V effect (direct V pattern) as a V effect. ing. Here, the rank-up direct V effect (rank-up effect) is an effect in which the actual number of rounds is not notified to the player during the small winning game and at the start of the special game, and the actual number of rounds is notified during the execution of the special game. is.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_10R symbol 2 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 7 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to display "777" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small win is won in the 2_10R pattern 2, it is configured to execute a non-rank-up direct V effect as a direct V effect (direct V pattern) as a V effect. Here, the non-rank-up direct V effect is an effect (effect without rank-up effect) in which the actual number of rounds is notified to the player during the small winning game or at the start of the special game.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_10R symbol 3 (symbol indicating a small win) of the symbol number 8 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "537" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small hit is won in the 2_10R pattern 3, it is configured to execute a V challenge effect as a V effect, and the V challenge effect of the rotating body 1/5 (the operation mode of the rotating body C17 is (a) 1 /5 pattern of V challenge motion, and a V challenge performance of rotating body 1/5 as a performance on the performance display device SG).

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_10R symbol 4 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 9 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "537" respectively. It should be noted that it is possible not to display the two design patterns of the first decorative design and the second decorative design, to display only the first decorative design, or to display only the second decorative design. When a small hit is won in the 2_10R pattern 4, it is configured to execute a V challenge effect as a V effect, and the V challenge effect of the rotating body 2/5 (the operation mode of the rotating body C17 is (b) 2 /5 pattern of V challenge motion, and a V challenge performance of rotating body 2/5 as a performance on the performance display device SG.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_10R symbol 5 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 10 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "537" respectively. It should be noted that it is possible not to display the two design patterns of the first decorative design and the second decorative design, to display only the first decorative design, or to display only the second decorative design. When a small hit is won in the 2_10R pattern 5, it is configured to execute a V challenge effect as a V effect, and the V challenge effect of the rotating body 3/5 (the operation mode of the rotating body C17 is (c) 3 /5 pattern of V challenge motion, and a V challenge performance of rotating body 3/5 as a performance on the performance display device SG.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_10R symbol 6 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 11 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "537" respectively. It should be noted that it is possible not to display the two design patterns of the first decorative design and the second decorative design, to display only the first decorative design, or to display only the second decorative design. When a small hit is won in the 2_10R pattern 6, it is configured to execute the V challenge effect as the V effect, and the V challenge effect of the rotating body 4/5 (the operation mode of the rotating body C17 is (d) 4 /5 pattern of V challenge motion, and a V challenge performance of rotating body 4/5 as a performance on the performance display device SG.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_10R symbol 7 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 12 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "537" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small hit is won in the 2_10R pattern 7, it is configured to execute a V challenge effect as a V effect, and the V challenge effect of the rotating body 5/5 (the operation mode of the rotating body C17 is (e) 5 /5 pattern of V challenge motion, and the V challenge performance of rotating body 5/5) is executed as the performance on the performance display device SG.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_8R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 13 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "222" respectively. It should be noted that it is possible not to display the two design patterns of the first decorative design and the second decorative design, to display only the first decorative design, or to display only the second decorative design. When a small win is won in the 2_8R pattern 1, the rank-up direct V effect (rank-up effect A, B, C, D) is executed as the direct V effect as the V effect.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_8R symbol 2 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 14 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "222" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small hit is won in the 2_8R pattern 2, the non-rank-up direct V effect is executed as the direct V effect as the V effect.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_7R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 15 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "222" respectively. It should be noted that it is possible not to display the two design patterns of the first decorative design and the second decorative design, to display only the first decorative design, or to display only the second decorative design. When a small hit is won in the 2_7R symbol 1, the rank-up direct V effect (rank-up effect A, B, C, D) is executed as the direct V effect as the V effect.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_7R symbol 2 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 16 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "222" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small win is won in the 2_7R symbol 2, a non-rank-up direct V effect is executed as a direct V effect as a V effect.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_6R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 17 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "222" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small win is won in the 2_6R symbol 1, the rank-up direct V effect (rank-up effect A, B, C, D) is executed as the direct V effect as the V effect.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_6R symbol 2 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 18 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "222" respectively. It should be noted that it is possible not to display the two design patterns of the first decorative design and the second decorative design, to display only the first decorative design, or to display only the second decorative design. When a small hit is won in the 2_6R symbol 2, a non-rank-up direct V effect is executed as a direct V effect as a V effect.

If the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the 2_3R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the symbol number 19 of the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed, the second The first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "222" respectively. It should be noted that it is not necessary to display the two performance patterns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed, and only the second decorative pattern may be displayed. When a small hit is won in the 2_3R symbol 1, a direct V effect (rank-up effect E) is executed as a direct V effect as a V effect.

In this way, the power is cut off during the pattern fluctuation for the pattern numbers 1 to 19, and the performance patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) when the power is restored are determined according to the type of the pattern number. 131", "222", "777" and "537" are displayed when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is stopped. As a modified example, when the power is cut off during the small winning symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, the following first main game symbol or second main game symbol At the start of the symbol variation, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols may be configured to display "131", "222", "777" and "537" respectively. In addition, at the end of the small winning game that is executed after the power supply is restored and the restarted pattern fluctuation is stopped, or at the end of the special game that is executed by entering a specific area during the small winning game, the first main game side hold and second If there is a hold on the second main game side, as described above, at the start of the next first main game symbol or second main game symbol variation, "131" is displayed in each of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. , ``222'', ``777'', and ``537'' are displayed. If there is no suspension on the first main game side and no suspension on the second main game side at the end of the special game to be executed, it is executed by entering a specific area after the end of the small winning game or during the small winning game. After the special game is finished, "131", "222", "777" and "537" may be displayed in the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, respectively. In addition, as another modification, it is configured to display the design for production (at least one of the first decorative design and the second decorative design) even during the small winning game or during the special game, and in the design numbers 1 to 19 The power is cut off during the pattern fluctuation, and the design for performance when the power is restored (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) is "131", "222", "777" according to the type of the pattern number. , "537" may be configured to be displayed during a small winning game or during a special game. In addition, in the case of power restoration accompanied by RAM clearing, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "331" respectively. When the power is turned off while the error is being reported and the power is restored without canceling the error, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to display "123" respectively. Although the example in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed when the power is restored has been shown, only the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is displayed. You don't have to. Further, it is possible to display only the second decorative design without displaying the first decorative design.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an effect stage when power is cut off during a small winning game or a special game and power is restored.

When the power is turned off and the power is restored, from the main control unit to the sub control unit. Power failure recovery per information (special game information, small winning game information), power failure recovery pattern information (first main game pattern return information, second main game pattern return information), launch position information (left-handed information) , right-handed information), set value information, movable accessory initial action information, etc.). The sub-control unit that has received the power failure recovery information is configured to determine the performance stage to be displayed on the performance display device SG based on the received power failure recovery information.

During a small hit game when winning with the 1_4R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the first main game pattern symbol number 1 in the low probability/low base state, and during a small win game based on the small win (special When the power is turned off in a situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first large winning opening C10, and the power is restored, ( The production stage after returning to the screen is configured to display the production stage A.

A small win based on a small win during a small win game or a special game when winning with the 1_4R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small win) of the symbol number 1 of the first main game symbol in the low-probability/low-probability base state When the power is turned off and the power is restored in a situation where the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 during the game (during the operation flag of the special electric role) , (after returning to the screen) the production stage is configured to display the production stage of RUSH1.

During a small hit game when winning with the 1_4R pattern 1 (symbol indicating a small hit) of the first main game pattern pattern number 1 in the low probability base state, and during a small win game based on the small win (special When the power is turned off in a situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first large winning opening C10, and the power is restored, ( The production stage after the screen is restored is configured to display the production stage of RUSH2 or RUSH1 based on the command information (or production selection state information) indicating the stage information transmitted from the main control unit when the power is restored. ing.

A small win based on a small win during a small win game or a special game when winning with the 1_4R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small win) of the symbol number 1 of the first main game symbol in the low probability high base state When the power is turned off and the power is restored in a situation where the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 during the game (during the operation flag of the special electric role) , (after returning to the screen) the production stage is configured to display the production stage of RUSH2. Symbol numbers 2 to 5 are the same as symbol number 1.

During a small winning game when winning with the 2_10R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small winning) of the second main game symbol symbol number 6 in the low probability/low base state, and during a small winning game based on the small winning (special When the power is turned off in a situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first large winning opening C10, and the power is restored, ( The production stage after returning to the screen is configured to display the production stage of RUSH1.

A small win based on a small win during a small win game or a special game when winning with the 2_10R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small win) of the symbol number 6 of the second main game symbol in the low probability/low base state. When the power is turned off and the power is restored in a situation where the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 during the game (during the operation flag of the special electric role) , (after returning to the screen) the production stage is configured to display the production stage of RUSH2.

During a small winning game when winning with the 2_10R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small winning) of the second main game symbol symbol number 6 in the low probability base state, and during a small winning game based on the small winning (special When the power is turned off in a situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first large winning opening C10, and the power is restored, ( The production stage after returning to the screen is configured to display the production stage of RUSH2.

A small win based on a small win during a small win game or a special game when winning with the 2_10R symbol 1 (symbol indicating a small win) of the symbol number 6 of the second main game symbol in the low probability base state. When the power is turned off and the power is restored in a situation where the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 during the game (during the operation flag of the special electric role) , (after returning to the screen) the production stage is configured to display the production stage of RUSH2. Symbol numbers 7 to 19 are the same as symbol number 6.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a game flow in a non-time reduction game state (low-probability base state). In the non-time shortened game state (low-probability base state), when the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied, the following game can be executed.
(1) After starting the pattern variation in the super-shortened variation variation mode, it is fixed and stopped with the effect symbol indicating the loss.
(2) After starting the symbol variation in the variation mode of the shortened variation, it is fixed and stopped with the effect symbol indicating the loss.
(3) After starting the pattern variation in the variation mode of the normal variation, it is determined and stopped with the effect symbol indicating the loss.
(4) SP reach M battle is executed via the developing performance after the start of the symbol variation, and the determination is stopped with the performance symbol indicating the failure.
(5) SP reach M battle is executed through the development of performance after the start of pattern variation, and fixed stop is made with performance symbols showing a win (big win, small win).
(6) After the symbol variation is started, the advance notice effect is executed, the SP reach MS is executed, and the symbol for effect indicating the loss is determined and stopped.
(7) After the symbol variation is started, the notice performance is executed, the SP reach MS is executed, and the performance symbols indicating the hit (big win, small win) are fixed and stopped.
(8) Normal ready-to-win is executed after starting pattern variation, and after developing to weak SP ready-to-win, it further develops to SP ready-to-win M battle, and is determined and stopped with a performance pattern showing loss.
(9) Normal reach is executed after the start of pattern variation, and after developing into weak SP reach, it further develops into SP reach M battle, and is determined and stopped with a performance pattern indicating a hit (big win, small win).
(10) After the symbol variation is started, the normal reach is executed, and the determination is stopped with the performance symbol indicating the loss.
(11) Normal reach is executed after the start of pattern variation, and after developing into long reach, M chance is executed and fixed stop is performed with a performance symbol indicating loss.
(12) Normal reach is executed after the start of pattern variation, and after development to long reach, M chance is executed, and fixed stop is made with performance symbols indicating a win (big win, small win).
(13) After the symbol variation is started, a pseudo-continuous guess is executed, and the game is fixed and stopped with a performance symbol indicating a failure.
(14) After the symbol variation is started, the pseudo run is executed to start the symbol variation of the second pseudo variation.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a game flow of the second and third pseudo fluctuations of the pseudo continuous fluctuations in the non-time shortening gaming state (low-probability base state). In the case of the second pseudo-fluctuation in FIG. 51, the first main game symbols continue the symbol fluctuation, and the second effect symbols start the pseudo-fluctuation second symbol fluctuation, and the following games can be executed. ing.
(15) After starting the second pattern variation of the pseudo variation, normal reach is executed, and after developing into weak SP reach, it further develops into SP reach M battle, and is fixed and stopped with a performance symbol showing loss.
(16) After starting the second pseudo-fluctuation pattern fluctuation, normal reach is executed, and after developing into weak SP reach, it further develops into SP reach M battle to show a hit (big hit, small hit). Press to confirm and stop.
(17) After starting the second pseudo-fluctuation symbol variation, normal reach is executed and fixed stop is performed with the effect symbol indicating loss.
(18) Normal reach is executed after the second pseudo-variation symbol variation is started, and after developing into long reach, M-chance is executed and fixed stop is performed with a performance symbol indicating loss.
(19) After starting the second pseudo-fluctuation pattern fluctuation, normal reach is executed, and after developing into long reach, M chance is executed, and it is determined and stopped with a performance pattern indicating a hit (big hit, small hit). .
(20) After starting the second pattern variation of the pseudo variation, the pseudo consecutive 2-guessing is executed, and the pattern indicating the loss is determined and stopped.
(21) After starting the symbol variation of the second pseudo variation, the pseudo run is executed to start the symbol variation of the third pseudo variation.

When the third pseudo-fluctuation occurs, the performance symbols start the third pseudo-fluctuation pattern variation while the first main game symbols continue the symbol variation, and the following games can be executed.
(22) After starting the third pattern variation of the pseudo variation, normal reach is executed, and after developing into weak SP reach, it further develops into SP reach M battle, and is determined and stopped with a performance symbol showing loss.
(23) Normal reach is executed after the third pseudo-variation pattern change is started, and after developing into a weak SP reach, it further develops into an SP reach M battle to show a hit (big win, small win). Press to confirm and stop.
(24) After starting the third pattern variation of the pseudo-variation, the SP reach M battle is executed via the development effect, and the symbol for effect indicating the loss is fixed and stopped.
(25) Execute the SP reach M battle through the developing effect after starting the third pattern change of the pseudo-variation, and stop with the effect symbol showing the hit (big win, small win).

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a game flow in RUSH1 and RUSH2. In the production stages of RUSH1 and RUSH2, when the second main game pattern variation start condition is satisfied, the following games can be executed.
(1) After starting the symbol variation in the variation mode of the shortened variation, it is determined and stopped with the effect symbol indicating the loss.
(2) After starting the pattern variation in the variation mode of the normal variation, it is determined and stopped with the effect symbol indicating the loss.
(3) Normal reach is executed after the start of pattern fluctuation, and after developing into battle reach, battle reach is successful by defeating the enemy, and it is confirmed and stopped with a production pattern that indicates a hit (big hit, small hit). do.
(4) Normal reach is executed after the start of pattern variation, and after developing into battle reach, the battle reach fails due to the enemy defending, returning to the normal screen and temporarily stopping the production pattern indicating the failure. After that, the resurrection winning performance is performed, and the game is fixed and stopped with performance symbols indicating winning (big winning, small winning).
(5) Normal reach is executed after the start of pattern fluctuation, and after developing into battle reach, battle reach fails due to the enemy defending, returning to the normal screen and stopping with a production pattern that indicates a loss. .
(6) Normal reach is executed after the start of pattern variation, and after development to SP reach, success performance is executed, and the game is fixed and stopped with performance symbols indicating a win (big win, small win).
(7) After starting pattern variation, execute normal reach, develop into SP reach, execute failure effect, return to the normal screen, temporarily stop the effect symbol indicating failure, and then return per revival. A performance is performed, and the game is fixed and stopped at a performance symbol indicating a hit (big win, small win).
(8) Normal ready-to-win is executed after the start of pattern variation, and after progressing to SP ready-to-win, failure performance is executed, the normal screen is returned to, and fixed stop is performed with performance symbols indicating failure.
(9) After starting the pattern variation, super M chance is executed, then the success effect is executed, and the pattern for effect indicating the win (big win, small win) is fixed and stopped.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a rotating body C17 having a specific area C12-2 provided inside the first big prize winning opening C10. The rotating body C17 has five holes, and in the normal state, there is a hole (specific region C12-2) marked with "V" as shown in the mode of (a) 1/5 pattern V challenge operation. One and four holes (general area C12-3) described as "outside" (general areas C12-3-1, C12-3-2, C12-3-3, C12-3-4) are provided there is When the game ball that entered the first big winning hole C10 goes to the specific area C12-2 (the rotating body C17), the side of the rotating body (for example, the right side of the rotating body shown in FIG. 54 (a)) I will go from Here, if the game ball coming from the side can enter the hole (specified area C12-2) marked with "V" with good timing, a special game is executed. That is, "V" is the specific area C12-2, and during the small hit game based on the small hit (during the operation flag of the special electric role product), the game ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 When passage is detected, it is configured to develop into a special game after the end of the small winning game. On the other hand, "outside" is a losing area (general area C12-3) of the first big winning port C10, and the first big winning during the small winning game based on the small winning (while the flag of the special electric role is activated) When the passage of game balls is detected in the mouth C10 general area C12-3, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded to the player as prize balls. If the passage of the game ball is not detected in the specific area C12-2 during the small winning game, the small winning game is terminated. When there is a hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side after the end of the small winning game, the pattern variation of the first main game pattern is started. Further, after the end of the small winning game, regardless of whether or not there is a hold on the first main game side, if there is a hold on the second main game side, the pattern variation of the second main game pattern is started. ing. The rotating body C17 starts rotating (counterclockwise) when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, and is configured to always rotate at a constant speed. The rotation may be started based on the start timing of the winning game start demonstration.

This rotating body C17 is configured to take any of the following modes (a) to (e) during the SP reach or during the small winning game.
(a) A mode consisting of one “V” hole and four “outer” holes (input of a specific area in a small winning game, as shown in a mode of a 1/5 pattern V challenge operation) A mode in which the ball probability is 1/5 and the motion mode of the rotating body is a 1/5 pattern V challenge motion)
(b) One “outer” hole (general area C12-3-1 ) is changed to the notation of “V” and there are two “V” holes (the probability of entering a specific area in a small winning game is 2/5, and the operation mode of the rotating body is 2/5). 5 patterns of V-challenge motion mode)
(c) As shown in a mode that results in a 3/5 pattern V-challenge motion, (a) two "outer" holes in a mode that results in a 1/5 pattern V-challenge motion (general area C12-3-1 , C12-3-2) is changed to "V" notation and there are three "V" holes (the probability of entering a specific area in a small winning game is 3/5, and the rotating body A mode in which the operation mode is a 3/5 pattern V challenge operation)
(d) As shown in a mode that results in a 4/5 pattern V-challenge motion, (a) the three "outer" holes in a mode that results in a 1/5 pattern V-challenge motion (general area C12-3-1 , C12-3-2, C12-3-3) is changed to "V" notation and there are four "V" holes (the probability of entering a specific area in a small hit game is 4/5 A mode in which the motion mode of the rotating body is a 4/5 pattern V challenge motion)
(e) The four "outer" holes (general area C12-3-1 , C12-3-2, C12-3-3, C12-3-4) is changed to the notation of "V" and there are five "V" holes (entering a specific area in a small hit game A mode in which the probability is 5/5 and the motion mode of the rotating body is a 5/5 pattern V challenge motion)

Although the number of holes in the rotating body C17 is set to 5 and the game ball is configured to enter the specific area with a ball entry probability of 1/5 to 5/5, it is not limited to this, and the number of holes is 5. More holes than holes, for example, 10 holes may be provided so that a game ball enters a specific area with a ball entry probability of 1/10 to 10/10. A small number of holes, for example, three holes may be provided so that a game ball enters the specific area with a ball-entering probability of 1/3 to 3/3. Further, it is not necessary to provide a pattern in which a game ball enters a specific area with a probability of 100% (5/5). As another modification, instead of changing the "outer" hole to the "V" notation and increasing the number of "V" holes, the "outer" hole is blocked and the "V" that exists from the beginning It may be configured such that the probability of a ball entering the hole of the hole is increased. In such a configuration, the game ball does not enter the portion where the "outer" hole is blocked and the rotating body rotates counterclockwise, so the "outer" hole is blocked. If the game ball is headed to (if it is not blocked, it will enter the area of the loss), the game ball is near the rotating body (for example, the right side of the rotating body ), and then the next area (specific area, blocked general area, or unblocked general area) approaches the staying game ball due to the action of the rotating body, and the next area However, (1) if it is a specific area, it will enter the specific area, (2) if it is a general area that is blocked, the next area will be closer, and (3) if it is a general area that is not blocked, it will enter the general area. It will be a ball.

FIG. 55 is an image diagram of the flow from SP reach (M chance) to the special game and the V increase effect. As an effect to change the mode of the rotating body C17, the motion mode of the rotating body C17 is changed from (a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion to (b) to (e) V pattern motion mode of the rotating body. A V-increasing effect for changing to a challenge motion is executed.

When the main control unit determines a small hit in the win/fail determination, the small winning pattern is determined by the pattern content determination means MN40, and the variation mode of the variation mode number 97 is determined by the variation mode determination means MN50, the symbol variation display is started. An instruction command (variation mode information indicating the variation mode number 97, stop symbol information of a small winning symbol, etc.) is transmitted to the sub-controller. The sub control unit selects among the variation patterns of the plurality of sub control units based on the symbol variation display start instruction command (variation mode information indicating variation mode number 97, stop symbol information for small winning symbols, etc.) received from the main control unit It is designed to determine the variation pattern of SP reach (M chance) from 1. The condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is started, and after a predetermined time elapses, for example, the first decorative symbol of "2" is tense and the normal reach is executed. be done. In this normal reach, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at "232", and then develops into a long reach. After developing into a long reach, via SP reach (M chance), a small winning pattern is determined and stopped, and a small winning game is started. In the production of the small winning game start demonstration of the small winning game, the production "Aim for "V"" is executed, and the game is played to the specific area C12-2 of the first large winning opening C10 provided in the game area on the right side. Executes a right-handed annunciation prompting the ball to be launched. In addition, along with this "Aim for the 'V'" effect, an image object of a right arrow is displayed as a right-handed notification prompting the user to shoot a game ball to the right-hand game area.

After the end of the small winning start demonstration, the small winning game opened by the first big winning opening C10 is executed. When the game ball has not entered the first big winning hole C10 for a certain period of time during the small winning game, a warning effect is executed to encourage the entry of the ball. During the small winning game, when it is detected that one game ball has entered the first big winning hole C10, the V increase effect is executed. The V increase effect is composed of a rotating body absorption effect and a rotating body probability display effect. When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 during the small winning game after executing the V increase effect, in the special game start demonstration, the success effect of "V" entering ball ( For example, an effect of displaying "V ball" is executed. After the special game start demonstration is finished, a special game round game is started. On the other hand, when the V increase effect is executed and the passage of the game ball cannot be detected in the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game (the general area C12-3 which is the "outside" area when the ball is entered), a failure presentation is executed in the small winning game end demonstration.

Next, the V increase production is illustrated. When executing the 0 V increase effect {(a) the V increase effect that does not change from the aspect of the V challenge operation of the 1/5 pattern}, the timing that develops into SP reach or the first ball entry in the small winning game Based on the detection, as shown in the rotating body absorption effect in FIG. 55, (a) the same (or similar) 1/5 image object as the figure indicated by the 1/5 pattern, (b) the figure indicated by the 2/5 pattern 2/5 image object identical (can be similar) to (c) 3/5 image object identical (can be similar) to figure shown in 3/5 pattern, (d) same as figure shown in 4/5 pattern (can be similar) 4/5 image object, (e) display the same (can be similar) 5/5 image object as the figure shown in the 5/5 pattern on the effect display device SG, 1/5 image object, A rotator absorption effect is executed in which the rotator image object is sucked into the rotator image object displayed on the effect display device SG in the order of the 2/5 image object, the 3/5 image object, the 4/5 image object, and the 5/5 image object. do. After that, an effect of displaying the probability of the body of revolution is executed in which a 1/5 image object showing the pattern of the probability of entering the ball that the body of revolution C17 can finally take is displayed in the image object of the body of revolution. The body of revolution C17 is designed to increase the number of "V" holes in the pattern of the probability of entering a ball displayed in the production of the probability display of the body of revolution. One of the "outer" holes is changed to "V", and there are two "V" holes (the probability of entering a ball in a specific area is 2/5). When it is done, it pretends to be "outside" and returns to the notation.

0 V increase effect {(a) V increase effect not changed from the mode of V challenge operation of 1/5 pattern} is during the small hit game when the small hit in the small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 1 is won. is configured to run on During the small winning game, at the timing when the entry of the fifth game ball into the first big winning hole C10 is detected, the performance display device SG pretends to display the 2/5 image object and displays the 1/5 image. configured to display objects. In addition, in accordance with the timing of displaying the 2/5 image object, one "outside" of the rotating body C17 is changed to the notation of "V", and in accordance with the display timing of returning to the 1/5 image object. , one "V" of the rotating body C17 is changed to "outside".

1 V increase effect {(a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion to (b) 2/5 pattern V challenge motion] When executing V increase effect, SP reach develops. Based on the timing or the detection of the first ball in the small winning game, as shown in the rotating body absorption effect of FIG. 5 image objects, (b) 2/5 image objects identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 2/5 pattern, (c) 3/5 image identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 3/5 pattern object, (d) a 4/5 image object identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 4/5 pattern, and (e) a 5/5 image object identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 5/5 pattern. Rotating bodies displayed on the effect display device SG and displayed on the effect display device SG in the order of 1/5 image object, 2/5 image object, 3/5 image object, 4/5 image object, and 5/5 image object A rotating body absorption presentation is executed such that the object is sucked into the image object. After that, an effect of displaying the probability of the body of revolution is executed in which a 2/5 image object showing the pattern of the probability of entering the ball that the body of revolution C17 can finally take is displayed in the image object of the body of revolution. The body of revolution C17 is designed to increase the number of "V" holes in the pattern of the probability of entering a ball displayed in the production of the probability display of the body of revolution. One of the "outer" holes is changed to "V", and there are two "V" holes (the probability of entering a ball in a specific area is 2/5). be done.

One V increase effect {(a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion mode to (b) 2/5 pattern V challenge motion mode V increase effect} is the small hit of the 1_4R symbol 2 It is configured to be executed during a small winning game when winning a small winning in a pattern. During the small winning game, the 2/5 image object is displayed on the effect display device SG at the timing when the entry of the fourth game ball into the first big winning hole C10 is detected. Also, one "outside" of the rotating body C17 is changed to "V" in accordance with the timing of displaying the 2/5 image object.

2 V increase effect {(a) V challenge motion of 1/5 pattern to (c) V challenge motion of 3/5 pattern}, develops into SP reach Based on the timing or the detection of the first ball in the small winning game, as shown in the rotating body absorption effect of FIG. (can be similar) 1/5 image object, (b) 2/5 image object identical (can be similar) to the figure shown in the form of V challenge motion of 2/5 pattern, (c) 3/5 pattern 3/5 image object identical (possibly similar) to the figure shown in the form of the V challenge motion, (d) 4/5 identical (possibly similar) to the figure shown in the form of the 4/5 pattern V challenge motion 5 image objects, (e) a 5/5 image object identical (or similar) to the figure shown in the form of the 5/5 pattern V challenge motion is displayed on the effect display device SG, a 1/5 image object, 2 /5 image object, 3/5 image object, 4/5 image object, and 5/5 image object are executed in the order of rotating body absorption effect to be sucked into the rotating body image object displayed on the effect display device SG. . After that, an effect of displaying the probability of the body of revolution is executed, in which a 3/5 image object showing the pattern of the ball entry probability mode that the body of revolution C17 can finally take is displayed in the image object of the body of revolution. The body of rotation C17 is designed to increase the number of "V" holes in the pattern of the probability of entering a ball displayed in the display of the probability of rotation. In this case, (a) V challenge motion of 1/5 pattern Two of the four "outer" holes are changed to "V" notation, and there are three "V" holes (the probability of entering a ball in a specific area is 3 /5 aspect).

2 V increase effect {(a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion mode to (c) 3/5 pattern V challenge motion mode V increase effect} is the small hit of the 1_4R pattern 3 It is configured to be executed during a small winning game when winning a small winning in a pattern. During the small winning game, at the timing when the entry of the third game ball into the first big winning hole C10 is detected, a 3/5 image object (1/5 ⇒ 2/5 ⇒ 3/ 5) is displayed. In addition, it is configured such that the two "outside" of the rotating body C17 are changed to "V" in accordance with the timing of displaying the 3/5 image object.

3 V increase effect {(a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion mode to (d) 4/5 pattern V challenge motion mode V increase effect} develops into SP reach Based on the timing or the detection of the first ball in the small winning game, as shown in the rotating body absorption effect of FIG. (can be similar) 1/5 image object, (b) 2/5 image object identical (can be similar) to the figure shown in the form of V challenge motion of 2/5 pattern, (c) 3/5 pattern 3/5 image object identical (possibly similar) to the figure shown in the form of the V challenge motion, (d) 4/5 identical (possibly similar) to the figure shown in the form of the 4/5 pattern V challenge motion 5 image objects, (e) a 5/5 image object identical (or similar) to the figure shown in the form of the 5/5 pattern V challenge motion is displayed on the effect display device SG, a 1/5 image object, 2 /5 image object, 3/5 image object, 4/5 image object, and 5/5 image object are executed in the order of rotating body absorption effect to be sucked into the rotating body image object displayed on the effect display device SG. . After that, a 4/5 image object showing the pattern of the ball entry probability mode that the body of revolution C17 can finally take is displayed in the image object of the body of revolution. The body of rotation C17 is designed to increase the number of "V" holes in the pattern of the probability of entering a ball displayed in the display of the probability of rotation. In this case, (a) V challenge motion of 1/5 pattern 3 of the 4 ``outer'' holes in the form are changed to ``V'', and there are 4 ``V'' holes (the probability of entering a specific area is 4 /5 aspect).

3 V increase performance {(a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion mode to (d) 4/5 pattern V challenge motion mode V increase performance} is the small hit of the 1_4R symbol 4 It is configured to be executed during a small winning game when winning a small winning in a pattern. During the small winning game, at the timing when the second game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is detected, the effect display device SG displays a 4/5 image object (1/5 ⇒ 2/5 ⇒ 3/ 5⇒4/5, which may be ranked up and displayed). In addition, it is configured such that the three "outside" of the rotating body C17 are changed to "V" in accordance with the timing of displaying the 4/5 image object.

4 V increase effect {(a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion mode to (e) 5/5 pattern V challenge motion mode V increase effect} develops into SP reach Based on the timing or the detection of the first ball in the small winning game, as shown in the rotating body absorption effect of FIG. (can be similar) 1/5 image object, (b) 2/5 image object identical (can be similar) to the figure shown in the form of V challenge motion of 2/5 pattern, (c) 3/5 pattern 3/5 image object identical (possibly similar) to the figure shown in the form of the V challenge motion, (d) 4/5 identical (possibly similar) to the figure shown in the form of the 4/5 pattern V challenge motion 5 image objects, (e) a 5/5 image object identical (or similar) to the figure shown in the form of the 5/5 pattern V challenge motion is displayed on the effect display device SG, a 1/5 image object, 2 /5 image object, 3/5 image object, 4/5 image object, and 5/5 image object are executed in the order of rotating body absorption effect to be sucked into the rotating body image object displayed on the effect display device SG. . After that, an effect of displaying the probability of the body of revolution is executed, in which a 5/5 image object showing the pattern of the probability of entering the ball that the body of revolution C17 can finally take is displayed in the image object of the body of revolution. The body of rotation C17 is designed to increase the number of "V" holes in the pattern of the probability of entering a ball displayed in the display of the probability of rotation. In this case, (a) V challenge motion of 1/5 pattern 4 out of the 4 "outer" holes are changed to "V" notation, and there are 5 "V" holes (the probability of entering a ball in a specific area is 5 /5 aspect).

4 V increase effect {(a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion mode to (e) 5/5 pattern V challenge motion mode V increase effect} is the small hit of the 1_4R symbol 5 It is configured to be executed during a small winning game when winning a small winning in a pattern. During the small winning game, at the timing when the entry of the first game ball into the first big winning hole C10 is detected, a 5/5 image object (1/5 ⇒ 2/5 ⇒ 3/ 5⇒4/5, which may be ranked up and displayed). Also, the four "outside" of the rotating body C17 are changed to "V" in accordance with the timing of displaying the 5/5 image object.

A player adjusts the number of balls to be entered into the first big winning hole C10 by executing a V-increasing performance corresponding to the number of balls entering the first big winning hole C10 during a small winning game. While doing so, you can enjoy a small winning game.

Here, the structure of the game of this embodiment is demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment includes a big win pattern and a small win pattern (develops into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a small win game).

<Jackpot probability>
In the low-probability state, the winning probability that the main game symbols (the first main game symbols, the second main game symbols) are the jackpot symbols is 1/200. It may be set lower than the small hit probability. In the high-probability state, the winning probability that the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) are jackpot symbols is 1/199. It may be set lower than the small hit probability. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to provide a high probability state, and in that case, it is preferable not to provide a big hit pattern (variable probability pattern) or a small hit pattern that triggers the transition to the high probability state. Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration may be such that only the small winning symbols are provided without providing the big winning symbols.

<Small hit probability>
In the low-probability-low base state, low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state, and high-probability-low base state, the winning probability that the first main game pattern is a small winning pattern is 1/70 (of the second main game pattern). Probability lower than small hit probability). In the low-probability-low base state, low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state, and high-probability-low base state, the winning probability that the second main game pattern is a small winning pattern is 1/7 (not approximately 1/1) probability). A direct V pattern in which the probability (100%) of a game ball entering a specific area is unchanged when a small winning pattern is won, and a variable probability of a game ball entering a specific area when a small winning pattern is won. (1/5 to 5/5) V challenge pattern. In addition, the selection ratio of the 1st_4R symbol 1, the 1_4R symbol 2, the 1_4R symbol 3, the 1_4R symbol 4, and the 1_4R symbol 5, which are the small winning symbols of the 1st main game symbol, is 60:22:9:7: 2, 2nd_10R symbol 1, 2_10R symbol 2, 2_10R symbol 3, 2_10R symbol 4, 2_10R symbol 5, 2_10R symbol 6, 2_10R symbol 7, which are small winning symbols of the second main game symbol. 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_3R pattern 1 The selection ratio is 10: 3: 6.5: 6.5 : 6:5:1:7:3:7:3:10.5:4.5:27. In addition, in the present embodiment, it may be provided only with a low probability low base state and a low probability high base state (high probability high base state and high probability low base state may not be provided).

<Probability of winning auxiliary game pattern>
In the low-probability/low-probability base state and the high-probability/low-probability base state, the winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol is set to 1/1024 (0 may be acceptable). In the low-probability-high base state and the high-probability-high base state, the winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol is set to 1023/1024 (substantially 1/1 is sufficient).

<Transition of game state (in case of jackpot pattern)>
<Transition of the game state of the first main game symbol in the low-probability-low base state (in the case of a jackpot symbol)>
In the low-probability/low-probability base state, when the first main game pattern wins as a jackpot pattern (normal 4R jackpot pattern), the state shifts to the low-probability-high base state (RUSH1) after the special game. In the low-probability-low base state, when the first main game pattern wins with the jackpot pattern (normal pattern 10R jackpot pattern), the state shifts to the low-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game. In the low-probability-low base state, when the first main game pattern is a jackpot pattern (variable-probability-pattern 10R jackpot pattern), the state shifts to a high-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game.

<Transition of the game state of the first main game symbol in the low probability base state (in the case of a jackpot symbol)>
In the low probability high base state, when the first main game pattern wins in the jackpot pattern (the 4R jackpot pattern of the normal pattern), the state shifts to the low probability base state (RUSH2) after the special game. In the low probability high base state, when the first main game pattern wins with the jackpot pattern (10R jackpot pattern of the normal pattern), the state shifts to the low probability high base state (RUSH2) after the special game. In the low-probability-high base state, when the first main game pattern is a jackpot pattern (variable-probability-pattern 10R jackpot pattern), the game moves to a high-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game.

<Transition of the game state of the first main game symbol in the high probability high base state (in the case of a jackpot symbol)>
In the high-probability-high base state, when the first main game pattern is a jackpot pattern (normal 4R jackpot pattern), the state shifts to a low-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game. In the high-probability-high base state, when the first main game pattern is a jackpot pattern (normal 10R jackpot pattern), the state shifts to the low-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game. In the high-probability-high base state, when the first main game pattern is a jackpot pattern (variable-probability 10R jackpot pattern), the game moves to the high-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game.

<Transition of the game state of the second main game symbol in the low-probability-low base state (in the case of a jackpot symbol)>
In the low-probability/low-probability base state, when the second main game pattern wins in the big-hit pattern (normal 4R big-hit pattern), the state shifts to the low-probability/high base state (RUSH2) after the special game. In the low-probability/low-probability base state, when the second main game pattern wins with the jackpot pattern (10R jackpot pattern of the normal pattern), the state shifts to the low-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game. In the low-probability-low base state, when the second main game pattern wins as a jackpot pattern (variable-probability 10R jackpot pattern), the state shifts to a high-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game.

<Transition of the game state of the second main game symbol in the low probability base state (in the case of a jackpot symbol)>
In the low probability high base state, when the second main game pattern wins with the jackpot pattern (the 4R jackpot pattern of the normal pattern), the state shifts to the low probability base state (RUSH2) after the special game. In the low probability high base state, when the second main game pattern wins with the jackpot pattern (10R jackpot pattern of the normal pattern), the state shifts to the low probability high base state (RUSH2) after the special game. In the low-probability-high base state, when the second main game pattern is a jackpot pattern (variable-probability-pattern 10R jackpot pattern), the game moves to a high-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game.

<Movement of the game state of the second main game symbol in the high probability high base state (in the case of a jackpot symbol)>
In the high-probability-high base state, when the second main game pattern is a jackpot pattern (normal 4R jackpot pattern), the state shifts to the low-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game. In the high-probability-high base state, when the second main game pattern wins as a jackpot pattern (10R jackpot pattern of normal patterns), the state shifts to the low-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game. In the high-probability-high base state, when the second main game pattern wins as a jackpot pattern (variable-probability 10R jackpot pattern), the state shifts to the high-probability-high base state (RUSH2) after the special game.

<Transition of game state (in case of small winning pattern)>
<Transition of the game state of the first main game symbol in the low-probability-low base state (in the case of a small winning symbol)>
In the low-probability base state, if the first main game symbol wins with a small winning symbol (1_4R symbol 1, 1_4R symbol 2, 1_4R symbol 4, 1_4R symbol 5) and enters a specific area, a special game After that, it shifts to the low probability high base state (RUSH1).

<Transition of the game state of the first main game symbol in the low probability base state (in the case of a small winning symbol)>
In the low fixed height base state, if the 1st main game symbol wins with a small winning symbol (1_4R symbol 1, 1_4R symbol 2, 1_4R symbol 4, 1_4R symbol 5) and enters the specific area, special game After that, it shifts to the low probability high base state (RUSH2).

<Transition of the game state of the first main game symbol in the high probability high base state (in the case of a small winning symbol)>
In the high probability high base state, if the 1st main game symbol wins with a small winning symbol (1_4R symbol 1, 1_4R symbol 2, 1_4R symbol 4, 1_4R symbol 5) and enters the specific area, special game After that, it shifts to the low probability high base state (RUSH2). In addition, in the high probability base state, if the first main game pattern wins with a small winning pattern (1_4R pattern 1, 1_4R pattern 2, 1_4R pattern 4, 1_4R pattern 5) and enters the specific area, After the special game, the state may be shifted to the high probability/high base state (RUSH2).

<Transition of the game state of the second main game symbol in the low-probability-low base state (in the case of a small winning symbol)>
In the low probability base state, the second main game pattern is a small winning pattern (2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2nd_10R pattern 1, 2nd_10R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 3, 2_10R pattern 4, 2_10R pattern 5, 2_10R pattern 6, 2_10R pattern 7). After that, it shifts to the low probability high base state (RUSH2).

<Transition of the game state of the second main game symbol in the low probability base state (in the case of a small winning symbol)>
In the low fixed height base state, the second main game pattern is a small winning pattern (2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2nd_10R pattern 1, 2nd_10R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 3, 2_10R pattern 4, 2_10R pattern 5, 2_10R pattern 6, 2_10R pattern 7). After that, it shifts to the low probability high base state (RUSH2).

<Transition of the game state of the second main game symbol in the high probability high base state (in the case of a small winning symbol)>
In the high probability high base state, the second main game pattern is a small winning pattern (2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2nd_10R pattern 1, 2nd_10R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 3, 2_10R pattern 4, 2_10R pattern 5, 2_10R pattern 6, 2_10R pattern 7). After that, it shifts to the low probability high base state (RUSH2). In addition, in the high probability high base state, the second main game pattern is a small winning pattern (2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2nd 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 3, 2_10R pattern 4, 2_10R pattern 5, 2_10R pattern 6, 2_10R pattern 7) and enter the specific area, After the special game, the state may be shifted to the high probability/high base state (RUSH2).

In this embodiment with a small winning pattern (developing into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a small winning game), the variation mode number 97 of the main control unit is the M chance after going through the long reach. It is a variation mode of the SP reach to be executed. When the main control unit determines a small hit in the win/fail determination, the small winning pattern is determined by the pattern content determination means MN40, and the variation mode of the variation mode number 97 is determined by the variation mode determination means MN50, the symbol variation display is started. An instruction command (variation mode information indicating the variation mode number 97, stop symbol information of a small winning symbol, etc.) is transmitted to the sub-controller. The sub control unit selects among the variation patterns of the plurality of sub control units based on the symbol variation display start instruction command (variation mode information indicating variation mode number 97, stop symbol information for small winning symbols, etc.) received from the main control unit to determine the variation pattern of 1. For example, when the variation mode of the main control unit is variation mode number 97 and the first main game symbol is the 1_4R symbol 1, "SP reach (M chance) 1/5" is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit. Then, when the variation mode of the main control unit is variation mode number 97 and the first main game symbol is the 1_4R symbol 2, "SP reach (M chance) 2/5" is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit. Then, when the variation mode of the main control unit is variation mode number 97 and the first main game symbol is the 1_4R symbol 3, "SP reach (M chance) 3/5" is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit. Then, when the variation mode of the main control unit is variation mode number 97 and the first main game symbol is the 1_4R symbol 4, "SP reach (M chance) 4/5" is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit. Then, when the variation mode of the main control unit is variation mode number 97 and the first main game symbol is the 1_4R symbol 5, "SP reach (M chance) 5/5" is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit. configured to be

FIG. 56 is an image diagram of SP reach (M chance) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. In the low-probability-low base state, the 1_4R symbol 1 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the 1st main game symbol starts to fluctuate. Then, in the effect display device SG, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 using the first decorative symbols is executed as shown in FIG. executed. In this small winning game, the rotating body is set so that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 1/5, and the player enters the first big winning hole C10. When the game ball passes through the specific area C12-2, it develops into a special game, and the special game is started from the second round. The special game is completed when the special game is executed up to the fourth round.

Also, in the low-probability base state, the 1_4R symbol 2 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 2/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the first main game symbol When the variation starts, the effect display device SG executes SP reach (M chance) 2/5 using the first decorative symbols as shown in FIG. A game is executed. In this small winning game, the rotating body aspect (the rotating body aspect shown in the V increase effect 2/5) that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 2/5. It is set so that when a game ball that enters the first big winning hole C10 passes through the specific area C12-2, it develops into a special game, and the special game starts from the second round. The special game is completed when the special game is executed up to the fourth round.

Also, in the low probability base state, the 1_4R symbol 3 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 3/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the first main game symbol When the variation starts, SP reach (M chance) 3/5 using the first decorative symbols is executed in the effect display device SG, and after the variation of the first main game symbols stops, the small winning game is executed. In this small winning game, the rotating body mode (the rotating body mode shown in the V increase effect 3/5) is set so that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 3/5. It is set so that when a game ball that enters the first big winning hole C10 passes through the specific area C12-2, it develops into a special game, and the special game starts from the second round. The special game is completed when the special game is executed up to the fourth round.

Also, in the low-probability-low base state, the 1_4R symbol 4 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 4/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the first main game symbol When the variation starts, SP reach (M chance) 4/5 using the first decorative symbols is executed in the effect display device SG, and after the variation of the first main game symbols stops, the small winning game is executed. In this small winning game, the rotating body aspect (the rotating body aspect shown in the V increase effect 4/5) that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 4/5. It is set so that when a game ball that enters the first big winning hole C10 passes through the specific area C12-2, it develops into a special game, and the special game starts from the second round. The special game is completed when the special game is executed up to the fourth round.

In addition, in the low-probability base state, the 1_4R symbol 5 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 5/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the first main game symbol When the fluctuation starts, SP reach (M chance) 5/5 using the first decorative symbols is executed in the effect display device SG, and a small winning game is executed after the fluctuation of the first main game symbols is stopped. In this small winning game, the rotating body mode (the rotating body mode shown in the V increase effect 5/5) in which the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 5/5. It is set so that when a game ball that enters the first big winning hole C10 passes through the specific area C12-2, it develops into a special game, and the special game starts from the second round. The special game is completed when the special game is executed up to the fourth round.

"SP reach (M chance) 1/5", "SP reach (M chance) 2/5", "SP reach (M chance) 3/5", "SP reach (M chance)" as the variation pattern of the sub control unit ) 4/5” is configured to execute a chance-up effect during SP reach. The chance-up production is a production using a ready-to-win background, and if the ready-to-win background is "blue", the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 is 1/5 or more. It is a production that suggests the aspect of the rotating body. The “blue” ready-to-win background is not determined as a rotating body that has a probability of 1/5 entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10, but the first big winning hole C10. As an aspect different from the aspect of the rotating body in which the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 is 1/5, the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 is 2/5. A rotating body mode, a rotating body mode in which the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 is 3/5, a ball entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 A production that can be a rotating body with a probability of 4/5 and a rotating body with a probability of 5/5 entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10. It's becoming

In addition, if the ready-to-win background is “red”, the effect is such that the ball-entering probability in the specific area C12-2 of the first prize-winning hole C10 is 2/5 or more, suggesting a mode of rotation. The "red" ready-to-win background is not determined as a rotating body that has a probability of entering 2/5 in the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10, but the first big winning hole C10. As an aspect different from the aspect of the rotating body in which the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 is 2/5, the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 is 3/5. A rotating body mode, a rotating body mode in which the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 4/5, a ball entering a specific area C12-2 in the first big winning hole C10 It is an effect that there is a possibility that it will be a rotating body with a probability of 5/5. Even if SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is executed on the effect display device SG, SP reach (M chance) 1 being executed is executed by executing the chance up effect of the reach background of "red". It is possible to suggest (notify) that the probability of entering the ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize hole C10 is at least one rank higher than /5.

In addition, if the ready-to-win background is “gold”, the effect is such that the ball-entering probability in the specific area C12-2 of the first prize-winning hole C10 is 3/5 or more, suggesting a form of a rotating body. The ready-to-reach background of "gold" does not determine the aspect of the rotating body that makes the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize hole C10 3/5, but the first big prize hole C10. As an aspect different from the aspect of the rotating body in which the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 is 3/5, the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 is 4/5. The effect is such that there is a possibility that the ball will enter the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize-winning hole C10 with a probability of 5/5. Even if SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is executed on the effect display device SG, SP reach (M chance) 1 is being executed by executing the chance up effect of the reach background of "gold". It is possible to suggest (notify) that the probability of entering the ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize hole C10 is higher than /5 by at least two ranks.

In this way, by generating a chance-up effect in the reach background during the SP reach (M chance), the specific area C12-2 enters the specific area C12-2 as the operation mode of the rotating body C17 in the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game. The specific area ball entry easiness as a ball probability is configured to be higher than the SP reach (M chance) in which the chance-up effect does not occur.

Small winning pattern of 1_4R pattern 1 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning port C10 in the small winning game is 1/5), small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2 (1st in the small winning game The ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 of the big winning opening C10 is 2/5), and the ball entering probability of the specific area C12-2 as the operation mode of the rotating body C17 in the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game. As a small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 3 with high ease of entering the specific area (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the 1st big winning opening C10 in the small winning game is 3/5), 1_4R pattern 4 It has a small winning pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 4/5).

In the low-probability-low base state, the 1_4R symbol 1 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the 1st main game symbol starts to fluctuate. Then, the effect display device SG is configured to execute SP reach (M chance) 1/5 using the first decorative symbol, but in the low-probability-low base state, the 1_4R symbol is used as the main game symbol. It may be configured such that 2 small hits are won and SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control section. In this case, when the first main game symbols start to fluctuate, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 using the first decorative symbols is executed in the effect display device SG as shown in FIG. 56(f). Then, during the SP reach (M chance) 1/5, for example, as shown in FIG. By executing this chance-up effect, the operating mode of the rotating body of the first big winning hole C10 showing that the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is from 1/5 to 2/5. Therefore, in the low-probability base state, the small hit of the 1_4R symbol 2 is won as the main game symbol, and the same specific area as when SP reach (M chance) 2/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit It becomes easy to enter the ball. On the effect display device SG, SP reach (M chance) even when the chance up effect in which blue characters "chance up" is displayed during execution of SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is executed. Although it is configured to continue 1/5, SP reach (M chance) If a chance up effect in which blue letters "chance up" is displayed during execution of 1/5 is executed, SP reach is 1 stage It may be configured so as to develop to a rank-up SP reach (M chance) of 2/5.

Also, in the low-probability base state, the 1_4R symbol 2 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 2/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the first main game symbol When the variation starts, the effect display device SG is configured to execute SP reach (M chance) 2/5 using the first decorative symbol, but in the low-probability-low base state, the second as the main game symbol. A small hit of 1_4R pattern 3 may be won, and SP reach (M chance) 2/5 may be determined as a variation pattern of the sub control unit. In this case, when the first main game symbols start to fluctuate, SP reach (M chance) 2/5 using the first decoration symbols is executed in the effect display device SG. Then, during the SP reach (M chance) 2/5, a chance-up effect is executed by "chance up" in "blue" characters. By executing this chance-up effect, the operating mode of the rotating body of the first big winning hole C10 showing that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is from 2/5 to 3/5. Therefore, in the low probability base state, the small hit of the 1_4R symbol 3 is won as the main game symbol, and the SP reach (M chance) 3/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit Same specific area It becomes easy to enter the ball. On the effect display device SG, SP reach (M chance) even when the chance up effect in which blue characters "chance up" is displayed during execution of SP reach (M chance) 2/5 is executed. You can continue 2/5, or if a chance-up effect is executed in which blue letters "chance up" are displayed during the execution of SP reach (M chance) 2/5, SP reach is ranked one step. You may develop to SP reach (M chance) improved to 3/5.

In addition, the chance-up production by "chance up" of "blue" characters is executed once during SP reach (M chance) 2/5, but SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is executed, SP During execution of reach (M-chance) 1/5, chance-up effect by "chance up" of "red" characters may be executed once. In addition, if a chance-up effect that displays "chance up" in red letters is executed during the execution of SP reach (M chance) 1/5, SP reach (M chance) 3 with SP reach ranked up by two stages. /5.

In addition, in the low-probability base state, the 1_4R symbol 1 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the first main game symbol When the variation starts, the effect display device SG is configured to execute SP reach (M chance) 1/5 using the first decorative symbol, but in the low-probability-low base state, the second as the main game symbol. It may be configured such that a small hit of 1_4R pattern 4 is won, and SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is determined as a variation pattern of the sub control unit. In this case, when the first main game symbols start to fluctuate, the performance display device SG executes SP reach (M chance) 1/5 using the first decorative symbols. Then, during SP reach (M chance) 1/5, a chance-up effect is executed by "chance up" in "gold" characters. By executing this chance-up effect, the operating mode of the rotating body of the first big prize opening C10 showing that the probability of entering the ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 is from 1/5 to 4/5. Therefore, in the low-probability base state, the small hit of the 1_4R symbol 4 is won as the main game symbol, and the SP reach (M chance) 4/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit Same specific area It becomes easy to enter the ball. On the effect display device SG, SP reach (M chance) even when the chance up effect in which gold letters "chance up" are displayed during execution of SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is executed. You can continue 1/5, or if a chance-up effect is executed in which gold letters "chance up" are displayed during the execution of SP reach (M chance) 1/5, SP reach will be ranked in 3 stages. You may develop to SP reach (M chance) 4/5 which improved. In addition, SP reach may be developed to SP reach (M chance) 2/5, which is ranked up by one step, or SP reach (M chance) may be developed to be SP reach (M chance) 3/5, which is ranked up by two steps. However, the ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 is 4/5.

Small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 1 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the 1st big winning opening C10 is 1/5), small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2 (specific area C12 of the 1st big winning opening C10 The specific area entry probability as the ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 as the operation mode of the rotating body C17 in the first big prize opening C10 in the small winning game than the ball entry probability of -2 is 2/5) High 1_4R pattern 3 small winning pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the 1st big winning port C10 is 3/5), 1_4R design 4 small winning pattern (specification of the 1st big winning port C10 The area C12-2 has a ball entry probability of 4/5).

In the low-probability-low base state, the 1_4R symbol 1 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the 1st main game symbol starts to fluctuate. Then, the effect display device SG is configured to execute SP reach (M chance) 1/5 using the first decorative symbol, but in the low-probability-low base state, the 1_4R symbol is used as the main game symbol. It may be configured such that 3 small hits are won and SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub-control section. In this case, when the first main game symbols start to fluctuate, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 using the first decoration symbols is executed in the effect display device SG as shown in FIG. 56(i). Then, during the SP reach (M chance) 1/5, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56(j) and (k), a chance-up effect is executed twice by blue characters "chance up". By executing the chance-up effect by the blue character "chance up" twice, the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 is 1/5 to 3/5. Since it becomes the operation mode of the rotary body of the big winning opening C10, in the low probability base state, the small hit of the 1_4R symbol 3 is won as the main game symbol, and the SP reach (M chance) 3 as the variation pattern of the sub control unit The easiness of entering the specific area is the same as when /5 is determined. In addition, the chance-up production by the blue letter "chance up" is executed twice during the SP reach (M chance) 1/5, but the chance-up production by the red letter "chance up" is executed once. You may do so. When the chance-up effect in which red characters "chance up" is displayed is executed, the SP reach is increased by two stages to SP reach (M chance) 3/5.

Also, in the low-probability base state, the 1_4R symbol 2 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 2/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the first main game symbol When the variation starts, the effect display device SG is configured to execute SP reach (M chance) 2/5 using the first decorative symbol, but in the low-probability-low base state, the second as the main game symbol. A small hit of 1_4R pattern 4 may be won, and SP reach (M chance) 2/5 may be determined as a variation pattern of the sub control unit. In this case, when the first main game symbols start to fluctuate, SP reach (M chance) 2/5 using the first decorative symbols is executed in the effect display device SG. Then, during the SP reach (M chance) 2/5, the chance-up effect by blue letters "chance up" is executed twice. By executing the chance-up effect by the blue character "chance up" twice, the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize opening C10 is 2/5 to 4/5. Since it becomes the operation mode of the rotating body of the big winning opening C10, in the low probability base state, the small hit of the 1_4R symbol 4 is won as the main game symbol, and the SP reach (M chance) 4 as the variation pattern of the sub control unit The easiness of entering the specific area is the same as when /5 is determined. In addition, during SP reach (M chance) 1/5, for example, the chance-up effect by the blue character "chance up" is executed twice, but the chance-up effect by the red character "chance up" is 1 It may be executed several times.

In this way, in the case of the 1_4R symbol 1 as the main game symbol, the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is set to 1/5, and the main game symbol is set to 1/5. In the case of the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2, the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning port C10 in the small winning game is set to 2/5, and the small of the 1_4R pattern 3 as the main game pattern In the case of a winning pattern, the ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is set to 3/5, and in the case of the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 4 as the main game pattern, the small winning. When the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the game is set to 4/5, and the main game pattern is the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 5, the first big winning hole in the small winning game The ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 of C10 is set to 5/5.

In other words, rather than the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 1, the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2, the small hitting pattern of the 1_4R pattern 3, the small hitting pattern of the 1_4R pattern 4, and the small hitting pattern of the 1_4R pattern 5 The game pattern is configured to have a higher specific area entry easiness as the ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 as an operation mode of the rotating body C17 in the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game. In addition, the main game pattern of the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 3, the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 4, and the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 5 is a small winning game rather than the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2. , as the operation mode of the rotating body of the first big prize opening C10, the specific area C12-2 is configured to have a high probability of entering a ball as a ball entering probability. In addition, the main game symbols of the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 4 and the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 5 are more likely to rotate than the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 3 in the small winning game. As the motion mode of the body, the easiness of entering the specific area as the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is configured to be high. In addition, the main game pattern of the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 5 is more specific than the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 4 as the operation mode of the rotating body of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game. The probability of entering a ball in a specific area of 2 is set to be high.

A conventional pachinko game machine that develops from a small winning game and becomes a special game shifts to a time shortening game state (eg, low probability base state) after the special game. Then, it is configured so that only one reservation on the second main game side can be stored, and a special game developed from a small winning game with a relatively high continuation rate (for example, 80%) using the second main game pattern. It is a pachinko machine that repeats games. In addition, pachinko game machines have been developed that have a plurality of reserves on the second main game side and develop from a small win game to become a special game. Further improvement is needed.

Based on the fact that the main game pattern is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the 1_4R pattern 1 (first specific mode), SP reach (M chance) 1/5 (first specific effect) during the pattern fluctuation Executed, and based on the fact that the main game pattern is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the 1_4R pattern 2 (second specific mode), SP reach (M chance) 2/5 (second specific mode) during symbol fluctuation production), but the main game pattern is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the 1_4R pattern 1 (first specific mode), the small winning game start demonstration is executed. During the time, the pattern fluctuation of the main game pattern has stopped, but the SP reach (M chance) 1/5 (first specific effect) is executed, and the main game pattern is the 1_4R pattern 2 (second specific mode ), the pattern variation of the main game pattern is stopped during the execution time of the small winning game start demo, but SP reach (M chance) 2/5 (second It may be configured to execute a second specific effect). In this case, even if SP reach (M chance) 1/5 or SP reach (M chance) 2/5 is executed over the execution time of the small winning game start demo from the pattern fluctuation of the main game pattern. Good, during the pattern fluctuation of the main game pattern, normal reach production and normal pattern fluctuation production are executed, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 and SP reach (M chance) during the execution time of the small hit game start demo You can do 2/5.

In addition, based on the fact that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the 1_4R symbol 1 (first specific mode) and the 1_4R symbol 2 (second specific mode), the execution time of the small hit game start demo It was configured to execute SP reach (M chance) 1/5 (first specific effect) and SP reach (M chance) 2/5 (second specific effect) during the game. Although pattern fluctuation of game patterns is stopped, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 (first specific effect) and SP reach (M chance) 2/5 (second specific effect) are configured to be executed. may In this case, from the pattern fluctuation of the main game pattern, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 or SP reach (M chance) over the execution time of the small winning game via the small winning game start demonstration 2/5 may be executed continuously, or during the pattern fluctuation of the main game pattern and during the small winning game start demonstration, the normal reach production and the normal pattern fluctuation production are executed, and during the execution time of the small winning game. SP reach (M chance) 1/5 or SP reach (M chance) 2/5 may be executed.

In addition, during the execution time of the small winning game start demo, during the small winning game, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 (first specific effect), SP reach (M chance) 2/5 (second specific effect) Although it was made to be executed, it is not limited to the effect of SP reach, and the aspect of the rotating body such that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize hole C10 is 1/5 or 2/5 1/5 effect (first specific effect) that suggests that the probability of entering the ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize hole C10 is 1/5, the first big prize hole It may be configured to execute a 2/5 effect (second specific effect) suggesting that the ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 of C10 is 2/5.

As the small winning pattern (stop display mode of the specific mode), it has the 1_4R pattern 1 (first specific mode) and the 1_4R pattern 2 (second specific mode), and the game to the specific area C12-2 As aspects related to the ease of entering a ball, an aspect with a probability of entering a ball of 1/5 (first ease of entering a ball aspect) and an aspect with a probability of entering a ball of 2/5 (second ease of entering a ball aspect). have. Based on the fact that the main game symbol is scheduled to be stopped or displayed stopped at the 1_4R symbol 1, the first specific effect of SP reach (M chance) 1/5 or 1/5 effect is executed, and the main Based on the fact that the game symbol is scheduled to be stopped or displayed stopped at the 1_4R symbol 2, it is configured to execute the second specific effect of SP reach (M chance) 2/5 or 2/5 effect. ing. In addition, the main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the 1_4R symbol 1, so that the probability of the game ball entering the specific area C12-2 is 1/5, and the main game symbol is the 1_4R symbol 2. , the probability of a game ball entering the specific area C12-2 is 2/5.

By constructing in this way, in the game property of becoming a special game developed from a small win game in a low-probability/low-base state, not only does the presence or absence of winning of a small win be aroused, but also a specific area when a small win is won. By suggesting (announcing) the probability of entering a ball (V winning expectation) in advance by the type of production (for example, the type of SP reach) during pattern fluctuation, during the small winning game start demonstration, or during the small winning game (for example, the type of SP reach) The playability of the conventional ready-to-win effect, which has been used only for the suggestion (notification), can be further enhanced. In addition, not only do you feel the expectation of the visual expectation (SP reach performance) on the performance display device SG, but also the mechanical expectation of the rotating body C17 (V increase mode of rotating body "V" increase of performance) ), you can feel the expectation level, and you can give double the visual excitement. In addition, the accuracy of the degree of expectation of the special game is different from the conventional one (because the degree of expectation of the special game simply doubles according to the number of "V" by the "V" increase effect, is 20% (1/5), 40% (2/5), 60% (3/5), 80% (4/5), 100% (5/5), etc. becomes very clear.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between small winning symbols and prefetch effects. In this embodiment with a small winning pattern (developing into a special game when entering a specific area during a small winning game), the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 1 (the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game The probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is 1/5), and the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 as the operation mode of the rotating body C17 in the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game. It has a small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2 with high ball easiness (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 2/5).

Based on the look-ahead information (holding number information, win/fail information, pattern information, variation mode information) received from the main control unit, the sub-control unit determines whether there is information that can be a trigger hold in the hold on the second main game side. It is determined whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect when there is information that can cause trigger suspension. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the look-ahead performance is to be executed, the type of the look-ahead performance that can be executed is selected from a plurality of types of look-ahead performance. As look-ahead effects, there are a button vibrator look-ahead effect in which the sub-input button SB vibrates and a button pop-out look-ahead effect in which the sub-input button SB pops out (a specific small hit look-ahead effect).

The button vibrator look-ahead performance is a look-ahead performance for announcing that a small win is won by vibrating a sub-input button from a pattern variation before trigger suspension, and is executed until the trigger suspension pattern variation. The button vibrator look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect in which the sub-input button vibrates at the start of pattern variation prior to trigger suspension and trigger suspension pattern variation, and there are two vibration patterns. The first pattern is a short vibration pattern in which the sub-input button vibrates for a short period of time, and by executing the button vibration look-ahead effect of this short vibration pattern, it is notified that a small win has been won. It is configured. The second pattern is a long vibration pattern in which the sub-input button vibrates for a long period of time, and by executing the button vibration look-ahead effect of this long vibration pattern, a small win is won and a small win is won. It is configured to inform that the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 is 3/5 or more as the operation mode of the rotating body C17 in the first big winning hole C10 in the game. The button vibe look-ahead effect is weak SP reach of the main game section fluctuation mode numbers 35 to 45 ⇒ SP reach M battle fluctuation mode, main game section fluctuation mode numbers 46 to 53 weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle CU × 1 variation mode, the variation mode of weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle CU×2 of the variation mode numbers 54 to 57 of the main game part, etc. can be trigger pending.

Here, the variation mode of the weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle of the variation mode numbers 35 to 45 (variation mode information) of the main game part is the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 1 (the first big winning opening in the small winning game The ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 of C10 corresponds to 1/5), and the weak SP reach of the main game section's variation mode numbers 46 to 53 (variation mode information) ⇒ SP reach M battle CU x 1 The variation mode corresponds to the small winning pattern of the 1_4R symbol 2 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 2/5), and the variation mode of the main game part The variation mode of weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle CU × 2 of numbers 54 to 57 (variation mode information) is the small winning pattern of the 1 _ 4 R pattern 3 (the specific area C12 of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game - 2's ball entry probability corresponds to 3/5).

In other words, the button vibe prefetch effect of the short vibe pattern is that the trigger suspension is the 1_4R pattern 1 small hit pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small hit game is 1/5) , 1_4R pattern 2 small hit pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning port C10 in the small hit game is 2/5), 1_4R design 3 small hit pattern (first in the small hit game It is configured to be executed in the case of a small winning pattern with a ball entry probability of 3/5) in the specific area C12-2 of the 1st prize winning opening C10.

Long vibe pattern button vibe look-ahead is a small hit with a trigger hold of the 1_4R pattern 3 small hit pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small hit game is 3/5) It is configured to be executed in the case of symbols.

The button pop-out look-ahead effect (specific small hit look-ahead effect) is a look-ahead effect that notifies that a small win is won by popping up the sub-input button at the timing of winning a prize with the trigger pending, and is a pop-out pattern. There are two patterns as The first pattern is a pop-out pattern without vibration in which the sub-input button pops out without vibrating, and a small win is won by executing the button pop-out look-ahead effect of this pop-out pattern without vibration; , It is configured to notify that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is 2/5 or more as the operation mode of the rotating body C17 in the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game. The second pattern is a pop-out pattern with vibration that pops out after the sub-input button vibrates, and a small win is won by executing the button pop-out look-ahead effect of this pop-out pattern with vibration; , It is configured to notify that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is 3/5 or more as the operation mode of the rotating body C17 in the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game. The button pop-out look-ahead effect is the main game section's variation mode number 46-53 weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M Battle CU x 1 variation mode, the main game section's variation mode number 54-57 weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M It is configured so that the variation of battle CU×2 and the like can be trigger pending.

Here, the variation mode of the weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle CU × 1 of the variation mode numbers 46 to 53 of the main game part is the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2 (the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game The ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 corresponds to 2/5), and the variation mode of weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle CU x 2 of the variation mode numbers 54 to 57 of the main game part is the 1_4R pattern It corresponds to 3 small winning symbols (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 3/5).

In other words, the button pop-out look-ahead effect of the pop-out pattern without a vibe is that the trigger suspension is the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 2/5 ) is configured to be executed in the case of a small winning pattern.

The button pop-out look-ahead effect of the pop-out pattern with vibe is that the trigger hold is the small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 3 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small hit game is 3/5). It is configured to be executed in the case of a small winning pattern.

The small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 1 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 1/5) is a trigger for the button pop-out look-ahead effect (specific small-hit lookahead effect) Although it is configured so as not to be suspended (configured not to win in the pre-reading judgment of the sub control unit), the small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2 (the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 in the small hit game The ball entry probability is 2/5) is configured to be able to hold the trigger of the button pop-out look-ahead effect (a specific small hit look-ahead effect) (configured to be able to win in the look-ahead judgment of the sub control unit) . In addition, the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 1 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning port C10 in the small winning game is 1/5) and the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2 (small winning game 2/5 in the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10) can be a trigger suspension of a button vibe look-ahead effect that is different from the button pop-out look-ahead effect (a specific small hit look-ahead effect). It is configured as follows (configured to be able to win in the pre-reading determination of the sub control unit). In addition to the button vibrator look-ahead effect and the button pop-out look-ahead effect, for example, a hold change effect, which is the effect of the effect display device SG, is provided. It is executed in the case of the small winning pattern of the pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 2/5), and if it is a money holding change effect, the trigger holding is the second It may be configured to be executed in the case of the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 3 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 3/5).

As the small winning pattern (stop display mode of the specific mode), it has the 1_4R pattern 1 (first specific mode) and the 1_4R pattern 2 (second specific mode), and the game to the specific area C12-2 As aspects related to the ease of entering a ball, an aspect with a probability of entering a ball of 1/5 (first ease of entering a ball aspect) and an aspect with a probability of entering a ball of 2/5 (second ease of entering a ball aspect). have. Based on the fact that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the 1_4R symbol 1, the probability of the game ball entering the specific area C12-2 becomes 1/5, and the main game symbol is the 1_4R symbol 2. Based on the fact that the game ball is stopped and displayed, the probability of the game ball entering the specific area C12-2 is 2/5. Also, as a result of the look-ahead determination, if there is a trigger hold that will be the 1_4R symbol 1 (under a situation that satisfies the first condition), the main game symbol will be stopped and displayed at the 1_4R symbol 1 It is possible to execute a button vibe look-ahead effect (first look-ahead effect) that suggests or informs in advance that the If the condition is satisfied), it seems that it is possible to execute a button pop-out look-ahead effect (second look-ahead effect) that suggests or informs in advance that the main game symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed at the 1_4R symbol 2 is configured to Then, as a result of the look-ahead determination, in a situation where there is a trigger suspension of the 1_4R pattern 1 (under a situation where the first condition is satisfied), it is configured to limit the execution of the button pop-out look-ahead effect. .

By configuring in this way, conventionally, only the existence of a small hit was notified in advance by a look-ahead effect, but the probability of entering a specific area ( In a pachinko machine with different V winning expectations, not only does it suggest (announce) the degree of expectation for a small win at the time of prior suggestion by a look-ahead effect, but it also indicates the input of a specific area when a small win is won. Even the ball probability (V winning expectation) can be suggested (notified) in advance. In other words, it is possible to simultaneously suggest (inform) two expectations, ie, the degree of expectation for a small win that can trigger a special game and the degree of expectation that a special game can be played when the small win is won.

In the modified example having the 1_10R symbol as the small winning symbol of the first main game symbol, the small winning symbol of the 1_10R symbol is the small winning symbol of the 1_4R symbol 1 (the specific area of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game The ball entry probability of C12-2 is 1/5, and the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game is 3 rounds), the rotating body in the first big winning port C10 in the small winning game As the operation mode of C17, the specific area C12-2 has a high ball-entering probability as the specific area C12-2 (the ball-entering probability of the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 2/5, It is configured so that the number of execution rounds of the special game is 9 rounds when the small win game develops into the special game.

Specifically, the 1_10R symbol is 10 rounds (small It is a pattern that develops into a special game of 1 round in a winning game and 9 rounds in a big win developed from a small win. In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, a low-probability-low base state), the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied, and the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the 1_10R symbol indicating a small win, and this small win is achieved. A special game is executed when the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 during the small hit game, and the time shortening game state (for example , low probability high base state).

As look-ahead effects, there are a button vibrator look-ahead effect in which the sub-input button SB vibrates and a button pop-out look-ahead effect in which the sub-input button SB pops out (a specific small hit look-ahead effect). The button vibrator look-ahead performance is a look-ahead performance for notifying that a small win is won by vibrating a sub-input button from a pattern variation before the trigger suspension, and is executed until the trigger suspension pattern variation. The button vibrator look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect in which the sub-input button vibrates at the start of pattern variation before trigger suspension and trigger suspension pattern variation, and there are two vibration patterns. The first pattern is a short vibration pattern in which the sub-input button vibrates for a short period of time, and by executing the button vibration look-ahead effect of this short vibration pattern, it is notified that a small win has been won. It is configured. The second pattern is a long vibration pattern in which the sub-input button vibrates for a long period of time, and by executing the button vibration look-ahead effect of this long vibration pattern, a small win is won and a small win is won. It is configured to inform that the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 is 3/5 or more as the operation mode of the rotating body C17 in the first big winning hole C10 in the game. Button vibe look-ahead effect is weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle variation mode of main game part variation mode numbers 35 to 45, weak SP reach of main game part variation mode number 46 to 53 ⇒ SP reach M battle CU × 1 variation mode, the variation mode of weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle CU×2 of the variation mode numbers 54 to 57 of the main game part, etc. are configured to be trigger pending.

Here, the variation mode of the weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle of the variation mode numbers 35 to 45 of the main game part is the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 1 (the specific area C12 of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game -2 ball entry probability corresponds to 1/5), and the variation mode of weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle CU × 1 of the variation mode number 46 to 53 of the main game part is the small hit of the 1 _ 10 R pattern It corresponds to the pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 2/5), and the weak SP reach of the main game unit variation mode numbers 54 to 57 ⇒ SP reach The variation mode of the M battle CU×2 corresponds to the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 3 (the ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game is 3/5).

In other words, the button vibe prefetch effect of the short vibe pattern is that the trigger suspension is the 1_4R pattern 1 small hit pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small hit game is 1/5) , 1_10R pattern small winning pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning port C10 in the small winning game is 2/5), 1_4R small winning pattern 3 (first in the small winning game It is configured to be executed in the case of a small winning pattern with a ball entry probability of 3/5) in the specific area C12-2 of the big winning opening C10.

Long vibe pattern button vibe look-ahead is a small hit with a trigger hold of the 1_4R pattern 3 small hit pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small hit game is 3/5) It is configured to be executed in the case of symbols.

The button pop-out look-ahead effect (specific small hit look-ahead effect) is a look-ahead effect that notifies that a small win is won by popping up the sub-input button at the timing of winning a prize with the trigger pending, and is a pop-out pattern. There are two patterns as The first pattern is a pop-out pattern without vibration in which the sub-input button pops out without vibrating, and a small win is won by executing the button pop-out look-ahead effect of this pop-out pattern without vibration; , It is configured to notify that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is 2/5 or more as the operation mode of the rotating body C17 in the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game. The second pattern is a pop-out pattern with vibration that pops out after the sub-input button vibrates, and a small win is won by executing the button pop-out look-ahead effect of this pop-out pattern with vibration; , It is configured to notify that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is 3/5 or more as the operation mode of the rotating body C17 in the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game. The button pop-out look-ahead effect is the main game section's variation mode number 46-53 weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M Battle CU x 1 variation mode, the main game section's variation mode number 54-57 weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M It is configured so that the variation mode of battle CU×2 and the like can be trigger pending.

Here, the variation mode of weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle CU × 1 of the variation mode numbers 46 to 53 of the main game part is the small winning pattern of the 1_10R pattern (specification of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game The ball entry probability of the area C12-2 corresponds to 2/5), and the variation mode of the weak SP reach ⇒ SP reach M battle CU × 2 of the variation mode numbers 54 to 57 of the main game part is the 1_4R pattern 3 (The probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 3/5).

In other words, the button pop-out look-ahead effect of the pop-out pattern without vibe is that the trigger is held, the small hit pattern of the 1_10R pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small hit game is 2/5) It is configured to be executed in the case of a small winning pattern.

The button pop-out look-ahead effect of the pop-out pattern with vibe is that the trigger hold is the small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 3 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small hit game is 3/5). It is configured to be executed in the case of a small winning pattern.

The small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 1 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 1/5) is a trigger for the button pop-out look-ahead effect (specific small-hit lookahead effect) Although it is configured so as not to be suspended (configured not to win in the prefetch judgment of the sub control unit), the small winning pattern of the 1_10R pattern (the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game The probability of entering the ball is 2/5) is configured (configured to be able to win in the look-ahead determination of the sub control unit) so that the trigger of the button pop-out look-ahead effect (specific small hit look-ahead effect) can be held. In addition, the small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 1 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning port C10 in the small winning game is 1/5) and the small winning pattern of the 1_10R pattern (the first big prize The probability of entering the ball in the specific area C12-2 of the mouth C10 is 2/5) is configured to be able to hold the trigger of the button vibe look-ahead effect that is different from the button pop-out look-ahead effect (specific small hit look-ahead effect) (sub It is configured so that it can be won by the pre-reading judgment of the control unit). In addition to the button vibe look-ahead effect and the button pop-out look-ahead effect, for example, a hold change effect, which is the effect of the effect display device SG, is provided. It is executed in the case of the small winning pattern of the pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 1/5), and if it is a money holding change effect, the trigger holding is the second It may be configured to be executed in the case of a small winning symbol of 1_10R symbol (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 2/5).

In addition, as the small winning design, the small winning design of the 1_4R design 1 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game is 1/5) and the small winning design of the 1_10R design (The ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 2/5) was shown as an example. As the operation mode of the rotating body C17, the small hit pattern of the relationship that the specific area entry ease as the ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 is high or low A winning pattern <a small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 3 <a small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 4 <a small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 5) may be used.

In addition, the small winning pattern A1 (the probability of entering the ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first large winning opening C10 in the small winning game is one of 1/5 to 5/5, and the small winning game has developed into a special game A small winning pattern B1 (first big winning port C10 in a small winning game) in which the number of rounds of a special game when developing from a small winning game to a special game is larger than the number of rounds of the special game executed at the time is, for example, 3 rounds. The number of execution rounds of the special game when it develops from a small winning game to a special game, for example, 9 rounds, is included in the specific area C12-1.

In the small winning pattern A1, the specific area entry easiness as the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first large winning opening C10 in the small winning game differs corresponding to the small winning pattern (1/5, 2/ 5, 3/5, 4/5, and 5/5), and is configured to execute a V challenge performance as a V performance in accordance with the determined small winning pattern. there is The V challenge effect is a V challenge effect of 1/5 of the rotating body (the motion mode of the rotating body C17 is (a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion, and the effect on the effect display device SG is a V challenge of 1/5 rotating body). effect), V challenge effect of rotating body 2/5 (V challenge motion of rotating body C17 is (b) 2/5 pattern, V challenge effect of rotating body 2/5 as effect on effect display device SG) , Rotating body 3/5 V challenge effect (Rotating body C17 operates in (c) 3/5 pattern V challenge motion, Rotating body 3/5 V challenge effect as effect on effect display device SG), rotation Body 4/5 V challenge effect (rotating body C17 has a (d) 4/5 pattern V challenge motion, rotating body 4/5 V challenge effect as effect on effect display device SG), rotating body 5 /5 V challenge effect (the motion mode of the rotating body C17 is (e) 5/5 pattern V challenge motion, and the V challenge effect of rotating body 5/5 is provided as the effect on the effect display device SG).

On the other hand, the small winning pattern B1 is configured to enter the specific area C12-1 of the first large winning opening C10 in the small winning game, and the game ball entered during the small winning game follows the straight V route. It is configured such that when it passes through, it (substantially) 100% enters the specific area C12-1 (a straight V aspect). Then, as the V production, a direct V production {rank-up direct V production (rank-up production A, B, C, D), non-rank-up direct V production, direct V production (rank-up production E)} is executed. is configured to

In this embodiment having a small winning pattern (developing into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a small winning game), the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from a small winning game to a special game is 9 rounds. As the small winning pattern A2, the small winning pattern of the 2_10R pattern 3 (the probability of entering the ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game is 1/5, and the small winning game develops into a special game The number of execution rounds of the special game is 9 rounds, the rotation body 1/5 V challenge effect, the operation mode of the rotation body C17 is (a) 1/5 pattern V challenge operation), 2_10R pattern 4 small hit Design (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning port C10 in the small winning game is 2/5, the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game is 9 rounds, the rotating body 2/5 V challenge production, the operation mode of the rotating body C17 is (b) 2/5 pattern V challenge operation), the small winning pattern of the 2_10R pattern 5 (the specific area of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game The ball entry probability of C12-2 is 3/5, the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game is 9 rounds, the V challenge effect of the rotating body 3/5, and the operation mode of the rotating body C17 (c) 3/5 pattern V challenge operation), 2_10R pattern 6 small winning pattern (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 4/5, small winning game The number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from to the special game is 9 rounds, the V challenge effect of the rotating body 4/5, the operation mode of the rotating body C17 is (d) 4/5 pattern V challenge operation), 2_10R The small winning pattern of the pattern 7 (the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first large winning opening C10 in the small winning game is 5/5, and the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game 9 rounds, V challenge effect of rotating body 5/5, action mode of rotating body C17 is provided with 5 small winning patterns of (e) V challenge action of 5/5 pattern).

In addition, as the small winning pattern B2 in which the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game is 9 rounds, the small winning pattern of the 2_10R pattern 2 (the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game It is configured to enter the specific area C12-1, and the game ball entered during the small hit game passes through the direct V route and enters (substantially) 100% in the specific area C12-1 (a form of direct V ), the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game is 9 rounds, and direct V production (non-rank-up direct V production) is provided. Incidentally, as the small winning symbol B2, in the small winning game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol of the 2_10R symbol 2, when the ball does not enter the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning hole C10, the small winning It is constructed such that a game ball entered during a game passes through the straight V route, passes through the V challenge route, and flows into the rotating body C17. At that time, since the motion mode of the rotating body C17 is configured to execute the (e) 5/5 pattern V-challenge motion, it is configured to (substantially) 100% enter the specific area C12-2. ing. With this configuration, even if the ball does not enter the specific area C12-1 on the direct V route, the ball will enter the specific area C12-2 on the V challenge route, so the special game can be executed reliably. is configured to As for the effect, it may be configured to execute the V-challenge effect of the rotator 5/5.

Furthermore, as a small winning symbol C2 in which the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game is 9 rounds, the small winning symbol of the 2_10R symbol 1 (the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game It is configured to enter the specific area C12-1, and the game ball entered during the small hit game passes through the direct V route and enters (substantially) 100% in the specific area C12-1 (a form of direct V ), the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game is 9 rounds, and direct V production (non-rank-up direct V production) is provided. As the small winning symbol C2, if the ball does not enter the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol of the 2_10R symbol 1, the small winning It is constructed such that a game ball entered during a game passes through the straight V route, passes through the V challenge route, and flows into the rotating body C17. At that time, since the motion mode of the rotating body C17 is configured to execute the (e) 5/5 pattern V-challenge motion, it is configured to (substantially) 100% enter the specific area C12-2. ing. With this configuration, even if the ball does not enter the specific area C12-1 on the direct V route, the ball will enter the specific area C12-2 on the V challenge route, so the special game can be executed reliably. is configured to As for the effect, it may be configured to execute the V challenge effect of rotating body 5/5.

In addition, as the small hit patterns described later, the 2_8R pattern 1, the 2_8R pattern 2, the 2_7R pattern 1, the 2_7R pattern 2, the 2_6R pattern 1, the 2_6R pattern 2, and the 2_3R pattern 1 are the small hit patterns. Similarly, when the ball does not enter the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning port C10 in the small winning game based on the stop display, the game ball entered during the small winning game passes through the direct V route. and flows into the rotating body C17 via the V-challenge route. With this configuration, even if the ball does not enter the specific area C12-1 on the direct V route, the ball will enter the specific area C12-2 on the V challenge route, so the special game can be executed reliably. is configured to At that time, since the motion mode of the rotating body C17 is configured to execute the (e) 5/5 pattern V-challenge motion, it is configured to (substantially) 100% enter the specific area C12-2. ing. As for the effect, it may be configured to execute the V challenge effect of rotating body 5/5.

The small winning pattern A2, the small winning pattern B2 and the small winning pattern C2 are small winning patterns in which the number of execution rounds of the special game when the small winning game develops into the special game is the same 9 rounds. Among the five small-hit patterns of the small-hit pattern A2, the small-hit pattern of the 2_10R pattern 3, the small-hit pattern of the 2_10R pattern 4, the small-hit pattern of the 2_10R pattern 5, and the small-hit pattern of the 2_10R pattern 6 The ball-entering probability of the specific area (specifically, the specific area C12-2) of the first big winning hole C10 in the winning game is 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, and 4/5, respectively. It is configured to execute a V-challenge effect in which the ball entering the area is not confirmed. On the other hand, the specific area (specifically, the specific area C12-1) has a ball-entering probability (approximately) of 100%, and is configured to execute a direct V effect in which the ball is confirmed to enter a specific area. In addition, regarding the small winning symbol of the 2_10R symbol 7, the probability of entering the specific area (specifically, the specific area C12-2) of the first big winning hole C10 is 5/5, and the probability of entering the specific area is 5/5. It is configured to execute a V-challenge effect in which the entry of the ball is confirmed.

That is, the specific area entry easiness as the probability of entering the specific area of the first large winning opening C10 in the small winning game is small winning symbol A2<small winning symbol B2=small winning symbol C2. In addition, the V effect that indicates the ease of entering the specific area as the probability of entering the specific area of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is the V challenge effect of the small winning pattern A2<Direct V of the small winning pattern B2. Production = Direct V production of small hit pattern C2.

When a small hit is won, the small winning pattern A2 of the second main game pattern is the 2nd_10R pattern 3 small winning pattern, the 2_10R small winning pattern 4, the 2_10R small winning pattern 5, the 2nd_10R small winning pattern 5, When either the small winning symbol of 2_10R symbol 6 or the small winning symbol of 2_10R symbol 7 is determined, the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation, and when the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed. Sometimes, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are configured to display "537" respectively. Here, either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern may be hidden, and only one of them may display "537". As a modified example, if the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, the second main game symbol will not be stopped and displayed, but the next second main game symbol will start to fluctuate, or the second main game symbol will be displayed. During the small winning game or the special game executed after the stop display of the two main game symbols, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols may be configured to display "537" respectively. Here, either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern may be hidden, and only one of them may display "537".

When a small win is won and a small win pattern of the 2_10R pattern 2 is determined as the small win pattern B2 of the second main game pattern, the power is turned off during the pattern fluctuation and the power is restored during the pattern fluctuation. In this case, when the second main game symbols are stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are configured to display "777" respectively. Here, either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern may be hidden, and only one of them may display "777". As a modified example, if the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, the second main game symbol will not be stopped and displayed, but the next second main game symbol will start to fluctuate, or the second main game symbol will be displayed. During the small winning game or special game executed after the stop display of the two main game symbols, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols may be configured to display "777" respectively. Here, either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern may be hidden, and only one of them may display "777".

When a small win is won and a small win pattern of the 2_10R pattern 1 is determined as the small win pattern C2 of the second main game pattern, the power is turned off during the pattern fluctuation and the power is restored during the pattern fluctuation. In this case, when the second main game symbols are stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are configured to display "222" respectively. Here, either the first decorative design or the second decorative design may be hidden, and only one of them may display "222". As a modification, if the power is turned off during the symbol fluctuation and the power is restored during the symbol fluctuation, the second main game symbol will not be stopped and displayed, but the next second main game symbol will start to change, or the second main game symbol will be displayed. During the small winning game or the special game executed after the stop display of the two main game symbols, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols may be configured to display "222" respectively. Here, either the first decorative design or the second decorative design may be hidden, and only one of them may display "222".

As a small winning pattern, it has a 2_10R pattern 3 (first specific mode) and a 2_10R pattern 2 (second specific mode). When a ball enters a specific area during execution of a small winning game executed based on the main game symbol being stopped and displayed at the 2_10R symbol 3, a specific number of unit games (for example, 10 times) are performed. Execute the special game to be executed. Even when the ball enters the specific area during the execution of the small winning game executed based on the main game symbol being stopped and displayed at the 2_10R symbol 2, the unit game is performed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times). It is configured to execute a special game to be executed. In addition, as aspects related to the ease of entering a game ball into a specific area, there are aspects in which the probability of entering a ball is 1/5 (first ease of entering a ball), /5 aspect (second ball entry ease aspect), and the probability of a game ball entering a specific area is 1 based on the fact that the main game symbol is stop-displayed at the 2_10R symbol 3. /5 mode, and the main game symbol is stop-displayed at the 2_10R symbol 2, so that the probability of a game ball entering the specific area is approximately 100% or the probability of entering a ball is 5/5. It is configured. Then, in a situation where the power supply is interrupted during the variable display of the main game symbols, and then the power is restored and the variable display of the main game symbols is resumed, the main game symbols are completed by completing the variable display of the restarted main game symbols. When the game symbols are stopped and displayed at the 2_10R symbol 3, the final mode of the performance symbols is set to "537" (first mode), and the main game is completed by completing the variable display of the restarted main game symbols. When the symbol is stop-displayed at the 2_10R symbol 2, the final mode of the performance symbol is configured to be "777" (second mode).

By configuring in this way, the probability of entering a ball in a specific area (V winning expectation) in the case of winning a small hit is either a V challenge operation mode or a direct V mode (in the effect display device SG) If it is a production mode, depending on whether it is a V challenge production or a direct V production), the first decorative pattern displayed when the power is restored after the power is turned off during the pattern fluctuation, By varying the display tendency of the second decorative symbols, it is possible to properly notify the player of the degree of advantage after the power is restored. For example, in the case of a V-challenge motion in which the entry of a ball into a specific area is not confirmed, the misunderstanding by the player is prevented by not displaying doubles, which is a mode indicating development to a special game. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent players from being confused by notifying a mode indicating that a special game will develop if the ball entering the specific area is (substantially) determined to be a straight V. can.

Furthermore, depending on whether it is a V challenge action in which the ball entering the specific area is not fixed or the ball entering the specific area is (substantially) a fixed straight V, the pattern is fluctuating. By differentiating the display tendencies of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern displayed when the power is restored after the power is turned off, it is possible to appropriately inform the player of the degree of advantage after the power is restored. . For example, in the case of a V-challenge motion in which the entry of a ball into a specific area is not confirmed, the misunderstanding by the player is prevented by not displaying doubles, which is a mode indicating development to a special game. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent players from being confused by notifying a mode indicating that a special game will develop if the ball entering the specific area is (substantially) determined to be a straight V. can.

Although the example in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed when the power is restored has been shown, only the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is displayed. You don't have to. Further, it is possible to display only the second decorative design without displaying the first decorative design.

As a pattern different from the small winning pattern C2 in which the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game is 9 rounds, the number of executing rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game is different. It has a small winning pattern D2 in which the number of rounds is less than 9 rounds and the probability of entering a specific area (specifically, the specific area C12-1) is the same.

Then, as the small winning pattern D2, the small winning pattern of the 2_8R pattern 1 (configured to enter the specific area C12-1 of the first large winning opening C10 in the small winning game, the game entered during the small winning game Constructed so that the ball passes through the direct V route and enters the specific area C12-1 (approximately) 100% (a form of direct V), and the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from a small winning game to a special game is 7 rounds, direct V effect (rank up direct V effect)), 2 _ 8 R pattern 2 small hit pattern (configured to enter the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small hit game, A game ball entered during a small winning game passes through a straight V route and enters (approximately) 100% in a specific area C12-1 (mode of straight V), developing from a small winning game to a special game. When the special game is executed, the number of rounds is 7 rounds, the direct V effect (non-rank up direct V effect)), the small hit pattern of the 2_7R pattern 1 (in the small hit game, the specific area C12 of the first big winning opening C10 -1, so that the game ball entered during the small winning game passes through the straight V route and enters (approximately) 100% in the specific area C12-1 (a form of straight V) Configuration, number of execution rounds of special game when developing from small winning game to special game is 6 rounds, Direct V production (rank up direct V production)), 2 _ 7R pattern 2 small winning pattern (No. It is configured to enter the specific area C12-1 of the 1st prize winning opening C10, and the game ball entered during the small winning game passes through the straight V route and enters the specific area C12-1 (abbreviated) 100%. (mode of direct V), the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from a small winning game to a special game is 6 rounds, direct V production (non-rank up direct V production)), 2_6R pattern 1 Small winning pattern (configured to enter the specific area C12-1 of the first large winning opening C10 in the small winning game (a form of direct V), the game ball entered during the small winning game is a direct V route Passing through the specific area C12-1 (abbreviated) 100% entering the ball, the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from a small hit game to a special game is 5 rounds, direct V production (rank up direct V effect)), 2 _ 6 R pattern 2 small winning pattern (configured to enter the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning port C10 in the small winning game, the game ball entered during the small winning game It is configured to pass through the V route and enter the specific area C12-1 (approximately) 100% (a form of direct V), and special when developing from a small hit game to a special game The number of execution rounds of another game is 5 rounds, direct V production (non-rank up direct V production)), small hit pattern of 2_3R pattern 1 (to specific area C12-1 of first big winning port C10 in small winning game Constructed to enter the ball, configured so that the game ball entered during the small winning game passes through the straight V route and enters (substantially) 100% in the specific area C12-1 (a form of straight V), small The number of execution rounds of the special game when the winning game develops to the special game is 2 rounds, and seven small winning patterns of direct V performance (direct V performance) are provided.

Although it does not occur in the small winning pattern B2, it has a specific performance (rank up performance) that occurs during the small winning game of the small winning pattern C2 and the small winning pattern D2 or during the special game start demonstration. Then, the display mode of the specific effect (rank-up effect) is configured to differ depending on whether it is the small-hit symbol C2 or the small-hit symbol D2. Note that the display mode of the specific effect (rank-up effect) may be the same.

Here, the specific effect (rank-up effect) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 49, the specific effect (rank-up effect) is a small winning pattern of the 2_10R pattern 1 (in a small winning game, the ball is configured to enter the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning hole C10). , The game ball entered during the small winning game passes through the direct V route and enters the specific area C12-1 (approximately) 100% (a mode of becoming a straight V), and from the small winning game to the special game The number of execution rounds of the special game at the time of development is 9 rounds, direct V production (rank up direct V production)), 2_8R pattern 1 small winning pattern (specific area C12 of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game -1, so that the game ball entered during the small winning game passes through the straight V route and enters (approximately) 100% in the specific area C12-1 (a form of straight V) Configuration, number of execution rounds of special game when developing from small winning game to special game is 7 rounds, Direct V production (rank up direct V production)), 2 _ 7 R pattern 1 small winning pattern (No. It is configured to enter the specific area C12-1 of the 1st prize winning opening C10, and the game ball entered during the small winning game passes through the straight V route and enters the specific area C12-1 (abbreviated) 100%. (mode of direct V), the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from a small winning game to a special game is 6 rounds, direct V production (rank up direct V production)), 2_6R pattern 1 Small winning pattern (configured to enter the specific area C12-1 of the first large winning opening C10 in the small winning game, the game ball entered during the small winning game passes through the direct V route and passes through the specific area C12-1 2 (abbreviated) 100% entry (a form of direct V), the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from a small hit game to a special game is 5 rounds, direct V production (rank up direct V It is an effect that is executed during the special game start demonstration after the game ball enters the specific area V12-1 during the small winning game after winning with the small winning pattern of production)).

In addition, this specific effect (rank-up effect) is the small winning pattern of the 2_3R pattern 1 (the number of rounds in the small winning game is It is configured to enter the specific area C12-1 of the 1st prize winning opening C10, and the game ball entered during the small winning game passes through the straight V route and enters the specific area C12-1 (abbreviated) 100%. (mode of direct V), the number of execution rounds of the special game when it develops from the small winning game to the special game is 2 rounds, and the direct V effect (direct V effect)) is not executed. However, the rank-up effect E may be executed as the rank-up effect. When the rank-up performance E is executed, it is determined that the minimum number of execution rounds of the special game is 2 rounds when the small win game develops into the special game.

A specific performance (rank-up performance) is a performance that ranks up to a special game with more rounds than 2, pretending to be 2 rounds, which is the minimum number of execution rounds of a special game when developing from a small winning game to a special game. is. There are four types of specific effects (rank-up effects), and the order of rank-up effects A<rank-up effects B<rank-up effects C<rank-up effects D is high, and the special game is highly expected to be ranked up. It is configured.

The rank-up effect A is displayed such that points are displayed on the effect display device SG each time the sub-input button is pressed, and the display of the points is added. The sub-input button can be pressed three times, and the total points for the three times are the number of balls that can be obtained in the subsequent special game (corresponding to the number of rounds that can be executed).

The displayed points are the display of the number of balls to be obtained, and are configured so that the points are displayed as follows.
(1) +0
(2) +150 (number of balls for one round)
(3) +300 (number of balls for 2 rounds)
(4) +450 (number of balls for 3 rounds)
(5) +600 (number of balls for 4 rounds)
(6) +750 (number of balls for 5 rounds)
(7) +900 (number of balls for 6 rounds)
(8) +1050 (number of balls for 7 rounds)
(9) +1200 (number of balls for 8 rounds)
(10) +1350 (number of balls for 9 rounds)
For example, when the rank is to be raised to a special game of 10 rounds at once, +1350 (number of balls for 9 rounds) is displayed, the second and third times are displayed as +0, and then the total +1350 is displayed. is configured to display Also, if the display is divided into three times, +300 (number of balls for 2 rounds) is displayed for the first time (3 rounds of special games are confirmed in appearance), and +450 (for 3 rounds) is displayed for the second time. The number of balls played) is displayed (6 rounds of special games are confirmed in total), and +600 (4 rounds of special games are confirmed in total) is displayed for the third time (10 rounds of special games are confirmed in total). After that, +1350, which is the total points, is displayed. In addition, +300 (number of balls for 2 rounds) is displayed for the total points of 3 times, and in the subsequent round game during the special game, the rank is further increased (+300 (number of balls for 2 rounds) during the round game) display).

In the rank-up performance B, points are displayed on the performance display device SG by repeatedly hitting the sub-input button, and the display of the points is displayed so as to be added each time the sub-input button is repeatedly hit. The effective time of the sub-input button is set to 8 seconds, and the total points are displayed based on the elapse of the effective time. This total point is the number of balls that can be obtained in the subsequent special game (corresponding to the number of executable rounds).

The displayed points are the display of the number of balls to be obtained, and are configured so that the points are displayed as follows.
(1) +0
(2) +15 (the number of balls released corresponding to one ball entering the big prize opening)
(3) +30 (the number of balls released corresponding to entering two balls into the grand prize opening)
(4) +45 (the number of balls released corresponding to the fact that 3 balls entered the grand prize opening)
(5) +60 (the number of balls released corresponding to entering 4 balls into the grand prize opening)
(6) +75 (the number of balls released corresponding to entering 5 balls into the grand prize opening)
(7) +90 (the number of balls released corresponding to entering 6 balls into the grand prize opening)
(8) +105 (the number of balls released corresponding to entering 7 balls into the grand prize opening)
(9) +120 (the number of balls released corresponding to 8 balls entering the grand prize opening)
(10) +135 (the number of balls released corresponding to 9 balls entering the grand prize opening)
(11) +150 (number of balls for one round)
(12) +300 (number of balls for 2 rounds)
(13) +450 (number of balls for 3 rounds)
(14) +600 (number of balls for 4 rounds)
(15) +750 (number of balls for 5 rounds)
(16) +900 (number of balls for 6 rounds)
(17) +1050 (number of balls for 7 rounds)
(18) +1200 (number of balls for 8 rounds)
(19) +1350 (number of balls for 9 rounds)
For example, there are 10 operations during the effective time of 8 seconds, +15, +30, +120, +60, +15, +90, +105, +150, +45, +120, and then the total +750 of . This +750 is determined to be 6 rounds or more of the special game. In addition, +750 (the number of balls for 5 rounds) may be displayed as the total points for consecutive hits, and the rank may be further increased in the subsequent round game during the special game.

In the rank-up effect C, the sub-input button pops out, and points are displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the popped-out sub-input button with one blow. The points are the number of balls that can be obtained in the subsequent special game. This rank-up performance C is a performance executed when the number of balls that can be obtained in the subsequent special game becomes maximum, and the number of execution rounds of the special game when it develops into the special game is 9 rounds. It is a production that shows.

The displayed points are the display of the number of balls to be obtained, and are configured so that the points are displayed as follows.
(1) +150 (number of balls for one round)
(2) +300 (number of balls for 2 rounds)
(3) +450 (number of balls for 3 rounds)
(4) +600 (number of balls for 4 rounds)
(5) +750 (number of balls for 5 rounds)
(6) +900 (number of balls for 6 rounds)
(7) +1050 (number of balls for 7 rounds)
(8) +1200 (number of balls for 8 rounds)
(9) +1350 (number of balls for 9 rounds)
For example, +900 is displayed by one operation, and then the total +900 is displayed in an enlarged manner. This +900 is determined to be 7 rounds or more of the special game. In addition, +750 (the number of balls for 5 rounds) may be displayed as the total points for consecutive hits, and the rank may be further increased in the subsequent round game during the special game.

The rank-up effect D is a effect that does not require operation of the sub-input button. This rank-up performance D is a performance executed when the number of balls that can be obtained in the subsequent special game becomes maximum, and the number of execution rounds of the special game when it develops into the special game is 9 rounds. It is a production that shows.

Also, in the rank-up effect D, based on the look-ahead information received from the main control unit (holding number information, win/fail information, pattern information, variation mode information), the sub-control unit controls the second main game side in the special game start demonstration. A mode in which a small win is won and a direct V is made in the reserve (may be in the reserve of the first main game side or in the reserve of both the first main game side and the second main game side). When it is determined whether or not there is a winning pattern to execute (direct V effect), and it is determined that there is a winning pattern to execute a mode (direct V effect) that results in a small win and a direct V, Displaying a V chance icon (displaying a "V icon" on the effect display device SG) (for example, displaying two "V"s) when an image object promoting the operation of the sub-input button is displayed. It is configured to be able to execute the consecutive manor look-ahead effect B.

In the case where the second main game side's hold (or the first main game's side's hold) is executed in the rank-up effect D, the second main game side's hold may be performed, and the first main game side and the second main game side It indicates that it is confirmed that there are two or more reserves related to small winning symbols that execute a direct V mode (direct V effect) in the state of direct V (may be within both reserves on the main game side) (The number of "V" displays corresponds to the number of reservations related to small winning symbols that execute a direct V mode (direct V effect)).

The read-ahead effect B within the hold of the rank-up effect D may be in the hold on the second main game side (it may be in the hold on the first main game side, or in the first main game) based on the operation of the sub-input button. A number of specials corresponding to the number of small winning symbols (for example, 2) that executes the direct V mode (direct V effect) of the side and the second main game side may be held) It is configured to display (for example, display two "V"s) a V chance icon (a "V icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG) as an icon.

It should be noted that the second main game side hold (may be in the first main game side hold, or may be in the hold of both the first main game side and the second main game side) It was explained that the number of V chance icons as special icons corresponding to the number of small winning symbols that execute the V mode (direct V effect) is displayed. All the numbers of small winning symbols in the form of direct V (may be in the reserve of the main game side, or may be in the reserve of both the first main game side and the second main game side) Two examples are shown, but if it is on hold on the second main game side, it is possible to display up to 4 corresponding to the number of holds of 4, and on the hold on the first and second main game sides. If there is, it is possible to display 8 corresponding to the maximum number of 8 on hold). A V chance icon corresponding to the number of reservations won by lottery, etc., may be displayed.

For example, by judging whether or not there is a small hit winning holding that executes a direct V mode in the holding of the second main game side by the sub control unit, the holding of the second main game side during the special game Suppose that it is determined that there is a reserve in which a small win is won in which four direct Vs are executed. In the case of executing the reservation internal rendezvous production B, any reservation (four in this example) that has won a small win can be subject to the execution of the reserving internal redevelopment production B, and any small win will be won. It is constructed so that it can be a lottery target for execution of the reservation inner renso effect B for the reservations (4 pieces in this example). In this example, 4 reservations are subject to the execution of the reservation internal resou performance B and the lottery target for the execution, and as a result of the lottery, the reservation internal resou production B is executed for the reservations that have won two small prizes. do. In this example, in the suspension inner renso effect B, two V-chance icons are displayed because two are determined as execution targets for the four suspensions. Further, it is constructed so as not to be subject to the lottery for the execution of the re-holding-in-residence production B again with respect to the holding of the two small wins on which the V-chance icon is displayed. For the two small wins for which the V chance icon was not displayed (as a result of the lottery, the small win for executing the mode of two direct Vs that were not subject to the execution of the pending internal rendezvous production B) , during the execution of the next round or the next special game (including during the special game start demonstration), it is configured to be a lottery target for the execution of the pending internal rendezvous effect B again.

In addition, in the rank-up effect D, based on the look-ahead information received from the main control unit (holding number information, win/fail information, pattern information, variation mode information) Small hit winning and V challenge operation during suspension (may be in suspension on the first main game side, or may be in suspension on both the first main game side and the second main game side). Determining whether or not there is a winning pattern for executing a mode (V challenge performance), and determining that there is a winning pattern for executing a mode (V challenge performance) in which a minor winning and V challenge action is performed, When an image object prompting the operation of the sub-input button is displayed, the on-hold continuous pre-reading effect A of super M chance icon (displaying "M icon" on the effect display device SG) may be executed.

In the case where the second main game side's hold (or the first main game's side's hold), the first main game side and the second It is confirmed that there are two or more reserves related to small winning symbols that execute a mode (V challenge effect) that becomes a V challenge operation (may be within both holds on the main game side). ing.

The read-ahead effect A within the hold of the rank-up effect D may be in the hold on the second main game side (it may be in the hold on the first main game side, or in the first main game) based on the operation of the sub-input button. The number of specials corresponding to the number of small winning symbols (for example, two) that executes the mode (V challenge effect) that becomes the V challenge action (which may be held on both the side and the second main game side) It is configured to display (for example, display two "M") a super M chance icon ("M icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG) as an icon.

It should be noted that the V of the reserve on the second main game side (it may be in the reserve on the first main game side, or it may be in the reserve on both the first main game side and the second main game side) Although it has been explained that the number of super M chance icons as special icons corresponding to the number of small winning symbols that execute the challenge action mode (V challenge effect) is displayed, It may be in the hold of the first main game side, or it may be in the hold of both the first main game side and the second main game side). All the number of winning symbols (two examples are shown, but if it is in the hold of the second main game side, it is possible to display up to 4 corresponding to the number of reservations of 4, the first main game side and the second If it is in the hold of the main game side, it is possible to display a maximum of 8 corresponding to the number of holds of 8). A super M chance icon corresponding to the number of holds won by a pre-order lottery, pre-order lottery, etc. may be displayed.

For example, the second main game side during the special game by determining whether or not there is a small hit winning reservation that executes a V challenge operation in the second main game side reservation by the sub control unit Suppose that it is determined that there is a hold in which a small win has been won by executing a mode of four V-challenge actions. In the case of executing the reservation internal rendezvous performance A, any reservation (four in this example) that has won a small win can be subject to the execution of the reserving internal rendezvous performance A, and any small win will be won. It is constructed so that it can be a lottery target for execution of the reservation internal rendezvous effect A for the reservations (four pieces in this example). In this example, four reservations are the objects for the execution of the reservation internal rendezvous production A and the lottery targets for the execution, and as a result of the lottery, the reservation internal resou production A is executed for the reservations that have won two small prizes. do. In this example, in the suspension inner rendezvous effect A, two super M chance icons are displayed because two of the four suspensions are determined to be executed. Further, it is constructed so as not to be subject to lottery for the second execution of the suspension inner-recessor performance A with respect to the suspension of the two small wins on which the super M chance icon is displayed. For the two small wins for which the super M chance icon was not displayed (as a result of the lottery, the small win for executing the aspect of the two V-challenge actions that were not subject to execution of the pending inner Renso production A) In other words, during the next round or the next special game (including during the special game start demonstration), it is configured to be a lottery target for the execution of the pending internal rendezvous effect A again. Incidentally, in the rank-up effect D, an example has been shown in which it is determined that two or more small winning symbols are reserved in the reservation, but the number may be one. In addition, an example is shown in which the pre-reading determination of whether or not there is a small winning pattern in the sub game part is executed during the special game start demonstration, but during the pattern fluctuation, during the small winning start demonstration, during the small winning game, and during the big winning game It may be executed at a predetermined timing such as during the period.

The rank-up effect E is a small winning pattern of the 2_3R pattern 1 in which the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game is the minimum two rounds (the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game It is configured to enter the specific area C12-1, and the game ball entered during the small hit game passes through the direct V route and enters the specific area C12-1 (substantially) 100% (a form of direct V ), the number of execution rounds of the special game when developing from the small winning game to the special game is 2 rounds, and the direct V effect (direct V effect)) is configured to be executed. . When the rank-up performance E is executed, it is determined that the number of execution rounds of the special game when the small win game develops into the special game is the minimum two rounds.

The rank-up effects A to E may be configured to suggest a round for rank-up or a special icon to be obtained according to the background color or the like at the time of the rank-up effect. When configured in this way, in the case of a red background, the rank-up to a special game of 6 rounds or more is confirmed, and in the case of a gold background, the rank-up to a special game of 6 rounds or more is confirmed and a special icon (for example, An example of obtaining at least one or more of "V icon", "M icon") can be cited.

In addition, the V chance icon is based on the prefetch information (holding number information, win/fail information, pattern information, variation mode information) received from the main control unit. It may be in the hold of the side, or it may be in the hold of both the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side). It is determined whether or not there is a winning pattern to be executed, and when it is determined that there is a winning pattern to execute a mode of winning a small win and a straight V (direct V effect), a V chance icon (" The effect of displaying the V-chance icon is set to be the pre-reading effect B on hold.

In addition, the super M chance icon is based on the prefetch information (holding number information, win/fail information, pattern information, variation mode information) received from the main control unit. It may be in the reserve of the game side, or it may be in the reserve of both the first main game side and the second main game side. and when it is determined that there is a winning pattern for executing a small winning and V challenge operation (V challenge performance), a super M chance icon (effect display device SG ("M icon" is displayed on the screen), and the effect of displaying the super M chance icon is assumed to be a reservation prefetch effect A.

In addition, in the second round, which is the first round in which the special game is started, and in subsequent rounds, as special icons, a V chance icon ("V icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG), a super M chance icon ( "M icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG). In the rank-up effect A, rank-up effect B, and rank-up effect C, in addition to the display of points, V chance icons as special icons ("V icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG), super M chance icons (effect display ) is displayed on the device SG.

In the rank-up effect A, the timing of displaying the V chance icon (displaying "V icon" on the effect display device SG) and super M chance icon (displaying "M icon" on the effect display device SG) as special icons. is performed when the sub-input button is pressed three times, and when the sub-input button is operated, it is determined that there is a winning pattern to execute the mode of winning and direct V (direct V effect) within the hold when the sub input button is operated. And, if there is a hold determined that there is a winning pattern to execute a mode (V challenge effect) that becomes a small win and a V challenge operation, a lottery based on the operation of the sub-input button (such as a lottery foreseeing the lottery in the hold) Although it is configured to be displayed, it may be displayed without being based on the operation of the sub-input button.

In the rank-up effect B, the timing of displaying the V chance icon (displaying "V icon" on the effect display device SG) and super M chance icon (displaying "M icon" on the effect display device SG) as special icons. is performed when pressing the sub-input button repeatedly, and when the sub-input button is operated, it is determined that there is a winning pattern to execute the mode of winning and direct V (direct V effect) within the hold when operating the sub input button. , If there is a hold that determines that there is a winning pattern to execute a mode of winning a small win and a V challenge action (V challenge performance), a lottery based on the operation of repeatedly hitting the sub-input button (such as a lottery foresight within the reserve) Although it is configured to be displayed by , it may be displayed without being based on the operation of repeatedly hitting the sub-input button.

In rank-up effect A, rank-up effect B, and rank-up effect C, a V chance icon (“V icon” is displayed on the effect display device SG) and a super M chance icon (“M icon” is displayed on the effect display device SG) as special icons. icon") is displayed, a maximum of one icon may be displayed, but a plurality of icons may be displayed. In the case of rank-up effect A and rank-up effect B, the special icons appear by pressing the "+V icon" or "+M icon" on the display of the number of points earned during the operation game during the valid time of the sub-input button. indicate. In the case of the rank-up effect C, "V chance" is displayed in a large size at the same time as the points are displayed by pressing the protruded sub-input button with one blow. Note that only one type of special icon (for example, only "V icon"; for example, only "M icon") may be displayed. In addition, the timing of displaying the special icon is determined by a lottery to determine whether or not to display the special icon based on the ball entering the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20, or the right general winning hole P20. As a result, a special icon may be displayed when it is determined to display. Furthermore, the number of special icons to be displayed may be determined by a lottery, or the number of special icons to be displayed may be determined based on the number of balls entering the first big winning hole C10, the second big winning hole C20, or the right general winning hole P20. It may be determined by lottery.

The specific production (rank-up production) is a production performed during the execution time of the special game start demonstration, but during the execution time of the small winning game start demonstration, during the small winning game, during the execution time of the small winning game end demonstration, special It may be executed in the second round, which is the first round when the game is started, in subsequent rounds, during the execution period of the special game end demo, or may be executed multiple times at multiple timings. When configured in this way, the sub-control unit may be in the reserve of the second main game side (may be in the reserve of the first main game side, or the first main Determining whether or not there is a winning pattern for executing a mode (direct V effect) in which a small win is won and a direct V is performed (may be held on both the game side and the second main game side); Winning a small hit in the reserve of the second main game side (may be in the reserve of the first main game side, or may be in the reserve of both the first main game side and the second main game side), and It is preferable to determine whether or not there is a winning symbol for performing a V-challenge motion mode (V-challenge effect).

Based on the look-ahead information received from the main control unit (holding number information, success/failure information, pattern information, variation mode information), the sub-control unit is in the hold of the second main game side (in the hold of the first main game side and (or may be in the hold of both the first main game side and the second main game side). When it is determined that there is a (trigger hold), a read-ahead effect in the hold (for example, a read-ahead effect A in the hold that displays "M icon" on the effect display device SG, and a "V icon" in the effect display device SG) 2 which is the first round in which the special game is started during the execution time of the small winning game start demonstration, during the small winning game, during the execution time of the small winning game end demonstration. An example of execution during the execution period of the first round, the subsequent rounds, and the special game end demo was shown, but it may be executed during the symbol variation.

When configured in this way, based on the look-ahead information (holding number information, win/fail information, pattern information, variation mode information) received from the main control unit, the sub-control unit wins a small hit in the hold of the second main game side and It is determined whether or not there is a winning pattern for executing a mode of V challenge operation (V challenge performance), and a winning pattern is held (trigger When it is determined that there is a suspension), it is configured to execute a reservation-in-reservation look-ahead effect A for displaying a super M chance icon (displaying "M icon" on the effect display device SG) during symbol fluctuation. Just do it.

In addition, based on the look-ahead information (holding number information, win/fail information, pattern information, variation mode information) received from the main control unit, the sub-control unit wins a small hit and becomes a direct V in the hold of the second main game side. It is determined whether or not there is a winning pattern to execute (direct V performance), and if there is a hold (trigger hold) that will be a winning pattern to execute a mode of winning a small win and a direct V (direct V performance) It is only necessary to execute the on-hold consecutive house look-ahead effect B for displaying a V chance icon (displaying a "V icon" on the effect display device SG) when it is determined. When executing the look-ahead effect during the design change, the displayed special icon (for example, "V icon", "M icon") is displayed (resident) on the effect display device SG until the pattern change is completed. It is configured to keep Further, it may be configured to display a plurality of special icons (for example, “V icon” and “M icon”) in one on-hold continuous-home look-ahead effect. Alternatively, only one type of special icon (for example, only "V icon"; for example, only "M icon") may be displayed.

Suspension pre-reading effect executed during pattern change (for example, Suspension pre-reading effect A displaying "M icon" on the effect display device SG, In-hold pre-reading effect A displaying "V icon" on the effect display device SG The following timings are exemplified as execution timings of the consecutive manor look-ahead effect B, etc.).
(1) The timing immediately before the operation of the sub-input button indicating the success or failure of the SP reach effect (timing after (j2) in FIG. 131 and before (k2) in FIG. 132)
(2) The timing of displaying the SP reach title in the SP reach production (the timing after (i2) in FIG. 131 and before (k2) in FIG. 132 or (m) in FIG. timing)
(3) Timing at which the normal screen is displayed after the failure effect is displayed when the SP reach effect in the SP reach effect fails and then the effect is revived and the effect succeeds (4) Confirmation of the first decorative pattern of the failure when to stop

In addition, the pre-reading effect in the reservation that is executed during the pattern change (for example, the pre-reading effect A in the reservation that displays the "M icon" on the effect display device SG, and the "V icon" that displays the "V icon" in the effect display device SG) The following timings in (b)-(l) of FIG.
(b) Accompanied by the fulfillment of the condition for starting the variation of the first main game symbols, the suspension is canceled, and the first decorative symbols of the left, middle and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols are displayed. Timing for executing action 1 at the start of fluctuation when starting fluctuation display (c) Timing for executing acceleration fluctuation for the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns at which fluctuation display is started (d) Acceleration fluctuation Timing at which the first decorative symbols in the executed left, middle, and right columns perform high-speed variation (e) Timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left column that performed high-speed variation perform deceleration variation (f) Left column Timing at which the first decorative symbol performs fixed position action 1 (g) Timing at which the first decorative pattern in the right column that has performed high-speed variation performs deceleration variation (h) The first decorative pattern in the right column performs fixed position action 1 (i) Timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the deceleration variation (j) Timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the fixed-position action 1 (k) The first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed-position action 1 Timing (l) Timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern executes re-variation

In addition, the pre-reading effect in the reservation that is executed during the pattern change (for example, the pre-reading effect A in the reservation that displays the "M icon" on the effect display device SG, and the "V icon" that displays the "V icon" in the effect display device SG) The following timings in (m) to (x) of FIG.
(m) Timing to execute action 2 at the start of fluctuation when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start re-fluctuation (pseudo-run) (n) Left row, middle row where re-fluctuation is started , Timing when the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the acceleration variation (o) Timing when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns that have performed the acceleration variation perform the high speed variation (p) Execution of the high speed variation Timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column performs slowdown variation (q) Timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column performs fixed position action 2 (r) The first decorative symbol in the right column that performed high-speed variation Timing for executing deceleration variation (s) Timing for the first decorative symbol in the right column to execute the fixed position action 2 (t) Timing after the first decorative pattern in the right column executes the fixed position action 2 (u) Left Timing at which the first decorative symbols in the row and right column perform tenpai action 1 (v) Timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns perform shake action 1 (w) Simulated consecutive symbols perform deceleration fluctuation Timing (x) Timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the fixed position action 2

In addition, the pre-reading effect in the reservation that is executed during the pattern change (for example, the pre-reading effect A in the reservation that displays the "M icon" on the effect display device SG, the "V icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG) The following timings in (y) to (j2) of FIG.
(y) Timing at which the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 2 (z) Timing at which the pseudo-continuous pattern executes re-variation (a2) Re-variation in the left, middle, and right columns (pseudo-continuous) Timing to execute action 3 at the start of fluctuation when starting (b2) Timing to execute acceleration fluctuation for the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns that started re-variation (c2) Acceleration fluctuation was executed At the timing when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform high-speed variation (d2) At the timing when the first decorative symbol in the left column, which has performed high-speed variation, performs deceleration variation (e2) Timing when 1 decorative symbol performs fixed position action 3 (f2) Timing when the first decorative pattern in the right column that has performed high speed variation performs deceleration variation (g2) The first decorative symbol in the right column performs fixed position action 3 Timing to execute (h2) Timing after the first decorative pattern in the right column executes fixed position action 3 (i2) Timing for the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns to execute Tenpai Action 2 (j2) Left column And the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the right column performs the shaking action 2

Also, the following timings in (k2) to (n2) of FIG. 132 are illustrated.
(k2) Timing at which the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes fixed position action 3 (l2) Timing (m2) at which the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right The timing (n2) at which the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns perform the shaking fluctuation is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns perform the fixed stop.

In the low-probability-low base state, the 1_4R symbol 1 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the 1st main game symbol starts to fluctuate. Then, in the effect display device SG, SP reach (M chance) 1/5 using the first decorative symbols is executed, and after the fluctuation of the first main game symbols is stopped, a small winning game is executed. In this small winning game, the rotating body is set so that the probability of entering the ball in the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 1/5, and the player enters the first big winning hole C10. When the game ball passes through the specific area C12-2, it develops into a special game, and the special game is started from the second round. The special game is completed when the special game is executed up to the fourth round.

In the low probability base state, the 1st_4R symbol 2 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 2/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the 1st main game symbol starts to fluctuate. Then, in the effect display device SG, SP reach (M chance) 2/5 using the first decorative symbols is executed, and after the fluctuation of the first main game symbols is stopped, a small winning game is executed. In this small winning game, the rotating body aspect (the rotating body aspect shown in the V increase effect 2/5) such that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 2/5. It is set so that when a game ball that enters the first big winning hole C10 passes through the specific area C12-2, it develops into a special game, and the special game starts from the second round. The special game is completed when the special game is executed up to the fourth round.

In the low-probability-low base state, the 1_4R symbol 3 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 3/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the 1st main game symbol starts to fluctuate. Then, in the effect display device SG, SP reach (M chance) 3/5 using the first decorative symbols is executed, and after the fluctuation of the first main game symbols is stopped, a small winning game is executed. In this small winning game, the rotating body aspect (the rotating body aspect shown in the V increase effect 3/5) that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 3/5. It is set so that when a game ball that enters the first big winning hole C10 passes through the specific area C12-2, it develops into a special game, and the special game starts from the second round. The special game is completed when the special game is executed up to the fourth round.

In the low-probability-low base state, the 1_4R symbol 4 small hit is won as the main game symbol, SP reach (M chance) 4/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub-control part, and the 1st main game symbol starts to fluctuate. Then, in the effect display device SG, SP reach (M chance) 4/5 using the first decorative symbols is executed, and after the fluctuation of the first main game symbols is stopped, a small winning game is executed. In this small winning game, the rotating body aspect (the rotating body aspect shown in the V increase effect 4/5) that the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 4/5. It is set so that when a game ball that enters the first big winning hole C10 passes through the specific area C12-2, it develops into a special game, and the special game starts from the second round. The special game is completed when the special game is executed up to the fourth round.

In the low-probability-low base state, the 1st_4R symbol 5 small hit is won as the main game symbol, the SP reach (M chance) 5/5 is determined as the variation pattern of the sub control unit, and the 1st main game symbol starts to fluctuate. Then, in the effect display device SG, SP reach (M chance) 5/5 using the first decorative symbols is executed, and after the fluctuation of the first main game symbols is stopped, a small winning game is executed. In this small winning game, the rotating body mode (the rotating body mode shown in the V increase effect 5/5) in which the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 is 5/5. It is set so that when a game ball that enters the first big winning hole C10 passes through the specific area C12-2, it develops into a special game, and the special game starts from the second round. The special game is completed when the special game is executed up to the fourth round. In this way, the small winning pattern (small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 1, small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2, small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 3, small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 4, small winning pattern of the 1_4R pattern 5 The ball-entering probability of the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is different according to the winning pattern).

FIG. 58 is an image diagram of an effect using the rotator icon displayed on the effect display device SG. While the production symbols (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) on the first main game side are fixed and stopped in the non-time-reduced game state, and during the pattern fluctuation of the production patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) , rotator icon (specific effect), are displayed in the lower area of the effect display device SG. It should be noted that it may be a variation mode of a time-reduced game state instead of a non-time-reduced game state, or a symbol variation of a second main game symbol instead of a symbol variation of a first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of a first main game symbol. It may be the design variation of the first decorative design corresponding to the variation. It has a first element (the number of "V" holes) and a second element (the degree of cracking of the rotating body icon, the color of light emitted from the cracks of the rotating body icon) as change elements of the display mode of the rotating body icon. The first element (the number of "V" holes) of the rotator icon displayed during the pattern variation suggests (informs) the possibility of winning a small win, and also indicates the possibility of winning a small win. Ease of entry into specific area C12-2 as ball entry probability of specific area C12-2 {ease of entry of game ball into specific area C12-2 It suggests (informs) the degree (aspect related to ease of entry of a game ball into a specific area)}. Suggestion (announcement) of the degree of expectation for winning a small prize according to the aspect indicated by the second element of the rotating body icon displayed during the pattern variation (the degree of cracking of the rotating body icon, the color of light emitted from the crack of the rotating body icon) )are doing.

The effect using the image object of the rotating body icon (rotating body icon effect) is performed when the design for effect (first decorative design, second decorative design) in (a) of FIG. As shown, the rotator icon image object is always rotating about one axis. Among the image objects of the rotating body icon, there are a total of five rotating body image objects { In the figure (a), 1 "V" and 4 "outside"} are included, and the value indicating the number of "V" {1/5 in the figure (a)} of the image object It is included.

(b) During the pattern fluctuation of the production pattern (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern), the rotating body icon destruction production (the cracking of the rotating body icon as the production of the second element, light emission from the crack effect) and the "V" hole change effect as the effect of the first element.

(c) During the pattern fluctuation of the production pattern (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern), the value indicating the number of "V" as a result of the "V" hole change production as the production of the first element The (first element) becomes 2/5, and the step of the step-up effect described later as the effect of the rotating body icon destruction effect (rotating body icon cracking effect, light emitting effect from the crack) as the effect of the second element. number is greater than (b).

(d) shows a mode in which the rotating body icon destruction effect as the effect of the second element fails while the pattern for effect (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) is changing, and (c) 2/5 as the value (first element) indicating the number of "V" as a result of the "V" hole change effect as the effect of the first element shown in , returns to 1/5 of the initial value However, the 2/5 may be left unchanged and may be displayed continuously during the subsequent pattern variation. Then, during the continuous pattern fluctuation, the value indicating the number of "V" corresponding to 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, and 5/5, and the effect that the image object of the rotating body is displayed ( For example, V challenge production) may be executed.

(e) During the pattern fluctuation of the production pattern (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern), it shows a mode in which the rotating body icon destruction production as the production of the second element succeeds. , the image object of the body of rotation icon is destroyed, and the image object of the value indicating the number of "V" and the image object of the body of rotation displayed in the image object of the body of rotation icon are displayed in an enlarged state. be.

In this example, 2/5 as a value (first element) indicating the number of "V" as a result of the "V" hole change effect as the effect of the first element shown in (c) is enlarged and displayed. , and the image object of the body of rotation displayed in the image object of the icon of the body of revolution (in the figure of (e), two "V" and three "outside") are enlarged and displayed. However, values indicating the number of "V" corresponding to 3/5, 4/5, 5/5 different from 2/5, and 3/5, 4/5, 5/5 different from 2/5. An image object of a rotating body corresponding to 5 may be displayed. In addition, it is configured to determine that the small winning is won by executing the success effect of the rotator icon and completely destroying the rotator icon. Further, when the success effect of the rotating body icon destruction effect is executed, the development to the SP reach is determined. Also, for example, when developing into SP reach at 2/5 as shown in (e), a value indicating the number of "V" corresponding to 3/5, 4/5, 5/5 during SP reach, An effect (for example, a V-challenge effect) in which an image object of a rotating body is displayed may be executed. Although an example of executing the success effect of destroying the image object of the rotating body icon as the effect of the second element only when the small win has been won has been shown, , as the effect of the second element, a failure effect in which the image object of the rotating body icon cannot be destroyed may be executed. In that case, it may be constructed such that the failure performance is once executed and then revived to perform the success performance, or the performance of winning a small prize may be executed after the failure performance. It should be noted that the effect using the rotating body icon (rotating body icon effect) is displayed when the pattern (a) for the effect (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) is confirmed and stopped in the losing pattern. Although an example is shown, the display may be started during the pattern fluctuation of the pattern for effect (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) of (b).

Also, the rotating body icon effect is configured as follows. The first element (the number of "V" holes) is the specific area as the ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 as the operating mode of the rotating body of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game when the small winning is won. Ease of ball entry {degree of ease of entry of game ball into specific area C12-2 (aspect related to ease of entry of game ball into specific area)} is suggested (informed), but for example , the first element = 2/5 indicates 2/5 or more, and the specific region entry probability as the entry probability of the specific region C12-2 of 3/5, 4/5, and 5/5 Ball easiness {degree of easiness of entry of game ball into specific area C12-2 (aspect related to easiness of entry of game ball into specific area)} is shown. In other words, it suggests (reports) that the mode of the V-challenge operation becomes 2/5 or more when a small hit is won. In addition, the first element is configured to suggest (notify) the possibility of winning a small prize, but the timing of (b) and (c) before the success of the rotation icon destruction effect. , when a certain value (for example, 3/5) or more is displayed, it is configured to indicate that the small hit is decided. Further, when a certain value (for example, 3/5) or more is displayed, it may be determined that the rotating body icon destruction effect will be a success effect. It may be suggested (informed) that the change mode of the SP reach M battle will be achieved by achieving a success effect in the rotating body icon destruction effect. Since the variation mode of the SP reach M battle corresponds to the settlement of the small hit winning, it suggests (reports) the small winning win.

The second element (the degree of cracking of the rotating body icon, the color of light emitted from the crack of the rotating body icon) is indicated by, for example, a step-up rendering showing the degree of cracking of the rotating body icon and the color of light emitted from the crack. As step-up 1, it becomes white light emission with small cracks. As a step-up 2, it emits blue light with small cracks. As step-up 3, green light is emitted during cracks. As step-up 4, it becomes orange light emission in the crack. As a step-up 5, it has become a crack-sized red light emission.

In addition, this step-up effect suggests (reports) the reach, the type of reach, and the degree of expectation for winning a small hit. Step-up 1 suggests potential reach. Step-up 2 suggests that it will be more variable than reach. Step-up 3 suggests that it will be more variable than reach. Step-up 4 suggests that it will be a variation mode more than weak SP reach. Step-up 5 suggests that it will be a variation of the SP reach M battle. Since the variation mode of the SP reach M battle corresponds to the settlement of the small hit winning, the step-up 5 substantially suggests (reports) the small winning win.

As a small hit design, it has a 1_4R design 1 (first specific mode) and a 1_4R design 2 (second specific mode). As aspects related to the ease of entry of a game ball into the specific area C12-2, an aspect with an entry probability of 1/5 (first ease of entry) and an aspect with an entry probability of 2/5 (second A mode in which the probability of entering a game ball into the specific area C12-2 is 1/5 based on the fact that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the 1_4R symbol 1. Then, based on the fact that the main game symbol is stop-displayed at the 1_4R symbol 2, the probability of a game ball entering the specific area C12-2 is 2/5. Then, during the variable display of the main game symbols, a rotating body icon effect (specific effect) can be executed on the effect display device SG. The rotator icon effect is configured so that the mode of ease of entry of a game ball into a specific area differs based on the mode of the small winning pattern. number of elements (first element), elements of the degree of cracking of the rotating body icon and elements of the color of light emitted from the cracks of the rotating body icon (second element). The display mode of the number (first element) is configured to suggest the degree of ease of entry of a game ball into a specific area (a mode related to the ease of entry of a game ball into a specific area), The degree of cracking of the rotating body icon and the display mode of the luminous color (second element) from the cracks of the rotating body icon are configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the main game identification information will be in a specific mode of stop display mode. there is

By configuring in this way, with the rotator icon (specific effect) as one notice effect, the probability of entering a ball in a specific area (V winning expectation) when a small win is won, and the expectation of winning a small win Since it is possible to suggest (notify) two of them, it is possible to increase the number of variations (enjoy the combination of the change modes of the first element and the second element) in which the state change in the announcement effect is enjoyed. In other words, it not only predicts whether or not you will win a small win, but also predicts how much you expect to win a V prize if you win a small win. It can be given to one notice production.

As the aspect of the first element (the number of "V" holes), as the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 as the operation aspect of the rotating body of the first big winning opening C10 in the small winning game when winning the small winning Aspect A that suggests (informs) that the ease of entering a specific area is 1/5 (a 1/5 V challenge operation with one "V" hole), and when a small hit is won A mode B that suggests (informs) that the specific area C12-2 ball entry probability is 2/5 as the operation mode of the rotating body of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game ( A specific area C12-2 as an operation mode of the rotator of the first big prize opening C10 in the small win game when the small win is won. Aspect C that suggests (announces) that the ease of entering a ball in a specific area as the probability of entering a ball is 3/5 (aspect in which the V challenge motion is 3/5 with three “V” holes); Suggesting that the ease of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 as the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is 4/5 as the operation mode of the rotating body of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game in the case of winning a small win ( A mode D (a mode of 4/5 V challenge motion with four "V" holes), and an operation mode of the rotating body of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game when winning a small winning. Aspect E that suggests (informs) that the ease of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 as the probability of entering a ball in the specific area C12-2 is 5/5 (5/5 V challenge action with five "V" holes It has a form).

As the look-ahead effect, a rotating body icon look-ahead effect that changes the first element and the second element of the rotating body icon is provided. It is configured to execute an effect that changes the element and the second element. For example, in the pattern change three before the trigger pending, the first element is shown in FIG. 58(b) ? /5 is displayed, and the second element executes a step-up 1 effect of white light emission with small cracks as a step-up effect. In the pattern variation two before the trigger hold, the first element displays 1/5 (first element aspect A) shown in FIG. 58 (a), and the second element is a step-up effect , the step-up 2 effect of small cracks and blue light emission is executed. In the symbol change immediately before the trigger suspension, the first element displays 2/5 shown in (c) of FIG. Executes a light emitting effect. In the pattern variation of the trigger suspension, if the trigger suspension has not won a small hit, as the performance of the second element, a performance in which the rotating body icon destruction performance shown in (d) of FIG. 58 fails is executed, 2/5 as a value (first element) indicating the number of "V"s as a result of the "V" hole change effect shown in c) is configured to return to 1/5 of the initial value. .

On the other hand, in the pattern variation of the trigger pending, if the trigger pending wins a small hit, the effect of the success of the rotating body icon destruction effect shown in (e) of FIG. 58 is executed as the effect of the second element. , as a success effect, the image object of the rotator icon is destroyed, and the image object 2/5 of the value (first element) indicating the number of "V" displayed in the image object of the rotator icon is changed. The image object of the body of revolution is configured to be displayed in an enlarged state.

Also, in the pattern variation of the trigger hold, for example, if it develops into SP reach at 2/5, the value indicating the number of "V" corresponding to 3/5, 4/5, 5/5 during SP reach, rotation An effect (for example, a V-challenge effect) in which a body image object is displayed may be executed. Although an example of executing the success effect of destroying the image object of the rotating body icon as the effect of the second element only when the small win has been won has been shown, , as the effect of the second element, a failure effect in which the image object of the rotator icon cannot be destroyed may be executed. In that case, it may be constructed such that the failure performance is once executed and then revived to perform the success performance, or the performance of winning a small prize may be executed after the failure performance.

FIG. 59 is an image diagram of the result screen. In the non-time-reduced gaming state (eg, low-probability-low base state) after the time-reduced gaming state of RUSH1 and RUSH2 (eg, low-probability-high base state), there is a hold on the second main game side. In this case, it is configured to execute the symbol variation of the second main game symbols of the number corresponding to the number of reservations on the second main game side. For example, if there are four reserves on the second main game side, four times of pattern fluctuations of the second main game symbols on the second main game side corresponding to the four reserves on the second main game side Run. In an example where there are four reserves on the second main game side in this non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability-low base state), the symbol variation of the fourth second main game symbol (final symbol variation ), a result screen (a result screen indicating that the RUSH 1 and RUSH 2 states have ended, a screen displaying the number of consecutive games in a special game, the number of balls obtained during consecutive games, etc.) is displayed. there is

As shown in (a) of FIG. 59, in the example where there are four reserves on the second main game side, if the symbol variation (final symbol variation) of the fourth second main game symbol is a loss, The symbol variation of the second main game symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is started. The background when starting this pattern variation is that the current gaming state is a non-time-reduced gaming state (eg, low-probability-low base state), but the background of the time-reduction gaming state (eg, low-probability-high base state) configured to use After the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the pattern variation, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are tenned with the same pattern, the SP ready-to-win performance is executed, and then the SP ready-to-win performance is performed. As a result of , a production indicating failure is executed.

Here, this pattern variation is a non-time-reduced gaming state (eg, low-probability-low base state), but it is executed continuously after the time-reduction gaming state of RUSH1 and RUSH2 (eg, low-probability-high base state) is completed. This is an effect to be performed, and since the variation mode determination tables T4 and T5 of the limited frequency state are used, the background uses the background of the time shortened game state (for example, low probability high base state). Specifically, when the variation mode is selected using the table T4 for determining the variation mode of the limited frequency state, the background of RUSH2 is displayed, and the variation mode is selected using the table T5 for determining the variation mode of the limited frequency state. is configured to display the background of RUSH1.

Then, a result screen is displayed a predetermined time (e.g., 8 seconds before) before the pattern fluctuation of the second main game pattern is fixed and stopped after execution of the effect indicating failure as a result effect of the SP ready-to-win effect. . The result screen may be configured to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation of the second main game symbols. As shown in (c), the result screen is a result screen showing that the RUSH1 and RUSH2 states have ended. This is a screen displaying a certain "1000 GET". After the result screen is displayed, the background is switched to the production stage A as shown in (d), and the second main game symbols, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are fixed and stopped.

After the second decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, if there is a hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, the pattern variation of the first main game pattern is started. do. On the other hand, after the second decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, if there is a hold on the second main game side and there is no hold on the first main game side, the pattern variation of the second main game pattern is started. do. It should be noted that when switching to production stage A is started, the first decorative symbol is shaken in the form of "171" indicating that the SP reach is out, and the second main game symbol and the second It is preferable that the decorative symbols are subjected to symbol variation. Then, it is preferable that the second decorative symbols are also fixed and stopped in accordance with the confirmation stop of the symbol variation of the second main game symbols, and the suspension display for the effect of the variation is erased. As a modification, in the situation where switching to production stage A is started (while the second main game pattern is changing), the pending display for production of the change may be hidden, and the next change (first main game pattern ) may be configured to display a pending display for effect of the change.

Also, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the fourth second When the symbol variation (final symbol variation) of the main game symbols is a small hit, the symbol variations of the second main game symbol, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are started. The background at the time of starting this symbol variation is configured to use the background of the time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state). After the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the pattern variation, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are tenned with the same pattern, the SP ready-to-win performance is executed, and then the SP ready-to-win performance is performed. A production indicating success is executed as a result production of . When an effect indicating success is produced as a result of the effect of SP reach, the second main game symbol is determined and stopped in the form of a small winning symbol (for example, 2_10R symbol 3). When the pattern fluctuation of the second main game pattern is fixed and stopped, the pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, but the pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is not fixed and stopped. , only an effect indicating success may be executed as a result of the SP reach effect.

After the symbol variation of the second main game symbols is fixed and stopped, the performance of the small winning game start demonstration is executed. In the production of this small winning game start demonstration, the production "Aim for 'V'" is executed, and the game ball is shot to the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 provided in the game area on the right side. Execute right-handed notification prompting to do so. In addition, along with this "Aim for the 'V'" effect, the image object of the right arrow is displayed as a right-handed notification prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right-hand game area ((c in FIG. 60). ), however, unlike FIG. 60(c), the background is white, and the image object of the arrow saying "Aim for 'V'" is displayed in black).

When the performance of the small winning game start demonstration is finished, the small winning game is started and the first big winning opening C10 is opened. When the game ball enters the first big prize hole C10, the V challenge effect (rotating body is a V challenge action) to incite whether the game ball enters the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize hole C10 mode) is executed. As a result of the V challenge effect, when it is detected that the game ball has entered the general area C12-3 which is the "outer" hole, the special game is not developed and the small winning game ends. When the small winning game ends, a performance of a small winning game ending demonstration is executed. In the performance of the small winning game end demonstration, a result screen is displayed.

The result screen is configured to be displayed a predetermined time before the end of the small winning game end demonstration, or after a predetermined time elapses from the start of the small winning game ending demonstration. As shown in (c), the result screen is a result screen indicating that the state of RUSH1 or RUSH2 has ended. This is a screen displaying "1000 GET". After the result screen is displayed, when there is a hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, the pattern variation of the first main game pattern is started. On the other hand, after the result screen is displayed, if there is a hold on the second main game side and there is no hold on the first main game side, the pattern variation of the second main game pattern is started. In addition, after the result screen is displayed, when starting the symbol variation of the first main game symbols, it is preferable to switch to the production stage A before starting the symbol variation of the first main game symbols. After displaying the result screen, when the pattern variation of the second main game pattern is started, it is in the non-time game state (low probability low base state), but in the time shortened game state (for example, low probability high base state) It is preferable to start the symbol variation of the second main game symbols while continuing the background.

In addition, when the pattern variation of the second main game pattern where the time-reduced game state of RUSH1 and RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) ends is a loss, and there is no hold on the second main game side. is configured not to display the result screen in the losing variation (the final variation in the time-reduced gaming state). In this case, when the symbol variation of the second main game symbol where the time shortening game state (for example, the low probability base state) ends is fixed and stopped at the losing symbol, and the symbol variation of the next first main game symbol starts. It is configured to switch the stage to the performance stage A and start pattern variation.

As a game state related to the ease of opening the second main game starter electric accessory B11d (sometimes referred to as a variable member), there are a normal game state and a time-reduced game state in which the variable member is easier to open than in the normal game state. , and is configured to enter a time-reduced game state after the execution of the special game is finished. One unit is from the start of the variable display of the main game symbols to the stop display, and the time shortening game state is maintained until one unit is performed 10 times after the execution of the special game. After one unit is played 10 times, the game state is changed from the time-reduced game state to the normal game state. Then, when the variation display related to the main game information acquired during the execution of the time shortened game state is executed in the normal game state after the time shortened game state, it is determined as the information for performing the small winning game. In the case, it is possible to execute the result screen (result effect related to the small winning game) during execution of the small winning game, and the variable display related to the main game information acquired during the execution of the time reduced gaming state is the time reduced gaming state. When it is executed in the subsequent normal game state, and when it is determined that the information is a loss in which the small winning game is not performed, the result screen is executed during the variable display related to the main game information. there is

In a pachinko game machine that executes V challenge production in RUSH1 and RUSH2, a non-time-reduced gaming state (eg, a low-probability-low base state) after the time-reduction gaming state of RUSH1, RUSH2 (eg, a low-probability-high base state) is completed ), the final pattern variation of the second main game pattern can be a small hit in which the ball is not confirmed in the specific area (difficult to enter the ball). The result screen can be appropriately displayed, and the subsequent transition to the non-time-reduced game state (low-probability-low base state) can be seamlessly connected.

FIG. 60 is an image diagram of a puncture effect. In the non-time-reduced gaming state (eg, low-probability-low base state) after the time-reduced gaming state of RUSH1 and RUSH2 (eg, low-probability-high base state), there is a hold on the second main game side. In this case, it is configured to execute the symbol variation of the second main game symbols of the second main game side of the number corresponding to the number of the second main game side hold, for example, the second main game side hold If there are 4 symbols, the symbol variation of the 2nd main game symbols on the 2nd main game side for 4 times corresponding to the 4 reserved symbols on the 2nd main game side is executed. Then, in the example where there are four reserves on the second main game side in this non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state), the symbol variation of the fourth second main game symbol (final pattern variation), I explained an example configured to display the result screen, RUSH1, RUSH2 time-reduced gaming state (eg, low probability high base state), RUSH1, RUSH2 time-reduced gaming state (eg , low-probability-high base state) after the end of the non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability-low base state), if there is a hold on the second main game side, and the last held Symbol variation of the second main game symbol (symbol variation before the final symbol variation) other than the symbol variation of the 2 main game symbols (final symbol variation), the second main game symbol digested in the non-reduced time gaming state In the case of a pattern variation in which the variation related to the holding on the game side) is a small hit, a special effect is given when the ball does not enter the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 (“V” hole) in the small hit game It is configured to execute (punk effect). It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the special effect (puncture effect) is not executed.

The special effect (puncture effect) executed when the ball does not enter the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 (“V” hole) in the small winning game is shown in (c) Puncture effect 1. , The background of "Aim for the 'V'" is black, and the image object of the arrow pointing to the right is displayed in white. Aim” is a dark image. Then, after the special effect (puncture effect) is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), when the pattern change of the second main game pattern is performed in the next pattern change, the background of the time-reduced game state is continued. configured to display. Here, when the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is performed in the next symbol variation, the background of the effect stage B may be continuously displayed.

Puncture effect 1, which is a special effect (puncture effect), is configured to be executed even in the time-reduced gaming states of RUSH1 and RUSH2 (for example, low probability high base state). When there is a hold on the second main game side in a non-time-reduced game state (for example, a low-probability base state) after the time-reduced game state of RUSH1 and RUSH2 is completed, and the last being held In the case of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (the final symbol variation), it is configured not to be executed.

In other words, in the non-time-reduced gaming state (eg, low-probability-low base state) after the time-reduced gaming state of RUSH1 and RUSH2 (eg, low-probability-high base state), there is a hold on the second main game side. If so, it is configured to execute the symbol variation of the second main game symbols of the second main game side corresponding to the number of reservations on the second main game side, for example, the second main game side If there are 4 reservations, the symbol variation of the 2nd main game symbols on the 2nd main game side for 4 times corresponding to the 4 reservations on the 2nd main game side is executed. In an example where there are four reserves on the second main game side in this non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability-low base state), the symbol variation of the fourth second main game symbol (final symbol variation ), the pattern variation of the second main game pattern becomes a small hit, and if the ball does not enter the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 (“V” hole) in the small win game, a special effect (punk effect ) is not executed, but it may be configured to execute a special effect (punk effect).

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), RUSH1, RUSH2 time-reduced gaming state (eg, low probability base state), RUSH1, non-time-reduced gaming state after RUSH2 time-reduced gaming state (eg, 2nd main game symbols other than symbol variation (final symbol variation) of the last 2nd main game symbol that is retained in the case where there is a hold on the 2nd main game side in the low-probability/low-probability base state) symbol variation (the symbol variation before the final symbol variation, and the variation related to the holding of the second main game side digested in the non-reduced time game state) is a small hit, the second main game symbol, The pattern variation of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is started. The background at the time of starting this symbol variation is configured to use the background of the time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state). After the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the pattern variation, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are tenned with the same pattern, the SP ready-to-win performance is executed, and then the SP ready-to-win performance is performed. A production indicating success is executed as a result production of . When an effect indicating success is produced as a result of the effect of SP reach, the second main game symbol is determined and stopped in the form of a small winning symbol (for example, 2_10R symbol 3). When the pattern fluctuation of the second main game pattern is fixed and stopped, the pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, but the pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is not fixed and stopped. , only an effect indicating success may be executed as a result of the SP reach effect.

After the pattern variation of the second main game pattern is fixed and stopped, the performance of the small winning game start demonstration is executed. In the production of this small winning game start demonstration, the production "Aim for the 'V'" is executed, and the game ball is shot to the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 provided in the game area on the right side. Execute right-handed notification prompting to do so. In addition, along with this "Aim for the 'V'" effect, the image object of the right arrow is displayed as a right-handed notification prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right-hand game area ((c in FIG. 60). ), the background in FIG. 60(c) is white, and the image object of the arrow saying "Aim for 'V'" is displayed in black). When the performance of the small winning game start demonstration is finished, the small winning game is started and the first big winning opening C10 is opened. When the game ball enters the first big prize hole C10, the V challenge effect (rotating body is a V challenge action) to incite whether the game ball enters the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize hole C10 mode) is executed. As a result of the V challenge effect, when it is detected that the game ball has entered the "V" hole, a successful effect of the "V" entry (for example, the effect of displaying "V enter") is performed in the special game start demonstration. Run. Further, in the effect of the special game start demonstration, one of the effects of rank-up effects A to E is executed. In addition, it is not necessary to execute the rank-up effect. When the performance of the special game start demonstration is finished, the special game is started from the 2nd round, and the special game is executed until the round determined by the small winning pattern.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), RUSH1, RUSH2 time reduction gaming state (eg, low probability base state), RUSH1, RUSH2 time reduction gaming state (eg, low probability height base state) after the end If there is a hold on the second main game side in the non-time-reduced game state (for example, low-probability base state), the pattern variation of the last second main game pattern that is held (final pattern Variation) of the second main game symbols other than (variation) (a symbol variation before the final symbol variation, and a variation related to the holding of the second main game side that is digested in the non-reduced time gaming state) is a small hit. In the case of , the symbol variation of the second main game symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is started. The background at the time of starting this symbol variation is configured to use the background of the time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state). After the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the pattern variation, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are tenned with the same pattern, the SP ready-to-win performance is executed, and then the SP ready-to-win performance is performed. A production indicating success is executed as a result production of . When an effect indicating success is produced as a result of the effect of SP reach, the second main game symbol is determined and stopped in the form of a small winning symbol (for example, 2_10R symbol 3). When the pattern fluctuation of the second main game pattern is fixed and stopped, the pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, but the pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is not fixed and stopped. , only an effect indicating success may be executed as a result of the SP reach effect.

After the pattern variation of the second main game pattern is fixed and stopped, the performance of the small winning game start demonstration is executed. In the production of this small winning game start demonstration, the production "Aim for the 'V'" is executed, and the game ball is shot to the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 provided in the game area on the right side. Execute right-handed notification prompting to do so. In addition, along with this "Aim for the 'V'" effect, the image object of the right arrow is displayed as a right-handed notification prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right-hand game area ((c in FIG. 60). ), however, unlike FIG. 60(c), the background is white and the image object of the arrow saying "Aim for 'V'" is displayed in black). When the performance of the small winning game start demonstration is finished, the small winning game is started and the first big winning opening C10 is opened. When the game ball enters the first big prize hole C10, the V challenge effect (rotating body is a V challenge action) to incite whether the game ball enters the specific area C12-2 of the first big prize hole C10 mode) is executed. As a result of the V challenge effect, when it is detected that the game ball has entered the general area C12-3 which is the "outer" hole, the special game is not developed and the small winning game ends. When the small winning game ends, a small winning game end demonstration effect is executed. The effect of the small winning game end demonstration is configured to execute a special effect (punk effect). The special effect (puncture effect) is configured to be displayed before a predetermined time before the end of the small winning game end demonstration or after a predetermined time elapses from the start of the small winning game end demonstration. FIG. 60 shows the execution mode of the special performance in the V challenge performance, but the same special performance may be executed in the direct V performance. Then, execute the effect "Aim for the "V"", and the right-handed notification prompting to shoot the game ball to the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning hole C10 provided in the game area on the right side. Along with this "Aim for the 'V'" effect, the image object of the right arrow is displayed as a right-handed notification prompting the user to shoot the game ball to the right-hand game area (see (c) of FIG. 60, provided that , unlike FIG. 60(c), the background is white and the image object of the arrow saying "Aim for the 'V'" is displayed in black), the first prize winning opening C10 is opened, and then the specific area C12- When the ball is not landed in 1, the puncture performance 1 is executed during the small winning game end demonstration. In addition, as a special effect (puncture effect), a puncture effect 2 as shown in (d) is provided. ) is completed, the symbol variation of the second main game symbol becomes a small win, and there is no hold on the second main game side, and the specific area C12 is during the small win game. -1 or executed when the ball is not entered in the specific area C12-2 ("V" hole), or (2) a non-time-reduced game state after the time-reduced game state of RUSH1, RUSH2 is completed (for example, When there is a hold on the second main game side in the low-probability-low base state), the pattern fluctuation of the last held second main game pattern (final pattern fluctuation) becomes a small hit. , and is configured to be executed when the ball does not enter the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 (“V” hole) during the small winning game. Here, the puncture effect 2 may be executed after the puncture effect 1 is executed (that is, the puncture effect 1 is displayed → the puncture effect is not displayed → the puncture effect 2 is displayed).

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an effect flow of continuous effect. RUSH2 after the end of the special game is in a time-reducing game state of 10 times (for example, low-probability base state), and is configured to perform continuous production in pattern fluctuations of 1 to 10 fluctuations. there is In addition, RUSH2 is a time-reduced gaming state of 10 times (for example, low probability base state), and is not limited to pattern fluctuations of 1 to 10 variations, time-reduced gaming state of RUSH2 (for example, low Probable height base state), it is sufficient if it is configured so that continuous production is executed in an arbitrary period of pattern fluctuations of 1 fluctuation to 10 fluctuations.

In the continuous effect, if there is a hold on the second main game side in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) of the 1st to 10th fluctuations of RUSH2, the second main game pattern It is configured to execute a continuous effect, which is an effect to collect characters of "MACHI" by symbol variation (an effect of displaying characters of "MACHI"), over a plurality of variations. Also, in the time-reduced game state (for example, low-probability base state) of the 1st to 10th fluctuations of RUSH2, there is no hold on the second main game side, and there is a hold on the first main game side. If it is, it is configured to execute a continuous effect that is an effect of collecting the characters of "MACHI" (an effect of displaying the characters of "MACHI") in the symbol variation of the first main game symbol over a plurality of variations. ing.

61(a) The production flow will be described for the super M chance production in which the continuous production succeeds. The effect flow will be described by taking as an example the case where the continuous effect succeeds in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state) of the 8th variation of RUSH2. The symbol variation of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) is started in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) of the 8th variation of RUSH2. Characters up to "MACH" are collected at the time when this symbol variation is started. Then, during the pattern variation of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) of the eighth variation, the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" ("M", "A", "C", "H ” ・ An effect to collect the letters “MACHI” by accumulating and displaying the letters “I”, which is described as “MACHI display” in FIG. 61), and an effect to display the letters “MACHI” As a result, an effect of displaying the letter "I" on the effect display device SG is performed. Since the effect of displaying the letter "I" has been executed, all the letters "M", "A", "C", "H" and "I" are displayed, and the effect of displaying the letter "MACHI" is successful, and the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" ends. Even if the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" is over, the pattern variation of the 8th variation in the time-reduced gaming state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) continues, and the characters "MACHI" After the effect to be displayed, the title of "Super M Chance" is displayed, and the game explanation "Determine the level of the rotating body with roulette" is displayed. After execution of the game explanation, a roulette performance is executed for determining the motion mode of the rotating body used in the V-challenge performance. The effect result of the roulette effect determines the operation mode of the rotating body used in the V challenge effect, and then the 8th variation second main game in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) The symbol variation of the symbol (may be the first main game symbol) is fixed and stopped. After the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol may be used) is fixed and stopped, a small win start demonstration is performed, and the effect of aiming for "V" is executed. When the small winning game start demonstration ends, a small winning game is executed in which a V challenge effect is performed in which the rotator C17 operates in a V challenge operation.

The production flow will be described for the production in which the continuous production fails in (b) of FIG. 61 . The effect flow will be described by taking as an example the case where the continuous effect succeeds in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state) after the 5th variation of RUSH2. The symbol variation of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) is started in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) of the fifth variation of RUSH2. At the time when this symbol variation is started, characters up to "MAC" are collected. Then, during the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol) of the fifth variation, the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" is executed, and the result of the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI". , the character "H" is displayed on the effect display device SG. The effect of displaying the letter "H" was executed, but since the letters "M", "A", "C", "H", and "I" are not all displayed, it is in an incomplete state. Also after the 6th variation, the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" is executed. In the pattern variation of the 2nd main game pattern (may be the 1st main game pattern) of the 6th to 10th variation of the RUSH2 time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state), the letters "MACHI" are displayed. However, if the character "I" is not displayed as a result of the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI", the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" will fail, the continuous effect will end, and the next Execute symbol variation.

The continuous effects for displaying the letters "MACHI" are: Continuous effect A when the prefetching lottery is not won, continuous effect B when the prefetching lottery is won, and continuous effect when the prefetching lottery is not won. A continuous performance C is provided for executing a continuous performance B when a pre-reading lottery is won during execution of A. Here, as an effect to display the characters "MACHI", for the continuous effect A when the prefetch lottery is not won, the characters "MACHI" are not completed, and the continuous effect when the prefetch lottery is won. B, the continuous effect C in which the continuous effect B is executed when the prefetching lottery is won during the execution of the continuous effect A when the prefetching lottery is not won is configured so that the characters "MACHI" can be completed. there is

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an effect scenario of the continuous effect A when the pre-reading lottery is not won. The production scenario of the continuous production A when the prospective lottery is not won is composed of a plurality of patterns (for example, 20 patterns). The production scenario 1 is a production scenario in which the letters "MACHI" are never displayed from the first to tenth variations. In production scenario 2, the character "M" is displayed in the first variation, the character "A" is displayed in the second variation, and the character "CHI" is displayed in the third to tenth variations. There is no production scenario. In production scenario 3, no characters are displayed in the first to third variations, the character "M" is displayed in the fourth variation, the character "A" is displayed in the fifth variation, and the character "A" is displayed in the sixth variation. From the 1st to the 10th variation, the production scenario is such that the characters "CHI" are not displayed. Production scenario 4 displays no characters in the first to sixth variations, displays the character "M" in the seventh variation, displays the character "A" in the eighth variation, and displays nine variations. From the 1st to the 10th variation, the production scenario is such that the characters "CHI" are not displayed. In production scenario 5, no characters are displayed in the first variation, two characters "MA" are displayed simultaneously in the second variation, and the characters "CHI" are displayed in the third to tenth variations. It is a production scenario that never happens.

In production scenario 6, no characters are displayed in the first to fifth variations, the two characters "MA" are displayed simultaneously in the sixth variation, and "CHI" is displayed in the seventh to tenth variations. It is a production scenario that does not display the characters. In production scenario 7, no characters are displayed in the first to third variations, the character "M" is displayed in the fourth variation, the character "A" is displayed in the fifth variation, and the character "A" is displayed in the sixth variation. The production scenario is such that no character is displayed on the eye, the character "C" is displayed at the 7th variation, and the character "HI" is not displayed at the 8th to 10th variation. . In production scenario 8, the letter "M" is displayed in the first variation, the letter "A" is displayed in the second variation, the letter "C" is displayed in the third variation, and 10 variations are displayed from the fourth variation. It is a production scenario in which the characters "HI" are not displayed until the eyes. In production scenario 9, no characters are displayed in the first to second variations, the character "M" is displayed in the third variation, the character "A" is displayed in the fourth variation, and the character "A" is displayed in the fifth variation. The effect scenario is such that the character "C" is displayed on the eye, and the character "HI" is not displayed from the 6th to the 10th variation. In production scenario 10, no characters are displayed in the first to third variations, the character "M" is displayed in the fourth variation, the character "A" is displayed in the fifth variation, and the character "A" is displayed in the sixth variation. This is an effect scenario in which the character "C" is displayed on the eye, and the character "HI" is not displayed from the 7th to the 10th variations.

In production scenario 11, no characters are displayed in the first to fifth variations, the character "M" is displayed in the sixth variation, the character "A" is displayed in the seventh variation, and the eight variations. This is an effect scenario in which the character "C" is displayed on the eye, and the character "HI" is not displayed from the 9th to the 10th variations. In production scenario 12, no characters are displayed in the first variation, two characters "MA" are displayed simultaneously in the second variation, the letter "C" is displayed in the third variation, and 10 characters are displayed from the fourth variation. The effect scenario is such that the character "HI" is not displayed until the change. In production scenario 13, no characters are displayed in the first to fifth variations, the two characters "MA" are displayed simultaneously in the sixth variation, and the character "C" is displayed in the seventh variation, From the 8th variation to the 10th variation, the production scenario is such that the characters "HI" are not displayed. In production scenario 14, no characters are displayed in the first to seventh variations, the two characters "MA" are displayed simultaneously in the eighth variation, the characters "C" are displayed in the ninth variation, In the tenth variation, the production scenario is such that the characters "HI" are not displayed.

In production scenario 15, the characters "M" are displayed in the first variation, the two characters "AC" are displayed in the second variation, and the characters "HI" are displayed in the third to tenth variations. It is a production scenario that has nothing to do. In the production scenario 16, no characters are displayed in the first to third variations, the character "M" is displayed in the fourth variation, and the two characters "AC" are displayed simultaneously in the fifth variation. From the 6th variation to the 10th variation, the effect scenario is such that the characters "HI" are not displayed. In production scenario 17, no characters are displayed in the first to sixth variations, the character "M" is displayed in the seventh variation, and the two characters "AC" are displayed simultaneously in the eighth variation, From the ninth variation to the tenth variation, the production scenario is such that the characters "HI" are not displayed. In the production scenario 18, the letter "M" is displayed in the first variation, the letter "A" is displayed in the second variation, the letter "C" is displayed in the third variation, and the letter is displayed in the fourth variation. This is an effect scenario in which the letter "H" is displayed in the fifth variation, and the letter "I" is not displayed in the sixth to tenth variations. In the production scenario 19, the letter "M" is displayed in the first variation, the letter "A" is displayed in the second variation, no letter is displayed in the third to fourth variations, and five variations are performed. The character "C" is displayed on the eye, the character "H" is displayed at the 6th variation, and the character "I" is not displayed from the 7th variation to the 10th variation. there is In the production scenario 20, the character "M" is displayed in the first variation, the two characters "AC" are displayed in the second variation, and no characters are displayed in the third to fourth variations. The character "H" is displayed in the 5th variation, and the character "I" is not displayed in the 6th to 10th variations.

FIG. 63 is an image diagram of the continuous effect A when the pre-reading lottery is not won. Hereinafter, the continuous performance A will be described by taking as an example the performance scenario 20 of the continuous performance A when the prospective lottery is not won. In the production scenario 20, the character "M" is displayed in the first variation, the two characters "AC" are displayed in the second variation, and no characters are displayed in the third to fourth variations. The character "H" is displayed in the 5th variation, and the character "I" is not displayed in the 6th to 10th variations.

(a) of FIG. 63 shows 1 change in the situation where the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 3 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low-probability base state) The second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) is changed, and the character "M" is displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect to display the character "MACHI". is configured to When "M" is displayed on the effect display device SG, the displayed "M" is then displayed in the leftmost frame above the effect display device SG (see (b) reference).

(c) is the second variation in the situation where the first main game side hold is 0 and the second main game side hold is 2 in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) of RUSH2 Two main game symbols (or the first main game symbol may be used) are changed, and two characters of "AC" are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect of displaying the characters of "MACHI". It is configured. When "AC" is displayed on the effect display device SG, after that, the displayed "AC" is displayed in two frames on the right side of the frame where "M" is displayed above the effect display device SG. (see (d)).

(e) is the third variation in the situation where the first main game side hold is 0 and the second main game side hold is 1 in the time reduction game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state), 4 The effect is to display the characters "MACHI" of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol) of the variation eye, but the characters "H" and "I" are not displayed. It is configured.

(f) is the 5th variation in the situation where the 1st main game side hold is 0 and the 2nd main game side hold is 2 in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) of RUSH2 There are two main game symbols (or the first main game symbols may be used) as symbol variations, and as an effect for displaying the characters "MACHI", the character "H" is displayed on the effect display device SG. ing. When 'H' is displayed on the performance display device SG, the displayed 'H' is then displayed in a frame on the right side of the frame displaying 'C' above the performance display device SG. (see (g)).

(h) is the 6th change to 10 in the situation where the 1st main game side hold is 0 and the 2nd main game side hold is 4 in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) of RUSH2 The effect is to display the characters "MACHI" of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol) of the variation, but the characters "H" and "I" are not displayed. It is configured.

In other words, the production scenario 20 is a production that displays the characters "MACHI" in the pattern fluctuations of 1 to 10 fluctuations of RUSH2 in the time-reduced game state (for example, low probability base state) after the special game ends. Similarly, the production scenarios 1 to 19 are also configured to fail in the continuous production as the production of displaying the characters "MACHI".

FIG. 64 is an image diagram of the continuous effect B when winning the pre-reading lottery. In (a) of FIG. 64, in the time reduction game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state), the hold on the first main game side is 0, the hold on the second main game side is 3, and the hold 3 is The second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) of the first variation in the situation where the trigger suspension of the variation mode for executing the V challenge effect (for example, the triangular first suspension display shown in FIG. 64) is performed. The pattern is variable, and the character "M" is displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect for displaying the character "MACHI". When "M" is displayed on the effect display device SG, the displayed "M" is then displayed in the leftmost frame above the effect display device SG (see (b) reference).

(c) is the second variation in the situation where the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 2 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) Two main game symbols (or the first main game symbol may be used) are changed, and two characters of "AC" are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect of displaying the characters of "MACHI". It is configured. When "AC" is displayed on the effect display device SG, after that, the displayed "AC" is displayed in two frames on the right side of the frame where "M" is displayed above the effect display device SG. (see (d)).

(e) is the third variation in the situation where the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 1 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) There are two main game symbols (or the first main game symbols may be used) as symbol variations, and as an effect for displaying the characters "MACHI", the character "H" is displayed on the effect display device SG. ing. When 'H' is displayed on the performance display device SG, the displayed 'H' is then displayed in a frame on the right side of the frame displaying 'C' above the performance display device SG. (see (f)).

(e) is the 4th variation in the situation where the 1st main game side hold is 0 and the 2nd main game side hold is 0 in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) of RUSH2 There are two main game symbols (may be the first main game symbols), and the symbols are varied, and the character "I" is displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect for displaying the characters "MACHI". ing. When 'I' is displayed on the performance display device SG, the displayed 'I' is then displayed in a frame on the right side of the frame displaying 'H' above the performance display device SG. (see (h)).

It should be noted that, as the trigger suspension, the target is a variation mode in which the V challenge effect of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) is executed, but the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) A variation mode in which a direct V effect is executed may be targeted. In addition, the look-ahead effect B targeting these variation modes is the pattern variation of 1 variation to 10 variation of RUSH2 in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) after the special game ends, "MACHI ” is configured to succeed in the continuous effect as the effect of displaying the characters, but if the change mode of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol) is targeted as the trigger suspension, , the continuous performance A is configured so that the continuous performance fails. In addition, the trigger suspension of the look-ahead effect B may be changed to a second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol may be a big hit). is configured to succeed.

FIG. 65 is an image diagram of the continuous effect B (scenario) when the prefetching lottery is won. The continuous performance B (scenario) when the prefetching lottery is won is configured to execute the continuous performance up to the middle using the performance scenario. Here, an example is shown in which the pre-reading lottery is won and the production scenario 15 is won in the production scenario lottery. In production scenario 15, the characters "M" are displayed in the first variation, the two characters "AC" are displayed in the second variation, and the characters "HI" are displayed in the third to tenth variations. It is a production scenario that has nothing to do.

In (a) of FIG. 65, in the time reduction game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state), the hold on the first main game side is 0, the hold on the second main game side is 3, and the hold 3 is The second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol) of the first variation in the situation where the trigger suspension of the variation mode for executing the V challenge effect (for example, the triangular first suspension display shown in FIG. 65) is performed. The pattern is variable, and as an effect to display the characters "MACHI", the character "M" is configured to be displayed on the effect display device SG (similar to the effect of the first variation in the effect scenario 15). there is When "M" is displayed on the effect display device SG, after that, the displayed "M" is configured to be displayed in the leftmost frame above the effect display device SG (the first variation of the effect scenario 15 (see (b)).

(c) is the second variation in the situation where the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 2 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) Two main game symbols (or the first main game symbol may be used) are changed, and two characters of "AC" are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect of displaying the characters of "MACHI". It is configured (similar to the second variation effect in the effect scenario 15). When "AC" is displayed on the effect display device SG, after that, the displayed "AC" is displayed in two frames on the right side of the frame where "M" is displayed above the effect display device SG. (similar to the effect of the first variation in the effect scenario 15) (see (d)). Continuous production B (scenario) is executed along the production scenario 15 up to the second variation. After the third variation, since there is no pattern to display the characters "H" and "I" in the production scenario 15, the continuous production (scenario) in the case of winning the prefetch lottery is the production scenario. It is configured to display non-displayable (impossible) characters.

(e) is the third variation in the situation where the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 1 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) There are two main game symbols (or the first main game symbols may be used) as symbol variations, and as an effect for displaying the characters "MACHI", the character "H" is displayed on the effect display device SG. ing. When 'H' is displayed on the performance display device SG, the displayed 'H' is then displayed in a frame on the right side of the frame displaying 'C' above the performance display device SG. (see (f)).

(g) is the 4th variation in the situation where the first main game side hold is 0 and the second main game side hold is 0 in the time reduction game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) There are two main game symbols (may be the first main game symbols), and the symbols are varied, and the character "I" is displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect for displaying the characters "MACHI". ing. When 'I' is displayed on the performance display device SG, the displayed 'I' is then displayed in a frame on the right side of the frame displaying 'H' above the performance display device SG. (see (h)).

It should be noted that, as the trigger suspension, the target is a variation mode in which the V challenge effect of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) is executed, but the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) A variation mode in which a direct V effect is executed may be targeted. In addition, the look-ahead effect (scenario) targeting these variation modes is a time-reduced game state (for example, low-probability base state) after the end of the special game. Although it is configured so that the continuous effect as the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" will be successful, the variation mode of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol may be) is targeted as the trigger hold. In this case, the continuous performance is configured to fail in the same manner as the continuous performance A. For example, (a) to (f) of FIG. 65 are the same as the winning case, and the character "I" is not displayed in (g) and (h) of FIG. In addition, the hold of the trigger of the look-ahead effect (scenario) may be a variation mode of the second main game pattern (or the first main game pattern may be a big hit). It is configured so that continuous production is successful.

FIG. 66 is an image diagram of the continuous effect C. FIG. The continuous performance C is configured to execute the continuous performance B when the prefetching lottery is won during the execution of the continuous performance A when the prefetching lottery is not won. Hereinafter, the continuous performance A will be described by taking as an example the performance scenario 20 of the continuous performance A when the prospective lottery is not won. In the production scenario 20, the character "M" is displayed in the first variation, the two characters "AC" are displayed in the second variation, and no characters are displayed in the third to fourth variations. The character "H" is displayed in the 5th variation, and the character "I" is not displayed in the 6th to 10th variations.

(a) of FIG. 66 shows 1 change in the situation where the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 3 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low-probability base state) The second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) is changed, and the character "M" is displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect to display the character "MACHI". is configured to When "M" is displayed on the effect display device SG, the displayed "M" is then displayed in the leftmost frame above the effect display device SG (see (b) reference).

(c) is the second variation in the situation where the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 2 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) Two main game symbols (or the first main game symbol may be used) are changed, and two characters of "AC" are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect of displaying the characters of "MACHI". It is configured. When "AC" is displayed on the effect display device SG, after that, the displayed "AC" is displayed in two frames on the right side of the frame where "M" is displayed above the effect display device SG. (see (d)).

(e) is the third variation in the situation where the first main game side hold is 0 and the second main game side hold is 1 in the time reduction game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state), 4 The effect is to display the characters "MACHI" of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol) of the variation, but the characters "H" and "I" are not displayed. It is configured.

(f) is the 5th variation in the situation where the 1st main game side hold is 0 and the 2nd main game side hold is 2 in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) of RUSH2 There are two main game symbols (or the first main game symbols may be used) as symbol variations, and as an effect for displaying the characters "MACHI", the character "H" is displayed on the effect display device SG. ing. When 'H' is displayed on the performance display device SG, the displayed 'H' is then displayed in a frame on the right side of the frame displaying 'C' above the performance display device SG. (see (g)).

The continuous production A is executed according to the production scenario 20 up to the fifth variation. During the pattern variation of the next sixth variation, one new hold is entered on the second main game side, and this new hold is a trigger hold of a variation mode that executes the V challenge effect (for example, the triangle shown in FIG. 66). first pending display) (see (h)).

Then, after the sixth variation, the continuous effect B is executed in the case of winning the pre-reading lottery. (i) is the 7th variation in the situation where the hold on the 1st main game side is 0 and the hold on the 2nd main game side is 1 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) The effect is to display the character "MACHI" of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol), but the characters "H" and "I" are not displayed. .

(j) is the 8th variation in the situation where the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 0 in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) of RUSH2 The symbol variation of the 2 main game symbols (or the 1st main game symbol may be acceptable) is a pattern variation (trigger pending symbol variation), and this (j) trigger pending symbol variation is a variation mode for executing Super M Chance production. ing. Specifically, the pattern variation of this trigger pending is the super M chance variation mode of variation mode numbers 115 to 120 in the table T2. This Super M Chance effect is to display the characters "MACHI" in FIG. It is displayed, and the production is performed until the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped in the mode of showing a small hit in FIG. 67(p).

(j) The character "I" is displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect to display the character "MACHI" after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the pattern variation of the trigger suspension. When 'I' is displayed on the performance display device SG, the displayed 'I' is then displayed in a frame on the right side of the frame displaying 'H' above the performance display device SG. (see (k)). When "I" is finally displayed on the effect display device SG in (k), the continuous effect as the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" is successful.

It should be noted that, as the trigger suspension, the target is a variation mode in which the V challenge effect of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) is executed, but the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) A variation mode in which a direct V effect is executed may be targeted. In addition, the look-ahead effect B targeting these variation modes is the pattern variation of 1 variation to 10 variation of RUSH2 in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) after the special game ends, "MACHI ” is configured to succeed in the continuous effect as the effect of displaying the characters, but if the change mode of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol) is targeted as the trigger suspension, , the continuous performance A is configured so that the continuous performance fails.

When the continuous production fails, in FIG. 66, the production of executing the continuous production A according to the production scenario 20 from (a) to (g) up to the fifth variation can be the same. During the pattern change of the next 6th change, one new hold is entered on the second main game side, and this new hold is lost (for example, normal change, SP reach (RUSH), battle reach (RUSH)). It is a variable mode trigger suspension (for example, the triangular first suspension display shown in FIG. 66) for executing an effect (see (h)).

Then, after the sixth variation, the continuous effect B is executed in the case of winning the pre-reading lottery. (i) is the 7th variation in the situation where the hold on the 1st main game side is 0 and the hold on the 2nd main game side is 1 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) The effect is to display the character "MACHI" of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol), but the characters "H" and "I" are not displayed. . (j) when the trigger hold is lost, the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 0 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low-probability base state) The second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) of the 8th variation in the situation is a symbol variation (trigger pending symbol variation), and this (j) trigger pending symbol variation performs a losing effect. It is a variation mode to. Specifically, the pattern variation of this trigger pending is the normal variation of the variation mode number 25 of the table T2, the SP reach (RUSH) of the variation mode number 29 of the table T2, and the battle reach (RUSH) of the variation mode number 30 of the table T2 is a variation of

The effect of this failure is that the character "I" is not displayed on the effect display device SG as the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" in FIG. is configured as In the symbol variation in which the failure is suspended as a trigger, "I" is not displayed on the effect display device SG as the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI", so "I" is displayed on the effect display device as shown in (k). It is configured so that "H" above SG is not displayed in the frame to the right of the frame in which it is displayed. Since "I" was not finally displayed on the effect display device SG, the continuous effect as the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" has failed. In addition, the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect B may be changed to a big hit, and in this case, the continuous effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" is configured to succeed. In FIG. 66, the continuous effect C based on the effect scenario 20 has been described, but in addition to that, for example, in the case of the continuous effect C based on the scenario 8, the trigger pending (the Suspension corresponding to the variation mode production of the super M chance with variation mode numbers 115 to 120) occurs after the production scenario 8 is decided (for example, in the middle of the first variation). ", the character "A" is displayed in the second variation, and the character "C" is displayed in the third variation. When it comes to being replaced with continuous effect B, ``the character 'M' is displayed in the first variation, the character 'A' is displayed in the second variation, and the character 'CHI' is displayed in the third variation'. Continuous production C, or continuous production in which “the character “M” is displayed in the first variation, the character “AC” is displayed in the second variation, and the character “HI” is displayed in the third variation” C, or a continuous effect C in which "the letter 'M' is displayed in the first variation, the letter 'ACH' is displayed in the second variation, and the letter 'I' is displayed in the third variation". .

FIG. 67 is an image diagram of Super M Chance production. This Super M Chance effect is to display the characters "MACHI" in FIG. It is displayed, and the production is performed until the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped in the mode of showing a small hit in FIG. 67(p).

(l) highlights that the continuous effect as the effect of displaying the characters of "MACHI" was successful by finally displaying "I" on the effect display device SG in (k). , the characters 'M', 'A', 'C', 'H', and 'I' displayed on the effect display device SG are integrated into the character 'MACHI' and enlarged at the center of the effect display device SG. is configured to display in

In (m), after enlarging and displaying "MACHI" in the center of the effect display device SG, although not shown, an effect is executed such that the screen of the effect display device SG is broken, and the characters "MACHI" are erased. Then, the characters "Super M Chance" are displayed to execute the title display. Execution of this title display allows the player to recognize that the trigger suspension was a variation mode of Super M Chance.

In (n), after the title is displayed, the effect display device SG displays "Determine the rotating body level with roulette" and explains the game of the effect to be executed thereafter.

(o) shows an effect (roulette effect) using roulette displayed in the game explanation. A roulette with characters 1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 5/4, and 5/5 is displayed, and the roulette is rotated at high speed. After spinning at high speed, the roulette spins slowly and finally stops. When the roulette wheel is stopped, the characters displayed at the lower portion of the effect display device SG (1/5 in the figure) indicate the number of "V" holes to be used in the V challenge effect to be executed thereafter. ing. Here, an example is shown in which 1/5 is determined as a result of the roulette effect.

(p) indicates that the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (which may be the first main game symbol) as trigger pending has been fixed and stopped. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are also determined and stopped when the symbol variation of the second main game symbols (or may be the first main game symbols) is determined and stopped. Then, at the timing before the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped, 1/5 which is the result of the roulette performance shown in (o) is highlighted, and 1/5 which is the result of the roulette performance is displayed. The image object of the rotating body used in the V challenge effect corresponding to is displayed on the effect display device SG. In addition, after displaying the result of the roulette effect (o), before displaying the image object of the rotating body used in the V challenge effect corresponding to the result of the roulette effect (p), as a re-challenge effect, 1 It may be configured to display 2/5, 3/5, 4/5 and 5/5 different from /5. In addition, in (p), as the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol) is confirmed and stopped, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are also confirmed and stopped at "222". Although shown, it may be configured to have a definite stop at "537". In other words, in the case of the V challenge production, unlike the direct V production, it cannot be said that the number of balls entering the specific area is approximately 100%, so the symbol combination (for example, Zoro Combinations other than eyes) may be used.

(q) indicates a small winning game start demonstration. In the effect of the small winning game start demonstration, the effect "Aim for the 'V'" is executed, and the game ball is shot to the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 provided in the game area on the right side. Execute the right-handed notification prompting to do so. In addition, along with this "Aim for the 'V'" effect, an image object of a right arrow is displayed as a right-handed notification prompting the user to shoot a game ball to the right-hand game area.

(r) indicates a small winning game. In this example, since the result of the roulette effect is 1/5, a V challenge effect corresponding to 1/5 (a V challenge motion in which the motion mode of the rotator C17 is the (a) 1/5 pattern) is executed. is configured as In the V challenge effect corresponding to 1/5, the ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game is 1/5, and the effect on the effect display device SG is 1/5 of the rotating body. 5 V challenge effect, and the operation mode of the rotating body rotating body C17 in the first big prize winning opening C10 is configured to perform the (a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion.

A look-ahead effect based on the result of the look-ahead determination can be executed over a plurality of variations, and a non-look-ahead effect not based on the result of the look-ahead determination can be performed over a plurality of variations. If the result of the prefetch judgment satisfies a predetermined condition during the execution of the non-prefetch production (for example, if the trigger holding that the small hit is won occurs), the production of the continuous production when the prefetch judgment that is being executed is not won. It is configured to change the scenario (performance content of non-prefetching performance) to a continuous performance performance scenario (performance content of prefetching performance) when prefetching determination is won.

By configuring in this way, a pachinko gaming machine that executes a prefetch lottery in a predetermined small number of fluctuations (e.g., 10 fluctuations) in a time-reduced gaming state (e.g., low probability base state), prefetching If the effect does not occur, it seems that there is no hit (big hit, small win) in the hold, and if the look-ahead effect occurs, it seems that there is no hit (big hit, small win) before reaching the pattern change of the trigger hold. There is a problem that it seems that Then, the above problem can be solved by first executing the continuous effect of the effect scenario management that does not depend on the look-ahead effect.

Small hit pattern that executes direct V effect (2nd_10R pattern 1 small hit pattern, 2_10R pattern 2 small hit pattern, 2_8R pattern 1 small hit pattern, 2_8R pattern 2 small hit pattern, 2_7R pattern 1 small hit pattern, 2_7R pattern 2 small hit pattern, 2_6R pattern 1 small hit pattern, 2_6R pattern 2 small hit pattern, 2_3R pattern 1 small hit pattern, 1st main game pattern small hit A small winning pattern that executes a direct V effect may be provided in the design) and a small winning pattern that executes the V challenge production (small winning pattern of 2_10R pattern 3, small winning pattern of 2_10R pattern 4, 2nd_10R design 5 small hit pattern, 2_10R design 6 small hit design, 2_10R design 7 small hit design, 1_4R design 1 small hit design, 1_4R design 2 small hit design, 1_4R design 3 It has a small hit pattern, a small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 4, and a small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 5).

Continuous effect B (scenario) and trigger suspension targeted for continuous effect C are not variations of small winning symbols that execute the direct V effect of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol), but the second main game symbol. It is preferable to target the variation mode of the small winning symbols that execute the V challenge effect of the 2 main game symbols (may be the 1st main game symbols).

In addition, the target hold suggested by the production scenario of the continuous production A is not the fluctuation mode of the small winning pattern that executes the direct V production of the second main game pattern (it may be the first main game pattern), but the second main game. It is preferable to target the variation mode of the small winning symbol that executes the V challenge effect of the symbol (may be the first main game symbol).

In addition, even if the preceding hold that is digested prior to the trigger hold is the hold of the fluctuation mode of the small winning pattern (big hit pattern) of the second main game pattern (may be the first main game pattern), the trigger holding will proceed. It is possible to execute all continuous effects. In this case, it is preferable that the pre-hold that is digested prior to the trigger hold is a fluctuation mode of the small winning symbol that executes the direct V effect of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol).

As a look-ahead effect related to the trigger holding of the variation mode of the small winning symbol of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) for executing the V challenge effect, the effect of stocking the super M chance icon is executed. It is In addition, as a look-ahead effect related to the trigger holding of the variation mode of the small hit symbol of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) that executes the direct V effect, the effect of stocking the V chance icon is executed. is configured to

Here, in the specific effect A (rank-up effect C), a V chance icon (“V icon” is displayed on the effect display device SG) and a super M chance icon (“M icon” is displayed on the effect display device SG) as special icons. ”) can be stocked, but in the specific effect B (rank-up effect D), the V chance icon (displaying “V icon” on the effect display device SG) as a special icon can be stocked. However, the super M chance icon (the "M icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG) is configured not to be stocked.

By configuring in this way, the fluctuation mode of the small winning pattern that executes the direct V effect is not subject to the look-ahead effect (continuous effect B (scenario), continuous effect C) of the effect scenario management, so that the effect It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the small win for which the direct V effect is executed, regardless of whether the look-ahead effect of scenario management is being executed or not.

Based on the look-ahead information (holding number information, winning/failure information, pattern information, variation mode information) received from the main control unit, the sub-control unit holds that a small hit is won in the holding of the second main game side during the special game. If it is determined whether or not there is, and if it is determined that there is a hold (trigger hold) that has won a small hit, a read-ahead effect in the hold during the special game (for example, "M icon" on the effect display device SG It is configured to execute an on-hold read-ahead effect A to be displayed, a hold-on-hold read-ahead effect B that displays a "V icon" on the effect display device SG, etc.). The judgment timing of whether or not there is a reserve in which a small hit is won in the reserve of the second main game side by the sub control unit is during the special game, but during the small hit fluctuation, during the small win game, and during the special game The determination may be made at any timing as long as it is in the middle, or at a plurality of timings.

By judging whether or not there is a reserve in which a small win is won in the reserve of the second main game side by the sub control unit, a plurality of small wins are won in the reserve of the second main game side during the special game. When it is determined that there is a reservation that is on hold, and a reservation is executed, the execution target of the reservation ), and for any hold that has won a small hit, the lottery target for the execution of the reservation (notification target). For those who have won a small hit that has been subject to a lottery for the execution of the reservation inside the Renso production, it will not be the lottery target for the execution of the reservation inside the Renso production again. is configured to On the other hand, although it has become a lottery target for the execution of the reservation inside Renso production, for the reservation that has won a small hit and has become the execution target of the reservation inside Renso production, the reservation inside Renso production will be executed again. It is configured to be subject to the lottery of

Also, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the timing of determining whether or not there is information that can be triggered pending in the hold on the first main game side by the sub control unit is the winning of the game ball to the first main game start port A10. It is configured to make a judgment at the timing (more specifically, the timing at which the prefetch information is received from the main control unit), and in the time shortening game state, the trigger is held within the hold of the second main game side by the sub control unit The timing of determining whether or not there is information that can be, the winning timing of the game ball to the second main game start port B10 (more specifically, the timing of receiving the look-ahead information from the main control unit). It is configured. Furthermore, in the non-time-reduced game state, the timing for determining whether or not there is information that can be trigger pending in the hold on the first main game side by the sub control unit is the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first main game symbols or the stop of fluctuation. In the time-reduced game state, the sub-control unit determines whether or not there is information that can result in a trigger hold in the hold on the second main game side. The timing is configured to be determined at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second main game symbols or the timing at which the hold information with the stopping of the fluctuation is digested.

FIG. 68 is an image diagram of the read-ahead effect of the reservation. First, image objects displayed on the effect display device SG during the special game will be described. In the special game start demonstration after the small winning game, the second holding display of the first main game side (0 is shown in (a) of FIG. 68, the first main game side ), the second hold display on the second main game side (in (a) of FIG. 68, 4 is shown, and there are four holds on the second main game side). it's shown. On the right side of the second main game side second pending display, the second main game side first pending display (in (a) of FIG. 68, four first pending displays are shown, the second main game (there are four holdings on the same side). Below the second hold display on the second main game side, an image object of a right arrow is displayed as a right hitting notification. Below the image object of the right arrow as a right-handed notification, the number of balls won during the special game (including the small winning game) up to the Nth time (the number of balls won by consecutive games) is displayed (for example, 3150 GET). Below the number of balls won during the special game, 150, which is the number of balls won during the special game this time (Nth time) (including the number of balls won in the small winning game), and this time 150, which is the expected number of balls that can be obtained in the (Nth) special game, is displayed. At the lower left of the effect display device SG, the title of the BGM that is output in the current special game is displayed. At the upper right of the effect display device SG, the number of round games (for example, 3R) being executed in the current special game is displayed. At the bottom center of the effect display device SG, it is notified that the rank-up effect A will be executed in the special game start demonstration.

In (a) of FIG. 68, during the N-th special game, there are 4 holds that have won a small hit in the hold on the second main game side during the 10th round special game (there are 4 trigger holds). individual situations). After the end of the N-1th special game, a trigger suspension scheduled to execute the symbol variation of the second main game first, and a suspension of a small winning symbol with a small winning symbol that executes a direct V effect. is trigger hold 1 (in FIG. 68, the first hold display on the side of the second main game with 1 written in a circle corresponds to it), and the second symbol change after trigger hold 1 is the second main game. Trigger hold 2 (in FIG. 68, the second main with 2 written in a circle) The first hold display on the game side corresponds), and the pattern change next to the trigger hold 2, which is the third pattern change of the second main game, is the trigger hold scheduled to be executed, and the V challenge effect is executed. The holding that results in a small hit with a small winning pattern is trigger holding 3 (in FIG. 68, the first holding display on the second main game side with 3 written in a black circle corresponds to it), and the pattern variation next to trigger holding 3 Trigger suspension 4 (in FIG. 68, the circled corresponds to the first pending display on the second main game side with 4 written in ).

By determining whether or not there is a reserve in which a small win is won in the reserve of the second main game side by the sub control part, four small wins are won in the reserve of the second main game side during the special game. is determined to exist. Here, four trigger holds, Trigger Hold 1, Trigger Hold 2, Trigger Hold 3, and Trigger Hold 4, can be the targets of execution of the hold-in-hold continuous production effect, and trigger hold 1, trigger hold 2, trigger hold 3, The four trigger suspensions of the trigger suspension 4 can be the lottery targets for execution of the suspension-in-renso production. Next, a lottery is carried out for execution targets of the pending rendezvous effect, and trigger hold 1 and trigger hold 4 are determined as execution target trigger holds (trigger hold 1 and trigger hold 4 in FIG. 68 are trigger hold execution targets). indicated by a star). In the special game of this time (the Nth time), the two holdings, Trigger Hold 1 and Trigger Hold 4, have won a small hit. It is configured to execute a reservation prefetch effect B, etc.).

The rank-up effect A is displayed such that points are displayed on the effect display device SG each time the sub-input button is pressed, and the display of the points is added. The sub-input button can be pressed three times, and the total points for the three times are the number of balls that can be obtained in the subsequent special game (corresponding to the number of rounds that can be executed). FIG. 68(b) shows the first operation of the sub-input button of the rank-up effect A during the special game start demonstration of the N-th special game, and the effect display of the button image object prompting the operation of the sub-input button. It is displayed on the device SG.

(c) of FIG. 68 shows the result based on the first operation of the sub-input button of the rank-up effect A during the special game start demonstration of the N-th special game, and "+300" is displayed on the effect display device SG. indicate. Then, the obtained 300 points are added to "150" indicating the expected number of balls to be obtained in the current (Nth) special game to change the number to "450".

(d) of FIG. 68 shows the second operation of the sub-input button of the rank-up effect A during the special game start demonstration of the N-th special game, and the button image object prompting the operation of the sub-input button is produced. It is displayed on the display device SG.

(e) of FIG. 68 shows the result based on the second operation of the sub-input button of the rank-up effect A during the special game start demonstration of the N-th special game, and "+450" is displayed on the effect display device SG. indicate. Then, the obtained 450 points are added to "450" indicating the expected number of balls to be obtained in the special game this time (the N-th time) to change the number to "900".

FIG. 68(f) shows the third operation of the sub-input button of the rank-up effect A during the special game start demonstration of the N-th special game, and the button image object prompting the operation of the sub-input button is produced. It is displayed on the display device SG.

(g) of FIG. 68 shows the result based on the third operation of the sub-input button of the rank-up effect A during the special game start demonstration of the N-th special game, and "+600" is displayed on the effect display device SG. indicate. Then, the obtained 600 points are added to "900" indicating the expected number of balls to be obtained in the special game this time (the N-th time) to change the number to "1500". Also, in the rank-up effect A, when the sub-input button is operated three times, the V chance icon ("V icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG) and the super M chance icon ("V icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG). It is possible to display special icons such as "M icon"), and in this example, trigger hold 1 and trigger hold "Vx2" indicating that two V chance icons corresponding to 4 have been obtained is displayed on the performance display device SG.

(h) of FIG. 68 shows the result of the rank-up effect A during the special game start demonstration of the N-th special game, and the effect display device SG shows the maximum acquired points, and the special game continues for 10 rounds. "MAX1350GET" is displayed to indicate that Then, in the rank-up effect A, two V-chance icons corresponding to "Vx2" indicating that two V-chance icons have been obtained ("V-icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG) are produced. It is displayed on the display device SG.

When the N-th special game ends, the pattern variation of the trigger suspension 1 is executed. Since the trigger suspension 1 is a trigger suspension in which a small hit is won, the small winning pattern is fixed and stopped after the start of pattern variation. Then, when the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning opening C10 during the operation flag operation of the special electric role based on the small hit, the next N+1th special game is executed. It is configured.

(i) of FIG. 68 is a situation in which there are three holds that have won a small hit in the hold on the second main game side during the N+1th special game this time and during the 10th round special game (trigger hold are three). In the (N+1)-th special game after the N-th special game is completed, trigger suspension 2, trigger suspension 3, and trigger suspension 4 are suspended as suspensions on the second main game side. Here, by judging whether or not there is a reserve in which a small hit is won in the reserve of the second main game side by the sub control unit, three small wins are won in the reserve of the second main game side during the special game. is determined to exist. Three trigger holds, Trigger Hold 2, Trigger Hold 3, and Trigger Hold 4, can be the targets of execution of the hold-in-place rendezvous effect. Since it has become a lottery target for the execution of the manor production and has become a target for the execution of the reservation inner manor production, it is configured so that it will not be a lottery target for the execution of the reservation inner manor production again. For Trigger Suspension 2 and Trigger Suspension 3, in the previous N-th special game, it was a lottery target for the execution of the Suspension Renso effect, but since it was not subject to the Suspend Renso effect, this time It is configured to be subject to a lottery for the execution of the re-hold inner Renso effect in the (N+1)th special game. Then, in the N+1-th special game, a lottery is performed for execution targets of the suspension inner rendezvous effect, and trigger suspension 2 and trigger suspension 3 are determined as trigger suspensions to be executed (trigger suspension 2 and trigger suspension 3 in FIG. 68). is a pending trigger to be executed). As a result, in the N+1th special game this time, the two holdings of trigger holding 2 and trigger holding 3 have been won as small hits. , and B, which displays a "V icon" on the effect display device SG, etc.).

In the N+1-th special game, an example of executing the rank-up effect B in the special game start demonstration is shown. In the rank-up performance B, points are displayed on the performance display device SG each time the sub-input button is repeatedly hit, and the display of the points is displayed so as to be added each time the sub-input button is repeatedly hit. The effective time of the sub-input button is set to 8 seconds, and the total points are displayed based on the elapse of the effective time. is).

FIG. 68(j) shows a repeated hitting operation of the sub input button of the rank-up effect B during the special game start demonstration of the N+1th special game. Displayed in SG.

(k) of FIG. 68 shows the result based on the continuous hitting operation of the sub-input button of the rank-up effect B during the special game start demonstration of the N+1th special game, and "+1350" is displayed on the effect display device SG. . Then, the obtained 1350 points are added to "150" indicating the expected number of balls to be obtained in the N+1th special game to change the number to "1500". Also, in the rank-up effect B, when the sub-input button is repeatedly hit, the V chance icon (“V icon” is displayed on the effect display device SG) and the super M chance icon (“M icon” is displayed on the effect display device SG). ), and in this example, one V "Vx1" indicating that a chance icon has been obtained is displayed on the effect display device SG, and "Mx1" indicating that one super M chance icon corresponding to trigger hold 3 has been obtained is displayed as a effect. Display on device SG.

(l) of FIG. 68 shows the result of the rank-up effect B during the special game start demonstration of the N+1th special game, and the effect display device SG shows the maximum acquired points, and the special game continues for 10 rounds. "MAX1350GET" is displayed to indicate that Then, in the rank-up performance B, one V-chance icon (“V-icon” is displayed on the performance display device SG) corresponding to “V×1” indicating that one V-chance icon has been obtained is produced. Displayed on the display device SG, one super M chance icon corresponding to "M x 1" indicating that one super M chance icon has been acquired ("M icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG) is displayed on the performance display device SG. Since one "V icon" corresponding to trigger hold 4 was displayed on the effect display device SG, two "V icons" are displayed as a result.

In addition, the prefetch effect A in the hold is based on the prefetch information (holding number information, win/fail information, pattern information, variation mode information) received from the main control unit. It is determined whether or not there is a winning pattern for executing a mode (V challenge performance) of winning a small win and a V challenge operation, and a winning pattern for executing a mode (V challenge performance) of winning a small prize and a V challenge operation is determined. It is configured to display a super M chance icon ("M icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG) when it is determined that there is a suspension (trigger suspension).

In addition, the on-hold continuous game look-ahead effect B is based on the look-ahead information received from the main control unit (holding number information, win/fail information, pattern information, variation mode information). It is determined whether or not there is a winning pattern for executing a mode of winning a small win and a direct V (performance of a direct V), and a winning pattern of executing a mode of winning a small win and a direct V (performance of a direct V) is determined. It is configured to display a V chance icon ("V icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG) when it is determined that there is a suspension (trigger suspension).

On-hold read-ahead effect executed during special game (for example, on-hold read-ahead effect A that displays "M icon" on the effect display device SG, on-hold read-ahead effect A that displays "V icon" on the effect display device SG The execution timing of the continuous game look-ahead effect B, etc.) is not limited to during the special game (the second round, which is the first round in which the special game is started, or subsequent rounds), and the execution of the special game start demo. It may be configured to be executed during time or during the execution time of the special game end demonstration. In addition, in a pachinko game machine configured to execute a read-ahead rendezvous effect in the reserve executed during such a special game, the probability of winning a small win in the second main game pattern is high (for example, 1023/ 1024, etc.).

The second main game starter B10 was explained as the second main game starter electric accessory, and the first main game starter A10 was explained as the starter that is not the second main game starter electric accessory, but the first main game starter The port A10 may be the first main game starter electric accessory, and the second main game starter B10 may be the starter that is not the second main game starter electric accessory. In addition, unlike the pachinko game machine designed with two main game symbols, the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern, and the probability of winning a small hit with the second main game pattern is high, only the first main game pattern is provided, Even in a pachinko game machine designed to increase the probability of winning a small win in the first main game pattern, it is possible to execute the pre-reading effect of the reserved consecutive games executed during such a special game. In this case, it can be realized by replacing the second main game symbols explained so far with the first main game symbols.

Based on the look-ahead information received from the main control unit (holding number information, success/failure information, pattern information, variation mode information), the sub-control unit is in the hold of the second main game side (in the hold of the first main game side and (or may be in the hold of both the first main game side and the second main game side). When it is determined that there is a (trigger hold), a read-ahead effect in the hold (for example, a read-ahead effect A in the hold that displays "M icon" on the effect display device SG, and a "V icon" in the effect display device SG) 2 which is the first round in which the special game is started during the execution time of the small winning game start demonstration, during the small winning game, during the execution time of the small winning game end demonstration. An example of execution during the execution period of the first round, the subsequent rounds, and the special game end demo was shown, but it may be executed during the symbol variation. Suspension pre-reading effect executed during pattern change (for example, Suspension pre-reading effect A displaying "M icon" on the effect display device SG, In-hold pre-reading effect A displaying "V icon" on the effect display device SG Execution timings of (1) to (4) of the timings described above, (b) to (l) of FIG. 129, (m) to (x) of FIG. 130, and (y) of FIG. ) to (j2), (k2) to (n2) in FIG. 132, and the like.

When it is determined by the pre-reading determination of the sub-control part during the N-th special game that the information for the small winning game is stored, the information for the small winning game is stored during execution of the special game. It is possible to execute a read-ahead effect (special effect) in which the reservation is notified. Even if a plurality of pieces of information for a small winning game are stored during the N-th special game, only one (one or more) of the information for a plurality of small winning games is stored in the pre-reading performance within the reservation. It is configured to be a notification target, and for information that is a small winning game that is a notification target in the pending consecutive house look-ahead effect executed based on the look-ahead determination of the sub-control unit during the N-th special game While not subject to judgment of the prefetch judgment of the sub control unit during the N + 1th special game after the Nth special game, it is notified by the prefetching performance in the hold during the Nth special game It is constructed so as to be subject to judgment of the prefetch judgment of the sub-control unit during the N+1-th special game for the information that does not become a small winning game.

For pachinko machines designed with a low probability of winning a small hit (e.g., 1/7), if a pre-reading effect occurs during a special game or during a pattern change, the pre-reading A player recognizes that the probability of winning is very low except for the trigger pending which is the target of the effect, and as a result, the interest in the game is reduced. In addition, when the reserve-in-residence look-ahead effect occurs and the small hit is won in the latest hold and develops into a special game, the hold-in-place look-ahead effect is executed for the hold that becomes the most recent small win. Since the player does not know the possibility that the holding of 's' will be a hit, this causes a decrease in interest in the game. However, in a pachinko game machine designed with a high probability of winning a small hit (for example, about 1/1), by executing the above-described read-ahead performance within the hold, the trigger hold after the trigger hold Therefore, the player can be given a feeling of expectation of winning even for the trigger hold in which the read-ahead performance within the hold is not executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to execute the pre-reading performance of the reserved residence at unexpected timing.

FIG. 69 is an image diagram showing a charge promotion effect. The final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state (for example, low probability base state) (in the case of RUSH1, the first variation of the second main game symbol after the special game ends ((a) in FIG. 69) , In the case of RUSH2, the 10th variation of the second main game pattern after the end of the special game), at a predetermined timing after a predetermined period of time has passed since the symbol variation started, an effect to accumulate the hold of the second main game side. It is configured to execute a certain charge promotion effect.

If the first variation of the second main game symbol after the special game of RUSH1, which is the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state), is a losing symbol variation. , the first variation (SP reach) of the variation mode number 102 of the table T1 is selected. The variation mode of this first variation (SP reach) has a variation time of 68 seconds, and is constructed so as to execute SP reach during symbol variation of the second main game symbol, and display of charge promotion effect and result screen. has enough variation time to execute

In addition, the 10th variation of the second main game symbol after the special game of RUSH2, which is the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state), is the symbol variation of losing. In the case, the variation mode of SP reach (RUSH) of variation mode number 29 or battle reach (RUSH) of variation mode number 30 of table T3 is selected. This SP reach (RUSH) fluctuation mode has a fluctuation time of 50 seconds, and is configured to execute SP reach during pattern fluctuation of the second main game pattern, and execute charging promotion effect and result screen display. have enough variation time to The variation mode of battle reach (RUSH) has a variation time of 58 seconds, and is configured to execute battle reach while the pattern of the second main game pattern is changing, and execute charging promotion effect and result screen display. has sufficient fluctuation time for

As shown in (b) of FIG. 69, the charge promotion effect is the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state (for example, low probability base state) (in the case of RUSH1, after the special game is over) At the 1st variation of the 2nd main game symbol (Fig. 69(a), 10th variation of the 2nd main game symbol after the end of the special game in case of RUSH2), the effect display device SG says "Charge right hand". The image object is displayed, and it is a right-handed notification prompting to shoot a game ball to the game area on the right side where the second main game start opening is arranged.

As shown in (c) of FIG. 69, the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state (for example, low probability base state) (in the case of RUSH1, the second main game symbol after the end of the special game (Fig. 69(a), 10th variation of the second main game pattern after the end of the special game in the case of RUSH2), the number of balls entering the second main game start port becomes 4, and the effect When the number of first pending displays displayed on the lower side of the display device SG reaches four (maximum), an image object of "charging completed" indicating that the charge promotion effect is completed is displayed, and the charge promotion effect is terminated. 69(d), when displaying the image object "charging complete", the display indicating the number of executions of the time-reduced game state is displayed according to the number of balls entered into the second main game start port (for example, 4).In this configuration, the display indicating the number of executions of the time-saving game state on the upper right of the effect display device SG from the image object of "charging completed" is changed. It is preferable to change the display indicating the number of times the time-saving game state is executed from "last" to "remaining 4 times" by displaying a color effect on the display of the "charging complete" image object. Instead of changing the display indicating the number of times the time-reduced gaming state (eg, low probability base state) is executed, at the timing of entering the second main game start port, the time-reduced gaming state (eg, low probability High base state) can be configured to change the display indicating the number of executions (1 remaining from last, 1 remaining to 2 remaining, 2 remaining to 3 remaining, 3 remaining to 4 remaining) good.

In addition, the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) (in the case of RUSH1, the first variation of the second main game symbol after the special game is finished (( in FIG. 69) a) In the case of RUSH2, when the 10th variation of the second main game symbol after the special game ends), when the number of balls entered into the second main game start port is not 4 (for example, when 3 balls are entered) , an image object of "charging complete" indicating that the charge promotion effect is completed in a state where the first pending display displayed on the lower side of the effect display device SG does not reach the maximum (four), and the charge promotion effect is performed. Then, the symbol variation of the next second main game symbol (in the case of RUSH1, the second variation of the second main game symbol after the special game is over, and in the case of RUSH2, the second main game symbol after the special game is over) 11th variation), at the start of the variation, the display showing the number of executions of the time-reduced game state (eg, low probability base state) is displayed by subtracting 1 from the number of balls entering the second main game start port. (For example, if three pitches have been scored, "Two times remaining").

The final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state (for example, low probability base state) (in the case of RUSH1, the first variation of the second main game symbol after the special game ends ((a) in FIG. 69) , In the case of RUSH2, the 10th variation of the second main game symbol after the end of the special game), based on the ball entering the second main game start port, from the main control unit to the sub control unit Prefetch information (holding number information, It is configured to transmit the success/failure information, pattern information, variation mode information).The sub-control unit is based on the prefetch information (holding number information, success/failure information, pattern information, variation mode information) received from the main control unit , whether or not the hold in the hold on the second main game side is a loss, whether or not there is a winning pattern to execute a mode (V challenge performance) in which a small win and V challenge operation is performed, a small win and It is determined whether or not there is a winning pattern for executing a straight V mode (direct V performance).

In (d) of FIG. 69, it is the result of the charge promotion effect, based on the prefetch information (holding number information, success or failure information, pattern information, variation mode information) received by the sub control unit from the main control unit, 2 Whether or not the hold in the hold of the main game side is a loss, whether or not there is a winning pattern for executing a mode (V challenge performance) of winning a small win and V challenge operation, winning a small win and direct V The information indicated by the four second main game side trigger pending, which is the result of determining whether or not there is a winning symbol to execute the mode (direct V effect), will be described.

The symbol variation of the 2nd main game symbol in the 1st variation of RUSH1 (in the case of RUSH2, the 10th variation of the 2nd main game symbol after the end of the special game) is completed, and the symbol variation of the 2nd main game is executed first. The scheduled trigger hold is a hold that will result in a loss, and is trigger hold 1 (in FIG. 69, the first hold display on the second main game side with 1 written in a circle corresponds). The symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the 1st variation of RUSH1 (in the case of RUSH2, the 10th variation of the 2nd main game symbol after the end of the special game) is completed, and the symbol variation of the 2nd main game is executed secondly. The trigger hold scheduled to be performed is a hold that results in a small win with a small winning pattern that executes a direct V effect, and is a trigger hold 2 (in FIG. 1 pending display). The symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the first variation of RUSH1 (in the case of RUSH2, the tenth variation of the second main game symbol after the end of the special game) is completed, and the symbol variation of the second main game is executed thirdly. The trigger hold scheduled to be performed is a hold that will result in a small win with a small winning pattern that executes the V challenge effect, and is a trigger hold 3 (in FIG. 69, the second main game side first pending display). The symbol variation of the 2nd main game symbol in the 1st variation of RUSH1 (in the case of RUSH2, the 10th variation of the 2nd main game symbol after the end of the special game) is completed, and the symbol variation of the 2nd main game is executed 4th. The trigger hold scheduled to be performed is a hold that results in a small win with a small winning pattern that executes a direct V effect, and is a trigger hold 4 (in FIG. 1 pending display).

Trigger suspension 1 is a losing pattern, trigger suspension 2 is a small winning symbol that executes a direct V effect, trigger suspension 3 is a small winning symbol that executes a V challenge performance, and trigger suspension 4 is a small winning symbol that executes a direct V effect. , and the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state (for example, low probability base state) (in the case of RUSH1, the second main game symbol after the end of the special game In the first variation of the game pattern ((a) in FIG. 69, in the case of RUSH2, the tenth variation of the second main game pattern after the end of the special game), there are a plurality of holdings on the second main game side (for example, four). ) In the case of being held (held), based on the information on the validity of the holding of the plurality of symbols, including the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time shortened game state, the plurality of held symbols It is configured to execute "summary variation" in which the reserved symbol variation of 1 is made to look like 1 symbol variation.

For example, design variation for 5 variations (current design variation (the relevant design variation), 1st variation in 4 reservations, 2nd variation in 4 reservations, 4 The pattern variation of the 3rd variation in the hold, the pattern variation of the 4th variation in the 4 holds) can be made to look like 1 pattern variation. In addition, it is not limited to the "summary variation" that makes the symbol variation for 5 variations look like 1 symbol variation, but the symbol variation for the symbol variation and the number of pending reservations is made to look like 1 symbol variation. It may also be referred to as “summary change”. For example, if there is the design variation and two reservations, the design variation for the three variations (current design variation (the design variation), the first variation of the two reservations, and the two reservations The pattern variation of the second variation in the middle is set as a “summary variation” that makes it look like the pattern variation of 1. In addition, the number of pattern variations including the design variation and the subsequent retention that becomes a small hit may be a “summary variation” that looks like a symbol variation of 1. For example, if there is a pattern variation and 4 reservations, and the second reservation has a small hit winning reservation, the symbol variation, 4 The symbol variation of the first variation in the reserve and the symbol variation of the second variation in the reserve of four are regarded as a "summary variation" in which three variations are shown as one symbol variation.

Trigger suspension 1 is a losing pattern, trigger suspension 2 is a small winning symbol that executes a direct V effect, trigger suspension 3 is a small winning symbol that executes a V challenge performance, and trigger suspension 4 is a small winning symbol that executes a direct V effect. The ``summary variation'' in the situation of winning with , is configured to notify that at least one of a plurality of symbol variations is winning with a small winning symbol that executes direct V performance by performing a winning performance. It is This winning effect can be a reservation-in-request read-ahead effect executed during pattern variation (for example, reservation-end game read-ahead effect B in which a "V icon" is displayed on the effect display device SG) or the like. The execution timing of the on-hold renso look-ahead effect (for example, the on-hold renso look-ahead effect B that displays the "V icon" on the effect display device SG, etc.) executed during this pattern change is the timing (1) described above. (4), (b) to (l) in FIG. 129, (m) to (x) in FIG. 130, (y) to (j2) in FIG. 131, (k2) to (n2) in FIG. can. In addition, this hit performance targets the small winning patterns that execute the direct V performance and excludes the small winning patterns that execute the V challenge production, but targets the small winning patterns that execute the V challenge production. You may perform a performance.

Trigger suspension 1 is a losing pattern, trigger suspension 2 is a small winning symbol that executes a direct V effect, trigger suspension 3 is a small winning symbol that executes a V challenge performance, and trigger suspension 4 is a small winning symbol that executes a direct V effect. The following timings can be exemplified as the execution timing of the hit effect in the "collective variation" in the situation of winning with.
(1) A hit variation is executed at the timing during the pattern variation of the second main game symbol in the first variation of RUSH1 (in the case of RUSH2, the 10th variation of the second main game symbol after the end of the special game).
(2) The symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the first variation of RUSH1 (in the case of RUSH2, the 10th variation of the second main game symbol after the end of the special game) is completed, and the second symbol of the second main game is completed. Hit variation is executed at the timing during variation (symbol variation of trigger hold 1).
(3) The symbol variation of the 2nd main game symbol in the 1st variation of RUSH1 (10th variation of the 2nd main game symbol after the end of the special game in the case of RUSH2) ends, and the 3rd symbol of the 2nd main game. Hit variation is executed at the timing during variation (symbol variation of trigger hold 2).

In addition, when the trigger suspension 1, which is the suspension of the small winning symbol for executing the V challenge performance, is suspended earlier than the trigger suspension 2, which is the suspension of the small winning symbol for executing the direct V performance, that is, In (d) of FIG. 69, the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the first variation of RUSH1 (in the case of RUSH2, the tenth variation of the second main game symbol after the end of the special game) is completed, and the first 2. The trigger hold scheduled to execute the pattern variation of the main game is a hold that will be a small hit with a small hit pattern that executes the V challenge production (trigger hold 1 (in FIG. 69, the second The 1st pending display on the main game side corresponds)), the symbol variation of the 2nd main game symbol of the 1st variation of RUSH1 (in the case of RUSH2, the 10th variation of the 2nd main game symbol after the end of the special game) is completed , Second, the trigger hold scheduled to execute the pattern variation of the second main game is a hold that will be a small hit with a small hit pattern that executes a direct V effect (trigger hold 2 (2 in a circle in FIG. 69) In the situation where the first suspended display on the second main game side where It is configured to perform a temporary stop display effect).

After that, as shown in (f) of FIG. 69, a result screen (as a result screen indicating that the state of RUSH1 or RUSH2 has ended, "BONUS x 1", which is the number of consecutive games in the special game, or the output obtained during the consecutive games). A screen displaying "600 GET" which is the number of balls) is displayed. Then, when the trigger suspension 1, which is the suspension of the small winning symbol for executing the V challenge performance, is suspended before the trigger suspension 2, which is the suspension of the small winning symbol for which the direct V performance is performed, After performing a losing effect as shown in (e) of FIG. 69, the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) (after special game in case of RUSH1) 1st variation of the 2nd main game symbol ((a) in FIG. 69, 10th variation of the 2nd main game symbol after the end of the special game in the case of RUSH2), or multiple symbol variations (trigger hold 1 symbol variation, pattern variation of trigger suspension 2, pattern variation of trigger suspension 3, pattern variation of trigger suspension 4) (for example, pattern variation of trigger suspension 1 and pattern variation of trigger suspension 2), It is configured to execute a special effect (revival V challenge effect) as shown in FIG. 69(g).

(g) of FIG. 69 is the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state (for example, low probability base state) (1 variation of the second main game symbol after the end of the special game in the case of RUSH1) 69(a), in case of RUSH2, the 10th variation of the second main game symbol after the end of the special game. A special effect may be executed in the symbol variation of 1 or the pattern variation of Trigger Suspension 2. After executing the special effect (resurrection V challenge effect) as shown in (g) of FIG. After the small winning pattern is displayed, the small winning game is executed.If the passage of the game ball cannot be detected in the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game, (h ), a result screen different from the previously displayed result screen ((f) in FIG. 69) is displayed during the small win game end demonstration. A specific effect different from the result screen of (h) (effect of maintaining a failure effect screen indicating that the specific area has not been passed) may be executed.

An example of the charge promoting effect of increasing the first pending display on the effect display device SG based on the entry of the ball into the second main game start port is shown, but it is different from the effect of displaying the first pending display on the effect display device SG. Effect (for example, four empty squares are displayed on the effect display device SG, and the four empty squares displayed on the effect display device SG are colored based on the ball entering the second main game start port. It may be an effect such as showing that the empty squares are filling up.

The final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state (for example, low probability base state) (in the case of RUSH1, the first variation of the second main game symbol after the special game ends ((a) in FIG. 69) , In the case of RUSH2, at the predetermined timing of the 10th variation of the second main game symbol after the end of the special game), if all the holdings on the second main game side (for example, four) are accumulated, one of the following You may employ the specification which performs that production|presentation.
(1) At a predetermined timing, if all (for example, 4) holds on the second main game side are accumulated, the charge promotion effect is not executed (in the first place, no charge promotion effect is displayed).
(2) At a predetermined timing, even if all (for example, four) reserves on the second main game side are accumulated, the charge promotion effect is executed, but even if there is no entry into the second main game start port. Execution of charging completion effect (for example, execution of charging completion effect is executed immediately after the start of execution of charge promoting effect).
(3) At a predetermined timing, even if all (for example, 4) reserves on the second main game side are accumulated, the charge promotion effect is executed, and if there is no entry into the second main game start port. Do not execute the charge completion effect (for example, even if all the reserves on the second main game side are accumulated after the start of the charge promotion effect, if there is no ball actually entered into the second main game start port, the charge is completed does not execute the rendition).

Even if the pachinko machine is provided with both the small winning symbol for executing the direct V effect and the small winning symbol for executing the V challenge effect as the second main game symbol, the time shortening game state (for example, low probability high The final variation of the second main game symbols in the base state) and the symbol variation of the reserved second main game symbols for a plurality of reserved patterns can be set as appropriate display contents, whereby Even if the performance in the "summary variation" matches with the content suggesting a loss, the variation content can leave the possibility of a small win for executing the V-challenge performance.

In the time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state), the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern is satisfied, and the first main game pattern is a small winning pattern indicating a small winning (all small winning patterns are targeted). During the small winning game based on this small winning (while the operation flag of the special electric role is activated), the passing of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10. Then, a special game is executed, and after the completion of this special game, it is configured to be in a time shortening game state (for example, low probability high base state).

Then, this time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state) is a condition for starting fluctuation of the first main game symbols in a situation where the total number of times the conditions for starting fluctuation of the second main game symbols have not been satisfied has reached 10 times. completes 6 times in total (single upper limit number of times A) (end condition A), or in a situation where the total number of times the first main game pattern has not reached 6 times. It is set to end (end condition B) when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in total 10 times (single upper limit number of times B).

That is, when one of the end conditions A and B is satisfied, the time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability-high base state) is configured to end. Then, in the upper right of the effect display device SG, as shown in FIG. Remaining 7 times, remaining 6 times, remaining 5 times, remaining 4 times, remaining 3 times, remaining 2 times, remaining 1 time, subtraction display such as last, 1st time, 2nd time, 3rd time, 4th time, 5th time, 6th, 7th, 8th, 9th, and last display) is executed.

Part of the situation where the total number of times that the first main game symbols have not met the fluctuation start conditions has not reached 6 times (the total number of times that the first main game symbols have met the fluctuation start conditions is 0, 1, or 2 times. , 3 times, 4 times), even if the condition for starting the change of the new 1st main game pattern is satisfied and the pattern change of the 1st main game pattern is executed, the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) is configured not to update the display indicating the number of executions.

For example, in a situation where "remaining 9 times" is displayed as a display indicating the number of executions of the time-reduced gaming state (for example, low probability base state), the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied and the second Even if the pattern variation of one main game pattern is executed, the display indicating the number of times of execution of the time-reduced game state (for example, low probability base state) is not changed from "remaining 9 times" to "remaining 8 times", It is configured to maintain the display of "remaining 9 times".

Then, the situation in which the first main game symbol has satisfied the fluctuation start condition six times in total (the situation in which the first main game symbol has satisfied the fluctuation start condition five times in total, that is, the new first main game symbol If the condition for starting the variation of the game symbols is satisfied, the number of times reaches 6 times), when the condition for starting the variation of the first main game symbols is satisfied and the symbol variation of the first main game symbols is executed (the end condition A is If satisfied), update the display indicating the number of executions of the time-reduced game state (for example, low probability base state), and the satisfaction of the second main game pattern fluctuation start condition reaches 10 times in total. If it is not in the state (regardless of the number of remaining times of the executable low probability base state of the second main game pattern), the number of executions of the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) It is configured such that the displayed display is forcibly changed to a display mode of a specific mode (last or 0 times).

For example, in a situation where "remaining 9 times" is displayed as a display indicating the number of executions of the time-reduced game state (eg, low-probability base state), the satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is When the first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied and the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is executed, the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is started. Sometimes, the display indicating the number of executions of the time-reduced gaming state (for example, the low-probability base state) is changed from "remaining 9 times" to "last". At the timing when the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern starts to fluctuate or when the pattern of the first main game pattern is fluctuating, the display showing the number of executions of the time-reduced game state (for example, the low-probability base state) is forcibly displayed. It is configured to have a display mode of a specific mode (last or 0 times).

In addition, an example is shown in which the display showing the number of executions of the time-reduced gaming state (for example, the low probability base state) is forcibly configured to the display mode of the specific mode (last or 0 times), but the first Time-reduced game state (for example, low-probability base) at the timing of the start of the main game pattern pattern fluctuation, the timing during the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern, and the timing of the stop of the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern. state) may be deleted. When erasing the display indicating the number of executions of the time-reduced gaming state (for example, the low-probability base state), it may be erased suddenly, or may be erased so as to fade out.

In addition, the situation where the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern is satisfied in total six times (situation where the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern is satisfied in total five times, that is, the If the condition for starting the fluctuation of the game symbols is satisfied, the number of times reaches 6 times), when the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbols is satisfied and the pattern fluctuation of the first main game symbols is executed (end condition A is In case of satisfying), at a predetermined timing after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, the charge promotion effect, which is the effect of accumulating the hold on the second main game side, may be executed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol in a time-reduced game state (for example, low-probability base state) and the second main game symbol's fluctuation start condition is not satisfied in total 10 times. is totaled 6 times (single upper limit number of times A) to end (end condition A), and start fluctuation of the first main game pattern in a time shortened game state (for example, low probability high base state) In a situation where the conditions have not been satisfied a total of 6 times, the total number of times the variation start conditions of the second main game symbols are satisfied is 10 times (single upper limit number of times B), so that the game ends (end condition B). (single upper limit number of times A = 6 times < single upper limit number of times A = 10 times), but it is a time-reduced game state (for example, low probability high base state) and the second main game pattern fluctuation start condition In a situation where the total satisfaction does not reach 6 times, the total satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is 10 times (single upper limit number of times A), so that the game ends (end condition A), Satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol in a time-reduced game state (for example, low-probability base state) and the first main game symbol's fluctuation start condition is not satisfied in total 10 times. may be set to end (termination condition B) when the total number of times reaches 6 (single upper limit number of times B) (single upper limit number of times A=10 times>single upper limit number of times A=6 times).

The second main game starter B10 was explained as the second main game starter electric accessory, and the first main game starter A10 was explained as the starter that is not the second main game starter electric accessory, but the first main game starter The port A10 may be the first main game starter electric accessory, and the second main game starter B10 may be the starter that is not the second main game starter electric accessory.

As game states related to the ease of opening the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, there are a normal game state and a time shortened game state, and the time shortened game state is set after the execution of the special game is finished. It is As the main game symbols, it has a first main game symbol and a second main game symbol. When the time shortened game state is entered after the execution of the special game is finished, the first main game pattern or the second main game pattern from the start of the variable display to the stop display is set as one unit, and the first main game is played after the execution of the special game is finished. The time reduction game state is maintained until one unit of symbols is played six times (first time), and one unit of the second main game symbol is played ten times (first time) after the execution of the special game. It is configured so that the time-reduced game state is maintained until the game is played twice). Based on the execution of one unit of the second main game symbol in the time shortened game state, the subtraction display (information related to the second number of times), which is the display indicating the number of times the time shortened game state is executed, is updated and displayed. The subtraction display is not updated and displayed even if one unit of the first main game symbol is played after the execution of the special game is completed and before one unit of the first main game symbol is performed six times. If one unit of the first main game symbol has been played 6 times after the execution of the game is finished, the subtraction will be made even before one unit of the second main game symbol is played 10 times after the execution of the special game is finished. It is configured to refresh the display.

In the time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability base state), the total satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state (for example, low-probability base state) is 10. In a situation where the first main game symbol has not reached the number of times, the satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern has reached a total of 6 times). It is possible to display the number of executions of the low probability height base state) (display that does not misidentify), and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. In addition, by performing an appropriate effect according to the holding situation in the final symbol fluctuation in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state), it is possible to create a motivation to accumulate the holding of the second main game side.

Execution of continuous performance A according to the scenario when the last symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state (for example, low-probability base state) is executed to execute the charge promotion performance, and the prefetching lottery is not won. It is configured to execute a look-ahead performance D for executing a continuous performance B when the look-ahead lottery is won later.

FIG. 70 is an image diagram of the continuous effect D. FIG. Symbol variation starts at the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol (eg, the 10th variation of the second main game symbol after the end of the RUSH2 special game) in the time-reduced game state (eg, low probability base state). At a predetermined timing after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since then, a charge promotion effect, which is a effect for accumulating a hold on the second main game side, is executed.

(g) of FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the fifth variation, but since the first to fifth variations are as described in (a) to (g) of FIG. Give an explanation. Continuous production A is executed according to the production scenario 20 up to the fifth variation in (g) of FIG. 70 . The next 6th to 9th fluctuations are the 2nd main game pattern (may be the 1st main game pattern) in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state). It is designed to display letters, but the letter "I" is not displayed. Then, in the ninth variation, it is configured to display on the effect display device SG that the continuous effect as the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" has failed.

(i) is the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state (for example, low fixed height base state) (the 10th variation of the second main game symbol after the special game of RUSH2 is finished). The display device SG displays an image object saying "Charge with a right-handed shot", and is a right-handed notification prompting to shoot a game ball to the right game area where the second main game start opening is arranged. .

As shown in (j), the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced game state (for example, low probability base state) (the 10th variation of the second main game symbol after the special game of RUSH2 is finished) , when the number of balls entered into the second main game start port reaches 4 and the number of first pending displays displayed on the lower side of the effect display device SG reaches 4 (maximum), the charging promotion effect is completed. Display the image object of "charging complete" and end the charge promoting effect. Also, when displaying the image object of "charging completed", as shown in (j), the display indicating the number of times the time-reduced game state is executed is displayed as the number of balls entered into the second main game start port (for example, 4). (individual) is configured to change to the display indicated by In such a configuration, a color effect is displayed on the display indicating the number of execution times of the time reduction game state under the effect display device SG from the image object of "charging completed", and the number of execution times of the time reduction game state is displayed. It is configured to change the displayed display from "last" to "remaining 4 times". In addition, instead of changing the display indicating the number of executions of the time-reduced game state (for example, low-probability base state) when displaying the image object of "charging completed", entering the second main game start port At the timing of , change the display indicating the number of executions of the time-reduced gaming state (for example, low probability base state) (1 remaining from the last, 1 remaining to 2 remaining, 2 remaining to 3 remaining, remaining 3 times to the remaining 4 times).

At the final symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state (for example, low probability base state) (the 10th variation of the second main game symbol after the special game of RUSH2 is finished), the second main game start port. It is configured to transmit look-ahead information (holding number information, success/failure information, pattern information, variation mode information) from the main control unit to the sub-control unit based on the entry to the ball. The sub control unit determines whether or not the hold in the hold on the second main game side is a loss based on the look-ahead information (holding number information, winning/failure information, pattern information, variation mode information) received from the main control unit. Whether or not there is a winning pattern for executing a mode of winning a small win and a V challenge action (V challenge performance), or whether there is a winning pattern for executing a mode of winning a small win and a direct V (direct V performance) determine whether

In (j), the second main game is the result of the charge promotion effect, based on the prefetch information (holding number information, success/failure information, pattern information, variation mode information) received by the sub control unit from the main control unit Whether or not the reservation in the reservation on the side is a loss, whether or not there is a winning pattern to execute a mode (V challenge performance) of winning a small win and V challenge operation, mode of winning a small win and direct V The information indicated by the four second main game side trigger pending, which is the result of determining whether or not there is a winning symbol to execute (direct V effect), will be described. The 10th pattern variation of the 2nd main game pattern after the end of the RUSH2 special game is completed, and the trigger suspension scheduled to execute the pattern variation of the 2nd main game in the 11th variation is a suspension that will result in a loss. , trigger suspension 1 (in FIG. 70, the first suspension display on the second main game side with 1 written in a circle corresponds). The 11th pattern variation of the 2nd main game pattern after the end of the RUSH2 special game is completed, and the trigger suspension scheduled to execute the pattern variation of the 2nd main game in the 12th variation is a suspension that results in a loss. , trigger hold 2 (in FIG. 70, the first hold display on the second main game side with 2 written in a circle corresponds). The 12th pattern variation of the 2nd main game pattern after the end of the special game of RUSH2 is completed, and the 2nd main game pattern variation is scheduled to be executed in the 13th variation. , trigger hold 3 (in FIG. 70, the first hold display on the second main game side with 3 written in a circle corresponds). The 13th pattern variation of the 2nd main game pattern after the end of the RUSH2 special game is completed, and the 2nd main game pattern variation is scheduled to be executed in the 14th variation. It is a hold that results in a small hit with a small winning pattern, and is trigger hold 4 (in FIG. 70, the first hold display on the second main game side with 4 written in a circle corresponds).

After the 11th variation, the continuous effect B is executed when the prefetching lottery is won. (k) is the 11th variation in the situation where the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 3 in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) of RUSH2 The effect is to display the character "MACHI" of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol), but the characters "H" and "I" are not displayed. .

(l) is the 12th variation in the situation where the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 2 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) The effect is to display the character "MACHI" of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol), but the characters "H" and "I" are not displayed. .

(m) is the 13th variation in the situation where the hold on the 1st main game side is 0 and the hold on the 2nd main game side is 1 in the time reduction game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) The effect is to display the character "MACHI" of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol), but the characters "H" and "I" are not displayed. .

(n) is the 14th variation in the situation where the hold on the first main game side is 0 and the hold on the second main game side is 0 in the time-reduced game state of RUSH2 (for example, low probability base state) 2 main game symbols (may be the 1st main game symbols) symbol variation (trigger pending symbol variation), and this (n) trigger pending symbol variation is a variation mode for executing Super M Chance production. ing. Specifically, the pattern variation of this trigger pending is the super M chance variation mode of variation mode numbers 115 to 120 in the table T2. This Super M Chance effect is to display the characters "MACHI" in FIG. It is displayed, and the production is performed until the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped in the mode of showing a small hit in FIG. 67(p). The character "I" is displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect to display the character "MACHI" after a predetermined time has passed since the pattern variation of (n) trigger suspension is started. When 'I' is displayed on the performance display device SG, the displayed 'I' is then displayed in a frame on the right side of the frame displaying 'H' above the performance display device SG. (see (o)).

In (o), "I" is finally displayed on the effect display device SG, which means that the continuous effect as the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" has succeeded. It should be noted that, as the trigger suspension, the target is a variation mode in which the V challenge effect of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) is executed, but the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) A variation mode in which a direct V effect is executed may be targeted. In addition, the look-ahead effect B targeting these variation modes is the pattern variation of 11 variation to 14 variation of RUSH2 in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) after the special game ends, "MACHI ” is configured to succeed in the continuous effect as the effect of displaying the characters, but if the change mode of the second main game symbol (or the first main game symbol) is targeted as the trigger suspension, , the continuous performance A is configured so that the continuous performance fails. In addition, the trigger hold of the look-ahead effect B may be changed to a big hit, and in this case, the continuous effect of displaying the characters "MACHI" is configured to succeed. Alternatively, the 10th to 14th fluctuations may be set as the "summary fluctuation".

The continuous effects A to D may be configured to be executed as "summary variation". In the continuous production A, since the pattern fluctuations from the 1st fluctuation to the 10th fluctuation are executed according to the production scenario, the pattern fluctuations from the 1st fluctuation to the 10th fluctuation are regarded as 1 pattern fluctuation. It can be a "summary change" made to be visible. In the continuous performance B, the pattern variation of the trigger pending winning the prefetching lottery and the pattern variation of the pending pending before the trigger pending (1 to 3 variations) are set as one symbol variation. It can be a "summary change" made to be visible. Since the continuous performance C is a continuous performance in which the continuous performance A and the continuous performance B are combined, the continuous performance A along the performance scenario and the continuous performance B when winning the prefetch lottery are combined, from the first variation. The symbol variation up to the 10th variation can be set as a "summary variation" that looks like the symbol variation of 1. - 特許庁It should be noted that there is a trigger suspension in the 2nd to 9th variations, and when the trigger suspension results in a loss, it is preferable that the pattern variation after the trigger suspension is performed in accordance with the production scenario. Since the continuous performance D is also a continuous performance combining the continuous performance A and the continuous performance B, the continuous performance A according to the performance scenario and the continuous performance B when winning the prefetch lottery are combined, and from the first variation. The symbol variation up to the 14th variation can be set as a "combined variation" in which the symbol variation looks like 1 symbol variation. In addition, if there is a trigger hold in the 11th to 13th fluctuations, and the trigger hold is lost, the pattern change after the trigger hold is a specific effect (for example, the effect of displaying the characters "MACHI") However, it is preferable to perform an effect in which the characters "M", "A", "C", "H" and "I" are not displayed.

When the power is turned off during execution of the continuous performance A and the power is restored, by backing up the performance scenario that was being executed before the power was turned off, even when the power is restored, it will be executed before the power is turned off. It is configured to be able to execute a continuous performance A using a performance scenario. In the case where the performance scenario is not backed up, the symbol variation at the time of power failure is backed up as to what symbol variation of the 1st to 10th variation in RUSH2 in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game. In this case, one of the production scenarios 1 to 20 is determined by lottery, and the pattern variation backed up using the determined production scenario (produced by the production display device SG when the power is restored) When the pattern variation of the original pattern is not performed, the continuous performance A is executed from the pattern variation next to the backed up pattern variation.

When the power is turned off during execution of the continuous performance B and the power is restored, the continuous performance B that was being executed before the power was turned off is not executed. At the timing when RUSH2 in the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game is started, the performance scenario is determined by lottery, so by backing up the performance scenario, Even when the power is restored, the continuous performance A using the performance scenario backed up before the power failure can be executed. In the case where the performance scenario is not backed up, the symbol variation at the time of power failure is backed up as to what symbol variation of the 1st to 10th variation in RUSH2 in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game. In this case, one of the production scenarios 1 to 20 is determined by lottery, and the pattern variation backed up using the determined production scenario (produced by the production display device SG when the power is restored) When the pattern variation of the original pattern is not performed, the continuous performance A is executed from the pattern variation next to the backed up pattern variation.

Since the continuous performance C is a continuous performance combining the continuous performance A and the continuous performance B, if the power is turned off during execution of the continuous performance A and the power is restored, the performance scenario that was being executed before the power was turned off is executed. By backing up, even when the power is restored, the continuous performance A using the performance scenario executed before the power failure can be executed. In the case where the performance scenario is not backed up, the symbol variation at the time of power failure is backed up as to what symbol variation of the 1st to 10th variation in RUSH2 in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game. In this case, one of the production scenarios 1 to 20 is determined by lottery, and the pattern variation backed up using the determined production scenario (produced by the production display device SG when the power is restored) When the pattern variation of the original pattern is not performed, the continuous performance A is executed from the pattern variation next to the backed up pattern variation.

Then, when the power is turned off during execution of the continuous performance B and the power is restored, the continuous performance B that was being executed before the power was turned off is not executed. When the power is turned off during execution of the continuous performance B and the power is restored, by backing up the performance scenario of the continuous performance A executed before the power is turned off, even when the power is restored, the power is restored before the power is turned off. It is configured to be able to execute a continuous production A using the production scenario that has been executed before. In the case where the performance scenario is not backed up, the symbol variation at the time of power failure is backed up as to what symbol variation of the 1st to 10th variation in RUSH2 in the time shortening game state after the end of the special game. In this case, one of the production scenarios 1 to 20 is determined by lottery, and the pattern variation backed up using the determined production scenario (produced by the production display device SG when the power is restored) When the pattern variation of the original pattern is not performed, the continuous performance A is executed from the pattern variation next to the backed up pattern variation.

Since the continuous performance C is a continuous performance in which the continuous performance A and the continuous performance B are combined, when the power is turned off while the continuous performance A is being executed, the operation is the same as the continuous performance A. Then, when the power is turned off during execution of the continuous performance B of 11 to 14 fluctuations and the power is restored, the continuous performance B that was being executed before the power was turned off is not executed. From the pattern variation when the power is restored (if the pattern variation of the performance pattern is not performed in the performance display device SG when the power is restored, from the pattern variation next to the pattern variation that was backed up) to 14 variation, a specific It is preferable to perform an effect (for example, the effect is to display the characters "MACHI", but the characters "M", "A", "C", "H", and "I" are not displayed). .

V-increasing effect in which the motion mode of the rotating body C17 is changed from (a) 1/5 pattern V challenge motion to the motion mode of the rotating body C17 pattern (b) to (e) V challenge motion. etc., the notation of "outside" of the rotating body C17 is changed to the notation of "V", and the number of "V" holes increases. By blocking, it may be configured to change the specific area entry easiness as the ball entry probability of the specific area C12-2 which is the hole of "V".

The arrangement of the holes of the rotating body C17 when the "outer" holes are closed with a shutter or the like is configured as follows.
(1) When a 1/5 image object is displayed, the body of revolution C17 has one “V” hole, four “outer” holes, and the specific region C12-2 has an entrance probability of 1/ 5 (20%)
(2) When a 2/5 image object is displayed, the rotating body C17 has one "V" hole and three "outer" holes (one "outer" hole is closed by a shutter). state), when the game ball heads to the place where the "outer" hole is closed by the shutter, the ball enters the specific area C12-2 by the rotating body C17 rotating counterclockwise. Since it is almost decided, the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is 2/5 (40%)
(3) When a 3/5 image object is displayed, the body of revolution C17 has one "V" hole and two "outer" holes (two "outer" holes are closed by shutters). state), when the game ball heads to the place where the "outer" hole is closed by the shutter, the ball enters the specific area C12-2 by the rotating body C17 rotating counterclockwise. Since it is almost decided, the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is 3/5 (60%)
(4) When a 4/5 image object is displayed, the body of revolution C17 has one "V" hole and one "outer" hole (three "outer" holes are closed with shutters). state), when the game ball heads to the place where the "outer" hole is closed by the shutter, the ball enters the specific area C12-2 by the rotating body C17 rotating counterclockwise. Since it is almost decided, the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is 4/5 (80%)
(5) When a 5/5 image object is displayed, the body of revolution C17 has one “V” hole and zero “outer” holes (four “outer” holes are blocked by shutters). state), when the game ball heads to the place where the "outer" hole is closed by the shutter, the ball enters the specific area C12-2 by the rotating body C17 rotating counterclockwise. Since it is almost decided, the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is 5/5 (100%)

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the operation timing of the shutter C12-3-1 when closing the "outer" hole with the shutter C12-3-1. The shutter is configured to be operated by a motor, and when the motor is CW, the shutter closes the "outer" hole and the "V" hole, and when the motor is CW, the shutter "outer" , and the "V" hole are left unblocked.

When the 1/5 image object is displayed (when executing the 0 V increase effect), the rotation body absorption of FIG. As shown in the production, (a) 1/5 image objects identical (possibly similar) to those shown in the 1/5 pattern, and (b) 2/5 image objects identical (possibly similar) to those shown in the 2/5 pattern. 5 image objects, (c) 3/5 image objects identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 3/5 pattern, (d) 4/5 image identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 4/5 pattern Object, (e) 5/5 image object identical (or similar) to the figure shown in 5/5 pattern is displayed on effect display device SG, 1/5 image object, 2/5 image object, 3/5 image A rotator absorption effect is executed such that the object, the 4/5 image object, and the 5/5 image object are sucked into the image object of the rotator displayed on the effect display device SG in that order. After that, an effect of displaying the probability of the body of revolution is executed in which a 1/5 image object showing the pattern of the probability of entering the ball that the body of revolution C17 can finally take is displayed in the image object of the body of revolution. The rotating body C17 is designed to close the "outer" hole with a shutter corresponding to the pattern of the ball-entering probability mode displayed in the presentation of the rotating body probability display. One of the "outer" holes in the "outer" hole is blocked and there are three "outer" holes (the probability of entering a specific area is 2/5). It is configured to return to a mode with four "outer" holes.

The 0 V increase effect is configured to be executed during the small winning game when the small winning in the small winning symbol of the 1_4R symbol 1 is won. During the small winning game, the 1/5 image is disguised to display the 2/5 image object on the effect display device SG at the timing when the entry of the game ball of the 5th count into the first big winning hole C10 is detected. configured to display objects. In addition, the motor is rotated in the CW direction at the timing when the 2/5 image object is displayed, that is, at the timing when the game ball entering the first big prize opening C10 at the fifth count is detected. The shutter is controlled to cover the "outer" holes, and the motor is rotated in the CCW direction in time with the display timing to restore the 1/5 image object, and the one "outer" hole blocked by the shutter is closed. ' is controlled to return to the state where the hole is not closed by the shutter (0 closed).

The rotating body C17 has one "V" hole until all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole are discharged, or until the period of 240 seconds after the first big prize hole is opened. and four "outer" holes. The motor is turned CW based on the fact that all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole have been discharged (completed the global ball discharge) or that a period of 240 seconds has passed since the first big prize hole was opened. direction to close one "V" hole and four "outer" holes with the shutter, then rotate the motor in the CCW direction to remove the one closed by the shutter. A state in which the "V" hole and four "outer" holes are not blocked by the shutter (the rotating body consists of one "V" hole and four "outer" holes control to return to the state of the initial position).

When the 2/5 image object is displayed (when executing the effect of increasing V by 1), the rotating body absorption of FIG. As shown in the production, (a) 1/5 image objects identical (possibly similar) to those shown in the 1/5 pattern, and (b) 2/5 image objects identical (possibly similar) to those shown in the 2/5 pattern. 5 image objects, (c) 3/5 image objects identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 3/5 pattern, (d) 4/5 image identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 4/5 pattern Object, (e) 5/5 image object identical (or similar) to the figure shown in 5/5 pattern is displayed on effect display device SG, 1/5 image object, 2/5 image object, 3/5 image A rotator absorption effect is executed such that the object, the 4/5 image object, and the 5/5 image object are sucked into the image object of the rotator displayed on the effect display device SG in that order. After that, an effect of displaying the probability of the body of revolution is executed in which a 2/5 image object showing the pattern of the probability of entering the ball that the body of revolution C17 can finally take is displayed in the image object of the body of revolution. The rotating body C17 is designed to close the "outer" hole with a shutter corresponding to the pattern of the ball-entering probability mode displayed in the presentation of the rotating body probability display. One of the "outer" holes of the "outer" hole is blocked and there are three "outer" holes (the probability of entering a ball in a specific area is 2/5). ing.

The one-piece V increase performance is configured to be executed during a small winning game when a small winning in the small winning symbol of the 1_4R symbol 2 is won. During the small winning game, at the timing when the fourth count game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is detected, the effect display device SG displays a 2/5 image object (1/5 ⇒ 2/5 rank up) may be displayed as In addition, the motor is rotated in the CW direction at the timing when the 2/5 image object is displayed, that is, at the timing when the game ball entering the first big prize opening C10 at the fourth count is detected. It is controlled so that the "outside" holes are closed by the shutter.

The rotating body C17 has one "V" hole until all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole are discharged, or until the period of 240 seconds after the first big winning hole is opened. , the state composed of three "outer" holes and one "outer" hole closed by a shutter is maintained. The motor is turned CW based on the fact that all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole have been discharged (completed the global ball discharge) or that a period of 240 seconds has passed since the first big prize hole was opened. 1 "V" hole and 3 "outer" holes are closed by the shutter, and the 4 "outer" holes are closed by the shutter, then the motor is rotated in the CCW direction so that one "V" hole and four "outer" holes blocked by the shutter are not blocked by the shutter (rotating body is one "V" hole It is controlled to return to the initial position state, which is a state composed of a hole and four “outer” holes.

When the 3/5 image object is displayed (when executing the effect of increasing the number of V by 2), the rotation body absorption of FIG. As shown in the production, (a) 1/5 image objects identical (possibly similar) to those shown in the 1/5 pattern, and (b) 2/5 image objects identical (possibly similar) to those shown in the 2/5 pattern. 5 image objects, (c) 3/5 image objects identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 3/5 pattern, (d) 4/5 image identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 4/5 pattern Object, (e) 5/5 image object identical (or similar) to the figure shown in 5/5 pattern is displayed on effect display device SG, 1/5 image object, 2/5 image object, 3/5 image A rotator absorption effect is executed such that the object, the 4/5 image object, and the 5/5 image object are sucked into the image object of the rotator displayed on the effect display device SG in that order. After that, an effect of displaying the probability of the body of revolution is executed, in which a 3/5 image object showing the pattern of the ball entry probability mode that the body of revolution C17 can finally take is displayed in the image object of the body of revolution. The rotating body C17 is designed to close the "outer" hole with a shutter corresponding to the pattern of the ball-entering probability mode displayed in the presentation of the rotating body probability display. 2 of the ``outer'' holes of the ``outer'' are blocked, and there are 2 ``outer'' holes (the probability of entering a ball in a specific area is 3/5). ing.

The 2 V increase effect is configured to be executed during the small winning game when the small winning in the small winning symbol 3 of the 1_4R symbol 3 is won. During the small winning game, at the timing when the third count game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is detected, a 3/5 image object (1/5 ⇒ 2/5 ⇒ 3/ 5) is displayed. In addition, the motor is rotated in the CW direction at the timing when the 3/5 image object is displayed, that is, at the timing when the game ball entering the first big prize opening C10 for the third count is detected. It is controlled so that the "outside" holes are closed by the shutter.

The rotating body C17 has one "V" hole until all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole are discharged, or until the period of 240 seconds after the first big prize hole is opened. , two "outer" holes and an "outer" hole closed by two shutters. The motor is turned CW based on the fact that all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole have been discharged (completed the global ball discharge) or that a period of 240 seconds has passed since the first big prize hole was opened. direction to close one "V" hole and two "outer" holes with the shutter, and then close the four "outer" holes with the shutter. is rotated in the CCW direction, and the one “V” hole and the four “outer” holes blocked by the shutter are not blocked by the shutter (rotating body is one “V” hole It is controlled to return to the initial position state, which is a state composed of a hole and four “outer” holes.

When the 4/5 image object is displayed (when executing the effect of increasing the number of V by 3), the rotation body absorption of FIG. As shown in the production, (a) 1/5 image objects identical (possibly similar) to those shown in the 1/5 pattern, and (b) 2/5 image objects identical (possibly similar) to those shown in the 2/5 pattern. 5 image objects, (c) 3/5 image objects identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 3/5 pattern, (d) 4/5 image identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 4/5 pattern Object, (e) 5/5 image object identical (or similar) to the figure shown in 5/5 pattern is displayed on effect display device SG, 1/5 image object, 2/5 image object, 3/5 image A rotator absorption effect is executed such that the object, the 4/5 image object, and the 5/5 image object are sucked into the image object of the rotator displayed on the effect display device SG in that order. After that, a 4/5 image object showing the pattern of the ball entry probability mode that the body of revolution C17 can finally take is displayed in the image object of the body of revolution. The rotating body C17 is designed to close the "outer" hole with a shutter corresponding to the pattern of the ball-entering probability mode displayed in the presentation of the rotating body probability display. Three "outer" holes of the "outer" holes are blocked and there is one "outer" hole (the probability of entering a ball in a specific area is 4/5). ing.

The 3 V increase effect is configured to be executed during the small winning game when the small winning in the small winning symbol of the 1_4R symbol 4 is won. During the small winning game, at the timing when the second count game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is detected, a 4/5 image object (1/5 ⇒ 2/5 ⇒ 3/ 5⇒4/5, which may be ranked up and displayed). In addition, the motor is rotated in the CW direction at the timing when the 4/5 image object is displayed, that is, at the timing when the game ball entering the first big prize opening C10 for the second count is detected. It is controlled so that the "outside" holes are closed by the shutter.

The rotating body C17 has one "V" hole until all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole are discharged, or until the period of 240 seconds after the first big winning hole is opened. , a state composed of one "outer" hole and three "outer" holes closed by shutters is maintained. The motor is turned CW based on the fact that all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole have been discharged (completed the global ball discharge) or that a period of 240 seconds has passed since the first big prize hole was opened. direction to close one "V" hole and one "outer" hole with the shutter so that four "outer" holes are closed with the shutter, then the motor is rotated in the CCW direction so that one "V" hole and four "outer" holes blocked by the shutter are not blocked by the shutter (rotating body is one "V" hole It is controlled to return to the initial position state, which is a state composed of a hole and four “outer” holes.

When the 5/5 image object is displayed (when executing the effect of increasing V by 4), the rotation body absorption of FIG. As shown in the production, (a) 1/5 image objects identical (possibly similar) to those shown in the 1/5 pattern, and (b) 2/5 image objects identical (possibly similar) to those shown in the 2/5 pattern. 5 image objects, (c) 3/5 image objects identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 3/5 pattern, (d) 4/5 image identical (or similar) to the figure indicated by the 4/5 pattern Object, (e) 5/5 image object identical (or similar) to the figure shown in 5/5 pattern is displayed on effect display device SG, 1/5 image object, 2/5 image object, 3/5 image A rotator absorption effect is executed such that the object, the 4/5 image object, and the 5/5 image object are sucked into the image object of the rotator displayed on the effect display device SG in that order. After that, an effect of displaying the probability of the body of revolution is executed, in which a 5/5 image object showing the pattern of the probability of entering the ball that the body of revolution C17 can finally take is displayed in the image object of the body of revolution. The rotating body C17 is designed to close the "outer" hole with a shutter corresponding to the pattern of the ball-entering probability mode displayed in the presentation of the rotating body probability display. 4 out of the ``outer'' holes of the ``outer'' are blocked and the ``outer'' holes are 0 (a form in which the probability of entering a ball in a specific area is 5/5). ing.

The 4 V increase performance is configured to be executed during the small winning game when the small winning in the small winning symbol of the 1_4R symbol 5 is won. During the small winning game, at the timing when the first count game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is detected, the effect display device SG displays a 5/5 image object (1/5 ⇒ 2/5 ⇒ 3/ 5 ⇒ 4/5 ⇒ 5/5). In addition, the motor is rotated in the CW direction at the timing when the 5/5 image object is displayed, that is, at the timing when the entry of the game ball in the first count into the first big winning hole C10 is detected. It is controlled so that the "outer" holes are closed with the shutter.

The rotating body C17 has one "V" hole until all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole are discharged, or until the period of 240 seconds after the first big prize hole is opened. , and an "outer" hole closed by four shutters. The motor is turned CW based on the fact that all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole have been discharged (completed the global ball discharge) or that a period of 240 seconds has passed since the first big prize hole was opened. direction to close one "V" hole with the shutter, and after closing the four "outer" holes with the shutter, rotate the motor in the CCW direction to close the shutter. One blocked “V” hole and four “outer” holes are not blocked by the shutter (rotating body has one “V” hole and four “outer” holes The control is performed so as to return to the initial position state, which is a state configured with a hole in the .

The final symbol variation of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) (for example, in the case of RUSH1, the second In the 1st variation of the main game pattern, or in the case of RUSH2, the 10th variation of the 2nd main game pattern after the end of the special game), the variation fixed time when the pattern variation is fixed with a losing pattern or a small winning pattern is It is 10 seconds, and the variation time of auxiliary game symbols in the time shortened game state (eg, low fixed height base state) and time shortened game state (eg, low fixed height base state) or non-time shortened game state (for example, It is configured to be longer than the operation time (time including opening time and closing time) of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d in the low-probability-low base state). In this variable fixed time (strictly speaking, at the start of the variable fixed time), the main game time reduction flag is switched from on to off, and the auxiliary game time reduction flag is also switched from on to off. In this way, by making the fluctuation fixed time of the final symbol variation in the time shortened game state longer than the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol, when the final symbol variation of the time shortened game state is completed, the auxiliary game symbol Even in the state where the pattern variation is being executed, the pattern variation (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the auxiliary game pattern is surely completed within 10 seconds of the variation fixed time, and the non-time reduction game state is released. Since the mode of 0.5 seconds open→closed is completed, the game state at the time of the first pattern change after the time shortened game state can be reliably set to the non-time shortened game state. In addition, the fixed time of the final pattern fluctuation in the time-reduced game state is longer than the operation time (the time including the opening time and the closing time) of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d {10 seconds>7. 6 seconds (0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed), 10 seconds > 3.8 seconds (3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed)}, when the final symbol variation in the time shortened game state is completed, the second main game This is a state in which the starter electric accessory B11d is in operation, and even if a ball is entered into the second main game starter during the variable fixed time, the maximum number of holds on the second main game side is 4. In order to maintain , the game after the final symbol variation in the time-reduced game state is surely executed with a limited variation mainly composed of the second main game (for example, 4 variation "combined variation"). can be done.

The final symbol variation of the second main game symbol (may be the first main game symbol) in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) (for example, in the case of RUSH1, the second In the 1st variation of the main game pattern, or in the case of RUSH2, the 10th variation of the 2nd main game pattern after the end of the special game), the variation fixed time when the pattern variation is fixed with a losing pattern or a small winning pattern is It is 10 seconds, and the variation time of auxiliary game symbols in the time shortened game state (eg, low fixed height base state) and time shortened game state (eg, low fixed height base state) or non-time shortened game state (for example, It is configured to be longer than the operation time (time including opening time and closing time) of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d in the low-probability-low base state). In this variable fixed time, an example is shown in which the main game time reduction flag is switched from on to off, and the auxiliary game time reduction flag is also switched from on to off. At the start), only the auxiliary game time reduction flag may be configured to switch from ON to OFF. It is preferable that the main game time reduction flag is switched from ON to OFF in a predetermined number of symbol fluctuation fluctuation fixed times after shifting to the non-time reduction gaming state. By configuring in this way, in the continuous performance that can be executed over a plurality of variations from the final symbol variation in the time-reduced game state to the predetermined number of times in the non-time-reduced game state, the time is reduced even in the non-time-reduced game state. Since it is possible to select a variation mode in which the game state and the selection tendency are the same, it is possible to execute a continuous performance in which the performance executed in each symbol variation is well-balanced.

Weak SP reach, which is a variation mode of variation mode numbers 17 to 19, is set so as not to be a variation mode in which winning of a small hit is determined. The variation pattern of the sub-control unit corresponding to the weak SP reach, which is the variation mode of variation mode numbers 17 to 19, also corresponds to the weak SP reach, and is a reach using a character, SP reach (especially, SP reach M It is a reach that will be an opportunity for development to battle).

An example of fixing and stopping the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in accordance with the fixing and stopping of the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern has been shown, but when a small win is won, SP reach production is performed. Only the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) may be fixed and stopped in accordance with the ending timing of the variation time of the variation mode. When configured in this manner, the effect of SP reach can be executed even during the small winning game start demonstration and the small winning game, and the design for performance (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern) is used to start the small winning game. During the execution of the SP reach effect during the demonstration and the small winning game, the pattern changes (for example, the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns perform the shaking action in the tenpai state, and the first decorative pattern in the middle row is the pattern The variation is continued, and the pattern variation is continued for the second decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns), and is fixed and stopped during the small winning game. Designs for production (first decorative design, second decorative design) are not limited to fixed stop during the small winning game, during the small winning game end demonstration (specification of the first big winning port C10 during the small winning game When the passage of the game ball cannot be detected in the area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2) or during the special game start demonstration (during the small winning game, the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12 of the first big winning opening C10 -2 when the passage of the game ball is detected), it may be fixed and stopped. As the timing for fixing and stopping the design for production (first decorative design, second decorative design), the passage of the game ball in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game is detected, the timing of detecting the passage of the game ball in the general area C12-3 of the first large winning opening C10 during the small winning game, the timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the small winning game end demonstration was started, the special game For example, timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start demonstration was started.

(Second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, by providing a plurality of types of time-reduced game states after the end of the special game, the interest in the time-reduced game state is enhanced. Here, although some of them have been described in the above-described embodiment, an example of a configuration that can be further applied to the above-described embodiment is referred to as a second embodiment, which will be described in detail below. Also, the above-described embodiments should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine in the second embodiment. Only differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, in the second embodiment, there are two first main game start ports, the first main game start port A10 in the central part of the game area and the first main game start port A12 on the right side of the game area (based on the center of the game area). is provided. In addition, the game ball that the player hits to the left and flows down the left side of the game area (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start opening A10, and is difficult to be guided to the other ball entry openings. The game ball that the player hits to the right and flows down the right side of the game area (based on the center of the game area) is the auxiliary game start port H10, the distribution ball entrance C30, the second main game start It is configured so that it is easy to be guided to the opening B12, the first main game start opening A12, the second big winning opening C20, and the first big winning opening C10, and it is difficult to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10. Furthermore, the game ball that the player hits to the right and flows down the right side of the game area (based on the center of the game area) is the auxiliary game start opening H10, the distribution ball entrance C30, the second main game start opening B12, the second It is configured to flow down in the order of 1 main game start opening A12, second big winning opening C20, and first big winning opening C10. In addition, a first non-electric role A12hd is provided in the first main game start port A12, and when the first non-electric role A12hd is in a closed state, the game ball enters the first main game start port A12. When it is difficult to enter the ball and the first non-electric accessory A12hd is in the open state, the game ball is configured to easily enter the first main game start opening A12. In addition, a second non-electrical accessory B12hd is provided in the second main game starting port B12, and when the second non-electrical accessory B12hd is in a closed state, the game ball will When it is difficult to enter the ball and the second non-electric accessory B12hd is in the open state, the game ball is configured to easily enter the second main game start opening B12. It should be noted that "easily guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined, for example, by the number of incoming balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively. In addition, as the flow of the game of the second embodiment, in a non-time-reduced game state (for example, a low-probability base state), a left-handed strike (a game in which a game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game board surface) method, and the game ball is fired with a relatively weak firing intensity), and the game is played in a time-reduced game state (for example, high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) right-handed (This is a game method in which a game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game board surface, and the game ball is shot with a relatively strong shooting intensity).

Next, FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the sorting ball entrance C30. Inside the distribution ball entrance C30, there is a first open ball entrance C32 (first open ball entrance entrance ball detection device C32s), a second open ball entrance C33 (second open ball entrance entrance ball detection device C33s) that opens the second non-electric accessory B12hd when a game ball enters, and a sorting entrance It has a distribution member C34 for distributing a game ball entering the ball hole C30 to the first open ball hole C32 and the second open ball hole C33.

When the distribution member C34 is in the first mode, it is in a state of being swung to the right so as to block the flow path to the second open ball entrance C33, and a game in which a ball enters the distribution ball entrance C30 A ball is configured to easily enter the first open ball entrance C32 and difficult to enter the second open ball entrance C33.

When the distribution member C34 is in the second mode, it is in a state of being swung to the left so as to block the flow path to the first open ball entrance C32, and a game in which a ball enters the distribution ball entrance C30 The ball is configured to be difficult to enter the first open ball entrance C32 and easy to enter the second open ball entrance C33. Further, the distribution member is configured to start driving from the first opening timing when the electric accessory C30d is opened, and to be driven in the order of "first mode→second mode→first mode".

Next, FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining auxiliary game stop symbols. Two types of auxiliary game time reduction flags, an auxiliary game time reduction flag A and an auxiliary game time reduction flag B, are provided as auxiliary game time reduction flags. In addition, depending on the type of the auxiliary game time reduction flag that is turned on, it is configured so that the opening mode of the electric role product C30d is different. The timing at which the game ball enters the minute ball entrance C30 can be differentiated, and the game ball is swung to the first open ball entrance C32 and the second open ball entrance C33 in accordance with the driving of the distribution member C34. configured to be divisible. Specifically, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on, the opening mode of the electric role product C30d is "0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open→closed", and the 4.0 seconds opening (long opening) that makes it easier for a game ball to enter is the latter half of the open period. When the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on, the opening mode of the electric role product C30d is "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open →Closed", and the opening of 3.0 seconds (long opening) that makes it easy for game balls to enter is the first half of the open period.

In addition, the long open period is longer when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on than when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on, and the total open time is also the auxiliary game time reduction. The time is longer when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on than when the flag B is on. At the same time, the driving mode of the distribution member C34 is "3.6 seconds first mode (guided to the second open entrance C33) → 4.0 seconds second mode (guided to the first open entrance C32)". It has become. By configuring in this way, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is ON, the ball is entered into the first open ball entrance C32, and when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is ON, the ball is entered into the second open ball entrance C32. is configured to In this example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag (auxiliary game time reduction flag A and auxiliary game time reduction flag B) is off, the winning probability on the auxiliary game side may be set to 0 (no winning). In such a configuration, the random number for determining the auxiliary game variation time may be acquired, and the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols may be determined based on the random number. In addition, the candidate for the variation time of the auxiliary game pattern is in the same auxiliary game side game state (auxiliary game short time flag A on, auxiliary game short time flag B on, auxiliary game short time flag A and auxiliary game short time flag B off) It may be configured to have a plurality of them, or it may be configured to have only one candidate for the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol in all the game states of the auxiliary game side. In such a configuration, the auxiliary game fluctuation time determination random number may not be provided. Further, the opening mode of the electric role product C30d when the auxiliary game time saving flag A is ON and the opening mode of the electric role product C30d when the auxiliary game time saving flag B is ON may be the same.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart of game state determination processing after the end of the special game. First, at step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is a special game in a non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the pattern of the winning pattern is the pattern number 1 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1754, in step 1756, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (100 in this example) to the time saving number counter. Next, in step 1758, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1780. Further, if No in step 1754, in step 1766, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (7 in this example) to the time saving number counter. Next, at step 1768, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1780. In this way, depending on the stopped winning pattern, the auxiliary game time saving flag that is turned on after the special game related to the winning pattern may be different (either the auxiliary game time saving flag A or the auxiliary game time saving flag B is turned on. ), that is, it is configured so that the time reduction game state can be different. In addition, the state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on may be referred to as the time reduction game state A, and the state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on may be referred to as the time reduction game state B.

In addition, the state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on is set to the time reduction game state A, and the state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on is set to the time reduction game state B, but the time reduction game state A is the first non- As a game state related to the ease of opening the electric role product A12hd, it is sufficient if the first non-electric role product A12hd is in a game state that is easier to open than in the normal game state. As the game state related to the ease of opening the electric accessory B12hd, it is sufficient that the second non-electric accessory B12hd is in a game state in which it is easier to open than in the normal game state. In addition, the time reduction game state A and the time reduction game state B are game states related to the ease of opening the electric role product C30d, and are game states in which the electric role product C30d is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state. is preferred.

In the case of No in step 1752, in step 1770, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (7 in this example) to the time saving number counter. Next, at step 1772, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag B, and proceeds to step 1780. Next, at step 1780, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1800}. Thus, in the second embodiment, whether the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on as the auxiliary game time reduction flag or the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on (time reduction game state A or time reduction game state B ) is determined by the type of the winning pattern (does not depend on the game state at the time of winning), and depending on the type of the winning pattern, the time reduction game state A or the time reduction game state There is a case of transitioning to B.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart of the distribution member operation control process. First, in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution member driving flag (the flag that is turned on while the distribution member is being driven based on the release of the electric accessory) is off. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUMC of the main control board M reaches the first opening timing of the electric accessory (at the timing when the electric accessory is first opened, the distribution member starts to be driven). or not). In the case of Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the initial value (7.6 in this example) to the distribution member drive timer (decrement timer) and starts it. Next, at step 1808 , the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution member driving flag, and proceeds to step 1810 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1802 , the process proceeds to step 1810 . Next, in step 1810, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the distribution member drive timer value has reached the drive switching timing (timer value = 4.0) (the distribution member drive timer has become a decrement timer). Therefore, the distribution member driving timer value at the timing of 3.6 seconds from the start of driving the distribution member is 4.0). In the case of Yes in step 1810, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the distribution member from the first mode to the second mode (the initial position is the first mode), and the following processing { processing of step 1850}. Also, if No in step 1810, in step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution member drive timer value is zero. If Yes at step 1814, at step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the distribution member from the second mode to the first mode. Next, in step 1818, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution member driving flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1850}. Incidentally, even if No in step 1804 or 1814, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1850}.

The middle part of FIG. 76 is a working diagram of the electric accessory and the distribution member. First, the distribution member C32 is driven from the first mode (initial position) to the second mode at a predetermined timing (3.6 seconds from the start of driving). Here, in the case of the time shortening game state B, the electric accessory is long open during the period in which the distribution member is in the first mode (3.0 seconds, which is the first half of the opening period of the electric accessory described above). (opening), making it easier to enter the game ball. On the other hand, in the case of the time reduction game state A, the electric accessory is long open during the period in which the distribution member is in the second mode (4.0 seconds, which is the second half of the opening period of the electric accessory described above). open) to facilitate entry of game balls. Further, the lower part of FIG. 76 is a table showing the opening mode of the electric accessory and the displacement mode of the distribution member. As described above, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on, the electric accessory opening pattern is longer than when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on. When the maximum opening time is longer and the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on, the game ball to the distribution ball entrance is relatively higher than when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on. It is easy to enter the ball. In addition, as described above, in the case of the first mode, the distribution member guides the game ball to enter the second open ball entrance C33 (performs the lottery related to the second main game symbols), In the case of the second mode, the game ball is guided to enter the first open ball entrance C32 (perform a lottery related to the first main game symbol).

FIG. 77 is a flow chart of the first non-electric accessary product operation control process. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first non-electric accessory opening flag (the flag that turns on while the first non-electric accessory A12hd is open) is off. . In the case of Yes in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first open ball entrance C32. In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first non-electric accessory open flag. Next, at step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M releases the first non-electric accessory A12hd, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1900}. In addition, if No in step 1852, in step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M will enter a predetermined number of balls (the number of balls that will cause the first non-electric accessory A12hd to close) to the first main game start opening A12. , in this example, two, but at least one or more) has entered the ball. In the case of Yes in step 1860, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error occurrence condition (in this example, in the situation where the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is off, the first non-electric accessory A12hd is opened, and when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is off at the timing when it becomes Yes in step 1860, it is determined whether or not an error occurs). If Yes at step 1862, at step 1864, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first non-electric accessory A12hd. Next, at step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first non-electric accessory open flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1900}. Note that even if No in step 1860 or step 1854, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). If No in step 1862, an error is reported in step 1868, and error processing is executed (error recovery conditions include, for example, power off→on, RAM clear, etc.). Thus, in the second embodiment, even if the game ball enters the first main game start opening A12 in a situation where the auxiliary game time saving flag A is off, it is not immediately determined to be an error. , the first non-electric role A12hd is opened in a situation where the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is off, and the first non-electric role A12hd is closed in a situation where the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is off. A predetermined number of game balls (in this example, it is two, but it is sufficient if it is equal to or more than the number of balls that the first non-electric accessory A12hd changes from the open state to the closed state, and there is no problem with three, etc.) game balls It is configured to determine an error when the ball enters the first main game start opening A12. In the second embodiment, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is on, the first non-electric role A12hd is opened, and after that, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned off after one variation, The auxiliary game time saving flag A is off and the first non-electric role A12hd is open, and in such a case, in order not to make an error, the auxiliary game time saving flag A is off when the first non-electric role A12hd is opened, In addition, the error condition is that the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is off even when the first non-electric accessory A12hd is closed.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the second non-electric accessary product operation control process. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second non-electric accessory open flag (the flag that turns on while the second non-electric accessory B12hd is open) is off. . If Yes at step 1902, at step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the second open ball entrance C33. In the case of Yes in step 1904, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second non-electric accessory open flag. Next, at step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M releases the second non-electric accessory B12hd, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1900}. In addition, if No in step 1902, in step 1910, the CPUMC of the main control board M will enter a predetermined number (the number of balls that will cause the second non-electric accessory B12hd to close) to the second main game start opening B12. , in this example, two, but at least one or more) has entered the ball. In the case of Yes in step 1910, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error occurrence condition (in the situation where the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is off, the second non-electric auditors B12 is opened Then, it is determined whether or not an error occurs when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is OFF at the timing when it becomes Yes in step 1910). If Yes at step 1912, at step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second non-electric accessory B12hd. Next, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second non-electric accessary product open flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). Note that even if No in step 1910 or step 1904, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). If No in step 1912, an error is reported in step 1918, and error processing is executed (error recovery conditions include, for example, power off→on, RAM clear, etc.). Thus, in the second embodiment, even if the game ball enters the second main game start port B12 in a situation where the auxiliary game time saving flag B is off, it is not immediately determined to be an error. , the second non-electric role B12hd is opened in a situation where the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is off, and the second non-electric role B12hd is closed in a situation where the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is off. A predetermined number of game balls (in this example, it is two, but it is sufficient if it is equal to or more than the number of incoming balls that causes the second non-electric accessory B12hd to change from the open state to the closed state, and there is no problem with three or the like). It is configured to determine an error when the ball enters the second main game start port B12. As for the number of balls that cause an error, the number of balls entered into the first main game start port A12 is measured in the case of the error of the first main game start port A12, and the number of balls entered into the first main game start port A12 is measured in the case of the error of the second main game start port B12. It is configured to measure the error of the port B12 and determine the error, and enter one ball into the first main game start port A12, enter one ball into the second main game start port B12, and enter two balls in total. It is not configured to determine an error because a ball has been thrown. In the second embodiment, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, the second non-electric role item B12hd is opened, and then, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned off after one variation, The auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned off and the second non-electric role B12hd is being opened, in order not to make an error in such a case, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned off when the second non-electric role B12hd is opened, In addition, the error condition is that the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is off even when the second non-electric accessory B12hd is closed.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing winning symbols and a game flow of the second embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment includes a big win pattern and a small win pattern (develops into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a small win game).
<Jackpot probability>
In the non-reduced time game state, the winning probability that the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) are the big win symbols is set to 1/200, but it may be set lower than the small win probability. . In the time shortening game state A and the time shortening game state B, the winning probability that the main game symbols (the first main game symbol, the second main game symbol) become the big hit symbols is set to 1/200, which is lower than the small winning probability. It is sufficient if it is set. When the time shortening game state A and the time shortening game state B are set to a high-probability high base state and a high-probability low base state, the main game pattern (first main game pattern, second main game pattern) is a jackpot pattern. The probability is 1/199. It may be set lower than the small hit probability. It should be noted that the probability variation state may not be provided, and in that case, the winning probability that the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) are the big hit symbols is only 1/200.

<Small hit probability>
In the non-time-reduced game state, the time-reduced game state A, and the time-reduced game state B, the winning probability that the second main game symbol is a small winning symbol is set to 1/7 (probability not substantially 1/1). A straight V pattern in which the probability of a game ball entering a specific area is unchanged (100%) when a small winning pattern is won. It should be noted that although the small winning symbols of the first main game symbols are not provided, the winning probability may be set to 1/70 or the like.

<Probability of winning auxiliary game pattern>
In the low-probability/low-probability base state and the high-probability/low-probability base state, the winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol is set to 1/1024 (0 may be acceptable). In the low-probability-high base state and the high-probability-high base state, the winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol is set to 1023/1024 (substantially 1/1 is sufficient).

The 1_4R large symbol 1 of symbol number 1 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the first main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. If the 1_4R large pattern 1 (the pattern for production is "222" etc.) is displayed in a non-time shortened game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 100 times It is configured to provide the time reduction game state A. When the 1_4R large pattern 1 (the pattern for production is "777" etc.) is displayed in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 7 times It is configured to give the shortened game state B. In addition, "○R large pattern" is a simple name for the jackpot pattern corresponding to ○R (○ is any integer from 2 to 10) (in contrast, "○R pattern" is , ○R (○ is any integer from 2 to 10).

The 1_4R large symbol 2 of symbol number 2 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the first main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. If the 1_4R large pattern 2 (the pattern for production is "777" etc.) is displayed in a non-time shortened game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 7 times It is configured to provide the time reduction game state B. When the 1_4R large pattern 2 (the pattern for production is "777" etc.) is displayed in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 7 times It is configured to give the shortened game state B.

The 2_4R large symbol of symbol number 3 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. If the 2_4R large pattern (the pattern for production is "222" etc.) is displayed in a non-time shortened game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 7 times It is configured to give the shortened game state B. When the 2_4R large pattern (the pattern for production is "222" etc.) is displayed in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, the time is reduced 7 times It is configured to give the game state B.

The 2_10R large symbol of symbol number 4 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 10 rounds. If the 2_10R large pattern (the pattern for production is "777" etc.) is displayed in a non-time shortened game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 7 times It is configured to give the shortened game state B. When the 2_10R large pattern (the pattern for production is “777” etc.) is displayed in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, the time is shortened 7 times It is configured to give the game state B.

The 2_4R symbol with symbol number 5 as a winning symbol is a small winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and during a small winning game based on a small winning (during the operation flag of a special electric role), the first large When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the winning opening C10, it develops into a special game of 4 rounds (1 round in the small winning game, 3 rounds in the big winning developed from the small winning). is set to The 2_4R pattern (the design for production is "222" etc.) is displayed in a non-time shortening game state (for example, low-probability base state), and a specific area C12-1 of the first big winning port C10 during a small winning game. Alternatively, when the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-2 and a special game is started, after the special game ends, it is configured to give the time shortening game state B seven times. The 2_4R pattern (the pattern for production is "222" etc.) is displayed in the time shortening gaming state (for example, the low probability base state), and the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning port C10 during the small winning game or When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-2 and the special game is started, when the special game is finished, the time shortening game state B is given 7 times after the special game is finished. there is

The 2_10R symbol of symbol number 6 as a winning symbol is a small winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and during a small winning game based on a small winning (during the operation flag of the special electric role), the first large When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the winning opening C10, it develops into a special game of 10 rounds (1 round in the small winning game, 9 rounds in the big winning developed from the small winning). is set to The 2_10R symbol (the effect symbol is "777", etc.) is displayed in a non-time-reducing gaming state (for example, a low-probability-low base state), and a specific region C12-1 of the first big winning port C10 during a small winning game. Alternatively, when the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-2 and the special game is started, after the special game is finished, the time shortening game state B is given seven times. The 2_10R pattern (the design for production is "777" etc.) is displayed in the time shortening gaming state (for example, the low probability base state), and the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning port C10 during the small winning game or When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-2 and the special game is started, when the special game is finished, the time shortening game state B is given 7 times after the special game is finished. there is

The ratio of turning on the auxiliary game time reduction flag B after becoming a special game in the non-time-reduced game state and ending the special game, in other words, the ratio of becoming a special game in the non-time-reduced game state and becoming the time-reduced game state B after the special game ends, It is "50%" after the special game on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state ends, "100%" after the special game on the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state ends, and the second After the special game on the main game side is finished, the ratio of the time shortening game state B is higher than after the special game on the first main game side is finished (and the special game on the second main game side is finished The later one is configured so that the ratio of the time shortening game state A is lower than after the special game on the first main game side), in other words, after the special game on the second main game side is the second It is configured so that the rate of the time shortened game state B is higher (the rate of the time shortened game state A is lower) in the case of shifting to the time shortened game state than after the special game on the main game side ends. The number of execution rounds of the special game in the second embodiment is "4R" for "symbol numbers 1, 2, 3 and 5" and "10R" for "symbol numbers 4 and 6". The average value of the number of executed rounds is larger in the special game on the second main game side than in the special game on the first main game side, that is, the expected number of winning balls in the special game is higher. .

A game flow will be explained. As a premise of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the special area C12-1 or the specific area of the first big winning opening C10 during the operation flag operation of the special electric role based on the small winning pattern and the small winning pattern is provided. In a pachinko gaming machine where a special game is played when the passage of a game ball is detected in C12-2, the winning probability of winning the second main game pattern with a small winning pattern is determined by entering the game ball into a specific area of the big winning opening. Set lower than probability. For example, assume that the probability of winning a small hit is 1/7 (probability that is not approximately 1/1), and the probability that a game ball enters a specific area is approximately 100% (if a game ball enters the big winning hole, an error, etc. Enter the specific area unless there is a problem). The winning probability of the big-hit symbol is set to 1/200, but it may be set lower than the small-hit probability. Since the probability of becoming a special game in the time reduction game state B is set higher than the probability of becoming a special game in the time reduction game state A, the time reduction in the time reduction game state B is shorter than that in the time reduction game state A. It is in an advantageous state as a game state.

In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability-low base state), the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game pattern is satisfied, and the 1_4R large pattern 1 (performance As for the symbols for use, "222" etc.) is displayed, and when a special game is selected, a special game of 4 rounds is executed. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on, and the time reduction game state A is executed 100 times. In the time reduction game state A of 100 times, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on, and the transition mode of the distribution member C34 is the second mode, so it becomes easier to enter the first main game start port A12. ing. In such a 100-time time-reduction game state A, mainly, the symbol variation by the first main game symbol is executed. In the 100 times time reduction game state A, when the 1_4R large symbol 1, 1_4R large symbol 2, 2_4R large symbol, 2_10R large symbol, 2_4R symbol, and 2_10R symbol are displayed and the special game is started, after that , It shifts to the time reduction game state B seven times, but it does not hit any, and when the symbol variation is executed 100 times, the time reduction game state A is changed to a non-time reduction game state (for example, low probability low base state). configured to move to As a modification, only when the 1 — 4R large symbol 1 is displayed in the 100 times shortened game state A and the transition to the special game is made, then the 100 times shortened game state A is resumed, and 100 times In the time reduction game state A, when the 1st_4R large pattern 2, the 2_4R large pattern, the 2_10R large pattern, the 2_4R pattern, and the 2_10R large pattern are displayed and the special game is entered, then 7 times of the time reduction game state It may be configured to shift to B. Or, in 100 times of time reduction game state A, 50% when the 1_4R large pattern 1 is displayed and shifted to a special game, then again 100 times of time reduction game state A, 100 times In the time reduction game state A, 50% when the 1_4R large pattern 1 is displayed and shifts to the special game, the 1_4R large pattern 2, the 2_4R large pattern, the 2_10R large pattern, the 2_4R pattern, and the 2_10R pattern At 100% when it is displayed and shifts to the special game, it may be configured to shift to the time reduction game state B seven times thereafter.

In the time shortening game state A, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the 2_4R symbol of symbol number 5 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol, or the 2_10R symbol of symbol number 6, which is a small A winning pattern is displayed, and when the passage of the game ball is not detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning, the time shortening game state A is configured to continue In the time reduction game state A, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the winning pattern of the second main game pattern is the 2_4R pattern with pattern number 5 or the 2_10R pattern with pattern number 6. A certain small winning pattern is displayed, and if the passage of the game ball is not detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning, the time shortening game It may be configured to end state A.

In the non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability-low base state), the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game pattern is satisfied, and the 1_4R large pattern 2 (performance As for the symbols for use, "777" etc.) are displayed, and when a special game is selected, a special game of 4 rounds is executed. After the special game ends, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed seven times. In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, a low-probability-low base state), the conditions for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbol are satisfied, and the 2_4R large symbol with symbol number 3 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol, or When the 2_10R large symbol of symbol number 4 is displayed and a special game is played, a special game of 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed. After the special game ends, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed seven times. In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability-low base state), the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is satisfied, and the 2_4R symbol of symbol number 5 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol, or the symbol A small winning symbol, which is the 2_10R symbol of number 6, is displayed, and the passing of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning. In that case, 4 rounds or 10 rounds of special games are executed. After the special game ends, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed seven times.

In the time reduction game state A, the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied, and the 1_4R large symbol 1 of symbol number 1 or the 1_4R large symbol of symbol number 2 as the winning symbol of the first main game symbol. If 2 is displayed and a special game is selected, 4 rounds of the special game are executed. After the special game ends, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed seven times. In the time reduction game state A, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbol is satisfied, and the 2_4R large symbol of symbol number 3 or the 2_10R large symbol of symbol number 4 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol. When it is displayed and a special game is played, a special game of 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed. After the special game ends, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed seven times. In the time shortening game state A, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the 2_4R symbol of symbol number 5 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol, or the 2_10R symbol of symbol number 6, which is a small 4 rounds or 10 rounds when the winning pattern is displayed and the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning. special game. After the special game ends, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed seven times.

In the time reduction game state B, the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied, and the 1_4R large symbol 1 of symbol number 1 or the 1_4R large symbol of symbol number 2 as the winning symbol of the first main game symbol. If 2 is displayed and a special game is selected, 4 rounds of the special game are executed. After the special game ends, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed seven times. In the time reduction game state B, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbol is satisfied, and the 2_4R large symbol of symbol number 3 or the 2_10R large symbol of symbol number 4 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol. When it is displayed and a special game is played, a special game of 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed. After the special game ends, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed seven times. In the time shortening game state B, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the 2_4R symbol with symbol number 5 or the 2_10R symbol with symbol number 6 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol. 4 rounds or 10 rounds when the winning pattern is displayed and the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning. special game. After the special game ends, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed seven times.

In the time shortening game state B of 7 times, the auxiliary game time shortening flag B is turned on, and the transition mode of the distribution member C34 is the first mode, so it becomes easier to enter the second main game start port B12. ing. In such a time-reduction game state B of 7 times, mainly, the symbol variation by the second main game symbol is executed. In the time reduction game state B of 7 times, when the 1_4R large symbol 1, the 1_4R large symbol 2, the 2_4R large symbol, the 2_10R large symbol, the 2_4R symbol, and the 2_10R symbol are displayed and shift to the special game, after that , It shifts to the time reduction game state B seven times, but it does not hit any, and when the symbol variation is executed seven times, the time reduction game state B is changed to a non-time reduction game state (for example, low probability low base state). configured to move to Since the probability of becoming a special game in the time reduction game state B is set higher than the probability of becoming a special game in the time reduction game state A, the time reduction in the time reduction game state B is shorter than that in the time reduction game state A. It is in an advantageous state as a game state. In the time shortening game state B, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the 2_4R symbol with symbol number 5 or the 2_10R symbol with symbol number 6 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol. A winning pattern is displayed, and when the passage of the game ball is not detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning, the time shortening game state B is configured to continue In addition, in the time reduction game state B, the fluctuation start condition of the second main game symbol is satisfied, and the 2_4R symbol of symbol number 5 or the 2_10R symbol of symbol number 6 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol. A certain small winning pattern is displayed, and if the passage of the game ball is not detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning, the time shortening game It may be configured to end state B.

When the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on, the opening mode of the electric role product C30d is changed to "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → By setting it to "closed", the time shortening game state B that makes it easy to enter the second main game start port B12 is set, and when the auxiliary game time saving flag A is on, the opening mode of the electric role product C30d is set to "0.2 seconds. Open→Closed for 0.2 seconds→Open for 0.2 seconds→Closed for 3.0 seconds→Open for 4.0 seconds→Closed" makes it possible to easily enter the first main game start port A12. Time shortening game state A However, in response to the game ball entering the auxiliary game start port H10 (inflow, passing in the case of a gate), an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game pattern winning random number) is acquired, and the acquired auxiliary The time shortening game state A and the time shortening game state B may be controlled by determining a stop symbol based on the judgment of the game symbol random number.

In the case of such a configuration, if the determination of whether or not the acquired auxiliary game pattern random number is lost and the number of lost symbols is set to one, the stop symbol is determined for one lost symbol, and there are a plurality of lost symbols. If the setting is , one losing pattern is determined by lottery from among a plurality of losing patterns. On the other hand, if the winning determination of the acquired auxiliary game symbol random number is a win and the winning symbol is set to one, the stop symbol is determined for one winning symbol, and there are multiple winning symbols (auxiliary game symbol_ In the case of the setting of win A, auxiliary game symbol_win B, etc.), one winning symbol is determined by lottery from among a plurality of winning symbols. In the time reduction game state A and the time reduction game state B, when the winning symbol is the auxiliary game symbol_winning A, the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric role object B11d as the predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric role object is , "0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed". is an auxiliary game symbol _ hit B, the opening mode of the second main game starter electric role product B11d as a predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric role product is "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open→0.2 seconds closed→0.2 seconds open→closed. In the non-reduced time game state, when the winning symbol is auxiliary game symbol_win A and the winning symbol is auxiliary game symbol_win B, the opening mode of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is 0.5 seconds. Open to closed is preferable.

Then, in the time shortening game state A, the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win A by lottery is set to 100%, and the selection state A is set in which the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win B is set to 0%. By setting the opening mode of C30d to "0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed", the first main game start gate A12 A game state in which it is easy to enter a ball can be created.

In addition, in the time shortening game state B, the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win A by lottery is set to 0%, and the selection state B is set in which the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win B is set to 100%. 2nd main game start gate B12 A game state in which it is easy to enter a ball can be created.

It should be noted that the selection state A and the selection state B are configured to be determined by the game state and winning symbols when the special game is entered.

The selection state A is configured to be selected when the game state when the special game is entered is the non-time reduction game state and the winning symbol is the 1_4R large symbol 1 . As a modification, the selection state A may be configured to be selected only when the winning pattern is the 1_4R large pattern 1, regardless of the game state when the special game is entered (that is, the special game and Regardless of the game state when it becomes, if the winning symbol is the 1_4R large symbol 1, the time reduction game state after that may be the time reduction game state A).

The selection state B is configured to be selected when the game state when the special game is entered is the non-time reduction game state and the winning pattern is a pattern other than the 1_4R large pattern 1.例文帳に追加Further, the selection state B is configured to be selected when the game state when the special game is entered is the time reduction game state and all the winning symbols. As a modification, the selection state B may be configured to be selected only when the winning symbol is a symbol other than the 1_4R large symbol 1, regardless of the game state when the special game is entered (that is, Regardless of the game state when the special game is entered, if the winning pattern is a pattern other than the 1_4R large pattern 1, the subsequent time reduction game state may be the time reduction game state B. ).

Further, the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern may be determined by lottery according to the game ball entering (flowing in, passing in the case of a gate) into the auxiliary game starting port H10. In this configuration, the stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols are set so as to correspond to the fluctuation mode of the auxiliary game symbols.

For example, in the non-time shortening game state, it is set to select the variation mode 1, the variation mode 2, and the variation mode 3 as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols.

Variation mode 1 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbols are lost symbols, and the variation time is set to be long (for example, 30 seconds).

The variation mode 2 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, the auxiliary game symbol_win A, and the variation time is set to be long (it may be the same as or different from the variation mode 1). , The predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric accessory is configured to be set to, for example, 0.5 seconds (0.5 seconds open→closed) when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off.

Variation mode 3 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, auxiliary game symbol_win B, and the variation time is long (it may be the same as or different from variation mode 1 and variation mode 2). It is set, and the predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric accessory is configured to be set to, for example, 0.5 seconds (open for 0.5 seconds → closed) when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off. Although it is configured to operate the electric accessory in the same operation pattern as the variation mode 2, it may be a different pattern.

In the time shortening game state A and the time shortening game state B, the variation mode 4, the variation mode 5, and the variation mode 6 are set to be selected as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols. Variation mode 4 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbols are lost symbols, and the variation time is set shorter than the variation modes 1 to 3 (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Variation mode 5 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, auxiliary game symbol_win A, and the variation time is set to be short (it may be the same as or different from variation mode 4). , The predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric role product is, for example, the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric role product B11d when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, "0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds Closed→Opened for 0.2 seconds→Closed for 3.0 seconds→Opened for 4.0 seconds→Closed".

The variation mode 6 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, the auxiliary game symbol_win B, and the variation time is short (it may be the same as or different from the variation mode 4 and the variation mode 5). It is set, and the predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory is set to, for example, "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed”, and the electric accessory is operated in an operation pattern different from the variation mode 5. is configured as

Then, in the time shortening game state A, the selection state A in which the ratio of determining the variation mode 5 by lottery is 100% and the percentage of determining the variation mode 6 is 0%, and the opening mode of the electric accessory C30d is set to " 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed”, a game that makes it easy to enter the first main game start port A12 state can be

In addition, in the time reduction game state B, the selection state B in which the ratio of determining the variation mode 5 by lottery is 0% and the percentage of determining the variation mode 6 is 100%, and the opening mode of the electric accessory C30d is set to " 3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed”, a game that makes it easy to enter the second main game start port B12 state can be

The selection state A and the selection state B are configured to be determined by the game state and winning symbols when the special game is entered.

The selection state A is configured to be selected when the game state when the special game is entered is the non-time reduction game state and the winning pattern is the 1_4R large pattern 1.例文帳に追加

The selection state B is configured to be selected when the game state when the special game is entered is the non-time reduction game state and the winning pattern is a pattern other than the 1_4R large pattern 1.例文帳に追加Further, the selection state B is configured to be selected when the game state when the special game is entered is the time reduction game state and all the winning symbols.

Further, in the non-time-reduced game state, only the variation mode 1 is selected as the variation mode of the auxiliary game symbols, and in the time-reduced game state, the variation mode 5 and the variation mode are selected as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols. You may set so that the aspect 6 may be acquired. That is, in the non-time-reduced game state, only the losing patterns are selected and the winning patterns are not selected, and in the time-reduced game state, only the winning patterns are selected and the losing patterns are not selected. configured.

Further, depending on the time shortening game state A and the time shortening game state B, the variable fixing time of the auxiliary game pattern may be set to different times. For example, in the time reduction game state A, the variable fixed time of the auxiliary game symbol_per A is set to 3.6 seconds. After the auxiliary game symbol _ hit A is fixed and stopped, the opening operation of the physical electric accessory C30d starts after the lapse of the variable fixed time of 3.6 seconds, so that the distribution member C34 is in the second mode. Since the game ball enters the distribution ball entrance C30 in this state, it is possible to create a game state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the first main game start opening A12.

Also, in the time shortening game state B, the variable fixed time of the auxiliary game symbol_win B is set to 0 seconds (a short time such as 0.1 seconds may be used). After the auxiliary game symbol _ hit B is fixed and stopped, the opening operation of the physical electric accessory C30d starts after the lapse of the variable fixed time of 0 seconds or 0.1 seconds, so that the distribution member C34 is the first Since the game ball enters the sorting ball entrance C30 in the state of the first mode, it is possible to create a game state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second main game start opening B12. In addition, it is preferable to start the operation of the distribution member in accordance with the timing of fixing and stopping the auxiliary game symbols.

In the final symbol variation (seventh variation) of the second main game symbols in the time shortening game state B, the hold of the second main game side is further accumulated at a predetermined timing after a predetermined time has passed since the symbol variation started. A charge promotion effect (which may be the same effect as the charge promotion effect described in the present embodiment), which is an effect, may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the percentage of wins in the second main game symbols, so that the state in which the time reduction game state B continues can be further increased.

In the second embodiment, a sorting ball entrance C30, a first non-electrical accessory A12hd of the first main game starter A12, and a second non-electrical accessory B12hd of the second main game starter B12 are provided, and the special game ends. By configuring to have a plurality of types of later time reduction game states, it is easy to shift to the time reduction game state A 100 times after winning the first main game pattern, and 7 times after winning the second main game pattern. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can be easily shifted to the time-reducing game state B for each round.

As a game state related to the ease of opening the first non-electrical accessory A12hd (first variable member) and the second non-electrical accessory B12hd (second variable member) material, the normal game state and the first non-electrical accessory than the normal game state A time shortening game state A (first specific game state) in which the electric accessory A12hd is likely to be in an open state, and a time shortening game state B (second specific game state). After the first main game symbols are stop-displayed in the form of a small win, the variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a specific number of balls enter the first big winning opening C10 or a specific period elapses. It is possible to execute a small winning game that executes a unit game that can be in a state once, and when a ball enters a specific area during execution of a small winning game, a first special game is executed after the end of the small winning game, and a second special game is executed. After the 2 main game symbols are stopped and displayed in a small win mode, the variable winning opening is placed in an advantageous state for the player until a specific number of balls enter the first big winning opening C10 or a specific period elapses. It is possible to execute a small winning game that executes the unit game once, and when a ball enters a specific area during execution of the small winning game, the second special game is executed after the small winning game is completed. It is The time shortening game state A is configured to be set more easily after the first special game than after the second special game, and the time shortening game state B is set more easily after the second special game than after the first special game. It is configured to be easily set after After the variable display of the first main game symbol is performed 100 times (the first number of times) in the time shortening game state A, the time shortening game state A is changed to the normal game state. After the variation display of the second main game symbols is performed seven times (the second number of times) in B, the time shortening game state B is changed to the normal game state. 100 times (first time) is a number greater than 7 times (second time), and 1/1 ( The first probability) is configured to be higher than 1/7 (second probability) as the probability that the second main game symbol will be a small win.

In a conventional pachinko gaming machine that develops from a small hit and becomes a special game, the game state includes a non-time shortened game state (eg, low probability low base state) and a time shortened game state (eg, low probability high base state) ), but in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, there are three non-time-reduced gaming states (for example, low probability and low base state), time-reducing gaming states A, and time-reducing gaming states B Since one game state can be provided, it is possible to diversify game characteristics. In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that develops from a small win and becomes a special game, a time reduction game state A, which is a time reduction game state that mainly assists the pattern variation of the first main game pattern, By providing the time shortening game state B for assisting the pattern variation of the second main game pattern, the problem that the time shortening game state cannot be applied after the special game with the first main game pattern can be solved. In addition, by providing a time-reduced game state B in which the number of pattern fluctuations is specified, and designing that the winning of the next special game is not confirmed, it is possible to achieve the same effect as a pachinko game machine with probability fluctuation in which the number of pattern fluctuations is specified. It becomes possible to construct a natural game flow.

(Modification 1 of the second embodiment)
Here, although some of them have been described in the above-described embodiment, an example of a configuration that can be further applied to the above-described embodiment will be described in detail below as Modified Example 1 of the second embodiment. Also, the above-described embodiments should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a winning symbol and a game flow in Modification 1 of the second embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine of Modified Example 1 of the second embodiment includes a big win pattern and a small win pattern (develops into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a small win game).
<Jackpot probability>
In the non-reduced time game state, the winning probability that the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) are the big win symbols is set to 1/200, but it may be set lower than the small win probability. . In the time shortening game state A and the time shortening game state B, the winning probability that the main game symbols (the first main game symbol, the second main game symbol) become the big hit symbols is set to 1/200, which is lower than the small winning probability. It is sufficient if it is set. When the time shortening game state A and the time shortening game state B are set as a high-probability high base state and a high-probability low base state, the main game pattern (first main game pattern, second main game pattern) is a jackpot pattern. The probability is 1/199. It may be set lower than the small hit probability. It should be noted that the probability variation state may not be provided, and in that case, the winning probability that the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) are the big hit symbols is only 1/200.

<Small hit probability>
In the non-time-reduced game state, the time-reduced game state A, and the time-reduced game state B, the winning probability that the second main game symbol is a small winning symbol is 1023/1024, which is approximately 1/1 (approximately 100%). The V-challenge pattern is 1/10 in which the probability of a game ball entering a specific area when a small winning symbol is won is unchanged. It should be noted that the probability of a game ball entering a specific area when a small winning symbol is won may be a variable (eg, 1/5 to 5/5, etc.) V-challenge pattern. It should be noted that although the small winning symbols of the first main game symbols are not provided, the winning probability may be set to 1/70 or the like.

<Probability of winning auxiliary game pattern>
In the low-probability/low-probability base state and the high-probability/low-probability base state, the winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol is set to 1/1024 (may be 0). In the low-probability-high base state and high-probability-high base state, the winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol is set to 1023/1024 (substantially 1/1 is sufficient).

The 1_4R large symbol 1 of symbol number 1 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the first main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. If the 1_4R large pattern 1 (the design for production is “222” etc.) is displayed in a non-time shortened game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 100 times It is configured to provide the time reduction game state A. When the 1_4R pattern 1 (the design for production is "222" etc.) is displayed in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, the time is reduced 100 times It is configured to give the game state A.

The 1_4R large symbol 2 of symbol number 2 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the first main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. If the 1_4R large pattern 2 (the pattern for production is "222" etc.) is displayed in a non-time shortened game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 100 times It is configured to give the time reduction game state A. When the 1_4R large pattern 2 (the pattern for production is "777" etc.) is displayed in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 100 times It is configured to give the shortened game state B.

The 1_4R large symbol 3 of symbol number 3 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the first main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. If the 1_4R large pattern 3 (the design for production is "777" etc.) is displayed in a non-time shortened game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 100 times It is configured to provide the time reduction game state B. When the 1_4R large pattern 3 (the design for production is "777" etc.) is displayed in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 100 times It is configured to give the shortened game state B.

The 2_4R large symbol 1 of symbol number 4 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. If the 2_4R large pattern 1 (the design for production is "222" etc.) is displayed in a non-time shortened game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 100 times It is configured to provide the time reduction game state A. When the 2_4R large pattern 1 (the pattern for production is "222" etc.) is displayed in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 100 times It is configured to give the shortened game state A.

The 2_4R large symbol 2 of symbol number 5 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. If the 2_4R large pattern 2 (the pattern for production is "111" etc.) is displayed in a non-time shortened game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 100 times It is configured to provide the time reduction game state B. When the 2_4R large pattern 2 (the design for production is "111" etc.) is displayed in the time shortening game state (for example, low probability high low base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 100 times of time It is configured to give the shortened game state B.

The 2_10R large symbol of symbol number 6 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 10 rounds. If the 2_10R large pattern (the pattern for production is "777" etc.) is displayed in a non-time shortened game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, 100 times It is configured to give the shortened game state B. When the 2_10R large pattern (the pattern for production is "777" etc.) is displayed in the time reduction game state (for example, low probability base state) and becomes a special game, after the special game ends, the time is reduced 100 times It is configured to give the game state B.

The 2_4R symbol 1 with symbol number 7 as a winning symbol is a small winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and during a small winning game based on a small winning (during the operation flag of the special electric role), the first When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the big winning opening C10, a special game of 4 rounds (1 round in the small winning game, 3 rounds in the big winning developed from the small winning) is performed. set to evolve. The 2_4R pattern 1 (the design for production is "537" etc.) is displayed in the non-time shortening game state (for example, low probability base state), and the specific area C12- 1 or the specific area C12-2, when the passage of the game ball is detected and the special game is started, after the special game is finished, the time shortening game state A is given 100 times. The 2_4R pattern 1 (the design for production is "537" etc.) is displayed in the time shortening game state (for example, the low probability base state), and the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning port C10 during the small winning game Alternatively, when the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-2 and the special game is started, when the special game is ended, the time shortening game state B is given 100 times after the special game is finished. ing.

The 2_4R symbol 2 of symbol number 8 as a winning symbol is a small winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and during a small winning game based on a small winning (during the operation flag of the special electric role), the first When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the big winning opening C10, a special game of 4 rounds (1 round in the small winning game, 3 rounds in the big winning developed from the small winning) is performed. set to evolve. The 2_4R pattern 2 (the design for production is "537" etc.) is displayed in the non-time shortening game state (for example, the low-probability base state), and the specific area C12- 1 or the specific area C12-2, when the passage of the game ball is detected and the special game is started, after the special game ends, the time shortening game state B is given 100 times. The 2_4R pattern 2 (the design for production is "537" etc.) is displayed in the time shortening game state (for example, the low probability base state), and the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning port C10 during the small winning game Alternatively, when the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-2 and the special game is started, when the special game is ended, the time shortening game state B is given 100 times after the special game is finished. ing.

The 2_10R symbol with symbol number 9 as a winning symbol is a small winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and during a small winning game based on a small winning (during the operation flag of the special electric role), the first large When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the winning opening C10, it develops into a special game of 10 rounds (1 round in the small winning game, 9 rounds in the big winning developed from the small winning). is set to The 2_10R symbol (the effect symbol is "537", etc.) is displayed in a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, a low-probability-low base state), and a specific area C12-1 of the first big winning port C10 during a small winning game. Alternatively, when the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-2 and a special game is started, after the special game is finished, the time shortening game state B is given 100 times. The 2_10R pattern (the design for production is "537" etc.) is displayed in the time shortening gaming state (for example, the low probability base state), and the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning port C10 during the small winning game or When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-2 and the special game is started, when the special game is ended, the time shortening game state B is given 100 times after the special game is finished. there is

The ratio of turning on the auxiliary game time reduction flag B after becoming a special game in the non-time-reduced game state and ending the special game, in other words, the ratio of becoming a special game in the non-time-reduced game state and becoming the time-reduced game state B after the special game ends, It is "50%" after the special game on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state ends, "80%" after the special game on the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state ends, and the second After the special game on the main game side is finished, the ratio of the time shortening game state B is higher than after the special game on the first main game side is finished (and the special game on the second main game side is finished The later one is configured so that the ratio of the time shortening game state A is lower than after the special game on the first main game side), in other words, after the special game on the second main game side is the second It is configured so that the rate of the time shortened game state B is higher (the rate of the time shortened game state A is lower) in the case of shifting to the time shortened game state than after the special game on the main game side ends. The number of execution rounds of the special game in Modification 1 of the second embodiment is "4R" for "symbol numbers 1 to 5, 7 and 8" and "10R" for "symbol numbers 6 and 9". The average value of the number of executed rounds is larger in the special game on the second main game side than in the special game on the first main game side, that is, the expected number of winning balls in the special game is higher. .

A special game in the time reduction game state A or the time reduction game state B, and the ratio at which the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on after the special game ends, in other words, the special game becomes the special game in the time reduction game state A or the time reduction game state B. The percentage of time reduction game state B after completion is "80%" after the special game on the first main game side ends, "80%" even after the special game on the second main game side ends, and the second It is configured so that the ratio of the time shortened game state B after the special game on the main game side is the same as the ratio of the time shortened game state B after the special game on the first main game side is finished. Once it shifts to the time reduction game state A or the time reduction game state B, it shifts to the time reduction game state B even if it becomes a special game with the first main game pattern or a special game with the second main game pattern. However, since the expected number of winning balls in the special game is larger in the second main game pattern, it is more advantageous for the player to proceed with the game in the second main game pattern. there is The number of execution rounds of the special game in Modification 1 of the second embodiment is "4R" for "symbol numbers 1 to 5, 7 and 8" and "10R" for "symbol numbers 6 and 9". The average value of the number of executed rounds is larger in the special game on the second main game side than in the special game on the first main game side, that is, the expected number of winning balls in the special game is higher. .

A game flow will be explained. As a premise of the pachinko game machine of Modification 1 of the second embodiment, a special area C12- 1 or in a pachinko game machine that becomes a special game when the passage of a game ball is detected in the specific area C12-2, the winning probability that the second main game pattern is a small winning pattern is 1023/1024, which is approximately 1/1 ( (approximately 100%). Then, the ball entry probability of the game ball to the specific area is set lower than the winning probability of the small winning symbol. For example, it is assumed that the ball entry probability is 1/10. The winning probability of the big-hit symbol is set to 1/200, but it may be set lower than the small-hit probability and the probability of entering the specific area. Since the probability of becoming a special game in the time reduction game state B is set higher than the probability of becoming a special game in the time reduction game state A, the time reduction in the time reduction game state B is shorter than that in the time reduction game state A. It is in an advantageous state as a game state.

In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability-low base state), the fluctuation start condition of the first main game symbol is satisfied, and the 1_4R large symbol 1 or 2 of symbol number 1 as the winning symbol of the first main game symbol (The effect symbol is "222", etc.) is displayed, and when a special game is played, 4 rounds of the special game are executed. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on, and the time reduction game state A is executed 100 times. In the time reduction game state A of 100 times, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on, and the transition mode of the distribution member C34 is the second mode, so it becomes easier to enter the first main game start port A12. ing. In such a 100-time time-reduction game state A, mainly, the symbol variation by the first main game symbol is executed. In the time shortening game state A of 100 times, when the fluctuation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied and the 1_4R large symbol 1 and the 1_4R large symbol 2 are displayed and the special game is started, then 100 times again. It shifts to the time reduction game state A. In the time shortening game state A of 100 times, when the fluctuation start condition of the 2nd main game symbol is satisfied and the 2_4R large symbol 1 and the 2_4R symbol 1 are displayed and the special game is started, then 100 times again. Move to shortened game state A. In the time reduction game state A of 100 times, the rate of shifting to the time reduction game state A of 100 times again is 50% in the case of the first main game pattern, and 20 in the case of the first main game pattern. %.

In the 100 times time reduction game state A, when the fluctuation start condition of the 1st main game symbol is satisfied and the 1_4R large symbol 3 is displayed to shift to the special game, then it shifts to the 100 times time reduction game state B. do. In the 100th time reduction game state A, the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is satisfied, the 2_4R large symbol 2, the 2_10R large symbol, the 2_4R symbol 2, and the 2_10R symbol are displayed, and the special game is started. Then, after that, it shifts to the time reduction game state B of 100 times. In the time reduction game state A of 100 times, the ratio of shifting to the time reduction game state B of 100 times is 50% in the case of the first main game pattern, and 80% in the case of the first main game pattern. It has become. In other words, the ratio of transitioning to the time reduction game state B as a special game with the second main game symbols is higher than the ratio of transitioning to the time reduction game state B as a special game with the first main game symbols. there is

In the 100 time reduction game state A, the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the 2_4R pattern 1 of pattern number 7 and the 2_4R pattern 2 of pattern number 8 as winning patterns of the second main game pattern. , Any of the 2_10R symbols of the pattern number 9 is displayed, and during the small winning game based on the small winning game ball in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 is not detected, the time reduction game state A is continued. In addition, in the 100 times shortened game state A, the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the 2_4R pattern 1 of the pattern number 7 and the 2_4R pattern number 8 as the winning pattern of the second main game pattern. Any of the 2_10R symbols of symbol 2 and symbol number 9 is displayed, and in the specific area C12-1 or specific area C12-2 of the first big winning port C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning If the passage of the game ball is not detected, the time reduction game state A may be terminated.

In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability-low base state), the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game pattern is satisfied, and the 1_4R large pattern 3 (performance As for the symbols for use, "777" etc.) are displayed, and when a special game is selected, a special game of 4 rounds is executed. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times. In a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability-low base state), the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is satisfied, and the 2_4R large symbol 2 of symbol number 5 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol, or , 2_10R large symbols of symbol number 6 are displayed, and when a special game is played, a special game of 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times. In the non-reduced time gaming state (for example, low-probability-low base state), the condition for starting the variation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the 2_4R symbol 1 of symbol number 7 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol, symbol number Either the 2_4R symbol 2 of 8 or the 2_10R symbol of symbol number 9 is displayed, and the specific area C12-1 or the specific area of the first big winning opening C10 during the small hit game based on the small hit When the passage of the game ball is detected in C12-2, a special game of 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times.

In the time shortening game state A, when the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied and the 1_4R large symbol 1 of the symbol number 1 as the winning symbol of the first main game symbol is displayed and a special game is started, 4 rounds of special games are run. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on, and the time reduction game state A is executed 100 times. In the time reduction game state A, when the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied and the 1_4R large symbol 2 of the symbol number 2 as the winning symbol of the first main game symbol is displayed and a special game is started, 4 rounds of special games are run. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times. In the time reduction game state A, when the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied and the 1_4R large symbol 3 of symbol number 3 is displayed as the winning symbol of the first main game symbol, and a special game is started, 4 rounds of special games are run. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times.

In the time shortening game state A, when the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbol is satisfied and the 2_4R large symbol 1 of symbol number 4 is displayed as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and a special game is started, 4 rounds of special games are run. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on, and the time reduction game state A is executed 100 times. In the time reduction game state A, when the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbol is satisfied and the 2_4R large symbol 2 of the symbol number 5 is displayed as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and a special game is started, 4 rounds of special games are run. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times. In the time shortening game state A, when the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbols is satisfied and the 2_10R large symbol of the symbol number 6 is displayed as the winning symbol of the second main game symbols, and the special game is started, 10 Execute the special game of the round. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times.

In the time shortening game state A, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the small winning pattern, which is the 2_4R pattern 1 of the pattern number 7 as the winning pattern of the second main game pattern, is displayed, and the small winning is achieved. When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 during the small winning game based on, a special game of 4 rounds is executed. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on, and the time reduction game state A is executed 100 times. In the time shortening game state A, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the small winning pattern, which is the 2_4R pattern 2 of the pattern number 8 as the winning pattern of the second main game pattern, is displayed, resulting in a small winning. When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 during the small winning game based on, a special game of 4 rounds is executed. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times. In the time shortening game state A, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbols is satisfied, and the small winning symbols, which are the 2_10R symbols of the symbol number 9 as the winning symbols of the second main game symbols, are displayed, based on the small winning. When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 during the small winning game, a special game of 10 rounds is executed. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times.

In the time shortening game state B, the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the second main game pattern win pattern is the 2_4R pattern 1 of pattern number 7, the 2_4R pattern 2 of pattern number 8, and the pattern number. Any of the 9th 2_10R symbols is displayed, and the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning. If not, it is configured to continue the time shortening game state B. In addition, in the time shortening game state B, the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the 2_4R pattern 1 of the pattern number 7 as the winning pattern of the second main game pattern, the 2_4R pattern 2 of the pattern number 8, Any of the 2_10R symbols of symbol number 9 is displayed, and the game ball passes through the specific area C12-1 or specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning. is not detected, the time reduction game state B may be terminated.

In the time reduction game state B, when the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied and the 1_4R large symbol 1 of the symbol number 1 as the winning symbol of the first main game symbol is displayed and a special game is started, 4 rounds of special games are run. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on, and the time reduction game state A is executed 100 times. In the time shortening game state B, when the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied and the 1_4R large symbol 2 of symbol number 2 is displayed as the winning symbol of the first main game symbol, and a special game is started, 4 rounds of special games are run. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times. In the time shortening game state B, when the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is satisfied and the 1_4R large symbol 3 of the symbol number 3 as the winning symbol of the first main game symbol is displayed and the special game is started, 4 rounds of special games are run. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times.

In the time shortening game state B, when the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbol is satisfied and the 2_4R large symbol 1 of the symbol number 4 is displayed as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and a special game is started, 4 rounds of special games are run. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on, and the time reduction game state A is executed 100 times. In the time shortening game state B, when the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbols is satisfied and the 2_4R large symbol 2 of the symbol number 5 is displayed as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and a special game is started, 4 rounds of special games are run. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times. In the time reduction game state B, when the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbols is satisfied and the 2_10R large symbol of symbol number 6 is displayed as the winning symbol of the second main game symbols, and the special game is started, 10 Execute the special game of the round. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times.

In the time shortening game state B, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the small winning pattern that is the 2_4R pattern 1 of the pattern number 7 as the winning pattern of the second main game pattern is displayed, and the small winning is achieved. When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 during the small winning game based on, a special game of 4 rounds is executed. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag A is turned on, and the time reduction game state A is executed 100 times. In the time reduction game state B, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the small winning pattern, which is the 2_4R pattern 2 of the pattern number 8 as the winning pattern of the second main game pattern, is displayed, and the small winning pattern is achieved. When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 during the small winning game based on, a special game of 4 rounds is executed. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times. In the time shortening game state B, the condition for starting the variation of the second main game symbols is satisfied, and the small winning symbol, which is the 2_10R symbol of the symbol number 9 as the winning symbol of the second main game symbol, is displayed, based on the small winning. When the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning hole C10 during the small winning game, a special game of 10 rounds is executed. After the special game is finished, the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is turned on, and the time reduction game state B is executed 100 times.

In the time shortening game state B, the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the second main game pattern win pattern is the 2_4R pattern 1 of pattern number 7, the 2_4R pattern 2 of pattern number 8, and the pattern number. Any of the 9th 2_10R symbols is displayed, and the passage of the game ball is detected in the specific area C12-1 or the specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning. If not, it is configured to continue the time shortening game state B. In addition, in the time shortening game state B, the fluctuation start condition of the second main game pattern is satisfied, and the 2_4R pattern 1 of the pattern number 7 as the winning pattern of the second main game pattern, the 2_4R pattern 2 of the pattern number 8, Any of the 2_10R symbols of symbol number 9 is displayed, and the game ball passes through the specific area C12-1 or specific area C12-2 of the first big winning opening C10 during the small winning game based on the small winning. is not detected, the time reduction game state B may be terminated.

When the auxiliary game time reduction flag B is on, the opening mode of the electric role product C30d is changed to "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → By setting it to "closed", the time shortening game state B that makes it easy to enter the second main game start port B12 is set, and when the auxiliary game time saving flag A is on, the opening mode of the electric role product C30d is set to "0.2 seconds. Open→Closed for 0.2 seconds→Open for 0.2 seconds→Closed for 3.0 seconds→Open for 4.0 seconds→Closed" makes it possible to easily enter the first main game start port A12. Time shortening game state A However, in response to the game ball entering the auxiliary game start port H10 (inflow, passing in the case of a gate), an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game pattern winning random number) is acquired, and the acquired auxiliary The time shortening game state A and the time shortening game state B may be controlled by determining a stop symbol based on the judgment of the game symbol random number.

In the case of such a configuration, if the judgment of whether or not the acquired auxiliary game pattern random number is a loss and the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of lost symbols is set to one, the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the lost symbols for the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the lost symbols to be determined for the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the number of the lost symbols for the number of the number of the number of the winning symbols for the number of the number of the number of the winning symbols. If the setting is , one losing pattern is determined by lottery from among a plurality of losing patterns. On the other hand, if the winning determination of the acquired auxiliary game symbol random number is a win and the winning symbol is set to one, the stop symbol is determined for one winning symbol, and there are multiple winning symbols (auxiliary game symbol_ In the case of the setting of win A, auxiliary game symbol_win B, etc.), one winning symbol is determined by lottery from among a plurality of winning symbols. In the time reduction game state A and the time reduction game state B, when the winning symbol is the auxiliary game symbol_win A, the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric role object B11d as the predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric role object is , "0.2 seconds open -> 0.2 seconds closed -> 0.2 seconds open -> 3.0 seconds closed -> 4.0 seconds open -> closed". is the auxiliary game symbol _ hit B, the opening mode of the second main game starter electric role product B11d as the predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric role product is "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open→0.2 seconds closed→0.2 seconds open→closed. In the non-time shortening game state, when the winning symbol is auxiliary game symbol_win A and the winning symbol is auxiliary game symbol_win B, the opening mode of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is 0.5 seconds. Open to closed is preferable.

Then, in the time shortening game state A, the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win A by lottery is set to 100%, and the selection state A is set in which the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win B is set to 0%. By setting the opening mode of C30d to "0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed", the first main game start gate A12 A game state in which it is easy to enter a ball can be created.

In addition, in the time shortening game state B, the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win A by lottery is set to 0%, and the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win B is set to 100%. 2nd main game start gate B12 A game state in which it is easy to enter a ball can be created.

The selection state A and the selection state B are configured to be determined by the game state and winning symbols when the special game is entered.

In the selection state A, the game state at the time of becoming a special game is a non-time reduction game state, and the winning symbols are the 1_4R large symbol 1, the 1_4R large symbol 2, the 2_4R large symbol 1, and the 1_4R large symbol 1. It is configured to be selected when As a modification, in the selection state A, regardless of the game state when the special game is entered, the winning symbols are the 1_4R large symbol 1, the 1_4R large symbol 2, the 2_4R large symbol 1, and the 1_4R large symbol 1. (That is, regardless of the game state when the special game is entered, the winning symbol is 1_4R large symbol 1, 1_4R large symbol 2, 2_4R large symbol 1, 1_4R In the case of symbol 1, the subsequent time reduction game state may be configured to be the time reduction game state A).

In the selection state B, the game state at the time of becoming a special game is a non-time reduction game state, and the winning symbols are 1_4R large symbol 3, 2_4R large symbol 2, 2_10R large symbol, 2_4R symbol 2, and 2_10R. It is configured to be selected when it is a pattern.

In the selection state B, the game state when the special game is entered is the time reduction game state, and the winning symbols are 1_4R large symbol 2, 1_4R large symbol 3, 2_4R large symbol 2, 2_10R large symbol, It is configured to be selected in the case of the 2_4R symbol 2 and the 2_10R symbol. As a modification, in the selection state B, the winning symbols are 1_4R large symbol 2, 1_4R large symbol 3, 2_4R large symbol 2, 2_10R large symbol, and 2_4R regardless of the game state when the special game is entered. It may be configured so that it is selected only when it is the symbol 2 and the 2_10R symbol (that is, regardless of the game state when the special game is entered, the winning symbol is the 1_4R large symbol 2, the 1_4R large symbol 3 , 2_4R large symbol 2, 2_10R large symbol, 2_4R symbol 2, and 2_10R symbol, the subsequent time reduction game state may be the time reduction game state B).

Further, the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern may be determined by lottery according to the game ball entering (flowing in, passing in the case of a gate) into the auxiliary game starting port H10. In this configuration, the stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols are set so as to correspond to the fluctuation mode of the auxiliary game symbols.

For example, in the non-time shortening game state, it is set to select the variation mode 1, the variation mode 2, and the variation mode 3 as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols.

The variation mode 1 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbols are lost symbols, and the variation time is set to be long (for example, 30 seconds).

The variation mode 2 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, the auxiliary game symbol_win A, and the variation time is set to be long (it may be the same as or different from the variation mode 1). , The predetermined time related to the open state of the electric accessory is configured to be set to 0.5 seconds (0.5 seconds open→closed) when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off, for example.

Variation mode 3 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, auxiliary game symbol_win B, and the variation time is long (it may be the same as or different from variation mode 1 and variation mode 2). It is set, and the predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric accessory is configured to be set to, for example, 0.5 seconds (open for 0.5 seconds → closed) when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off. Although it is configured to operate the electric accessory in the same operation pattern as the variation mode 2, it may be a different pattern.

In the time shortening game state A and the time shortening game state B, the variation mode 4, the variation mode 5, and the variation mode 6 are set to be selected as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols.

Variation mode 4 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbols are lost symbols, and the variation time is set shorter than the variation modes 1 to 3 (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Variation mode 5 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, auxiliary game symbol_win A, and the variation time is set to be short (it may be the same as or different from variation mode 4). , The predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric role product is, for example, the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric role product B11d when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, "0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds Closed→Opened for 0.2 seconds→Closed for 3.0 seconds→Opened for 4.0 seconds→Closed".

The variation mode 6 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, the auxiliary game symbol_hit B, and the variation time is short (it may be the same as or different from the variation mode 4 and the variation mode 5). It is set, and the predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory is set to, for example, "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed", and the electric accessory is operated in an operation pattern different from the variation mode 5. is configured as

Then, in the time shortening game state A, the selection state A in which the ratio of determining the variation mode 5 by lottery is 100% and the percentage of determining the variation mode 6 is 0%, and the opening mode of the electric accessory C30d is set to " 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed”, a game that makes it easy to enter the first main game start port A12 state can be

In addition, in the time reduction game state B, the selection state B in which the ratio of determining the variation mode 5 by lottery is 0% and the percentage of determining the variation mode 6 is 100%, and the opening mode of the electric accessory C30d is set to " 3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed”, a game that makes it easy to enter the second main game start port B12 state can be

The selection state A and the selection state B are configured to be determined by the game state and winning symbols when the special game is entered.

In the selection state A, the game state at the time of becoming a special game is a non-time reduction game state, and the winning symbols are the 1_4R large symbol 1, the 1_4R large symbol 2, the 2_4R large symbol 1, and the 1_4R large symbol 1. It is configured to be selected when

In the selection state B, the game state when it becomes a special game is a non-time reduction game state, and the winning symbols are 1_4R large symbol 1, 1_4R large symbol 2, 2_4R large symbol 1, 1_4R large symbol 1 Other than It is configured to be selected when it is a pattern. Further, the selection state B is configured to be selected when the game state when the special game is entered is the time reduction game state and all the winning symbols.

Further, in the non-time-reduced game state, only the variation mode 1 is selected as the variation mode of the auxiliary game symbols, and in the time-reduced game state, the variation mode 5 and the variation mode are selected as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols. You may set so that the aspect 6 may be acquired. That is, in the non-time-reduced game state, only the losing patterns are selected and the winning patterns are not selected, and in the time-reduced game state, only the winning patterns are selected and the losing patterns are not selected. configured.

Further, depending on the time shortening game state A and the time shortening game state B, the variable fixing time of the auxiliary game pattern may be set to different times.

For example, in the time reduction game state A, the variable fixed time of the auxiliary game symbol_per A is set to 3.6 seconds. After the auxiliary game symbol _ hit A is fixed and stopped, the opening operation of the physical electric accessory C30d starts after the lapse of the variable fixed time of 3.6 seconds, and the distribution member C34 is in the second mode. Since the game ball enters the distribution ball entrance C30 in this state, it is possible to create a game state in which it is easy to enter the first main game start opening A12.

In addition, in the time reduction game state B, the variable fixed time of the auxiliary game symbol_win B is set to 0 seconds (a short time such as 0.1 seconds may be used). After the auxiliary game symbol _ hit B is fixed and stopped, the opening operation of the physical electric accessory C30d starts after the lapse of the variable fixed time of 0 seconds or 0.1 seconds, so that the distribution member C34 is the first Since the game ball enters the distribution ball entrance C30 in the state of the first mode, it is possible to create a game state in which it is easy to enter the second main game start opening B12. In addition, it is preferable to start the operation of the distribution member in accordance with the timing of fixing and stopping the auxiliary game symbols.

In modification 1 of the second embodiment, a sorting ball entrance C30, a first non-electrical accessory A12hd of the first main game starter A12, and a second non-electrical accessory B12hd of the second main game starter B12 are provided. Thus, a pachinko game that easily shifts to the 100 time reduction game state A after winning the first main game pattern, and easily shifts to the 100 time reduction game state B after winning the second main game pattern. machine can be provided. In addition, it becomes a special game in a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, a low-probability-low-base state), and when the transition to the time-reduced gaming state occurs after the special game, it becomes the time-reduced gaming state A, but the time-reduced gaming state A or To provide a pachinko game machine in which a special game is entered in a time shortened game state B and, when the special game is shifted to the time shortened game state after the special game, the time shortened game state B is more advantageous than the time shortened game state A.例文帳に追加

As a game state related to the ease of opening the first non-electrical accessory A12hd (first variable member) and the second non-electrical accessory B12hd (second variable member) material, the normal game state and the first non-electrical accessory than the normal game state A time shortening game state A (first specific game state) in which the electric accessory A12hd is likely to be in an open state, and a time shortening game state B (second specific game state). After the first main game symbols are stop-displayed in the form of a small win, the variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a specific number of balls enter the first big winning opening C10 or a specific period elapses. It is possible to execute a small winning game that executes a unit game that can be in a state once, and when a ball enters a specific area during execution of a small winning game, a first special game is executed after the end of the small winning game, and a second special game is executed. After the 2 main game symbols are stopped and displayed in a small win mode, the variable winning opening is placed in an advantageous state for the player until a specific number of balls enter the first big winning opening C10 or a specific period elapses. It is possible to execute a small winning game that executes the unit game once, and when a ball enters a specific area during execution of the small winning game, the second special game is executed after the small winning game is completed. It is The time shortening game state A is configured to be set more easily after the first special game than after the second special game, and the time shortening game state B is set more easily after the second special game than after the first special game. It is configured to be easily set after 1/10 (first probability) as the probability that the game ball that entered the first big winning hole C10 can enter the specific area is 1/10 as the probability that the second main game pattern will be in the form of a small win. It is configured to be lower than 1 (second probability).

In a conventional pachinko game machine that develops from a small hit and becomes a special game, the game state is a non-time shortened game state (eg, low probability low base state) and a time shortened game state (eg, low probability high base state) ), but in the pachinko game machine of Modification 1 of the second embodiment, a non-time-reduced game state (for example, a low-probability base state), a time-reduced game state A, a time-reduced game Since three game states of the state B can be provided, it is possible to diversify the game. In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that develops from a small win and becomes a special game, a time reduction game state A, which is a time reduction game state that mainly assists the pattern variation of the first main game pattern, By providing the time shortening game state B for assisting the pattern variation of the second main game pattern, the weak point that the time shortening game state cannot be applied after the special game with the first main game pattern can be eliminated. In addition, a time-reduced game state B in which the number of pattern variations is specified is provided, but by designing that the winning of the next special game is substantially confirmed, the winning of the next special game is substantially confirmed ( Loop type) It is possible to build a natural game flow like a pachinko game machine with variable probability. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine that develops from a conventional small win and becomes a special game, there are many cases where the time reduction game state is not entered after the first special game, and the staying time of the time reduction game state, which is an advantageous state, is short. As a result, the player's playing time was shortened and the number of out balls as a result of playing the game was smaller than that of other pachinko machines, but after the first special game, the advantage was relatively long. By providing the time shortening game state A of 100 times, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction and increase the number of out balls by lengthening the playing time of the player.

By having two of the auxiliary game time reduction flag A and the auxiliary game time reduction flag B as the auxiliary game time reduction flag, two time reduction game states of the time reduction game state A and the time reduction game state B are provided as the time reduction game state. , and in the time-reduced game state A, the timing at which the electric accessory is long opened (the timing at which the game ball is easy to enter) is the first half, and in the time-reduced game state B, the electric accessory The timing when is long open (the timing when the game ball is easy to enter) is the second half. In addition, since the distribution member is in the first mode in the first half and the distribution member is in the second mode in the second half, the electric accessories are installed in the time shortening game state A. When the game ball enters the ball entrance, it enters the first open ball entrance, and in the time shortening game state B, the game ball enters the distribution ball entrance where the electric accessory is installed. In this case, the ball enters the second open ball entrance, and when the game ball enters the first open ball entrance, the first non-motorized accessory installed at the first main game start opening When the game ball is opened and the game ball enters the second open ball entrance, the first non-electric accessory installed at the second main game start opening is opened, so that in the case of the time shortening game state A The game progresses by entering the ball into the first main game starting port, and in the case of the time shortening game state B, the game progresses by entering the ball into the second main game starting port. It is possible to create novel game characteristics having different game characteristics depending on whether it is the game state A or the time reduction game state B.例文帳に追加

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing winning symbols and a game flow in modification 2 of the second embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine of Modified Example 2 of the second embodiment includes big-hit symbols and small-hit symbols (develops into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a small-hit game).
<Jackpot probability>
In the non-reduced time game state, the winning probability that the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) are the big win symbols is set to 1/200, but it may be set lower than the small win probability. . In the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E, the winning probability that the main game pattern (first main game pattern, second main game pattern) becomes a big hit pattern is 1/200. , may be set lower than the small hit probability. When time shortening game state C, time shortening game state D, and time shortening game state E are high-probability high base state and high-probability low base state, main game symbols (first main game pattern, second main game pattern) The winning probability of becoming a big hit symbol is assumed to be 1/199. It may be set lower than the small hit probability. It should be noted that the probability variation state may not be provided, and in that case, the winning probability that the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) are the big hit symbols is only 1/200.

<Small hit probability>
In the non-time-reduced game state, time-reduced game state C, time-reduced game state D, and time-reduced game state E, the winning probability that the second main game symbol is a small winning symbol is 1/7 (not substantially 1/1). probability). A straight V pattern in which the probability of a game ball entering a specific area is unchanged (100%) when a small winning pattern is won. It should be noted that although the small winning symbols of the first main game symbols are not provided, the winning probability may be set to 1/70 or the like.

<Probability of winning auxiliary game pattern>
In the non-time shortening game state, the winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol is set to 1/1024 (0 may be acceptable). In the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E, the winning probability of the auxiliary game symbol is set to 1023/1024 (substantially 1/1 is sufficient).

<Time reduction game state>
By setting the ratio of entering the first main game start port A12 and the ratio of entering the second main game start port B12 as follows, time reduction game state C, time reduction game state D, time A shortened game state E can be provided.
(1) Time reduction game state C: Proportion of entering the first main game start port A12: Proportion of entering the second main game start port B12 = 99:1
(2) Time reduction game state D: Proportion of entering the 1st main game start port A12: Proportion of entering the 2nd main game start port B12 = 95:5
(3) Time reduction game state E: Proportion of entering the 1st main game start port A12: Proportion of entering the 2nd main game start port B12 = 1:99

In addition, the ratio is not limited to this value, and the time-reduced game state C may have a ratio that makes it difficult to enter the second main game start port B12, and the time-reduced game state D is the second It suffices if it is a rate at which it is difficult to enter the second main game start port B12, and it is easier to enter the second main game start port B12 than in the time shortened game state C, and the time shortened game state E is the second It is sufficient that the ball enters the second main game start port B12 at approximately 100%, which is the rate at which it is easy to enter the main game start port B12. Since the probability of becoming a special game in the time-reduced gaming state D is set higher than the probability of becoming a special game in the time-reduced gaming state C (the time-reduced gaming state D is the second main game than the time-reduced gaming state C). Since it is easy to enter the game start port B12, it is easy to receive a lottery with a winning probability of 1/7 that the second main game pattern is a small winning pattern). It is in an advantageous state as a time shortening game state. Also, since the probability of a special game being played in the time-reduced gaming state E is set higher than the probability of being a special game in the time-reduced gaming state D (the time-reduced gaming state E is higher than the time-reduced gaming state D). Since it is easy to enter the second main game start port B12, it is easy to receive a lottery of 1/7, which is the winning probability that the second main game pattern is a small winning pattern). E is in an advantageous state as a time reduction game state. That is, it is set to the relationship of time reduction game state C<time reduction game state D<time reduction game state E.

In the time shortening game state C, the first non-electric role A 12hd is more open than the normal game state than the second non-electric role B 12hd is more likely to be open than the normal game state. This is a game state in which the ratio of the easy game state is set higher. For example, when 100 symbol changes are executed in the time-reduced game state C, the number of times (ratio) of entering the first main game start port A12: the number of times (ratio) of entering the second main game start port B12 = It is set to 99:1 (for example, the selection ratio of the auxiliary game symbol_win A described later and the auxiliary game symbol_win B described later is set to 99:1).

In the time shortening game state D, the first non-electric role A 12hd is more open than the normal game state than the second non-electric role B 12hd is more likely to be open than the normal game state. This is a game state in which the ratio of the easy game state is set higher. For example, when 100 symbol changes are executed in the time-reduced game state D, the number of times (percentage) of entering the first main game start port A12: the number of times (percentage) of entering the second main game start port B12 = It is set to 95:5 (for example, the selection ratio of the auxiliary game symbol_win A described later and the auxiliary game symbol_win B described later is set to 95:5).

In the time shortening game state E, the second non-electric accessory B12hd is more open than the normal game state than the first non-electric accessory A12hd is more likely to be open than the normal game state. This is a game state in which the ratio of the easy game state is set higher. For example, when 100 symbol variations are executed in the time-reduced gaming state E, the number of times (percentage) of entering the first main game start port A12: the number of times (percentage) of entering the second main game start port B12 = It is set to 1:99 (for example, the selection ratio of the auxiliary game symbol_win A described later and the auxiliary game symbol_win B described later is set to 1:99). In addition, the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E are game states related to the ease of opening the electric role product C30d. It is preferable that the As a modification, when 100 symbol variations are executed in the time-reduced gaming state E, the number of times (percentage) of entering the first main game start port A12: entering the second main game start port B12 The number of times (ratio) may be set to 0:100 (for example, the selection ratio of the auxiliary game symbol_win A described later and the auxiliary game symbol_win B described later may be set to 0:100).

The 1_4R large symbol 1 of symbol number 1 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the first main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. When the 1_4R large pattern 1 is displayed in the non-time-reduced game state and the special game is started, the time-reduced game state C is given 99 times after the special game is finished. When the 1_4R large pattern 1 is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E and the special game is performed, the time reduction game state C is given 99 times after the special game ends. is configured as

The 1_4R large symbol 2 of symbol number 2 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the first main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. When the 1_4R large pattern 2 is displayed in the non-time-reduced game state and the special game is started, the time-reduced game state D is given 99 times after the special game is finished. When the 1_4R large pattern 2 is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E and the special game is performed, the time reduction game state D is given 99 times after the special game is finished. is configured as

The 1_4R large symbol 3 of symbol number 3 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the first main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. When the 1_4R large pattern 3 is displayed in the non-time-reduced game state and the special game is started, the time-reduced game state E is given five times after the special game is finished. When the 1_4R large pattern 3 is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E and the special game is performed, the time reduction game state E is given five times after the special game ends. is configured as

The 1_4R pattern 1 of the pattern number 4 as the winning pattern is a small winning pattern of the first main game pattern, and the game ball passes through the specific area of the first big winning port during the small winning game based on the small winning. is detected, it is set to develop into a special game of 4 rounds. When the 1_4R symbol 1 is displayed in the non-time-reduced game state and the special game is started, the time-reduced game state C is given 99 times after the special game is finished. When the 1_4R symbol 1 is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E, and the special game is performed, after the special game ends, the time reduction game state C is given 99 times. is configured to

The 1_4R pattern 2 of the pattern number 5 as the winning pattern is a small winning pattern of the first main game pattern, and the game ball passes through the specific area of the first big winning port during the small winning game based on the small winning. is detected, it is set to develop into a special game of 4 rounds. When the 1_4R symbol 2 is displayed in the non-time-reduced game state and the special game is started, the time-reduced game state D is given 99 times after the special game is finished. When the 1_4R symbol 2 is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E and the special game is entered, after the special game ends, the time reduction game state D is given 99 times. is configured to

The 1_4R pattern 3 of the pattern number 6 as the winning pattern is a small winning pattern of the first main game pattern, and the game ball passes through the specific area of the first big winning port during the small winning game based on the small winning. is detected, it is set to develop into a special game of 4 rounds. When the 1_4R symbol 3 is displayed in the non-time reduction game state and the special game is started, the time reduction game state E is given five times after the special game is finished. When the 1_4R pattern 3 is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E, and the special game is performed, after the special game ends, the time reduction game state E is given five times. is configured to

The 2_4R large symbol 1 of symbol number 7 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. When the 2_4R large symbol 1 is displayed in the non-time-reduced game state and the special game is started, the time-reduced game state E is given five times after the special game is finished. When the 2_4R large pattern 1 is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E and the special game is performed, the time reduction game state E is given five times after the special game is finished. is configured as

The 2_4R large symbol 2 of symbol number 8 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 4 rounds. When the 2_4R large pattern 2 is displayed in the non-time-reduced game state and the special game is started, the time-reduced game state E is given five times after the special game is finished. When the 2_4R large pattern 2 is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E and the special game is performed, the time reduction game state E is given five times after the special game is finished. is configured as

The 2_10R large symbol of symbol number 9 as a winning symbol is a big winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and is set to execute a special game of 10 rounds. When the 2_10R large pattern is displayed in the non-time-reduced game state and the special game is started, the time-reduced game state E is given five times after the special game is finished. When the 2_10R large pattern is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E and the special game is performed, after the special game ends, the time reduction game state E is given five times. is configured to

The 2_4R pattern 1 of the pattern number 10 as the winning pattern is a small winning pattern of the second main game pattern, and the game ball passes through the specific area of the first big winning hole during the small winning game based on the small winning. is detected, it is set to develop into a special game of 4 rounds. When the 2_4R symbol 1 is displayed in the non-time reduction game state and the special game is started, the time reduction game state E is given five times after the special game is finished. When the 2_4R symbol 1 is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E, and the special game is performed, after the special game ends, the time reduction game state E is given five times. is configured to

The 2_4R pattern 2 of the pattern number 11 as the winning pattern is a small winning pattern of the second main game pattern, and the game ball passes through the specific area of the first big winning hole during the small winning game based on the small winning. is detected, it is set to develop into a special game of 4 rounds. When the 2_4R symbol 2 is displayed in the non-time reduction game state and the special game is started, the time reduction game state E is given five times after the special game is finished. When the 2_4R symbol 2 is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E, and the special game is performed, after the special game ends, the time reduction game state E is given five times. is configured to

The 2_10R symbol of symbol number 12 as a winning symbol is a small winning symbol of the second main game symbol, and during a small winning game based on a small winning, the game ball passes through a specific area of the first big winning port. It is set to develop into a special game of 10 rounds when it is detected. When the 2_10R symbol is displayed in the non-time reduction game state and the special game is started, the time reduction game state E is given five times after the special game is finished. When the 2_10R symbol is displayed in the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E, and the special game is performed, after the special game ends, the time reduction game state E is given five times. It is configured.

In the non-time shortening game state, the time shortening game state C and the time shortening game state D, the ratio of winning the jackpot pattern in the first main game pattern and shifting to the time shortening game state E after the special game is 20%. In the non-time shortened game state, the time shortened game state C, and the time shortened game state D, a small winning pattern is won in the first main game pattern and develops into a special game, and the ratio of shifting to the time shortened game state E after the special game. is 20%. That is, even if the non-time-reduced game state, the time-reduced game state C, and the time-reduced game state D become special games with the first main game symbols, the rate of transition to the time-reduced game state E is 20%. state is the same. It should be noted that the ratio of transitioning to the time reduction game state E with the special game with the first main game symbols is lower than the ratio of transitioning to the time reduction game state E with the special game with the second main game symbols.

In the non-time-reduced game state, the time-reduced game state C, the time-reduced game state D, and the time-reduced game state E, the jackpot pattern is won in the second main game pattern, and the ratio of shifting to the time-reduced game state E after the special game is , 100%. In the non-time shortening game state, the time shortening game state C, the time shortening game state D, and the time shortening game state E, a small winning pattern is won in the second main game pattern and develops into a special game, and the time shortening game is played after the special game. The rate of transition to state E is 100%. That is, when a special game is played with the second main game symbols in the non-time-reduced game state, time-reduced game state C, time-reduced game state D, and time-reduced game state E, the game state always shifts to the time-reduced game state E. The ratio of transitioning to the time shortening game state E with the second main game symbols as a special game is configured to be higher than the ratio of transitioning to the time shortening game state E with the first main game symbols as a special game. As a modification, in the non-time-reduced game state, the time-reduced game state C, the time-reduced game state D, and the time-reduced game state E, the jackpot pattern is won in the second main game pattern, and the time-reduced game is played after the special game. The rate of transition to state E may be 90% (for example, when the 2_4R large pattern 2 is displayed and the special game is performed, it may not be shifted to the time reduction game state E after the special game), In the time shortening game state, the time shortening game state C, the time shortening game state D, and the time shortening game state E, a small win pattern is won in the second main game pattern and develops into a special game, and after the special game, the time shortening game state. The rate of transition to E may be 90% (for example, when the 2_4R symbol 2 is displayed and a special game is played, it may not be shifted to the time reduction game state E after the special game).

The time shortening game state C and the time shortening game state D are configured so as to end with the symbol variation of the first main game symbol 99 times. In other words, the situation where the second main game symbols have not satisfied the fluctuation start condition in total 5 times , the time reduction game state D ends), the time reduction game state C and the time reduction game state D end on the condition that the number of symbol changes of the first main game symbol reaches 99 times (single upper limit number C). is configured as Although the single upper limit number C is set to 99 times, the number may be more than 99 times, as long as it is equal to or greater than the single upper limit number D. In addition, even in a situation where the number of symbol variations of the first main game symbol has not reached 99 times and the number of symbol variations of the second main game symbol has not reached 5 times, the number of symbol variations of the first main game symbol When the sum of the number of symbol variations and the number of symbol variations of the second main game symbol reaches 99 times, the time shortening game C and the time shortening game state D are terminated at the variation reaching 99 times. there is On the other hand, the time shortening game state E is configured to end after five symbol variations of the second main game symbol. In other words, in a situation where the satisfaction of the variation start condition for the first main game symbols has not reached 99 times in total, the total number of symbol variations for the first main game symbols and the number of symbol variations for the second main game symbols It is configured such that the time-reduced game state E is terminated on condition that it reaches 5 times (single upper limit number of times D). Although the single upper limit number of times D is set to 5 times, the number of times may be less than 5 times, and the number of times may be equal to or less than the single upper limit number of times C. In addition, in the time reduction game state C and the time reduction game state D, the time reduction game state C and the time reduction game state D are terminated when the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied in total five times. Instead, for example, the time shortening game state C and the time shortening game state D may end when the second main game symbol variation start conditions are met in total 99 times. In such a configuration, even in a situation where the number of symbol variations of the first main game symbols has not reached 99 and the number of symbol variations of the second main game symbols has not reached 99, the second When the sum of the number of symbol variations of the first main game symbol and the number of symbol variations of the second main game symbol reaches 99 times, the time shortening game C and the time shortening game state D are terminated when the number of symbol variations reaches 99 times. It is preferably configured to.

Also, the time shortening game state C and the time shortening game state D may be configured to end when the main game symbols change 99 times. In other words, the time reduction game state C and the time reduction game state D are completed on the condition that the total number of symbol variations of the first main game symbol and the number of symbol variations of the second main game symbol is 99 times. is configured to On the other hand, the time shortening game state E may be configured so as not to end when the main game symbols change five times. In other words, even if the total number of symbol variations of the first main game symbols and the number of symbol variations of the second main game symbols is five, the number of symbol variations of the second main game symbols has reached five times. If not, it may be configured so that the time reduction game state E does not end.

In the time reduction game state C and the time reduction game state D, there is a possibility that the second non-electric accessory B12hd of the second main game start port B12 is operated and opened, so the second main game start port B12 It is configured to be able to execute a special effect that suggests (informs) the possibility of releasing the 2 non-electric accessory B12hd (possibility of winning the auxiliary game symbol_hit B described later). In the time shortening game state C and the time shortening game state D, the variation information of the auxiliary game pattern received from the main control unit or the prefetch information (holding number information of the auxiliary game pattern, success or failure information of the auxiliary game pattern, information of the auxiliary game pattern Symbol information, variation mode information of auxiliary game symbols, etc. If it is the variation information, the auxiliary game symbol _ hit B described later is transmitted from the main game unit at the start of the fluctuation of the auxiliary game scheduled to be stopped, and if it is the look-ahead information Auxiliary game symbol _ hit B described later is transmitted from the main game unit at the time of suspension occurrence of the auxiliary game scheduled to be stopped), the sub control unit determines that the auxiliary game symbol _ hit B described later will be stopped. It is determined whether or not there is information that can be the trigger suspension of the auxiliary game in the suspension of the auxiliary game (the auxiliary game pattern _ hit B described later is the suspension of the auxiliary game scheduled to be stopped), and the corresponding information If there is, the variation effect of the auxiliary game pattern (effect to be executed when the auxiliary game pattern _ hit B described later starts the fluctuation of the auxiliary game scheduled to stop) or the look-ahead effect (auxiliary game pattern _ hit B described later determines whether or not to execute a special performance which is a performance to be executed in advance upon occurrence of a pending auxiliary game scheduled to be stopped. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special performance is to be executed, the type of special performance that can be executed is selected from a plurality of types of special performance. This special performance is configured to be displayed on the performance display device SG in parallel with the symbol variation of the performance symbols displayed during the symbol variation of the first main game symbols and the advance notice performance. In the time reduction game state E, even if the auxiliary game symbol _ win B described later is won or is scheduled to be won, the special effect is not executed, but the first main game in the time reduction game state E Proportion of entering the starting port A12: It may be configured so that a special effect can be executed according to the ratio of the rate of entering the second main game starting port B12. For example, the ratio of the first main game start A12: the ratio of the second main game start B12 = 40:60. A case close to a percentage can be exemplified.

The symbol variation of the second main game symbol is digested with priority over the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. Based on the read-ahead information (holding number information, win/fail information, pattern information, variation mode information), the sub-control unit determines whether or not there is information that can be a trigger hold in the hold on the first main game side, and trigger hold If there is information that can be, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the look-ahead performance is to be executed, the type of the look-ahead performance that can be executed is selected from a plurality of types of look-ahead performance. When it is decided to execute a special effect that is the variable effect or the prefetch effect of the auxiliary game symbols during the execution of the prefetch effect (first main game prefetch effect) targeting the trigger suspension on the first main game side. is to limit the execution of the prefetch effect (first main game prefetch effect) scheduled to be executed with the pattern change of the first main game pattern next to the prefetch effect (first main game prefetch effect) being executed. (In this case, the executed prefetch effect (first main game prefetch effect) may be executed simultaneously with the special effect). In other words, in the symbol variation after the symbol variation of the first main game symbol during execution of the look-ahead effect (first main game look-ahead effect), the continuation of the look-ahead effect (first main game look-ahead effect) being executed is not executed. It is configured. However, it is preferable to limit the information only when the variable display of the auxiliary game that triggers the execution of the special effect is the win. When determining whether or not to execute a new look-ahead effect (first main game look-ahead effect), the special effect has ended (or the pattern variation of the auxiliary game that triggered the execution of the special effect has ended), and , on the condition that the hold of the trigger on the first main game side is exhausted, the look-ahead determination is performed.

It is configured to digest the symbol variation of the second main game symbol with priority over the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. information, success/failure information, pattern information, variation mode information), the sub-control unit determines whether or not there is information that can cause a trigger hold in the hold on the second main game side, and there is information that can cause a trigger hold. If so, it is determined whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect (second main game look-ahead effect) targeting the second main game's trigger hold. As a result of the determination, if it is determined to execute the prefetching effect (second main game prefetching effect), the prefetching effect (second main game prefetching effect) that can be executed from among multiple types of prefetching effects (second main game prefetching effect) ) is configured to draw lots. As a look-ahead effect (second main game look-ahead effect), a look-ahead look-ahead effect in the reserve executed during the pattern change of the "summary change" (for example, a look-ahead look-ahead in the hold that displays the "M icon" on the effect display device SG A look-ahead effect (a second main game look-ahead effect) can be exemplified by executing a look-ahead look-ahead look-ahead effect B for displaying a "V icon" on the look-ahead display device SG. Also, it is possible to execute the "collective variation" itself as a look-ahead effect (second main game look-ahead effect).

The time shortening game state C and the time shortening game state D have the same aspect of the performance stage and performance symbols displayed on the performance display device SG, and are configured to be indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish. It is In the time reduction game state C and the time reduction game state D, a suggestive effect that suggests (informs) the possibility of the time reduction game state D is configured to be executable, and the execution frequency of the suggestion effect is the time reduction game state. C and the time reduction game state D are configured to be different. Here, as an example of the suggestive effect, the effect that the design for the effect is displayed in a specific combination (for example, the order of "123", "456", etc.), the effect that the effect stage changes (stage change effect) When these effects are executed, the time reduction game state D is determined, or the possibility of the time reduction game state D increases if the frequency of execution of these effects is high. On the other hand, in the time reduction game state E, the suggestive effect is not executed. In the time-reduced gaming state E, the suggestive effect is configured not to be executed, but the ratio of entering the first main game start port A12 in the time-reduced game state E: Entering the second main game start port B12 It may be configured such that the suggestive effect can be executed according to the ratio of the ratio of the ratio. For example, the ratio of the first main game start A12: the ratio of the second main game start B12 = 40:60. A case close to a ratio can be exemplified. In this case, the time reduction game state C, the time reduction game state D, and the time reduction game state E have the same aspect of the production stage, the production pattern, etc. displayed on the production display device SG. It is preferably configured to be indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish.

In the time shortening game state C and the time shortening game state D, the time shortening game states C and D end with the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern 99 times, and the non-time shortening game state (for example, the low probability low base state ), and the time-reduced game state E ends with the symbol variation of the second main game symbol five times, and a non-time-reduced game state (for example, low probability, low base state), but if the time shortened game state C or the time shortened game state D, the symbol of the 99th first main game symbol, which is the final symbol variation in the time shortened game state. When the number of reservations on the first main game side reaches the maximum of 4 during the fluctuation, the time-reduced game state C and the time-reduced game state D are terminated, and the non-time-reduced game state (for example, low-probability low-base state ), and if the time-reduced gaming state E is reached, the second main game is played during the symbol variation of the fifth second main game symbol, which is the final symbol variation of the time-reduced gaming state E. It may be configured to end the time-reduced gaming state E and shift to a non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, low-probability-low base state) when the number of holdings on the side reaches the maximum of four. In addition, at the timing of shifting from the time-reduced gaming state to the non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, the timing when the number of reservations is maximized), the right hitting notification prompts to shoot the game ball to the right gaming area. It is preferable to erase the display of the arrow image object from the effect display device SG. Also, in the final symbol variation (fifth variation) of the second main game symbol in the time shortening game state E, at a predetermined timing after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the symbol variation, the second main game side is held. Furthermore, it may be configured to execute a charge promotion effect (which may be the same effect as the charge promotion effect described in the present embodiment), which is an effect for accumulating. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the percentage of wins in the second main game symbols, so that the state in which the time reduction game state E continues can be further increased.

Acquire auxiliary game content determination random numbers (for example, auxiliary game symbol winning random numbers) in response to game balls entering (flowing in, passing in the case of a gate) into the auxiliary game starting port H10, and obtaining auxiliary game symbol random numbers. It is configured to control the time shortening game state C and the time shortening game states D and E by determining the stop symbol based on the success/failure determination.

If the determination of whether or not the acquired auxiliary game symbol random number is lost, and if one lost symbol is set, a stop symbol is determined for one lost symbol, and if a plurality of lost symbols are set, a plurality of One losing pattern is determined by lottery from among the losing patterns. On the other hand, if the winning determination of the acquired auxiliary game symbol random number is a win and the winning symbol is set to one, the stop symbol is determined for one winning symbol, and there are multiple winning symbols (auxiliary game symbol_ In the case of the setting of win A, auxiliary game symbol_win B, etc.), one winning symbol is determined by lottery from among a plurality of winning symbols. If the winning symbol is the auxiliary game symbol _ winning A, the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d as the predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric accessory is "0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds Closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed", and if the winning symbol is the auxiliary game symbol _ winning B, the second time as the predetermined time related to the open mode of the electric accessory The opening mode of the main game starter electric accessory B11d is "open for 3.0 seconds→close for 0.2 seconds→open for 0.2 seconds→close for 0.2 seconds→open for 0.2 seconds→close". It is configured. When the winning symbol is auxiliary game symbol_win A and the winning symbol is auxiliary game symbol_win B, the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is preferably open for 0.5 seconds→closed.

In the time reduction game state C, the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win A by lottery is set to 99%, and the selection state C is set in which the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win B is set to 1%, and the electric role C30d. By setting the opening mode to "0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed", it is possible to enter the first main game start gate A12. It is possible to create a game state in which it is easy to hit the ball.

In the time reduction game state D, the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win A by lottery is set to 95%, and the selection state D is set in which the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win B is set to 5%, and the electric role C30d is selected. By setting the opening mode to "0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed", it is possible to enter the first main game start gate A12. It is possible to create a game state in which it is easy to hit the ball.

In the time shortening game state E, the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win A by lottery is set to 1%, the ratio of determining the auxiliary game symbol_win B is set to 99%. By setting the opening mode to "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed", it is possible to enter the second main game start gate B12. It is possible to create a game state in which it is easy to hit the ball.

Incidentally, the selection state C, the selection state D, and the selection state E are configured to be determined by winning symbols at the time of becoming a special game.

The selection state C is configured to be selected when the winning symbol in the special game is the 1_4R large symbol 1 and the 1_4R symbol 1.

The selection state D is configured to be selected when the winning symbols in the special game are the 1_4R large symbol 2 and the 2_4R large symbol 2.

In the selection state E, the winning symbols at the time of becoming a special game are 1_4R large symbol 3, 1_10R symbol, 2_4R large symbol 1, 2_4R large symbol 2, 2_10R large symbol, 2_4R symbol 1, and 2_4R symbol. 2. It is configured to be selected when it is the 2_10R symbol. The selection state C, the selection state D, and the selection state E may be configured to be determined by the game state and winning symbols when the special game is entered. For example, when the game state at the time of becoming a special game is a state other than the non-time-reduced game state (time-reduced game state C, time-reduced game state D, time-reduced game state E), any winning pattern Alternatively, the selection state E (time reduction game state E) may be established.

Further, the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern may be determined by lottery according to the game ball entering (flowing in, passing in the case of a gate) into the auxiliary game starting port H10. In this configuration, the stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols are set so as to correspond to the fluctuation mode of the auxiliary game symbols.

For example, in the non-time shortening game state, it is set to select the variation mode 1, the variation mode 2, and the variation mode 3 as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols.

The variation mode 1 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbols are lost symbols, and the variation time is set to be long (for example, 30 seconds).

The variation mode 2 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, the auxiliary game symbol_win A, and the variation time is set to be long (it may be the same as or different from the variation mode 1). , The predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric accessory is configured to be set to, for example, 0.5 seconds (0.5 seconds open→closed) when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off.

Variation mode 3 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, auxiliary game symbol_win B, and the variation time is long (it may be the same as or different from variation mode 1 and variation mode 2). It is set, and the predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric accessory is configured to be set to, for example, 0.5 seconds (open for 0.5 seconds → closed) when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off. Although it is configured to operate the electric accessory in the same operation pattern as the variation mode 2, it may be a different pattern.

In the time shortening game state C, the time shortening game state D, and the time shortening game state E, the variation mode 4, the variation mode 5, and the variation mode 6 are set to be selected as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols.

Variation mode 4 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbols are lost symbols, and the variation time is set shorter than the variation modes 1 to 3 (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Variation mode 5 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, auxiliary game symbol_win A, and the variation time is set to be short (it may be the same as or different from variation mode 4). , the predetermined time related to the opening mode of the electric role product is, for example, "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds Closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed.

The variation mode 6 is a variation mode in which the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol, that is, the auxiliary game symbol_hit B, and the variation time is short (it may be the same as or different from the variation mode 4 and the variation mode 5). It is set, and the predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory is set to, for example, "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed", and the electric accessory is operated in an operation pattern different from the variation mode 5. is configured as

In the time shortening game state C, the ratio of deciding the variation mode 5 by lottery is set to 99%, the ratio of deciding the variation mode 6 is set to 1%, and the selection state C is set. 2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed”, a game state in which it is easy to enter the first main game start port A12. can do.

In the time shortening game state D, the ratio of deciding the variation mode 5 by lottery is set to 95%, the ratio of deciding the variation mode 6 is set to 5%, and the selection state D is set. 0 second open → 0.2 second closed → 0.2 second open → 0.2 second closed → 0.2 second open → closed”, a game state in which it is easy to enter the second main game start port B12. can do.

In the time shortening game state E, the ratio of determining the variation mode 5 by lottery is set to 1%, the percentage of determining the variation mode 6 is set to 99%, and the selection state E is set. 0 second open → 0.2 second closed → 0.2 second open → 0.2 second closed → 0.2 second open → closed”, the game state where it is easy to enter the second main game start port B12. can do.

It should be noted that selection state C, selection state D, and selection state E are configured to be determined by winning symbols when the special game is played.

The selection state C is configured to be selected when the winning symbol in the special game is the 1_4R large symbol 1 and the 1_4R symbol 1.

The selection state D is configured to be selected when the winning symbols in the special game are the 1_4R large symbol 2 and the 2_4R large symbol 2.

In the selection state E, the winning symbols at the time of becoming a special game are 1_4R large symbol 3, 1_10R symbol, 2_4R large symbol 1, 2_4R large symbol 2, 2_10R large symbol, 2_4R symbol 1, and 2_4R symbol. 2. It is configured to be selected when it is the 2_10R symbol. The selection state C, the selection state D, and the selection state E may be configured to be determined by the game state and winning symbols when the special game is entered.

Further, in the non-time-reduced game state, only the variation mode 1 is selected as the variation mode of the auxiliary game symbols, and in the time-reduced game state, the variation mode 5 and the variation mode are selected as the variation modes of the auxiliary game symbols. You may set so that the aspect 6 may be acquired. That is, in the non-time shortening game state, only the winning symbols are selected and the winning symbols are not selected, and in the time shortening gaming state, only the winning symbols are selected and the losing symbols are not selected. It is designed to configure

FIG. 82 shows the display screen during variable standby displayed on the effect display device SG and the display priority. The dashed line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-reduced time game state will be described. Currently, fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation stopped (before transition to the waiting movie described later), "437" is displayed as the first decorative symbol in a stopped state. , The second decoration symbol is similarly displayed as "437" in a stopped state, the second suspended display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second suspended display on the second main game side is displayed as "0". It is displayed, and the pending display for the effect of the change (it is displayed when the first pending display is erased when the change starts, and is displayed until the end or partway through the change ( When the next variation is started even after the display ends, the suspension display for the effect of the variation corresponding to the next variation is displayed)), the first suspension display on the first main game side, the second main game side is not displayed. The display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side are different, and the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side is The number indicating the number of reservations is hollowed out, and the number indicating the number of reservations is not hollowed out in the display mode of the second reservation display on the second main game side. The display priority is as follows: second decorative design>second reserved display>first decorative design. In addition, the display priority may be the second reserved display > second decorative design > first decorative design, and since the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap, the second decoration Design=second reserved display>first decorative design.

Next, the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-shortening game state will be described. Currently, there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side, the fluctuation is stopped, and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds as a specific time) has passed since the fluctuation stop, and the time is not shortened The first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side that were displayed in the variable waiting screen display 1 in the gaming state are not displayed. . In addition, similar to the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time-reduced game state, the suspension display for the effect of the variation, the first suspension display on the first main game side, and the first suspension display on the second main game side are displayed. not Here, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stop, a waiting movie is displayed to indicate that the fluctuation is on standby (variation stop), and the waiting movie uses part of the reach effect. , and information on the right of the character (first element) used in the first decorative pattern is displayed. There are a plurality of types of characters displayed during this standby movie, and they are the same characters (first element) used in each first decorative pattern, but are specific first decorative patterns and second elements. is a first decorative pattern of "7" (for this "7", for example, a first decorative pattern indicating that a special game that triggers a transition to a high-precision high base state by becoming a number double) will be executed , the character (second element) corresponding to the first decorative pattern indicating that the special game with the largest number of rounds is executed by becoming the number double, is the other first decorative pattern and the first decorative pattern. The first decorative pattern with two elements of "6" (for this "6", for example, the first The character (second element) corresponding to the character (second element) that corresponds to the standby movie (Alternatively, the character corresponding to the first decorative pattern whose second element is "6" may be configured not to be displayed in the waiting movie at all).

In addition, in the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time-reduced gaming state or the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the suspension display area for the variation (the place where the suspension for the variation is displayed) Although the configuration has been explained in which the display for showing the status) and the first suspension display area on the first main game side (the display for indicating the location where the suspension is displayed) are not displayed, they may be displayed. For example, each display area may be partitioned as a reserved display area for effecting the change and a first reserved display area on the first main game side. As a result, even during the variable standby (variable stop), it is possible to suggest that the display indicating the upper limit number of the first pending display or the pending display for the effect of the variation is displayed. In addition, in the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-reduced time gaming state, in the same way as (in the same position) as the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-reduced time gaming state, the second decoration symbol, the second pending display (first Main game side, second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first reserved display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the number that has not changed in the first reserved display, but can recognize that the number is not changed in the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in addition to the waiting movie, and the second reserved display. The display may be configured to allow the recognition of unchanged numbers.

Next, the variable standby screen display 1 in the time shortening game state will be described. Currently, there is no suspension on the first main game side and no suspension on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation stopped (before transition to the waiting movie) , the first decorative symbol is displayed in a state of being stopped at "437", the second decorative symbol is similarly displayed in a state of being stopped at "437", and the second pending display on the first main game side is "0". Display, the second reserve display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", "→→ right hit →→" is displayed as the right hitting instruction display, and the suspension display for the effect of the change is displayed, the first main game The first pending display on the side and the first pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. It should be noted that, similarly to the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-shortening game state, the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side are different. , In the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side, the number indicating the pending number is hollowed out, and in the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side, the number indicating the pending number is Not hollowed out. The display priorities are as follows: right-handed instruction display>second decorative design>second reserved display>first decorative design. In addition, the display priority may be right-handed instruction display > second reserved display > second decorative design > first decorative design, and right-handed instruction display is the second decorative design and second reserved display. Since there is no superimposition, it may be right-handed instruction display>second decorative design=second reserved display>first decorative design.

Next, the variable standby screen display 2 in the time shortening game state will be described. Currently, the fluctuation is stopped and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 242 seconds as a specific time) has passed since the fluctuation was stopped, and the first decorative symbol that was displayed in the fluctuation waiting screen display 1 in the time shortening game state, the second 2 Decorative symbols, the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. In addition, similar to the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time-reduced game state, the suspension display for the effect of the variation, the first suspension display on the first main game side, and the first suspension display on the second main game side are displayed. not In addition, similar to the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-reduced time gaming state, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable stop, a standby movie indicating variable standby (variable stop) is displayed. The standby movie is the same as the standby movie displayed in the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-reduced time gaming state.

In addition, in the variable standby screen display 1 in the time shortening game state or the variable standby screen display 2 in the time shortened game state, the suspension display area for the effect of the change (to indicate the place where the suspension for the effect of the change is displayed) display) and the second main game side first suspension display area (display for showing the location where suspension is displayed) are not displayed, but they may be displayed. For example, a display may be performed in which each display area is partitioned as a reserved display area for effecting the change and a first reserved display area on the second main game side. Thus, even during the time shortening game, it is possible to suggest displaying the pending display for effect of the change, and to make it easy to recognize the number of first pending displays on the second main game side. Also, in the variable standby screen display 2 in the time shortened game state, in the same way as the variable standby screen display 1 in the time shortened game state (in the same position), the second decorative pattern, the second pending display (first main game side, second main game side), may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first reserved display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the number that has not changed in the first pending display, but can recognize that it is not changing in the second decorative pattern in addition to the waiting movie, and the number that has not changed in the second pending display. It can be configured to recognize numbers.

In addition to the screen display configuration described above, various screen display configurations are possible. 1, the second holding display on the first main game side and the second holding display on the second main game side are not displayed; If there is no hold on either side and a predetermined period has passed, the variable standby screen display 1 can be shifted to the variable standby screen display 2, but in the time shortening game state, the variable standby screen display 1 is displayed. , Even if there is no suspension on the first main game side and no suspension on the second main game side and a predetermined period of time has passed, the screen display 1 during variable standby does not shift to the screen display 2 during variable standby. good too.

Next, the volume adjustment screen display and the light intensity adjustment screen display will be described with reference to FIG. The dashed line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the volume adjustment in the non-time-reduction game state will be described. In the non-time shortening game state, the volume can be adjusted during the variable standby (variable stop) or during the variable. Volume adjustment is performed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the volume adjustment screen (display indicating the volume, display of the cross button indicating the volume adjustment method, display of the sub-input button indicating to end the volume adjustment screen, display of the image that makes the screen translucent) When the sub-input button SB is operated, the display of the volume adjustment screen ends. If it is in the variable standby (variable stop) state in the non-reduced time gaming state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. , the volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative pattern, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern. As a result, the volume adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display for which visibility is especially desired. If it is fluctuating in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the production holding for the change If there is a display or a hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the volume adjustment screen during the fluctuation in a smaller size than during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). , for example, a simple reduction of the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display indicating volume, display of cross button SB-2 indicating volume adjustment method, sub-input indicating end of volume adjustment screen The display of the button SB and the display of an image that makes the screen semi-transparent may be reduced respectively), only the display indicating the volume may be displayed, or the display indicating the volume and the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method may be displayed. It is good also as only two combinations of. If only the display indicating the volume is used, or only the combination of the display indicating the volume and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method is used, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is fluctuating but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is fluctuating. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative pattern. It should be noted that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during fluctuation, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is as follows: second decorative pattern>second reserved display>volume adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the change). In addition, the display priority is 2nd decorative pattern = 2nd reserved display, 2nd decorative pattern < 2nd reserved display, 1st decorative pattern < 1st reserved display (and reserved display for production of the change), even if good. If a button operation related to volume adjustment (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed during display of the standby movie, the display of the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, the volume adjustment in the time shortening game state will be described. In the time shortening game state, the volume can be adjusted during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) or during the fluctuation. In the time shortening game state, if it is in the variable standby (variable stop), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first main game side, the second reserve display on the second main game side, right hand An instruction display may be displayed, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative pattern, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern. As a result, the volume adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display for which visibility is especially desired. If there is a change in the time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserved display on the first main game side, the second reserved display on the second main game side, and the reserved display for effecting the change If there is a hold, the first hold display on the second main game side and the right-handed instruction display are displayed, and although not shown, during fluctuation, the volume adjustment screen is displayed smaller than during fluctuation standby (variation stop). is preferable, and for example, it may be configured so that the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern do not overlap. For example, a simple reduction of the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display indicating volume, display of cross button SB-2 indicating volume adjustment method, sub-input button indicating to end the volume adjustment screen SB display and the display of an image that makes the screen translucent) may be reduced, or only the display indicating the volume may be displayed, or the display indicating the volume and the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method may be displayed. Only a combination of the two may be used. If only the display indicating the volume is used, or only the combination of the display indicating the volume and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method is used, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is fluctuating but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is fluctuating. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative pattern. It should be noted that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during fluctuation, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priorities are as follows: right-handed instruction display>second decorative pattern>second reserved display>volume adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display>second reserved display>second decorative design, second decorative design>second reserved display>right-handed instruction display, second reserved display>second decorative design>right-handed instruction display , and furthermore, second decorative design=second reserved display, first decorative design<first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation).

Next, the light amount adjustment in the non-shortening game state will be described. In the non-reduced time gaming state, the light amount can be adjusted during the variable standby (variable stop). Light amount adjustment is performed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the light intensity adjustment screen (display indicating the light intensity, display of the cross button indicating the light intensity adjustment method, display of the sub-input button indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen, display of the image that makes the screen translucent) When the sub-input button SB is operated, the display of the light amount adjustment screen ends. If it is in the variable standby (variable stop) state in the non-reduced time gaming state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. , the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. If it is fluctuating in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the production holding for the change If there is a display or a hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the light amount adjustment screen during the fluctuation in a smaller size than during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). For example, a simple reduction of the light intensity adjustment screen during variable standby (variation stop) (display indicating light intensity, display of cross button SB-2 indicating light intensity adjustment method, sub-input indicating termination of light intensity adjustment screen The display of the button SB and the display of an image that makes the screen semi-transparent may be reduced respectively), or only the display indicating the amount of light may be displayed, or the display indicating the amount of light and the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light may be displayed. It is good also as only two combinations of. In the case of displaying only the amount of light, or combining only the display of the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the light amount adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap the first decorative pattern that is changing. As a result, the light amount adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display where the visibility is particularly desired. If it is fluctuating in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the production holding for the change If there is display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and the light quantity adjustment screen is not displayed. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the light intensity can be adjusted even during the fluctuation. It may be configured to display an adjustment screen. The display priority is as follows: second decorative pattern>second reserved display>light amount adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the change). In addition, the display priority is 2nd decorative pattern = 2nd reserved display, 2nd decorative pattern < 2nd reserved display, 1st decorative pattern < 1st reserved display (and reserved display for production of the change), even if good. If a button operation related to light intensity adjustment (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed during display of the standby movie, display of the standby movie is ended and a light intensity adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, light amount adjustment in the time shortening game state will be described. In the time shortening game state, the light amount can be adjusted during the variable standby (variable stop). In the time shortening game state, if it is in the variable standby (variable stop), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first main game side, the second reserve display on the second main game side, right hand An instruction display may be displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the light amount adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative pattern, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern. For example, a simple reduction of the light intensity adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display showing light intensity, display of cross button SB-2 showing light intensity adjustment method, sub-input button showing end of light intensity adjustment screen SB display and the display of an image that makes the screen translucent) may be reduced, or only the display indicating the light amount may be displayed, or the display indicating the light amount and the cross button SB-2 indicating the light amount adjustment method may be displayed. Only a combination of the two may be used. In the case of displaying only the amount of light, or combining only the display of the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the light amount adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap the first decorative pattern that is changing. As a result, the light amount adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display where the visibility is particularly desired. If there is a change in the time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserved display on the first main game side, the second reserved display on the second main game side, and the reserved display for effecting the change If there is a hold, the first hold display on the second main game side and the right-handed instruction display are displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the light intensity can be adjusted even during the fluctuation. It may be configured to display an adjustment screen. The display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display>second decorative pattern>second reserved display>light amount adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display>second reserved display>second decorative design, second decorative design>second reserved display>right-handed instruction display, second reserved display>second decorative design>right-handed instruction display , and furthermore, second decorative design=second reserved display, first decorative design<first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation).

Next, screen display during normal fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. The dashed line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the screen display during normal fluctuation in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, it is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area, the second pending display "2" on the first main game side, and the second on the second main game side. 2 Suspended display "0", Suspended display for the effect of the change, 1st suspended display on the first main game side (2 pieces) are displayed, and the 1st suspended display on the 2nd main game side is displayed. Absent. In addition, in the normal fluctuation screen display in the non-time-reduced game state, when a ball is entered into the second main game start port B10, the first pending display of the second main game side is displayed, and the second main game side second The hold display is counted up (added), and when the fluctuation related to the hold on the second main game side is started, the first hold display on the second main game side is decremented by one, and the second hold display on the second main game side. is counted down (subtracted). Specifically, currently, there are two holds on the first main game side, two first hold displays on the first main game side, "2" on the second hold display on the first main game side, The first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed, the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and a ball is newly entered into the second main game start gate B10. When there is, one first pending display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second pending display on the second main game side is updated from "0" to "1". The display priority is as follows: sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) > second reserved display > main region (variable display of the first decorative pattern, temporary stop display of the first decorative pattern) > reserved display for effecting the change > The first pending display on the first main game side > the first pending display on the second main game side. The display priority may be sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) < second reserved display, sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) = second reserved display, or the main region The display priority of (variation display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to be the lowest among these, and the first suspended display on the first main game side < the second main game 1st pending display on the side, 1st pending display on the 1st main game side = 1st pending display on the 2nd main game side.

Next, the screen display during normal fluctuation in the time reduction game state will be described. Currently, it is fluctuating, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area, the second reserved display "0" on the first main game side, the second on the second main game side 2 Hold display "2", hold display for the effect of the change, first hold display (two pieces) on the second main game side, right-handed instruction display, and first hold on the first main game side display is not shown. In addition, in the normal fluctuation screen display in the time shortening game state, even if a ball is entered into the first main game start port A10, the first holding display on the first main game side is not displayed. The second pending indication is configured to count up. The display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display> sub-area (variation display of the second decorative design)> second reserved display> main area (variation display of the first decorative design, temporary stop display of the first decorative design)> the variation Retained display for effect>First retained display on the second main game side. The display priority may be sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) < second reserved display, sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) = second reserved display, or the main region The display priority of (variation display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to be the lowest among these, and the first pending display on the first main game side may be displayed. , Retaining display for effect of the change> First reserving display on the first main game side> First reserving display on the second main game side, or Reserving display for effecting the change> First reserving on the second main game side Display>The first pending display on the first main game side may be set.

Here, the characteristic configuration shown using FIG. 84 will be supplemented.

In the non-reduced time gaming state (state without electric support state), the first main game side pending display is displayed in the display mode of "●" as the first pending display. On the other hand, in the time-reduced game state (state accompanied by electric power support state), the second main game-side pending display is displayed in the display mode of "heart (painted out)" as the first pending display. In addition, the second pending display is the same regardless of whether it is in the non-time-reduced game state or the time-reduced game state, but the second pending display on the first main game side is "hollowed numbers". This is the display mode, and the second reserved display on the second main game side is in the display mode of "filled numbers". It should be noted that the difference between the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side is indicated not only by hollowing out or filling in, but also by using different colors of numbers, etc. may be configured.

In addition, in the case of the configuration of the start opening (see the fifth embodiment) in which the ball is alternately entered into the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10, the first reservation on the first main game side The display mode of the display and the display mode of the first suspension display on the second main game side may be the same, and the first suspension and It may be configured to display the first pending display on the second main game side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 the ball has entered.

In the main area, the first decorative pattern is displayed from top to bottom (or bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc.) using the entire effect display device SG in the left, middle, and right columns. Moving scroll display (specifically, the first decorative patterns displayed in the main area are sequentially switched while scrolling in the order of 1→2→...→7→8→...1→... is displayed, and temporary stop → fixed stop is performed in the order of left and right center.), but in the sub-region, the second decorative pattern is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device SG in the left column, the middle column, and the right column. It is displayed as if it is fluctuating on the spot (that is, it is scroll-displayed moving from top to bottom (or from bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc.) using the entire effect display device SG. Fluctuation display that appears to move from top to bottom, bottom to top, left to right, or right to left only in some display areas, or rotate horizontally or vertically only in some display areas A variable display of a switching display mode in which the display of the second decorative pattern recognized by the player is switched in the partial display area by rotating half or one time. In addition, the first decorative pattern may be displayed not only by scroll display but also by horizontal rotation or vertical rotation display that is fluctuating on the spot. In addition, the first decorative pattern, which has a role to liven up the production, is configured so that the type of variable display varies depending on the game state and the production stage (for example, the first decorative pattern is a low-probability-low base state or production mode A Although it is a scroll display in the high-precision high base state and production mode B, it is a rotating display), while realizing the diversity of production, the second decorative pattern that has the role of grasping the fluctuation situation and stop situation. Regarding, the type of variable display is the same regardless of the game state or the production stage (for example, the second decorative pattern is the same in the low probability low base state and production mode A, and in the high probability high base state and production mode B Also, it is preferable to use only scroll display or only rotating display).

Also, as shown in FIG. 84, in the non-time-reduced game state, the effect pending display of the change and the first main game-side first pending display are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and in the time-reduced game state, At the lower left of the effect display device SG, the effect pending display of the change and the first pending display on the second main game side are displayed, and the player is currently playing mainly through which starting port. (The first main game start port A10 is the main in the non-time shortened game state, and the second main game start port B10 is the main in the time shortened game state). ' or 'Heart (filled in)'), or the display position of the first reserved display on the first main game side or the first reserved display on the second main game side (in the non-time reduction game state, the first main game side 1 pending display is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and in the time shortening game state, the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG). ing. The display mode and display position of the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are the same regardless of whether it is in the non-reduced time game state or the reduced time game state. is.

Here, the first holding display on the first main game side, the first holding display on the second main game side, and the second holding display on the first main game side that can be displayed during fluctuations in the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state The display patterns of the pending display and the second pending display on the second main game side, including modification examples, will be described in detail below.
(1) First pending display (1-1) In the non-time-reduced game state, only the first pending display on the first main game side is displayed (the first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed) to shorten the time. In the gaming state, only the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-2) In the non-time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the first main game side and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Only 1 pending display is displayed (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-3) In the non-time-reduced game state, only the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed (the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed), and in the time-reduced game state, the first main game display is displayed. A first pending display on the game side and a first pending display on the second main game side are displayed.
(2) Second pending display In both the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state, the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. .

The area where the first pending display on the first main game side, the first pending display on the second main game side, and the pending display for the effect of the change are collectively referred to as the first pending display area, and the first pending display on the first main game side The area where the second pending display and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed may be collectively referred to as the second pending display area. Supplementally, in the second reserved display area, unlike the first reserved display area, display corresponding to the change display of the change, such as the hold display for effecting the change, is not performed. In other words, the second suspension display for indicating that the number is fluctuating is not additionally displayed, and only the number of suspensions (the number of non-fluctuations) is displayed.

The effect pending display of the variation is the same display mode regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side. Specifically, in the non-time-reduced game state, the fluctuation on the first main game side and the fluctuation on the second main game side are larger than the first hold display on the first main game side. If it is displayed as "●" and if it is a time shortened game state, it is from the first hold display on the second main game side, regardless of whether it is a fluctuation on the first main game side or a fluctuation on the second main game side It is displayed as a large "heart (filled)". It should be noted that the suspension display for effect of the change can be displayed only in the case of the change on the first main game side (when the condition for starting the change on the first main game side is satisfied) in the non-time-reduced game state {that is, It is configured so that it is not displayed in the fluctuation of the second main game side (when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game side is satisfied)}, and if it is in the time shortening game state, the fluctuation of the second main game side (the second main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the game side is satisfied) {that is, the fluctuation on the first main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the first main game side is satisfied) is not displayed}. good too. In addition, as an effect according to the degree of expectation of the change, the display mode of the pending display for the effect of the change may be changed. etc.), or the shape may change (default shape (here, "circle" for the first main game, "heart" for the second main game) → ☆, etc.), and the number of display patterns , in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the number of patterns in the variation of the first main game side (for example, the default color, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color patterns in total 6 colors. Hit expectation is The default color < blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow color.) is the number of patterns in the variation of the second main game side (for example, default color, red, rainbow color, total 3 color patterns. Win The degree of expectation is greater than the default color < red < rainbow color. Equipped with a total of 6 color patterns of green, red, and rainbow colors.The hit expectation is the default color<blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow color.) is the number of patterns ( For example, a default color, red, and rainbow colors are provided, and the expected win rate is higher than the default color<red<rainbow color.). Note that the same pattern number relationship may also be adopted for the undigested hold (first hold display).

The display priority of the first pending display and the second pending display is the second pending display>the first pending display, and when both pending displays are displayed even during normal fluctuation, The display priority of the second pending display is set higher than the display priority of the first pending display. For example, when a notice image (displayed on the entire screen such as the next notice), SP reach, the first decorative pattern, etc. are displayed, the second pending display> notice image (or SP reach, the first decorative pattern, etc.) > The first pending display is displayed.

Whether or not the first decorative design and the second decorative design can be overlapped and whether or not the first reserved display and the second reserved display can be overlapped are as follows, including modified examples (Fig. 82, Fig. 84, etc. as necessary ).
(1) Possibility of overlap between the first decorative design and the second decorative design (1-1) During the fluctuation standby (variation stop), the first decorative design and the second decorative design overlap (depending on the display priority, the overlapping part is , the second decorative design is displayed in front of the first decorative design), the stop display positions of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are determined (not shown).
(1-2) During the fluctuation standby (change stop), the first decorative design and the second decorative design do not overlap, and during the fluctuation, the first decorative design and the second decorative design overlap (depending on the display priority, overlap In the part, the stop display positions of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are determined so that the second decorative design is displayed in front of the first decorative design.
For example, if it is a non-time-reduced game state, it may be configured as (1-1), if it is a time-reduced game state, it may be configured as (1-2), and if it is a non-time-reduced game state (1- The configuration of 2) may be used, and the configuration of (1-1) may be used even in the time shortening game state.
(2) Possibility of overlap between the first pending display and the second pending display The first pending display on the main game side) and the second pending display (the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side) do not overlap, the first pending display and the second The display position of the pending display is determined. It should be noted that this is also applicable during the fixed stop.

Whether or not the first decorative design and the first reserved display overlap, Whether or not the second decorative design and the second reserved display overlap, Whether or not the first decorative design and the second reserved display overlap, Whether the second decorative design and the first reserved display Whether duplication is possible or not is as follows.
(A) Non-time-reduced gaming state (1) Possibility of overlap between the first decorative design and the first reserved display During both fluctuation standby (variation stop) and fluctuation, the first decorative design and the first reserved display The display positions of the first decorative design and the first reserved display are determined so as to overlap (the overlapping portion is displayed in front of the first reserved display in the first decorative design due to the display priority).
(2) Whether or not the second decorative design and the second reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the second reserved display A display position of the second pending display is determined.
(3) Possibility of overlap between the first decorative design and the second reserved display The first decorative design and the second reserved display overlap during both fluctuation standby (variation stop) and fluctuation (depending on the display priority, the overlapping part , the display positions of the first decorative pattern and the second reserved display are determined so that the second reserved display is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative design and the first reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the first reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the first reserved display A display position of the first pending display is determined. In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative design and the first reserved display are determined to overlap at least during fluctuation, and similarly in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative design and the second reserved display It is defined to overlap at least during variation, and may or may not be defined to overlap during standby for variation.
(B) Time reduction game state (1) Overlap possibility of the first decorative design and the first reserved display The first decorative design and the first reserved display overlap both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during fluctuation The display positions of the first decorative pattern and the first reserved display are determined so as not to occur. It should be noted that it may be constructed so as to overlap rarely (lower frequency than the non-time-reduced game state) during fluctuation.
(2) Whether or not the second decorative design and the second reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the second reserved display A display position of the second pending display is determined.
(3) Overlapping of the first decorative design and the second reserved display Whether or not the first decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap during both fluctuation standby (variation stop) and fluctuation, so that the first decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap A display position of the second pending display is determined. It should be noted that it may be constructed so as to overlap rarely (lower frequency than the non-time-reduced game state) during fluctuation.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative design and the first reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the first reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the first reserved display A display position of the first pending display is determined.

Next, screen display during SP reach will be described with reference to FIG. First, the screen display 1 during SP reach in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, it is in the SP reach, the variation display of the second decorative pattern in the sub-area, the second reservation display "2" on the first main game side, the second reservation display "0" on the second main game side, the variation The pending display for effect is displayed, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first pending display on the first main game side are not displayed. Needless to say, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (however, up to hold 4), and the second main game start port B10. When the game ball is entered in , the second reservation display on the second main game side is updated (however, up to reservation 4). In addition, the first pending display can be displayed when returning to the normal stage screen (such as the screen of the production stage A) which is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state after the end of the SP reach, but at this time , the first pending display is displayed including the ball entered during the SP reach. Specifically, if the number of holds increases from 2 to 3 during SP reach, the first hold display will not be displayed during SP reach, but three first hold displays will be displayed when returning to the normal stage screen. of. The display priority is as follows: sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern)>second reserved display>reserved display for effect of the change>SP ready-to-win effect.

Next, the screen display 2 during SP reach in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, the SP reach is in progress, the movable accessory YK has moved to the front of the effect display device SG, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-area, and the second suspended display "2" on the first main game side. , the second pending display "0" on the second main game side, the pending display for effecting the change is displayed, the variable display of the first decorative pattern in the main area, and the first pending display on the first main game side are not shown. It should be noted that the suspension display for effecting the change may be configured not to be displayed.

In this way, under certain circumstances {during SP reach, during operation of movable accessories, promotion production (production to incite whether or not to promote from even-numbered patterns, which are non-variable patterns, to odd-numbered patterns, which are probability-variable patterns), error screen display In the middle class}, the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first pending display on the first main game side are not displayed, so that the player can easily visually recognize the SP reach. . It should be noted that even during the SP reach, the first decoration symbol may be displayed in the main area in a variable display or the first holding display on the first main game side may be displayed. In this case, the first decoration in the main area may be displayed. The variable display of the pattern is preferably displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the effect display device SG (almost the same size as the variable display of the second decorative pattern or slightly larger than the variable display of the first decorative pattern), and the main area. By displaying the variable display of the first decorative pattern in , it is possible to show the player the reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4") or the reach pattern (for example, only one "4" is displayed). Become. The display priority is as follows: sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern)>second reserved display>reserved display for effect of the change>liquid crystal effect {effect display (in FIG. 85, the star-shaped movable accessory YK falls It is an effect on the effect display device SG that makes it look as if it is shining upward with the falling position as a reference)}.

Next, updating of the first pending display and the second pending display will be described with reference to FIG. First, the fluctuation is finished, and the fluctuation is stopped with two holdings on the first main game side. Next, a new change on the first main game side has just started, the first pending display on the first main game side begins to shift its display position (shift animation starts), and the second display on the first main game side begins to shift. The hold display is decremented from "2" to "1" immediately after the fluctuation starts. Next, before the shift of the first reservation display on the first main game side ends, a game ball is newly entered into the first main game start port A10, and the first A pending occurrence display (holding occurrence animation) is performed in which the first pending display on the main game side increases by one, and the second pending display on the first main game side immediately changes from "1" to " 2”.

Here, the characteristic configuration shown using FIG. 86 is supplemented.

When a new hold occurs (when a game ball newly enters the starting hole), the execution time (for example, 1000 ms) of the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) of the first hold display {from the lower part of the effect display device SG It is an effect that the hold gradually appears and is displayed in a fixed position (the place where the Nth hold is displayed), and the time from the start of appearance to the completion of display is 1000 ms} is the update time of the second hold display ( addition time and subtraction time, which are configured to be longer than, for example, 100 ms). Also, the execution time (for example, 1500 ms) of the shift display (shift animation) of the first hold display {The hold displayed in the place where the Nth hold is displayed moves, and the N-1th It moves to the place where the suspension is displayed, and then it is displayed in a fixed position (the place where the N-1th suspension is displayed), and the time from the start of movement to the completion of display (completed movement) is 1500 ms} is configured to be longer than the update time of the second pending display. Furthermore, the update time of the second pending display is shorter than the variable fixed time (for example, the fixed variable time of the first main game symbol is 500 ms, the fixed variable time of the second main game symbol is 300 ms), and the shortest variation. It is configured to be shorter than the time (3000 ms in this embodiment).

Regarding the fixed variable time, the fixed variable time for the first main game symbols was set to 500 ms, and the fixed variable time for the second main game symbols was set to 300 ms. The fixed time and the variable fixed time of the second main game pattern may be the same time, or each variable fixed time (for example, 500 ms for the non-time-reduced game state and 300 ms for the time-reduced game state) is predetermined according to the game state. may have been In addition, it may be set so that the variation fixing time of the symbol variation is different according to the number of reservations, and in this case, when the symbol variation is started in a situation where there are 2 to 4 reservations, or when the fixed stop is made, the first main game side 500 ms when there is a hold or a hold on the second main game It is preferable to set the variable fixed time to 0 ms when there is also no side hold, but the variable fixed time is not limited to this time. In addition, the fixed variable time of the first decorative symbols and the fixed fixed time of the second decorative symbols are preferably set so as to match the fixed fixed time of the first main game symbols and the fixed fixed time of the second main game symbols. However, the fixed variable time may be different from the fixed variable time of the first main game symbols and the fixed variable time of the second main game symbols.

Immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the first pending display can simultaneously (overlap) display the shift display (shift animation) and the pending occurring display (suspended occurring animation) {that is, the first pending display can display the pending When execution of a shift indication (shift animation) is started while an occurrence indication (pending occurrence animation) is being executed, the pending occurrence indication (pending occurrence animation) and the Shift display (shift animation) can be executed at the same time, and execution of pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) is started during execution of shift display (shift animation), shift display (shift animation ) can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the shift display (shift animation) and pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation). }, but it is impossible to display subtraction and addition at the same time in the second pending display. It will happen. When the number of reservations increases immediately before the start of fluctuation and the fluctuation starts, the second reservation display performs the display of addition (due to the start of fluctuation) and then the display of subtraction (due to the start of fluctuation). It should be noted that both subtraction and addition require the time required for this update display (for example, updating from "2" to "1" or from "1" to "2") (because the number display switches) required time) is 100 ms.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the relationship between the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of "(1) blue hold change" will be described. First, it is in a fluctuation stop state in a state where there are four holds. Next, a change is started, and the number of holds becomes 4 due to the new ball entry, and further, the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the new ball entry is blue hold. Next, the change just before the blue hold ends, and the change just before is a loss ("861"), and the change is stopped. Next, a variation corresponding to Blue Suspension is started, and Blue Suspension is displayed as a production suspension display (blue) for the variation. In addition, when the fluctuation starts with blue reservation, a shorter fluctuation time is likely to be selected than when the fluctuation is started with red reservation (in other words, a fluctuation time with a low expectation of winning is likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, it is 7 reach, and 7 reach is more likely to hit (big hit, small hit) than other reach (example: 2 reach)) (The second decorative pattern does not become a specific reach mode, and continues to display fluctuation), but when the fluctuation starts with blue reservation, when the fluctuation starts with red reservation, which will be described later The probability of becoming a specific reach mode is lower than Next, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) that is a win, but when the fluctuation starts with blue reservation, it fluctuates with red reservation. It has a lower probability of being in a particular final appearance than it is in the beginning. Next, the case of "(2) red hold change" will be described. The basic flow is the same as "(1) blue pending change", but the display mode of the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) is different. First, it is in a fluctuation stop state in a state where there are four holds. Next, a change is started, and the number of suspensions becomes 4 due to the new entry, and further, the display mode of the first suspension display corresponding to the new entry is red suspension. Next, the change immediately before the red hold ends, and the change immediately before is a loss ("861"), and the change is stopped. Next, a variation corresponding to Red Suspension is started, and Red Suspension is displayed as a production suspension display (red) for the variation. In addition, when the fluctuation starts with red holding, a longer fluctuation time is likely to be selected than when the fluctuation starts with blue holding (in other words, a fluctuation time with a high degree of expectation for winning is likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern does not have a specific reach mode and continues to display variable), but is red reserved. When the change starts, the probability of a specific reach state is higher than when the change starts with blue pending. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hits is displayed, but when the fluctuation starts with red reservation, it changes with blue reservation The probability of being in a particular final display mode is higher than in the case of starting. As an example, the probability of reaching reach with blue reservation is 90% of the variation related to blue reservation, the probability of reaching reach with red reservation is 99% of the variation related to red reservation, and the difference is 9% is. In addition, the probability of becoming a specific reach mode (eg, 7 reach) in blue retention is 5% in the case of reach due to fluctuations related to blue retention, and a specific reach mode in red retention (eg, 7 reach) The probability of becoming a reach is 30% when it becomes a reach due to a change related to red holding. The difference is 25%. In this way, the probability of reaching a reach in both blue hold and red hold is set high and the difference between them is set not to be large, and the probability of a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) is set not to be so high. In addition, it is desirable that the difference between them should be relatively large. As a result, while the expectation that the reach will be achieved by changing the hold is secured to some extent, by setting a difference in the degree of expectation for the subsequent development (what number will reach the reach), the first hold display The content suggested by the difference in display mode can be complicated. Note that these numerical values (percentages) are examples and can be changed as appropriate, but it is desirable to have such a magnitude relationship.

In addition, when the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the second decorative pattern may also be in the ready-to-reach mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of "(1) the number of reservations is 1" will be described. First, it is in a state of suspension with one hold. Then the fluctuation is started. In addition, when the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations of 1, a longer fluctuation time is likely to be selected than when the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations of 4, which will be described later. Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern does not have a specific reach mode and continues the variable display), but the specific reach The probability of becoming a mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) is displayed in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hits, but the probability of becoming a specific final display mode is regardless of the number of reservations. They are the same or slightly different. Next, the case of "(2) the number of reservations is 4" will be described. The flow at the time of fluctuation is the same as "(1) The number of reservations 1", so it is omitted, but when the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations 4, a shorter fluctuation time is selected than when the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations 1. easy to be In addition, as described in the description of "(1) number of reservations 1", the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern has a specific reach mode) However, the probability of becoming a specific reach mode is the same or a slight difference regardless of the number of reservations, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hits. Although the final display mode (here, 7 sets) is displayed, the probability of becoming a specific final display mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, when the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the second decorative pattern may also be in the ready-to-reach mode.

Next, the relationship between the game state and the final display mode will be described with reference to FIG. First, the non-time reduction game state will be described. First, it is in a state of suspension with one hold. Next, the variation is started, the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state (here, 7 ready-to-win) (the second decorative pattern is not in the ready-to-reach state and continues the variable display), and finally, the first decoration. Although the design and the second decorative design are the final display mode indicating the winning mode, as the final display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design, in addition to the design matching (for example, "777"), the latent mode It is configured so that a mode transition pattern (for example, a "hidden" pattern) indicating transition to the mode can be displayed. Next, the time reduction game state will be explained. Description of the flow of variation is omitted because it is the same as the non-time-reduced game state. In the time shortening game state, the final display mode indicating the winning mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is only pattern matching (for example, "777"), and the mode transition pattern indicating transition to the hiding mode. is configured not to be displayed. That is, the number of candidates for the final display mode is larger in the non-reduced time game state than in the reduced time game state for both the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols. By configuring in this way, the hit from the non-time-reduced game state includes the transition to the latent mode to provide various game characteristics, and the hit from the time-reduced game state does not include the transition to the latent mode. , the game state can be recognized by the player. Furthermore, after a specific reach mode (here again, 7 reach with high expectations is desirable), there are "767", "787", and "777" in the non-reduced time game state, and as an example, each appears 1/3 On the other hand, there are "787" and "777" in the time shortened game state, and as an example, it is configured to appear 1/2 each, and in the time shortened game state, the reach is 7 by lowering the probability of being out. In this case, it is possible to restrict the medium pattern from coming off without reaching 7, so that the degree of expectation can be raised more than in the non-time shortening game state.

In the non-reduced time gaming state, as the final display mode indicating the winning mode, the first decoration pattern can display a mode transition pattern indicating transition to the hiding mode, but the second decoration pattern can display the first decoration. The mode transition pattern displayed in the pattern may not be displayed, and it may be configured to indicate that the transition to the latent mode is performed in a different final display mode. In addition, it may be configured to display a combination of odd-numbered symbols or a combination of even-numbered symbols, and furthermore, it may be configured so that the odd-numbered symbol combination has a higher probability of being in the probability fluctuation state in the latent mode than the even-numbered symbol combination. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the relationship between the game state and the warning display for hitting (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display) will be described. First, the display of the hitting warning in the non-reduced time game state will be described. First, it is in a state where there is one hold on the first main game side and the fluctuation is stopped. Here, there is no display showing how to hit the player. Next, when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the first pending display on the second main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are updated, and furthermore, a left-handed warning is given. The display is performed until the end condition (for example, 10 seconds, the ball is entered into the first main game start gate A10, etc.) is satisfied, and a warning is given by voice along with the left-handed warning display (for example, "Left-handed please” x 3 times). The left-handed warning display can be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed at a position where the player can easily recognize it, but it overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the first reserved display, and the second reserved display. configured to not be displayed. It should be noted that even if the ball is entered in the first main game start gate A10 in the non-time-reduced game state, and the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side are updated, it is left-handed. No warning is displayed. Next, a description will be given of how to play warning display in the time-reduced game state. First, there is one hold on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped. Here, a right hitting instruction display (“→→ right hitting→→”), which is a display showing the player how to hit, is displayed. The right hitting instruction display (“→→ right hitting →→”) is displayed in the time shortening game state, and does not depend on the update display of the number of reservations (for example, addition of the second reservation display), and shortens the time. If it is in a game state, it will be continuously displayed. Next, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second pending display on the first main game side is updated (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed), and further. , The right-handed warning display is performed until the end condition (for example, entering the ball in the second main game start port B10, etc.) is satisfied, and a warning is given by voice together with the right-handed warning display (for example, "Right-handed please"). The right-handed warning display can be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed at a position where the player can easily recognize it, but it overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the first reserved display, and the second reserved display. configured to not be displayed. Note that even if a ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state and the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are updated, a right-handed warning is issued. No display is performed. In addition, without displaying the hitting method warning display (left hitting warning display, right hitting warning display) on the effect display device SG, an audio warning ("Please hit right", "Please hit left") is output. It may be configured to be

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability of displaying pseudo consecutive symbols (re-change probability) will be described. First, the flow of production will be explained using the case of "blue hold change -> re-change (pseudo-continue)". First, there are three reserves on the first main game side, and the first reserve display is displayed in blue reserve, and is in a change stop state. Next, a change due to blue suspension is started (blue is displayed as a suspension display for the effect of the variation), and with "6" on the left column and "7" on the right column, a pseudo continuous suggestion As an advance notice, a pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol (here, translucent "NEXT") in which a pseudo-continuous symbol (here, non-transparent "NEXT") to be described later is translucent is displayed on the effect display device SG from top to bottom. is displayed by scrolling to Next, a pseudo-run suggestive symbol is scroll-displayed to approximately the center of the effect display device SG, and a pseudo-run symbol indicating that a pseudo-run will occur is displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbols have stopped, next, all symbol rows, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column, are re-flushed. ing. As the first decorative symbols, pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols can be displayed, but as the second decorative symbols, pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed. Next, the display mode of the look-ahead effect (hold change effect) (in this example, blue hold change, red hold change) and the probability of displaying pseudo consecutive symbols will be described. As described above, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed, a pseudo-continuous pattern that changes again occurs. Well, for example, with blue reserves with low expectations of winning, the probability of recurrence (probability of pseudo-runs) is low, and with red reserves with high expectations of winning, the probability of recurrence is high (that is, The probability of re-fluctuation may be configured as follows: red hold>blue hold). In the above description, the case where the pseudo-continuous suggesting symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed from the display where the left symbol and the right symbol are not the same (not reachable) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed. In addition to the configuration in which the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed from the same reach display, and the configuration in which the first decorative symbol can be re-varied (pseudo-continuous), the second decorative symbol is also re-variable (pseudo-continuous). ) possible configuration, a configuration in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is a specific symbol (for example, "7"), and the symbol columns in which the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed are the left column and the right column. There may be. Further, the pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern is displayed at a predetermined position {for example, the central part of the medium pattern row (approximately in the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.} without scrolling display. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-run) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-run symbol is configured to be scrolled and displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). You can

Next, using FIG. 92, the probability that the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed during the look-ahead effect display (re-variation probability) and the trigger variation (variation related to the hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect) The relationship between the probability of symbol display (re-change probability) will be described. First, it is in a state of suspension of fluctuation with two holds. Next, the change is started, and the background is displayed in translucent black, which is the highly anticipated display mode of the look-ahead effect. In this way, when the high-expectation display mode of the look-ahead effect is displayed, the pseudo-suggestive symbols and the pseudo-suggestive symbols may not be displayed. may be displayed, but with a low probability. Next, the background is continuously displayed in translucent black, and the fluctuation is stopped. Then the trigger variation is started and the background is the normal background (not translucent black). Next, in a state in which "6" is displayed in the left column and "7" is displayed in the right column, pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols are displayed by scrolling from top to bottom on the effect display device SG. Next, the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol is scroll-displayed to substantially the center of the effect display device SG, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed substantially in the center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbols have stopped, next, all symbol rows, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column, are re-flushed. ing. In this way, in the change related to the hold before the change related to the hold that triggered the occurrence of the look-ahead effect (so-called trigger change), the display mode of the look-ahead effect is a highly expected display mode (here, a translucent black background) can be displayed, but the pseudo-continuous pattern is not displayed and re-variation (pseudo-continuous) does not occur, or when the look-ahead effect display mode is a high-expectation display mode, the look-ahead effect may be configured so that the probability of re-variation (pseudo-run) occurring due to the pseudo-running pattern being displayed is lower than when the display mode is low expectation, and in the trigger variation, the high expectation of the look-ahead effect Since the display mode of the degree cannot be displayed and the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol can be displayed, a re-variation (pseudo-continuous) may occur, or the pseudo-continuous change may occur more than the variation related to the hold before the trigger variation. It may be configured such that the pattern is displayed and the probability of occurrence of re-variation (pseudo-run) increases. Further, the pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern is displayed at a predetermined position {for example, the central part of the medium pattern row (approximately in the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.} without scrolling display. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-run) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-run symbol is configured to be scrolled and displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). You can

Next, referring to FIG. 93, decorative patterns after power off and after power off (if RAM is not cleared, i.e., S1002→S1008→S1010→S1012→S1014→... in FIG. 6). I will explain the relationship between First, (A) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage A (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, after the power is turned off, stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and ``8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)'' is displayed, just like before the power was turned off. there is The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before or after the power is turned off, etc. Here, "861" is displayed. Next, (B) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage B (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, after the power is turned off, Stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. there is The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, (C), which is a modification of (A), will be described. First, it is staying in stage A (during suspension of fluctuation), and the first decoration pattern is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, when the power is restored from the power interruption, the stage A set as the default stage is displayed. , 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)" are displayed. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. In this case, only the first decorative pattern is changed. It returns with the default display of the pattern of "2 (ally), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)".

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the relationship between the decorative designs after power-off and after power-off recovery (in the case of RAM clear; S1002→S1004→S1006→ . . . in FIG. 6) will be described. First, (A) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage A (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, the RAM is cleared to recover from the power failure, and stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. , 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)”. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before or after the power is turned off, etc. Here, "331" is displayed. Next, (B) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage B (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, the RAM is cleared to recover from the power failure, and stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. ), 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)”. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "331" in numerals.

Thus, when the RAM is cleared (RAM is cleared and the power is restored), a predetermined display mode (here, stage A , the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are both "331"), which makes it easier for the player, game staff, etc. to grasp that the RAM has been cleared.

It should be noted that the default display of the first decoration pattern "3 (penguin), 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)" when the RAM is cleared may be changed to a display mode that can be displayed only when the RAM is cleared, or during a normal game. However, for example, it may be configured to display as a premium effect in which a win (big win, small win) is almost guaranteed. Also, the display mode when the RAM is cleared is set to the same display mode as the default display mode when the power is restored (the same display mode as in (C) of FIG. 93), and when the RAM is cleared, the first decoration pattern is changed to "2 ( Ally), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)", and the second decorative pattern may be displayed as a number "246".

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, reach voice, which is an effect at the time of reach (announcement that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by the sound generated when reach is established) and the probability of displaying pseudo consecutive symbols (probability of recurrence) I will explain the relationship between In addition, the expected hit rate of reach voice is reach < chance < development < super hot. In addition, it should be supplemented in advance that this figure explains the probability of re-fluctuation due to the reach voice when the reach is established in the fluctuation that develops into a predetermined SP reach after the reach is established. First, (A) will be explained. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, fluctuation is started, reach is established, and the sound of "reach" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern, is displayed substantially in the center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "reach" is generated when the reach is established, the re-fluctuation probability is set to be high. Next, (B) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the sound of "chance" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern, is displayed substantially in the center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "chance" is generated when the reach is established, the re-fluctuation probability is set to middle. Next, (C) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the sound of "development" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" is not displayed on the effect display device SG, but develops into a super ready-to-win effect, and the super ready-to-win effect is displayed. In this way, when the ready-to-win state is established and the "development" ready-to-win voice is generated, the probability of re-fluctuation is 0, and the super ready-to-win effect is directly developed without re-fluctuation. Next, (D) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "Gekiatsu" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern, is displayed substantially in the center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "very hot" is generated when the reach is established, the re-fluctuation probability is set to be low.

In this way, the more reach voices with high expectations for winning, the lower the probability of re-fluctuation (pseudo-run), but some of the reach voices with high expectations for hitting occur It is configured so that re-fluctuations (pseudo continuations) do not occur in the case of (here, "development" reach voice). In addition, even if some reach voices (for example, "development" reach voices) occur among the reach voices with high hit expectations, they are configured so that re-fluctuations (pseudo consecutive) occur, When some reach voices (e.g. "development" reach voices) occur, configure the re-change probability to be set high (e.g. higher re-change probability than when "chance") may

In other words, the hit expectation by the reach voice is reach < chance < development < super hot, and the probability of re-fluctuation (pseudo consecutive) by the reach voice is
(1) development (including non-occurrence)<extremely hot<chance<reach (2) extremely hot<chance<development≤reach, it is possible to configure an order different from the hit expectation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the display mode of decorative symbols in the all-rotation effect will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Then the fluctuations start and reach. Next, the characters "Full rotation" are displayed in the approximate center of the effect display device SG, and the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative symbols are aligned (for example, "777" or "888 ” etc.), scrolling display is performed at a slower speed than normal fluctuations (for example, the state in the second figure). As described above, the first decorative symbols can be scroll-displayed in a state in which the patterns are aligned. , the left, middle, and right columns are individually variably displayed in a state in which the patterns are not aligned, and the speed does not slow down (=maintains a constant speed). Next, substantially at the same time as the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a state in which only numbers are aligned. It should be noted that the second decorative pattern may also be variably displayed in a state in which the patterns are aligned (for example, "777" or "888") so as to be synchronized with the first decorative pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the variation mode of decorative symbols for each stage will be described. First, stage A will be described. In stage A, when the variation starts, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a scroll display that moves from top to bottom in the display area of the effect display device SG, and the second decorative pattern is displayed on the spot (the second A variable display is performed by a scroll display that appears to move from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display area). Next, stage B will be described. In stage B, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative pattern is horizontally rotated on the spot to change the pattern. A variable display is performed by a scroll display that appears to move from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display area). As described above, since the first decorative pattern is a pattern that is easy for the player to visually recognize, the player does not become bored by changing the variation mode depending on the stage, and the second decorative pattern is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Since it is a pattern, it is displayed in the same variation mode without changing the variation mode depending on the stage. Here, stage A is a stage corresponding to a non-time-reduced gaming state (or non-time-reduced gaming state and non-probability variable gaming state), stage B is a time-reduced gaming state (or time-reduced gaming state and probability variable gaming state), or both stage A and stage B are stages corresponding to non-time-reduced gaming state (or non-time-reduced gaming state and non-probability variable gaming state), It may be configured such that transition from stage A to stage B is possible. Also, the stage may be referred to as a production mode.

In addition, scroll display in which the display area of the effect display device SG moves from top to bottom, scroll display in which the display area of the effect display device SG moves from right to left, and variable display in which the pattern is changed by rotating horizontally on the spot , etc. may be referred to as a variable display format, that is, a variable display format in which the display area of the effect display device SG is scrolled from top to bottom, and a variable display in which the pattern is changed by rotating horizontally on the spot. The variable display format is different from the variable display format that executes .

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the display contents of the decorative symbols during variation will be described. First, (A) will be described. (A) is a diagram relating to the display of the first decorative design and the second decorative design in the fluctuation pattern to be a reach. First, at stage B, fluctuation is stopped. Next, the variation is started, and the pattern rows of the left, middle and right columns of the first decorative pattern are varied in a variation mode in which the pattern is changed by rotating horizontally, and the pattern of the second decorative pattern is changed. In each of the left, middle, and right symbol columns, the symbols fluctuate in a vertical scrolling manner on the spot. In each pattern row of the first decorative pattern, the patterns are regularly changed in order of "1→2→3→...→7→8→1→...", and in the second decorative pattern, No matter what the variation of the first decoration pattern is, the predetermined pattern variation is uniformly performed, and is ``275''→“864”→“387”→“641”→“728”→“413”. →“156”→“532”→“275”→ . Next, at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established at "7" in the first decorative symbol, and at the timing when the fluctuating "6" is positioned in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). , "275" is positioned within the sub-region as the second decorative symbol that is fluctuating. In addition, in the second decorative pattern, the patterns in the left row and the right row are different, and reach is not established.

Next, (B) will be described. (B) is a diagram relating to the display of the first decorative design and the second decorative design in a variation pattern that does not result in a reach but a loss. First, at stage B, fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and in each of the left, middle, and right pattern rows of the first decorative pattern, the pattern is changed by rotating horizontally (high-speed fluctuation). 2. In each of the left, middle, and right pattern rows of the decorative pattern, the patterns are fluctuated in a fluctuating mode of vertical scrolling on the spot. Next, it is the timing just before the left column stops. At this time (for a moment), "868" is displayed (however, since the right symbol is fluctuating at high speed, it is not a ready-to-win). The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at normal speed (the second decorative pattern fluctuates only at almost normal speed. It may be configured to fluctuate at low speed during full rotation production), at this time (for a moment However), "864" is displayed. Next, it is time to stop the left column, the left column of the first decorative pattern is stopped (temporarily stopped), the middle and right columns of the first decorative pattern are in high speed fluctuation, and at this time (in an instant ), but "168" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "387" is displayed. Next, it is the timing just before the stop of the right column. , and the middle row is in the process of high-speed fluctuation, and at this time (for a moment), "165" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "641" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing of the right pattern. The middle row is in the process of high-speed fluctuation, and at this time (for a moment), "166" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "728" is displayed. Next, it is the timing just before the end of the variable time, "1" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column of the first decorative pattern, and "6" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right column, The middle row is during low speed fluctuation, and "116" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at normal speed, and "413" is displayed. Next, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, a fluctuation stop command is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S to indicate the end of the fluctuation time (also for stopping display of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern), Both the first decorative design and the second decorative design stop changing (fixed stop) at "126".

In the first decorative pattern, from just before the stop (temporary stop) of the left and right columns to stop (temporary stop), or from just before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) to the fluctuation stop (fixed stop), The pattern is changed in the order that is arranged continuously in advance and the fluctuation is stopped (fixed stop), but in the second decorative pattern, the fluctuation is changed from just before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) to the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) The pattern displayed immediately before the stop (fixed stop) is changed to the final stop pattern in an instant, and the variation stops (fixed stop). In this example, in the first decorative pattern, from just before the left column stop (temporary stop) to the left column stop (temporary stop), the left column is changed to "8 → 1", and the right column stop ( Temporary stop) to the right column stop (temporary stop), the right column is changed from "5 to 6", and from just before the fluctuation stop (definite stop) to the fluctuation stop The columns are changed from "1 to 2". In the second decorative pattern, since it continues to fluctuate at the normal speed until the fluctuation stops, the pattern displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) is instantly changed to the final stop symbol "126". , the left column is changed to "3→1", the middle column is changed to "6→2", and the right column is changed to "2→6". However, since the patterns are displayed at random during the fluctuation of the second decorative pattern, the pattern displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (determined stop) and the final stop pattern may coincidentally continue.

In addition, the pattern arrangement pattern of the second decorative pattern may be regular and continuous. ·” may be displayed, but in this case, the symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right columns are displayed differently. Specifically, if it is a specification to display with one shift, the left column starts with "1" and is "1 → 2 → 3 → ...", and the middle column starts with "2" and is "2 → 3 → 4". →...", the right column starts with "3" and changes like "3→4→5→...", and changes to the final stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop (fixed stop).

Thus, in the first decorative pattern, the pattern displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the pattern (final stop pattern) displayed at the time of fluctuation stop (fixed stop) are continuous or continuous. In many cases, in the second decorative pattern, the pattern displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the pattern (final stop pattern) displayed at the time of stopping the fluctuation (fixed stop) are not continuous or are not continuous. There are many things.

Next, the relationship between the pseudo-continuous symbols, the developmental symbols, and the pseudo-continuous symbols and the developmental symbols will be described. In the following description, the configuration for displaying the first decorative pattern, the first reserved display, etc. during super reach is shown, but as described above, the first decorative pattern, the first reserved display, etc. are displayed during super reach. A configuration in which no display is made may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 99 is an image diagram showing the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design when re-fluctuation is executed. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped at "861". The first decorative design is composed of characters and numerical designs, and the second decorative design is composed only of numerical designs. Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern fluctuation. Next, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern both display "6" in the left pattern and the right pattern to form a reach, and further, in the main area, re-variation (for example, pseudo-continuous variation) is performed. Translucent "NEXT" symbols ("re-variation suggestive symbol", "pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol (pseudo-continuous suggestive effect)") suggesting whether or not to continue are displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the liquid crystal screen. Next, when the re-fluctuation is executed, the non-transmissive "NEXT" pattern (also called "re-fluctuation pattern" or "pseudo-continuous pattern") is placed approximately in the center of the liquid crystal screen instead of the translucent "NEXT" pattern. Is displayed. At this time, no pattern suggesting re-change is displayed in the sub-region. In the main area, after the non-transparent "NEXT" pattern is displayed, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start to change again. The stop situation is also called “temporary stop”). At this time, since the number of reservations is still 3, it can be seen that one symbol variation is shown as if the symbol is varied a plurality of times. Next, in the symbol variation performed again, the left symbol and the right symbol form a reach again with "7", and then execute the super reach effect, and since the variation was a loss, the first decorative symbol, the second Both of the decorative symbols are determined and stopped at a reach-losing symbol ("717") that is not double. In addition, during the Super Reach effect, the battle effect of friendly characters and enemy characters is displayed in the center of the LCD screen, so even if it is the first decoration pattern, only the number pattern is displayed in small size in the upper right corner of the screen ( Also referred to as a "retreat display mode"), the player is made to pay attention to the battle performance, and after the battle performance is completed, decoration patterns composed of characters and number patterns are displayed in the same manner as at the start of variation. It should be noted that the pseudo consecutive suggestive symbols are displayed at a predetermined position {for example, the central part of the medium pattern row (approximately in the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.} without being scrolled. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-run) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-run symbol is configured to be scrolled and displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). You can

Next, FIG. 100 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific pattern is displayed and a super ready-to-win effect is produced. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern fluctuation. Next, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern have "6" displayed on the left and right patterns to form a reach, and furthermore, in the main area, a specific pattern ( After the "development" or "development!!!", which is also called a development pattern, is displayed, the super ready-to-win effect is executed. It should be noted that when the specific symbols are displayed in the main area, the symbols indicating that the super ready-to-win effect will develop are not displayed in the sub-area. Also, "development" and "development!!!" are different symbols, but even if either one is displayed, the same development destination, super ready-to-win effect, can be executed. In addition, the degree of expectation to win is different between "development" and "development !!!", and when "development !!!" Big hit, small hit) Expectations are high. In addition, multiple types of super reach effects are provided, for example, super reach effects with different characters have different expectations of winning, and super reach effects are configured in multiple stages such as the first half of super reach and the latter half of super reach. As a development pattern for super reach production, not only a pattern that goes through the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach, but also a pattern that displays the second half of super reach without going through the first half of super reach is provided. good too. Therefore, when "development" or "development!!!" The hit (big hit, small hit) expectation is different in ("development" → super reach production A and "development !!!" → super reach production A, the hit (big hit, small hit) expectation is different). It is possible to Also, in the case where the first half of Super Reach and the second half of Super Reach are displayed, the first half of Super Reach is displayed when "Development" is displayed and when "Development!!!" is displayed. However, it is also possible to configure so that the ratio of the second half of the super reach is different. Of course, depending on the type of development pattern (“development”, “development !!!”, etc.), the possibility of developing into a super reach with high expectations for winning (big hit, small hit) among multiple types of super reach may be configured. In addition, low expectations with relatively low expectations for hits (big hits, small wins) Super reach (for example, super reach performance by Kirin, which will be described later) and high expectations with relatively high expectations for hits (big hits, small wins) It is good also as composition which each has multiple super reach (for example, battle production which is super reach production).

As a supplement, here, the first decorative pattern is composed of the second element (for example, numbers) and the first element (for example, characters) at the time of start of fluctuation, at the time of stop of fluctuation, and before the development of super reach. However, under certain circumstances caused by the production pattern (for example, during super reach, during movable role movement, during variable promotion production, during error screen display.Here is super reach.) Only the second element (number) consists of

Next, FIG. 101 is an image diagram showing a display transition when advanced symbols are displayed corresponding to the advance notice type and a super ready-to-win effect is produced. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Here, the notice display during the pattern change ("comment notice" that suggests the expectation of the hit (big hit, small hit) with letters in the oval frame, and the production that suggests the expectation of the hit (big hit, small hit) A "timer notice" that displays the time until the display is displayed, and a "next notice" that indicates that the change will result in super reach are performed. First, when "chance", which is a "comment notice", is displayed, next, a specific symbol "development" indicating development to a super ready-to-win effect is displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. On the other hand, when "00:10:00" (a display indicating that some kind of effect will occur in 10 seconds), which is a "timer notice", is displayed, it is a specific symbol indicating that the super ready-to-win effect will develop. After "Development!!!" is displayed, a super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when "next time SP ready-to-win", which is "next time notice", is displayed, the specific pattern is not displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. In this way, "development" is displayed after "comment notice", "development!!!" is displayed after "timer notice", and specific symbols are not displayed after "next notice". is done. It should be noted that, here, it is assumed that "development" is displayed after "comment notice" and "development!!!" is displayed after "timer notice", respectively, but this is not the case. "Development!!!" can be displayed after "Comment notice" and "Timer notice" can be followed by "Development!!!" may be higher than the percentage of "timer notice" followed by "expansion!!!" The rate at which "development" is displayed after is high. In addition, there is a difference in the expectation of winning (big hit, small win) between "development" and "development!!!" There is a difference in the degree of expectation for winning (big hit, small hit) for "comment notice", "timer notice", and "next notice". It's becoming

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 35, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be employed, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 102 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super ready-to-win effect is produced when different display modes are performed for the same advance notice type. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Here, a notice is displayed during the pattern change {“Comment notice” that indicates the degree of expectation of winning (big hit, small win) with letters in the oval frame (“Chance” and “Gekietsu!!” are both comment notices )} is performed. First, when "chance" is displayed, next, "development", which is a specific pattern indicating that the super ready-to-win effect will develop, is displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. On the other hand, when "Super heat!!" is displayed, the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the specific symbol "development!!!" is displayed to indicate that the super ready-to-win effect will develop. In this way, "chance" is associated with "development", and "very hot!!" is associated with "development!!!". It should be noted that here, it is assumed that "chance" is associated with "development", and that "hot heat!!" is associated with "development!!!", respectively. It is not limited, and it is configured so that "development!!!" can be displayed after "chance" and "development" can be displayed after "hot heat!!", and "development!!!" can be displayed after "chance". The percentage of "development!!!" displayed after "hot heat!!" The percentage of “development” displayed after “chance” may be higher than “chance”. In addition, as mentioned above, there is a difference in expectations between "development" and "development!!!" ) There is a difference in the degree of expectation.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 35, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be adopted, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 103 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a different look-ahead effect is performed and a super ready-to-win effect is obtained. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, the first pending display changes to blue and the decoration pattern is stopped at "861". Next, in the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension (the suspension that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect. Here, the blue suspension display.), "development" is displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when the pattern combination of the decorative symbols at the time of stoppage of the variation is a chance number look-ahead consecutive number (here, "123"), "Development!!!" is displayed in the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension. , a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. In addition, when the chance look-ahead occurs, a special effect is generated around the fixed and stopped first decorative pattern to make it easier to recognize that the chance look-ahead has occurred, and the special effect is generated for the second decorative pattern. It may be configured so as not to In this way, "development" is displayed after the pending change effect is displayed as the prefetch effect, and "development !!!" is displayed after the chance eye is displayed as the prefetch effect. there is In addition, here, after the pending change production, "development" is displayed, and after the chance eye look ahead, "development !!!" is displayed. "Development!!!" is displayed even after the pending change effect, and the percentage of "development!!!" may be high, and in this case, "development" may be displayed after the chance lookahead, and the percentage of "development" displayed after the chance lookahead is higher than the rate at which "development" is displayed after the pending change production " The rate at which "development" is displayed may be high. As mentioned above, there is a difference in the expectation of hitting (big hit, small hit) between "development" and "development !!!" There is a higher chance expectation for a hit (big hit, small hit) than the pending change effect. It should be noted that, in this example, the correspondence between the pending change production and the development pattern ("development", "development !!!") in the chance eye look-ahead was explained, but if it is a look-ahead production, even if it is another production Well, for example, it can also be applied to "Angel Zone" and "True Angel Zone", which are background change effects. In addition, in this example, the difference in hit (big hit, small hit) expectation in one look-ahead effect (holding change effect or chance eye look-ahead) was explained, but whether multiple types of look-ahead effects were executed at the same time Alternatively, it may be configured such that the corresponding relationship with the development pattern (“development”, “development !!!”) is different depending on the number of pre-reading effects being executed at the same time (complex number of pre-reading effects). For example, when only the pending change effect (one type of prefetch effect) is executed, the development pattern in the trigger fluctuation is better when the hold change effect and the chance eye lookahead (two types of prefetch effect) are executed is likely to be displayed, or when only the pending change effect (one type of prefetch effect) is being executed, the percentage of “development !!!” type) is being executed, it may be configured so that the percentage of “development !!!” is displayed is higher. ) is executed, even if the percentage of “development” displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is being executed is higher good. In addition, similar to the development pattern, the pseudo-continuous pattern is also a pseudo-continuous pattern ("NEXT") depending on whether or not multiple types of pre-reading effects were being executed at the same time or the number of pre-reading effects being executed at the same time (complex number of pre-reading effects). "NEXT!!!") may be configured to have a different correspondence relationship. For example, when the pending change effect and the chance look-ahead (two types of the look-ahead effect) are executed than when only the pending change effect (one type of the look-ahead effect) is executed, pseudo-continuous trigger fluctuation If the pattern is easy to display, or if only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the ratio of “NEXT !!!” It may be configured so that the percentage of “NEXT!!!” displayed is higher when two types) are being executed. The percentage of “NEXT” displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is being performed is higher than the rate of “NEXT” being displayed when the type) is being performed. good too.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 35, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be employed, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 104 is an image diagram showing display transition when a different display mode is performed for the same look-ahead effect type, resulting in a super ready-to-win effect. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Here, a new hold display ("trigger hold display") is displayed in blue (that is, blue is determined in the pending change effect, which is one of the look-ahead effects). Next, when the trigger suspension display remains blue and does not change, "development" is displayed in the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension, and a super ready-to-win effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when the trigger pending display changes from blue to red, the symbol variation associated with the trigger pending is "development!!!" is displayed, and a super ready-to-win effect (not shown) is executed. In this way, after the blue color is displayed in the pending change effect, "development" is displayed, and after the red color is displayed in the pending change effect, "development!!!" is displayed. . Here, it is assumed that "Development" is displayed after blue, and "Development!!!" is displayed after red, respectively. In this case, the ratio of "Development!!!" displayed after red and "Development!!!" displayed after blue may be higher than the ratio of "Development!!!" displayed after blue. In some cases, "development" may be displayed after red, and "development" may be displayed more frequently after blue than "development" is displayed after red. There is also a difference in the degree of expectation for winning (big win, small win) between blue and red, which are the display modes of the pending change performance, and red has a higher expectation for winning (big win, small win) than blue. In this example, the description was made using the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the development pattern (“development”, “development !!!”) in the pending change effect, but if it is a look-ahead effect, it does not have to be a pending change effect. For example, it can also be applied to the "Angel Zone" and "True Angel Zone", which are background change effects.

Next, FIG. 105 is an image diagram showing display transition when developing to the same super ready-to-win effect via different displays. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after the specific symbol "development" or "development !!!" indicating that the super reach effect is developed is displayed, a low expectation super with a relatively low expectation of winning (big hit, small hit) As a ready-to-win production (first half of super ready-to-win), a production in which a giraffe destroys medium symbols is executed, and a low-expectation super ready-to-win` symbol combination (“656”) is displayed. In addition, during the low-expectation super reach, the first decoration pattern is displayed only in the number pattern, but it may be the first decoration pattern composed of the number pattern and the character pattern. Next, a high-expectation super ready-to-win production (second half of super ready-to-win) with a relatively high degree of expectation for winning (big win, small win) is executed. Here, even if any of "development" and "development!!!" !”, the ratio of development to the high-expectation-level super-reach production is different. is displayed, the high-expectation super-reach effect is executed at a rate of 50%. In addition, 90% when "development" is displayed and 50% when "development !!!" It will return to the normal screen without developing into a reach effect.

Next, FIG. 106 is an image diagram showing the display transition when developing into the super ready-to-win effect via the button effect. First, the decorative designs (first decorative design, second decorative design) are in the process of changing. Next, the decoration pattern forms a reach, and a button effect is executed that enables the player to operate the sub-input button SB. At the time of the button presentation, the first decoration pattern is only numbers, the left pattern is displayed at the left end of the liquid crystal screen, the right pattern is displayed at the right end of the liquid crystal screen, and a plurality of patterns that can be selected by the player's operation of the sub-input button SB are displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen. is displayed in a circle. The multiple patterns include "6", which is a winning pattern, "development" and "development !!!", which indicate that it will be a super reach effect, "5", which is a losing pattern, and "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern. is displayed. When a plurality of patterns rotate in a circle and the sub-input button SB can be operated, a button image with "PUSH" written is displayed in the approximate center of the liquid crystal screen, and the sub-input button SB is operated. Triggered by this, one pattern is displayed. Here, a predetermined "development" is displayed, and after that, although not shown, a super ready-to-win effect is executed. When the sub-input button SB is not operated, after the valid period of the sub-input button SB has elapsed, "development" is displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. The symbols displayed when the sub-input button SB is operated are determined in advance by preliminary lottery of the sub-control board S performed at the start of fluctuation.

Note that the production in this example may be changed as follows.
(1) Before developing into a super ready-to-win effect (=up to the stage where the illustrated development pattern is displayed), the first decorative pattern is not displayed only with a number pattern, but is composed of a number pattern and a character pattern. The configuration may be such that the first decorative pattern is displayed.
(2) Depending on the type of button image (e.g., large button image, small button image, default color, red, rainbow color, etc.), the percentage of symbols to be stopped may differ. When is displayed, the percentage of symbols other than losing symbols such as "NEXT", "Development", "Development!!!", and winning symbols will be displayed higher than when small button images are displayed. may
(3) Depending on the type of button image (e.g., large button image, small button image, default color, red, rainbow color, etc.), the ratio of displayed developed patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns may differ. For example, when a large button image is displayed, the percentage of displayed development patterns is higher than when a small button image is displayed, the percentage of “development!!!” It is also possible to set a high percentage of symbols to be displayed, a high percentage of "NEXT!!!" to be displayed, and the like.
(4) Any image may be displayed at a predetermined timing without displaying the button image. In addition, it is possible to have a pattern in which a button image is displayed (a pattern in which the player can operate the button) and a pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (a pattern in which the player cannot operate the button). Often, in this case, the pattern in which the button image is displayed is configured to increase the expectation of winning (big hit, small win) than the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing, or the pattern other than the losing pattern is set. It may be configured such that the ratio of symbols ("NEXT", "development", "development!!!", winning symbols, etc.) to be displayed is high. Furthermore, even if the ratio of the developed symbols displayed is different between the pattern in which the button image is displayed and the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the pattern in which the button image is displayed can increase the percentage of “Development!!!” displayed).
(5) Pseudo-continuous symbols may include not only "NEXT" but also multiple types such as "NEXT!!!". !” may be configured to increase the expectation of winning (big win, small win), or “NEXT!!!” may be displayed in an array pattern in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circle. Furthermore, an arrangement pattern may be provided in which "NEXT" and "NEXT!!!" are displayed at the same time.
(6) There may be a plurality of types of arrangement patterns in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circle. In the case of a big hit, a small hit) variation, a variation that results in a super reach effect, etc.), the hit ( (Big win, small win) It may be configured such that the ratio of displaying the arrangement pattern with high expectation is high. For example, as an arrangement pattern with a high probability of winning (big hit, small win), an arrangement pattern with no losing pattern (for example, "6 (big hit pattern or small winning pattern), development, development, NEXT, development !!!" Array pattern displayed), or an array pattern in which "Development!!!" !!!・development!!!・NEXT・development!!!” is displayed).

As in (3), the proportion at which the development pattern is displayed varies depending on the display mode of the notice of the change (button effect, comment notice, timer notice, etc.), or the display mode of the notice of the change By configuring the display ratio of the pseudo-continuous symbols to be different according to the change, if the display mode of the advance notice of the change is highly expected, the possibility that the advanced symbols and the pseudo-continuous symbols will be displayed becomes high. It can be configured so that the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit, small hit) can be easily grasped.

Next, FIG. 107 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super ready-to-win effect occurs in different effect stages (also referred to as effect modes). First, the production stage A will be described in detail. In the performance stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, a ready-to-win effect is formed, and after a specific symbol "development" indicating development to a super ready-to-win effect is displayed, the super ready-to-win effect is executed. Next, the production stage B will be described in detail. In the production stage B, a first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after forming the reach, the super reach production is executed as it is (that is, the specific symbol "development" indicating that the reach is developed is not displayed), or when the reach is formed, the production stage After displaying a "development (an aspect in which the inside of a Chinese character is hollowed out as shown)" different from A, a super ready-to-win effect is executed. That is, in this example, the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage, but the display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ (is the same), and the first decoration is displayed according to the production stage. Although an advanced design can be displayed in the design, the second decorative design is configured so as not to display an advanced design.

Next, FIG. 108 is an image diagram showing display transition when re-fluctuation is executed in different production stages. First, the production stage A will be described in detail. In the performance stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after a reach is formed and the "NEXT" symbol indicating that the re-variation is to be executed is displayed, the symbol variation is started again. Next, the production stage B will be described in detail. In the production stage B, a first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after the symbol combination "678" (order) indicating that the re-variation is executed in the first decorative symbol is displayed (temporarily stopped), the symbol variation is started again, or the reach is formed, after displaying the "NEXT (a form in which the inside of the alphabet is hollowed out as shown)" different from the production stage A, the pattern variation is started again. It should be noted that, depending on which production stage re-fluctuation was performed, if re-fluctuation is performed twice {variation start → temporary stop → re-fluctuation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re- Fluctuation)} hit (big hit, small hit) expectation and when re-fluctuation is performed 3 times {variation start → temporary stop → re-fluctuation → temporary stop → re-fluctuation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach Development (re-fluctuation)} may have a different difference from the expected hit (big hit, small hit). For example, in the production stage A (for example, the daytime stage or the non-predictive stage other than the angel zone), the average hit (big hit, small hit) expectation when the re-variation is performed twice is 5%. The average hit (big hit, small hit) expectation when the variation is executed three times is 25%, and the difference is 20% (a difference of 5 times). Or, in the look-ahead stage such as the angel zone), the average hit (big hit, small hit) expectation when the re-variation is performed twice is 40% on average, and the hit (jackpot) when the re-variation is performed three times , small win) The degree of expectation may be 50% and the difference may be 10% (difference of 1.25 times). The difference between the hit (big win, small win) expectation (expectation for execution of special game) is the percentage subtraction, the hit (big hit, small win) expectation (1/N), or the like. . Also, the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage (production stage A, production stage B), but the display form of the second decorative pattern is the same, and the first decorative pattern is the "NEXT" pattern. Although it can be displayed, the second decorative design may be configured so that the "NEXT" design is not displayed. It should be noted that both production stage A and production stage B have been mainly explained as being non-predictive stages in non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game state (game state similar to the above-mentioned daytime stage), but are not limited to this. , production stage A is a non-prefetch stage in a non-probability variable game state and non-time-reduced game state (for example, the daytime stage described above), production stage B is a non-probability-variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state (for example, The production stage A and the production stage B are configured as the above-mentioned night stage), and both the production stage A and the production stage B are configured as a look-ahead stage in the non-probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state, and the production stage A and the production stage B are both the probability fluctuation game state and It is also possible to configure as a non-prefetching stage in the time reduction game state, and if a plurality of production stages are provided, it is possible to apply the production form shown in this example regardless of the game state.

In addition, in FIG. 108, the configuration regarding the "NEXT" symbol, which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is illustrated, but the extended symbol may also be configured in the same manner as in FIG. That is, (1) while the development pattern temporarily stops as the first decorative pattern in the production stage A, the development pattern does not temporarily stop as the first decorative pattern in the production stage B, (2) the development pattern in the production stage A. is temporarily stopped in the display mode A as the first decorative pattern, while in the production stage B, the developed pattern is temporarily stopped in the display mode B as the first decorative pattern (the display mode is different from the production stage A). may be configured.

Next, FIG. 109 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the pseudo consecutive symbols and the specific symbols are displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, a translucent "NEXT" pattern, which is a re-change suggesting pattern that suggests that a reach is formed and that re-change is to be executed, is displayed. When the translucent "NEXT" pattern is moved from the top to the bottom of the liquid crystal screen and re-fluctuation is executed, the non-transparent "NEXT" pattern is displayed and then pattern fluctuation is started again. The pattern variation is performed again, the ready-to-win state is formed again, and this time, "development" indicating that the super ready-to-win effect is executed instead of the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed. After that, the super ready-to-win effect is executed, and since the variation was a loss, the game is fixed and stopped at the ready-to-win losing symbol ("717"). As shown in this figure, while it is possible to display a specific symbol (eg, "development") after displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol (eg, "NEXT"), a pseudo-continuous symbol can be displayed after displaying a specific symbol. It may be configured so that it cannot be displayed. In addition, the ratio of specific symbols to be displayed depends on whether or not pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed (=whether or not re-fluctuation is performed), the number of times pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed (=number of re-fluctuations), etc. can be different. For example, the greater the number of re-changes, the easier it is for the specific pattern to be displayed (= the higher the percentage of specific patterns displayed without displaying the lost pattern), and the greater the number of re-changes , which is highly expected to win (big win, small win), may be displayed at a higher rate even when specific symbols are displayed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 110, even when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (during the display of pseudo continuous symbols and during the display of advanced symbols), the second decorative symbols are displayed in the left, middle, and right columns. The variable display is continued in all, and further, the variable display of the second decorative symbols may be continued in all of the left, middle, and right columns even during super reach.

Next, FIG. 111 is an image diagram showing display transition when the first decorative symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner. First, the first decorative pattern is stopped at "861", but the left pattern (elephant) and the middle pattern (giraffe), and the middle pattern (giraffe) and the right pattern (chick) are displayed in duplicate. At this time, the middle pattern (giraffe) is placed behind the LCD screen (the player side is in front) from the left pattern (elephant) and right pattern (chick), and the left pattern (elephant) and right pattern (chick) are partly It is hidden. Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, a reach is formed, and the medium pattern is displayed as a low-speed fluctuation display. At this time, the middle pattern is arranged in front of the liquid crystal screen than the left and right patterns forming the reach. In this figure, the chick ("1") as the medium symbol is displayed at low speed and does not stop, and then the pseudo-continuous symbol ("NEXT" symbol) is displayed at low speed and stopped at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen. ing. After that, although not shown, after a re-variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is executed, a super ready-to-win effect is executed, and since the variation was a loss, the game is fixed and stopped with a reach-to-loss pattern (“717”). When displaying the reach-losing pattern, the middle pattern (chick) is placed behind the LCD screen from the left pattern (lion) and the right pattern (lion), just like before the start of the fluctuation, and part of the middle pattern (chick) is hidden. As for the second decorative symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are not displayed redundantly at any timing. In addition, even if a development pattern ("development" or "development!!!") is displayed instead of a pseudo-continuation symbol, the relationship between the left and right symbols and the middle symbol will be displayed when the pseudo-continuation symbol is displayed. It can be the same as when The display mode may be a display mode in stage C or a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (variation with a high chance of winning). In other words, the display mode in this figure may be a display mode that is not displayed in stage A or stage B but may be displayed in stage C, or it may be a display mode that can be displayed in stage C. It may be a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (variation with a high degree of expectation when reach is performed) rather than in a short-term variation).

Next, FIG. 112 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative design and the second decorative design. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern fluctuation. At this time, the speed of the first decorative pattern is gradually increased from low speed to high speed pattern fluctuation (low speed→medium speed→high speed). On the other hand, the second decorative pattern has a constant pattern fluctuation speed, and is always a high-speed pattern fluctuation. Next, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern become high speed, and when the reach is formed by the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the middle pattern in the first decorative pattern becomes the low speed pattern fluctuation, and the second decorative pattern becomes the second decorative pattern. In the 2 decorative patterns, the middle pattern is a high-speed pattern variation. After that, during execution of the super reach effect, the left pattern and the right pattern in which both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern form the reach are stopped (or temporarily stopped), and only the middle pattern is at high speed. Pattern is changing. After the end of the super ready-to-win effect, the variation was a loss, so the game is fixed and stopped with a ready-to-win losing symbol (“686”). In this figure, while the super ready-to-win effect is being executed, only the middle pattern is changed while forming the ready-to-win in the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. During execution of medium or specific super ready-to-win production, all the first decorative symbols and all the second decorative symbols may be varied. It should be noted that the second decorative pattern may also have a plurality of fluctuation speeds, and in this case, it is preferable that the second decorative pattern is less likely to change in fluctuation speed than the first decorative pattern. For example, low speed is not used in the second decorative pattern, but medium speed is used (in addition, low speed, medium speed, and high speed are used in the first decorative pattern). In addition, it is possible to configure the second decorative pattern so as not to temporarily stop in the middle, specifically, it is configured to always be at high speed or stop (fixed stop), or high speed, medium speed and stop (fixed stop). and the like.

Here, the pseudo consecutive symbols and development symbols in the time shortening game state are supplemented. In the time shortening game state, it may be constructed such that the pseudo-continuous symbols and the advanced symbols can be displayed, but it is more preferable to construct so that the pseudo-continuous symbols and the advanced symbols cannot be displayed. This is because, in the time-reduced game state, the variation time is relatively shorter than in the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state), and there are fewer effects suggesting a hit (big hit, small win) within one variation. there is When displaying a pseudo-continuous pattern or a development pattern, it means that the one with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected. The period until the start of the game or the small winning game) is prolonged, and the speed at which the number of balls is increased during consecutive games is slowed down. In addition, in this way, in the time shortening game state, a short variation time is likely to be selected, and the effect amount is also small. It is preferable that it consists only of elements (numbers).

Next, FIG. 113 is an image diagram relating to the case where a power failure occurs during execution of a loss variation. First, (a) in the non-variable probability game state and the non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 4, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed on the effect display device SG. In the non-variable probability game state and the non-reduced time game state, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "number + character", and the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "number" only. . (b) After that, the hold is digested, the hold digestion transmission image (may be referred to as the hold image, the hold display, the hold, etc.) corresponding to the digested hold is displayed, and the pattern fluctuation that becomes a loss starts. be done. Note that the pending display (sometimes referred to as a pending image) and the pending digestion transfer image may be collectively referred to as a variable rights image. In addition, the first reserved display and the second reserved display may be collectively referred to as reserved display, and a plurality or all of the first reserved display, the second reserved display, and the reserved digestion transfer image are referred to as variable rights images. Sometimes.

<When power failure did not occur>
After that, (c) stop display is performed at "817" of "numbers + characters" where the first decorative design is a failing design, and stop display is performed at "817" of "numbers" where the second decorative design is a failing design. In addition, when the next variation starts, the first decorative design is the "number + character""817" decorative design, and the second decorative design is the "number""817" decorative design. start scrolling). Here, as a modification, instead of variably displaying both the first decorative design and the second decorative design, only the first decorative design may be variably displayed and the second decorative design may not be displayed.

<When power is generated>
After (b) described above, (d) a power cut occurs during the pattern variation. (e) After that, the power supply is restored and the variation of the main game symbols is resumed, but the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are not variably displayed (become hidden) during the execution of the symbol variation. It should be noted that the variation time of the pattern variation is 50 seconds, and if the power failure occurs at the timing of 10 seconds after the start of the variation (it may be the case that the power failure processing is executed), after the power is restored, It is configured to perform the remaining 40 seconds of variation.

(f) After that, the pattern variation that has been executed is finished, and the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with "numbers + characters" which is "711", which is a stop mode dedicated to power failure, and "711". , the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. The stop display here may be a confirmed display or a temporary stop display (the same applies to other configurations), but it is preferably applied only to the first decorative pattern. It is desirable that the second decorative pattern is only fixedly stopped (not temporarily stopped). (g) After that, the suspension is canceled, and the next symbol variation is started. Here, as a modification, the stop display of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols may not be intervened. The first and second decorative symbols are hidden until the stop display (variable fixed time that is the period during which the stop display is maintained) after the variable display ends, and the variable display of the next main game pattern is started. It may be configured such that the first decorative design and the second decorative design are re-displayed on this occasion.

As described above, in the figure, when the power is turned off, after the power is restored, "711" of "numbers and characters" is displayed as the first decorative pattern as the stop pattern exclusively for when the power is restored, and the second decorative pattern is displayed. "711" of "number" is displayed in the pattern. That is, except after power is restored, "711" is not stop-displayed (not selected as a stop design) as a missing design in either the first decorative design or the second decorative design. As a modification, the lost symbol "711" may be configured to be stopped and displayed other than after the power is restored. However, in any case, it is desirable that two out of the three digits of the lost pattern displayed after the power is restored have the same number or different numbers for each of the three digits, and the reach mode (for example, It is desirable not to be a winning pattern (for example, three symbols are the same number such as "777" and "222").

In addition, the timing at which "711" of "number + character" is displayed as the first decorative symbol and the timing at which "711" of "number" is displayed as the second decorative symbol are determined and stopped timing of the main game symbol ( the timing at which the fixed stop starts). In this case, at the timing when the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are stopped and displayed. Also, as described above, the main game symbols are determined as the timing at which "711" of "number + character" is displayed as the first decorative symbol and the timing at which "711" of "number" is displayed as the second decorative symbol. It may be the timing at which the next symbol variation starts after the game is stopped (timing at which the first decorative symbol starts to vary). In this case, at the timing when the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed, the first decorative design and the second decorative design have started to fluctuate (without stop display).

It should be noted that the stop mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are both scheduled to be "817" in the case where the power interruption does not occur and in the case where the power interruption occurs. However, if a power failure occurs, it is configured to display "711" exclusively for power failure. That is, the planned stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are different in the case where the power interruption occurs during the fluctuation and in the case where the power interruption does not occur. display mode after stopping) can be displayed.

It should be noted that the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the same stop symbols regardless of whether or not the power is cut off. With this configuration, even if the power supply is interrupted during pattern fluctuation due to a power outage in the game hall or the like, the stop pattern of the main game pattern is not changed, so that the result of the game is not affected. On the other hand, by making the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol special symbols for the time of power failure, the occurrence of power failure can be appropriately notified to the player and the manager.

In addition, as described in (a) of FIG. 113, in the same figure, the case where the symbol variation starts in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state is illustrated, but it is limited to this. However, the configuration illustrated in the figure can also be applied to other game states. Similarly, even if the game state is described in figures other than FIG. 113, it is only an example, and it is supplemented that it can be applied to other game states.

Next, FIG. 114 is an image diagram relating to the case where a power failure occurs during execution of a winning (big winning, small winning) variation. First, (a) in the non-variable probability game state and the non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 4, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed on the effect display device SG. In the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-reduced time gaming state, the display mode (sometimes referred to as display format) of the first decorative symbols is "numbers + characters", and the display mode of the second decorative symbols. (sometimes referred to as display format) has only "numbers". (b) After that, the suspension is digested, the suspension digestion transmission image corresponding to the digested suspension is displayed, and the symbol variation for winning (big win, small win) is started.

Here, the display format of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern is "number", "number + character", etc., and the display format of "777" of "number" and "666" of "number" are the same, and the display formats of "777" of "number" and "number+character" and "777" are different.

<When power failure did not occur>
(c) After that, the first decorative design is stopped at "777" of "numbers + characters" which is a winning (big win, small winning) design, and the second decorative design is a winning (big win, small winning) design. Stop display at "777" of "number". (d) After that, a winning game (big winning game or small winning game) is started. During the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), the display position of the first decorative pattern is changed to the upper left part of the performance display device SG, the size of the display area is reduced, and the size of the display area is reduced from "numbers + characters" to "numbers". ” only. As a modified example, instead of a three-digit number, a single-digit number (for example, if "777" wins (big hit, small win), only "7" wins, and "222" wins (big hit, small win). may be "2" only, etc.). Also, the second decorative pattern is hidden. (e) After that, when the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) is completed, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed as "777" with only "numbers" which are winning (big winning, small winning) patterns. After that, the suspension is digested and the next symbol variation is started. It should be noted that when the next variation starts, the decorative design of "777" (the first decorative design and the second decorative design, or only the first decorative design may be used) will start to fluctuate. After the end of the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), the non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state which is the gaming state before the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) starts, the probability variable gaming state and time reduction. It will be shifted to the game state, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the probability variable game state and the time reduction game state are both composed only of "numbers" (the display format is only "numbers" ing). In addition, the game state to be shifted after the winning game (big win game or small win game) is only an example, and if different from the game state before the start of the winning game (big win game or small win game), the same configuration can be applied. is.

<In case of power failure>
(f) After that, a power cut occurs in the middle of the pattern variation. (g) After that, the power supply is restored and the variation of the main game symbols is resumed, but the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are not variably displayed (become hidden) during the execution of the symbol variation.

(h) After that, the winning (big winning, small winning) symbol variation that has been executed is terminated, and the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) is executed. When the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) is started, the first decoration pattern is displayed in "711", which is a stop mode dedicated to power-off. During the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), the display position of the first decorative pattern is changed to the upper left of the effect display device SG, the size of the display area is reduced, and the display format is "numbers + characters". to "numbers" only. As a modification, instead of the three-digit number, a symbol (such as “?” or “???”) may be used instead, or the first decorative pattern or “?” (“???”) may be used. may not be displayed at all. Also, the second decorative pattern is hidden. (g) After that, the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) ends, the hold is canceled, and the next symbol variation starts. It should be noted that, when the next variation starts, the variation of the "711" decorative design with only "numbers" among the first decorative design and the second decorative design will start (only the first decorative design and can also be used). After the end of the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), the non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state which is the gaming state before the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) starts, the probability variable gaming state and time reduction. The game state is shifted to the game state, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the probability variable game state and the time reduction game state are both composed of "numbers" only. In addition, the game state to be shifted after the winning game (big win game or small win game) is only an example, and if different from the game state before the start of the winning game (big win game or small win game), the same configuration can be applied. is. Also, regarding the performance (big hit performance or small winning performance) during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), if the power failure does not occur, the winning (big winning, small winning) type (10R big winning or not) , 4R big hit or small win) (10R big hit when power failure does not occur becomes hit performance A, 4R big hit when power failure does not occur) will be a hit production B, and if the power is not cut off, the small win will be a hit production C). Good), the big hit effects will be the same, and the big win effects and small win effects will be the same (10R big win if power is cut off, 4R big win if power cut is occurred, power cut has occurred. It is preferable that the small hit in the case is a hit production D).

In this way, in the same figure, when power failure occurs, during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) after the power is restored and the decorative pattern after the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), "711" is displayed as a stop pattern dedicated to the time of power return (although the configuration in which both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed is exemplified, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed). ing. In this way, even in the case where the power is cut off during the symbol variation that will result in a hit (big win, small win), the stop symbol dedicated after the power is restored is similar to the case where the power is cut off during the pattern variation that will result in a loss. is configured to display "711".

In addition, in the figure, the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is hidden during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), but it is not limited to this, and the winning game ( During the jackpot game or the small win game, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be configured to be hidden, or both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be configured to be displayed. good too. Also, during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), the first decorative pattern may be hidden and the second decorative pattern may be displayed. Also, in the configuration in which the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is hidden during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), as described above, the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) starts. It may be configured to display only one "7" pattern having three in front during a winning game (big winning game or small winning game). In addition, in the embodiment in which the first decorative pattern is displayed during the winning game (big hit game or small winning game), as a modification, the third decorative pattern (display format) is a new display mode (display format) instead of the first decorative pattern For example, while the "numbers" of the first decorative design are Arabic numerals, the "numbers" of the third decorative design are Roman numerals).

In addition, as the timing at which "711" is displayed, the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) end timing (or winning game (big winning game or small winning game) end demo end timing, winning game (big winning game or small winning game) Hit game) immediately after the end, immediately after the start of the time shortening game state), or the timing at which the first pattern variation after the end of the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) starts (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern timing to start the variable display).

It should be noted that the stop mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is scheduled to be "777" for both the case where the power interruption does not occur and the case where the power interruption occurs. However, if power failure occurs, "711" dedicated to power failure is displayed during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) and/or after the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) is completed. It is configured as follows. That is, the planned stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are different in the case where the power interruption occurs during the fluctuation and in the case where the power interruption does not occur. display mode after stopping) is displayed.

As detailed in FIGS. 113 and 114, when a power failure occurs during execution of symbol variation executed in a predetermined game state (for example, non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state) In the case of a power outage during the execution of the winning (big hit, small winning) pattern variation, and in the case of a power outage during the execution of the losing pattern variation, the next variation after the power is restored At the start (or just before the start of the next fluctuation, or just before the holding is digested), the same symbol combination (combination of numbers) is displayed for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol ("711 ”), but the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is configured to be different. More specifically, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the symbol variation that results in a loss, a display mode composed of "numbers + characters" as shown in Figs. 113(f) and (g) (display format), and when a power failure occurs during the execution of the winning (big win, small win) symbol variation, as shown in FIG. It is a display mode (display format). As for the second decorative pattern, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the pattern variation that will result in a loss, if the power is cut off during the execution of the pattern variation that will be a hit (big hit, small hit). Even so, the display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern after the power is restored (at the start of the next fluctuation after the power is restored, just before the next fluctuation starts, just before the pending digestion, etc.) is also a pattern combination (combination of numbers) are also the same.

In this way, even in the symbol variation started in the same game state, power interruption occurs during the symbol variation depending on whether the symbol variation is a losing variation or a hit (big hit, small win) variation. By configuring the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern to be different when the power is restored, it is possible to properly inform the player of the game situation even after the power is cut off. Here, regarding the combination of the "numbers" of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, regardless of whether the pattern variation is a loss variation or a hit (big hit, small hit) variation, it is set to "711". It is configured, and as a result, whether the pattern variation that caused the power failure was a winning (big hit, small win) variation or a losing variation, and if it was a winning (big hit, small win) variation, which one It is possible to uniformly and fairly display information that a player cannot know after the power supply is restored, such as whether or not all "numbers" have been hit (big win or small win), and furthermore, in a mode of indicating loss. Since it is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who sees the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern to feel that he has lost.

113 and 114, the same game state is any state controlled by the main control board M, such as a time reduction game state, a probability variation game state, a limited frequency state (game state related to variation patterns), etc. It may be applied to any state controlled by the sub-control board S such as the production mode.

Next, FIG. 115 is an image diagram relating to the case where a power failure occurs during execution of a winning (big winning, small winning) variation. First, (a) in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 3, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are variably displayed on the effect display device SG. Note that the look-ahead effect is not executed, in other words, there is no trigger pending within the pending. (b) After that, at a predetermined timing, a hit (big win, small win) confirmation effect is executed as a notice effect during symbol variation. The advance notice effect in the figure is a different effect from the look-ahead effect, and is a effect that suggests the result of the pattern variation being executed. Further, the hit (big win, small win) confirmation effect is a production to notify that the schedule of winning (big win, small win) is definite, and in the figure, "Rainbow!" is displayed. It will happen. That is, when the hit (big win, small win) confirmation effect is executed as the notice effect during the pattern change, it is certain that the win (big win, small win) pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the pattern change. . In addition, when the hit (big hit, small win) confirmation effect is executed, it may be determined that the win (big hit, small win) will be 1000/1000 after that, or the hit (big hit, small win) confirmation effect is executed, it may be determined that a hit (big win, small win) will occur with 999/1000 (probability infinitely close to 1) thereafter. Further, the notice effect in the figure may be referred to as the variable notice effect, the non-prefetch notice effect, or the like.

(c) After that, the power is cut off during the symbol variation when the hit (big win, small win) confirmation effect is executed as the advance notice effect during the symbol change. (d) After that, the power supply is restored and the variation of the main game pattern is resumed. Is displayed). (e) After that, the main game symbols are stopped and displayed at winning (big win, small winning) symbols (“7A” corresponding to winning), and execution of a winning game (big winning game or minor winning game) is started. When a winning game (big winning game or small winning game) starts (or a winning game (big winning game or small winning game) start demonstration time starts), characters during screen return are erased on the effect display device SG, It switches to the screen display during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game). Further, during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), "711" dedicated to the time of power return is displayed as the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and during the winning game (big win game or small win game), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be configured to be hidden, or the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be configured to be hidden. Any of the decorative patterns may be configured to be displayed. Also, during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), the first decorative pattern may be hidden and the second decorative pattern may be displayed. Also, in the configuration in which the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is hidden during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), as described above, "?" It may be constructed so as to be displayed during a winning game (big winning game or small winning game), or it may be designed so as not to display the first decorative pattern or "?" ("???") at all. Also, regarding the performance (big hit performance or small winning performance) during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), if the power failure does not occur, the winning (big winning, small winning) type (10R big winning or not) , 4R big hit or small win) (10R big hit when power failure does not occur becomes hit performance A, 4R big hit when power failure does not occur) will be a hit production B, and if the power is not cut off, the small win will be a hit production C). Good), the big hit effects will be the same, and the big win effects and small win effects will be the same (10R big win if power is cut off, 4R big win if power cut is occurred, power cut has occurred. It is preferable that the small hit in the case is a hit production D).

(f) After that, the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) is finished, the suspension is newly digested, and the next symbol variation is started. At the start of the next symbol variation (or after the end of the winning game (big win game or small winning game) and before the start of symbol variation), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are "711 ” is displayed as a “number”. In addition, the game state after the end of the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) exemplifies the case of shifting to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state.

Next, FIG. 116 is an image diagram relating to the case where a power failure occurs during execution of the look-ahead effect. First, (a) in a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 2, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner on the effect display device SG, A new hold occurs and the number of holds becomes 3, and a winning (big win, small win) confirmation effect, which is a pending change effect, is executed as a look-ahead effect for the newly generated pending image (“☆ "display). (b) After that, a power cut occurs during the same symbol variation. In addition, when the hit (big hit, small hit) fixed effect is executed as the look-ahead effect, it is notified that the pattern variation being executed (or the pattern variation that has started execution) will be a hit (big hit, small win). Instead, it is notified that the symbol variation to be the target of the look-ahead effect, in other words, the symbol variation related to the trigger hold will be a hit (big win, small win).

(c) After that, the power supply is restored and the variation of the main game pattern is resumed, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not displayed while the symbol variation is being executed (they become non-display and the characters during the screen recovery are Is displayed). (d) After that, symbol variations that lead to a loss are executed a plurality of times, and the symbol variations related to suspension that trigger execution of the win (big win, small win) confirmation effect executed as the look-ahead effect start. It should be noted that, when the hold that triggers the execution of the hit (big hit, small hit) finalized effect executed as the prefetch effect is digested, the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image after that is the hit (big hit, small win) executed as the prefetch effect Small hit) It is the same as the display mode of the pending image which is the fixed effect. In this case, it may be configured not to execute the hit (big hit, small win) confirmation effect (displayed as "☆" in the figure), which is a pending change effect as the look-ahead effect, during the pattern fluctuations that result in multiple losses. However, it may be configured so as to restart during any one of the pattern fluctuations in the pattern fluctuations resulting in a plurality of losses. Also, the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image may be different from the display mode of the pending image that is the hit (big hit, small win) confirmation effect executed as the look-ahead effect (for example, "●" display). .

(e) After that, the symbol variation targeted for the hit (big win, small win) confirmation effect is completed, and the winning (big win, small win) pattern ("7A" corresponding to the win) is stopped and displayed. Since it is a stop display of the winning (big hit, small winning) pattern in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state, the first decorative pattern is "777" in the display mode (display format) of "numbers + characters". It is stopped and displayed, and "777" is stopped and displayed in the display mode (display format) of "number" as the second decorative pattern. (f) During the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), "777" is displayed as the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and during the winning game (big win game or small win game), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be configured to be hidden, or the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be configured to be hidden. Any of the decorative patterns may be configured to be displayed. Also, during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), the first decorative pattern may be hidden and the second decorative pattern may be displayed. Also, in the configuration in which the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is hidden during the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), as described above, the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) starts. It may be configured to display only one "7" pattern having three in front during a winning game (big winning game or small winning game).

(g) After that, the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) ends. After the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) ends and before the start of pattern fluctuation, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern hit (big winning game) related to the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) being executed. , small win) The symbol "777" is displayed as "numbers". "777" is displayed as a "number" in order to shift to the probability variation game state and time reduction game state after the end of the winning game (big winning game or small winning game).

In this way, as a look-ahead effect, the hit (big win, small win) confirmation effect is executed, and if the power is cut off during the pattern fluctuation in which the win (big hit, small win) confirmation effect is executed, it is executed after that. The stop symbol after the end of the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) is "777", which is not a special combination of symbols when power is restored.

As detailed in FIGS. 115 and 116, when a power cut occurs after the hit (big hit, small hit) confirmation effect is executed in the big hit variation or the small hit variation, the winning game (big hit game or While the first decorative pattern immediately after the end of the small winning game is displayed in combination of numbers exclusively for the time of power return, when the power is cut off after the winning (big win, small winning) confirmation performance is executed as a look-ahead performance. , the first decorative pattern immediately after the end of the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) is not a dedicated display corresponding to the time of power return, but the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) stopped and displayed before starting , small hit) is configured to be a pattern. By configuring in this way, when the variation results in a win (big win, small win), even if the power is cut off, the winning game (big win game or small win game) is immediately started. In order to preferentially notify the occurrence of power interruption, the first decoration pattern is displayed with a combination of numbers dedicated to the time of power interruption, and after performing pattern variations for a predetermined number of times, a win (big win, small win) is achieved. In that case, if the power is cut off, the period from the power recovery to the end of the winning game (big hit game or small win game) is long, so the hit ( By configuring to display the first decorative pattern in the (big win, small win) pattern, it is possible to preferentially notify the occurrence of the power failure according to the game situation and win (big win, small win). It is possible to selectively use the case where the execution is preferentially notified.

In FIG. 116, as an example of the look-ahead effect, the pending change effect was illustrated, but the look-ahead effect applicable to this example is not limited to this, and the look-ahead zone effect with background change (specifically, the background Normally, the "mountain" background is displayed as a production, but due to the occurrence of a hold that triggers the execution of the look-ahead zone production, the display may switch to the "sky" background or "space" background, etc. The background has a higher expectation of winning (big hits, small wins) than the “mountain” background, and the “space” background has a higher expectation of winning (big hits, small wins) than the “sky” background, and is an opportunity to execute the look-ahead zone production. A production that confirms the hit (big hit, small hit) in the pending hold) and a countdown look-ahead production in which the numbers are subtracted and displayed at the start of the pattern fluctuation (specifically, the hold that triggered the execution of the countdown look-ahead production) It is an effect that subtracts a number each time the hold that is digested before the hold that triggered the execution of the countdown look-ahead effect is digested so that "0" is displayed when it is digested. There are "white", "red", and "rainbow" as colors, and if it is "rainbow", the hit (big hit, small hit) in the hold that triggered the execution of the countdown look-ahead effect is confirmed), etc. It is applicable to various look-ahead effects. In addition, in the embodiment in which the first decorative pattern is displayed during the winning game (big hit game or small winning game), as a modification, instead of the first decorative pattern, a new display mode (display format) of the third decorative pattern ( For example, while the "numbers" of the first decorative design are Arabic numerals, the "numbers" of the third decorative design are Roman numerals). Note that the background effect may be referred to as an effect mode.

Next, FIG. 117 is an image diagram regarding execution of the performance of the role product. First, (a) in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, the number of reservations is 3, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed on the production display device SG, as a super ready-to-win production. A battle effect is being executed (execution is started after 30 seconds from the start of pattern variation). In addition, since the super ready-to-win effect is being executed, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the upper right row of the effect display device while the left pattern and the right pattern are displayed in a tenpie state, and the second decorative pattern is tenpie. All patterns are displayed fluctuating. (b) After that, as a super reach effect, the main character's attack hits the enemy character, and the role effect (effect accompanied by the driving of the movable character) is executed (execution starts 50 seconds after the start of the pattern fluctuation) ). In this way, the role product presentation in the figure plays a role of definitely informing the player that the symbol variation being executed will result in a win (a big win or a small win).

Here, the movable accessory (sometimes referred to as the movable accessory YK) during execution of the accessory production in FIG. During the performance of the performance ("initial position → stop for 5 seconds at a predetermined position in front of the performance display device SG → initial position"), or the performance display device SG The first decorative pattern is not displayed, and the second decorative pattern maintains variable display. Also, the first reserved display is hidden, and the second reserved display continues to be displayed. Note that the first pending display is displayed before the execution of the battle effect as the super ready-to-win effect is started, but may be configured so as not to be displayed after the execution of the battle effect is started. Also, during execution of the performance of the character, as shown in (b), since the movable character after the movement is driven in front of the second decorative pattern, when the second decorative pattern is viewed from the front, part of the pattern (Second decorative pattern in the left column) visibility is reduced, but in order to improve it, as a modification, the display position of the second decorative pattern is changed even before the movable accessory is driven. However, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed behind the movable accessory (so that the visibility of the second decorative symbol is not hindered by the movable accessory).

Here, in the figure, as the second pending display, an image with a pending number of 3 is displayed, that is, the pending number on the first main game side or the pending number on the second main game side In the shortened game state, the number of reservations on the first main game side, and in the time shortened game state, the number of reservations on the second main game side) is exemplified. It may be constructed such that both the number of reservations on the main game side and the number of reservations on the second main game side are displayed (for example, images of two numbers such as "3" and "0" are displayed). In such a configuration, both the number of reservations on the first main game side and the number of reservations on the second main game side are displayed regardless of the performance mode or the game state. may be configured as follows. Moreover, it should be supplemented that such a configuration is not limited to the configuration shown in the same figure, and can be applied to all embodiments or configurations according to this example.

(c) After that, an effect of defeating the enemy character is executed, and winning (big win, small win) symbols are displayed for both the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols. Although not shown, after this, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the manner shown in (e) of FIG. The display size and display mode (display format) of the decorative symbols are not changed, and then the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are fixed and stopped.

(d) On the other hand, in the non-variable probability game state and the non-time reduction game state, there is no hold and the symbols are stopped, power cutoff occurs. (e) After that, the power is restored, and the operation check of the movable accessory is executed as the initial operation after the power is restored.

Here, the movable accessory at the time of the operation check in the same figure is driven in the manner of "initial position → stop for 2 seconds at a predetermined position in front of the effect display device SG → initial position", and the operation check is being performed. , the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are not displayed (the effect display device SG displays that the screen is being restored). Also, the time from the start of the operation check to the end is 10 seconds.

(f) After that, a suspension occurs during the operation check of the movable accessory (while it is returning to the initial position), the suspension is digested, and the pattern fluctuation is started, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern will start the variable display. The timing of resuming the display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern after the power is restored includes (1) the timing when the suspension occurs, (2) the timing when the suspension is terminated, and (3) a predetermined time after the power is restored. Elapsed timing or the like may be used.

In this way, when the character effect is executed, the first decorative pattern is hidden and the second decorative pattern is displayed. Both the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed.

Although (d) to (f) in FIG. 4 illustrate the case where the power is cut off while the symbols are stopped, the following configuration may be used.
(1) Power outage occurs during pattern fluctuation (2) Power is restored (3) Pattern fluctuation resumes based on power restoration, and an operation check is executed in which the movable accessory stops in front of the effect display device for 2 seconds. However, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, the first reserved display, and the second reserved display are not displayed (the screen displays the characters "Returning to the screen").
(4) Since the pattern variation was terminated during the execution of the action check of the movable accessory and a suspension occurred, a new pattern variation is started. When the new symbol variation starts, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the first reserved display, and the second reserved display may be displayed as described above. In the case of the configuration as described above, in the new pattern variation in (4), when the effects such as (a) to (c) in FIG. 117 are executed, the operation check is performed after the new pattern variation starts. In order to complete within 10 seconds (because the power supply is restored and the operation check is started during the pattern change before the new pattern change), the operation check will not be performed overlapping with the super reach effect (battle effect). Furthermore, the action check is not performed in duplicate with the performance of the character.

Note that the character effect may be executed when, as shown in FIG. It may be configured to be executed in order to inform the player that there is a relatively high possibility that the inside symbol variation will result in a win (big win or small win). The configuration shown in the figure can be applied to any configuration.

In addition, as shown in the figure, in the case of executing a role production that definitely notifies that the pattern variation will result in a win (big win, small win) by executing it, a win (big win, small win) The time (50 seconds in the figure) from the start of the symbol variation that results in a hit to the start of driving of the movable role related to the performance of the role (50 seconds in the figure) is the time from the start to the end of the operation check after the power is restored ( is longer than 10 seconds). In addition to the production pattern in which 50 seconds are required from the start of the fluctuation until the start of driving of the movable role related to the role production, as in the flow of production in the same figure, the driving of the movable role related to the role production is started. A production pattern requiring 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation until the start of the movement, a production pattern requiring 30 seconds from the start of fluctuation until the start of driving of the movable role related to the performance of the role, and start of driving the movable role related to the performance of the role. A plurality of movable character object driving production patterns may be provided, such as a production pattern that requires 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation to until, but in any of these production patterns, the movement related to the character production from the start of the fluctuation of the pattern fluctuation It is preferable that the time required to start driving the accessory exceeds 10 seconds, which is the time from the start to the end of the operation check after power is restored.

By configuring in this way, for example, in the case where the symbol variation is executed like "symbol variation that leads to a loss → symbol variation that leads to a hit (big win, small win)", immediately before the end of the symbol variation that leads to a loss ( For example, even if a power failure occurs 0.1 seconds before the fixed stop) and the power is restored after that, after the operation check after the power is restored, the pattern variation being executed is a hit (big hit, small hit). It is possible to execute the performance of the accessory that definitely notifies that it will be, and it is possible to prevent the situation where the player cannot grasp the state of the game.

In addition, as shown in the figure, in the case of executing a role production that definitely notifies that the pattern variation will result in a win (big hit, small win) by executing it, a hit (big hit, small win) The time from the start of the symbol variation that becomes a hit) to the end of the driving of the movable role related to the performance of the role and the re-display of the first decorative symbol is the time from the start to the end of the operation check after the power is restored. It is longer than (10 seconds in the figure).

Also, in the figure, the case of the non-variable probability game state and the non-time reduction game state is illustrated, but the configuration of the figure can be applied to any game state. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 35, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be employed, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Further, the gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(1) The first decorative symbol becomes a reach ("7↓7"), and then stop display ("787") when the reach is lost.
(2) After that, the game is not executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, no game ball is entered into the ball entrance and no pattern variation is executed), so that the standby state is entered and the standby movie is displayed. be. While the waiting movie is displayed, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hidden (only the first decorative pattern may be hidden).
(3) When the power is turned off while the standby movie is being displayed, and then the power is restored, the standby movie is not displayed and the first decorative symbol is a stop symbol (for example, "711") dedicated to when the power is restored. ) (the second decorative pattern is also displayed as “711”).
(4) If the game state during the display of the standby movie is the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol after the power is restored is "711" of "numbers + characters" (the second 2 The decorative symbol is "711" with only "numbers" displayed), and the game state during the standby movie display is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (for example, probability variable game state and time In the case of the shortened game state), the first decorative pattern after the power is restored is displayed as "711" with only "numbers" (the second decorative design is displayed as "711" with only "numbers"). .
It may be configured as described above. It should be noted that, when power is restored, as described above, the operation check of the movable accessory may be performed.

Next, FIG. 118 is an image diagram regarding power-off.

<In the case of non-time reduction game state>
(a) It is in a non-reduced time game state, and decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. As for the first decorative design, "711" is stop-displayed in "numbers + characters", and as for the second decorative design, "711" (numbers only) is stop-displayed. (b) After that, a power failure occurs. (c) After that, the power is restored, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The second decorative pattern has the same pattern combination (combination of the same numbers) and display mode (display format) as before the power was turned off. On the other hand, the first decorative pattern is the same pattern combination (combination of the same numbers) as before the power is turned off, but the display mode (display format) is changed to "numbers" only. In addition, in the same figure, when the power is cut off in the situation where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the non-reduction game state, only the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbols is changed and the symbol combination is changed. (combination of numbers) is the same, but it is not limited to this, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern and the pattern combination (number combination) may be changed. As an example, in a non-time-reduced game state, when the first decorative symbol is "numbers + characters" and "283" is stopped and displayed, the power is cut off, and then the power is restored. The decorative pattern may be configured to be displayed as "711" exclusively for when the power is restored in the form of "numbers". Even if only the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern can be changed before the power is turned off and after the power is restored, the display mode (display format) and the pattern combination (combination of numbers) are changed. Even in the case of such a configuration, it may be configured so that only "numbers" are displayed after the power is restored, and then "numbers + characters" are displayed at the timing when pattern variation starts.

<In the case of time reduction game state>
(d) It is in the time reduction game state, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. As for the first decorative design, "711" is stop-displayed in "numbers + characters", and as for the second decorative design, "711" (numbers only) is stop-displayed. (e) After that, a power failure occurs. (f) After that, the power is restored, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The second decorative pattern has the same pattern combination (combination of the same numbers) and display mode (display format) as before the power was turned off. In addition, the first decorative pattern is also the same pattern combination (combination of the same numbers) as before the power is cut off, and the display mode (display format) is also the same "numbers + characters" as before the power is cut off. .

In addition, in the same figure, the case where the power is cut off while the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the non-time-reduced game state and the situation where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the time-reduced game state are shown. Although the comparison is made with the case where the power failure occurs, the probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state and the probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state may be compared, or the non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state may be compared. The time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state may be compared. In addition, as shown in the same figure, when the power is restored after the power is turned off in the situation where the decoration design is stopped and the suspension is not occurring, and when the power is restored after the power is turned off in the situation where the decoration design is displayed fluctuating. 113, the power recovery screen as shown in FIG. 113(e) may be configured not to be displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 113, when the power is restored after the power has been turned off in a situation where no suspension has occurred and the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, a power restoration screen such as (e) of FIG. 113 is displayed. Alternatively, the display time may be shortened compared to the case where the power is restored after the power is turned off while the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in the non-reduced time gaming state, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is different before the power is turned off and after the power is restored, but only the pattern combination (combination of numbers) is different. Alternatively, both the combination of symbols (combination of numbers) and the display mode (display format) may be different. In addition, although "numbers" and "numbers + characters" have been exemplified as configurations with different display modes (display formats), the present invention is not limited to this, and character designs, character types, number colors, arithmetic The display mode may be different depending on whether it is a numeral or a Chinese numeral, the size, or the like (similarly applicable to other configurations). Also, in the case where a power outage occurs in the time-reduced game state in the same figure, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is the same before the power outage and after the power is restored, but the symbol combination ( number combination) may be configured to be different (eg, before power failure: "283", after power recovery: "711").

In addition, in the non-reduced time gaming state (and non-probability variable gaming state), a plurality of production stages (also referred to as production modes) are prepared, and the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is changed according to the production stage. may be configured to As an example, as shown in FIG. 97, at least a production stage A and a production stage B may be provided, and the production stage A may be configured to be changeable (movable) to the production stage B. In this case, the production stage "Numbers" have a common format, such as "numbers + characters A" in stage A, and "numbers + characters B" in stage B. ("Character A" means a character corresponding to a "number" to be displayed among a plurality of types of characters belonging to the animal type of character type A. For example, if "8" means "elephant" Correspondingly, "character B" means a character corresponding to a "number" to be displayed among a plurality of types of characters belonging to the fruit type that is character type B. For example, if "8" is "watermelon". applies, and the display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern is the same in both the production stage A and the production stage B). On the other hand, in the time reduction game state (and the probability variable game state), the production stage may be one type of production stage C, and the production stage C may be configured to have a display mode (display format) of only "numbers". Here, when the power supply is restored after the occurrence of the power failure in the non-time reduction game state (and the non-probability variable game state), the production stage (after the screen is restored) will always be the production stage A, and the production stage B will be performed. If the power is turned off and then restored in a situation where the first decorative pattern is "number + character B" and "711" is stopped, the stage will be stage A and the first decorative pattern will be "number + character B", "711" is stop-displayed, and "711" is stop-displayed with only "numbers" as the first decoration pattern in the effect stage C of the time reduction game state (and the probability variation game state). If the power supply is turned off and then restored, the production stage C is maintained and the first decoration pattern is only "numbers" and "711" is stopped and displayed. Similarly, if the power supply is restored after the power failure occurs in the non-time reduction game state (and the non-probability variable game state), the production stage will always be the production stage A. If the power supply is turned off and then restored in the situation where "283" is stopped and displayed with "number + character B", the stage will be stage A and the first decorative pattern will be "number + character B" with "711". It will be stopped and displayed, and in the situation where the first decorative symbol is only "numbers" and "283" is stopped and displayed at the production stage C in the time reduction game state (and the probability variable game state), the power is turned off and after that When the power supply is restored, the production stage C is maintained and the first decoration pattern is only "number" and "711" is stopped and displayed. It is supplemented that such a relationship between the game state, the performance stage, and the first decorative symbol (and the second decorative symbol) can be applied to all configurations according to this example. In addition, when the power is restored after the power failure occurs in the non-time shortening game state (and the non-variable probability game state), and when the production stage is configured to always be the production stage A, the first decoration in the production stage B In the situation where the symbol is "number + character B" and "283" is stopped, if the power is turned off and then the power is restored, the stage will be stage A and the first decorative symbol will be "number + character A" and " 711” may be stopped.

In the figure, the case of the non-time-reduced game state and the case of the time-reduced game state are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the case of the non-probability-variable game state and the case of the probability-variable game state are compared. It may be applied to the case of comparison, or may be applied to the case of comparing the case of the non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state with the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. It should be noted that the comparison of applicable game states is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. Similarly, the configuration comparing the case of the non-probability varying gaming state and the case of the probability varying gaming state may be applied to the case of comparing the case of the non-time shortening gaming state and the case of the time shortening gaming state. Alternatively, it may be applied to compare the non-probability varying gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state with the probability varying gaming state and time shortening gaming state. Similarly, the non-probability variation gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state and the probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state are compared. It may be applied to the case of comparing the case, or may be applied to the case of comparing the case of the non-probability variation gaming state and the case of the probability variation gaming state.

Next, FIG. 119 is an image diagram regarding the final variation in the time reduction game state. In the same figure, after the end of the winning game (big winning game or small winning game), it shifts to a non-probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, and the number of time reductions is given 100 times.

(a) The 99th symbol variation in the time shortening game state is completed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. As for the first decorative design, "613" is displayed as "number", and as for the second decorative design, "613" (number only) is displayed as stopped. In addition, there is only one hold, and since this is a time-reduced game state, a right-handed instruction display (an image prompting the player to hit right-handed) is displayed.

(b) After that, the 100th symbol variation starts as the final variation in the time shortening game state. (c) After that, a power cut occurs during the final variation in the time-reduced game state. (d) After that, the power is restored, and at the first timing after the power is restored, the right-handed instruction display is displayed again, and the display mode is the same as before the power was turned off. In addition, the display of the second decorative pattern is also displayed in the same display mode (display format) as before power-off. As a modification, the right-handed instruction display may be displayed again, but the second decorative pattern may not be displayed again. (e) After that, at the second timing after the power is restored, the first decorative pattern is displayed again in the same display mode (display format) and pattern combination (combination of numbers) as before the power was turned off. is displayed again in a display mode (display format) of only "" and a combination of numbers "711". The first decorative symbol displayed again is fixed and stopped, and during the variable fixed time at the time of this fixed stop, the time-reduced gaming state is maintained (when the variable fixed time ends, the non-time-reduced game state transition), and the right-handed instruction display is still continuously displayed. (f) After that, the variable fixed time ends at the third timing after the power supply is restored, the state shifts to the non-time-reduced game state, and the first decorative pattern changes to a display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time-reduced game state. ("number + character" and "711"). In this way, after the power is restored, the first decorative symbol is displayed again after the right-handed instruction display is displayed again.

By configuring in this way, even if power failure occurs in the middle of the final variation in the time shortening game state, by visually recognizing the stop display of the first decorative pattern after the power is restored, the power can be displayed in any game state. It is possible to recognize whether a disconnection has occurred, and for example, in a game machine where the variation time of decorative symbols in the time shortened game state is short, it is difficult to determine at what timing the time shortened game state ends. Therefore, it is particularly suitable.

In addition, since it takes time for the player to shoot a game ball with a right stroke and the main game pattern starts to change, when the power is cut off in the time shortened game state and the power is restored, By configuring to display the right-handed instruction display before the display of the first decorative pattern, it is possible to teach the player an appropriate firing position rather than re-displaying the decorative pattern when the power is cut off. By giving priority, subsequent games can proceed smoothly.

In FIG. 119, the re-display timing of the second decorative symbol after the power is restored may be before the re-display timing of the right-handed instruction display, or substantially the same as the re-displayed timing of the right-handed instruction display. , or may be substantially the same as the redisplay timing of the first decorative symbol. Also, as described above, the effect mode in the non-time-reduced game state and the effect mode in the time-reduced game state may be different. With such a configuration, when the power failure does not occur, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the time shortened game state is temporarily stopped until the first decorative symbol of the 100th rotation, which is the final variation of the time shortened game state, is temporarily stopped. is a display mode (display format), and during the temporary stop (the game state during this temporary stop is still the time-reduced game state), although it is in the time-reduced game state, the second corresponding to the non-time-reduced game state The display mode (display format) is changed to 1 decorative design, after which the first decorative design is fixed and stopped, and at the same time, the second decorative design, which was fluctuating at the time of the temporary stop of the first decorative design, is also fixed and stopped, After that, it may be configured to shift to a non-time-reduced gaming state, and to maintain the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol in the display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time-reduced gaming state (in this case, The display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern does not change).

Further, in FIG. 119, after the first decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode (display format) before the power is turned off at the timing of (e), the display mode (display format) does not change with the passage of time, and then When a new hold occurs and the pattern variation starts, the first decoration pattern may be displayed in a display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-reduced time gaming state.

In addition, in FIG. 119, after the timing of (c), without going through (d), at the timing of (e), the first decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode (display format) before the power is turned off. can be configured to Also, at the timing after (e) (the timing after the variable fixed time has elapsed), based on the game state switching from the time-reduced game state to the non-time-reduced game state, a left-handed instruction is displayed. After the timing of (f), that is, immediately after the shift to the non-time-reduced game state and immediately after the first fluctuation starts, the left-handed instruction display is continuously displayed for a predetermined time and then erased. good too. The display priority at that time is configured to be in the order of left-handed instruction display>second decorative design>second reserved display>first decorative design. Note that the left-handed instruction display is composed of image objects that are the same as or similar to the left-handed warning display shown in FIG. In the above description, the left-handed instruction display when the power is turned off and the power is restored is described, but unlike FIG. Even if it progresses to the non-time-reduced gaming state, the variation in the non-time-reduced gaming state, which is the 100th next variation of the time-reduced gaming state (the first time after shifting to the non-time-reduced gaming state Immediately after the start of the variation), it may be configured so that a left-handed instruction is displayed, and in the case of such a configuration, if the power is cut off at the 100th rotation of the time shortening game state and the power is restored, the time Even immediately after the start of the variation in the non-time-reduced game state, which is the 100th next variation in the shortened game state (the first variation after shifting to the non-time-reduced game state), the left-handed instruction display is not performed. may be configured.

Further, the gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(1) Suspension does not occur, and decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state.
(2) A power failure occurs.
(3) The power supply is restored, the effect display device displays that the screen is being restored, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are not displayed.
(4) In the situation where the effect display device displays that the screen is being returned, a new suspension occurs and the main game symbols start to fluctuate, but the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols remain hidden. becomes.
(5-1) After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power supply was restored, the effect display device ends the display indicating that the screen is being restored, and the variable display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern resumes.
(5-2) Alternatively, after the power is restored, a predetermined time, which is a time during which the display of screen restoration on the effect display device can be finished, has passed, but since the main game symbols are fluctuating, the screen is restored. continues, and when the variation of the main game symbols ends, the display of the screen returning on the effect display device ends, and the variation display of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols resumes (suspension further occurs ) or a stop indication is given (if no pending has occurred, ie no new changes can be initiated).
It may be configured as described above.
That is, it may be configured to act like "(1)→(2)→(3)→(4)→(5-1)", or "(1)→(2)→(3)". →(4)→(5-2)”.

Next, FIG. 120 shows a configuration relating to display priority (display priority) in the effect display device SG when an error occurs. A high display priority means that the display is on the front side (front layer) of the player, and a low display priority means that the display is on the rear side (back layer) of the player's view. is that

First, (a) the receiver (upper tray) full tank abnormality is detected, and an error display of "Please remove the ball" is displayed on the performance display device SG. In addition, the error display overlaps the display area of the first decorative pattern, and the display priority of the error display is higher than that of the first decorative pattern. Specifically, the error display of "Please pull out the ball" is displayed in the front layer than the display of the first decorative pattern, which is displayed as "711" in "numbers + characters". Also, the display area of the error display does not overlap with the display area of the second decorative pattern. Specifically, the display area of the error display "Please pull out the ball" does not overlap with the display of the second decorative pattern displaying "711".

After that, (b) the cross button SB-2 is operated (either the right button or the left button) to display the volume adjustment screen. When the cross button SB-2 for displaying the volume adjustment screen is operated, the volume is not adjusted (that is, only the volume adjustment screen is displayed) regardless of whether the right button is operated or the left button is operated. As a modification, when the right button is operated, the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the volume is increased by one level, and when the left button is operated, the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the volume is decreased by one level. may be configured as follows. In a situation where the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted based on the operation of the cross button SB-2 while the volume adjustment screen is displayed (for example, the operation of the right button of the cross button SB-2 Pressing increases the volume by one step, and pressing the left button of the cross button SB-2 decreases the volume by one step). Further, the display area of the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative pattern and the error display, but does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. The display priority is "error display→volume adjustment screen→first decoration pattern" from the highest. That is, by displaying the volume adjustment screen, part of the display of the first decorative pattern that is displayed as "711" in "number + character" becomes invisible, while "Please pull out the ball ” is configured to be visible. Also, when the volume adjustment screen is displayed, pressing the right button of the cross button SB-2 increases the volume by one level, or pressing the left button of the cross button SB-2 increases the volume by one level. When the volume becomes low, the speaker may output a sound that makes it possible to recognize the volume level after the change (which can be output each time the right button or left button of the cross button SB-2 is operated).

In this way, in the same figure, while the saucer (upper tray) full state abnormality is occurring, in other words, in a situation where the error display, the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern are displayed, the cross button SB- By operating 2, the volume adjustment screen is displayed. In other words, the volume can be adjusted even while the pan (upper pan) is full. In the figure, the case where the tray (upper tray) is full is exemplified, but this is only an example, and it may be applied to the situation where other errors occur. Also, it is not necessary to act as shown in the figure during all errors, and depending on the type of error that has occurred, a different action from that shown in the figure (for example, pressing the cross button SB-2 while an error It may be configured so that the volume adjustment screen is not displayed and the volume cannot be adjusted even if the operation is performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferentially notify the information to be notified to the player, such as error display, and to play the game by visually recognizing the second decorative pattern even if the visibility of the first decorative pattern is lowered. The player can grasp the situation of In addition, although the volume adjustment screen overlaps the error display and reduces visibility, the fact that the volume adjustment screen is displayed itself is visible, so the player can tell that the volume can be adjusted at present. By operating the cross button SB-2, the volume output from the speaker changes, so the player can adjust the volume without any problem. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which a confirmation sound is output from a speaker so that the current volume level can be recognized each time the cross-shaped button SB-2 is operated to adjust the volume (the volume of the confirmation sound changes according to the volume level). do).

Although the display conditions and display priority of the volume adjustment screen and the volume adjustment operation are described in detail in FIG. However, to display the light intensity adjustment screen, unlike the volume adjustment screen, it is necessary to operate the up button or the down button of the cross button SB-2. Operation of the upper button or lower button of button SB-2 (When the upper button is operated, the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed and the light intensity increases by one level, and when the lower button is operated, the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. The difference is that the amount of light is reduced by one step).

The display areas of the error display and the second decorative pattern may be overlapped, or the display priority of the error display may be higher than that of the second decorative pattern.

In addition, the game machine detects that the tray (upper tray) is full (the tray (upper tray) is full), and the game machine detects that the tray (upper tray) is full error state A until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the occurrence of a full tank abnormality), and the game machine detects a tray (upper tray) full tank abnormality occurs), and the situation in which a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the game machine detected the tray (upper tray) full-up error (the tray (upper tray) full-up error occurred) In the case of state B, the configuration may be as follows.

When the first decorative pattern is fixedly stopped (or temporarily stopped), when it is configured to output a stop sound (a sound effect at the time of stop, also called stop SE), an error display is displayed on the effect display device SG. When the display is in the error state A, when the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (or temporarily stopped), a stop sound (stop SE) is output, and an error display is displayed on the effect display device SG. In the case of the error state B, the stop sound (stop SE) may not be output when the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (or temporarily stopped).

It should be noted that the fixed stop may be a temporary stop immediately before the fixed stop. Shaking fluctuation is performed → the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Further, the temporary stop may be applied to the temporary stop of a special symbol related to the pseudo continuous variation.

It should be noted that when a predetermined error occurs (for example, the saucer (upper tray) full tank error) is defined as error state A, and when a specific error occurs (for example, starting entrance winning error) is defined as error state B, which is applied to the above configuration. You may

In addition, in the same figure, the case where the error display and/or the volume adjustment screen is displayed during the stop display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is illustrated, but it is not limited to this, and the first Even when the error display and/or the volume adjustment screen are displayed while the decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable display (the first decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped), the same display priority as in the figure is displayed. configuration may be applied. In other words, the configuration regarding the display priority similar to that of the figure may be applied to any timing during the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in the figure can be applied to any game state. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 35, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be employed, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 121 shows the configuration regarding the display priority (display priority) in the effect display device SG when executing the button effect. First, (a) the number of reservations is 2, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are fluctuating. After that, (b) at a predetermined timing of the change, a button effect is executed, and an operation suggestion image (a button image with "PUSH" written substantially in the center of the liquid crystal screen) is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display area of the operation suggesting image overlaps that of the first decorative pattern, and the display priority of the operation instructing image is higher than that of the first decorative pattern. Further, the display areas of the operation suggestion image and the second decorative pattern do not overlap.

<Pattern 1>
After that, since the sub-input button was operated while (c) the operation suggestion image was being displayed (the valid period of the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect), the post-operation image in the button effect was “Gekiatsu!! !” is displayed on the effect display device SG (the operation suggestion image is erased). The display area of the post-operation image overlaps with the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the second reserved display (sometimes referred to as a second reserved image). "symbol->second reserved display->image after operation->first decoration pattern". In addition, the display area of the post-operation image is larger than that of the operation suggestive image, and by configuring in this way, the player operates the sub-input button SB with the desire to see the post-operation image more conspicuous. You can increase the frequency. In addition, since the second decorative design and the second reserved display are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate, the order of the display priority of the second decorative design and the second reserved display may be changed, The display priority may be the same. Further, in pattern 1 of FIG. 11, the post-operation image is configured to overlap the second pending display, but the post-operation image may be configured not to overlap the second pending display.

<Pattern 2>
After the above-mentioned (b), since the sub-input button was operated during (d) display of the operation suggesting image (effective period of the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect), the post-operation image in the button effect , “CHANCE!” is displayed on the effect display device SG (the operation suggestion image is erased). The display area of the post-operation image overlaps with the first decorative design and the first reserved display (which may also be configured to overlap with the reserved digestion transfer image), and the display area does not overlap with the second decorative design. The display priority is "first reserved display→post-operation image→first decorative pattern" in descending order. In addition, the display area of the post-operation image is larger than that of the operation suggestive image, and by configuring in this way, the player operates the sub-input button SB with the desire to see the post-operation image more conspicuous. You can increase the frequency. In addition, in the case of acting as in (d), the display priority of the second decorative pattern may be higher than that of the first reserved display. In pattern 2 of FIG. 2, the post-operation image is configured so as not to overlap the second pending display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the post-operation image overlaps the first pending display and the second pending display. may be configured to In such a configuration, the display priority of the post-operation image may be configured to be lower than the display priority of the first reserved display and the second reserved display.

It should be noted that it may be configured to have a plurality of types of operation suggestive images, for example, it is configured to have an operation suggestive image A that is displayed relatively frequently and an operation suggestive image B that is displayed relatively infrequently. In this case, only the operation suggesting image A may act like pattern 1 or pattern 2, and the operation suggesting image B may not act like pattern 1 or pattern 2 above. As an example, the display area of the operation suggesting image A may be smaller than that of the post-operation image, but the display area of the operation suggesting image B may be larger than that of the post-operation image.

In addition, in the same figure, it is configured such that the button effect starts (the operation suggestion image is displayed) in a situation where the symbol variation is not ready-to-win, but it is not limited to this, and during execution of the super ready-to-win effect. It may be configured to display a button effect (operation suggestion image). In such a configuration, the operation suggestion image and the post-operation image may be configured to have a higher display priority than the image during the super reach effect (for example, the image of the main character and the image of the enemy character). . The display priority with other elements may be the same as in the configuration of FIG.

Next, FIG. 122 shows the configuration regarding the display mode (display format) and the variation pattern of the first decorative design. In the configuration shown in the figure, as the limited frequency states described above, there are a limited frequency state A (a state in which the variation pattern table A is referred to) and a limited frequency state B (a state in which the variation pattern table B is referred to). As a state related to a variation pattern different from the frequency state, there is a normal game state (a state in which a normal variation pattern table is referred to).

(a) It is a time reduction game state, the state related to the variation pattern is limited frequency state A, and the first decorative pattern is displayed as "617" in "number". Further, in the limited frequency state A, the variation pattern is configured as follows. In the pattern variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortening game state, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, in the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table A ) to determine the variation pattern. Also, in the pattern variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game symbols in the non-reduced time gaming state, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table A) is used to determine the variation pattern. In addition, the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table A) may be provided with a limited frequency state (variation pattern table) corresponding to the number of reservations on the second main game side, for example, when the number of reservations is "1" Limited frequency state A1 (variation pattern table A1) to be used, Limited frequency state A2 (variation pattern table A2) to be used when the number of reservations is "2", Limited frequency state A3 to be used when the number of reservations is "3" (variation pattern table A3), limited frequency state A4 (variation pattern table A4) used when the number of reservations is "4", and so on. Limited frequency state A12 (variation pattern table A12) used when the number is "1" or "2", Limited frequency state A34 (variation pattern table A34) used when the number of reservations is "3" or "4" A limited frequency state (fluctuation pattern table) that is common to a portion of the number of reservations may be provided, such as.
<When you lose>
Random number: 0-499 → Fluctuation time: 3 seconds Random number: 500-799 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 800-999 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds
Random number: 0 to 299 → Fluctuation time: 3 seconds Random number: 300 to 499 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 500 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds

After that, the pattern variation of the main game pattern is executed 50 times without winning a win (big win, small win), and the game state remains the time-reduced game state, but the state regarding the variation pattern changes from the limited frequency state A. Switch to limited frequency state B. "617" is still displayed in the "number" of the first decorative pattern. Further, in the limited frequency state B, the variation pattern is configured as follows. In the pattern variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortening game state, the limited frequency state B (fluctuation pattern table B) is applied regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. is configured to determine a variation pattern using Also, if the limited frequency state A (fluctuation pattern table A) is not used in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the non-reduced time gaming state, the second main game side is held. Regardless of the number, the limited frequency state B (fluctuation pattern table B) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the limited frequency state B (variation pattern table B) may be provided with a limited frequency state (variation pattern table) corresponding to the number of reservations on the second main game side, for example, when the number of reservations is "1" Limited frequency state B1 (variation pattern table B1) to be used, limited frequency state B2 (variation pattern table B2) to be used when the number of reservations is "2", limited frequency state B3 to be used when the number of reservations is "3" (fluctuation pattern table B3), limited frequency state B4 (fluctuation pattern table B4) used when the number of reservations is "4", and so on. Limited frequency state B12 (variation pattern table B12) used when the number is "1" or "2", limited frequency state B34 (variation pattern table B34) used when the number of reservations is "3" or "4" A limited frequency state (fluctuation pattern table) that is common to a portion of the number of reservations may be provided, such as.
<When you lose>
Random number: 0 to 299 → Fluctuation time: 3 seconds Random number: 300 to 499 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 500 to 849 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 850 to 919 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 920 to 979 → Fluctuation time: 60 seconds Random number: 980-999 → Fluctuation time: 120 seconds
Random number: 0 to 99 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 100 to 199 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 200 to 399 → Fluctuation time: 60 seconds Random number: 400 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 120 seconds

After that, the pattern variation of the main game pattern is executed 50 times without winning a win (big win or small win), the time shortening game state ends, the game state becomes a non-time shortening game state, and the state relating to the variation pattern. is switched from the limited frequency state B to the normal game state (normal variation pattern table which is a normal game state regarding a variation pattern different from the limited frequency state). As the first decorative pattern, "617" is displayed by "numbers + characters". In addition, in the normal game state, the variation pattern is configured as follows. It should be noted that the normal game state (normal fluctuation pattern table) is preferably provided with a normal game state (normal fluctuation pattern table) corresponding to the number of reservations on the first main game side. For example, normal game state 1 (normal fluctuation pattern table 1) used when the number of reservations is "1", normal game state 2 (normal fluctuation pattern table 2) used when the number of reservations is "2", number of reservations Normal game state 3 (normal fluctuation pattern table 3) used when is "3", normal game state 4 (normal fluctuation pattern table 4) used when the number of reservations is "4", etc. A game state (normal fluctuation pattern table) may be provided, and a normal game state 12 (normal fluctuation pattern table 12) used when the number of reservations is "1" or "2", the number of reservations is "3", " A normal game state (normal fluctuation pattern table) common to some reserved numbers may be provided, such as a normal game state 34 (normal fluctuation pattern table 34) used in the case of 4".
<When you lose>
Random number: 0 to 199 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 200 to 699 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 700 to 919 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 920 to 979 → Fluctuation time: 60 seconds Random number: 980 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 120 seconds <at the time of hit>
Random number: 0 to 99 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 100 to 199 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 200 to 399 → Fluctuation time: 60 seconds Random number: 400 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 120 seconds

In this way, in the configuration in the same figure, after the winning game (big win game or small win game) is completed, the state is shifted to the time shortening game state, and after that, when the winning (big win, small win) is not won, the "time 50 changes in the shortened game state and limited frequency state A→50 changes in the time shortened game state and limited frequency state B→non-reduced time game state and normal game state”.

In addition, in the figure, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is different between the time-reduced game state and the non-time-reduced game state. The display mode (display format) of the first decoration pattern is the same in the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B, which are the same game state in the state. By configuring in this way, even when the background effect is designed to switch to various effect modes even in the same game state, the game can be played by visually recognizing the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern. It is possible to grasp the state, for example, at the end of the time-reduced game state (a situation in which the player cannot accurately grasp whether the time-reduced game state has ended), a hit (big win, small win) pattern Even when is stopped and displayed, it is possible to accurately recognize in which game state the win (big win or small win) is achieved by visually recognizing the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern.

In the same figure, in the time reduction game state, it is configured to transition between two limited frequency states, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to transition between three or more limited frequency states. In such a case, as in the case of the configuration of FIG. 11, if the game state is the same, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbols may be the same even if the limited frequency state is different. .

In the same figure, the display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern varies depending on the game state (whether it is a time-reduced game state) or a state related to the variation pattern (whether it is a limited frequency state). Regardless, it's all "numbers". In addition, it has a special effect that can be displayed in the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B, which is a special effect that can be displayed in the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B. 10th variation, 20th variation, . When the number of times (for example, 10 times) or less is reached, a display such as "Time saving number of times remaining XX times!" This "remaining number of time reduction suggesting effect" is not displayed in the non-time reduction game state. In addition, this "remaining number of times of shortening time suggestive effect" is displayed in such a large size that it overlaps with the first decorative pattern but does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. In addition, it is preferable that the display priority is the effect of suggesting the remaining number of times of shortening time>the first decorative pattern. However, the display priority may be the first decorative pattern>remaining number of times of shortening time suggesting effect in order to give priority to the notification of the success/failure determination result.

It should be noted that the time-reduced game state in the same figure may be a game state related to the variation pattern of the main game pattern, or an auxiliary game pattern (probability that the auxiliary game pattern stops with a winning pattern, variation time of the auxiliary game pattern, It may be a game state related to the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric accessory, etc.), or may serve as both. Also, this definition is not limited to the configuration in the figure, but is applicable to all configurations according to this example.

In the same figure, (a) time-reduced game state and limited frequency state A and (b) time-reduced game state and limited frequency state B are the same background effect (or effect mode), but (c) Different background effects (or effect modes) are provided in the non-time-reduced game state and the normal game state. In this case, until the first decorative symbol of the final variation in the limited frequency state B is temporarily stopped, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the limited frequency state B (time shortening game state) is maintained. During the temporary stop (the game state during this temporary stop is still the limited frequency state B and the time shortened game state), although it is in the limited frequency state B (time shortened game state), it corresponds to the non-time shortened game state. The display mode (display format) is changed to the first decorative design, and then the first decorative design is fixed and stopped, and at the same time, the second decorative design, which was fluctuating when the first decorative design was temporarily stopped, is also fixed and stopped. After that, it may be configured to shift to the non-time-reduced gaming state, and to maintain the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbols in the display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time-reduced gaming state (in this case , the display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern does not change). Further, as modifications, (a) time-reduced game state and limited frequency state A, (b) time-reduced game state and limited-frequency state B, and (c) non-time-reduced game state and normal game state. The background effects (or effect modes) may be different for each. Note that the production mode may also be referred to as a production stage, and is a production mode indicated by a background image. Examples include the daytime stage and night stage illustrated in FIG. 82 and the like, stage A and stage B illustrated in FIG. The stage mode corresponds to the performance mode. That is, both the present configuration and the configuration illustrated in FIG. 98 and the like may be employed. Moreover, it is not limited to this, and there is no problem in adopting a combination of a plurality of configurations related to the production mode (production stage, background production, background image) according to this example.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 35, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be adopted, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 123 is a configuration relating to the features of the first decorative symbols depending on the game state.

<a: Time reduction game state>
In the time shortening game state, "787" is not stop-displayed together with the first decorative design and the second decorative design ("232" can be stop-displayed) as a stop design (combination of numbers) that will result in a loss. The display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is "number". Further, the display of the hold display and the hold digestion transmission image is only the display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side. That is, even if a hold on the first main game side occurs, the hold display and hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the hold on the first main game side will not be displayed. Further, in the time shortening game state, the special symbol (“Continued” in the figure) is configured not to be stopped and displayed as the temporary stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. It should be noted that, in the time-reduced gaming state, if a reach of 7 symbols occurs ("7↓7"), it will be a hit (a big hit, a small hit) (not lost), in other words, the first decorative symbol and the second It may be configured such that only "777" is stopped and displayed together with the two decorative symbols. In addition, although this configuration can be applied as long as it is in the time reduction game state, it is preferable to apply it to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state.

<b, c: non-time reduction game state>
(b) In the non-reduced time gaming state, it is configured so that "787" may be stop-displayed together with the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern as a stop pattern (combination of numbers) that will result in a loss ( "232" may also be statically displayed). It should be noted that the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is "numbers + characters". Further, the display of the hold display and the hold digestion transmission image is only the display corresponding to the hold on the first main game side. That is, even if a hold on the second main game side occurs, the hold display and hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the hold on the second main game side will not be displayed. It should be noted that, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, there is a case where a reach of 7 symbols occurs ("7 ↓ 7"), which may result in a loss. may be configured so that can be stopped and displayed. In addition, although this configuration can be applied as long as it is in the non-time shortening gaming state, it is preferable to apply it to the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state.

In addition, in the (c) non-reduced time gaming state, a special symbol ("Continued" in the figure) can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol of the first decoration symbol. Here, the special symbols are symbols that are not stopped and displayed as fixed stop symbols, such as "continued" symbols that temporarily stop when pseudo continuous variation is executed, and "development" symbols that are temporarily stopped before the super reach effect is executed. It has become.

By configuring in this way, in the time-reduced gaming state, since the player pays attention to the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, the number of types of stop modes of the first decorative symbols can be reduced, or a predetermined While simplifying the display mode (number of display types) of the first decorative pattern, such as preventing the special pattern from being stopped and displayed, in the non-reduced time game state, the process until winning (big win, small win) In order to entertain, the display mode (number of display types) of the first decorative pattern is diversified, such as increasing the number of types of stop modes of the first decorative pattern and allowing predetermined special patterns to be stopped and displayed. By doing so, an appropriate performance environment can be constructed according to the game state.

Also, in the figure, the time-reduced gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state are compared, but the probability-variable gaming state and the non-probability-variable gaming state may be compared, or the gaming state related to the variation pattern ( A comparison may be made between the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B), or comparison may be made between the performance modes controlled by the sub-control board S (the performance mode A and the performance mode B). In the case of comparison in the performance mode, etc., it may be configured in combination with the configuration (stage A, stage B) relating to the performance mode described above with reference to FIG. 97 . More specifically, the production mode in the non-time-reduced gaming state (non-probability-variable gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state) in the figure is stage A in FIG. Both the configuration of FIG. 97 and the configuration of FIG. 97 may be adopted as stage B in FIG.

It should be noted that while a predetermined special symbol can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol in a non-time shortened game state, it is configured not to be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol in a time shortened game state. It may be constructed such that it can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol in both the shortened game state and the time shortened game state.

Further, the animation of the first decorative symbol may be stopped when the main game symbol is fixed and stopped, but the animation of the first reserved display may not be stopped. In the case of the first decorative pattern, the animation means that the pattern is moving such as swinging, the pattern of the numbers that make up the pattern is moving, or the character that is making up the pattern is moving. In the case of the first reserved display, the first reserved display is rotated, the pattern in the first reserved display is accompanied by movement, and the like. As an example of the period during which the animation of the first decorative pattern is stopped, fixed variable time can be exemplified. In addition, regarding the second decorative pattern and the second reserved display, the animation itself is not executed even during fluctuation or during fixed fluctuation (during stop display, during fixed fluctuation time), and the second decorative pattern is There are only variable display and variable fixed display (stopped display), and the second pending display only displays the pending number (including addition and subtraction).

In addition, the first decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped and then variably displayed again, and may be stopped and displayed with a different combination of symbols than when temporarily stopped. It may be configured so that there is no such case. As a specific example,
(1) The first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate → Develops into a super reach effect → As a result of the super reach effect, "666" is temporarily stopped and displayed → All patterns start to fluctuate again → "777" is temporarily stopped → Shaking fluctuation → Fixed stop (2) The 1st decorative pattern starts to fluctuate → Temporary stop display at the pattern combination “6 series 6” with the middle pattern as a special pattern → All patterns start to fluctuate again → Develop into a super reach production → Super reach production As a result, "666" may be configured as temporary stop display→shaking fluctuation→definite stop. The second decorative design in (1) and (2) is continuously displayed while the first decorative design is fluctuating (until just before the first decorative design is fixed and stopped), and at the same time as the first decorative design is fixed and stopped. Confirm stop.
With this configuration, the first decorative symbols play a role in enlivening the game by executing various effects, while the second decorative symbols can accurately notify the result of the game.

In addition, the first decorative pattern can change its mode by operating the operation member (for example, sub-input button, cross button, etc.) controlled by the sub-control board S, but the second decorative pattern is controlled by the sub-control board S. The mode does not change depending on the operation of the operating member (for example, sub-input button, cross button, etc.). Here, the mode change means that part or all of the design of the pattern is changed, the case where the temporarily stopped first decorative pattern returns and temporarily stops, or the case where the first decorative pattern moves forward (slides) and stops temporarily It is a change related to a variation mode such as a case, a temporary stop display of a special symbol, a change of the speed of the variation display of the first decorative symbol, and the like. With this configuration, the first decorative symbols play a role in enlivening the game by executing various effects, while the second decorative symbols can accurately notify the result of the game.

Next, FIG. 124 shows specific pattern variations on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state (for example, reach variations that perform normal reach effects for winning A3 in FIG. 12, super reach effects for winning A6, battle reach It shows the execution timing of each action etc. in the reach fluctuation that performs the first half and the second half of the production. It should be noted that various variations in the time-reduced gaming state instead of the non-time-reduced gaming state may be possible, and the reach that performs the first half and the second half of the normal reach production, super ready-to-win production, and battle ready-to-win production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 It may be a variation, or it may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the second main game symbol instead of a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. good. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is clear that the trigger of the look-ahead effect can be held as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. is.

In FIG. 124, execution timing of each action etc. will be described in chronological order, and detailed description will be omitted here. Since the detailed aspects of each action (a) to (n2) shown in FIG. 124 correspond to (a) to (n2) in FIGS. . First, in (a), in a non-time-reduced game state, there is a hold on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side. This is the timing when the corresponding first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. is digested, and the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner, and this is the timing to execute the action 1 at the start of variation, ( c) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns that have started the variable display execute the acceleration fluctuation, and (d) is the timing for the left, middle, and right columns that have executed the acceleration fluctuation. (e) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column, which has performed the high-speed variation, performs the deceleration variation, and (f) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column performs the high-speed variation. (g) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern performs the fixed position action 1, (g) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the right column that has performed the high speed variation performs the deceleration variation, (h) is the timing in the right column is the timing at which the first decorative symbol executes the fixed position action 1, (i) is the timing at which the pseudo consecutive pattern executes the deceleration fluctuation, and (j) is the timing at which the pseudo consecutive pattern executes the fixed position action 1 (k) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 1, (l) is the timing at which the pseudo continuous pattern executes the re-variation, and (m) is the timing to execute the action 2 at the start of fluctuation when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start re-fluctuation (pseudo-run), and (n) is the left where re-fluctuation starts The first decorative symbols in the row, the middle row, and the right row are the timing for executing the acceleration variation, and (o) is the timing for executing the acceleration variation, and the first decoration symbols in the left row, the middle row, and the right row execute the high-speed variation. (p) is the timing for the first decorative symbol in the left column that has performed the high speed variation to perform the deceleration variation, and (q) is the timing for the first decorative symbol in the left column to perform the fixed position action 2. (r) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the right column that has performed the high-speed variation executes the deceleration variation, and (s) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the right column performs the fixed position action 2 (t) is the timing after the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the fixed position action 2, and (u) is the timing after the first decorative symbol in the left and right columns is tenpai. Execute action 1 (v) is the timing for the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns to perform the shaking action 1, (w) is the timing for the pseudo continuous symbols to perform the deceleration variation, ( x) is the timing at which the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the fixed-position action 2, (y) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed-position action 2, and (z) is the pseudo-continuous pattern. (a2) is the timing at which the pattern changes again, and (a2) is the timing at which the change start action 3 is executed when starting the change (pseudo run) of the left, middle, and right columns, and (b2) ) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns that have started re-fluctuation execute the acceleration fluctuation, and (c2) is the timing for the left, middle, and right columns that have executed the acceleration fluctuation. (d2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column performs the high-speed variation, and (e2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column performs the deceleration variation. 1 decorative pattern is the timing to execute the fixed position action 3, (f2) is the timing for the first decorative pattern in the right column that has executed the high speed variation to execute the deceleration variation, (g2) is the timing of the right column (h2) is the timing after the first decorative pattern in the right column executes the fixed position action 3; (i2) is the timing in the left column and (j2) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the right column performs the tenpai action 2; (l2) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the column executes the fixed position action 3, (l2) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns executes the determined action, and (m2) is , is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are shaken, and (n2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped. be.

The specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time reduction game state shown in FIG. 124 starts the symbol variation of the first main game symbol at the timing of (b). Then, at the timing of (f) to (k), the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row, and the right row are temporarily stopped, and then at the timing of (l), the first re-variation (pseudo continuous) is performed. Start. As for the first decorative symbol, the second re-fluctuation (pseudo-run) is started at the timing of (m). This first re-variation (pseudo-run) is called a non-reach pseudo-run (pseudo-run in a non-tempered state). Then, the reach effect is executed from the timing of the tenpai action 1 of (u) of the first re-variation (pseudo-continuation) to the fixed position action 2 of (y), and at the timing of (q) to (y), the left column, The first decorative symbols in the middle row and the right row temporarily stop, respectively, and then start the second re-fluctuation (pseudo-run) at the timing of (z). As for the first decorative symbol, the second re-fluctuation (pseudo run) is started at the timing of (a2). This second re-fluctuation (pseudo-run) is called a post-reach pseudo-run (pseudo-run after the state of tenpai). Then, the ready-to-win effect is executed from the timing of the tenpai action 2 of (i2) of the second re-variation (pseudo continuation) to the fixed position action 3 of (k2). In addition, for the production sound (BGM), stage BGM is output from (a) to (u), reach BGM is output from (u) to (y), and stage BGM is output from (z) to (i2). Then, reach BGM is output from (i2) to (k2), and hit (big hit, small hit) BGM (for example, sound effect of deciding action) is output from (l2) to (n2). . It should be noted that the stage BGM may switch its content with a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) as a trigger. Dedicated BGM1, (z)-(i2) stage BGM3 or pseudo-continuous dedicated BGM2 may be output, or stage BGM1 (a)-(k), stage (l)-(u) BGM2 or pseudo-continuous BGM, stage BGM2 or pseudo-continuous BGM may be output from (z) to (i2). Also, when the pseudo-continuous symbols such as (j) and (x) perform the fixed-position action, pseudo-continuous symbol display-dedicated BGM may be output.

FIG. 125 shows execution timings of actions, etc. in the variable standby state. (a3) of FIG. 125 is a different situation from (a) to (n2) of FIG. 124, in which both the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold exist in the non-reduced time game state. It shows the timing when the variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the situation where the first main game symbol is not fixed and stopped at the losing symbol. Then, in (b3) to (f3) after (a3), the first main game symbol in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state The state (variation standby state) in which the first decorative symbol, which has undergone symbol variation in response to the symbol variation, is a lost symbol and is fixed and stopped, continues. In addition, (a3) of FIG. 125 shows the symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-reduced time gaming state in which neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held. 125 (a3) shows the timing when the variation of one decorative symbol is determined and stopped with a losing symbol, but in the non-reduced time game state, both the first main game side and the second main game side are held. It may be the timing when the first decorative symbols, which have changed in pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game symbols in the state where the second main game symbols have not been drawn, are confirmed and stopped as a losing symbol, or the first main game side may be held in the time shortening game state. It may be the timing at which the first decorative symbol, which has undergone symbol variation in response to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in a situation where there is neither nor a hold on the second main game side, is confirmed and stopped as a losing symbol, or it may be time. In a shortened game state, the first decorative pattern, which is changed in pattern corresponding to the pattern change of the first main game pattern in a state where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held, is determined as a losing pattern. It may be the timing of stopping. Then, in (b3) to (f3) after (a3), the first main game symbol in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state The state (variation standby state) in which the first decorative pattern, which has changed in pattern in response to the pattern change, is a lost pattern and is fixed and stopped (variation standby state) continues, but (b3) to (f3) are non- The first decorative pattern, which is changed in pattern corresponding to the pattern change in the second main game pattern in a state where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the time shortening game state, is a losing pattern. The fixed stop state (variable standby state) may be continued, or the state where neither the first main game side hold nor the second main game side hold is present in the time shortening game state. The state (variable standby state) in which the first decorative symbols, which have changed in symbols corresponding to the symbol variations in the second main game symbols, are fixed and stopped as losing symbols, may be continued, or the time may be shortened. In a game state, when there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, the first decorative pattern, which has undergone a pattern change corresponding to the pattern change of the first main game pattern, is determined and stopped as a lost pattern. It may be a state in which the state (variable standby state) continues. Further, (a3) of FIG. 125 shows the symbol variation corresponding to the first main game symbol in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the non-time shortening game state. 1 shows the timing when the variation of the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped with the losing pattern, but as (a3) in FIG. ) End demo end timing, immediately after the end of the winning game (big win game or small win game), immediately after the start of the time shortening game state), after the end of the winning game (big win game or small win game) It may be the timing when "777" or the like is displayed as a winning (big win, small win) symbol in a situation where there is no hold on the second main game side. Then, in the case of such a configuration, (b3) to (f3) after (a3), after the winning game (big win game or small win game) is completed, the holding of the first main game side is also the second main game side. In a state where there is no hold, a state (variable standby state) in which "777" or the like is displayed as a winning (big win, small win) symbol continues.

In FIG. 125, the execution timing of each action etc. will be described in chronological order, and detailed description will be omitted here. Since the detailed aspects of each action (a3) to (f3) shown in FIG. 125 correspond to (a3) to (f3) in FIG. 133, the details will be explained with reference to FIG. First, in (a3), the symbols fluctuated in response to the symbol fluctuations of the first main game symbols in a state where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side holds in the non-time-reduced game state. (b3) is the timing at which the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are displayed in the variable standby state, and (c3) is the timing in the variable standby state. (d3) is the timing at which the displayed volume adjustment screen and light amount adjustment screen are erased, (d3) is the timing at which the first ornamental pattern performs the first shaking action during the variable standby state, and (e3) is the timing. , is the timing for executing the waiting movie in the variable standby state, and (f3) is the timing for the first decorative symbol to execute the second shaking action during the variable standby state. The timing at which the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen displayed in the variable standby state are erased is (d3), and the timing at which the first decorative symbol performs the first shaking action during the variable standby state is (c3 ).

As for BGM (effect sound), the stage BGM is output from (a3) to (d3), and the output of the stage BGM is stopped (the output is set to 0) after a predetermined time elapses from the shaking action of (d3). After the output of the stage BGM is stopped (e3) and (f3), the stage BGM is not output. Here, the timing to stop the output of the stage BGM (set the output to 0) is preferably the timing after (d3) and the timing before (e3). The timing may be the same as the timing.

Next, FIG. 126 shows specific pattern variations on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, reach variations that perform normal reach effects for hitting A3 in FIG. 12, super reach effects for hitting A6, battle reach, etc.) It is a diagram showing the execution timing and execution time of each action of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the right column, and the middle column in the reach fluctuation that performs the first half and the second half of the production. It should be noted that various variations may be in the time-reduced game state instead of the non-time-reduced game state. It may be the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation. In addition, when target is the reach variation that performs the normal reach performance of the hit of A3, the super reach performance of the hit of A6, and the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the battle reach performance, the variation modes of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. As a group, it is clear that the prefetch effect can be triggered pending.

First, when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts a specific symbol variation in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbol in the left column changes the action 1 at the start of variation to H1. seconds to run. After that, fixed position action 1 for T1 seconds, shaking action for Y1 seconds, fluctuation start action 2 for H4 seconds, fixed position action 2 for T4 seconds, shaking action for Y3 seconds, tenpai action 1 for TP1 seconds, shaking action 1 Y4 seconds, fluctuation start action 3 for H7 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T7 seconds, shaking action for Y6 seconds, tenpai action 2 for TP3 seconds, shaking action 2 for Y7 seconds, and decision action for K1 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the left row is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the right column is H2 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T2 seconds for fixed position action 1, Y2 seconds for shaking action, 5 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T5 seconds for fixed position action 2, Tenpai Execute action 1 for 2 seconds TP, swing action 1 for Y5 seconds, action 3 at the start of fluctuation for H8 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T8 seconds, tenpai action 2 for TP4 seconds, shake action 2 for Y8 seconds, and decision action for K2 seconds do. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the right column is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the middle row is H3 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T3 seconds for fixed position action 1, H6 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T6 seconds for fixed position action 2, and H9 for action 3 at the start of fluctuation. Seconds, fixed position action 3 is executed for T9 seconds, and decision action is executed for K3 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the winning super reach effect and the winning battle reach effect, it is configured not to execute the fixed position action 3 in the middle row in the case of winning shown in FIG. 126 . .

In addition, as a temporary display mode, the special symbol (pseudo-continuous pattern) used in the first pseudo-continuous variation is the timing of the fixed position action 1 in the middle row, and the special symbol (pseudo-continuous pattern) used in the second pseudo-continuous variation after that. symbol) is displayed at the timing of fixed position action 2 in the middle row. At that time, the special symbol may be displayed by performing a fixed position action. Then, the group notice shown in FIG. 88 is given at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing earlier than the middle of Y7 seconds) after execution of tenpai action 2 in the left and right columns and during execution of shaking action 2. It is constructed so that it is executed for a time, but is not executed during execution of shake action 1 after execution of tenpai action 1 in the left and right columns. In addition, the pending change effect shown in FIG. 92 is after the execution of action 1 at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns and up to the fixed position action 1 of the first decorative symbols in the left column. Between (change timing 1), after the execution of the action 2 at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns, and until the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative pattern in the left column (change timing 2) Executed after the execution of the action 3 at the start of variation of the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative pattern and before the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the left column (change timing 3). It is possible to execute the pending change performance at all the timings of the change timings 1 to 3, or to execute the pending change performance at any one timing or at the timing 2 of the timings 1 to 3. good too.

The execution time and variable fixed time of each action in FIG. 126 have the following relationship.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (one of H1 to H9 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(1-1) Left column fluctuation start action H seconds (any one of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds one)
(1-2) Right column fluctuation start action H seconds (any one of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < right column shake action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(2) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(2-1) Left column fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds )
(2-2) Right column fixed position action T seconds (any one of T2, T5, or T8 seconds) < Right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(3) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(3-1) Left row tenpai action TP seconds (either one of TP1 or TP3 seconds) < left row shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, or Y7 seconds)
(3-2) Right column tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP2 or TP4 seconds) < right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(4) Decision action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(4-1) K1 seconds of the left column's final action <Y seconds of the left column's shaking action (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, and Y7 seconds)
(4-2) Right column decision action K2 seconds <Right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(5) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(5-1) Total time of fluctuation start action in left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(5-2) Total time of fluctuation start action in right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(6-1) Total time of fixed-position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(6-2) Total time of fixed-position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) < total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(7) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(7-1) Total time of tenpai action in the left column (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) < Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6 and Y7 seconds)
(7-2) Total time of tenpai action in the right column (total time of TP2 and TP4 seconds) < Total time of shaking action in the right column (total time of Y2, Y5 and Y8 seconds)
(8) Total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < total time of shaking action Y seconds (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(8-1) Left column final action K1 sec < total time of left column shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(8-2) Right column decision action K2 seconds < total time of right column shaking action (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(9) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(9-1) Total time of left column fluctuation start action (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds )
(9-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < Y seconds of shake action in right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(10) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(10-1) Total time of fixed position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(10-2) Total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(11) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(11-1) Total time of tenpai action in left column (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in left column (one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, and Y7 seconds)
(11-2) Total time of tenpai action in the right column (total time of TP2 and TP4 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the right column (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(12) Total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(13) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + total time of decision action (total time of K1-K3 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1-Y8 seconds)
(13-1) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed-position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) + left column decision action K1 second < total time of left column shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, and Y7 seconds)
(13-2) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) + right column decision action K2 seconds < total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(14) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(14-1) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed-position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) + left row decision action K1 seconds < left row shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(14-2) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) + right column decision action K2 seconds < right column shake action Y seconds (either one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(15) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (16) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (17) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < Variable fixed time (18) Decision action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < Variable fixed time (19) Shaking action Y seconds (Y1 ~ Y8 seconds) > Variable fixed time (20) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) + fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) + Tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + Decision action K seconds (one of K1 to K3 seconds) > Variable fixed time (21) Total time of action at the start of variation (H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position actions (total time of T1-T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1-TP4 seconds) + total time of decision action (total time of K1-K3 seconds) ) > Variable fixed time (22) Total time of action at the start of variation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (TP1 to TP4) second total time) + total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(23) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
Regarding (15) to (18) above, the variable fixed time may be configured to be shorter. Fixed time", "fixed position action T seconds (one of T1 to T9 seconds) > variable fixed time", "tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) > variable fixed time", " Decision action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds)>variable fixed time” may be satisfied. It should be noted that "either" as used herein may be satisfied as long as either is satisfied, and it is not necessary for both to be satisfied. For example, in the case of (3-2), at least one of TP2<Y2, TP2<Y5, TP2<Y8, TP4<Y2, TP4<Y5, and TP4<Y8 should be satisfied. The variable fixed time is the variable fixed time of the first main game pattern and the variable fixed time of the second main game pattern, and since there is no concept of totaling them, they are regarded as independent times.

Next, FIG. 127 shows specific pattern variations on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced game state (for example, the first and second halves of the normal reach production, super reach production, and battle reach production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13). It is a diagram showing the execution timing and execution time of each action of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the right column, and the middle column in reach fluctuation to be performed). It should be noted that various variations may be in the time-reduced game state instead of the non-time-reduced game state. It may be the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is clear that the trigger of the look-ahead effect can be held as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. is.

First, when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts a specific symbol variation in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbol in the left column changes the action 1 at the start of variation to H1. seconds to run. After that, fixed position action 1 for T1 seconds, shaking action for Y1 seconds, fluctuation start action 2 for H4 seconds, fixed position action 2 for T4 seconds, shaking action for Y3 seconds, tenpai action 1 for TP1 seconds, shaking action 1 Y4 seconds, fluctuation start action 3 for H7 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T7 seconds, shaking action for Y6 seconds, tenpai action 2 for TP3 seconds, and shaking action 2 for Y7 seconds. After the shaking action 2, the first decorative pattern in the left row is shaken and fluctuated with the losing pattern, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the right column is H2 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T2 seconds for fixed position action 1, Y2 seconds for shaking action, 5 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T5 seconds for fixed position action 2, Tenpai Execute action 1 for 2 seconds TP, shake action 1 for Y5 seconds, action 3 at the start of fluctuation for H8 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T8 seconds, tenpai action 2 for TP4 seconds, and shake action 2 for Y8 seconds. After the shaking action 2, the first decorative pattern in the right column is shaken and fluctuated with the losing pattern, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the middle row is H3 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T3 seconds for fixed position action 1, H6 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T6 seconds for fixed position action 2, and H9 for action 3 at the start of fluctuation. seconds to run. Then, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is fluctuated by the lost pattern in accordance with the shaking fluctuation of the left row and the right row, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuation fixing time. It should be noted that, when targeting the change of the reach that performs the first half and the second half of the losing super reach production and the losing battle reach production, the fixed position action 3 in the middle row, the left row, the middle row, and the right row in the case of winning shown in FIG. is configured not to execute the decision action of the first decorative pattern.

The execution time and variable fixed time of each action in FIG. 127 have the following relationship.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (one of H1 to H9 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(1-1) Left column fluctuation start action H seconds (any one of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds one)
(1-2) Right column fluctuation start action H seconds (any one of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < right column shake action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(2) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T8 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(2-1) Left column fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds )
(2-2) Right column fixed position action T seconds (any one of T2, T5, or T8 seconds) < Right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(3) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(3-1) Left row tenpai action TP seconds (either one of TP1 or TP3 seconds) < left row shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, or Y7 seconds)
(3-2) Right column tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP2 or TP4 seconds) < right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(4) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(4-1) Total time of fluctuation start action in left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(4-2) Total time of fluctuation start action in right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(5) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(5-1) Total time of fixed-position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(5-2) Total time of fixed-position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) < total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(6) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(6-1) Total time of tenpai action in the left column (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) < total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(6-2) Total time of tenpai action in the right column (total time of TP2 and TP4 seconds) < total time of shaking action in the right column (total time of Y2, Y5 and Y8 seconds)
(7) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(7-1) Total time of left column fluctuation start action (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds )
(7-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < Y seconds of shake action in right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(8) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(8-1) Total time of fixed-position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(8-2) Total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(9) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(9-1) Total time of tenpai action in the left column (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, and Y7 seconds)
(9-2) Total time of tenpai action in the right column (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(10) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(10-1) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed-position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) < total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(10-2) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) < total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(11) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Shake action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(11-1) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed-position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(11-2) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) < right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(12) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (13) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T8 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (14) Tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <variable fixed time (15) shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)>variable fixed time (16) action at the start of variation H seconds (Any one of H1-H9 seconds) + Fixed position action T seconds (Any one of T1-T8 seconds) + Tenpai action TP seconds (Any one of TP1-TP4 seconds) > Variable fixed time (17 ) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) > fluctuation Fixed time (18) total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total of TP1 to TP4 seconds) time) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(19) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
Regarding (12) to (14) above, the variable fixed time may be configured to be shorter. fixed time", "fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T8 seconds) > variable fixed time", "tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) > variable fixed time" good. It should be noted that "either" as used herein may be satisfied as long as either is satisfied, and it is not necessary for both to be satisfied. For example, in the case of (3-2), at least one of TP2<Y2, TP2<Y5, TP2<Y8, TP4<Y2, TP4<Y5, and TP4<Y8 should be satisfied.

Next, FIG. 128 shows the first left, right, and middle columns in the specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, normal symbol variation with chance look-ahead effect, reach variation) It is a figure which shows the execution timing and execution time of each action of a decorative design. In addition, in FIG. 128, the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance eye look-ahead effect is executed as the pre-trigger variation, and after the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped and displayed with the symbol combination showing the chance symbol, the next symbol variation is hit. The ready-to-reach variation for performing the ready-to-win effect is executed as a trigger variation, and these two symbol variations are the symbol variations before and after which are connected in time series. It should be noted that the time-reduced game state may be used instead of the non-time-reduced game state, and the pattern change of the second main game pattern may correspond to the pattern change of the second main game pattern instead of the first decorative pattern pattern change corresponding to the pattern change of the first main game pattern. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol. In addition, when normal symbol fluctuation and ready-to-win fluctuation are targeted, it is clear that fluctuation modes a1 to a4 shown in FIG.

First, for the first decorative symbol in the left column in the normal symbol variation, the variation start action is performed for H1 seconds, the fixed position action is performed for T1 seconds, and the shaking action is performed for Y1 seconds. After that, the determination stop of the first decorative pattern in the left column is executed over the variable fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the right column executes a fluctuation start action for H2 seconds, a fixed position action for T2 seconds, and a shaking action for Y2 seconds. After that, the fixed stop of the first decorative pattern in the right column is executed over the variable fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the middle row executes a fluctuation start action for H3 seconds, a fixed position action for T3 seconds, and a shaking action for Y3 seconds. After that, the fixing stop of the first decorative pattern in the middle row is executed over the variable fixed time. It should be noted that the fixed-position action for fixing and stopping the chance symbol may be a fixed-position action different from the fixed-position action shown in FIGS. The fixed position action is an action that the first decorative pattern bounces, and the fixed position action in the case of fixing and stopping the chance symbol includes an action that expands after the first decorative pattern jumps. actions taken). 128 is executed as a pre-trigger variation, and after the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols showing a chance eye, the next symbol variation is shown in FIG. It is also possible to configure the reach variation for performing normal reach performance for winning, the reach variation for performing super reach performance for winning, and the reach variation for performing first half and second half of battle reach performance for winning as trigger variation. 128 is executed as a pre-trigger variation, and after the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped and displayed in a symbol combination showing a chance eye, the next symbol variation is shown in FIG. It may be configured to execute the reach variation for performing the normal reach production of the failure, the reach variation for performing the super reach production for the failure, and the reach variation for performing the first half and the second half of the battle reach production for the failure as the trigger variation. Furthermore, the reach variation shown in FIG. 128 may be set as a variation mode group of group 2 or group 3 shown in FIG. In this case, the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance eye look-ahead effect in FIG. It is configured to execute the reach variation that performs the reach effect of hitting 128 as the trigger variation. In other words, not only does the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance look-ahead effect of FIG. 128 lead to the reach variation of FIG. It may be configured so as to lead to fluctuations and reach fluctuations of losing in FIG. 127 .

The execution time of each action in the normal symbol variation in FIG. 128 and the variation fixed time are constructed in the following relationship.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (one of H1 to H3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(1-1) Left column fluctuation start action H1 sec < Left column shake action Y1 sec (1-2) Right column fluctuation start action H2 sec < Right column shake action Y2 sec (1-3) During Row fluctuation start action H3 seconds < middle row shaking action Y3 seconds (2) fixed position action T seconds (one of T1 to T3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y3 seconds) )
(2-1) Left column fixed position action T1 sec <left column shaking action Y1 sec (2-2) Right column fixed position action T2 sec <right column shaking action Y2 sec (2-3) Middle column Fixed position action T3 seconds < middle row shaking action Y3 seconds (3) total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds) (4) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(5) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(7) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(8) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y3 seconds) )
(8-1) Left column action at start of fluctuation H1 sec + Left column fixed position action T1 sec < Left column shake action Y1 sec (8-2) Right column fluctuation start action H2 sec + Right column constant Position action T2 seconds <right row shaking action Y2 seconds (8-3) center row fluctuation start action H3 seconds + middle row fixed position action T3 seconds <middle row shaking action Y3 seconds (9) fluctuation start action H seconds (any one of H1 to H3 seconds) < variable fixed time (10) fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T3 seconds) < variable fixed time (11) shaking action Y seconds (Y1 ~ Any one of Y3 seconds)> Variable fixed time (12) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H3 seconds) + fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T3 seconds)> Fluctuation fixed time (13) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) > Fluctuation fixed time In addition, above (9), ( 10) may be configured so that the variable fixed time is shorter. In other words, "variation start action H seconds (any one of H1 to H3 seconds)>variable fixed time", "fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T3 seconds)>variable fixed time" may be satisfied. It should be noted that "either" as used herein may be satisfied as long as any of them is satisfied, and it is not necessary to satisfy any of them. For example, in the case of (1), at least one of H1<Y1, H1<Y2, H1<Y3, H2<Y1, H2<Y2, H2<Y3, H3<Y1, H3<Y2, H3<Y3 should be satisfied.

Next, the first decorative pattern in the left column in the reach fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state is H4 seconds for the action at the start of the fluctuation, T4 seconds for the fixed position action, Y4 seconds for the shaking action, and a tenpai action. TP for 1 second, shake action 1 for Y5 seconds, and decision action for K1 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the left row is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the right column, after the first decorative pattern in the left column starts to fluctuate, has an action at the start of fluctuation for H5 seconds, a fixed position action for T5 seconds, a tenpai action for 2 seconds, a shake action for Y6 seconds, and a decision action. is executed for K2 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the right column is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. For the first decorative pattern in the middle row, after the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns start to fluctuate, the action at the start of fluctuation is executed for H6 seconds, and the decision action is executed for K3 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. It should be noted that this reach variation may be the time-reduced game state instead of the non-time-reduced game state, or the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol may be the second main game symbol. It may be the design variation of the first decorative design corresponding to the design variation of. In the case of this reach fluctuation, the execution timing of the action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern in the left column, the middle row, and the right column is not the same but different (the timing at which the action at the start of the fluctuation of each first decorative pattern is different). there is In this way, by differentiating the execution timing of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns, there is a possibility that a specific symbol variation has started for the player at the timing of the variation start. It is possible to suggest that there is something to happen, and to inform the player of the degree of expectation of winning (big win, small win). Here, the form of the action at the start of variation when the execution timing of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is different, and the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns. When the execution timing of the action at the start of fluctuation is the same, the form of the action at the start of fluctuation may be changed to a different form (for example, when the execution timing is different, the first decorative pattern shakes in the vertical direction. , and if the execution timing is the same, the action is such that the first decorative pattern trembles in the horizontal direction). In the case of this reach variation, the execution timings of the actions at the start of variation in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are not the same but different (the actions at the start of variation of each first decorative pattern are executed at different timings). Although an example has been shown, the execution timing of the action at the start of variation in the left column, the middle column, and the right column may be the same as shown in the normal symbol variation. Here, when the hit (big win, small win) pattern is stopped and displayed with the normal reach production, the first decorative pattern in the middle row does not perform the fixed position action, but from the normal reach production to the super reach When the winning (big hit, small win) pattern is stopped and displayed without developing into a production, the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes a fixed position action and stops the first decorative pattern in the middle row. may be displayed. FIG. 126 shows the mode of the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern in the middle row when the winning (big hit, small win) pattern is stopped and displayed without developing from the normal ready-to-win production to the super ready-to-win production. A form of the same positional action as the form of the positional action 3 may be executed, or a form of a different positional action may be executed. It should be noted that, here, the case where the hit (big hit, small hit) pattern is stopped and displayed with the normal reach production is exemplified. In that case, it is preferable to configure not to execute the fixed position action 3 in the middle row as in the case of hit reach variation shown in FIG. 126 .

Also, the execution time of each action in the specific symbol variation in FIG. 128 and the variation fixed time are constructed in the following relationship.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H4 to H6 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(1-1) Left column fluctuation start action H4 seconds < left column shake action Y seconds (either one of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(1-2) Right column fluctuation start action H5 seconds <Right column shaking action Y6 seconds (2) Fixed position action T seconds (either one of T4 or T5 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (Y4 to Y6) seconds)
(2-1) Left column fixed position action T4 seconds <left column shaking action Y seconds (either one of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(2-2) Right column fixed position action T5 seconds <right column shaking action Y6 seconds (3) Tenpai action TP seconds (either one of TP1 or TP2 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (Y4 to Y6 seconds) any one)
(3-1) Left row tenpai action TP 1 sec < left row shaking action Y seconds (either one of Y4 or Y5 seconds)
(3-2) Right row tenpai action TP 2 seconds < right row shaking action Y 6 seconds (4) Determination action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any of Y4 to Y6 seconds) or one)
(4-1) Left column decision action K1 seconds < Left column swing action Y seconds (either one of Y4 or Y5 seconds)
(4-2) Right column decision action K2 seconds <Right column shaking action Y6 seconds (5) Total time of fluctuation start action (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (Y4 to Y6 seconds) total time)
(5-1) Left column fluctuation start action H4 seconds < total time of left column shaking action (total time of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 to T5 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(7) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y4-Y6 seconds)
(8) Total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds) (9) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) <Shake action Y seconds (one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(10) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 and T5 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(11) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) < swing action Y seconds (one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(12) Total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(13) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 and T5 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) + total time of decision action (total time of K1-K3 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y4-Y6 seconds)
(13-1) Left column fluctuation start action H 4 seconds + left column fixed position action T 4 seconds + left column tenpai action TP 1 second + left column decision action K 1 second < total time of left column shaking action (Y4) , Y total time of 5 seconds)
(13-2) Right column fluctuation start action H 5 seconds + right column fixed position action T 5 seconds + right column tenpai action TP 2 seconds + left column decision action K 2 seconds <right column shaking action Y 6 seconds (14) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4-H6 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4, T5 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1, TP2 seconds) + deciding action total time (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(14-1) Left row fluctuation start action H 4 seconds + left row fixed position action T 4 seconds + left row tenpai action TP 1 second + left row decision action K 1 seconds < left row shaking action Y seconds (Y4, one of Y5 seconds)
(15) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H4 to H6 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (16) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T4 or T5 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (17) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 or TP2 seconds) < Variable fixed time (18) Decision action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < Variable fixed time (19) Shaking action Y seconds (Y4 ~ Y6 seconds) > Variable fixed time (20) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H4 to H6 seconds) + fixed position action T seconds (one of T4, T5 seconds) + Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 or TP2 seconds) + Decision action K seconds (any one of K1-K3 seconds) > Variable fixed time (21) Total time of action at the start of variation (H4-H6) total time in seconds) + total time for fixed position actions (total time for T4 and T5 seconds) + total time for tenpai actions (total time for TP1 and TP2 seconds) + total time for decision actions (total time for K1-K3 seconds) ) > Variable fixed time (22) Total time of action at the start of variation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4, T5 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (TP1, TP2) second total time) + total time of decision action (total time of K1-K3 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (either one of Y4 or Y5 seconds)
Regarding (15) to (18) above, the variable fixed time may be configured to be shorter. Fixed time", "fixed position action T seconds (one of T4 or T5 seconds) > variable fixed time", "tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP1 or TP2 seconds) > variable fixed time", " Decision action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds)>variable fixed time” may be satisfied. It should be noted that "either" as used herein may be satisfied as long as either is satisfied, and it is not necessary for both to be satisfied. For example, in the case of (1-1), at least one of H4<Y4 and H4<Y5 should be satisfied.

Next, FIG. 129 is an image diagram from (a) stoppage of determination of the losing symbol to (l) re-fluctuation of the first pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, FIG. 129 shows specific pattern variations on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state (for example, reach variations that perform normal reach effects for winning A3 in FIG. 12, super reach effects for winning A6, battle reach effects It shows each action (b) to (l) in the reach fluctuation performed in the first half and the second half of. It should be noted that various variations in the time-reduced gaming state instead of the non-time-reduced gaming state may be possible, and the reach that performs the first half and the second half of the normal reach production, super ready-to-win production, and battle ready-to-win production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 It may be a variation, or it may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the second main game symbol instead of a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. good. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is clear that the trigger of the look-ahead effect can be held as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. is.

In (a), in the non-time-reduced game state, the hold on the first main game side is 4 and the hold on the second main game side is 0, and the effect display device SG corresponds to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern. This indicates that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol to be played are fixed and stopped at "711", which is the missing symbol. In the non-time-reduced game state, the display mode of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols is "numbers + characters", and the display mode of the second decorative symbols is "numbers". Only Then, four first pending displays on the first main game side are displayed, and the first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed with "4", and the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed with "0".

In (b), as the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern is satisfied, the hold is digested, and the hold digest transmission image (for example, the image object of the white circle in the figure) corresponding to the digested hold is displayed. It shows a variation start time action 1 when the displayed first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner. The variation mode of the pattern variation this time is a pattern variation that accompanies two pseudo-runs, and after reaching the reach production (normal reach production, super reach production, battle reach production), hit "777" (big hit, small hit). This is a variation mode for displaying symbols, and when the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start to be displayed in a varying manner, an action 1 at the start of variation is executed. This action 1 at the start of variation is the timing immediately after the start of the variation display of the first main game symbols (for example, after 0.1 seconds), when the losing symbols shown in (a) are fixed and stopped. The action of enlarging the first decorative patterns in the left, middle and right columns is illustrated. The display area where the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform the action 1 at the start (display area for the action at the start), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped. A display area larger than the display area (display area for confirmation and stop) is shown as an example, but when executing the action 1 at the start of the fluctuation that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the operation at the start is confirmed. The display area becomes smaller than the stop display area.

(c) shows the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns after the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols have started to be displayed in a variable manner. After execution of the action 1 at the start of variation when the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner, the enlarged first decorative symbols are the first decorative symbols that were fixed and stopped. It is configured to reduce to the size of one decorative pattern, and then execute acceleration variation for scrolling downward. Note that the acceleration variation is executed until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of variation of the first decorative symbol.

(d) shows the high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns after the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start the accelerated variation. After starting the acceleration variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, it is configured to perform a fast change.

(e) shows the deceleration variation of the first decorative symbol in the left column after performing the high speed variation. After performing high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols, deceleration variation for variably displaying the first decorative symbols in the left row in a visible state is performed. . It should be noted that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the slowdown variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing the high speed variation.

In (f), the first decorative pattern of the number "1" in the left column and the chick character is temporarily stopped while executing the deceleration variation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative pattern in the left column is temporarily stopped. It shows that the fixed-position action 1 is executed in the display area (display area of the fixed-position action in the left column, which is the display area of the fixed position). This fixed position action 1 is the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped shown in (a), and the first decorative pattern is higher than the first decorative pattern of the action 1 at the start of fluctuation shown in (b). , and expand the first decorative pattern at a position lower than the first decorative pattern of the action 1 at the start of fluctuation shown in (b), and then return it to the upper position. In addition, this fixed position action corresponds to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element) as a mode of a different fixed position action. It may be configured to perform a positional action that In this case, if the first element shown in the left column is a chick, there is an example in which the chick performs a fixed position action of waving both hands. In addition, while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the fixed position action 1, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuation.

(g) executes a shaking action after the first decorative pattern in the left column executes fixed position action 1, and executes deceleration variation of the first decorative pattern in the right column after executing high speed fluctuation. is shown. The first decorative pattern in the left column is configured to perform the shaking action after performing the fixed position action 1 and then shrinking. In addition, the first decorative symbol in the right column is configured to perform deceleration variation, which is variably displayed in a visible state, after performing high-speed variation. In addition, while the first decorative symbols in the left row are performing the shaking action and the first decorative symbols in the right row are performing the deceleration variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle row are performing the high speed variation.

(h) shows that the first decorative pattern in the left column continues to perform the shaking action, and the number "7" in the right column + the first decorative pattern of the lion character performs deceleration fluctuations. Temporarily stop, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the fixed position action 1 is executed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the right column is temporarily stopped (the display area of the fixed position operation in the right column, which is the display area of the fixed position). It is shown that. This fixed position action 1 may be the same as the fixed position action 1 executed by the first decorative symbol in the left column, or may be different. In addition, when executing a fixed position action different from the left column, a different fixed position action may be executed according to the pattern row of the first decorative pattern, or the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the 1 element+the type of the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element) may be executed. When executing an action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), the chick of the first element shown in the left column Since the first element is a lion, unlike the positional action of waving both hands, there is an example where the lion performs the positional action of pouncing. In addition, while the first decorative pattern in the left column is performing the shaking action and the first decorative pattern in the right column is performing the fixed position action 1, the first decorative pattern in the middle column is performing high-speed fluctuation. there is

(i) indicates that the pseudo consecutive symbols are performing deceleration variation. The first decorative pattern in the right column is configured to perform the swing action after performing the fixed position action 1 and then shrinking. Then, in a state in which the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column perform the shaking action, the pseudo continuous pattern (“NEXT” pattern) covers the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns. It is configured to decelerate and fluctuate to hide. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(j) indicates that the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed-position action 1. FIG. The pseudo-continuous symbols that are decelerating and fluctuating at a low speed are temporarily stopped at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen. At the timing of the temporary stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the fixed position action 1 in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row is temporarily stopped (the display area for the fixed position operation in the middle row, which is the display area of the fixed position). do. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation, and the first decorative pattern in the middle row is set so that the temporary stop and the fixed position action are not executed when the pseudo continuous pattern executes the fixed position action 1. is configured to

(k) shows that the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 1. In a state where the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the first decorative symbol of the number "1" and the chick character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT". Then, at the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the middle row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is displayed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row position action display area). In this embodiment, after the pseudo consecutive symbol (“NEXT” symbol) of (j) executes fixed position action 1, and the first decorative symbol in the middle row of (k) executes fixed position action 1, An example of executing the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern of (l) was shown, but after the pseudo-continuous pattern of (j) ("NEXT" symbol) executes the fixed position action 1, (1) in (k) The first decorative pattern in the row does not perform the fixed position action 1, and the first decorative pattern in the middle row continues to perform the variable display (the first decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped). (l) re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbols may be executed, or (2) one of the temporary stop candidates in the plurality of first decorative symbols scroll-displayed in the middle symbol row of the pseudo-continuous symbols. One may be set as one, and temporary stop and fixed position action may be performed as the first decorative pattern (for example, if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → While scrolling in the order of . , 1 → 2 → … → 7 → 8 → NEXT → 1 → … while scrolling in order, the first decorative symbols displayed in the main area are sequentially switched and displayed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. may be configured to do so). It should be noted that the configuration of the pseudo-continuous symbols in this way is not limited to the pseudo-continuous symbols in FIG. 129, but also the pseudo-continuous symbols in FIG. It is clear that it can be applied to the pseudo-continuous symbols in each embodiment, including the above.In addition, as the display area for the fixed position operation, a display area larger than the display area for the operation at the start and the display area for the fixed stop As an example, when the fixed position action 1 for reducing the first decorative pattern is executed, the display area for the fixed position action becomes a smaller display area than the display area for the action at the start and the display area for the fixed stop. Incidentally, the pseudo-continuous symbol corresponds to the "special symbol" used in the pseudo-continuous variation shown in FIG. 23 and the like as a provisional display mode.

(l) shows the re-fluctuation of pseudo consecutive symbols. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbols are configured to perform acceleration variation for scrolling downward when re-variation (pseudo-continuation) is performed. In addition, after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous pattern will start to change again (pseudo-continuous) with the action at the time of fluctuation start, or by executing a dedicated action (after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped). It is an action that suggests disappearing from the main area, and the pseudo-continuous pattern may disappear by performing an action such as an erasing action described later). The execution time is set to be longer than the erase action in which the pseudo-continuous pattern turns into fog and disappears without a trace, or the action at the start of fluctuation of other first decorative patterns, or the display area used in the action is Perform actions such as increasing the size, increasing the magnification, speeding up the rotation of the pseudo-continuous pattern, and increasing the light emission such as color effects. In addition, in this embodiment, (l) re-fluctuation of the pseudo-continuous symbols is performed, and after executing the action 2 at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (m), ( An example of performing high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (o) via accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of n) is shown. However, when executing the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern in (l) and executing the acceleration fluctuation, or when the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the action at the start of fluctuation, when executing the action at the start of fluctuation, or the pseudo When the continuous pattern executes a dedicated action, the action 2 at the start of the first decorative pattern variation in the left, middle, and right columns of (m), and the left, middle, and right columns of (n) It may be configured to perform high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (o) without executing the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols (in this case, (n) It is preferable to immediately perform high-speed variation without performing accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns).

Next, FIG. 130 is a state following FIG. 129, and is an image diagram from (m) action 2 at the start of fluctuation to (x) fixed position action 2 of pseudo consecutive symbols. First, (m) shows the action 2 at the start of variation when starting the first re-variation (pseudo run) of the first decorative symbol. When the first decorative pattern starts to change again, action 2 at the start of change is executed. This action 2 at the start of variation expands the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns indicated by (k) at the timing immediately after the re-variation is started (for example, after 0.1 seconds). Exemplify actions. The display area where the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform the action 2 at the start (display area for the action at the start), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped. A display area larger than the display area (display area for confirmation and stop) is shown as an example, but when executing the action 2 at the start of variation that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the operation at the start is confirmed. The display area becomes smaller than the stop display area. Although an example of executing the action 2 at the start of variation when starting the first re-variation (pseudo-run) of the first decorative symbol has been shown, when starting the re-variation (pseudo-run) of the first decorative symbol It is not necessary to execute action 2 at the start of fluctuation.

(n) shows the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns after the first decorative symbols start the first re-variation (pseudo run). After executing the action 2 at the time of start of variation when the first decorative design starts to re-variate, the enlarged first decorative design is reduced to the size of the first decorative design when it was fixed and stopped, and then , to perform an acceleration variation that scrolls downward. In addition, it is configured to execute the acceleration variation until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of the re-variation of the first decorative symbol.

(o) shows high-speed fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns after the first decorative symbols start the accelerated fluctuation. After starting the acceleration variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols, a predetermined time ( For example, it is configured to perform high-speed variation after 1 second) has elapsed.

(p) shows the deceleration variation of the first decorative symbol in the left column after executing the high speed variation. After the high-speed variation of the first decorative pattern is executed, the deceleration variation for variably displaying the first decorative pattern in the left row in a visible state is executed. It should be noted that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the slowdown variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing the high speed variation.

In (q), the number "1" in the left column + the chick character's first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped while executing the deceleration variation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative pattern in the left column is temporarily stopped. This indicates that the fixed-position action 2 is executed in the display area (display area of the fixed-position action in the left column, which is the display area of the fixed position). This fixed position action 2 is the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped shown in (a), and the first decorative pattern is higher than the first decorative pattern of the action 1 at the start of fluctuation shown in (b). exemplifies the action of expanding the . It should be noted that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the fixed position action 2, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuation.

(r) Executes the shake action after the first decorative pattern in the left column executes the fixed position action 2, and executes the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative pattern in the right column after executing the high speed fluctuation. is shown. The first decorative pattern in the left column is configured to perform the shaking action after performing the fixed position action 2 and then shrinking. In addition, the first decorative symbol in the right column is configured to perform deceleration variation, which is variably displayed in a visible state, after performing high-speed variation. In addition, while the first decorative symbols in the left row are performing the shaking action and the first decorative symbols in the right row are performing the deceleration variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle row are performing the high speed variation.

(s) is that the first decorative pattern in the left column continues to perform the shaking action, and the first decorative pattern of the number "1" in the right column + the character of the chick is performing deceleration fluctuation. Temporarily stop, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the fixed position action 2 is executed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the right column is temporarily stopped (the display area for the fixed position operation in the right column, which is the display area of the fixed position). It is shown that. This fixed position action 2 may be the same as the fixed position action 2 executed by the first decorative symbol in the left column, or may be different. In addition, while the first decorative pattern in the left column is performing the shaking action and the first decorative pattern in the right column is performing the fixed position action 2, the first decorative pattern in the middle column is performing the high-speed fluctuation. there is

(t) shows the state after execution of the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative pattern in the right column. After executing the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative pattern in the right column, the first decorative pattern in the right column is displayed in a reduced size. The first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are the same number "1" and the first decorative pattern of the chick character. At this time, the first decorative pattern in the right column may perform a shaking action. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(u) shows a tenpai action 1 in a state where the same pattern is displayed as the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column. In (t), after the first decorative pattern of the same number "1" and the character of the chick is displayed in the left and right columns, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are displayed. It is configured to perform action 1. This tenpai action 1 executes an action of enlarging the image object of the character of the chick as the first element of the first decorative pattern more than the action at the start of fluctuation or the fixed position action. A positional action that performs an action corresponding to the type of decoration pattern (eg, one of the first element + second element type, the first element type, and the second element type) is illustrated. In this example, since the first element is a chick, the action of blowing off the shells above and below the chick is executed. It has become. In addition, as a display area (display area for tenpai action) in which the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns perform Tenpai Action 1, the display areas for confirming and stopping the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are displayed, and the operation at the start is performed. , the display area is larger than the display area of the fixed position action, but when executing the tenpai action 1 that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area of the tenpai action is the left column and the right column The display area is smaller than the display area for the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol, the display area for the start operation, and the display area for the fixed position operation. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(v) shows shaking action 1 to be executed in the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column. This shaking action 1 is performed with the chick character as the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the number "1" as the second element after the tenpai action 1 of (u) is executed. , and then swaying the action. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation. It should be noted that after the tenpai action 1 of (u) is executed, the production mode of the normal reach production is executed, and during this normal reach production, the shaking action 1 of (v) is executed, but the super reach production is executed. or a battle reach effect may be executed. In such a configuration, the pseudo consecutive symbols may be temporarily stopped during the super ready-to-win production or battle ready-to-win production, and during the super ready-to-win production or battle ready-to-win production, the shaking action is performed in the same way as during the normal ready-to-win production. good too. Here, it is preferable that the shaking action during the super ready-to-win effect or the battle ready-to-win effect is configured to be different from the shaking action 1 during the normal ready-to-win effect. For example, the shaking action during the Super Reach production and the Battle Reach production has a smaller first decorative pattern than the shaking action 1 during the normal reach production, the first element is erased, and the shaking action is performed with only the second element. It is preferable that the swinging width is small, and the swing motion is slow (the cycle of one swing is longer than that of the normal ready-to-win effect).

(w) indicates that the pseudo consecutive symbols are performing deceleration variation. With the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column performing a shaking action, the pseudo continuous pattern (“NEXT” pattern) covers the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns. is configured to decelerate and fluctuate to In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(x) indicates that the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed-position action 2. The pseudo-continuous symbols that are decelerating and fluctuating at a low speed are temporarily stopped at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen. At the timing of the temporary stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the fixed position action 2 in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row is temporarily stopped (the display area for the fixed position operation in the middle row, which is the display area of the fixed position). do. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation, and the first decorative pattern in the middle row is set so that the temporary stop and the fixed position action are not executed when the pseudo continuous pattern executes the fixed position action 2. is configured to

Next, FIG. 131 is a state following FIG. 129 and FIG. 130, and is an image diagram from (y) fixed position action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row to (j2) swing action 2. FIG. First, (y) indicates that the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes the fixed position action 2. In the state where the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the number "7" + the first decoration symbol of the lion character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT". Then, at the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the middle row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is displayed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row position action display area). In this embodiment, after the (x) pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed-position action 2, and the first decorative symbol in the middle row of (y) executes the fixed-position action 2, An example of executing the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern of (z) was shown, but after the pseudo-continuous pattern of (x) ("NEXT" symbol) executes the fixed position action 2, (1) In (y) The first decorative pattern in the row does not perform the fixed position action 2, and the first decorative pattern in the middle row continues to perform the variable display (the first decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped). (z) re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbols may be executed, or (2) one of the temporary stop candidates in the plurality of first decorative symbols scroll-displayed in the middle symbol row of the pseudo-continuous symbols. One may be set as one, and temporary stop and fixed position action may be performed as the first decorative pattern (for example, if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → While scrolling in the order of . , 1 → 2 → … → 7 → 8 → NEXT → 1 → … while scrolling in order, the first decorative symbols displayed in the main area are sequentially switched and displayed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. may be configured to do so). It should be noted that the configuration of the pseudo-continuous symbols in this manner is not limited to the pseudo-continuous symbols in FIG. 129 and the pseudo-continuous symbols in FIG. From the beginning, it is clear that it can be applied to the pseudo-continuous pattern in each embodiment.Incidentally, as the display area of the fixed position operation, a display area larger than the display area of the operation at the start or the display area of the fixed stop is exemplified. However, when executing the fixed position action 2 that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the fixed position action becomes a display area smaller than the display area for the action at the start and the display area for the fixed stop. , the pseudo-continuous symbol corresponds to the "special symbol" used in the pseudo-continuous variation shown in FIG. 23 and the like as a provisional display mode.

(z) shows the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbols are configured to perform acceleration variation for scrolling downward when re-variation (pseudo-continuation) is performed. In addition, after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous pattern will start to change again (pseudo-continuous) with the action at the time of fluctuation start, or by executing a dedicated action (after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped). It is an action that suggests disappearing from the main area, and the pseudo-continuous pattern may disappear by performing an action such as an erasing action described later). The execution time is set to be longer than the erase action in which the pseudo-continuous pattern turns into fog and disappears without a trace, or the action at the start of fluctuation of other first decorative patterns, or the display area used in the action is Perform actions such as increasing the size, increasing the magnification, speeding up the rotation of the pseudo-continuous pattern, and increasing the light emission such as color effects. In addition, in this embodiment, (z) re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbols is executed, and after executing the action 3 at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (a2), ( An example of performing high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (c2) via accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of b2) is shown. However, when executing the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern of (z) and executing the acceleration fluctuation, or when the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the action at the start of fluctuation, when executing the action at the start of fluctuation, or the pseudo When the continuous pattern executes the dedicated action, action 3 at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns of (a2), and the left, middle, and right columns of (b2) It may be configured to perform high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (c2) without executing the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols (in this case, (n) It is preferable to immediately perform high-speed variation without performing accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns).

(a2) shows the action 3 at the start of variation when the first decorative symbol starts the second re-variation (pseudo run). When the first decorative pattern starts to change again, action 3 at the start of change is executed. This action 3 at the start of variation enlarges the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns indicated by (y) at the timing immediately after the re-variation is started (for example, 0.1 seconds later). Exemplify actions. The display area where the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform the action 3 at the start (display area for the action at the start), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped. Although a display area larger than the display area (display area for confirmation and stop) is shown as an example, when executing the action 3 at the start of fluctuation that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the operation at the start is confirmed. The display area becomes smaller than the stop display area. Although an example of executing the action 3 at the start of variation when starting the second re-variation (pseudo-run) of the first decorative symbol has been shown, when starting the re-variation (pseudo-run) of the first decorative symbol It is not necessary to execute action 3 at the start of fluctuation.

(b2) shows the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns after the first decorative symbols start the first re-variation (pseudo run). After execution of the action 3 at the time of start of variation when the first decorative design starts to change again, the enlarged first decorative design is reduced to the size of the first decorative design when it was fixed and stopped, and then , to perform an acceleration variation that scrolls downward. In addition, it is configured to execute the acceleration variation until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of the re-variation of the first decorative symbol.

(c2) shows the high-speed fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns after the first decorative symbols start the accelerated fluctuation. After starting the acceleration variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols, a predetermined time ( For example, it is configured to perform high-speed variation after 1 second) has elapsed.

(d2) shows the deceleration variation of the first decorative symbol in the left column after executing the high speed variation. After the high-speed variation of the first decorative pattern is executed, the deceleration variation for variably displaying the first decorative pattern in the left row in a visible state is executed. It should be noted that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the slowdown variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing the high speed variation.

In (e2), the number "7" in the left column + the first decorative pattern of the lion character are temporarily stopped while executing the deceleration variation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative pattern in the left column is temporarily stopped. This indicates that the fixed-position action 3 is executed in the display area (display area of the fixed-position action in the left column, which is the display area of the fixed position). This fixed position action 3 is the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped shown in (a), and the first decorative pattern is higher than the first decorative pattern of the action 1 at the start of fluctuation shown in (b). exemplifies the action of expanding the . In addition, while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the fixed position action 3, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuation.

In (f2), the first decorative pattern in the left column executes the shaking action after executing the fixed position action 3, and the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative pattern in the right column after executing the high speed fluctuation. is shown. The first decorative pattern in the left column is configured to execute the shaking action after executing the fixed position action 3 and then shrinking. In addition, the first decorative symbol in the right column is configured to perform deceleration variation, which is variably displayed in a visible state, after performing high-speed variation. In addition, while the first decorative symbols in the left row are performing the shaking action and the first decorative symbols in the right row are performing the deceleration variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle row are performing the high speed variation.

(g2) shows that the first decorative pattern in the left column continues to perform the shaking action, and the number "7" in the right column + the first decorative pattern of the lion character performs deceleration variation. Temporarily stop, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the fixed position action 3 is executed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the right column is temporarily stopped (the display area for the fixed position operation in the right column, which is the display area of the fixed position). It is shown that. This fixed position action 3 may be the same as the fixed position action 3 executed by the first decorative symbol in the left column, or may be different. In addition, while the first decorative pattern in the left column is performing the shaking action and the first decorative pattern in the right column is performing the fixed position action 3, the first decorative pattern in the middle column is performing the high-speed fluctuation. there is

(h2) shows the state after executing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the right column. After executing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the right column, the first decorative pattern in the right column is displayed in a reduced size. The first decorative patterns in the left and right columns display the same number "7" plus the first decorative pattern of a lion character. At this time, the first decorative pattern in the right column may perform a shaking action. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(i2) shows a tenpai action 2 in a state where the same pattern is displayed as the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column. In (h2), after the same number "7" and the first decorative pattern of the lion character are displayed in the left and right columns, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are displayed. It is configured to perform action 2. This tenpai action 2 exemplifies the action of enlarging the image object of the lion character as the first element of the first decorative pattern more than the action at the start of fluctuation or the fixed position action. In addition, as the display area (the display area for the tenpai action), the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns execute the tenpai action 2, the display area for fixing and stopping the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, and the operation at the start. , the display area is larger than the display area of the fixed position action, but when executing the tenpai action 2 that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area of the tenpai action is the left column and the right column The display area is smaller than the display area for the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol, the display area for the start operation, and the display area for the fixed position operation. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(j2) shows the shake action 2 executed in the first decorative pattern on the left column and the first decorative pattern on the right column. This shaking action 2 is performed after the tenpai action 2 of (i2) is executed, and the lion character as the first element and the number "7" as the second element of the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns. , and then swaying the action. It should be noted that after the tenpai action 2 of (i2) is executed, the production mode of the normal reach production is executed. It is configured to develop from super reach production or battle reach production. Here, after tenpai action 2 of (i2) is executed, the production mode of normal reach production is executed, and during this normal reach production, swing action 2 of (j2) is executed, but super reach production and battle You may comprise so that a reach production may be performed. Further, the normal reach effect may be continued without developing from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect or the battle reach effect. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

Next, FIG. 132 is a state following FIGS. 129, 130, and 131, and is an image diagram from (k2) fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row to (n2) fixed stop. First, in (k2), while the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are performing the shake action 2 in (j2), the first decorative symbol in the middle row performs the fixed position action 3. showing. In a state in which the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are in a tense state and the shaking action 2 is being executed, the first decorative pattern of the number "7" + the lion character in the middle row is decelerated and fluctuates. , and then temporarily stopped. At the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the middle row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is displayed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row is temporarily stopped (fixed position display area in the middle row) The display area of the action) is configured to perform the positional action 3. In addition, as the display area of the fixed position action, a display area larger than the display area of the action at the start and the display area of the fixed stop is exemplified, but when executing the fixed position action 3 to reduce the first decorative pattern, The display area for the motion at the fixed position is smaller than the display area for the motion at the start and the display area for the fixed stop. Here, when the hit (big win, small win) pattern is stopped and displayed with the super reach effect (or the battle reach effect), the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 3. However, when the normal reach effect does not develop into the super reach effect and the normal reach effect continues and the winning (big win, small win) pattern is stopped and displayed, the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 3. Instead, the first decorative symbol "7" in the middle row may be stopped and displayed. With this configuration, when a win (big win, small win) is achieved in the normal reach performance, the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern in the middle row is not executed, and the suddenly winning (big win, small win) pattern is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that surprises the player. Here, when the hit (big win, small win) pattern is stopped and displayed with the super reach effect (or the battle reach effect), the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 3. Although shown, it may be configured not to execute the middle row in-place action 3 . For example, if it is determined whether to perform an action or not depending on whether it is a normal background or a reach background (super reach background), in the pattern variation of the super reach effect (it may be a battle reach effect), the super Due to the leech background, it does not perform positional actions. Then, when the winning (big win, small win) pattern is stopped and displayed, the background is changed from the super ready-to-win background to the normal background, and after that, the first decorative pattern is configured to perform a shaking variation (shake action). . By constructing so that the fixed-position action is not executed during the super-ready-to-win effect, the player can see the super-ready-to-win effect without being disturbed by the fixed-position action.

(l2) is a win (jackpot, A small hit) pattern is displayed, indicating that a decision action is to be executed in the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns. This decision action is to erase the card-shaped image object as the first element of the first decorative pattern and to enlarge the lion character as the first element. , the first decorative pattern is configured to emit light for a moment. In addition, I showed an example where the decision action is configured differently from the action at the start of fluctuation, fixed position action, tenpai action, and swing action, but it is the same as the action at the start of fluctuation, fixed position action, tenpai action, and swing action. may be In addition, as the display area (decision action display area) where each of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns executes the decision action, the display area for the fixed stop, the display area for the action at the start, and the display area for the fixed position action The display area and the display area larger than the display area for the shaking motion are exemplified, but when executing the decision action to reduce the first decorative pattern, the display area for the decision action is the display area for the fixed stop, and the display area for the start The display area is smaller than the motion display area, the fixed position motion display area, and the swing motion display area. In addition, after (k2) execution of the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the middle row, an example of executing the deciding action in the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns of (l2) was shown. When the hit (big win, small win) pattern is stopped and displayed with a super reach effect (it may be a battle reach effect), after executing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the middle row of (k2), super reach End the production, execute the shaking action of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right rows, and then execute the deciding action in the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right rows of (l2). may In addition, when the hit (big hit, small hit) pattern is stopped and displayed with a super ready-to-win effect (or a battle ready-to-win effect), the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the middle row of (k2) is executed. (Switch from the display screen of the super reach effect to the normal background display screen), execute the shake action of the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns, and then ( In l2), the decision action may be executed in the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns.

(m2) indicates that a shaking variation (swinging action) is executed in a state where winning (big win, small winning) symbols are displayed after the deciding action. Shake variation (shake action) is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) until the final stop timing. Then, (n2) shows a state where winning (big win, small win) symbols are fixed and stopped. The definite stop is configured to definite stop the first decorative symbol over the time indicated by the variable fixed time.

129(i) to FIG. 130(m), the number "1"+chick character first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the left column, and the character "7" is temporarily stopped in the right column. After the first decorative pattern of the number + lion character is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous pattern ("NEXT" pattern) is displayed fluctuating at a low speed, temporarily stopped at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. In the case where the first decoration pattern of the number "1" + chick character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT", when the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" changes again , the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are configured to perform the action at the start of variation, but may be configured not to perform the action at the start of variation. In this case, when the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT" starts to change again, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns are already configured to perform high-speed variation. With this configuration, only the first action at the start of the fluctuation (action 1 at the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 129) can be emphasized in the pattern fluctuation of the pseudo-run where the timing of the re-fluctuation is difficult to understand. It is possible to easily recognize that it is a specific pattern variation. An example in which the number "1" + the chick character's first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" is shown, but the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" 91 or 92, in which the first decorative pattern of the character of the number "1" and the chick is not temporarily stopped in the middle row.

129(i) to FIG. 130(m), the number "1"+chick character first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the left column, and the character "7" is temporarily stopped in the right column. After the first decorative pattern of the number + lion character is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous pattern ("NEXT" pattern) is displayed fluctuating at a low speed, temporarily stopped at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. , in the case where the number "1" + the first decoration pattern of the character of the chick temporarily stops in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT", after the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" changes again , the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform the action at the start of fluctuation. In this case, after the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" starts to change again, and after the pseudo-continuous pattern changes at high speed and becomes non-transparent, the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns are displayed. executes action 2 at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, with regard to the pattern variation of the pseudo-run, the degree of expectation for winning is made different depending on the number of times the executed action at the start of the variation is executed (the number of times of execution of the pseudo-run is three times rather than two times). high expectations of winning). An example in which the number "1" + the chick character's first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" is shown, but the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" 91 or 92, in which the first decorative pattern of the character of the number "1" and the chick is not temporarily stopped in the middle row. In this case, the action at the start of fluctuation may be executed with two first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, or three patterns (2 The action at the start of fluctuation may be executed with two first decorative symbols and one special design, or the action at the start of fluctuation may be executed only with pseudo consecutive symbols.

In addition, in the case of pseudo-run variation using pseudo-run symbols, when the first decorative symbol changes again (pseudo-run after reach) after the ready-to-win state in which the first decorative symbol is in the tenpai state is formed. {swing action of the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns indicated by (w) via (u) tenpai action 1 from (q) fixed position action 2 in FIG. 130} Then, after the non-reach state in which the first decorative symbol is in the non-tenpai state is formed, the first decorative symbol changes again (non-reach pseudo-continuation). f) The shaking action of the first decorative symbols in the left row and the right row indicated by (i) from the fixed position action 1} are configured to be different. Here, the motion pattern related to the predetermined motion may be the number of types and/or combination of predetermined motions. As for the number of types of predetermined actions, there are three types of fixed position action, tenpai action, and shaking action when the pseudo-continuation after reach is executed, and fixed-position action, when non-reach pseudo-continuation is executed. There are two types of swing actions shown in (i), and after the first decorative pattern is in the state of tenpai, the first decorative pattern re-fluctuations (pseudo consecutive after reaching) are formed. Types of actions (three types), and predetermined actions when the first decorative pattern executes a re-variation (non-reach pseudo-continuation) after the non-reach state in which the first decorative pattern is in a non-tenpai state is formed It is configured to be different from the type (two types). Further, the combination of the predetermined actions is a combination of a fixed position action, a tenpai action, and a swing action when executing a pseudo-continuation after reach, and a fixed-position action, FIG. (i) is a combination of swing actions, and a predetermined operation in the case where the first decorative symbol performs a re-fluctuation (post-reach pseudo-continuation) after the ready-to-win state in which the first decorative symbol is in a tenpai state is formed. (a combination of a fixed position action, a tenpai action, and a swinging action), and after the non-reach state in which the first decorative pattern is in a non-tenpai state is formed, the first decorative pattern re-fluctuations (non-reach pseudo-continuation) It is configured so that it differs from the combination of predetermined actions (combination of fixed position action and shaking action) when executed. By configuring in this way, when a popular effect in recent years such as a pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the first decoration is displayed according to the effect process (mode of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol) until the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. By varying the chronological content of the actions of the symbols, it is possible to diversify the flow of the conventional uniform quasi-continuous presentation by the difference in the visual aspects of the first decorative symbols.

Next, FIG. 133 shows the pattern variation of the first main game symbols in the situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the (a3) non-time reduction game state. From the mode in which the first decorative pattern that has undergone pattern variation is fixed and stopped as a losing pattern, (f3) the display up to the second shaking action, and (a4) the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) end demonstration to (f4) FIG. 11 is an image diagram related to display up to the second shaking action.

In (a3), in the non-time-reduced game state, the effect display device SG confirms and stops the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol at "711", which is the missing symbol. In the non-reduced time gaming state, the display mode of the first decorative symbols is "numbers + characters", and the display mode of the second decorative symbols is "numbers only". Neither the first pending display on the first main game side nor the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed. In addition, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed as "0". It is in a variable standby state in which there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side. In addition, as (a3), the timing at which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped in the losing pattern (if there is a variable fixed time, the timing after the variable fixed time has elapsed) was exemplified. game) end timing (or hit game (big hit game or small hit game) end demo end timing, hit game (big hit game or small hit game) immediately after the end, time reduction game state start immediately after), hit game (jackpot game or It is the timing when "777" or the like is displayed as a winning (big win, small win) pattern in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side after the end of the small win game. may Also, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbols that have undergone symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is retained. It may be the timing when the winning symbol is confirmed and stopped, or the pattern fluctuation of the second main game symbol in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side in the time shortening game state. It may be the timing at which the first decorative pattern that fluctuates in correspondence with the pattern is fixed and stopped as a lost pattern, or in the time shortening game state, neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held. It may be the timing at which the first decorative symbol, which has undergone symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the situation, is confirmed and stopped as a losing symbol.

(b3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and has been fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). When the time elapses, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed. The volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are as described in FIG. 83, and in FIG. The difference is that the display is erased. In the variable standby state, the display of the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are executed again on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the setting of the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment is completed. can be configured to In addition, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are performed at the timing prior to the first shaking action during the variable standby state in FIG. 133 (d3) and the waiting movie in FIG. Without the need to operate the cross-shaped button SB-2, {in the variable standby state, the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped when the design is lost (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, it can be displayed.

In (c3), the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed in the variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed without any operation after the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed. Then, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are deleted. The volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display may be continued until the standby movie is displayed, and the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display may be deleted when the standby movie is displayed. good. In addition, if it is a variable standby state after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed without any operation after the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed, the volume will be adjusted until a new variation starts. The display of the adjustment screen and the display of the light amount adjustment screen may be continued, and the display of the volume adjustment screen and the display of the light amount adjustment screen may be erased when a new change is started.

(d3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and has been fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). After that, the first shaking action (second shaking motion) during the variable standby state is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The first swinging action during this variable standby state is a state in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and an action of swinging only the character as the first element of the first decorative pattern is exemplified. The first swing action during the variable standby state is an example of swinging only the first element of the first decorative symbol, but if it is an action different from swing action 1 or swing action 2, how can it be performed? can be any action. In addition, in the variable standby state, a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed since the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and the determination is stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). However, the condition is that a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed since the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment setting was completed in the variable standby state. The first swing action during the variable standby state may be executed immediately. Also, in this case, the first decorative pattern is a lost pattern and is fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed) for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, or a variable standby state) 20 seconds, which is the same as the time when the first shaking action starts), the number as the second element may be erased and only the character as the first element may be displayed. By doing so, the first shaking action during the variable standby state will be performed while only the character is displayed. Note that the first shake action during this variable standby state may be performed before the volume adjustment screen display and the light intensity adjustment screen display of (n) are executed, but this shake action may be performed at any timing. Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment can be set even while the shaking action is being executed, and even if the volume adjustment or light amount adjustment is set, the shaking action continues without ending. Also, the first shaking action during the variable standby state is an action that can be started at a timing earlier than the standby movie of (e3) in FIG. 133 .

(e3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed since the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and has been fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). When the time elapses, the standby movie is executed. This waiting movie, as shown in FIG. 133, is executed after the first shaking action in the variable waiting state, and includes part of the ready-to-win effect. , a second pending display on the first main game side, a second pending display on the second main game side, a character as the first element included in the standby movie, and information display related to the character ("1", Alphabetic information such as the number "7" and "super") is displayed, and the process is executed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses. In addition, if a button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (operation of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the display of the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. display. Also, at the timing of executing the standby movie in (e3), a power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed. It is preferable to display it superimposed on the middle movie. If a button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light amount adjustment is performed while the power saving display is being executed, the power saving display is terminated and only the standby movie is displayed. Then, when the button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (operation of the cross button SB-2) is performed again, the display of the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. It is configured. In other words, the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed unless the button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed twice while the power saving display is being executed. . The second decoration pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the information display related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie. The size relationship is as follows: 2nd decorative pattern > 2nd pending display on the 1st main game side = 2nd pending display on the 2nd main game side > information display related to the character as the 1st element included in the waiting movie By structuring that the second decorative pattern is stopped in the lost pattern and the number of reservations is 0, which is easier to see than the information display related to the character as the first element, it is related to the game. It is possible to emphatically display to the player the symbols and pending display (numbers) related to the game rather than the information of the waiting movie.

The waiting movie of (e3) in FIG. 133 includes a second decorative symbol, a second pending display on the first main game side, a second pending display on the second main game side, and a first display included in the waiting movie. An example of displaying characters as elements and information display related to the characters (numbers "1" and "7", alphabet information such as "super", etc.) was given, but the display is as follows. good too.
(1) In the standby movie in which the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixed and stopped, the second decorative symbol, the character as the first element included in the standby movie, and information related to the character are displayed ( numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.) are displayed, and the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed.
(2) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped with the missing symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie A character as a first element to be included and information display related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", information of alphabets such as "super", etc.) are displayed, and the second decorative pattern is not displayed.
(3) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped with the missing pattern, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and the information display related to the character ("1" or "7 ” and alphabetical information such as “super”) are displayed, and the second decorative symbols, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed.

(f3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed since the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and has been fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). After that, the second shaking action during the variable standby state (second shaking action). ) is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The second swinging action during this variable standby state is a state in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and an action of swinging only the character as the first element of the first decorative pattern is exemplified. It should be noted that the second shaking action during the variable standby state, like the first shaking action during the variable standby state, was exemplified by shaking only the first element of the first decorative symbol. Any action that is different from action 2 may be used. Note that the second shaking action during the variable standby state may be configured to be executed on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed after the settings for volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are completed. . It should be noted that the second shaking action during this variable standby state may start immediately after the standby movie ends. In addition, the second shaking action during this variable standby state is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), but the shaking action will continue until the next (second) waiting movie is displayed. may In this case, (a3) → (b3) → (c3) → (d3) → (e3) first waiting movie → (f3) second shaking action → second waiting movie → third It may be configured such that the shaking action→waiting movie is looped so that the shaking action . . . Also, as described above, the first decorative pattern is a losing pattern and is fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed) for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, or during the variable standby state) 20 seconds, which is the same as the time when the first shaking action starts), the number as the second element is erased and only the character as the first element is displayed. When starting the second shaking action immediately after the end of the movie, it is possible to display the first decorative pattern with only the first element immediately after the end of the second waiting movie. Immediately after the end of , the display mode may be returned to the display mode of the first decorative pattern consisting of the first element and the second element. Also, the waiting movie and the shaking action of the variable waiting state may be executed at the same time. In this case, by setting the display priority of the standby movie higher than the shaking action in the variable standby state and configuring the standby movie to be transparent, the shaking action in the variable standby state can be seen behind the standby movie. is configured to be If the standby movie is not transparent, only the standby movie can be seen, but behind the scenes, the shaking action of the variable standby state is executed.

(a4) is a winning game (big winning game or small winning game) end timing (or winning game (big winning game or small winning game) end demo end timing, winning game (big winning game or small winning game) immediately after the end, shortening the time Immediately after the start of the game state), in a time-reducing game state in which there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side after the end of the winning game (big win game or small win game), a win (Big hit, small hit) The timing when "777" or the like is displayed as a symbol is shown. In addition, in the time reduction game state, the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the display mode of the second decorative pattern are only "numbers". However, "numbers + characters" may be used only for the first decorative pattern of a specific type (for example, "numbers + characters" only for 7 patterns and 3 patterns, and only "numbers" for other first decorative patterns ). Neither the first pending display on the first main game side nor the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed as "0". It is in a variable standby state in which there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side. In (a4), the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the display mode of the second decorative pattern are configured to be only "numbers" in the time reduction game state, but (a4) is a specific production stage. , the display mode of the first decorative design and the display mode of the second decorative design are applicable even if they are configured to be only "numbers". Moreover, in this way, the third element may be added to the display mode of the first decorative pattern such as "numbers only" or "numbers + characters". For example, in the case of only "numbers", "numbers+effects" may be used, and in the case of "numbers+characters", "numbers+characters+effects" may be used.

(b4), although not shown, is a variable standby state, a winning game (big winning game or small winning game) end timing (or a winning game (big winning game or small winning game) end demo end timing, winning game When a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from (just after the end of the big win game or the small win game, or immediately after the start of the time-reduced game state), the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed. Although not shown in the figure, "711" of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern of the display of the losing pattern in (b3) is the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern of the display of the winning (big hit, small win) pattern. The difference is that it becomes "777".

In (c4), although not shown, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed in the variable standby state, and after the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed, there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, , 10 seconds), the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are cleared. Although not shown, "711" of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern of the display of the losing pattern in (c3) is the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern of the display of the winning (big hit, small win) pattern. The difference is that it becomes "777".

(d4), although not shown, is a variable standby state, winning game (big win game or small winning game) end timing (or winning game (big win game or small winning game) end demo end timing, winning game When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses after the end of (big win game or small win game), immediately after the start of the time-reduced game state), the first swing action (second swing action) during the variable standby state is predetermined. Run for a time (eg, 10 seconds). Although not shown, "711" of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern of the display of the losing pattern in (d3) is the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern of the display of the winning (big hit, small win) pattern. The difference is that it becomes "777". The first shaking action in the variable standby state is configured so that the shaking action is executed in the variable standby state in the non-reduced time game state, but not in the variable standby state in the reduced time game state. You may

(e4) is after the end of the special game (big hit game), in the variable standby state, the timing of the end of the winning game (big hit game or small winning game) (or the end of the winning game (big win game or small winning game) When a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) elapses after the demonstration end timing, the win game (big win game or small win game) ends, or the time-reduced game state starts), the waiting movie is executed. The standby movie includes a part of the ready-to-win effect, and the standby movie includes a second decorative symbol, a second hold display on the first main game side, and a second hold on the second main game side. Display, character as the first element included in the waiting movie and information display related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.), number of executions of special games Display of consecutive games (for example, "3 consecutive games"), display of the number of profits obtained in a special game (for example, "GET7200"), display of the number of times the time-saving game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") It is displayed and executed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses. In addition, if a button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (operation of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the display of the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. display. Also, when the standby movie is executed, a power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed. In this case, the "power saving" image object with a higher display priority than the standby movie It is preferable to display them in an overlapping manner. If a button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light amount adjustment is performed while the power saving display is being executed, the power saving display is terminated and only the standby movie is displayed. Then, when the button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (operation of the cross button SB-2) is performed again, the display of the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. It is configured. In other words, the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed unless the button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed twice while the power saving display is being executed. . The second decoration pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, the information display related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, and the continuous The size relationship between the manor display, the profit number display, and the executable number display is: Executable number display > consecutive manor display > profit number display > second decoration pattern > second reserved display on the first main game side = second main game Second pending display on the side> Information display related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, and that the second decorative symbol is stopped with the missing symbol and the pending number is 0. is configured to be easier to see than the information display related to the character as the first element, so that the symbols and pending display (numbers) related to the game are displayed more easily than the information of the waiting movie unrelated to the game. It is possible to emphasize and display to the person.

The waiting movie of (e4) in FIG. 133 includes a second decoration symbol, a second pending display on the first main game side, a second pending display on the second main game side, and a first display included in the waiting movie. A character as an element and information display related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", alphabet information such as "super", etc.), consecutive game display (for example, "three consecutive Sho"), the number of profits obtained in the special game (eg, "GET 7200)", and the display of the number of times that the time-reduced game can be executed (eg, "100 remaining times") are displayed. can be displayed as
(1) In the standby movie in which the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixed and stopped, the second decorative symbol, the character as the first element included in the standby movie, and information related to the character are displayed ( Numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.), display of consecutive games that is the number of executions of special games (e.g., "3 consecutive games"), display of the number of profits earned in special games ( For example, "GET7200)", a display of the number of times that the time-reduced game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") is displayed, and a second pending display on the first main game side and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. is not displayed.
(2) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped with the missing symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie Character as the first element included and information display related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", alphabet information such as "super", etc.); , "Triple House"), the number of profits obtained in the special game (for example, "GET 7200"), and the number of times the time-saving game state can be executed (for example, "100 remaining times") are displayed, and the second decoration pattern is displayed. is not displayed.
(3) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped with the missing pattern, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and the information display related to the character ("1" or "7 ” and alphabetical information such as “super”), the number of times a special game has been executed (for example, “3 consecutive houses”), and the number of profits obtained in a special game (for example, “GET7200)” , a display of the number of times the time-reduction game state can be executed (for example, "100 remaining times") is displayed, and a second decoration symbol, a second pending display on the first main game side, and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. is not displayed.
(4) In the standby movie in which the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixed and stopped, the second decorative symbol, the character as the first element included in the standby movie, and information related to the character are displayed ( numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.) are displayed, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the execution of the special game Display of number of consecutive games (for example, "3 consecutive games"), display of number of profits obtained in special game (for example, "GET7200"), display of possible number of times of shortened game state (for example, "100 times remaining") is not displayed.
(5) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped with the missing symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie A character as a first element to be included and information display related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", alphabet information such as "super", etc.) are displayed, and a second decorative pattern and a special game are executed. Display of number of consecutive games (for example, "3 consecutive games"), display of number of profits obtained in special game (for example, "GET7200"), display of possible number of times of shortened game state (for example, "100 times remaining") is not displayed.
(6) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped with the missing pattern, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and the information display related to the character ("1" or "7 ” and alphabetical information such as “super”) are displayed, the second decorative pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the number of times the special game is executed Display of consecutive games (for example, "3 consecutive games"), display of the number of profits obtained in a special game (for example, "GET 7200"), display of the number of times the time-saving game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") are Do not show.
In addition, in the situations (a4) to (d4) and (f4) of FIG. 133 (situation where the standby movie is not displayed), although not shown, a right-handed instruction display is displayed, and (e4) (situation in which the standby movie is displayed), the right-hand hitting instruction display may be configured not to be displayed (switched to non-display). In this configuration, even when (e4) in FIG. 133 is displayed as in (1) to (6) above, the right-handed instruction display is not displayed (switched to non-display). good too. In addition, in the situations (a4) to (d4) and (f4) of FIG. 133 (situation where the standby movie is not displayed), although not shown, a right-handed instruction display is displayed, and (e4) (a situation in which a standby movie is displayed), the right-hand hitting instruction display may be displayed (continued display). When configured in this way, even when (e4) in FIG. 133 is displayed as in (1) to (6) above, the right-handed instruction display is configured to be displayed (continuously displayed). may

(f4) of FIG. 133 is a variable standby state, winning game (big win game or small winning game) end timing (or winning game (big win game or small winning game) end demo end timing, winning game (big win game Or a small hit game) immediately after the end, immediately after the start of the time shortening game state) When a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) elapses, the second swing action during the fluctuation standby state (second swing action. Note that this fluctuation standby The second shaking action during the state is the second shaking action that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen ends, but may also be referred to as the third shaking action. )Run. The second swinging action during this variable standby state is a state in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and an action of swinging only the character as the first element of the first decorative pattern is exemplified. It should be noted that the second shaking action during the variable standby state, like the first shaking action during the variable standby state, was exemplified by shaking only the first element of the first decorative symbol. Any action can be used as long as it is different from action 2. Note that the second shaking action during the variable standby state may be configured to be executed on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed after the settings for volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are completed. . In addition, the second swing action during the variable standby state is configured so that the swing action is executed in the variable standby state in the non-reduced time game state, but not in the variable standby state in the reduced time game state. You may

The second shaking action during the variable standby state shown in (f4) of FIG. 133 may start immediately after the standby movie ends. In addition, the second shaking action during this variable standby state is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), but the shaking action will continue until the next (second) waiting movie is displayed. may In this case, (a4) → (b4) → (c4) → (d4) → (e4) first waiting movie → (f4) second shake action → second waiting movie → third It may be configured such that the shaking action→waiting movie is looped so that the shaking action . . . Also, when the second shaking action is started immediately after the end of the standby movie, and the first decorative pattern mode for executing the shaking action is that the number as the second element is deleted and the character as the first element When only is displayed, only the first element may be displayed immediately after the second waiting movie ends. Also, the waiting movie and the shaking action of the variable waiting state may be executed at the same time. In this case, by setting the display priority of the standby movie higher than the shaking action in the variable standby state and configuring the standby movie to be transparent, the shaking action in the variable standby state can be seen behind the standby movie. is configured to be In addition, when the standby movie is not transparent, only the standby movie can be seen, but behind the scenes, the shaking action of the variable standby state is executed.

Next, FIG. 134 shows the overlapping relationship between the first decorative symbols on the left and right columns and the first decorative symbols on the middle column in the normal symbol fluctuation on the first main game side and the reach fluctuation in the non-time shortening game state. It is an image diagram showing. First, in the normal pattern fluctuation, the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are changed to the first decorative pattern in the middle row and the first overlapping area at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of shaking fluctuation). , but the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are configured so as not to overlap each other. Also, in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation), for the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, predetermined timing , during swing fluctuation), the first decorative patterns in the middle row overlap in the second overlapping area, but the first decorative patterns in the left and right rows are configured so as not to overlap each other. Here, as illustrated, the specific pattern variation (for example, the reach variation) is more important than the normal pattern variation in the area where the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns overlap the first decorative pattern in the middle row. Overlap ratio, which is a ratio (= overlapping area where the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first decorative pattern in the middle row overlap / the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first decorative pattern in the middle row Display area of the decorative pattern) is configured to be large (first overlapping area<second overlapping area). In addition, the specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) has more timings at which the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns overlap the first decorative symbols in the middle row than in the normal symbol variation. Here, as shown in the figure, the second overlapping area in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation) is configured to differ according to the type of predetermined timing, and at the start of variation (action at the start of variation) , the overlap ratio (or overlap area) is larger than when the pattern feed fluctuation in the middle row of the reach, and the overlap ratio (or overlap area) is higher during the decision action or swing fluctuation than at the start of fluctuation (action at the start of fluctuation). or overlap region) is large. At a predetermined timing, an action (for example, an action at the start of fluctuation, a swinging action, a tenpai action, a deciding action) occurs, and the first decorative pattern on the left and right columns and the first decorative pattern on the middle row are card types. The first elements of the image objects (which may be character-type image objects) overlap each other, but the second elements of the number image objects do not overlap each other. When adding movement to the first decorative pattern in this way, the character as the first element is allowed to overlap with adjacent characters in order to give a sense of dynamism, while it is decided which number will stop ( By configuring the number as the second element for emphasizing whether or not it will be a big win or a small win) so as not to overlap, while diversifying the movement of the first decorative pattern itself, the original of the first decorative pattern It is possible not to deviate from the role of notifying whether a win (big win, minor win) or a loss, which is the purpose of . However, in a situation where the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element is displayed (for example, during the fluctuation start action, during the tenpai action, during the shaking action, etc.), the first It is appropriate to configure the elements so that they overlap each other and the second elements do not overlap each other. In the displayed situation, the timing may be such that the second elements overlap each other (for example, it is the timing before returning to the normal background and performing the decision action, and during the super reach effect, "777" display timing, etc.). In addition, in the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element, the first elements overlap and the second elements do not overlap, but not limited to this, the first elements also overlap However, the second elements may also overlap each other, and in such a case, the overlap ratio between the first elements (= the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first decoration in the middle row Overlapping area where the first element of the pattern overlaps / display area of the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the middle row) and the second element Overlapping ratio (= Overlapping area where the second element of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the second element of the first decorative pattern in the middle row overlap/The number of the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns display area of the second element and the second element of the first decorative pattern in the middle row), in particular, the overlapping ratio between the first elements can be made larger than the overlapping ratio between the second elements. preferred. In addition, it is not limited to the normal pattern fluctuation and reach fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, and the non-reach production, normal reach production, super reach production, and battle reach production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 It may be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of. In addition, in the time-reduced gaming state and the specific production mode, unlike the non-time-reduced game state and the predetermined production mode other than the specific production mode, the constituent elements of the first decorative pattern are super ready-to-win production and battle ready-to-win production. The second element may be used without the first element, and if configured in this way, in a time-reduced game state or in a specific production mode, predetermined timings (at the time of fluctuation start action, shaking action, tenpai action time, decision action, etc.), the second elements may overlap each other. It should be noted that, when targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is clear that the trigger of the look-ahead effect can be held as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. is.

In FIG. 134, in a situation where the first decorative symbols on the left and right columns are tense when the middle row symbol is sent in the reach fluctuation, the first decorative symbols on the left and right columns are the first decorative symbols on the middle row. Although the display priority is higher than the decorative design, the first decorative design in the middle row may have a higher display priority than the first decorative designs in the right and left columns. With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the first decorative symbols in the middle row will result in a win (big win, small win) symbol combination (whether double eyes). In addition, FIG. 134 shows that the first decorative patterns on the left and right columns expand when the first decorative patterns on the left and right columns are tense in the reach fluctuation, and then the first decorative patterns on the middle row are on the left and on the right. This is an example in which scrolling is performed in a size smaller than the first decorative pattern in the row, but in addition to this example, the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns do not expand or shrink during tenpai, and then the middle row may be enlarged and displayed in a larger size than the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns while overlapping the first elements of the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns. In that case, it is preferable to make the first decorative pattern in the middle row have a higher display priority than the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns so that the first decorative pattern in the middle row is watched. The first decorative pattern in the row may have a higher display priority than the first decorative pattern in the middle row. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the first decorative pattern does not scale, or is difficult to scale, in normal pattern fluctuations (non-reach fluctuations) compared to reach fluctuations. In addition, in normal pattern fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are the first decorative pattern in the middle row and the first may be configured so that they do not overlap in the overlap region of .

Also, in the normal pattern fluctuation, the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns overlap the first decorative pattern in the middle row with a predetermined action (for example, action at the start of fluctuation, shaking action, etc.) In a specific symbol variation (eg, reach variation) than the first time overlapping in the area, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns perform predetermined actions (eg, action at the start of variation, shaking action, deciding action etc.), the second time overlapping the first decorative pattern in the middle row in the second overlapping area is longer (first time<second time). In such a reach variation with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win), the time during which the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns overlap with the first decorative pattern in the middle row is made longer than normal pattern fluctuation. This allows the player to watch each action while diversifying the movement of the first decorative pattern itself.

Also, in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation), for the first decorative pattern in the left column, a predetermined action (for example, action at the start of variation, tenpai action, shaking action, decision action, etc.) It may overlap with the first decorative design. In this case, in the normal pattern fluctuation, the first decorative pattern in the left column is combined with the first decorative pattern in the right column by a predetermined action (for example, action at the start of fluctuation, tenpai action, shaking action, deciding action, etc.). , is configured to overlap (overlap) in the third overlapping area, and in a specific pattern variation (eg, reach variation), the first decorative pattern in the left column has a predetermined action (eg, variation start Time action, tenpai action, shaking action, deciding action, etc.) are configured to overlap the first decorative pattern in the right column in the fourth overlapping area. A specific pattern variation (for example, a reach variation) is a ratio of the area where the first decorative pattern in the left column overlaps the first decorative pattern in the right column (= the first Overlapping area where 1 decorative pattern and first decorative pattern in right column overlap/display area of first decorative pattern in left column and first decorative pattern in right column) is large (third overlapping region < first 4 overlapping regions). In addition, the specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) has more timings at which the first decorative symbol in the left column overlaps the first decorative symbol in the right column than the normal symbol variation. Here, the fourth overlap region in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation) is configured to differ according to a predetermined action, and the action at the start of variation is the middle row of reach at the time of symbol feeding variation. The overlapping ratio (or overlapping area) is larger than that during the swing action, and the overlapping ratio (or overlapping area) is larger for the decision action, swing action, etc. than for the action at the start of fluctuation. However, in a situation where the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element is displayed (for example, during the fluctuation start action, during the tenpai action, during the shaking action, etc.), the first decoration symbol in the left column The first element of the decorative pattern and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the right column overlap, and the second element of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the second element of the first decorative pattern in the right column do not overlap. However, for example, in a situation where the first decorative pattern composed of the second element without the first element is displayed during the super reach production or the battle reach production, the second elements You may provide an action that overlaps (for example, a decision action, etc.). In addition, in the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element, the first elements overlap and the second elements do not overlap, but not limited to this, the first elements also overlap However, the second elements may also overlap each other, and in such a case, the overlap ratio between the first elements (= the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the right column) Overlapping area where one element overlaps/display area of the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the right column) and the overlap ratio between the second element (= left column Overlapping area where the second element of the first decorative pattern of and the second element of the first decorative pattern of the right column overlap / The second element of the first decorative pattern of the left column and the first decorative pattern of the right column It is preferable to make the overlap ratio between the first elements larger than the overlap ratio between the second elements. In addition, it is not limited to the normal pattern fluctuation and reach fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, and the non-reach production, normal reach production, super reach production, and battle reach production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 It may be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of. In addition, in the time-reduced gaming state and the specific production mode, unlike the non-time-reduced game state and the predetermined production mode other than the specific production mode, the constituent elements of the first decorative pattern are super ready-to-win production and battle ready-to-win production. It is also possible to use the second element without the first element, and in the case of such a configuration, in the time-reduced game state or in a specific production mode, predetermined actions (variation start action, shaking action, tenpai action, decision actions, etc.), the second elements may overlap each other. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is clear that the trigger of the look-ahead effect can be held as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. is. In addition, the specific design variation (for example, reach variation) is more than the normal design variation, the time when the first decorative design of the left column and the first decorative design of the right column overlap in the third overlapping area, In the fourth overlapping area, the time during which the first decorative pattern in the left column overlaps with the first decorative pattern in the right column is configured to be longer. Note that the first elements of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first elements of the card-shaped image objects (or character-shaped image objects may be used) of the first decorative pattern in the right column overlap each other, but the second elements of the number image objects It is preferable that they are configured so as not to overlap each other. When adding movement to the first decorative pattern in this way, the character as the first element is allowed to overlap with adjacent characters in order to give a sense of dynamism, while it is decided which number will stop ( By configuring the number as the second element for emphasizing whether or not it will be a big win or a small win) so as not to overlap, while diversifying the movement of the first decorative pattern itself, the original of the first decorative pattern It is possible not to deviate from the role of notifying whether a win (big win, minor win) or a loss, which is the purpose of . In addition, in the reach variation with high expectation of winning (big win, small win), the time during which the first decorative pattern in the left column overlaps with the first decorative pattern in the right column is made longer than the normal pattern variation. You can let the person watch each action. In addition, in FIG. 134, at the time of start of fluctuation, at the time of shaking fluctuation, at the time of change in symbol feeding in the middle row of the reach, and at the time of the final action, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns overlap the first decorative symbols in the middle row. Examples have been shown, but at times other than these timings (including the timing of confirmation stop), the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns may overlap the first decorative symbols in the middle row (for example, confirmation duplication in a stopped state) and may not be duplicated.

In addition, in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation) on the first main game side in the non-reduced time gaming state, the reach state is formed at a predetermined timing (for example, FIGS. 124, 129 to 132, 134 As shown in , a tenpai action 2 is performed using the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, and then the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are shaken and fluctuated while tempering ( 134 (at the time of pattern feed fluctuation in the middle row of the reach), the timing when the first decorative pattern in the middle row is expanded and displayed fluctuating downward) is for a predetermined production that continues the fluctuating display The first element of the card-shaped image object (which may be a character-shaped image object) of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern row (for example, the middle row) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the shaking action 2 is executed. The first element of the card-type image object (which may be a character-type image object) of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the production pattern rows other than the predetermined production pattern rows (for example, the left row and the right row) It is configured to overlap (overlap) in a second overlap region. In addition, in the normal symbol variation in which the non-reach state is formed on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, a predetermined timing when the non-reach state is formed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 128 and 134) , the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the shaking action is being executed. At the timing of temporary stop display with the execution of the fixed position action 3), the first display corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row (for example, the middle row) that is temporarily stopped and displayed and the fixed position action 3 is performed The first element of the decorative design card-type image object (character-type image object may also be used), and other than the predetermined production design row that is temporarily stopped and is performing the shaking action (for example, the left row, The first element of the card-shaped image object (which may be a character-shaped image object) of the first decorative design corresponding to the row of performance symbols shown in the right column) overlaps (overlaps) in the first overlap region. It is Then, the first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the middle row that continues the variable display at a predetermined timing when the reach state in a specific pattern fluctuation (for example, reach fluctuation) is formed, and provisionally The second overlapping area overlapping (overlapping) the first elements of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the left and right columns that are stopped and are performing the shake action 2 is the non-normal symbol variation. The first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the middle row that performs the temporary stop display and performs the fixed position action 3 at the predetermined timing when the reach state is formed, and the temporary stop display and the shaking action. The first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the left and right columns being executed is larger than the first overlapping area (second overlapping area > first overlapping area) It is In other words, the specific pattern variation (for example, the reach variation) has a larger ratio (overlapping ratio) of the area where the first elements of the first decorative pattern overlap than the normal pattern variation (the second overlap area > first overlapping area). At a predetermined timing, the first elements of the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns and the first decorative symbols in the middle row overlap each other, but the second elements do not overlap each other. When adding movement to the first decorative pattern in this way, the character as the first element is allowed to overlap with adjacent characters in order to give a sense of dynamism, while it is decided which number will stop ( By configuring the number as the second element for emphasizing whether or not it will be a big win or a small win) so as not to overlap, while diversifying the movement of the first decorative pattern itself, the original of the first decorative pattern It is possible not to deviate from the role of notifying whether a win (big win, minor win) or a loss, which is the purpose of . In addition, it is not limited to the normal pattern fluctuation and reach fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, and the non-reach production, normal reach production, super reach production, and battle reach production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 It may be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is clear that the trigger of the look-ahead effect can be held as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. is.

In addition, in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation) on the first main game side in the non-reduced time gaming state, the reach state is formed at a predetermined timing (for example, FIGS. 124, 129 to 132, 134 As shown in , a tenpai action 2 is performed using the left and right first decorative symbols, and then the left and right first decorative symbols are shaking and fluctuating while tenpai. , the timing when the first decorative symbols in the middle row are enlarged and variably displayed downward), the first decoration corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row (for example, the middle row) that continues to be variably displayed. The first element of the card-shaped image object (which may be a character-shaped image object) of the design, and the predetermined effect symbol row (for example, left row, right column) overlaps (overlaps) with the first element of the card-type image object (or character-type image object) of the first decorative design corresponding to the performance design row in the second overlapping area for the fifth time. ) is configured as In addition, in the normal symbol variation in which the non-reach state is formed on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, a predetermined timing when the non-reach state is formed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 128 and 134) , the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the shaking action is being executed. At the timing of temporary stop display with the execution of the fixed position action 3), the first display corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row (for example, the middle row) that is temporarily stopped and displayed and the fixed position action 3 is performed The first element of the decorative design card-type image object (character-type image object may also be used), and other than the predetermined production design row that is temporarily stopped and is performing the shaking action (for example, the left row, right column) overlaps (overlaps) with the first element of the card-type image object (or character-type image object) of the first decorative design corresponding to the performance design row in the first overlapping area for the sixth time. ) is configured as Then, the first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the middle row that continues the variable display at a predetermined timing when the reach state in a specific pattern fluctuation (for example, reach fluctuation) is formed, and provisionally The fifth time when the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the left column and the right column that are stopped and are performing the shaking action 2 overlap (overlap) is more non-reach in the normal symbol fluctuation The first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the middle row that performs the temporary stop display and the fixed position action 3, and the temporary stop display and the shaking action are executed at the predetermined timing when the state is formed. The first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the left column and the right column are configured to be longer than the sixth time (overlapping) (fifth time>sixth time). In other words, the specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation) has a higher ratio of time when the first elements of the first decorative pattern overlap (overlapping ratio) than the normal pattern variation (the first elements are overlapping time is long) is configured (5th time > 6th time). At a predetermined timing, the first elements of the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns and the first decorative symbols in the middle row overlap each other, but the second elements do not overlap each other. In such a reach variation with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win), the time during which the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns overlap with the first decorative pattern in the middle row is made longer than normal pattern fluctuation. This allows the player to watch each action while diversifying the movement of the first decorative pattern itself. In addition, it is not limited to the normal pattern fluctuation and reach fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, and the non-reach production, normal reach production, super reach production, and battle reach production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 It may be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is clear that the trigger of the look-ahead effect can be held as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. is.

Next, FIG. 135 shows, in a non-time-reduced game state, a fixed position action when executing a chance look-ahead effect with a first decorative pattern corresponding to a pattern variation of the first main game pattern (a production mode of the chance look-ahead effect ) is an image diagram showing. The performance mode of the chance-read-ahead performance is a performance mode in which color effects such as red, green, and blue are added as the third element to the first decorative pattern when the fixed-position action is executed. Further, as a fixed position action when the chance look-ahead effect is executed, an action of enlarging the first decorative pattern more than the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped as described above may also be executed. , In this case, the enlargement action is performed when the chance look-ahead effect is not performed, such as expanding the first decorative pattern more than the fixed position action when the chance look-ahead effect is not performed, or expanding while rotating. It is desirable to differentiate from the positional action aspect. First, in (a) of FIG. 135, in the non-time-reduced game state, the hold on the first main game side is 2, the hold on the second main game side is 0, and the effect display device SG shows the first decorative symbol. The second decorative symbol is determined and stopped at "711", which is the missing symbol. In the non-reduced time gaming state, the display mode of the first decorative symbols is "numbers + characters", and the display mode of the second decorative symbols is "numbers only". Two first pending displays on the first main game side are displayed, and the first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed with "2", the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed with "0", and the first pending display on the first main game side is displayed. Hold 2 shows a trigger hold. Here, from FIG. 135 onward, to make it easier to understand whether the trigger is on hold or not, the first hold display that is not the trigger hold is indicated by “●”, and the first hold display that is the trigger hold is indicated by “▲”. However, in the actual first pending display, (1) the first pending display in the same display mode regardless of trigger pending or not trigger pending, for example, may be all "●", (2) As shown in the figure, "▴" may be used instead of "" so as to clearly indicate to the player that the trigger is pending ("●" if the trigger is not pending). In such a configuration, it may be determined by lottery whether to display the pending trigger as shown in (1) or as shown in (2) when trigger pending occurs. In this case, (b) perform a loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds, and add a blue color effect in addition to the fixed position action 1 of the first decorative pattern of "1" in the left column (for example, in addition to the enlargement action Effect mode of chance look-ahead effect) is executed. In addition, it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds can be the pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation modes of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. Next, (c) the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative pattern of "7" in the right column (for example, the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production that adds a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action) is executed, and then , (d) Execute the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol of "1" in the middle row (for example, the production mode of the chance look-ahead production that adds a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action). In addition, in (d), an example is shown in which the fixed position action 3 (for example, the production mode of the chance look-ahead production that adds a blue color effect in addition to the expansion action) is executed only for the first decorative pattern in the middle row. However, at the timing of (d), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns may simultaneously execute the blue color effect chance look-ahead effect, in which case the blue color effect is not involved. For normal fixed position actions (actions that enlarge the first decorative pattern), the left column is executed at the timing of (b), the middle column is executed at the timing of (c), and the left column is executed at (d). The blue color effect may be added at the same time to the first decoration symbols of the left, middle, and right columns which are executed at the timing of (d) and temporarily stopped at the timing of (d). In addition, it may be a time-reduced game state instead of a non-time-reduced game state, and it may correspond to a pattern change of a second main game pattern rather than a pattern change of a first decorative pattern corresponding to a pattern change of a first main game pattern. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol.

Next, (e) of FIG. 135 is a state different from (a) to (d) of FIG. The hold on the main game side is 0, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern on the effect display device SG are fixed and stopped at "711", which is the missing pattern. Four first pending displays are displayed on the first main game side, and the first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed with "4", the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed with "0", and the first pending display on the first main game side is displayed. Hold 4 indicates a trigger hold. In this case, (f) a fixed position action 4 (for example, left row, middle row, When the first decorative patterns in the right row temporarily stop at the same time, the first decorative patterns in each row perform an enlargement action at the same time, and the first decorative patterns in each row are simultaneously added with a blue color effect. production mode) is executed. In addition, it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be the pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation modes a1 to a4 shown in FIG. In this way, in the non-time-reduced game state, the occurrence timing of the fixed-position action and the chronological flow differ according to the variation time of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols ( The production mode of the chance look-ahead production is different). Furthermore, even if the production mode of the same blue color effect as the chance look-ahead production appears, in the situation where there is a trigger hold on the first main game side, the hold that is digested prior to the trigger hold is hold 4. → If it is a variation of 3, the variation time will be 5 seconds. At the same time, the first decoration pattern in the right column performs an enlargement action and adds a blue color effect. If the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1, the change time is 10 seconds. , fixed-position action 2, and fixed-position action 3 in that order, and a blue color effect is added in that order. , the magnify actions in that order, but the blue color effect can be done at the same time). Further, even if the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect with the same combination of the first decorative symbols (for example, "117") appears, the trigger is suspended under the condition that the trigger is suspended on the first main game side. If the hold that is digested before is the change of hold 4 → 3, the change time is 5 seconds. As a fixed position action 4, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform the enlargement action and add a blue color effect to execute the performance mode of the chance look-ahead performance, but the first main game side If the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1, the change time is 10 seconds. In the order of the columns, that is, the enlargement action is performed in the order of the fixed position action 1, the fixed position action 2, and the fixed position action 3, and the blue color effect is added in that order. (or, as noted above, the magnifying actions can be done in that order, but the blue tint effect can be done at the same time). In other words, it is the same type of chance-reading effect (combination of the same color effect and the same first decorative pattern), but the timing of occurrence of the fixed position action and the chronological flow are different (the appearance of the chance-reading effect is different). is configured as So far, an example has been shown in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance-read-ahead effect is performed by adding a blue color effect. A green or red color effect may be added instead of the color effect of . The green color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue and green color effects. Then, when executing the look-ahead effect for the first chance, the hold that is digested earlier than the trigger hold is held 4 → 3, and the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneously expanded as a fixed position action. A performance mode of a chance read-ahead performance is executed in which an action is taken and a blue color effect is added. In the next change from hold 3 to 2, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform the enlargement action and add a green color effect to execute the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production. do. Furthermore, in the next change from hold 2 to 1, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform enlargement actions at the same time, and a red color effect is added. Run. Furthermore, in the next hold 2 → 1 change, the left column, the middle column, and the right column are performed as the fixed position actions, that is, the expansion actions are performed in the order of fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, and fixed position action 3. And, in that order, a performance mode of a chance look-ahead performance for adding a red color effect is executed. In such an anticipation of chance production, as the hold is digested, the color effect changes from blue (low expectation of winning) to green (medium expectation of winning), and further to green (high expectation of winning). It is configured so that the degree of expectation for winning increases as the color effect progresses, so that the color effect changes from medium degree) to red color effect (high degree of expectation for winning).

Next, FIG. 136 shows a fixed-position action (performance mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) according to the trigger hold when executing the chance-read-ahead effect with the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the first main game symbols. It is an image diagram showing. The performance mode of the chance-read-ahead performance is a performance mode in which color effects such as red, green, and blue are added as the third element to the first decorative pattern when the fixed-position action is executed. Further, as a fixed position action when the chance look-ahead effect is executed, an action of enlarging the first decorative pattern more than the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped as described above may also be executed. , In this case, the enlargement action is performed when the chance look-ahead effect is not performed, such as expanding the first decorative pattern more than the fixed position action when the chance look-ahead effect is not performed, or expanding while rotating. It is desirable to differentiate from the positional action aspect. First, in (a) of FIG. 136, in the non-time-reduced game state, there is no hold on the first main game side or second main game side, and the hold is 0. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of one main game symbol indicate that the symbol is being varied. Then, (b) when four holdings on the first main game side occur during the symbol variation, (c) in the next variation after the symbol variation is stopped, a losing variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is executed, and the left column , middle row, and right row of the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same time fixed position action 4 (for example, when the first decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right columns Execution mode of a chance look-ahead effect that adds a blue color effect). In addition, it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be the pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation modes a1 to a4 shown in FIG. This fixed position action 4 may be the same action as shown in (f) of FIG. 135, or may be a different action. In addition, it may be a time-reduced game state instead of a non-time-reduced game state, and it may correspond to a pattern change of a second main game pattern rather than a pattern change of a first decorative pattern corresponding to a pattern change of a first main game pattern. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol.

In addition, (d) when two holdings on the first main game side occur during the symbol variation, (e) in the next variation after the symbol variation has stopped, a losing variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is executed, and that variation , the fixed-position action 1 (for example, an expansion action and a blue color effect are added in addition to the enlargement action) is executed in the first decorative pattern in the left column. In addition, it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds can be the pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation modes of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. Next, (f) the fixed position action 2 of the symbol "7" in the first decorative symbol in the right column (for example, the production mode of the chance look-ahead production that adds a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action) is executed. Then, (g) the first decoration pattern in the middle row is a fixed position action 3 (for example, in addition to the expansion action, a blue color effect is added to create a chance look-ahead effect mode). Note that the fixed-position actions 1, 2, and 3 may be the same actions as those shown in (b), (c), and (d) of FIG. 135, or may be different actions. In addition, at the timing of (g), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns may simultaneously execute the blue color effect chance look-ahead effect, in which case the blue color effect is not involved. For normal fixed position actions (actions that enlarge the first decorative pattern), the left column is executed at the timing of (e), the right column is executed at the timing of (f), and the middle row is executed at the timing of (g). The blue color effect may be added simultaneously to the first decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right columns which are executed at the timing of (g) and temporarily stopped at the timing of (g).

In this way, when a trigger hold is caused by entering a ball into the starting hole during pattern fluctuation under a situation where neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side exists, this pattern Depending on whether or not there is a hold that is digested prior to the trigger hold during the variation, and/or depending on how many holds are digested prior to the trigger hold during the pattern variation , fixed-position actions (production mode of chance-read-ahead production) are configured to be different. By constructing in this way, the player is made to select whether or not to accumulate the hold at the timing when the player recognizes or guesses that the trigger hold has occurred when executing the chance look-ahead performance using the first decoration pattern. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as giving a difference to the subsequent performance mode. In addition, even if the production mode of the chance look-ahead production of the same blue color effect appears, it will be started during the pattern fluctuation in the situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side. A trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the mouth, and if the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 4 → 3, the change time is 5 seconds. All the first decorative patterns in the row and right column are temporarily stopped at the same time, and as a fixed position action 4, the first decorative patterns in the left, middle and right rows simultaneously perform the enlargement action and have a chance to add a blue color effect. The effect mode of anticipation effect is executed, but trigger suspension is triggered by the entry of a ball into a starting port during pattern fluctuation under the condition that neither the suspension on the first main game side nor the suspension on the second main game side exists. occurs, and if the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1, the change time is 10 seconds. In other words, it is configured to perform the performance mode of the chance-first read-ahead performance in which the enlargement actions are performed in the order of the fixed-position action 1, the fixed-position action 2, and the fixed-position action 3, and the blue color effect is added in that order. (Alternatively, as noted above, the magnifying actions can be done in that order, but the blue tint effect can be done at the same time). Also, even if the combination of the first decorative symbols is the same combination (for example, "117"), even if the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect appears, there is both a hold on the first main game side and a hold on the second main game side. Trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the starting hole during pattern fluctuation in a situation where the trigger is not held. Due to the shortened variation of the loss, all the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows are temporarily stopped at the same time, and as a fixed position action 4, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows are expanded at the same time. and add a blue color effect. A trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the starting port, and if the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1, the change time is 10 seconds. A production form of a chance-read-ahead production in which enlargement actions are performed in the order of the middle row and the right row, that is, in the order of fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, and fixed position action 3, and a blue color effect is added in that order. (Or, as mentioned above, the expansion actions are performed in that order, but the blue color effect may be performed at the same time), that is, the same type (same color effect or same first decorative pattern combination), but it is configured so that the timing of occurrence of the fixed position action and the chronological flow are different (the production mode of the chance read-ahead effect is different). It should be noted that, when a trigger suspension occurs during a certain symbol variation, it is preferable to configure so that the chance look-ahead effect can be executed from the next symbol variation onward without executing the chance-first look-ahead effect from the certain symbol variation. is. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 136, when there is no hold on either the first main game side or the second main game side hold is 0, the variation time of the first main game symbol is 10 seconds. Even if trigger suspension occurs in a situation where variation is being executed and the remaining time of the variation time is 3 seconds or more (situation in which the variation time for executing the chance look-ahead effect remains), the chance look-ahead effect is not performed. Although the execution time is sufficiently secured, the chance-read-ahead performance is not executed in the certain pattern variation, and the chance-read-ahead performance can be executed from the next pattern variation. So far, an example has been shown in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance-read-ahead effect is performed by adding a blue color effect. A green or red color effect may be added instead of the color effect of . The green color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue and green color effects. Then, when executing the look-ahead effect for the first chance, the hold that is digested earlier than the trigger hold is held 4 → 3, and the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneously expanded as a fixed position action. A performance mode of a chance read-ahead performance is executed in which an action is taken and a blue color effect is added. In the next change from hold 3 to 2, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform the enlargement action and add a green color effect to execute the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production. do. Furthermore, in the next change from hold 2 to 1, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform enlargement actions at the same time, and a red color effect is added. Run. Furthermore, in the next hold 2 → 1 change, the left column, the middle column, and the right column are performed as the fixed position actions, that is, the expansion actions are performed in the order of fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, and fixed position action 3. And, in that order, a performance mode of a chance look-ahead performance for adding a red color effect is executed. In such an anticipation of chance production, as the hold is digested, the color effect changes from blue (low expectation of winning) to green (medium expectation of winning), and further to green (high expectation of winning). It is configured so that the degree of expectation for winning increases as the color effect progresses, so that the color effect changes from medium degree) to red color effect (high degree of expectation for winning).

Next, FIG. 137 is an image diagram showing a fixed position action when executing the chance look-ahead effect with the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time reduction game state. Although not shown, FIG. 137 shows a right-handed instruction display. First, in (a) of FIG. 137, in the time shortening game state, the hold on the first main game side is 0, the hold on the second main game side is 2, and the effect display device SG shows the first decorative symbol and the second 2 decorative symbols are fixed and stopped at "711" which is a missing symbol. In addition, in the time reduction game state, the display mode of the first decorative symbols is only "numbers", and the display mode of the second decorative symbols is also only "numbers". Two first pending displays on the second main game side are displayed, and the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed with "0", the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed with "2", and the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed. Hold 2 shows a trigger hold. In this case, (b) perform a loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds, and perform a fixed position action 5 in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time. As in the non-reduced time game state, this fixed position action is to perform the enlargement action of the first decorative pattern and add a blue color effect, but the fixed position action in the chance look-ahead effect in the non-reduced time game state It may be in a different mode than the position action, in which case, for example, the first decorative pattern may perform a shrinking action and add a blue color effect. In addition, it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be the pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation mode of b1 to b4 shown in FIG. Further, it may be a non-time-reduced game state instead of the time-reduced game state, and it may correspond to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol. So far, an example has been shown in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance-read-ahead effect is performed by adding a blue color effect. A green or red color effect may be added instead of the color effect of . The green color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue and green color effects. Then, when executing a chance look-ahead effect using blue, green, and red color effects, the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is held 4 → 3. In the change of hold 4 → 3, the left column and the middle column are fixed position actions. , the first decorative pattern in the right column simultaneously performs an enlargement action and adds a blue color effect to execute a performance mode of a chance-read-ahead performance. In the next change from hold 3 to 2, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform the enlargement action and add a green color effect to execute the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production. do. Furthermore, in the next change from hold 2 to 1, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform enlargement actions at the same time, and a red color effect is added. Run. In such an anticipation of chance production, as the hold is digested, the color effect changes from blue (low expectation of winning) to green (medium expectation of winning), and further to green (high expectation of winning). It is configured so that the degree of expectation for winning increases as the color effect develops, so that the color effect changes from medium degree) to red color effect (high degree of expectation for winning).

Next, in (c) of FIG. 137, in the time shortening game state, the hold on the first main game side is 0, the hold on the second main game side is 4, and the effect display device SG shows the first decorative symbol. The second decorative symbol is determined and stopped at "711", which is the missing symbol. Then, four first pending displays on the second main game side are displayed, and the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed with "0", the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed with "4", and the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed. Hold 4 indicates a trigger hold. In this case, (d) perform a loss variation with a variation time of 3 seconds, and perform a fixed position action 5 in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time. As in the non-reduced time game state, this fixed position action is to perform the enlargement action of the first decorative pattern and add a blue color effect, but the fixed position action in the chance look-ahead effect in the non-reduced time game state It may be in a different mode than the position action, in which case, for example, the first decorative pattern may perform a shrinking action and add a blue color effect. It is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 3 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation mode of b1 to b4 shown in FIG. In this way, in the time-reduced game state, the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is made the same according to the variation time of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol. is configured to Although the performance mode of the chance look-ahead effect is the fixed position action 5, it may be configured to display a look-ahead-only effect in the time-reduced game state. In that case, the look-ahead-only effect is configured to differ according to the variation time of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols.

Also, as shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 135 and (e) to (f) of FIG. 135, in the non-time reduction game state, the first The fluctuation time on the main game side is different, and the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns of the chance look-ahead effect (the order of the fixed position action) is configured to be different. On the other hand, as shown in (a), (b) of FIG. 137 and (c), (d) of FIG. 137, in the time reduction game state, the second main game side are different, but the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns of the chance look-ahead effect (the order of fixed position actions) is the same. By configuring in this way, the variable time varies depending on the number of reservations in any game state, but in the non-time-reduced game state that emphasizes performance rather than variable efficiency and the time-reduced game state that emphasizes variable efficiency, By differentiating the way of showing the first decorative patterns, the player can recognize in which state the fluctuation is occurring, and the mode of pattern fluctuation of the first decorative patterns suitable for each game state. can do. In addition, the game state can be divided into a game state in which the user can enjoy changing the mode of the fixed-position action according to the difference in the number of reservations, and a game state in which the mode of the fixed-position action is uniformed according to the difference in the number of reservations to realize seamless production progress. You can enjoy the tendency of the mode of the chance number according to the game state. It should be noted that the order of temporary stop in the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state may be the order of temporary stop in the normal symbol variation, without being limited to the order of temporary stop at the time of chance look-ahead effect. When the above configuration is applied to the order of temporary stop in the normal symbol variation in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, for the fixed position action in the normal symbol variation in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, There is no need to add color effects or lookahead-only effects as a third element.

In addition, regarding the order of start of variation, in both the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are designed to start design variation at the same time (substantially simultaneously). is configured to Furthermore, regarding the action at the start of variation, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbol is performed regardless of the number of reservations, but in the time-reduced gaming state, the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbol is not performed. Or it is configured so that the probability of doing so is low. Specifically, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, regardless of whether the hold on the first main game side is any of 1 to 4, the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is executed. However, in the time-reduced game state, regardless of whether the hold on the second main game side is 1 to 4, the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is not executed. Alternatively, in the time-reduced game state, only when the hold on the second main game side is 1 (hold is changed from 2 to 1), at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the pattern fluctuation of the second main game symbols. configured to take action. In addition, the chance eye look-ahead effect is configured to be executable in the symbol variation of holding 4→3, the symbol variation of holding 3→2, and the symbol variation of holding 2→1. Then, the chance-th look-ahead effect when the look-ahead wins is configured so that when the power is turned off and restored, the chance-th look-ahead effect corresponding to the trigger suspension is not executed. In other words, a trigger hold occurs during a certain fluctuation in the state where the hold of the first main game side (or the second main game side) is 1 or more, and the chance-first look-ahead effect is executed from the next fluctuation of the certain fluctuation. Even if it was planned, if the power is cut off during the certain fluctuation, even if the power is restored, the next fluctuation of the certain fluctuation will not execute the chance look-ahead effect, and the first main game side ( Or, the second main game side) has a hold of 3 or more, and a trigger hold occurs during a certain change, and the next change of the certain change is followed by a chance look-ahead effect, and the next change of the certain change. However, even if it is planned to execute the chance-first look-ahead effect, if the power is turned off during the one-on-one change, even if the power is restored, the chance-first look-ahead effect will not be executed in the next change of the one-on-one change (the one-on-one change In , since the power return screen is displayed, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, that is, the chance look-ahead effect is not executed even in the one after another change).

In addition, in the normal symbol variation in the non-reduced time gaming state, the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol may differ depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, but a specific symbol variation (for example, reach fluctuation), depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, there is no difference in the order of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbols, or the probability of the difference in the order of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbols is low. is configured to For example, the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3 is the left row, the middle row, and the right row. The first decorative symbols in the row are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time). The order in which the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the symbol variation is configured to be temporarily stopped in the order of the left row, the right row, and the middle row. On the other hand, the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the reach variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3 is the left row, right row, and middle row. It is configured to temporarily stop in order, and even in the reach fluctuation corresponding to the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side is 2 → 1, the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative pattern is , the left column, the right column, and the middle column are temporarily stopped in this order.

In addition, when the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance-first look-ahead effect) may be executed. In , depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, there may be a difference in the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect). ), depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, there is no difference in the order of the fixed position actions of the first decorative pattern (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) or the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern ( It is configured such that the probability of a difference in the order of the chance-read-ahead effect) occurring is low. For example, the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 4→3 The order is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously (substantially simultaneously) perform a fixed position action (a production mode of a chance-read-ahead production), but the first main game side The order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold is 2 → 1 (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the left column, the right column , and in the order of the middle row, a fixed-position action (an effect mode of a chance look-ahead effect) is performed. On the other hand, the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol (the effect mode of the chance-first look-ahead effect) in the reach variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side becomes 4 → 3 is , left row, right row, and middle row in the order of fixed position actions (a look-ahead effect mode for the first chance). Even in the reach fluctuation corresponding to the pattern fluctuation, the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the left column, the right row, and the middle row. production mode).

In addition, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the non-time-reduced game state, or when the game state is switched from the time-reduced game state to the non-time-reduced game state, the first main game side is held. Regardless of whether or not there is a hold on the second main game side, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variations of the second main game symbols are changed. The first decorative symbol uses the same symbol as the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortening game state (even if the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is Since the common first decorative symbols are used even in the symbol variation of , for example, if the order of variation is the order of the second main game symbol → the first main game symbol, first the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is used. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state after performing the symbol variation of the corresponding first decorative symbol, and the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is started from the state of the stopped display. (becomes). Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the order of start of variation and the order of temporary stop of the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative symbols are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Here, the fluctuation time tendency is the same (substantially the same) is a limited frequency state when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol in the non-reduced time gaming state. As a (game state or variation pattern table related to variation patterns), one variation pattern table (for example, the variation pattern selection tendency does not differ according to the number of reservations on the second main game side as shown in FIG. 13, but in FIG. 122 A table that applies a variation pattern selection state that does not depend on the number of reservations, such as the limited frequency state A and limited frequency state B, to a non-time-reduced gaming state, and a limited frequency state A or limited frequency state B) shown in FIG. Indicates that it is used regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. In addition, the order of starting the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative patterns in the left column, the middle row, and the right row start the pattern fluctuation at the same time (approximately at the same time), and the order of temporary stop is also the left row, the middle row, and the first decoration pattern. The first decorative symbols in the row and the right row are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time). By configuring in this way, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuations on the second main game side after the end of the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state are immediately digested. Since it is possible to return to the game on the first main game side, which is the main game of the non-time-reduced game state, which is the game property, the mode of the first decorative pattern is made simple, while corresponding to the non-time-reduced game state. By executing each minimum action, it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably transition to the first main game.

In addition, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side is temporarily stopped in the non-time-reduced game state, the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance anticipation effect) may be executed, or configured in such a manner. In the case, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the non-time-reduced game state, or when the game state is switched from the time-reduced game state to the non-time-reduced game state, the first main game side is held. Regardless of whether or not there is a hold on the second main game side, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variations of the second main game symbols are changed. The first decorative symbol uses the same symbol as the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortening game state (even if the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is Since the common first decorative symbols are used even in the symbol variation of , for example, if the order of variation is the order of the second main game symbol → the first main game symbol, first the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is used. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state after performing the symbol variation of the corresponding first decorative symbol, and the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is started from the state of the stopped display. (becomes). Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the order of starting the fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns and the order of the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) are the same ( substantially the same). Here, the fluctuation time tendency is the same (substantially the same) is a limited frequency state when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol in the non-reduced time gaming state. As a (game state or variation pattern table related to variation patterns), one variation pattern table (for example, the variation pattern selection tendency does not differ according to the number of reservations on the second main game side as shown in FIG. 13, but in FIG. 122 A table that applies a variation pattern selection state that does not depend on the number of reservations, such as the limited frequency state A and limited frequency state B, to a non-time-reduced gaming state, and a limited frequency state A or limited frequency state B) shown in FIG. Indicates that it is used regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. In addition, the order of the start of fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns start changing patterns at the same time (approximately at the same time). Mode) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time). By configuring in this way, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuations on the second main game side after the end of the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state are immediately digested. Since it is possible to return to the game on the first main game side, which is the main game of the non-time-reduced game state, which is the game property, the mode of the first decorative pattern is made simple, while corresponding to the non-time-reduced game state. By executing each minimum action, it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably transition to the first main game.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state Use the first decorative pattern. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the first main game side. It is configured such that the fluctuation time trend is changed as shown in FIG. 12 according to the number. In addition, according to the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of starting the variation of the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row, and the right row is the same (substantially the same), but the order of temporary stop is the first It is configured differently according to the number of reservations on the main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the normal game state (normal As a variation pattern table), it indicates that the normal game states 1 to 4 (normal variation pattern tables 1 to 4) according to the number of reservations on the first main game side are used. It should be noted that the order of starting the variation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start the pattern variation at the same time (substantially at the same time), and the order of the temporary stop is that the number of reservations is large. In the case (suspension 4 → 3, suspension 3 → 2), the first decorative patterns in the left column, middle row, and right column temporarily stop at the same time (approximately at the same time), and if there are few (suspension 2 → 1, suspension 1 → 0), the first decorative symbols in the left row, the right row, and the middle row are configured to temporarily stop in that order.

In addition, when the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the action at the start of fluctuation may be executed, and when the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead production) may be executed. , when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the pattern variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is non-time-reduced. The first decoration pattern in the game state is used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the first main game side. It is configured such that the fluctuation time trend is changed as shown in FIG. 12 according to the number. In addition, according to the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of the action at the start of the variation of the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative symbols is the same (substantially the same), but the fixed position action (chance eye The order of the look-ahead effect mode) is configured to differ according to the number of reservations on the first main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the normal game state (normal As a variation pattern table), it indicates that the normal game states 1 to 4 (normal variation pattern tables 1 to 4) according to the number of reservations on the first main game side are used. In addition, the order of the action at the start of the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns start the pattern fluctuation at the same time (approximately at the same time). If the number of reservations is large (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the first decorative patterns of the left row, middle row, and right row are executed at the same time (approximately at the same time), When there are few (reservation 2 → 1, reservation 1 → 0), the first decorative symbols in the left column, right column, and middle column are configured to be in the order of fixed position action (production mode of chance ahead reading production). ing.

In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1 → 0 (normal pattern variation of losing, reach goose, etc.) When the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 during non-reach pattern fluctuation such as pseudo-continuous gase, and the hold on the first main game side accumulates to the upper limit ("4"), the second In the pattern variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of one main game pattern, the order of starting the variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row and the right row are started at the same time (substantially at the same time). , On the other hand, the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are temporarily stopped in a different order (for example, the left row, right row, and middle row are temporarily stopped in this order). is configured to Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) Pattern variation of non-reach such as fake)}, the order of the start of the variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row, and the right row are at the same time (approximately at the same time), and the first decorative symbols The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously). However, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1→0 When a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 during a non-reach pattern fluctuation such as a pseudo-continuous gase, and only "1" is accumulated on the first main game side hold, the first main game In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the pattern, the order of starting the variation of the first decorative pattern is that the first decorative patterns in the left row, the middle row and the right row are started at the same time (substantially at the same time). The order in which the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped is that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in a different order (for example, temporarily stopped in the order of the left, right, and middle columns). It is configured. Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 1→0 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) Pattern variation of non-reach such as fake)}, the order of the start of variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously), while the first decorative symbols The order of temporary stops is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in different orders (for example, temporarily stopped in the order of the left, right, and middle columns). .

In addition, when the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the action at the start of fluctuation may be executed, and when the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead production) may be executed. , in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1→0 (normal pattern variation of losing , non-reach pattern fluctuations such as reach and pseudo-continuous), when a game ball enters the first main game start gate A10 and the hold on the first main game side accumulates to the upper limit ("4") , In the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game pattern, the order of the action at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row, and the right row are performed at the same time ( Approximately simultaneously), on the other hand, the order of the fixed position actions of the first decorative symbols (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is that the fixed position actions ( It is configured to execute (for example, the left column, the right column, and the middle column in order). Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) The order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol in the non-reach symbol variation such as fake)] is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously), and the first The order of the fixed-position actions of the decorative symbols (the effect mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously). However, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1→0 When a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 during a non-reach pattern fluctuation such as a pseudo-continuous gase, and only "1" is accumulated on the first main game side hold, the first main game In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the pattern, the order of the action at the start of the variation of the first decorative pattern is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row, and the right row are performed at the same time (substantially at the same time). On the other hand, the order of the fixed-position actions of the first decorative pattern (the production mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is that the fixed-position actions (the chance-read-ahead effect) are arranged in different orders for the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative patterns. mode) (for example, left column, right column, and middle column are executed in order). Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 1→0 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) The order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbols in the non-reach symbol variation such as fake)] is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously). The order of the fixed-position actions of the decorative symbols (the production mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is that the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns perform the fixed-position actions (the production mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) in a different order. (For example, it is configured to execute in the order of left column, right column, and middle column).

In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1 → 0 (normal pattern variation of losing, reach goose, etc.) When the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 during non-reach pattern fluctuation such as pseudo-continuous gase, and the hold on the second main game side accumulates to the upper limit ("4"), the second In the pattern variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of one main game pattern, the order of starting the variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row and the right row are started at the same time (substantially at the same time). , On the other hand, the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are temporarily stopped in a different order (for example, the left row, right row, and middle row are temporarily stopped in this order). is configured to Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol where the hold on the second main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) Pattern variation of non-reach such as fake)}, the order of the start of the variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row, and the right row are at the same time (approximately at the same time), and the first decorative symbols The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously). In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1→0 When the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 during non-reach pattern fluctuation such as pseudo-continuous gase, and only "1" is accumulated on the second main game side hold, the first main game In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the pattern, the order of starting the variation of the first decorative pattern is that the first decorative patterns in the left row, the middle row and the right row are started at the same time (substantially at the same time). The order in which the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped is that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in a different order (for example, temporarily stopped in the order of the left, right, and middle columns). It is configured. Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol where the hold on the second main game side is 1→0 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) Pattern variation of non-reach such as fake)}, the order of the start of the variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row, and the right row are at the same time (approximately at the same time), and the first decorative symbols The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously).

Also, in the non-time-reduced game state, when the first decorative pattern on the second main game side starts to fluctuate, the action at the start of fluctuation, and when the first decorative pattern on the second main game side temporarily stops, the fixed position action (chance In such a case, the pattern of the first main game pattern in which the hold on the first main game side is changed from 1 to 0 in the non-reduced time game state. During the pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the fluctuation (ordinary pattern fluctuation of loss, non-reach pattern fluctuation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage), the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, When the hold of the second main game side accumulates up to the upper limit ("4"), the order of the action at the start of the first decorative symbol variation in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol , the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously), while the order of the fixed-position actions of the first decorative symbols (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the left column, The first decorative patterns in the middle row and the right row are configured to execute the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead production) in a different order (for example, the left row, the right row, and the middle row in the order). there is Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol where the hold on the second main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) The order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol in the non-reach symbol variation such as fake)] is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously), and the first The order of the fixed-position actions of the decorative symbols (the effect mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously). In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1→0 When the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 during non-reach pattern fluctuation such as pseudo-continuous gase, and only "1" is accumulated on the second main game side hold, the first main game In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the pattern, the order of the action at the start of the variation of the first decorative pattern is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row, and the right row are performed at the same time (substantially at the same time). On the other hand, the order of the fixed-position actions of the first decorative pattern (the production mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is that the fixed-position actions (the chance-read-ahead effect) are arranged in different orders for the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative patterns. mode) (for example, left column, right column, and middle column are executed in order). Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol where the hold on the second main game side is 1→0 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) The order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol in the non-reach symbol variation such as fake)] is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously), and the first The order of the fixed-position actions of the decorative symbols (the effect mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously).

In addition, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the time shortened game state, or when the game state is switched from the non-time shortened game state to the time shortened game state, the second main game side is held. When there is a hold on the first main game side in a non-existing state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern is performed, but the first decorative pattern is in the time reduction game state. The same symbol as the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the first main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of start of variation and the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Here, the fluctuation time tendency is the same (substantially the same) means that the normal game state ( As a normal fluctuation pattern table), one fluctuation pattern table (for example, a normal fluctuation pattern table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 122) is used regardless of the number of reservations. It should be noted that the order of starting the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row and the right row start the pattern fluctuation at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side. The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time).

In addition, when the first decorative symbol on the first main game side starts to fluctuate in the time shortening game state, the action at the time of starting the fluctuation, and the fixed position action (chance eye) when the first decorative pattern on the first main game side temporarily stops In the case of such a configuration, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the time shortened game state, or when the time is changed from the non-time shortened game state When the game state is switched to the shortened game state, if there is a hold on the first main game side without a hold on the second main game side, the pattern variation of the first main game pattern is dealt with. Although the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern is performed, the first decorative pattern uses the same pattern as the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game pattern in the time shortening game state. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the first main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of the action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column and the order of the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) They are configured identically (substantially identically). Here, the fluctuation time tendency is the same (substantially the same) means that the normal game state ( As a normal fluctuation pattern table), one fluctuation pattern table (for example, a normal fluctuation pattern table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 122) is used regardless of the number of reservations. It should be noted that the order of the actions at the start of the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side. , The order of the fixed-position action (the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time).

Also, Pattern 1, which is one of the variation patterns of the first decorative symbols when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, will be described. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. The fluctuation time trend is changed according to the number, but the order of start of fluctuation and the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are determined by the second main game side. are configured identically (substantially identically) regardless of the number of reservations. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. It should be noted that, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the order in which the variation starts is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start varying symbols at the same time (substantially at the same time). The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time).

Also, in the time shortening game state, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side starts to change, the action at the time of starting the fluctuation, and when the first decorative pattern on the second main game side temporarily stops, the fixed position action (chance eye) In the case of such configuration, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol. Pattern 1, which is one of the patterns, will be described. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Depending on the number, the fluctuation time trend is changed, but the order of the action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns and the fixed position action (chance look-ahead effect The order of the performance mode) is configured to be the same (substantially the same) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. It should be noted that the order of the actions at the start of the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time), regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. , The order of the fixed-position action (the effect mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time).

Also, pattern 2 (a pattern different from pattern 1), which is one of the variation patterns of the first decorative symbols when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, will be described. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. The fluctuation time trend is changed according to the number, but the order of starting the fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns is irrespective of the number of reservations on the second main game side. are configured identically (substantially identically). The order of temporary stop is configured to differ according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. It should be noted that the order of the start of fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns start changing symbols at the same time (substantially at the same time), regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. In the order of temporary suspension, when the number of reservations is large (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are temporarily stopped at the same time (approximately at the same time). In each case (holding 2→1, holding 1→0), the left column, the right column, and the middle column are arranged in this order.

Also, in the time shortening game state, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side starts to change, the action at the time of starting the fluctuation, and when the first decorative pattern on the second main game side temporarily stops, the fixed position action (chance eye) In the case of such configuration, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol. Pattern 2 (a pattern different from pattern 1), which is one of the patterns, will be described. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Depending on the number, the fluctuation time trend is changed, but the order of actions at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is the number of reservations on the second main game side. Regardless, they are configured identically (substantially identically). It should be noted that the order of the fixed-position actions (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is configured to differ according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. It should be noted that the order of the actions at the start of the fluctuation is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns are executed simultaneously (substantially simultaneously) regardless of the number of pending actions on the second main game side. , The order of the fixed position action (the effect mode of the look-ahead effect for the first chance) is that when the number of reservations is large (hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2), the first decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneously displayed ( (substantially simultaneously), and when there are few (reservation 2→1, reservation 1→0), execution is performed in the order of the left column, the right column, and the middle column.

In addition, pattern 3 (a pattern different from pattern 1 and pattern 2), which is one of the variation mode patterns of the first decorative symbol when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, will be explained. do. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Depending on the number, the fluctuation time trend is changed, but the order of temporary stop is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order in which the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row start to change is configured to differ according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. It should be noted that the order of starting the variation of the first decorative pattern of the left column, the middle column, and the right column is, for example, when the number of reservations is large (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the left column, the middle row, and the right column The first decorative pattern is configured to start changing at the same time (approximately at the same time), and when there are few (holding 2 → 1, holding 1 → 0), it is configured to be in the order of the left column, the middle column, and the right column. However, this explanation is only an example, and it is sufficient if the order of starting the fluctuation is different according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order of temporary stop is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. Any one of these patterns (pattern 1 to pattern 3) is adopted as the variation pattern of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state.

Also, in the time shortening game state, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side starts to change, the action at the time of starting the fluctuation, and when the first decorative pattern on the second main game side temporarily stops, the fixed position action (chance eye) In the case of such configuration, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol. Pattern 3 (a pattern different from pattern 1 and pattern 2), which is one of the patterns, will be described. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Depending on the number, the fluctuation time trend is changed, but the order of the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the same regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side (approximately identical). The order of actions at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is configured to differ according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. In addition, the order of the action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern in the left column, the middle column, and the right column is, for example, when the number of reservations is large (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the left row, middle row, right The first decorative patterns in the row are configured to be executed at the same time (approximately at the same time), and when there are few (reservation 2 → 1, reservation 1 → 1), the left row, middle row, and right row are arranged in order. However, this explanation is only an example, and it is sufficient if the order of the actions at the start of fluctuation is changed according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. In addition, the order of the fixed position action (the effect mode of the look-ahead effect of the chance) is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row, and the right row are displayed at the same time (approximately at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. configured to run. Any one of these patterns (pattern 1 to pattern 3) is adopted as the variation pattern of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state.

Also, the first decorative pattern is configured as follows.
(1) It is preferable that the first decorative pattern is in a non-transmissive state and does not perform any action during the variable fixed time. The display mode of the first decorative symbol during the variable fixed time is a mode in which the first element and the second element are displayed (however, only the second element may be displayed in the time-reduced game state). Also, the third element may be attached to the first decorative pattern. Furthermore, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is, depending on the game state (low probability low base state, high probability high base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state), only the first element or the second element may be displayed. In addition, depending on the game state, the aspect of each element may be configured to be different. 1 element), but in other game states, it is an image of a lion facing sideways (first element), and in a low-probability-low base state, it is an image of the number "7" (second element), but other In the game state, the image of the kanji "7" (second element) is used, and in the low-probability-low base state, the image of "7" is red (third element), but in other game states, the image of "7" The image is gold (third element), or the image of the lion is yellow (third element) in the low-probability-low base state, but the image of the lion is gold (third element) in other game states. good too. It should be noted that, as in the game state, each element may be configured to differ depending on the stage or mode.
(2) It is preferable that the first decorative symbol is in a non-transmissive state and does not perform any action during the deceleration fluctuation. The display mode of the first decorative design during the deceleration fluctuation is preferably the same as the display mode of the first decorative design during the fixed fluctuation time.

Also, the second decorative pattern is configured as follows.
(1) For the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to perform the action at the start of variation.
(2) Regarding the second decorative symbols, it is preferable not to perform the tenpai action while the main game symbols and the first decorative symbols are changing.
(3) Since the second decorative symbols can always be displayed, it is preferable not to transmit them while the main game symbols and the first decorative symbols are fluctuating.
(4) As for the second decorative design, as shown in FIG. 134, the second decorative design in the left and right columns and the second decorative design in the middle row are configured so as not to overlap each other. It is preferable that the second decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the right column are configured so as not to overlap each other.
(5) Regarding the second decorative symbols, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side (or regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side), the order of starting fluctuation and the order of stopping are the same (substantially the same). is preferably configured to
(6) Regarding the second decorative symbols, it is preferable that the order of start of fluctuation and the order of stop are the same (substantially the same) regardless of the game state (non-time-reduced game state, time-reduced game state). .
(7) Regarding the second decoration symbols, regardless of whether the symbol variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side, regardless of the number of reservations, regardless of the presence or absence of the time reduction game state. , the order of starting the fluctuation and the order of stopping the fluctuation are preferably the same (substantially the same).
(8) As for the second decorative symbols, it is preferable not to perform the shaking action during the fluctuation of the main game symbols and the first decorative symbols.
(9) Regarding the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to perform the shaking action during the variable standby state.
(10) As for the second decoration symbols, decorations that are always displayed even when the main game symbols and the first decoration symbols are fluctuating, and even during the fluctuation standby state (including the execution of the waiting movie). It is a design.
(11) For the second decorative pattern, the display mode is the game state (low probability low base state, high probability high base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state) Regardless, only the second element It is preferable that the form of display (for example, outline, color and type of each number (Roman numeral or Chinese numeral)) be the same regardless of the game state. As with the game state, regardless of the stage or mode, only the second element is displayed, and its shape (for example, the outline, color, and type of each number (Roman numerals or Chinese numerals)) may be configured to be the same regardless of

Also, the shaking action is configured as follows.
(1) In the shaking action (first shaking motion) of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation (including temporary stop), both the first element and the second element are shaking, but the state is fixed and stopped. The swing action of the first decorative symbol in the variable standby state (the first second swing action during the variable standby state, the second second swing action during the variable standby state, and the second swing action during the variable standby state. The second shaking motion is the second shaking motion executed after the display of the standby demo screen ends, but it may also be called the third shaking motion.) only the first element shakes, and the second shaking motion is The two elements are constructed so as not to sway. In other words, the swing action during the symbol fluctuation and the swing action during the fluctuation standby state are different. However, regarding the shaking action of the first element, the shaking action of the first element of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation (including temporary stop) and the shaking action of the first element of the first decorative symbol during the fluctuation standby state actions are preferably the same. By applying the shaking action of the first decorative pattern during pattern fluctuation (including temporary suspension) to the variable standby state in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, even the variable standby state is dull. It is possible to avoid the screen (the screen where the first decorative pattern is just stopped), and it is possible to give movement on the liquid crystal screen, and only the second element (number) is fixed without performing a shaking action. By making such a display, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player misunderstand that the symbols are fluctuating.
(2) The image object of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced game state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element), and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-reduced game state (the image object of the first element) Since the image object and the image object of the second element are different, the aspect of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced game state and the aspect of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-reduced game state are different. is configured as
(3) Regarding the execution time of the shaking action of the first decorative pattern during pattern fluctuation, not only the execution time of the ready-to-win effect, but also the first column (eg, left column) and second column (eg, right column) It also includes the shaking action time from when one decorative pattern is temporarily stopped to when it is finally stopped.
(4) The shaking action is to perform a single action within a predetermined period of time (for example, move the first decorative pattern upward and then downward for 0.5 seconds) multiple times. It is configured to be displayed (continuous display, loop display). On the other hand, regarding the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, and the decision action, the action of performing one action in a predetermined time (for example, the action of gradually enlarging the first decorative pattern for 1.0 seconds) is set to 1. It is only executed once and displayed (single-shot display, non-loop display). The predetermined time for the swing action, the predetermined time for the action at the start of fluctuation, the predetermined time for the fixed position action, the predetermined time for the tenpai action, and the predetermined time for the determination action may be the same or different. may
(5) Regarding the shaking action during the variable standby state, the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is a losing symbol and is fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). After a lapse of time (for example, 20 seconds), the first shaking action (second shaking action) during the variable standby state is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) elapses after the main game symbol or the second main game symbol is fixed and stopped (after the variable fixed time has passed, if there is a variable fixed time), 2 during the variable standby state The second shaking action (second shaking action). (also referred to as an operation) is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). In this way, the shaking action during the variable standby state is configured to be able to execute the shaking action at a plurality of timings, similar to the shaking action during the variation. It should be noted that at the start of the first shake action during the variable standby state, the stage BGM is being output (continuously output from after the fixed stop), but after the standby movie is executed, the variable standby state The stage BGM is not output at the start of the second shaking action in , and during the shaking action.
(6) Shaking action of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation in the non-time-reduced game state (including temporary stop), and swing action of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation in the time-reduced game state (including temporary stop) It is different from the shaking action. That is, the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-reduced game state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element) and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced game state (the image of the first element object and the image object of the second element) are different, the mode of the swing action of the first decorative pattern during symbol fluctuation in the non-time-reduced game state (including temporary stop) and the pattern fluctuation in the time-reduced game state It is configured so that the mode of the swing action of the first decorative symbol (including during the temporary stop) is different.
(7) The swing action of the first decorative symbol during the variable standby state of the non-reduced time gaming state is different from the swing action of the first decorative symbol during the variable standby state of the reduced time gaming state. That is, the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-reduced game state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element) and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced game state (the image of the first element Since the object and the image object of the second element) are different, the swing action mode of the first decorative symbol during the variable standby state of the non-reduced time gaming state and the first decorative symbol during the variable standby state of the time-reduced gaming state is configured to be different from the swing action mode of the
(8) When the first decorative symbol in the time shortening game state is composed only of the second elements (numbers), it is preferable not to perform the shaking action in the variable standby state of the time shortening game state. In other words, when the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced game state is composed only of the second elements (numbers), the shaking action (first shaking motion) of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation (including temporary stop) is Executed, but the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the variable standby state, which is the fixed stop state (the first second shaking motion during the variable standby state, the second second shaking motion during the variable standby state. Note that the second shaking motion during the variable standby state is the second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen is finished, but it may also be called the third shaking motion.) should not be performed. is preferred.

Also, the fixed position action is configured as follows.
(1) In the unsuccessful super reach effect, when temporarily stopping the unsuccessful first decorative symbol in the third row (for example, the middle row) as the final row, the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the third row preferably not. By configuring in this way, if it is a normal pattern change of loss or a normal reach change of loss, it is indicated that it is temporarily stopped by performing a fixed position action even in the first decorative pattern of the middle row, while super reach production of loss Regarding, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the unsuccessful super reach effect and perform a fixed position action, so by omitting the action, the movement of the first decorative pattern is seamless according to the passing effect at the time of failure. realizable. On the other hand, when temporarily stopping the first decorative symbol in the third row (for example, the middle row) as the final row in the normal reach, it is preferable to perform the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the third row. , may not perform the positional actions in the third column. By configuring in this way, as with the super reach production, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the reach production and perform a fixed position action for the normal reach production of the failure. A seamless movement of the first decorative pattern can be realized according to the passing performance of. Here, in the case of a loss in which reach is not established (for example, in the case of stopping at a loose stitch such as "247" or "183"), it is preferable to perform the fixed position action of the third row. In addition, Tenpai with the first decorative pattern of "7" has a higher hit expectation than the first decorative pattern of other numbers, and is configured so that there is no loss in normal reach, or it is always super without becoming normal reach. If the first decorative pattern is "7" and it is tenpai because it is configured to develop into a reach effect (or it is easier to develop into a super reach effect than the first decorative pattern of other numbers is tenpai) , do not perform the positional action of the first decorative symbol in the third row (for example, the middle row) as the final row, or the third as the final row than the first decorative symbol of other numbers It is preferable to lower the probability of performing the positional action of the first decorative symbol in the row (for example, the middle row), and the tenpai of the first decorative symbol of other numbers, the positional action of the first decorative symbol in the third row. or, it is preferable to increase the probability of performing the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern in the third row (for example, the middle row) as the final row than "7" is tenpai .

Also, the tenpai action is configured as follows.
(1) Regarding the tenpai action of the first decorative pattern, it is performed in the first decorative patterns in the first row (for example, the left column) and the second row (for example, the right column), but the third row as the final row (for example, , middle row) is not performed in the first decorative pattern. By configuring in this way, by preparing an action that may be performed only with the first decorative patterns of the left column and the right column, which are the first decorative patterns other than the most focused last column, the final In the process until the first decorative pattern in the row stops, the tenpai to be noticed can be visually notified. On the other hand, actions other than the tenpai action of the first decorative pattern are performed with the first decorative patterns in the first column (eg, left column) and the second column (eg, right column), and the third column as the final column. It can also be done with the first decorative symbol in a row (eg middle row).
(2) It is configured to perform the same tenpai action regardless of whether it is pseudo-continuation from non-tenpai (non-reach pseudo-continuation) or pseudo-continuation from tenpai (post-reach pseudo-continuation). Specifically, in FIG. 124, there is a case where the tenpai action 2 of (i2) is performed without performing a non-reach pseudo-run after performing a non-reach pseudo-run, and a case where a post-reach pseudo-run is performed without performing a non-reach pseudo-run. This means that the tenpai action 2 is the same (common) as in the case of performing the tenpai action 2 of (i2) after performing the tenpai action. Also, in FIG. 124, there is a case where the tenpai action 2 of (i2) is performed without performing the post-reach pseudo-run after performing the non-reach pseudo-run, and a case where the post-reach pseudo-run is performed without performing the non-reach pseudo-run. In the case of performing the tenpai action 1 in (u), the aspects of the tenpai action 2 and the tenpai action 1 may be the same. In addition, in the pseudo variation in the pattern variation of the pseudo series, even if a specific notice effect that is determined to be a reach (for example, a notice effect of red lines in a line notice) occurs, a simulation that the specific notice effect has occurred It is configured so that it may become non-tempered at the time of fluctuation, or it may become non-tempered, and when it becomes non-tempered, it may become tenpai in the subsequent pseudo-variation.

Also, the decision action is configured as follows.
(1) The first decorative pattern in the first column (for example, "7" in the left column) in a specific pattern variation (for example, super reach variation) that is a single pattern variation and hit (big hit, small hit) and the first decoration pattern in the second column (for example, "7" in the right column) become the same pattern, and after performing the tenpai action and performing the ready-to-win effect, the super ready-to-win effect, which is the post-reach effect, is performed. is configured to Then, in the super reach effect, the first decorative pattern in the third row (for example, "7" in the middle row) is temporarily stopped at the pattern of the hit (big hit, small hit), and the combination of the hit (big hit, small hit) pattern The success pattern displaying a certain "777" and the first decorative pattern in the third row (for example, "8" in the middle row) temporarily stop at the missing symbol, and display the missing symbol combination "787". and a revival pattern for displaying '777', which is a winning (big win, small win) pattern combination, by performing re-fluctuation from , and winning (big win, small win) via a success pattern, or Whether or not to execute the decisive action is determined depending on whether a win (big win or small win) is achieved via the resurrection pattern. In addition, depending on whether a hit (big hit, small win) is achieved via the success pattern or a hit (big hit, small win) is achieved via the revival pattern, the mode of the decision action (for example, decision action A, (selecting and executing one of the decision actions B) may be configured differently. In addition, when a win (big win or small win) is achieved via the resurrection pattern, no deciding action is executed, or a reviving exclusive deciding action different from the normal deciding action may be executed.

In the normal pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern that corresponds to the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern in the non-time-reduced game state, the action at the start of the fluctuation, the fixed position action, and the shaking action are performed, In this non-reduced time game state, at the time of start of fluctuation, with the normal pattern fluctuation of the loss that depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (variation selection tendency differs according to the number of reservations on the first main game side) It is preferably configured to perform an action, a stationary action and a swing action. In addition, in the normal pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern fluctuation of the second main game pattern in the time-reduced game state, at least one of an action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern and a fixed position action. is not performed, while the swing action of the first decorative symbol is performed. The variation selection tendency differs depending on the situation) In the normal pattern variation of losing, at least one of the action at the start of the variation and the fixed position action is not performed, while the shaking action is preferably performed. is. For example, if the first main game symbol in the non-time-reduced game state is a loss and the normal symbol variation (particularly, holding 1→0) is executed, the variation start action and the fixed position action are performed, but the time is shortened. If the second main game symbol in the game state is a normal symbol variation of losing (especially, hold 1→0), at least one of the variation start action and the fixed position action may not be performed.

In the normal pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern that corresponds to the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern in the non-time-reduced game state, the action at the start of the fluctuation, the fixed position action, and the shaking action are performed, In this non-reduced time game state, at the time of start of fluctuation, with the normal pattern fluctuation of the loss that depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (variation selection tendency differs according to the number of reservations on the first main game side) It is preferably configured to perform an action, a stationary action and a swing action. In addition, in the normal symbol variation of the first decorative symbol that corresponds to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state, the first decorative symbol that corresponds to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state Compared to the normal pattern fluctuations of losing one decorative pattern, the execution probability of at least one of the action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern and the fixed position action is configured to be low, while the shaking action of the first decorative pattern is performed. In this time-reduced game state, normal pattern fluctuation of losing depends on the number of reservations on the second main game side (variation selection tendency differs according to the number of reservations on the second main game side) , it is preferable that the execution probability of at least one of the action at the start of fluctuation and the fixed position action is set to be low, while the swing action is performed. For example, if the first main game symbol in the non-time-reduced game state is a loss and the normal symbol variation (particularly, holding 1→0) is executed, the variation start action and the fixed position action are performed, but the time is shortened. If the second main game symbol in the game state is a normal symbol variation of losing (especially, hold 1→0), the execution probability of at least one of the variation start action and the fixed position action is configured to be low (for example, pattern 1: action at the start of fluctuation=50%, fixed-position action=100%, pattern 2: action at the start of fluctuation=100%, fixed-position action=80%).

In the pattern variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortening game state, at least one of an action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols, a fixed position action, a tenpai action, and a deciding action. is not performed, the shaking action of the first decorative pattern is performed. Further, in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time-reduced gaming state, the symbols of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols in the non-time-reduced gaming state. The execution probability of at least one of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, and the deciding action is configured to be lower than that of the variation, while the shaking action of the first decorative pattern is performed. It is

Also, the variable fixed time and the execution time of each action are configured as follows.
(1) A predetermined time from the first decorative design variable fixed time (for example, 500 ms) until the shaking action in the variable standby state is executed {the first decorative design is a lost design and the fixed stop is In some cases, a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) after the elapse of the variable fixed time) is set longer. By setting in this way, the time for indicating the definitive stop display of the first decorative pattern is secured as the variable fixed time, and the shaking action of the first decorative pattern during the pattern fluctuation (including the temporary stop) is ensured. is applied even during the variable standby state in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. When configured to avoid (give movement on the LCD screen), the next fluctuation will start It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it has been done.
(2) In a specific symbol variation that is one symbol variation (for example, reach variation, normal symbol variation such as holding 1 → 0 loss), the execution time of 1 action other than the shake action to be executed is It is preferably configured to be shorter than the execution time of the shaking action.
(3) In a specific symbol variation that is a single symbol variation (for example, reach variation, hold 1 → 0 loss normal symbol variation, etc.), the total execution time of each action other than the shaking action is the shaking It is preferably configured to be shorter than the total execution time of actions.
(4) In a specific symbol variation that is a single symbol variation (for example, reach variation, hold 1 → 0 loss normal symbol variation, etc.), the execution time of 1 action other than the shaking action is the variable fixed time Although it is preferably configured to be shorter than the variable fixed time, it may be configured to be longer than the variable fixed time.
(5) In a specific symbol variation that is a single symbol variation (e.g., reach variation, hold 1 → 0 loss normal symbol variation, etc.), the total execution time of each action other than the shaking action is variable. It is preferably configured to be longer than the fixed time.

As for BGM (effect sound), as shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, stage BGM is output during symbol variation and during the variation standby state. It is configured to output reach BGM. At the start of the first shake action during the variable standby state, the stage BGM is output (continuously output after the final stop), but after the standby movie is executed, the shake action during the variable standby state is output. The stage BGM is not output at the start and during the shaking action. By way of example, at the timing when the first decorative symbol in (a3) of FIGS. 125 and 133 is a lost symbol and the decision is stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed), the stage BGM is output. , (d3), the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol, and a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed since the fixed stop (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed), and the variable standby state is in effect. Although the stage BGM is continuously output even at the start of the first shaking action of (d3), the timing after the shaking action of (d3) is executed {the first decorative symbol is a missing symbol and is fixed and stopped (fluctuation fixed If there is time, the stage BGM is not output after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the variable fixed time has elapsed). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) has passed since the fixed stop of the losing pattern (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed), the second (f3) shaking action during the variable standby state It is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), but at that time, the stage BGM is not output. It should be noted that the timing after the swing action (d3) is executed {the first decorative pattern is a lost pattern and is fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed}, the stage BGM is configured not to be output. good. Also, at the timing of executing the standby movie in (e3), a power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed. It is configured so that it is superimposed on the middle movie and displayed, and the stage BGM is not output. In addition, if an error is detected during the variable standby state, even if it is the start of the first shake action during the variable standby state or the second shake action during the variable standby state, the error is configured to output an error sound based on the detection of By applying the shaking action of the first decorative pattern during pattern fluctuation (including temporary suspension) to the variable standby state in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, even the variable standby state is dull. It is possible to avoid the screen (the screen where the first decorative pattern is only stopped), and it is possible to give movement on the liquid crystal screen, and when the shaking action is first started in the variable standby state, the game Appropriate production output according to the variable standby state, such as continuing the output of the stage BGM to appeal to the machine, and stopping (muting) the output of the stage BGM to save power when going through the display of the standby movie. Aspects can be made.

Also, the reach voice is configured as follows.
(1) A reach voice occurs when a tenpai action occurs.
(2) There are cases where the reach voice is different even if the ten-pai action at the time of pseudo-continuation after reach and the ten-pai action after that are the same action. For example, output "chance" for the tenpai action at the time of pseudo-continuation after reach, and output "gekiatsu" for the subsequent tenpai action.
(3) There are multiple types of tenpai actions, and the reach voice may be the same even if the tenpai action at the time of pseudo-continuation after reach and the tenpai action after that are different actions. For example, there are tenpai action A and tenpai action B, and the only reach voice corresponding to tenpai action A and tenpai action B is "chance".

As for the standby movie, as explained with reference to FIG. 82, the standby movie can be displayed in both the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state. state, the first decorative pattern is a lost pattern and the fixed stop (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has passed), and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed) seems to be the same is configured to

The volume adjustment screen is configured as follows.
(1) During any of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern, fixed position action, tenpai action, shaking action (during variation, during variation standby state), and decision action, the volume adjustment screen is displayed by the player. It can be displayed by operating the cross button SB-2. In this case, each action and the volume adjustment screen can be displayed simultaneously in the display area SG10 (in other words, even when each action is being executed, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed). Note that during the variable fixed time, the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed even if the cross button SB-2 is operated.
(2) The cross button SB-2 is operated during any of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, the shaking action (during variation, during variation standby state), and the final action. , the volume adjustment screen is displayed in the display area SG10. The displayed volume adjustment screen and the first decorative pattern are displayed in an overlapping manner, and the display priority of the volume adjustment screen is set higher than that of the first decorative pattern. However, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate.
(3) If the action of the first decorative pattern is an action during fluctuation, the second decorative pattern is fluctuating but no action is performed, and the action of the first decorative pattern is in a fixed stop state (variation standby state). When the action is the shaking action, the second decorative symbol is in a fixed stop state (variable standby state) and is configured not to perform the action. However, the overlapping relationship between the volume adjustment screen and the first decorative symbols is configured so as not to overlap with at least one or more first decorative symbols (for example, the first decorative symbols in the left column). In addition, during fluctuation, the display time of the volume adjustment screen (the time corresponding to one operation of the cross button SB-2, for example, 5 seconds) It is the total time of the action, for example, the execution time of the shaking action executed from the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the left column to the final stop), while the other action time (1 action execution time, total action time). However, the display time of the volume adjustment screen can be extended (the display time timer is restarted or reset) by operating the cross button SB-2 again during the display. Therefore, by operating the cross button SB-2 multiple times while the first decorative symbol in the left row is performing the shaking action during the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, the shaking action can be performed. It is configured so that the volume adjustment screen is simultaneously displayed over the entire time (period) during or from the shaking action to other actions or super reach.

Also, the light amount adjustment screen is configured as follows.
(1) During any of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, the shaking action (during variation, during the variation standby state), and the decision action, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed by the player. It can be displayed by operating the cross button SB-2. In this case, each action and the light amount adjustment screen can be displayed simultaneously in the display area SG10 (in other words, the light amount adjustment screen can be displayed even when each action is being executed). It should be noted that during the variable fixed time, the light amount adjustment screen may not be displayed even if the cross button SB-2 is operated.
(2) The cross button SB-2 is operated during any of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, the shaking action (during variation, during variation standby state), and the final action. , the light amount adjustment screen is displayed in the display area SG10. The displayed light quantity adjustment screen and the first decorative pattern are displayed in an overlapping manner, and the display priority of the light quantity adjustment screen is set higher than that of the first decorative pattern. However, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate.
(3) If the action of the first decorative pattern is an action during fluctuation, the second decorative pattern is fluctuating but no action is performed, and the action of the first decorative pattern is in a fixed stop state (variation standby state). When the action is the shaking action, the second decorative symbol is in a fixed stop state (variable standby state) and is configured not to perform the action. However, the overlap relationship between the light amount adjustment screen and the first decorative pattern is configured so as not to overlap with at least one or more first decorative patterns (for example, the first decorative pattern in the left column). Also, during fluctuation, the display time of the light intensity adjustment screen (the time corresponding to one operation of the cross button SB-2, for example, 5 seconds) It is the total time of the action, for example, the execution time of the shaking action executed from the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the left column to the final stop), while the other action time (1 action execution time, total action time). However, the display time of the light amount adjustment screen can be extended (the display time timer can be restarted or reset) by operating the cross button SB-2 again during the display. Therefore, by operating the cross button SB-2 multiple times while the first decorative symbol in the left row is performing the shaking action during the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, the shaking action can be performed. The light amount adjustment screen is displayed simultaneously over the entire time (period) during the movement or during the transition from the shaking action to other actions or super reach. It should be noted that while the first decorative symbol in the left row is performing a swinging action while the first main game symbol or second main game symbol is changing, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed by operating the cross button SB-2 once. is displayed, and the sound volume adjustment screen is displayed by one operation of the cross button SB-2 while the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed, and the light intensity is displayed by one operation of the cross button SB-2 while the sound volume adjustment screen is displayed. By alternately repeating the display operation of the light intensity adjustment screen and the display operation of the volume adjustment screen during the execution of the shaking action so as to display the adjustment screen, the shaking action can be performed for the entire time (period) during the shaking action. It is configured so that the light intensity adjustment screen and the volume adjustment screen are displayed at the same time from the action to the transition to other actions and super reach (only one of the light intensity adjustment screen and the volume adjustment screen is displayed) In this case, the display of the light amount adjustment screen and the display of the volume adjustment screen are repeatedly switched over the entire time (period) during the shaking action or until the transition from the shaking action to another action or super reach).

Further, the advance notice effect is configured as follows.
(1) The rate at which the notice effect occurs when the first decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed is configured to be higher than the rate at which the notice effect occurs when the first decorative pattern fluctuates in deceleration or immediately before a temporary stop. In addition, the number of notice effects that can be executed when the first decorative pattern changes at high speed in one pattern change is configured to be larger than the number of notice effects that can be executed when the first decorative pattern changes in deceleration or immediately before temporary stop. . In addition, the number of candidates for the notice effect that can occur when the first decorative pattern changes at high speed in one pattern change is greater than the number of candidates for the notice effect that can occur when the first decorative pattern changes in deceleration or immediately before the temporary stop. It is configured. When the first decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed, it is in a transparent state and no action is executed, so when the notice performance is executed at the time of high speed fluctuation, the player can easily perform the notice performance. While it is visible, no action is executed even when the first decorative pattern decelerates and changes. , is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Then, immediately before the temporary stop time, since the fixed position action is executed, even if the announcement effect is executed in this state, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

Further, the sub-control section uses the image data of the image object generated when displaying the second element of the first decorative design as data when displaying the second element of the second decorative design. For example, the sub-controller (especially the sub-sub-controller SS) controls a frame buffer for storing image data of an image object to be displayed in the decorative design display area SG11, and an image control for controlling the display of the image data stored in the frame buffer. and an enlarging/reducing means for enlarging or reducing image data stored in the frame buffer. A reduction process is performed, and the image control means is configured to display the image data processed by the enlargement/reduction means as the second element of the second decorative design. By using image data in this way, an image object can be generated efficiently.

Supplementally, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is always displayed during the variable display, and the fixed stop is always performed. It may be configured to be displayed when possible or difficult to visually recognize, and in this case, the second decorative pattern is not necessarily fixed and stopped.

For each action (variation start action, fixed position action, shaking action, tenpai action, decision action), the action mode may be different depending on whether it is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute an action depending on whether it is in the time-reduced game state or in the non-time-reduced game state. Also, for each action (variation start action, fixed position action, swing action, tenpai action, decision action), the action mode may be different depending on whether it is the production stage A or the production stage B. Further, whether or not to execute an action may be determined depending on whether it is the production stage A or the production stage B. Also, for each action (variation start action, fixed position action, shaking action, tenpai action, decision action), even if the action mode differs depending on whether it is a normal background or a reach background (super reach background) good. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute an action depending on whether it is a normal background or a reach background (super reach background).

Regarding tenpai, it has been explained that tenpai is temporarily stopped in the order of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column, but the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column may be temporarily stopped at the same time and tempered. In this case, in the first (for example, first) pseudo change, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are temporarily stopped in order, and then the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle row. Then, the next (for example, second) pseudo fluctuation is started. Then, in the next pseudo-variation, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are temporarily stopped at the same time, and the ready-to-win effect is executed as it is, or the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped. It is configured. In addition, when the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are temporarily stopped and tenned at the same time, the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern in the right column Position actions are initiated at the same time.

When a specific notice effect (for example, the next notice effect) is generated during the symbol change, the fixed position action and the tenpai action may not be performed. For example, when the next advance notice effect occurs during pattern fluctuation, the super ready-to-win effect is executed without becoming tenpai and without becoming the normal ready-to-win effect. In the case of such a configuration, since it is desired to surely show the super ready-to-win effect to the player, during the super ready-to-win effect, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are arranged so as to make it difficult for the player to understand. It is intended to be tempered and preferably does not take place action and temper action. By configuring in this way, it is possible to show the player that the game is in a ten-pie state at a timing that surprises the player.

Depending on the display mode of the pending display for production of the change and the first pending display immediately before digestion, the mode of the action at the start of the fluctuation (whether it is easy to execute the action at the start of the fluctuation, or the highly expected action at the start of the fluctuation (whether it is easy to execute B) may be configured to have different tendencies. For example, in the case of the red pending display for production of the fluctuation or the first pending display just before digestion, the action at the start of fluctuation is always executed, but the white (normal) production pending display for the fluctuation In the case of pending display, it is configured so that the action at the start of the fluctuation is not always executed, and in the case of the red pending display for production of the relevant fluctuation and the first pending display immediately before digestion, the white (normal) fluctuation than in the case of the pending display for production or the first pending display just before digestion, or the ratio of execution of the action at the start of the fluctuation is higher, or the pending display for production of the red fluctuation In the case of 1 pending display, the ratio of execution of action B at the start of fluctuation is higher than in the case of the white (normal) pending display for effecting the change or the first pending display immediately before digestion. , In the case of the white (normal) pending display for the production of the fluctuation and the first pending display just before digestion, the fluctuation start time is higher than the red pending display for production of the relevant fluctuation and the first pending display just before digestion It is configured such that the rate at which action A is executed is high.

When enlarging by action (action at the start of fluctuation, fixed position action, tenpai action), the enlargement ratios of the first element and the second element may be different. For example, the magnification rate of the first element may be 1.4 times and the magnification rate of the second element may be 1.1 times, or only the first element may be enlarged and the second element may not be enlarged. As for the swing action, the amount of swing movement may differ between the first element and the second element. For example, if the display area of the first element is 1, the amount of movement of the first element swings left and right by 0.1. In this case, it may be swung left and right by 0.2 (or 0.05). However, it is desirable that the time required for one oscillation (period of one oscillation) is the same for both the first element and the second element.

In the explanation so far, as the display mode of the first decorative symbol in each action, game state, and stage, the display modes such as "numbers only" and "numbers + characters" have been described. A third element may be added to the display mode of "numbers + characters". For example, in the case of only "numbers", "numbers+effects" may be used, and in the case of "numbers+characters", "numbers+characters+effects" may be used.

12 and 13, the determination of the variation pattern of the first main game symbols depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (the first main game side The variation selection tendency differs depending on the number of reservations), and the determination of the variation pattern of the second main game pattern depends on the number of reservations on the second main game side, whether in the time shortened game state or the non-time shortened game state. (The fluctuation selection tendency differs depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side), but the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the first main game symbol is the reservation on the first main game side in the time reduction game state. It does not depend on the number (variation selection tendency is the same regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side), but in the non-time reduction game state it depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (the number of reservations on the first main game side The variation selection tendency differs depending on the number of reservations), and the determination of the variation pattern of the second main game pattern depends on the number of reservations on the second main game side in the time reduction game state (depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side) However, in the non-time-reduced game state, it is configured so that it does not depend on the number of reservations on the second main game side (the tendency of fluctuation selection is the same regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side). You may

Suspension 4→3, Suspension 3→2, Suspension 2→1, Suspension 1→0, Suspension 4→3, Suspension 3→2, Suspension 2→1, Suspension 1→0 The determination of the variation mode and the symbol variation in the lottery table for use correspond as follows. When the hold is 4→3 and the hold is 4→3, the change mode is determined by referring to the number of holds=3 in determining the variation mode in the variation mode determination lottery table, and the determined variation mode is used to determine the pattern variation. is set to run. When the hold is 3→2 and the hold is 3→2, the variation mode is determined by referring to the number of holds=2 in determining the variation mode in the variation mode determination lottery table, and the determined variation mode is used to determine the pattern variation. is set to run. When the hold is 2→1 and the hold is 2→1, the variation mode is determined by referring to the number of holds=1 in determining the variation mode in the variation mode determination lottery table, and the determined variation mode is used to determine the pattern variation. is set to run. When the hold is 1→0 and the hold 1→0, the variation mode is determined by referring to the number of holds=0 in determining the variation mode in the variation mode determination lottery table, and the determined variation mode is used to determine the pattern variation. is set to run.

83, the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are separately displayed. However, as shown in (b3) of FIG. good too.

In FIGS. 99 to 123, the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the first main game side have been described, but the first pending display on the second main game side has been described. And it may be configured to display the second pending display on the second main game side as well.

99 to 123, the example in which the ready-to-win mode is set in the second decorative pattern has been described, but the configuration may be such that the ready-to-reach mode is not set in the second decorative pattern (always fluctuating until the final stop). .

Based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments, the following concepts can be extracted (listed). However, the concepts listed below are only examples, and the concepts listed below can be added to these concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments, as well as the combination and separation (higher-level concepts) of these concepts. may

Pachinko machines, which are currently the most popular, change the pattern called "special pattern" (or main game pattern) on the display part such as 7 segments when a game ball enters the start hole. When it is displayed and the special pattern becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), a special game state with a higher profit state for the player than the normal game state {large winning opening (so-called attacker) that is normally closed is a type of machine that shifts to a game with content that is released under a predetermined condition (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”). Here, in order to reduce the burden of controlling the display of special symbols, which are directly linked to the player's profits, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbols", "decorative symbols" are used to enhance the interest of the game. The design for performance to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a manner synchronized with the variation of the special design. Then, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special pattern stops in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative pattern also follows in a predetermined mode (for example, "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative symbols in a predetermined manner.

Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, it is necessary to devise how to make the overall performance including the fluctuation mode of the pattern as highly interesting as possible. The focus is on whether or not to give. For example, the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variably displayed "decorative pattern" is hidden and instead an interesting moving image is displayed. One of them is a method of improving the interest of the game by such a production method.

(Third Embodiment)
The action at the time of power-on and the configuration of processing in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, which are applicable to the first and second embodiments, will be described in detail below as a third embodiment. Here, although some of them have been described in the above-described embodiments, an example of a configuration that can be further applied to the above-described embodiments is referred to as a third embodiment, which will be described in detail below. Moreover, the above-described embodiments should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be any combination. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described.

FIG. 138 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. FIG. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. 1(a) is executed. That is, after turning on the power of the pachinko game machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1010-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch is on. If Yes at step 1010-1, at step 1010-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the front frame D14 is open. (determined by ON/OFF of the sensor).

If Yes at step 1010-2, at step 1010-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the RAM clear button is on. If Yes at step 1010-3, at step 1010-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, the information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Execute clear processing (RAM clear processing when setting is changed). Next, at step 1010-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the information related to the execution of the setting change process in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (control command transmission at step 1999). (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, at step 1010-5-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the setting change flag (flag used in the setting control process), and proceeds to step 1010-5-2. Next, at step 1010-5-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the motor initial operation determination flag, and proceeds to step 1010-23.

On the other hand, if No at step 1010-1, at step 1010-11-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the RAM clear button is on. If Yes in step 1010-11-1, in other words, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear button ON and the setting key switch OFF, the process proceeds to step 1010-16 to execute RAM clear.

If No at step 1010-11-1 or No at step 1010-3, the process proceeds to step 1010-8. If No in step 1010-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the ON information of the setting key switch in step 1010-7, and proceeds to step 1010-8. Note that when the ON information of the setting key switch is cleared by executing the processing of step 1010-7, it is determined that the setting key switch is ON again after that. (2) When the power is turned off and then turned on again, the setting key switch is judged to be on. may

Next, at step 1010-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not information indicating that the power has been turned off normally is stored in the RAM. If Yes at step 1010-8, at step 1010-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the RAM area comparison with the amount of information stored). Next, in step 1010-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is correctly backed up in the RAM). judge. If Yes in step 1010-10, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1010-10-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M continues to be abnormal before the power was turned off. It is determined whether or not the situation is not the same (whether or not the power is restored after the power is turned off in a situation where an abnormality that stops the game has occurred). If Yes in step 1010-10-1, in step 1010-11, CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the power is turned off during setting change processing (during setting change mode) before the power is turned on. judge. If Yes at step 1010-11, at step 1010-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets ( (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1010-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M notifies the setting change abnormality (for example, notifies by a predetermined display device controlled by the main control board M). Next, at step 1010-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a setting change abnormality flag (a flag used at step 1000-5-1, which will be described later), and proceeds to step 1010-23.

In this manner, if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, a setting change abnormality may occur after the power is turned on. If No in step 1010-11, the process proceeds to step 1010-19.

Further, if No at step 1010-10-1, at step 1010-10-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sub-submits information about the continuing abnormality (abnormality detected before the power was cut off). It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control section SM (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1010-23.

In the case of No in step 1010-8 or step 1010-10, in step 1010-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the set value data is within the normal range ("1" to "3" in this example). Determine whether or not there is If Yes at step 1010-14, at step 1010-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the content of the RAM check flag is normal. In this example, it is determined that the operation is normal when the content of the RAM check flag stored in the predetermined RAM area is "AA55H". The content of the RAM inspection flag determined to be normal in step 1010-15 is not limited to "AA55H", and may be set to any content, or may be a value used in a normal game, 0 is acceptable. If Yes at step 1010-15, at step 1010-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes RAM clear. Next, at step 1010-16-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the motor initial operation determination flag, and proceeds to step 1010-23.

On the other hand, if No at step 1010-14 or step 1010-15, at step 1010-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M creates a command transmission buffer for transmitting information related to the RAM abnormality to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1010-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a RAM abnormality flag (a flag used at step 1000-5-1, which will be described later), and proceeds to step 1010-23. The predetermined RAM area mentioned above may be only the RAM area in which the RAM inspection flag is stored, or the RAM area in which the RAM inspection flag is stored and the RAM area in which the set value data are stored. In such a configuration, it is possible to confirm that the set value data is normal and the content of the RAM inspection flag is normal, by saying that "the value in the predetermined RAM area satisfies a specific condition." It is sometimes called "there is".

Next, at step 1010-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value data is within the normal range. If Yes at step 1010-19, at step 1010-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is ON information for the setting key switch. It should be noted that if the ON information of the setting key switch has been cleared in the process of step 1010-7, it is judged No in step 1010-20. For example, when an operation to turn on the setting key switch is performed while the front frame D14 is closed and the power is turned on, the operation to turn on the setting key switch is not performed and a new operation is not performed. Also (even if the setting key switch is apparently turned on), the ON information of the setting key switch is cleared. In the case of No in step 1010-19, in step 1010-24, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the information related to the setting value abnormality in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step 1999 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of ). Next, at step 1010-25, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a set value abnormality flag (a flag used at step 1000-5-1, which will be described later), and proceeds to step 1010-23.

If Yes at step 1010-20, at step 1010-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information related to the execution of the setting confirmation process to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, in step 1010-22-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a setting confirmation flag (a flag used in setting control processing, which will be described later), and proceeds to step 1012. It should be noted that even if No in step 1010-20, the process proceeds to step 1012 as well.

Next, at step 1012, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires various information commands at the time of power failure stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M, and at step 1014, the acquired various information commands is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (it may be transmitted at this timing, or at this timing, a command may be set and transmitted by the control command transmission process), and step 1014- At 1, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the return of the solenoid {Second main game starter electric accessory B11d of the second main game starter B10, big prize gate (for example, first big prize gate C10, second In order to restore the open or closed state of the large winning opening C20) and the direct V shutter C12-1-1 to the state before power off, also, the state of the initial position or movable position of the storage part C12-5 before power off In order to return to the state, it is determined whether the solenoid operation bit is on in the order of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d, the big winning opening, the direct V shutter C12-1-1, and the storage section C12-5, If it is ON, store the solenoid operation flag at the corresponding address (in order to determine that the second main game starter/big prize winner/movable piece is open before the power is turned off and open it again)}. Then, the process proceeds to step 1010-23.

Next, at step 1010-23, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information relating to power restoration to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (by the control command transmission processing at step 1999, the sub transmitted to the main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt related to the main processing on the main control board M side (for example, a hardware interrupt every approximately 4 ms. In this example, the interrupt T) is permitted, and the process proceeds to step 1018. After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (for example, random number counter incrementing process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M. As shown in FIG. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the processing shown in FIG. That is, with the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, hardware interrupt at approximately 4 ms intervals) as a trigger, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the input processing described later in step 1000-1. Next, at step 1000-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes various random number updating processes, which will be described later. Next, at step 1000-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an initial value update type random number update process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1000-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an initial value random number updating process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1009, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes setting control processing, which will be described later.

Next, at step 1000-5-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game stop flag is off. Here, the game stop flags are a RAM abnormality flag, a set value abnormality flag, a setting change abnormality flag, a setting change flag, and a setting confirmation flag, and any one of these game stop flags is turned on. If so, it will be judged as No in step 1000-5-1. If Yes at step 1000-5-1, go to step 1000-5-2. Instead, go to step 1550-13. That is, when the game is stopped, the processes of steps 1000-5-3 to 1551 and 1550-12 are not executed.

The setting control process of step 1009 is executed during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is configured so that the main processing of the progress of the game, such as variable display of game symbols and winning determination, is not executed. Also, if the RAM error flag, setting value error flag, setting change error flag, setting change flag, or setting confirmation flag are ON, the game is stopped (by not performing some processing during interrupt processing, This game stop state is called a game stop state A.

Next, at step 1000-5-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the motor initial operation determination flag is 0 or not. Here, the motor initial operation determination flag is used for RAM clear processing at the time of setting change, which is performed when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, or when the RAM clear button is operated to switch to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. It is a flag indicating that the game is being executed, and after the RAM clearing process is executed, the game is stopped, and the motor initial operation determination flag is set to 1. If the motor initial operation determination flag is 1, it is determined No in step 1000-5-2. If Yes at step 1000-5-2, go to step 1000-5-3. Instead, go to step 1550-12. That is, after the RAM clear process is executed, the processes of steps 1000-5-3 to 1551 are not executed.

Also, after the RAM clearing process is executed, the game is stopped, and this game stopped state is called a game stopped state B. FIG. In addition, if power is turned off or an error occurs during a small winning game and power is turned on with RAM clearing, there will be one ball ( If there is at least 2 or more game balls in the V challenge route, including the 1 ball (may be 2 or more balls) entered during the next small hit game Since it will exist in the lottery area, the probability of entering the ball into the specific area will be different from the probability of entering the ball in the specific area of the small winning game when the small winning is won in the normal game state. The purpose is to make the period in which the game is stopped during the initial operation for a certain period of time. Also, during setting change processing (setting change in progress), during setting confirmation, and during the occurrence of a specific error (game stop error), the game stop state A is in effect, but after the game stop state A is resolved, the motor is cleared when the RAM is cleared. When the initial action determination flag is on (after the setting change process is executed), the game stop state B continues, and from the timing when the game stop state B is reached, the movable body inside the first large winning opening C10 ( storage section, direct V shutter, interference member, rotating drum, stopper, rotating body, shutter) are configured to be initialized.

In the game stop state A, the motor control process of step 1550-12 is configured not to be executed, but in the game stop state B, the motor control process of step 1550-12 is configured to be executed. . In addition, in the game stop state B, the timer subtraction (S1000-5-3), which is the updating process of the timer data necessary for the progress of the game such as the control of the main game symbols, is not executed. , in the motor control process of step 1550-12 to be described later, timer subtraction of timer data relating to the initialization operation is executed. As a timer for timer subtraction, a motor initial operation timer for initializing the movable body in the big winning opening is used. It is configured to determine that the initial operation is completed and turn off the motor initial operation determination flag. Further, in the game stop state B, the timer subtraction (S1000-5-3) is not executed, but the timer subtraction (S1000-5-3) may be executed.

When the initialization operation of the movable body (motor control processing) accompanying the RAM clearing processing is completed, CPUMC of the main control board M executes the timer subtraction processing described later in step 1000-5-3. Next, at step 1000-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes start port 2 effective period setting processing (processing for setting the effective period of the second main game start port B10), which will be described later. Next, at step 1000-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes winning monitoring processing, which will be described later.

Next, at step 3000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes prize ball payout command transmission control processing, which will be described later. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins a prize in each prize opening is 4 balls from the first main game start opening A10, 1 ball from the second main game start opening B10, 1 ball from the first main game start opening C10 and the second The large winning opening C20 has 15 balls, the left general winning opening (also called general winning opening) P10 has 3 balls, and the right general winning opening P20 has 2 balls. These prize ball payout numbers are examples, and the number of prize ball payouts when entering the first main game start port A10 and when entering the second main game start port B10 are different. Alternatively, the number of prize balls to be paid out may be different between when the ball enters the first big prize hole C10 and when the ball enters the second big prize hole C20. In addition, when a game ball enters the left general winning hole P10, a lottery such as a winning lottery is not executed, and a predetermined number of prize balls (three balls in this example) are given to the player. It is configured. Also, when a game ball enters the right general winning hole P20, a random number on the auxiliary game side is obtained, and a predetermined number of prize balls paid out (two balls in this example) are given to the player. It is configured. However, the number of winning balls in all the winning holes provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example does not exceed 15 for one winning (winning ball), and is constant regardless of the game state (abnormal (Except when it is invalidated due to circumstances or an error), and is configured so that prize balls are not paid out except for winning prizes, realizing various game states. , the direct result of the game is summarized as "whether or not the shot game ball wins a prize in a predetermined winning hole".

In this example, since the specific prize ball payout control process is performed by the prize ball payout control board KH instead of the main control board M, the main control board M manages the progress of the payout control in real time. However, if there is an accident such as a power failure during payout of one game ball, the correct number of prize balls may not be delivered. For this reason, in this example, a retry function in the event of an abnormality that again pays out game balls for the winning prize (for example, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 and one game ball is paid out , and after that, after the power is restored, the remaining 3 game balls are paid out). Of course, by providing a backup function to the prize ball payout control board KH, it is possible to realize the correct number of prize ball payouts even when such an abnormality occurs. No function is required.

Next, at step 2000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes ball entry detection processing. Next, at step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process. Next, at step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric accessory drive determination process. Next, at step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes main game content determination random number acquisition processing. Next, at step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process. Next, at step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process. Next, at step 1600-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the later-described control processing inside the big prize winning mouth. Next, at step 1601, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a big winning opening validity period setting process. Next, at step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process. Next, at step 1551, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game start time control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550-12.

Next, at step 1550-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes motor control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1550-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes prize ball control processing for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH. Next, at step 1550-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes abnormality detection processing. Next, at step 1550-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a ball passing time abnormality detection process. Next, at step 1550-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state display process. Next, at step 1550-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a handle state signal inspection process. Next, at step 1550-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an out port monitoring process. Next, at step 1900, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes fraud detection information management processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1950, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes error management processing, which will be described later.

Next, at step 1550-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes firing control signal output processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1550-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes test signal output processing. Next, at step 1550-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes solenoid output processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes control command transmission processing (transmits the command set in each processing described above to the sub-main control section side). Next, at step 1550-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes LED output processing. Next, at step 3500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes external signal output processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1550-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes ball entry state control processing. Next, at step 1550-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes flag register return processing. Next, at step 1550-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets so as to permit the generation of a timer interrupt, and returns to the processing that was being executed immediately before execution of this interrupt processing.

The input process is a process of determining a signal input to the main control board M from an input device such as a sensor and setting a flag or the like corresponding to the signal. switches (for example, the first main game start entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance detection device H11s, the first big winning entrance winning detection device C11s, 1st big winning opening discharge detection device C13s, 2nd big winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device, etc.), out ball count switch that detects the ball entering the out door D36, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, open Signal (for example, front frame D14, door D18, etc.), magnetic detection signal 1 (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 1), radio wave detection signal, impact detection signal, touch state signal and magnetic detection signal 2 (detection by magnetic detection sensor 2 signal) input is monitored. In this example, for a special input such as the RAM clear button, input determination or the like is performed by a process different from the input process.

In addition, various random number update processing is a process of relatively simply updating (for example, adding a constant) the random number used in the lottery that has a very low impact on the winning ball. (For example, auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number) and variation pattern random number (for example, variation mode lottery random number) is a process of updating.

Note that the initial value update type random number update process is a process of updating the random numbers used in the lottery that has a certain degree of influence on the ball output (a process different from the various random number update processes described above). , random number per normal design (for example, random number for winning auxiliary game design), random number for normal design design (for example, random number for stop design of auxiliary game design), random number for special design design (for example, random number for design lottery), soft random number per special design described later, etc. This is a process for updating the

The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the random number for determining the initial value of the random number updated by the initial value update type random number update process used in the lottery that has a certain degree of influence on the ball output. , In this example, as an example of the random number to be updated, the initial value random number per normal design, the normal design design initial value random number, the special design design initial value random number, and the soft initial value random number per special design can be exemplified. Incidentally, the normal per symbol initial value random number and the normal symbol symbol initial value random number are random numbers that are updated by the initial value random number update process when the configuration is such that a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers are provided.

In addition, the timer subtraction process is a 2-byte timer (for example, the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, the special game timer MP34t , open time timer, etc.).

In addition, the start opening 2 effective period setting process is a winning opening that makes it easier to win by operating the normal electric accessory (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) according to the operating state of the normal electric accessory. This is the process of setting the validity period of (for example, the second main game starter B10).

Also, the winning monitoring process is a process of updating the passage counter of the switch, creating a security output request to be output to the external terminal board, and requesting transmission of a command to be transmitted to the effect control board.

The prize ball payout command transmission control process is a process in which the main control board M executes a payout control board transmission control process and a payout control board reception control process.

A description will be given of the payout control board transmission control process. First, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF, that is, whether or not the payout is currently being executed. When the payout signal is OFF, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there are undistributed prize balls (prize balls for which the prize ball payout command has not yet been transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH side). do. If there are undischarged prize balls, the CPUMC of the main control board M will detect a prize ball dispensation-related error that is inappropriate for distributing the prize balls (for example, an error related to a dispensation motor failure, a full tank, a ball It is determined whether or not a disconnection error, etc.) has occurred. When an error related to prize ball payout occurs, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a prize ball payout command for the number of prize balls to be paid out corresponding to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed this time. . Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M erases the undistributed prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball disbursement command set this time, and executes processing for shifting subsequent information. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the set prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and shifts to the payout control board reception control process. When the payout signal is ON, when there is no unpaid prize ball, and when no prize ball payout-related error occurs, the process proceeds to the payout control board reception control process.

A description will be given of the payout control board reception control process. First, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout-related information has been received. When the payout-related information is received, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is error information (out-of-ball error, upper tray full error, other payout-related error) in the received payout-related information. . If there is error information in the payout-related information, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the error flag related to the corresponding error, so that the error information on the prize ball payout control board KH side is sent to the main control board M management on the other side (unified management). On the other hand, if there is no error information in the payout-related information, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the error flag associated with the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout related information. If the received payout-related information includes prize ball payout completion information, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set prize ball payout command (prize ball payout command related to the completion of this payout), Move to signal output processing. When the payout-related information is not received, and when the prize ball payout completion information does not exist in the received payout-related information, the external signal output process is performed.

Ball entry detection processing includes auxiliary game start entry ball detection processing, main game start entry ball detection processing, first (second) big winning entry entry ball detection processing, general winning entry entry ball detection processing, and discharge ball detection processing. , out-hole ball detection processing and prize ball determination processing are executed.

Next, the control processing in the big winning mouth will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the flow of the big winning mouth process performed by the main control board M. FIG. Here, the first big winning hole C10 will be described as the target for the big winning hole C10. The big winning opening can be read as the second big winning opening.

Step 1600-1 is a flow chart of the big winning mouth process according to the subroutine of step 1600-1 of FIG. The big winning mouth process is a process controlled by the CPUMC of the main control board M, and is configured to execute a process corresponding to the value of the discharged ball status. There are 0, 1, and 2 as values of the discharged ball status, and the value of the discharged ball status=0 is a value indicating "in the normal game". The discharge ball status value=1 is a value indicating "during a small winning game" based on the stop display of the small winning symbol. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 154, it shows the process from the small winning start demonstration during the small winning game to the end of the final opening of the lid of the first big winning opening C10. The discharge ball status value = 2 is also a value indicating that the small winning game is in progress based on the fact that the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the same way as when the discharging ball status is 1, but it is a value indicating that the small winning game is ending. call. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 154, from the end of the final opening of the lid of the first big winning hole C10 during the small winning game until all the game balls entering the first big winning hole C10 are discharged. , or until the discharge ball timer reaches 0 after the last opening of the lid of the first big winning hole C10 during the small winning game is completed.

First, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1600-1-1 whether or not the normal game is being played. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharged ball status is zero. As a result of the determination, if the normal game is being played (the value of the discharged ball status is 0), it is monitored in step 1600-1-3 whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific areas C12-1 and C12-2. is configured to Here, when the game ball passes through the specific area C12-1 and the specific area C12-2, this passage is configured as an invalid ball entry. Further, in the process of making the ball invalid, an error notification is provided.

Next, in step 1600-1-5, it is configured to monitor whether or not there are any remaining balls inside the first big prize winning opening C10. That is, the value of the ball entry counter based on the entry of the game ball into the first big prize winning opening C10 is compared with the value of the discharge counter based on the discharge of the game ball from the first big prize winning opening C10 (for example, The difference between the incoming ball counter and the discharged counter is confirmed), and if the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter as a result of the comparison is 0, it is determined that there are no remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10. ing.

On the other hand, in step 1600-1-1, when it is determined that the normal game is not in progress (discharged ball status value is 0), in step 1600-1-101, during the small winning game (discharged ball status value is 1). determine whether there is As a result of the judgment, when the small winning game is being played (the value of the discharge ball status is 1), in step 1600-1-102, the motor normal operation judgment flag is turned on only once at the opening timing of the first big winning opening C10. . It should be noted that, when the motor normal operation determination flag is turned on, the process of turning on the motor normal operation determination flag is not performed again. Next, at step 1600-1-103, it is configured to monitor whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific areas C12-1 and C12-2. Here, when the game ball passes through the specific area C12-1 and the specific area C12-2, this passage is configured to be treated as a valid ball entry, and then a special game is performed. there is The processing of step 1600-1-3 when the value of the discharged ball status is 0 and the processing of step 1600-1-103 when the value of the discharged ball status is 1 may be the same processing.

Here, the motor normal operation determination flag interferes with the motor control processing through normal processing (processing through the case where the flag for game stop in step 1000-5-1 is off and the motor initial operation determination flag is off). Member normal operation control processing, rotating drum normal operation control processing, is a flag to perform the stopper normal operation control processing, during the small hit game interference member C12-6, rotating drum C12-7, stopper C12-8 to operate This is a flag for When the movable body controlled by the solenoid is normally operated by the motor, the motor initial operation determination flag can be used. Further, when the determination flag for the normal operation of a movable body including a motor and a solenoid is used, the drive source normal operation determination flag can be used in place of the motor initial operation determination flag.

Next, in step 1600-1-105, it is configured to monitor whether or not there are remaining balls inside the first big prize winning opening C10. In other words, the value of the ball entry counter based on the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is compared with the value of the discharge counter based on the game ball being discharged from the first big winning hole C10 (for example, The difference between the incoming ball counter and the discharged counter is confirmed), and if the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter as a result of the comparison is 0, it is determined that there are no remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10. ing. The processing of step 1600-1-5 when the value of the discharged ball status is 0 and the processing of step 1600-1-105 when the value of the discharged ball status is 1 may be the same processing.

Next, in step 1600-1-107, the process of monitoring the trigger for starting the movement of the movable body is performed. The process of monitoring the activation start timing of the movable body is a process of controlling the movable body to be activated based on the count number of game balls entering the first big winning hole C10. A direct V shutter C12-1-1 and a shutter C12-3-1 are provided as movable bodies that are operated based on the count number of game balls that enter the first big winning hole C10.

In step 1600-1-107, the movable body operation start trigger monitoring process, the shutter normal operation determination flag is turned on only once (set to 1 ) is configured as The shutter normal operation determination flag is the shutter normal operation control of the motor control processing through the normal processing (processing through the case where the game stop flag is off in step 1000-5-1 and the motor initial operation determination flag is off). It is a flag for performing processing, and is a flag for operating the shutter C12-3-1 during the small winning game. In the case of the 5/5 pattern V challenge operation or direct V pattern operation, it is configured to be turned on at the timing when the first game ball enters the first big winning hole C10. In the case of the 4/5 pattern V challenge operation, it is configured to turn on at the timing when the second game ball enters the first big winning hole C10. In the case of the 3/5 pattern V challenge operation, it is configured to turn on at the timing when the third game ball enters the first big winning hole C10. In the case of the V challenge operation of the 2/5 pattern, it is configured to turn on at the timing when the fourth game ball enters the first big winning hole C10. In the case of the V challenge operation of the 1/5 pattern, it is configured to be turned on at the timing when the fifth game ball enters the first big winning hole C10. Further, in step 1600-1-107, the direct V shutter C12-1-1 is configured to be controlled by the direct V shutter operation control process in step 1600-1-107-1, which will be described later. The shutter normal operation control process may be configured to be executed in step 1600-1-107.

Next, at step 1600-1-109, a solenoid control process in the big winning opening is performed. The large winning opening solenoid control process is a process for controlling a movable body operated by a solenoid, and is configured to control the storage section C12-5 in the storage section operation control process of step 1600-1-109-1 described later. It is

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 1600-1-101 that the small winning game is not in progress (the value of the discharged ball status is not 1), then in step 1600-1-201, the small winning game is ending (the value of the discharged ball 2) Determine whether or not. As a result of the judgment, if the small hit game is ending (the value of the discharge ball status is 2), in step 1600-1-203, whether the game ball has passed through the specific area C12-1 and the specific area C12-2 is configured to monitor Here, when the game ball passes through the specific area C12-1 and the specific area C12-2, this passage is configured to be treated as a valid ball entry, and then a special game is performed. there is It should be noted that the processing of step 1600-1-3 in the case of a normal game (the value of the discharged ball status is 0) and the processing of step 1600-1-103 in the case of a small winning game (the value of the discharged ball status is 1) The process and the process of step 1600-1-203 when the small winning game is ending (the value of the discharge ball status is 2) may be the same process.

Next, in step 1600-1-205, it is configured to monitor whether or not there are remaining balls inside the first big prize winning opening C10. That is, the value of the ball entry counter based on the entry of the game ball into the first big prize winning opening C10 is compared with the value of the discharge counter based on the discharge of the game ball from the first big prize winning opening C10 (for example, The difference between the incoming ball counter and the discharged counter is confirmed), and if the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter as a result of the comparison is 0, it is determined that there are no remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10. ing. In addition, the processing of step 1600-1-5 when the value of the discharged ball status is 0, the processing of step 1600-1-105 when the value of the discharged ball status is 1, and the processing of step 1600-1-105 when the value of the discharged ball status is 2 The processing of step 1600-1-205 in the case may be the same processing.

After step 1600-1-205, in step 1600-1-207, the process of monitoring the trigger for starting the movement of the movable body is performed. The process of monitoring the activation start timing of the movable body is a process of controlling the movable body to be activated based on the count number of game balls entering the first big winning hole C10. A direct V shutter C12-1-1 and a shutter C12-3-1 are provided as movable bodies that are operated based on the count number of game balls that enter the first big winning hole C10.

In step 1600-2-107, the movable body operation start trigger monitoring process controls the direct V shutter C12-1-1 by the same direct V shutter operation control process as in step 1600-1-107-1, which will be described later. is configured to The shutter normal operation control process may be configured to be executed in step 1600-1-207.

Next, at step 1600-1-209, a solenoid control process in the big winning opening is performed. The large winning opening solenoid control process is a process for controlling a movable body operated by a solenoid, and the storage section C12-5 is controlled by the storage section operation control process similar to step 1600-1-109-1 described later. is configured to

Next, at step 1600-1-211, it is checked whether or not there are any remaining balls inside the first big prize winning opening C10. If the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0, it is determined that there are no remaining balls in the first big winning hole C10, the discharge standby state is ended, and the setting and command request processing at the completion of discharge of the game balls is performed. to run. The setting and command request processing at the completion of discharge of the game ball is configured to execute data storage processing using the address of the movable body operation end table as an argument. Also, the command request setting process is executed using the ejection completion information data (9FH as MODE data) and ejection completion information (55H as EVENT data) as arguments. Next, at step 1600-1-215, the motor end operation determination flag is turned on. The motor end operation determination flag is a flag for executing shutter end operation control processing, interference member end operation control processing, rotary drum end operation control processing, and stopper end operation control processing, which will be described later.

Here, the ejection waiting state is a state in which the game ball remains in the first big winning opening C10 (the value of the game ball ejection waiting counter is not 0) in a small winning game state, and the ejection ball is a state. A state in which the timer MP41t-2 is not 0 is called a discharge standby state. The discharge standby state is the state from when the small winning game starts and the lid of the first big winning hole C10 is opened until the discharge ball timer MP41t-2 becomes 0. The state may be from the closing of the lid of C10 until the discharge ball timer MP41t-2 becomes 0, and the first big winning hole C10 after the game ball enters the inside of the first big winning hole C10. It may be in a state until it is discharged to the outside of the.

On the other hand, at step 1600-1-211, if the value of the game ball ejection waiting counter is not 0, at step 1600-1-301, whether or not the ejection waiting timer MP41t-2 (also called ejection ball timer) is 0 determine whether Here, the discharge waiting timer is a timer that sets a value of 240 seconds at the timing when the lid of the first big prize winning opening C10 is opened, and if the discharge waiting timer is 0, it is determined that the discharge waiting time has passed. Then, in step 1600-1-303, a discharge ball abnormality detection setting process is performed. In the ejection ball abnormality detection setting process, when the value of the game ball ejection waiting counter is not 0 and the value of the game ball ejection waiting timer is 0, 01000000B, which is the ejection ball abnormality bit data, is stored in the ejection ball abnormality determination flag. is configured as When 01000000B is set in the discharge ball abnormality determination flag, the discharge ball abnormality state (error state) occurs and the game is stopped. It should be noted that in the case of the discharge ball abnormal state (error state), it may be constructed such that the game stop flag is turned on in step 1000-5-1 and the process proceeds to step 1550-13.

Also, the big winning opening valid period setting process is a process of saving the result of valid period determination of the big winning opening (eg, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). In addition, in the case where the special winning opening has a specific area, the result of valid period determination of the specific area may be stored by the special winning opening valid period setting process.

Next, the special game start time control processing will be described. First, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is ON. When the special game transition permission flag is ON, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game start flag. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the address of the open count table as the base address.

Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the value of the pattern number to the base address. The design number here is a number corresponding to a big hit design or a small hit design. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the lower 4 bits of the contents of the base address as the number of opening data, and reads the upper 4 bits of the contents of the base address as the operation pattern data. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the address of the big win buffer as the RAM address (even when executing a small win, the address of the big win buffer is set once in this process).

Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the open count data is not 1R data. If the number-of-opening data is not 1R data, it is determined that a big win has been won, and the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the address of the big win buffer as the RAM address. On the other hand, if the opening number data is 1R data, in other words, if the opening number data is 1R data, it is determined that a small win has been won, and the CPUMC of the main control board M stores a small number as the RAM address. Sets the address of the hit buffer. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores the open count data in the RAM address, temporarily stores the operation pattern data in the RAM address +1 (address of), and shifts to the next abnormality detection process.

Here, the opening frequency table will be described. The number-of-opens table is a table that stores operation patterns and number-of-opens data of the big winning openings when a big win or a small win is executed. The operation pattern is the opening mode of the big prize opening, and it is configured so that there is a case where the operation pattern corresponding to the opening mode for the number of rounds larger than the number of rounds actually executed is determined. Further, the open count data is the data of the number of rounds actually executed, and in the case of a small hit, the open count data is 1R data. In addition, the number-of-opens table stores information on big wins and information on small wins, and addresses are assigned according to the types of big win symbols or small win symbols.

In this way, in both the case of winning the big win and the case of winning the small win, as the same processing, the control processing at the start of the special game is executed, and furthermore, the number of opening times table is referred to as the same table. , is configured to read out the actuation pattern and opening count data. It should be noted that the special game control process, which is the process executed during the execution of the big hit and the execution of the small hit, is a common process that is executed both during the execution of the big hit and during the execution of the small hit. In addition, there are three types of open number data corresponding to the big hit, namely 2R data, 4R data and 10R data, and the open number data corresponding to the small hit is only one type of 1R data. With such a configuration, it is determined whether the process related to the big win or the process related to the small win is being performed by determining whether or not the number of times of opening data is 1R data. can do.

Next, motor control processing will be described. 141 is a flow chart showing the flow of motor control processing performed by the main control board M. FIG. Here, the motor is a motor for operating the rotating body C17, the interference member C12-6, the rotating drum C12-7, the stopper C12-8, the shutter C12-3-1, and the V shutter 12-2-1. . The motor control process is omitted in the game stop state A, but is configured to be executed in the game stop state B. Note that the movable body controlled by the solenoid may be controlled by the motor, in which case the movable body can be controlled by the motor control process. Furthermore, within this motor control processing, a movable body operated by a motor and a solenoid may be controlled. It can be configured to execute control of a movable body, a movable body operated by a solenoid.

Step 1550-12 is a flow chart of motor control processing related to the subroutine of step 1550-12 in FIG. The motor control process is performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M to check the game stop state (turn on the motor initial operation determination flag and confirm that the motor initial operation timer is not 0, that is, during the execution of the initial operation after the RAM clear process presence or absence). If it is determined in this inspection that the initial operation is being executed, inspection of the motor initial operation state, control of the movable body F motor, control of the movable body E motor, control of the movable body D motor, control of the movable body G motor, It controls the movable body C motor. Here, the movable body D is an interference member C12-6, the movable body E is a rotating drum C12-7, the movable body F is a rotating body C17, the movable body G is a shutter C12-3-1, and the movable body C is a stopper C12-8. is shown.

First, at step 1550-12-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the motor initial operation determination flag is ON (1). As a result of determination, if the motor normal operation determination flag is ON, the motor initial operation state is inspected. The inspection of the motor initial operation state includes shutter initial operation in step 1550-12-3, interference member initial operation in step 1550-12-5, rotating drum initial operation in step 1550-12-7, and step 1550-12-9. It is configured to execute a stopper initial operation and check whether or not the motor initial operation timer has reached zero.

The shutter initial operation is configured to operate the shutter C12-3-1 for a predetermined initial time, and the movable body G motor is operated in the same manner as the 5/5 pattern V challenge operation shown in FIG. configured to operate in a manner The interference member initial operation is configured to operate the interference member C12-6 over a predetermined initial time, and is configured to drive the movable body D motor that operates the interference member over the initial time. It is The rotary drum initial operation is configured to operate the rotary drum C12-7 for a predetermined initial time, and is configured to drive the movable body E motor for operating the rotary drum for the initial time. It is The stopper initial operation is configured to operate the stopper C12-8 for a predetermined initial time, and the movable body C motor for operating the stopper is turned on at the initial time (time during which the stopper operates only one cycle). It is configured to be driven across. Although the stopper C12-8 is described as operating using a motor, it may be configured to operate using a solenoid.

In steps 1550-12-3 to 1550-12-9, when it is determined that the motor initial operation is finished, the end setting of the motor initial operation and the display request of the end presentation of the motor initial operation are requested. Here, when the content of the motor initial operation timer is other than 0, and when the result of subtracting 1 from the content of the motor initial operation timer is 0, it is determined that the motor initial operation has ended. It should be noted that when the result of subtracting 1 from the contents of the motor initial operation timer is 0, it is determined that the motor initial operation has ended. , a value indicating 240 seconds), it may be determined that the initial operation of the motor is completed. Further, in the game stop state B, the timer subtraction processing (S1000-5-3) is not executed. It is configured to perform subtraction processing. Here, the motor initial operation timer is a timer that manages the initial operation of the movable bodies D, E, F, and G operated by the motor, and is a timer that sets a value of 240 seconds at the start of RAM clearing. be. If the motor initial operation timer is 0, it is determined that the motor initial operation has ended. It should be noted that the motor initial operation timer and the motor of each movable body should be capable of managing a time such as 240 seconds or the timing of switching the movement pattern of the movable body. A timer of the type that starts is exemplified.

The end setting of the motor initial operation is configured to execute the data storage process using the address of the motor initial operation end setting table as an argument. A command request setting process is executed to request the display of the end effect of the motor initial operation, using the logical AND result of the motor initial operation state data (MODE data) 9EH and 7FH and the lower address of the motor initial operation determination flag as an argument. is configured as Next, in step 1550-12-11, it is determined whether the initial operations of the shutter, interference member, rotary drum, and stopper have been completed. If it is determined that the initial operation is completed, the motor initial operation determination flag is turned off in step 1550-12-13. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 1550-12-11 that the initial operation has not been completed, the process proceeds to the next process without executing step 1550-12-13.

If the motor initial operation determination flag is off at step 1550-12-1, it is determined at step 1550-12-101 whether the shutter normal operation determination flag is on (is 1). If the shutter normal operation determination flag is ON, a normal shutter operation control process to be described later in step 1550-12-103 is executed.

Next, in step 1550-12-111, it is determined whether or not the motor end operation determination flag is on (1). If the motor end operation determination flag is on, the shutter normal operation determination flag is turned off in step 1550-12-113. On the other hand, if the motor end operation determination flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step.

If the shutter normal operation determination flag is off in step 1550-12-101, it is determined in step 1550-12-201 whether the motor normal operation determination flag is on (is 1). If the motor normal operation determination flag is ON, an interference member normal operation control process of step 1550-12-205, which will be described later, is executed. Next, a rotary drum normal operation control process, which will be described later, is executed in step 1550-12-207. Next, a stopper normal operation control process, which will be described later, is executed in step 1550-12-209.

Next, in step 1550-12-211, it is determined whether or not the motor end operation determination flag is on (1). If the motor end operation determination flag is on, the shutter normal operation determination flag is turned off in step 1550-12-213. On the other hand, if the motor end operation determination flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step.

If the motor normal operation determination flag is off at step 1550-12-201, it is determined at step 1550-12-301 whether the motor end operation determination flag is on (is 1). If the motor termination operation determination flag is ON, the shutter termination operation control process of step 1550-12-303, which will be described later, is executed. Next, an interference member termination operation control process, which will be described later, is executed in step 1550-12-305. Next, a rotary drum end operation control process, which will be described later, is executed in step 1550-12-307. Next, an interference member termination operation control process, which will be described later, is executed in step 1550-12-309.

Next, in step 1550-12-311, it is determined whether or not the closing operations of the shutter, interference member, rotary drum, and stopper have been completed. If it is determined that the finishing operation has been completed, the motor finishing operation determination flag is turned off in step 1550-12-313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 1550-12-311 that the end operation has not been completed, the process proceeds to the next process without executing step 1550-12-313.

The motor control process is configured to control the movable body motor. The movable body includes a movable body F, a movable body E, a movable body D, and a movable body G, each of which has a different control method.

First, control of the movable body F motor will be described. The control of the movable body F motor is configured to execute general motor control processing with the RAM clear base address and data base address as arguments. The result obtained by subtracting 10, which is the number of motor control RAM bytes, from the address of the motor 1 specified number counter is the RAM base address, and the result of subtracting 10, which is the number of motor control data bytes, from the address of the motor 1 setting table is used as the data base address. address.

The control of the movable body E motor is configured to execute motor control general-purpose processing using the RAM base address obtained in the control of the movable body F motor and the data base address obtained in the control of the movable body F motor as arguments. The control of the movable body D motor is configured to execute motor control general-purpose processing using the RAM base address obtained in the control of the movable body E motor and the data base address obtained in the control of the movable body E motor as arguments. The control of the movable body G motor is configured to execute motor control general-purpose processing using the RAM base address obtained in the control of the movable body D motor and the data base address obtained in the control of the movable body D motor as arguments.

Next, the excitation data are output. The output of the excitation data is configured to take the logical sum of the value of the motor 1 output buffer and the value of the motor 2 output buffer, and output the result of the logical sum to the motor output port 1 (0F6H). Also, the logical sum of the value of the motor 3 output buffer and the value of the motor 4 output buffer is obtained, and the result of the logical sum is output to the motor output port 2 (0F7H).

Also, the prize ball control process is a process for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH. The abnormality detection process is a process of monitoring magnetism, disconnection/short-circuiting/power supply monitoring, radio wave monitoring, opening/closing state of glass frame set/game board D35, impact monitoring, and the like.

In addition, the entrance ball passage time abnormality detection process is to detect an entrance ball passage time abnormality when a game ball enters various ball entrances (for example, the first main game start opening A10). This is a process for monitoring the continuous ON time of the (entering ball sensor continuous ON time).

In addition, the game state display process includes the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously (the number of rounds executed in the big hit), the error state, the number of balls that are suspended in operation of the normal symbol display device (displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20). the current number of auxiliary game pending balls) and the number of active pending balls of the special symbol display device (current number of main game pending balls displayed on the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20) This is processing for requesting display.

Further, the handle state signal inspection process is a process of monitoring the touch state of the firing handle (for example, the firing handle D44).

The out-port monitoring process is a process of monitoring the out-port (for example, the out-port D36) in order to create a security output request.

Next, fraud detection information management processing will be described. First, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the unauthorized radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the unauthorized radio wave sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row (for example, this process is executed by the timer interrupt process). The purpose of this process is to eliminate the influence of noise by determining whether or not the interrupt is continuously ON for a predetermined number of times. ” has the same meaning). When the input from the unauthorized radio wave sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the unauthorized radio wave is detected, turns on the unauthorized radio wave detection flag, refers to the unauthorized magnetic sensor, and detects the unauthorized magnetic field. It is determined whether or not the input from the sensor is ON continuously for a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, if the input from the unauthorized radio wave sensor is not ON for the predetermined number of times in a row, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the unauthorized radio wave sensor and determines whether the input from the unauthorized radio wave sensor is OFF for the predetermined number of times in a row. judge. When the input from the unauthorized radio wave sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in a row, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the unauthorized radio wave is completed, turns off the unauthorized radio wave detection flag, refers to the unauthorized magnetic sensor, It is determined whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. Even if the input from the fraudulent radio wave sensor is not OFF for a predetermined number of times in a row, the fraudulent magnetic sensor is referred to and it is determined whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is ON for the predetermined number of times in a row.

Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. When the input from the fraudulent magnetism sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that fraudulent magnetism is detected, turns on the fraudulent magnetism detection flag, refers to the door opening sensor, and opens the door. It is determined whether or not the input from the sensor is ON continuously for a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, if the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is not ON for the predetermined number of times in succession, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor to determine whether the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is OFF for the predetermined number of times in succession. judge. When the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of fraudulent magnetism has ended, turns off the fraudulent magnetism detection flag, refers to the door opening sensor, It is determined whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is ON continuously for a predetermined number of times. Even if the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is not OFF for a predetermined number of times in a row, the door opening sensor is referred to determine whether the input from the door opening sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row.

Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door open sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door open sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. When the input from the door open sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession, at step 1924, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns on the door open flag, and activates the frame open sensor. Then, it is determined whether or not the input from the frame open sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. On the other hand, if the input from the door open sensor is not ON for a predetermined number of times in a row, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door open sensor and determines whether the input from the door open sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in a row. judge. When the input from the door open sensor is OFF continuously for a predetermined number of times, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 is opened, turns off the door open flag, refers to the frame open sensor, and detects the frame It is determined whether or not the input from the open sensor is continuously ON for a predetermined number of times. Even if the input from the door opening sensor is not OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession, the frame opening sensor is referred to determine whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row.

Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame open sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame open sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. When the input from the frame opening sensor is ON continuously for a predetermined number of times, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns on the frame open flag, and shifts to error management processing. On the other hand, if the input from the frame open sensor is not ON for the predetermined number of times in a row, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame open sensor and checks whether the input from the frame open sensor is OFF for the predetermined number of times in a row. judge. When the input from the frame opening sensor is OFF continuously for a predetermined number of times, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns off the frame opening flag, and shifts to error management processing. Also, if the input from the frame open sensor is not OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession, the process proceeds to error management processing.

Next, error management processing will be described. First, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error occurrence condition is satisfied. When the error occurrence condition is satisfied, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) indicating that an error has occurred and the error type information (command to the sub-control board S side). transmitted to the control unit SM side). Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error cancellation condition is satisfied. When the error cancellation condition is satisfied, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) related to information indicating that the error has been cleared (the sub-main control unit is sent to the SM side), and the process shifts to firing control signal output processing. It should be noted that when the error generation condition is not satisfied, and also when the error canceling condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to the firing control signal output process.

Next, firing control signal output processing will be described. First, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an error flag indicating a communication state (BIT0) and a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality (BIT1) with a payout control board (sometimes referred to as a prize ball payout control board KH). BIT0, which indicates the communication state, indicates normal if "00000000B" and indicates abnormal if "00000001B". In BIT1 indicating disconnection and short-circuit power source abnormality, "00000000B" indicates normality, and "00000010B" indicates abnormality. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the AND of the obtained error flag and the judgment data (“00000011B”). Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the firing enable signal bit data. For example, BIT5 of the output port indicates the emission enable signal, and "00000000B" indicates an error (abnormality), and "00100000B" indicates normality. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs to the output port and shifts to test signal output processing. BIT0 is digit 1-bit data, BIT1 is digit 2-bit data, BIT2 is digit 3-bit data, BIT3 is digit 4-bit data, BIT4 is digit 5-bit data, and BIT5 is firing enable signal bit data. , BIT6 is effect strobe bit data, and BIT7 is a security bit.

The test signal output process is a process of creating a signal to be output to a test device outside the game machine and outputting it to the corresponding output port.

Next, solenoid output processing will be described. The solenoid here is intended for the solenoid of the second main game starter electric accessory, the first big winning opening solenoid C13, the second big winning opening solenoid C23, the solenoid of the movable body A, and the solenoid of the movable body B. Here, the movable body A indicates the storage portion C12-5, and the movable body B indicates the direct V shutter C12-1-1.

The solenoid output processing is configured to acquire solenoid output setting information, acquire output data of each solenoid, and output the output data in order to output a solenoid signal.

First, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs processing for acquiring solenoid output setting information. The solenoid output setting information acquisition process uses the input table address as the solenoid output control table address, and the solenoid output control table + 0 (solenoid output data initial value, solenoid control number, solenoid control address initial value, solenoid setting table The solenoid output data initial value, the solenoid control number, the solenoid control address initial value, and the address of the solenoid setting table are sequentially acquired from the solenoid output control table having addresses.

Next, the process of obtaining the output data of each solenoid is performed. The process of acquiring the output data of each solenoid is as follows: the acquired solenoid output data initial value is the initial value of the output data, the acquired solenoid control number is the number of inspections, the address of the acquired solenoid setting table is the base address, and the number of inspections, It is configured to perform the following processes (1) to (5).
(1) Inspection of game stop (2) Acquisition of solenoid control address (3) Acquisition of solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer (4) Update of output data (5) Update of solenoid operation timer However, game is played by inspection of game stop It is configured not to perform subsequent processing when it is determined that it is stopped. It should be noted that the content indicated by the base address after executing the processes (1) to (5) for the number of inspections is configured to be obtained as the output port address.

(1) In the game stop inspection, when there is a game stop request as a result of executing the game stop monitoring process, it is determined that the game is stopped, and 00000000B is output as clear data. The game stop monitoring process may use the result of the game stop monitoring process in step 1550-12-3 of the motor control process, or may be executed separately in this process.

(2) Obtaining the solenoid control address is configured to obtain the solenoid control address corresponding to each solenoid. The solenoid of the second main game starter electric accessory acquires the address of the normal electric accessory solenoid control as the solenoid control address. The first large winning opening solenoid C13 acquires the address of the large winning opening 1 solenoid control as the solenoid control address. The second large winning opening solenoid C23 acquires the address of the large winning opening 2 solenoid control as the solenoid control address. The solenoid of the movable body A acquires the address for controlling the movable piece 1 solenoid as the solenoid control address. The solenoid of the movable body B acquires the address for controlling the movable piece 2 solenoid as the solenoid control address.

(3) Acquisition of the solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer is performed by using the most significant bit (bit 7) of the 8-bit data as the content of the acquired solenoid control address as the solenoid operation flag and the lower 5 bits of the content of the solenoid control address. (bit 4-bit 0) is configured to be a solenoid activation timer. Bits 6 and 5 are not used.

(4) The output data is updated by taking the result of ORing the value corresponding to the solenoid actuation flag and the solenoid actuation timer and the output data as the output data. When the solenoid operation flag is ON and the solenoid operation timer is 0, open holding solenoid data or holding solenoid data is set as a value to be logically summed. If the solenoid activation flag is ON and the solenoid activation timer is not 0, the open solenoid data or the solenoid data is set as the value to be logically ORed. When the solenoid operation flag is off, 00000000B is set as the value for logical summing.

(5) Updating the solenoid operation timer is configured such that when the solenoid operation flag is ON and the solenoid operation timer is other than 0, the content of the obtained solenoid control address is decremented by -1.

Next, the output data is output to the acquired output port address, and the solenoid output process is terminated. In addition, in the above-described motor control processing, the operation pattern of not only the motor-driven movable body inside the first prize winning opening C10 but also the solenoid-driven movable body is switched, and in the solenoid output processing, the solenoid is moved again. It may be configured to control the body. By setting data in the solenoid output port together with the solenoid output of the 1st big prize mouth, the 2nd big prize mouth, the 2nd main game starter electric accessories, etc., the opening and closing timing of the lid of the big prize mouth can be specified. It is possible to control whether or not a game ball can enter at the intended design timing without shifting the opening/closing timing of the direct V shutter C12-1-1 in the area (direct V area).

Also, the LED output process means display on the special symbol display device (for example, display of the first main game symbol on the first main game symbol display device A20, display of the second main game symbol on the second main game symbol display device B20, , display of the number of activated balls on the first main game side on the first main game symbol display device A20, display of the number of activated balls on the second main game side on the second main game symbol display device B20), normal symbol display device display (display of auxiliary symbols in the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, display of the number of operation pending balls on the auxiliary game side in the auxiliary game symbol display device H20), display of error state, display of game state, display of hitting (for example , the situation to hit right, the situation to hit left) and the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously (display the number of rounds in the big hit), initialization of the display , the output of LEDs controlled on the main control board M side, such as the output of display data, are sequentially controlled.

Next, external signal output processing will be described. First, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the game state temporary storage means MB to confirm the state of the gaming machine. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1, and based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, sends the state of the gaming machine to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G. A signal indicating is output, and the process proceeds to ball entry state control processing.

In addition, in the ball-entering state control process, calculation of a base value to be displayed on the ball-entering state display device J10, storage of the calculation result, display control of the calculation result, and the like are executed. At this time, if a setting change means is provided, the normal prize ball count counter value, normal out count counter value, total out count counter value, final base value of the immediately preceding section, etc. are stored for each set value, and input. It is also possible to configure so as to display on a ball state display device. More specifically, when the power is turned on, the performance of the gaming machine corresponding to the current settings (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot or the number of winning balls in each winning hole) is read, and a storage area corresponding to the current settings (for example, , a storage area for storing the normal prize ball count counter value, the normal out count counter value, the total out count counter value, the final base value of the immediately preceding section, etc.). Then, based on the values stored in the respective storage areas, the entry state information is generated and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately generate and display ball entry state information (for example, base value) for each setting. In addition, regarding the ball-entering state information displayed on the ball-entering state display device, the display content is switched by operating a dedicated ball-entering state display switching button or by operating a setting change button (for example, When the current setting is 1, when the ball entry status display switching button is operated once, the ball entry status information of setting 2 is displayed, and when it is operated again, the ball entry status information of setting 3 is displayed. displayed), so that the latest information for each setting can be confirmed. Here, when using the setting change button, in order to prevent the setting from being changed by operating the setting change button, the configuration using the setting key described above (for example, the power is turned on and the setting key switch is turned to the left) A configuration in which the display content is switched by operating the setting change button while the display is on) is preferable. In addition, when the display of the entering state information is switched by the entering state display switching button or the setting change button, the display may be returned to the current setting after a predetermined time elapses.

The flag register restoration process is a process related to the ball entry state display device J10 that displays the output of the test signal and the ball entry state information. It is a process to

The commands to the sub side set in FIG. 138 (commands set in step 1010-5, etc.) are configured to be transmitted in the control command transmission processing of step 1999. FIG. Notifications of RAM abnormality, set value abnormality, and setting change abnormality, and notification of setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are configured to execute display control in the LED output process of step 1550-6.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart of setting control processing related to the subroutine of step 1009 of FIG. First, at step 1009-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting change flag is ON. If Yes at step 1009-1, at step 1009-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an input based on the operation of the RAM clear button (for example, rise or fall of switch). If Yes in step 1009-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the address of the set value number in 1009-3. Next, in step 1009-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M increments the set value number by 1 if the set value number is less than the "maximum set value (6 in this example)-1". , and if the content of the set value number is greater than or equal to "maximum set value - 1", 0 is set as the set value number. It should be noted that the set values are in six stages of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, and the set value numbers are in six stages of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. That is, the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the set value is the set value number. Also, in the LED output process of step 1550-6, the set value corresponding to the set value number is displayed on the set value display device. Next, at step 1009-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes set value inspection processing (processing for confirming the set value number). Next, at step 1009-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting (set value number) is a value that can be set. Here, the values that can be set refer to the set value numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 is determined. If the set values are in four stages of 1, 2, 5, and 6, whether the set value number corresponding to the four values is 0, 1, 4, or 5. If the set value number is 2 or 3, it is a value that cannot be set.

Here, the setting value inspection processing of step 1009-5 will be described in detail. It is configured to determine by matching with value check data. More specifically,
(1) When the possible set values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, set value inspection data: "00111111B"
(2) When the settable setting values are 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6, setting value inspection data: "00101111B"
(3) When the settable setting value is only 1, set value inspection data: "00000001B"
(4) When the settable setting value is only 6 in one step Setting value inspection data: "00100000B"
Setting value inspection data is set as follows. That is, the least significant bit of the setting value inspection data is the bit corresponding to setting 1, and the 6 bits from the least significant bit correspond to setting 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, respectively, and can be set. "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the set value, and "0" is stored in the bit corresponding to the set value that cannot be set. As an execution mode of the setting value inspection process using the setting value inspection data, the number of times the setting value data is incremented by 1 (the number of setting values) is set as the number of times of rotation, and the setting value inspection data is rotated 1 bit to the right, and a carry flag is set. is 1, it is determined that the setting value can be set, and if the carry flag is 0, it is determined that the setting value cannot be set. It should be noted that the setting value and the setting value data may be the same value such that the setting value is 1 to 6 and the setting value data is 1 to 6. In such a configuration, The set value inspection process may be executed using the number of set value data (set value) as the number of rotations.

By using the setting value inspection data as described above, setting values that cannot be set in between, such as setting 5 when the settable setting values are 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6, can be changed. It is possible to determine whether or not the setting value (or setting number data) is a setting value that can be set even in a game machine having such a setting value. Note that if there are five levels of set values 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6, then in the processing of step 1010-19 described above, the set value (setting If it is determined that the value data is 7), it is determined that the set value is abnormal. is also determined to be set value abnormal.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes in step 1009-6, the process proceeds to step 1009-9; 1009-3 to step 1009-6 are repeatedly executed. It should be noted that even if No in step 1009-2, the process proceeds to step 1009-9.

In this way, every time the RAM clear button is operated (every time it changes from OFF to ON), the set value number transitions as "0→1→2→3→4→5→0→1→...". is configured as follows. In addition, by configuring as shown in the figure, even in a game machine in which there are set values (3, 4) that cannot be set in four stages such as 1, 2, 5, and 6, the same operation can be performed. , and the setting control process can be highly versatile. The operation member for changing the setting value number is not limited to the RAM clear button, and a setting change button for changing the setting value number, which is an operation member different from the RAM clear button, may be provided. .

If No in step 1009-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting confirmation flag is on in step 1009-7. If Yes at step 1009-7, at step 1009-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the address of the set value number, and proceeds to step 1009-9. On the other hand, if No in step 1009-7, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1000-5-1). Incidentally, in the LED output process of step 1550-6, the set value corresponding to the set value number is displayed on the set value display device.

Next, at step 1009-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch is off. If Yes at step 1009-9, at step 1009-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the setting change flag and the setting confirmation flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 1000-5-1 process). do. Note that even if No in step 1009-9, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1000-5-1).

It should be noted that one or more of the above-described power-on processing, processing during the setting change mode, and processing during the setting confirmation mode may be applied to all of the above-described embodiments.

Next, the direct V shutter operation control process shown in FIG. 143 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the flow of the direct V shutter operation control process performed by the main control board M. FIG. The direct V shutter operation control process of step 1600-1-107-1 is a subroutine of step 1600-1-107 of the big winning opening control process of FIG.

First, at step 1600-1-107-1-1, it is determined whether or not the lid of the first big prize winning opening C10 has started to be opened. When the lid of the first big winning hole C10 is opened, it is checked in step 1600-1-107-1-3 whether the mode of the small winning pattern is the F group. In the F group, the small winning patterns are 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_3R symbol 1 is the main game symbol.

If the small winning pattern is the F group, the direct V shutter operation pattern is set at step 1600-1-107-1-5 as the direct V pattern (open for 0.1 seconds → closed → 30 when the first count is detected. Seconds open → closed). On the other hand, if the small winning pattern is not in the F group, a non-direct V pattern (open for 0.1 seconds→closed) is set as the direct V shutter operation pattern in step 1600-1-107-1-7. In the direct V pattern, the direct V shutter C12-1-1 is placed in the easy-to-enter state (movable position) for 100 ms in accordance with the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of the first big prize winning opening C10. The solenoid that operates the direct V shutter is controlled to start the operation at the time of a small hit, and after 100 ms elapses, the solenoid is controlled so that it is in a non-entering easy state (initial position). Then, at the timing when it is detected that the first game ball has entered the large winning opening C10 in the non-easy ball entry state (ball entry timing of the first count), the solenoid is turned on so that the direct V shutter is in the easy ball entry state. Control. After 30 seconds have passed in the easy-ball-entering state, the solenoid is controlled so that the state is changed to the non-easy-ball-entering state.

On the other hand, in the non-direct V pattern, the direct V shutter C12-1-1 is in the easy-to-enter state (movable state) for 100 ms in accordance with the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of the first big prize winning opening C10. Position) to start the operation at the time of a small hit by controlling the solenoid that operates the direct V shutter, and after 100 ms, the solenoid is controlled so that it becomes a non-entering easy state (initial position). there is

In addition, the direct V shutter operation pattern (direct V pattern, non-direct V pattern) is such that the direct V shutter C12-1-1 is set to a pattern that keeps the ball in a non-easy entry state.

Next, in step 16600-1-107-1-9, it is determined whether or not all the set patterns have been executed. If it is a direct V pattern, open for 0.1 seconds -> close -> 30 seconds open -> close based on the detection of the first count. It is determined whether or not open→closed has been executed. If all the patterns set in step 1600-1-107-1-9 have been executed, the operation of the direct V shutter C12-2-1 is terminated in step 1600-1-107-1-11. On the other hand, if all the patterns set in step 1600-1-107-1-9 have not been executed, the direct V shutter operation that has not been executed is executed in step 1600-1-107-1-13.

In addition, when winning with a small winning pattern in the F group, the long opening permission flag, which is a flag for opening the direct V shutter C12-1-1 for 30 seconds, is turned on, and the winning count of the first big winning opening C10 However, if the long open permission flag is turned on at a specific count (for example, 1 count), the pattern may be switched to open the direct V shutter C12-1-1 for 30 seconds. In addition, the direct V shutter C12-1-1 is opened for 30 seconds, and after 30 seconds have passed, the direct V shutter C12-1-1 is closed. The direct V shutter C12-1-1 may be closed at the timing of closing or at the timing of the expiration of the effective period after the closing of the first big prize winning opening C10.

Next, the storage section operation control process shown in FIG. 144 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the flow of storage section operation control processing performed by the main control board M. FIG. The storage section operation control process of step 1600-1-109-1 is a subroutine of step 1600-1-109 of the big winning mouth control process of FIG.

First, in step 1600-1-109-1-1, it is determined whether or not the small winning game has started and the lid of the first big winning hole C10 has started to open. When the lid of the first big winning hole C10 is opened (when a small winning round game is started), a storage section operation pattern is set in step 1600-1-109-1-3. Next, in step 1600-1-109-1-5, the control timer is set to the timer value for the reservoir operation. Next, in step 1600-1-109-1-7, it is determined whether the timer value of the control timer is 0. If it is determined not to be 0, the reservoir C12-5 is operated based on the timer value and the reservoir operation pattern set in step 1600-1-109-1-9. Next, in step 1600-1-109-1-11, the timer value of the control timer is subtracted. On the other hand, if the timer value of the control timer is 0 at step 1600-1-109-1-7, the timer value of the control timer is subtracted at step 1600-1-109-1-11.

The reservoir C12-5 is configured to be in a held state (movable position) by a solenoid (driving source). Specifically, in accordance with the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of the first big winning opening C10 when the small winning game is started, the storage portion operation pattern is set, and the storage portion C12-5 is held ( movable position). The operation pattern of the storage section is set such that the storage section C12-5 is discharged (initial position) after 18 seconds (specified time) have elapsed from the opening timing of the lid of the first prize winning opening C10. When 18 seconds have elapsed from the opening start timing of the lid of the first big prize winning opening C10, the storage section C12-5 is controlled to be discharged. Further, the storage portion operation pattern is set to a pattern in which the storage portion C12-5 is kept in the discharged state in the discharge standby state after the storage portion C12-5 is set to the discharged state.

Next, the shutter normal operation control process shown in FIG. 145 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the flow of shutter normal operation control processing performed by the main control board M. FIG. The shutter normal operation control process of step 1550-12-103 is a subroutine of step 1550-12-103 of FIG.

First, in step 1550-12-103-1, it is determined whether the normal operation of the shutter C12-3-1 has already been initialized. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal shutter operation pattern of the shutter C12-3-1 and the timer value used for the normal shutter operation are set in the control timer as the initial setting for the normal operation of the shutter C12-3-1. . In step 1550-12-103-1, if normal operation initialization has not been completed, in step 1550-12-103-3, a shutter normal operation pattern setting process, which will be described later, is executed. Next, in step 1550-12-103-5, a timer value for normal shutter operation is set in the control timer.

Next, in step 1550-12-103-7, it is determined whether the normal shutter operation has been completed. Here, the normal operation of the shutter means that the shutter C12-3-1 is moved between the initial position (the position where the specific area is not blocked) and the movable position (the position where the specific area is blocked) by the motor (driving source). It is an operation of swinging about one axis between the two. Specifically, one operation pattern of the shutter normal operation patterns A to E is set based on the winning small winning pattern, and the shutter C12-3-1 is configured to operate, and the game ball is opened in the first big winning opening C10. The shutter C12-3-1 is operated based on the number of detected balls (ball count) and the timing of ball entry.

Shutter normal operation pattern A (1/5 pattern V challenge operation pattern) is an operation pattern that is set when a small hit in the 1_4R pattern 1 and 2_10R pattern 3 is won. , The motor is rotated in the CW direction at the timing when the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 at the fifth count is detected, and one shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 is initialized. It is operated from the position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked) to the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked), and is controlled to block the general area C12-3-1 with the shutter, and then the motor is CCW. direction to operate one shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 from the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked) to the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked). Then, one general area C12-3-1 blocked by the shutter is controlled to return to the state where it is not blocked by the shutter (0 closed).

Shutter normal operation pattern B (pattern of V challenge operation of 2/5 pattern) is an operation pattern that is set when a small hit in the small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 2 and the 2_10R pattern 4 is won. , The motor is rotated in the CW direction at the timing when the entry of the game ball of the fourth count into the first big winning hole C10 is detected, and one shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 is initialized. It is configured to operate from a position (a position in which the specific area is not blocked) to a movable position (a position in which the specific area is blocked), and control is performed to close one general area C12-3-1 with the shutter. It is

Shutter normal operation pattern C (3/5 pattern V challenge operation pattern) is an operation pattern that is set when a small hit in the 1_4R pattern 3 and 2_10R pattern 5 is won. , Rotate the motor in the CW direction at the timing when the third count game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is detected, corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 and the general area C12-3-2 The two shutters C12-3 are sequentially operated from the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked) to the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked), and the general area C12-3-1 and the general area C12 are opened. -3-2 is controlled to be closed by the shutter.

Shutter normal operation pattern D (pattern of V challenge operation of 4/5 pattern) is an operation pattern that is set when a small hit in the small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 4 and the 2_10R pattern 6 is won. , The motor is rotated in the CW direction at the timing when the entry of the game ball of the second count to the first big winning hole C10 is detected, and the general area C12-3-1, general area C12-3-2, general area The three shutters C12-3 corresponding to C12-3-3 are sequentially operated from the initial position (the position in which the specific region is not blocked) to the movable position (the position in which the specific region is blocked), and the general region C12 -3-1, the general area C12-3-2, and the general area C12-3-3 are controlled to be closed by the shutters.

Shutter normal operation pattern E (pattern of V challenge operation of 5/5 pattern) is an operation pattern that is set when a small hit in the small hit pattern of the 1_4R pattern 5 and the 2_10R pattern 7 is won. . In addition, the shutter normal operation pattern E (1/5 pattern V challenge operation pattern) is 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1 , 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern 2. It is an operation pattern that is set even when a small hit in the small hit pattern of 2_10R pattern 2 is won, and the first count to the first big winning opening C10 The motor is rotated in the CW direction at the timing when the game ball entry is detected, and the general area C12-3-1, general area C12-3-2, general area C12-3-3, general area C12-3- The four shutters C12-3 corresponding to 4 are sequentially operated from the initial position (the position where the specific region is not blocked) to the movable position (the position where the specific region is blocked), and the general region C12-3-1 , the general area C12-3-2, the general area C12-3-3, and the general area C12-3-4 are closed by the shutter.

If it is determined in step 1550-12-103-7 that the normal operation of the shutter has been completed, in step 1550-12-103-9 the timer value (timer data) of the control timer is stored in the timer storage area. Set "FFFF". Next, in step 1550-12-103-11, it is determined whether the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer is "FFFF", and if the stored timer value is "FFFF", step At 1550-12-103-13, the shutter C12-3-1 is operated based on the shutter holding operation pattern. The shutter C12-3-1 is controlled by a shutter holding operation pattern in which the shutter C12-3-1 is held in the movable position in the discharge waiting state after the movable position. configured to be

In the ejection standby state, when a pattern is set as the shutter holding operation pattern to hold the shutter C12-3-1 in the holding state, timer data for controlling the progress of the shutter holding operation pattern is stored. "FFFF" is stored as timer data in the timer storage area. Even if the timer data is subtracted from "FFFF" to "FFFE" by the subtraction processing of the control timer in step 1550-12-103-17, this timer value is When it is determined at -7 that the normal shutter operation has ended, the timer data is reset (restored) to "FFFF". In other words, if the normal shutter operation control process has not been completed after the normal shutter operation is completed, the timer storage area is configured to maintain "FFFF" as the timer data. In addition, in the ejection waiting state, the timer data may be configured so that "FFFF" is maintained as the timer data in the timer storage area without being subtracted from "FFFF" to "FFFE".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 1550-12-103-7 that it is not after the normal shutter operation has ended, the process of setting "FFFF" to the control timer in step 1550-12-103-9 is not executed. , to step 1550-12-103-11. If it is determined in step 1550-12-103-11 that the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer is not "FFFF", in step 1550-12-103-15 the storage area of the control timer The shutter C12-3-1 is operated based on the timer value stored in and the data of the set shutter normal operation pattern. After the processing of 1550-12-103-13 and 1550-12-103-15, at step 1550-12-103-17, the timer value in the storage area of the control timer is subtracted (for example, "FFFF"→"FFFE" ) and move to the next process.

The shutter C12-3-1 is operated until all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0, that is, until there are no remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10. If the holding state is ended in a certain state, the ball-entering probability in the specific area is changed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In response to such a problem, the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 145 sets the shutter normal operation patterns A to E with the opening of the first large winning opening C10 based on the winning of the small prize as a trigger, and sets the shutter normal operation pattern. (shutter normal operation control process). Then, after the shutter C12-3-1 is operated from the initial position to the movable position based on the setting of the shutter normal operation pattern, it is configured so as to be held in the movable position. Different from the opening of C10, all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0 (end trigger operation), and the holding state is released. ing. Further, a timer storage area is provided for storing timer data as information for controlling the progress of the set shutter normal operation pattern. The region's timer data is configured to remain at FFFF.

With this configuration, the operation of the shutter C12-3-1 is appropriately executed until all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing disadvantages to the player.

Next, the shutter normal operation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 146 will be described. 146 is a flow chart showing the flow of the shutter normal operation pattern setting process performed by the main control board M. FIG. The shutter normal operation pattern setting process shown here is a subroutine of step 1550-12-103-3 in FIG. In the shutter normal operation pattern setting process, first, in step 1550-12-103-3-1, it is confirmed whether the mode of the small winning symbol is the A group. If the mode of the small hit pattern is the 1st_4R pattern 1 and the 2nd_10R pattern 3, it is determined to be the A group, and in step 1550-12-103-3-3, the 1/5 pattern that is the shutter normal operation pattern A It is configured to set the pattern of the V-challenge operation and control the shutter.

On the other hand, in step 1550-12-103-3-1, when it is determined that the mode of the small winning pattern is not group A, in step 1550-12-103-3-5, the mode of the small winning pattern is group B. Check whether If the small hit pattern mode is the 1st_4R pattern 2 and the 2nd_10R pattern 4, it is determined to be the B group, and in step 1550-12-103-3-7, the 2/5 pattern which is the shutter normal operation pattern B It is configured to set the pattern of the V-challenge operation and control the shutter.

On the other hand, in step 1550-12-103-3-5, when it is determined that the mode of the small winning pattern is not group B, in step 1550-12-103-3-9, the mode of the small winning pattern is group C. Check whether If the mode of the small hit pattern is the 1st_4R pattern 3 and the 2nd_10R pattern 5, it is determined to be the C group, and in step 1550-12-103-3-11, the 3/5 pattern which is the shutter normal operation pattern C It is configured to set the pattern of the V-challenge operation and control the shutter.

On the other hand, in step 1550-12-103-3-9, when it is determined that the mode of the small winning pattern is not group C, in step 1550-12-103-3-13, the mode of the small winning pattern is group D. Check whether If the mode of the small hit pattern is the 1st_4R pattern 4 and the 2nd_10R pattern 6, it is determined to be the D group, and in step 1550-12-103-3-15, the 4/5 pattern that is the shutter normal operation pattern D It is configured to set the pattern of the V-challenge operation and control the shutter.

On the other hand, when it is determined at step 1550-12-103-3-13 that the mode of the small winning pattern is not group D, at step 1550-12-103-3-17, the mode of the small winning pattern is group E. Check whether If the small hit pattern mode is the 1st_4R pattern 5 and the 2nd_10R pattern 7, it is determined to be the E group, and in step 1550-12-103-3-19, the 5/5 pattern that is the shutter normal operation pattern E It is configured to set the pattern of the V-challenge operation and control the shutter.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 1550-12-103-3-17 that the mode of the small winning design is not group E, in step 1550-12-103-3-21, the mode of the small winning design is group F. Check whether The mode of the small hit pattern is 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern In the case of 2, it is determined to be group F, and in step 1550-12-103-3-19, the pattern of V challenge operation of 5/5 pattern, which is the shutter normal operation pattern E, is set to control the shutter. It is configured. It should be noted that although the small winning symbols are determined separately for group E and group F, the configuration may be such that determination is performed by one confirmation.

Regarding the operation of the shutter, one operation pattern of the shutter normal operation patterns A to F is set corresponding to the winning small winning pattern to operate the shutter, and any operation pattern is used. Even if there is, the operation of the shutter may be started based on the timing when the ball enters the first big winning hole.

Also, if the number of ball-entering counts and the number of shutters blocking the general area correspond to the ball-entering timing, the player will easily understand the ball-entering probability of the specific area. In order to solve this problem, the shutter is operated at different timings even when the same number of general areas are blocked by providing a shutter normal operation pattern for differentiating the shutter operation timing corresponding to the small winning pattern. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to easily understand the ball-entering probability in the specific area.

For such configuration, the following example is shown. For example, normal shutter operation patterns B1 to B5, which are modifications of the normal shutter operation pattern B that closes one general area C12-3-1, are shown below.

The shutter normal operation pattern B1 is when a small hit is won with the 1_4R pattern 2 and the 2_10R pattern 4, and the operation is started at the timing when the 1st count ball entry into the 1st big prize winning opening C10 is detected. , to close the general area C12-3-1.

The shutter normal operation pattern B2 is the 1_4R pattern 2-2 (a pattern that differs from the 1_4R pattern 2 only in the stop display mode of the pattern), the 2_10R pattern 4-2 (the stop display mode of the symbol is different from the 2_10R pattern 4). When a small win is won with a different pattern), the operation is started at the timing when the second count ball entering the first big prize opening C10 is detected, and the general area C12-3-1 is closed. is configured as

The shutter normal operation pattern B3 is the 1_4R pattern 2-3 (a pattern that differs from the 1_4R pattern 2 only in the stop display mode of the pattern), the 2_10R pattern 4-3 (the stop display mode of the symbol is different from the 2_10R symbol 4). When a small win is won with a different pattern), the operation is started at the timing when the ball entering the first big prize opening C10 for the third count is detected, and the general area C12-3-1 is closed. is configured as

The shutter normal operation pattern B4 is the 1_4R pattern 2-4 (a pattern that differs from the 1_4R pattern 2 only in the stop display mode of the pattern), the 2_10R pattern 4-4 (the stop display mode of the symbol is different from the 2_10R pattern 4). When a small hit is won with a different pattern), the operation is started at the timing when the ball entering the first big prize opening C10 at the 4th count is detected, and the general area C12-3-1 is closed. is configured as

The shutter normal operation pattern B5 is the 1_4R pattern 2-5 (a pattern that differs from the 1_4R pattern 2 only in the stop display mode of the pattern), the 2_10R pattern 4-5 (the stop display mode of the symbol is different from the 2_10R pattern 4). When a small win is won with a different pattern), the operation is started at the timing when the ball entering the first big prize opening C10 at the 5th count is detected, and the general area C12-3-1 is closed. is configured as The shutter normal operation patterns B1 to B5 are not limited, and operation patterns corresponding to the 6th to 10th counts may be provided.

It is explained that the V increase effect and the operation of the shutter C12-3-1 accompanying the V increase effect are executed when the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole C10 reaches a specific number during the small winning game. However, it may be executed within the execution time of the small winning start demonstration. When executing within the execution time of the small winning start demonstration, the execution time of the small winning starting demonstration is set to a long time, and the timing of starting the small winning starting demonstration or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the small winning starting demonstration It is preferable to configure so that the operation of the shutter C12-3-1 is started at a fixed timing.

For example, the 2_10R pattern 2 is configured to enter the specific area C12-1 of the first big winning hole C10 in the small winning game, and the gaming ball entered during the small winning game passes through the direct V route. The small winning pattern is constructed so that the ball enters the specific area C12-1 100% (a form of straight V), but this small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, and then during the small winning game executed. An irregular case is conceivable in which the entering game ball passes through the straight V route and does not enter the specific area C12-1. In the case of this irregular case, a game ball entered during a small winning game passes through the straight V route and flows into the rotating body C17 via the V challenge route. Since the ball entry probability to the specific area C12-2 with this body of revolution C17 is 1/5 to 5/5, the pattern is set to a pattern that is not 100%, such as a 1/5 pattern. Then, the game which is actually scheduled to enter the specific area C12-1 and develop into a big win game, due to the occurrence of an irregular case, the ball enters the general area of the rotating body C17, and only a small win game is executed. , and there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged.

Therefore, in a pachinko gaming machine that can give a big hit game after the end of the small win game when a game ball enters a specific area in a small win game (in the case of a game machine with a small win V), the first big In the process until the game ball entering the winning opening C10 flows down to the specific area C12-2, the interference member C12-6, the rotating drum C12-7, the stopper C12-8, etc. that affect the flow of the game ball It is configured to provide one or a plurality of movable bodies. Then, as the specific region, the specific region C12-1 (first specific region) and the specific region C12-2 (second specific region) arranged downstream of the specific region C12-1 are provided, and the specific region A game ball is moved to a specific area C12-1 by operating a direct V shutter C12-1-1 (first movable piece) provided for C12-1 in an easy-to-enter state and a difficult-to-enter state. (direct V shutter operation control processing), and by operating the shutter C12-3-1 (second movable piece) provided for the specific area C12-2 It is configured (shutter normal operation control process) to change stepwise the ball entry easiness (ball entry easiness from 1/5 to 5/5) of the game ball to the specific area C12-2. When the direct V shutter C12-1-1 is operated in an easy ball entry state, the shutter C12-3-1 provides a 5/5 pattern in which the ease of entry of a game ball into the specific area C12-2 is the highest. is configured as

By configuring in this way, in the case of the irregular case, even if the game ball entered during the small winning game passes through the straight V route and flows into the rotating body C17 via the V challenge route, Since the easiness of entering the game ball into the specific area C12-2 is set to the 5/5 pattern, which is the highest, the game can be developed into a big win game, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged. .

In addition, in a pachinko game machine (V probability variable game machine) that can give a high probability state after a big hit game by entering a game ball in a specific area in a V round game during a big win game, the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. Then, an irregular case is conceivable in which a game ball entered during the jackpot game executed thereafter passes through the straight V route and does not enter the specific area C12-1. In the case of this irregular case, a game ball entered during a big hit game passes through the straight V route and flows into the rotating body C17 via the V challenge route. Since the ball entry probability to the specific area C12-2 with this body of revolution C17 is 1/5 to 5/5, the pattern is set to a pattern that is not 100%, such as a 1/5 pattern. As a result, the game that is actually scheduled to enter a ball into the specific area C12-1 and provide a high probability state after the big win game will only execute the big win game, which may disadvantage the player. .

When applied to such a gaming machine, when a game ball enters a specific area in a V round game (in the case of a V probability variable gaming machine), after the V round gaming machine and after the end of the big hit game In a pachinko game machine capable of imparting a high probability state, an interference member that affects the flow of the game ball in the process until the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 flows down to the specific area C12-2. One or a plurality of movable bodies such as C12-6, rotary drum C12-7, and stopper C12-8 are provided. Then, as the specific region, the specific region C12-1 (first specific region) and the specific region C12-2 (second specific region) arranged downstream of the specific region C12-1 are provided, and the specific region A game ball is moved to a specific area C12-1 by operating a direct V shutter C12-1-1 (first movable piece) provided for C12-1 in an easy-to-enter state and a difficult-to-enter state. (direct V shutter operation control processing), and by operating the shutter C12-3-1 (second movable piece) provided for the specific area C12-2 It is configured (shutter normal operation control process) to change stepwise the ball entry easiness (ball entry easiness from 1/5 to 5/5) of the game ball to the specific area C12-2. When the direct V shutter C12-1-1 is operated in an easy ball entry state, the shutter C12-3-1 provides a 5/5 pattern in which the ease of entry of a game ball into the specific area C12-2 is the highest. is configured as

By configuring in this way, in the case of the irregular case, even if the game ball entered during the big hit game passes through the straight V route and flows into the rotating body C17 via the V challenge route, the specific Since the 5/5 pattern is set to maximize the ease of entry of the game ball into the area C12-2, a high probability state can be imparted after the big win game, so that the player suffers a disadvantage. can be prevented.

Next, the interference member normal operation control process shown in FIG. 147 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the flow of interference member normal operation control processing performed by the main control board M. FIG. The interference member normal operation control processing shown here is detailed processing shown in step 1550-12-205 in FIG.

At step 1550-12-201 of the motor control process at step 1550-12, if the motor normal operation determination flag is ON, at step 1550-12-205-1, the interference member normal operation pattern is set as a constant operation pattern. The interference member C12-6 is continuously operated by a motor (driving source). Then, it shifts to the next process.

Note that the control may be performed like the shutter normal operation control process. For example, it is determined whether the normal operation of the interference member C12-6 has already been initialized. That is, it is determined whether or not the interference member normal operation pattern of the interference member C12-6 and the timer value used for the interference member normal operation are set in the control timer as the initial setting for the normal operation of the interference member C12-6. . Then, if the normal operation initial setting has not been completed, the interference member normal operation pattern is set. Next, a timer value for normal operation of the interference member is set in the control timer.

Next, it is determined whether the normal operation of the interference member has been completed. Even if the normal operation of the interference member C12-6 has already been initialized, it is determined whether the normal operation of the interference member C12-6 has been completed. Here, the normal operation of the interference member means that the interference member C12-6 is rotated by a motor (driving source) to rotate a rotating body (eccentric cam or the like) disposed inside the interference member C12-6, and the rotating body rotates in the initial stage. By colliding with the interference member C12-6 biased in the position (rear position) direction, the interference member C12-6 moves back and forth irregularly between the initial position (rear position) and the movable position (front position). . In detail, the interference member normal operation pattern is set and the interference member C12-6 is moved back and forth in accordance with the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of the first big winning opening C10 when the small winning game is started. , and a repetitive state (also called reciprocating state or loop state) in which back and forth movement is repeatedly executed.

If it is determined that the normal operation of the interference member has ended, "FFFF" is set in the timer storage area for storing the timer value (timer data) of the control timer. Next, it is determined whether the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer is "FFFF". If the stored timer value is "FFFF", the interference member C12 -6 to work. The interfering member C12-6 is set in a pattern such that the interfering member C12-6 is kept in the repeated state (the operation of repeating the forward and backward movement is looped) in the discharging standby state after the repeated state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer is not "FFFF", the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer and the set interference member normal operation pattern data Based on this, it is configured to operate the interference member C12-6.

In the ejection standby state, when a pattern is set as the interference member repetitive motion pattern to keep the interference member C12-6 in the repetitive state, timer data for controlling the progress of the interference member repetitive motion pattern is stored. "FFFF" is stored as timer data in the timer storage area. This timer value is set to , resets (restores) the timer data to "FFFF". In other words, if the interference member normal operation control process has not been completed after the interference member normal operation has ended, the timer storage area is configured to maintain "FFFF" as the timer data. In addition, in the ejection waiting state, the timer data may be configured so that "FFFF" is maintained as the timer data in the timer storage area without being subtracted from "FFFF" to "FFFE".

Also, if it is determined that it is not after the normal operation of the interference member has ended, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the process of setting the control timer to "FFFF". Then, in the next process, a process of determining whether the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer is "FFFF" is executed. or operate the interference member C12-6 based on the timer value and the set interference member normal operation pattern, the timer value in the storage area of the control timer is decremented in the next process (for example, "FFFF" → Execute the process of subtracting "FFFE".

The interference member C12-6 continues until all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0, that is, there are remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10. If the state is terminated repeatedly in the state, the game ball does not flow down to the specific area C12-2 and the game ball remains, and the lottery for the specific area C12-2 is not executed, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that it brings about

In order to solve such a problem, the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 147 sets the interference member normal operation pattern with the opening of the first large winning opening C10 based on the winning of the small hit as a trigger, and the interference member normal operation pattern is set. Based on this, the interference member C12-6 as a movable body is operated (interference member normal operation control processing). Then, a repetitive state (for example, a reciprocating state) in which a pattern for moving the interference member C12-6 from the initial position to the movable position is repeatedly executed based on the setting of the interference member operation normal operation pattern (interference member repetitive operation pattern may be used). , loop state), and all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 different from the opening of the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0 (end) Triggering operation) is used as a trigger to repeatedly release the state. Further, a timer storage area for storing timer data as information for controlling the progress of the set interference member normal operation pattern is provided, and when the interference member C12-6 is in the repeated state, the timer is stored. The region's timer data is configured to remain at FFFF.

With this configuration, the operation of the interference member C12-6 can be appropriately executed until all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will be disadvantaged.

Next, the rotary drum normal operation control process shown in FIG. 148 will be described. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the flow of the rotating drum normal operation control process performed by the main control board M. FIG. The rotary drum normal operation control process shown here is the detailed process shown in step 1550-12-207 in FIG.

At step 1550-12-201 of the motor control process at step 1550-12, if the motor normal operation determination flag is ON, at step 1550-12-207-1, the rotating drum normal operation pattern is set as a constant operation pattern. The rotary drum C12-7 is rotated (continuously operated) by a motor (driving source). Then, it shifts to the next process.

Note that the control may be performed like the shutter normal operation control process. For example, it is determined whether the normal operation of the rotating drum C12-7 has already been initialized. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotating drum normal operation pattern of the rotating drum C12-7 and the timer value used for the rotating drum normal operation are set in the control timer as the initial settings for the normal operation of the rotating drum C12-7. . If the normal operation initial setting has not been completed, the rotating drum normal operation pattern is set. Next, a timer value for rotating drum normal operation is set in the control timer.

Next, it is determined whether the normal operation of the rotating drum has been completed. Even if the normal operation of the rotary drum C12-7 has already been initialized, it is determined whether the normal operation of the rotary drum C12-7 has been completed. Here, the rotating drum normal operation means that the rotating drum C12-7 is rotated by a motor (driving source). Specifically, the rotary drum normal operation pattern is set and the rotary drum C12-7 is rotated in accordance with the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the cover of the first big winning opening C10 when the small winning game is started, Control is performed so that the rotation is repeatedly executed (also called a loop state). The rotation of the rotary drum may be configured to rotate with the initial position as a starting point, or the initial position and the movable position may be set separately, and the operation of the initial position→the movable position→the initial position is one cycle, and the initial position is the initial position. Alternatively, the initial position and the movable position are set to the same position, and the operation from the initial position to the movable position (the same position as the initial position) makes one turn, and the initial position is the starting point. It may be configured to rotate.

If it is determined that the normal operation of the rotating drum has ended, "FFFF" is set in the timer storage area for storing the timer value (timer data) of the control timer. Next, it is determined whether or not the timer value stored in the control timer storage area is "FFFF". -7 to work. The rotating drum C12-7 is set in a pattern such that the rotating drum C12-7 is kept in the repeating state (the operation of repeating the rotation is looped) in the ejection standby state after the repeating state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer is not "FFFF", the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer and the set rotation drum normal operation pattern data are matched. Based on this, it is configured to operate the rotary drum C12-7.

In the discharge standby state, when a pattern is set as the rotating drum repetitive operation pattern to keep the rotating drum C12-7 in the repetitive state, timer data for controlling the progress of the rotating drum repetitive operation pattern is stored. "FFFF" is stored as timer data in the timer storage area. Even if the timer data is subtracted from "FFFF" to "FFFE" by the subtraction processing of the control timer, this timer value is set to , resets (restores) the timer data to "FFFF". In other words, if the rotating drum normal operation control process is not completed after the rotating drum normal operation is completed, the timer storage area is configured to maintain "FFFF" as the timer data. In addition, in the ejection waiting state, the timer data may be configured so that "FFFF" is maintained as the timer data in the timer storage area without being subtracted from "FFFF" to "FFFE".

Also, if it is determined that it is not after the normal operation of the rotating drum has ended, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the process of setting the control timer to "FFFF". Then, in the next process, a process of determining whether the timer value stored in the control timer storage area is "FFFF" is executed, and based on the determination result, the rotating drum C12-7 is determined based on the rotating drum repetition pattern. or operate the rotary drum C12-7 based on the timer value and the set rotary drum normal operation pattern, in the next process, the timer value in the storage area of the control timer is decremented (for example, "FFFF" → Execute the process of subtracting "FFFE".

The rotating drum C12-7 is operated until all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0, that is, there are remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10. If the state is terminated repeatedly in the state, the game ball does not flow down to the specific area C12-2 and the game ball remains, and the lottery for the specific area C12-2 is not executed, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that it brings about

In order to solve such a problem, the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 148 sets the rotating drum normal operation pattern with the opening of the first big winning opening C10 based on the winning of the small hit as a trigger, and follows the set rotating drum normal operation pattern. Based on this, the rotating drum C12-7 as a movable body is operated (rotary drum motion control processing). Then, a pattern for moving the rotary drum C12-7 from the initial position to the movable position (the same position as the initial position) is repeatedly executed based on the setting of the rotary drum normal operation pattern (or the rotary drum repeated operation pattern). A state (for example, a loop state) is formed, and all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 different from the opening of the first big winning hole C10 are discharged, and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0. It is configured such that the repeated state is canceled with the judgment (end trigger operation) as a trigger. Further, a timer storage area is provided for storing timer data as information for controlling the progress of the set rotary drum normal operation pattern. The region's timer data is configured to remain at FFFF.

With this configuration, the operation of the rotary drum C12-7 can be appropriately executed until all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will be disadvantaged.

Next, the stopper normal operation control process shown in FIG. 149 will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the flow of stopper normal operation control processing performed by the main control board M. FIG. The stopper normal operation control process shown here is the detailed process shown in step 1550-12-209 in FIG.

First, in step 1550-12-209-1, it is determined whether or not the normal operation of the stopper C12-8 has been initialized. That is, it is determined whether or not the stopper normal operation pattern of the stopper C12-8 and the timer value used for the stopper normal operation are set in the control timer as initial settings for the normal operation of the stopper C12-8. Then, in step 1550-12-209-1, if normal operation initialization has not been completed, in step 1550-12-209-3, a stopper normal operation pattern is set. Next, in step 1550-12-209-5, a timer value (for example, 21.3 seconds) for normal stopper operation is set in the control timer.

Next, in step 1550-12-209-7, it is determined whether the normal operation of the stopper has been completed. Even if the normal operation of the stopper C12-8 has already been initialized in step 1550-12-209-1, the process proceeds to step 1550-12-209-7 to determine whether the normal operation of the stopper has been completed. do. Here, the stopper normal operation means that the stopper C12-8 is vertically moved between an initial position (upper position) and a movable position (lower position) by a motor (driving source). Specifically, the stopper normal operation pattern is set in accordance with the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of the first big winning opening C10 when the small winning game is started, and one cycle is 3.7 seconds (upper). position) → 3.7 seconds (lower position) → 5.4 seconds (upper position) → 4.3 seconds (lower position) → 1.7 seconds (upper position) → 2.5 seconds (lower position) Then, the stopper C12-8 is vertically moved, and the vertical movement is repeatedly executed (also referred to as a reciprocating state or a loop state).

If it is determined in step 1550-12-209-7 that the normal operation of the stopper has been completed, that is, 3.7 seconds (upper position)→3.7 seconds (lower position)→5.4 seconds (upper position) ) → 4.3 seconds (lower position) → 1.7 seconds (upper position) → 2.5 seconds (lower position). , at step 1550-12-209-9, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the repeat operation of the stopper C12-8 has been completed. Here, it is determined whether or not the repeat operation pattern of the stopper C12-8 and the timer value used for the stopper repeat operation are set in the control timer as the initial setting for the repeat operation of the stopper C12-8 after the second cycle. do. Then, in step 1550-12-209-9, if the repeat operation initialization has not been completed, in step 1550-12-209-11, a stopper repeat operation pattern is set. Next, in step 1550-12-209-13, a timer value for stopper repetition operation (for example, 234.3 seconds: a value for repeating one cycle 11 times) is set in the control timer.

Next, in step 1550-12-209-15, the stopper C12-8 is repeatedly operated (stopper repeat operation) based on the timer value of the stopper repeat operation stored in the storage area of the control timer and the set stopper repeat operation pattern. operate). Here, the stopper repeat operation means that the stopper C12-8 is vertically moved between an initial position (upper position) and a movable position (lower position) by a motor (driving source). More specifically, a stopper repeat operation pattern is set, and the sequence is 3.7 seconds (upper position)→3.7 seconds (lower position)→5.4 seconds (upper position)→4.3 seconds (lower position)→1. It is controlled to be in a repetitive state (reciprocating state or loop state) in which one cycle of operation of 7 seconds (upper position)→2.5 seconds (lower position) is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 1550-12-209-7 that the stopper normal operation has not ended, in step 1550-12-209-17 the timer value for the stopper normal operation stored in the control timer storage area is Then, the stopper C12-8 is normally operated (stopper normal operation) based on the set stopper normal operation pattern. In the next process after executing the processes of steps 1550-12-209-15 and 1550-12-209-17, the process of subtracting the timer value in the storage area of the control timer is executed.

It has been described that the stopper C12-8 is operated based on the stopper repeated operation pattern after the stopper normal operation based on the stopper normal operation pattern is completed. It may be configured to set The stopper normal operation pattern and the stopper repeated operation pattern have a period of 21.3 seconds {3.7 seconds (upper position) → 3.7 seconds (lower position) → 5.4 seconds (upper position) → 4.3 seconds. Seconds (lower position) → 1.7 seconds (upper position) → 2.5 seconds (lower position)}, so that the stopper C12-8 performs the same operation, it is possible to set in this way. Alternatively, the timer value of the control timer may be set separately for the stopper normal operation and the stopper repeat operation without changing the pattern from the stopper normal operation pattern.

Further, the explanation has been given that the stopper C12-8 is operated based on the stopper repeated operation pattern after the stopper normal operation based on the stopper normal operation pattern is completed. Second movable position → 2 second initial position → 3 second movable position, which is a pattern different from stopper normal operation pattern, stopper repeat operation pattern 2, and stopper repeat operation pattern 3), stopper repeat operation pattern 2 (for example, 1.5 seconds movable position → 2.5 seconds initial position → 3.5 seconds movable position. Repetitive operation pattern 3 (for example, a pattern in which a 1.7-second movable position → a 2.7-second initial position → a 3.7-second movable position is performed. Stopper normal operation pattern, stopper repeated operation pattern 1, and stopper repeated operation pattern 2 The stopper may be operated using a pattern in which the operating mode of the stopper is different. The stopper repeat operation patterns 1 to 3 may be looped such that the stopper repeat operation pattern 1→stopper repeat operation pattern 2→stopper repeat operation pattern 3→stopper repeat operation pattern 1→ . . . good. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the game ball flows down to the rotating body C17 can be made irregular, making it difficult to intentionally aim for the ball to enter a specific area of the rotating body C17. be able to.

Next, the shutter termination operation control process shown in FIG. 150 will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the flow of the shutter termination operation control process performed by the main control board M. FIG. The shutter termination operation control process of step 1550-12-303 is a subroutine of step 1550-12-303 of FIG.

First, in step 1550-12-303-1, it is determined whether or not the initial setting of the closing operation of the shutter C12-3-1 has been completed. That is, it is determined whether or not a shutter termination operation pattern of the shutter C12-3-1 and a timer value used for the shutter termination operation are set in the control timer as the initial setting for the shutter C12-3-1 to perform the termination operation. . If it is determined in step 1550-12-303-1 that the initial setting of the closing operation has not been completed, setting of the shutter closing operation pattern is executed in step 1550-12-303-3. Next, in step 1550-12-303-5, a timer value for normal shutter operation is set in the control timer.

Next, in step 1550-12-303-7, it is determined whether or not the timer value stored in the timer storage area for storing the timer value (timer data) of the control timer is zero. If it is determined that the timer value of the control timer is not 0, in step 1550-12-303-9, the shutter is released based on the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer and the data of the set shutter termination operation pattern. Activate C12-3-1. Next, at 1550-12-303-11, the timer value in the storage area of the control timer is decremented, and the process proceeds to the next step. Also, if it is determined at step 1550-12-303-7 that the timer value of the control timer is 0, the process at step 1550-12-303-9 is not executed, and at 1550-12-303-11, Decrease the timer value in the storage area of the control timer, and proceed to the next process.

Further, the shutter termination operation pattern is configured to release the held state of the shutter C12-3-1. When releasing the holding state, the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0, and at the timing when it is determined that there are no remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10, the shutter C12-3-1 is positioned at the initial position. If not, a pattern corresponding to the normal shutter operation pattern is set as the shutter termination operation pattern from among the shutter termination operation patterns A to E.

When the shutter normal operation pattern A is set, the shutter end operation pattern A (1/5 end pattern) is set. , the general area C12-3-3, and the general area C12-3-4, the four shutters C12-3 are sequentially moved from the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked) to the movable position (the state in which the specific area is blocked). position), drive the motor in the CW direction until the internal maximum movable position is detected by the movable position sensor, then shutter C12-3 corresponding to general area C12-3-4, general area C12 -3-3 corresponding to the shutter C12-3, the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-2, the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 movable position (blocking the specific area The motor is driven in the CCW direction until it is detected by the initial position sensor that detects the internal initial position from the movable position sensor so as to operate from the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked) from the initial position (position in which the specific area is not blocked), It is configured to perform return processing.

When the shutter normal operation pattern B is set, the shutter end operation pattern B (2/5 end pattern) is set. , the three shutters C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-4 are sequentially operated from the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked) to the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked), and the internal After the motor is driven in the CW direction until the maximum movable position is detected by the movable position sensor, the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-4 and the shutter corresponding to the general area C12-3-3 C12-3, the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-2, and the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 are sequentially moved from the movable position (the position in which the specific area is closed) to the initial position ( The motor is driven in the CCW direction until it is detected by the initial position sensor that detects the internal initial position from the movable position sensor so as to operate to the position where the specific area is not blocked), and the return process is executed. It is

When the shutter normal operation pattern C is set, the shutter end operation pattern C (3/5 end pattern) is set. The two shutters C12-3 corresponding to are sequentially operated from the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked) to the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked), and the maximum movable position inside is detected. After driving the motor in the CW direction until detection by the position sensor, the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-4, the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-3, the general area C12- The shutter C12-3 corresponding to 3-2 and the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 are moved in order from the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked) to the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked). position), the motor is driven in the CCW direction until the internal initial position is detected by the movable position sensor, and the return process is executed.

When the shutter normal operation pattern D is set, the shutter end operation pattern D (4/5 end pattern) is set, and the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-4 is set. Operate from the initial position (the position where the specific area is not blocked) to the movable position (the position where the specific area is blocked), and drive the motor in the CW direction until the maximum movable position is detected by the internal maximum movable position sensor. Then, the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-4, the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-3, the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-2, the general In order to move the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the area C12-3-1 from the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked) to the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked) from the movable position sensor. The motor is driven in the CCW direction until it is detected by an initial position sensor for detecting the initial position of the motor, and the return process is executed.

When the shutter normal operation pattern E is set, the shutter end operation pattern E (5/5 end pattern) is set. After driving the motor in the CW direction, shutter C12-3 corresponding to general area C12-3-4, shutter C12-3 corresponding to general area C12-3-3, and shutter corresponding to general area C12-3-2 The shutter C12-3 and the shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 are operated in order from the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked) to the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked). The motor is driven in the CCW direction until the internal initial position sensor detects the initial position from the movable position sensor, and the return process is executed.

An initial position sensor is provided at the initial position, and the initial position is detected by the initial position sensor after the timing when all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are discharged, and the game returns. It may be configured to end the processing. Incidentally, when the shutter C12-3-1 is not located at the initial position, by setting an operation pattern for one cycle from the initial position to the movable position of the shutter C12-3-1 and detecting the initial position, It may be configured to end the return process. In addition, the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0, and it is explained that the holding state is canceled when it is determined that there are no remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10, but the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is is 0, or if it is determined that there are no remaining balls inside the first big prize winning opening C10, the holding state may be released.

If the shutter C12-3-1 maintains the holding state even after all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0, then the next small hit will occur. When playing a game, the probability of entering a ball in a specific area is different from that in the previous small winning game, which is disadvantageous to the player.

145 and 150, the shutter normal operation patterns A to E are set with the opening of the first big winning opening C10 based on the winning of the small hit as a trigger, and the set shutter It is configured to operate the shutter C12-3-1 as a movable body based on the normal operation pattern (shutter normal operation control process). Then, after the shutter C12-3-1 is operated from the initial position to the movable position based on the setting of the shutter normal operation pattern, it is configured to be in a holding state in which it is held at the movable position. Different from the opening of C10, all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0 (end trigger operation), and the holding state is released. ing. After the holding state is released, the shutter C12-3-1 in the movable position is moved to the initial position. Further, when the holding state is released, the shutter C12-3-1 in the movable position is moved to the initial position based on the setting of the shutter termination operation pattern for moving the shutter C12-3-1 to the initial position. It is configured to operate (shutter termination operation control process).

With this configuration, in the next small winning game after all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0, the shutter C12-3-1 can be appropriately executed, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing disadvantages to the player.

In the discharge standby state, when a pattern is set to keep each movable body in the discharge state or in the repeated state, "FFFF" is stored as timer data in the RAM area as the timer storage area. is configured as In this timer processing, since the RAM is configured to perform timer subtraction, the timer data is configured to change from "FFFF" to "FFFE" by timer subtraction. Then, when the timer data becomes "FFFE", it is configured to return to "FFFF". Movable bodies using solenoids (storage section, direct V shutter, second main game starter electric accessory) commonly execute this timer subtraction process. That is, the same processing as the timer subtraction processing of the second main game starter electric accessory is executed by the stopper, the storage section, and the direct V shutter. As for the stopper, the repeated state is infinitely managed, and the storage section, the direct V shutter, and the second main game starter electric accessory are configured to manage time. In addition, the timer data is maintained at "FFFF" even in the case of magnetic detection error, disconnection/short-circuit error, radio wave detection error, shock detection error, and the like.

Next, the interference member termination operation control process shown in FIG. 151 will be described. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the flow of the interference member termination operation control process performed by the main control board M. FIG. The interference member ending operation control process of step 1550-12-305 is a subroutine of step 1550-12-305 of FIG.

First, at step 1550-12-305-1, it is determined whether or not the interference member C12-6 is at the initial position. An initial position sensor is provided at the initial position, and the initial position sensor is configured to determine whether or not the interference member C12-6 is positioned at the initial position. At step 1550-12-305-1, if the interference member C12-6 is not located at the initial position, at step 1550-12-305-3, the interference member C12-6 is moved in the same pattern as the interference member normal operation pattern. is continuously operated until it is detected by the initial position sensor at the initial position. It should be noted that the operation pattern does not have to be newly set, and a new interference member normal operation pattern may be set. On the other hand, if the interference member is located at the initial position, the operation of the interference member C12-6 is terminated at step 1550-12-305-5.

Here, if the value of the game ball ejection waiting counter is 0, it is determined that there are no remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10, the ejection waiting state is terminated, and the interference member C12-6 repeats. It is configured such that the state of holding the same (the state of looping the action of repeating back and forth movement) is released. When canceling the state of holding the repeated state (the state of looping the action of repeating back and forth movement), the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0 and there are no remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10. If the interference member C12-6 is not at the initial position at the determined timing, the interference member C12-6 is moved to the initial position. In other words, after the timing when all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are discharged, the interference member C12-6 continues to output to the motor based on the already set interference member normal operation pattern. Operate until the initial position is detected by the initial position sensor. The operation of the interference member C12-6 is terminated when the initial position is detected by the initial position sensor.

When the interference member C12-6 is not located at the initial position, the interference member end operation pattern for one cycle from the initial position to the movable position is set for the interference member C12-6, the motor is driven, and the initial position is reached. is detected, the setting of the interference member ending operation pattern for one cycle is cancelled, and the operation of the interference member C12-6 may be ended. In this configuration, it is determined whether the initial setting of the ending operation of the interference member C12-6 has been completed. That is, it is determined whether or not the interference member termination operation pattern of the interference member C12-6 and the timer value used for the interference member termination operation are set in the control timer as the initial setting for the interference member C12-6 to perform the termination operation. . Then, if the initial setting of the ending motion has not been completed, the interfering member ending motion pattern is set. Next, a timer value for rotating drum normal operation is set in the control timer.

Next, it is determined whether or not the interference member C12-6 is at the initial position. As a result of determining whether the ending operation has been initialized, even if the ending operation has been initialized, the process proceeds to the process of determining whether the interference member C12-6 is not at the initial position. If the interference member C12-6 is not at the initial position, it is determined whether the timer value of the control timer is zero. When the timer value of the control timer is not 0, the interference member C12-6 is operated based on the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer and the data of the set interference member end operation pattern. there is

Next, a process of subtracting the timer value in the storage area of the control timer (for example, subtracting from "FFFF" to "FFFE") is executed. Even when the timer value of the control timer is 0, the process of subtracting the timer value of the storage area of the control timer is executed. When the interference member C12-6 is at the initial position, the interference member termination operation control processing is terminated without performing processing such as checking whether the timer value of the control timer is zero. In addition, due to the configuration in which the rotating body (eccentric cam, etc.) arranged inside the interference member C12-6 is rotated by the motor, there is a possibility that it cannot be stopped immediately at the timing detected at the initial position, so the motor is decelerated once. After performing the processing, it may be configured to stop when the initial position is detected in the low speed state.

The interference member C12-6 maintains the repeated state even after all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0, the next small winning game At this time, the operation of the interference member C12-6 does not become the same as the operation of the previous small winning game, and the probability of entering a ball in the specific area is different from that of the previous small winning game, which is inconvenient for the player. There is a problem of making a profit.

147 and 151, the interference member normal operation pattern is set with the opening of the first big winning opening C10 based on the winning of the small hit as a trigger, and the set interference member normal operation pattern is set. It is configured to operate the interference member C12-6 as a movable body based on the operation pattern (interference member normal operation control process). Then, a repetitive state (for example, reciprocating state, reciprocating state, loop state), and determination that all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 different from the opening of the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0 (end trigger It is configured so that the repetitive state is canceled with the trigger (operation). After the repeated state is canceled, the interference member C12-6 is configured to move to the initial position. Further, an initial position sensor (first detection means) for detecting that the interference member C12-6 is positioned at the initial position is provided, and when the repeated state is canceled, the interference member C12-6 is positioned at the initial position. If not, the interference member C12-6 is operated until the initial position is detected by the initial position sensor (interference member end operation control processing).

By configuring in this way, in the next small winning game after all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0, the interference member C12-6 Since the action can be executed appropriately, the possibility of causing a disadvantage to the player can be reduced.

Next, the rotary drum end operation control process shown in FIG. 152 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the flow of the rotating drum end operation control process performed by the main control board M. FIG. The rotating drum end operation control process of step 1550-12-307 is a subroutine of step 1550-12-307 of FIG.

First, at step 1550-12-307-1, it is determined whether the rotary drum C12-7 is at the initial position. An initial position sensor is provided at the initial position, and the initial position sensor is configured to determine whether or not the rotary drum C12-7 is positioned at the initial position. In step 1550-12-307-1, if the rotary drum C12-7 is not located at the initial position, in step 1550-12-307-3, in the same pattern as the rotary drum normal operation pattern, the rotary drum C12-7 is continuously rotated (operated) until it is detected by the initial position sensor at the initial position. It should be noted that the operation pattern may not be newly set, and a new rotary drum normal operation pattern may be set. On the other hand, if the rotary drum is located at the initial position, the operation of the rotary drum C12-7 is terminated at step 1550-12-307-5.

Here, if the value of the game ball ejection waiting counter is 0, it is determined that there are no remaining balls in the first big winning hole C10, and the ejection waiting state is ended, and the rotating drum C12-7 is put into a repeating state. It is configured such that the state of holding the same (the state of looping the motion of repeating the rotation) is released. When canceling the state in which the repeated state is maintained (the state in which the action of repeating the rotation is looped), the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0, and it is determined that there are no remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10. If the rotary drum C12-7 is not located at the initial position at the timing, the rotary drum C12-7 is rotated to the initial position. That is, after the timing at which all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are discharged, based on the rotary drum normal operation pattern that has already been set, the output to the motor is continued to drive the rotary drum C12-7. Rotate until the initial position is detected by the initial position sensor. The rotation of the rotary drum C12-7 is terminated when the initial position is detected by the initial position sensor.

If the rotary drum C12-7 is not at the initial position, the rotary drum end operation pattern for one cycle from the initial position to the movable position (the same position as the initial position) is set. By driving the motor and detecting the initial position, the setting of the rotary drum end operation pattern for one cycle may be canceled and the operation of the rotary drum C12-7 may be ended. In this configuration, it is determined whether the initial setting of the end operation of the rotary drum C12-7 has been completed. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotating drum ending operation pattern of the rotating drum C12-7 and the timer value used for the rotating drum ending operation are set in the control timer as the initial setting for the rotating drum C12-7 to end the operation. . Then, if the initial setting of the ending operation has not been completed, the rotary drum ending operation pattern is set. Next, a timer value for rotating drum normal operation is set in the control timer.

Next, it is determined whether or not the rotary drum C12-7 is at the initial position. As a result of determining whether or not the initial setting of the ending operation has been completed, even if the initial setting of the ending operation has been completed, the process proceeds to the process of determining whether the rotating drum C12-7 is not at the initial position. If the rotary drum C12-7 is not at the initial position, it is determined whether the timer value of the control timer is zero. When the timer value of the control timer is not 0, the rotary drum C12-7 is operated based on the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer and the data of the set rotary drum end operation pattern. there is

Next, a process of subtracting the timer value in the storage area of the control timer (for example, subtracting from "FFFF" to "FFFE") is executed. Even when the timer value of the control timer is 0, the process of subtracting the timer value of the storage area of the control timer is executed. Incidentally, when the rotating drum C12-7 is at the initial position, the rotating drum end operation control process is terminated without checking whether the timer value of the control timer is not 0 or the like. Since the rotary drum C12-7 is configured to rotate by a motor, it may not be possible to immediately stop at the timing detected at the initial position. For this reason, the rotary drum C12-7 may be stopped when the initial position is detected in the low speed state after the motor is once decelerated.

If the rotary drum C12-7 maintains the repeated state even after all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0, the next small winning game is performed. At this time, the operation of the rotary drum C12-7 is not the same as the operation of the previous small winning game, and the probability of entering a ball in the specific area is different from that of the previous small winning game, which is inconvenient for the player. There is a problem of making a profit.

148 and 152, the game machine described in FIGS. It is configured to operate the rotary drum C12-7 as a movable body based on the operation pattern (rotary drum normal operation control process). Then, a repetitive state (for example, a loop state) in which the pattern of moving the rotating drum C12-7 from the initial position to the movable position is repeatedly executed based on the setting of the rotating drum normal operation pattern (which may be the rotating drum repeated operation pattern). The game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 different from the opening of the first big winning hole C10 are all discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0 (end trigger operation). It is configured such that the repeated state is canceled as a trigger. After the repetition state is canceled, the rotating drum C12-7 is configured to move to the initial position. Further, an initial position sensor (first detection means) for detecting that the rotary drum C12-7 is positioned at the initial position is provided, and when the repeating state is canceled, the rotary drum C12-7 is positioned at the initial position. If not, the rotary drum C12-7 is operated until the initial position is detected by the initial position sensor (rotary drum end operation control process).

With this configuration, in the next small winning game after all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0, the rotary drum C12-7 Since the action can be executed appropriately, the possibility of causing a disadvantage to the player can be reduced.

Next, the stopper end operation control process shown in FIG. 153 will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the flow of stopper termination operation control processing performed by the main control board M. FIG. The stopper end operation control process of step 1550-12-309 is a subroutine of step 1550-12-309 of FIG.

First, in step 1550-12-309-1, it is determined whether or not all operations of the stopper repeat operation pattern have been completed. Here, all motions of the stopper repeat motion pattern are as follows: 3.7 seconds (upper position)→3.7 seconds (lower position)→5.4 seconds (upper position)→4.3 seconds (lower position)→1 7 seconds (upper position)→2.5 seconds (lower position), and it is determined whether the last 2.5 seconds (lower position) have been executed.

If execution of all motions of the stopper repeat motion pattern is completed in step 1550-12-309-1, the motion of the stopper C12-8 is terminated in step 1550-12-309-3. On the other hand, in step 1550-12-309-1, if execution of all motions of the stopper repeat motion pattern has not been completed, the motion of the stopper repeat motion pattern is continued in step 1550-12-309-5.

It should be noted that there are a plurality of stopper repetition patterns such as the above-described stopper repetition patterns 1 to 3, and the stopper repetition operation pattern 1→stopper repetition operation pattern 2→stopper repetition operation pattern 3→stopper repetition operation pattern 1→ . Thus, when the stopper repeat operation patterns 1 to 3 are configured to loop, the operation of the stopper C12-8 may be stopped at the timing when one of the patterns ends (completes).

Here, if the value of the game ball ejection waiting counter is 0, it is determined that there are no remaining balls in the first big winning hole C10, and the ejection standby state is ended, and the stopper C12-8 is kept in the repeating state. It is configured to release the state of holding at (the state of looping the action of repeating the vertical movement). When canceling the state of holding the repeated state (the state of looping the action of repeating the vertical movement), the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0 and there are no remaining balls inside the first big winning hole C10. At the determined timing, if execution of all operations of the stopper repeat operation pattern has not been completed, the stopper C12-8 is configured to continue to operate until execution of all operations of the stopper repeat operation pattern is completed. there is That is, after the timing at which all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are discharged, based on the already set stopper repeat operation pattern, the output to the motor is continued, and the stopper C12-8 stops repeatedly. All operations of the operation pattern {3.7 seconds (upper position) → 3.7 seconds (lower position) → 5.4 seconds (upper position) → 4.3 seconds (lower position) → 1.7 seconds (upper position )→2.5 seconds (lower position)} is completed, the motor is driven and controlled based on the stopper repeat operation pattern. The operation of the stopper C12-8 is terminated by detecting that all operations of the stopper repeat operation pattern have been completed.

When the stopper C12-8 is operated using a solenoid instead of a motor, the excitation of the solenoid is turned off at the timing when all the operations of the stopper repeat operation pattern are completed, and the solenoid spring (biasing member) biases the stopper C12-8. The stopper C12-8 is configured to return to the upper position, which is the initial position, by being pushed. When the stopper C12-8 returns to the upper position, which is the initial position, the operation of the stopper C12-8 is completed.

If the stopper C12-8 has not completed all the operations of the stopper repeat operation pattern, the stopper end operation pattern for one cycle of the stopper C12-8 is set, the motor is driven, and the stopper for one cycle is set. The setting of the end operation pattern may be canceled to end the operation of the stopper C12-8. In such a configuration, it is determined whether the initial setting of the end operation of the stopper C12-8 has been completed. That is, it is determined whether or not the stopper termination operation pattern of the stopper C12-8 and the timer value used for the stopper termination operation are set in the control timer as the initial setting for the stopper C12-8 to perform the termination operation. Then, if the initial setting of the ending operation has not been completed, the stopper ending operation pattern is set. Next, a timer value for normal stopper operation is set in the control timer.

Next, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the control timer is zero. As a result of determining whether the termination operation has been initialized, even if the termination operation has been initialized, the process proceeds to the process of determining whether the timer value of the control timer is 0 or not. When the timer value of the control timer is not 0, the stopper C12-8 is operated based on the timer value stored in the storage area of the control timer and the data of the set stopper end operation pattern. there is

Next, a process of subtracting the timer value in the storage area of the control timer (for example, subtracting from "FFFF" to "FFFE") is executed. Even if the timer value of the control timer is 0, the process of subtracting the timer value of the storage area of the control timer is executed.

When the stopper C12-8 maintains the repeated state even after all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0, the next small winning game is started. At that time, the operation of the stopper C12-8 does not become the same as the operation of the previous small winning game, and the probability of entering a ball in the specific area is different from that of the previous small winning game, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that it brings.

149 and 153, the game machine described in FIGS. 149 and 153 sets a stopper normal operation pattern triggered by the opening of the first big winning opening C10 based on the winning of the small hit, and sets the stopper normal operation pattern. (stopper normal operation control process). Then, a repetitive state (for example, reciprocating state, loop state) in which the pattern of moving the stopper C12-8 from the initial position to the movable position is repeatedly executed based on the setting of the stopper repeat operation pattern (or the stopper normal operation pattern). The game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 different from the opening of the first big winning hole C10 are all discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter is 0 (end trigger operation). It is configured such that the repeated state is canceled as a trigger. After the repetition state is canceled, the stopper C12-8 is configured to move to the initial position. If the stopper C12-8 is not located at the initial position when the repeated state is canceled, the set stopper repeated operation pattern (or the stopper normal operation pattern may be used) is canceled, thereby stopping the stopper C12-8. to the initial position (stopper end operation control process).

With this configuration, the stopper C12-8 operates in the next small winning game after all the game balls inside the first big winning hole C10 are discharged and the value of the game ball discharge waiting counter becomes 0. can be executed appropriately, it is possible to reduce the possibility of causing a disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing operation timings of the big winning opening and the internal movable body. Specifically, the first big prize opening C10, the storage portion C12-5, the direct V shutter C12-1-1, the interference member C12-6, the rotary drum C12-7, the stopper C12-8, and the shutter It is a diagram showing operation timing with C-12-3-1.

The first big winning hole C10 is configured to start opening the lid of the first big winning hole C10 to enter an easy winning state after the small winning start demonstration of the small winning game ends. The opening pattern of the lid of the first big prize winning port C10 is to repeat the operation of opening for 0.5 seconds and closing for 0.5 seconds three times, then opening for 0.5 seconds (4th opening) and 7.5 seconds. The operation of closing, opening for 0.5 seconds, closing for 0.5 seconds is repeated 3 times, and then opening for 0.5 seconds (opening for the 8th time), finally entering the first big prize winning opening C10. It is configured to be closed until all played game balls are discharged. In addition, as another opening pattern of the first big prize opening C10, "0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds Close → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 3.1 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0.048 seconds open→0.648 seconds closed→0. 048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → 0.648 seconds closed → 0.048 seconds open → closed (Finally, all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are discharged. closed until)". Further, as another opening pattern of the first big prize winning opening C10, an operation of opening for 0.08 seconds and closing for 0.920 seconds may be repeated 14 times.

The rotating body C17 is configured to start rotating by a motor (driving source) based on power-on of the pachinko game machine and always rotate at a constant speed. The rotation may be started based on the start timing of the game start demonstration and the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of the first big prize winning opening C10.

The storage section C12-5 is configured to catch (hold) the first game ball entered into the first big winning hole C10 and prevent other game balls from flowing down in the direction of the specific area. That is, when one game ball is held in the storage portion C12-5, the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 flows down to the general area route and flows into the general area C12-3. is configured to The storage section C12-5 can be controlled by a solenoid (driving source) between a hold state (catch state) and a discharge state (release state), and the opening start timing (first The storage section C12-5 is configured to be in a holding state in accordance with the opening timing of the opening), and the small winning operation (storage section operation control processing) is started, and the lid of the first big winning opening C10 After 18 seconds (regulation time) from the opening start timing, the storage section C12-5 is configured to be in a discharge state, and the stored game balls are discharged toward the direct V route and the V challenge route. It is configured. Here, the timing after 18 seconds (specified time) from the opening start timing of the lid of the first big winning hole C10 is after the timing when the last opening in the opening pattern of the first big winning hole ends. The storage section C12-5 is configured so as not to be in the discharge state when the first big prize opening C10 is open. Then, when the discharge waiting timer is 0, or when all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are discharged, the storage section operation control process, which is the small winning operation of the storage section C12-5, is performed. configured to terminate. Here, the discharge waiting timer is a timer that sets a value that is set to 240 seconds at the timing when the lid of the first big winning hole C10 is opened, and if the discharge waiting timer is 0, the discharge waiting time has elapsed. It is configured to determine Note that the discharge waiting timer may be of any type as long as it can manage a time such as 240 seconds.

The game balls held by the storage part C12-5 are discharged toward the direct V route and the V challenge route in the discharge standby state in the small winning game state after the closing of the first big winning hole C10. is configured to

The direct V shutter C12-1-1 is configured to be able to shift between a position (easy ball entry state) and a position where it is not allowed (non-ball entry easy state). A small hit operation (direct V shutter operation control process) that makes it easy to enter is started in accordance with the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of the big winning opening C10.

When the small winning symbols are the main game symbols of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5 and the 2_10R symbols 3 to 7, when the small winning is won, that is, when the small winning for executing the V challenge effect is won, the direct V shutter C12 -1-1, the direct V shutter C12-1-1 is operated so that the ball is in an easy-to-enter state for 100ms in line with the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of the first big prize winning opening C10. It is configured to control the solenoid to start the operation at the time of a small hit, and to control the solenoid so as to enter the non-entering easy state after 100 ms. Then, when the ejection waiting timer is 0, or when all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are ejected, the direct V shutter which is the small hit operation of the direct V shutter C12-1-1 The operation control process is configured to end.

On the other hand, the small winning pattern is 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_3R pattern When a small win is won in the mode of the F group, which is the main game pattern of No. 1, that is, when a small win for executing a direct V effect is won, the direct V shutter C12-1-1 is set to the first big winning hole. For 100 ms according to the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of C10, control the solenoid that operates the direct V shutter C12-1-1 so that it becomes easy to enter the ball, and operate at the time of a small hit. After 100 ms has passed, the solenoid is controlled so that the ball is not easily entered. Then, at the timing when it is detected that the first game ball has entered the first big winning hole C10 in the non-ball easy state (ball ball timing of the first count), the direct V shutter is set to the ball easy state. Control the solenoid. After 30 seconds have passed in the easy-ball-entering state, the solenoid is controlled so that the state is changed to the non-easy-ball-entering state. Then, when the ejection waiting timer is 0, or when all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are ejected, the direct V shutter which is the small hit operation of the direct V shutter C12-1-1 The operation control process is configured to end.

The timing of opening the direct V shutter C12-1-1 for 30 seconds is the timing of detecting that the first game ball has entered the first big winning hole C10 (ball entry timing of the first count). However, the timing later than the timing at which the shutter C12-3-1 starts operating in the V challenge operation of the 1/5 to 5/5 pattern (for example, the sixth game ball enters the first big winning opening C10 The timing at which the ball is detected), the timing at which the lid of the first big winning port C10 is finally opened, and the timing before the last opening of the lid of the first big winning port C10 is completed. If the timing is later than the timing at which the shutter C12-3-1 starts operating in the 1/5 to 5/5 pattern of the V-challenge motion, the V-challenge effect with a low probability of entering the specific area is executed, Since a direct V effect with a high probability of entering a ball into a specific area is executed, the player can be once discouraged and then stimulated, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. The same effect can be obtained when the timing at which the lid of the first big prize winning port C10 is finally opened and the timing before the timing at which the lid of the first big prize prize port C10 is finally opened is set to a predetermined time. The shutter C12-3-1 is set to the 5/5 pattern by the timing when the last opening of the lid of the big winning opening C10 ends and the timing before the predetermined time when the last opening of the lid of the first big winning opening C10 ends. It is preferable to configure so as to be in the form of a V-challenge.

Here, the small winning patterns are 2_10R pattern 1, 2_10R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_3R When a small win is won in the main game pattern of pattern 1, the storage part C12-5 is configured to be discharged after 18 seconds (regulation time) have elapsed from the opening timing of the lid of the first big prize winning port C10. In other words, since the direct V shutter is configured to be in the easy-ball-entering state at the timing when the storage section C12-5 is in the discharged state, if the game ball is stored in the storage section C12-5, It is configured so that (approximately) 100% of the ball enters the specific area C12-1.

On the other hand, if the small winning pattern is the main game pattern of 1_4R patterns 1 to 5 and 2_10R patterns 3 to 7, and the small winning pattern is won, 18 seconds (regulation Since the reservoir C12-5 is configured to be in the discharged state after the time elapses, that is, the direct V shutter is in the ball non-entry easy state at the timing when the reservoir C12-5 is in the discharged state. Since it is configured, even if a game ball is stored in the storage section C12-5, it is configured so as not to enter the specific area C12-1. A game ball that does not enter the specific area C12-1 flows down the direct V route, and then flows down the V challenge route downstream of the direct V route.

The interference member C12-6 is a member that flips the game ball so that the game ball that did not enter the specific area C12-1 flows downstream of the V challenge route. The interference member C12-6 rotates a rotating body (eccentric cam or the like) disposed inside the interference member C12-6 by a motor (driving source), and the rotating body is biased toward the initial position (rear position). The interference member C12-6 is configured to move back and forth irregularly between the initial position (rear position) and the movable position (front position) by colliding with the interference member C12-6. The motor (driving source) of the interference member C12-6 is driven in accordance with the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of the first big winning port C10, and the small hit operation (interference member normal operation control process) is performed. It is supposed to start. When the game ball collides with the interfering member C12-6 moving back and forth, the game ball is repelled and the game ball flows downstream of the V-challenge route. In addition, the driving pattern of the motor is constant, and when the ejection waiting timer is 0, or when all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are ejected, the small hit of the interference member C12-6 Interference member normal operation control processing, which is an operation, is configured to end. At the timing when the discharge waiting timer becomes 0, or at the timing when all the game balls entering the first big winning hole C10 are discharged, if the interference member C12-6 is not located at the initial position, the interference member C12 -6 is moved to the initial position and returned (return processing). In addition, an initial position sensor is provided at the initial position. By detecting the initial position with the position sensor, the return process is terminated.

The rotating drum C12-7 attracts the game ball, which is caused to flow downstream of the V challenge route by the interference member C12-6, toward the direction of the stopper C12-8 with an internal magnet and guides the game ball downstream of the V challenge route. Although it is a member that attracts the game ball with a magnet and guides it to the downstream of the V challenge route, instead of the rotating drum C12-7, a belt-shaped guide member formed with a groove or a holding plate may be used. When a belt-shaped guide member having grooves or holding plates is used, it is effective for game balls that are not attracted by magnets used in closed-type game machines. The rotating drum C12-7 is configured to be rotated by a motor (driving source), and the motor (driving source) is activated in accordance with the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of the first big prize winning opening C10. It is designed to drive and start the small hit time operation (rotating drum normal operation control process). In addition, the driving pattern of the motor is constant, and when the ejection waiting timer is 0, or when all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are ejected, when the rotary drum C12-7 hits a small hit It is configured such that the rotating drum normal operation control process, which is an operation, ends. At the timing when the discharge waiting timer becomes 0, or at the timing when all the game balls entering the first big winning hole C10 are discharged, if the rotating drum C12-7 is not positioned at the initial position, the rotating drum C12 -7 is moved to the initial position and returned (return processing). In addition, an initial position sensor is provided at the initial position. By detecting the initial position with the position sensor, the return process is terminated.

The stopper C12-8 is a member for temporarily stopping the game ball guided by the rotating drum C12-7 from flowing down in the direction of the rotating body C17. The stopper C12-8 is configured to move vertically between an initial position (upper position) and a movable position (lower position) by a motor (driving source). At the initial position (upper position), the falling game ball stops by colliding with the stopper C12-8, and at the movable position (lower position), the game ball stopped by the stopper C12-8 rolls. , and flow down to the rotating body C17. The stopper C12-8 is driven by a motor (driving source) in accordance with the opening start timing (first opening timing) of the lid of the first big prize winning opening C10, and starts the small hit operation (stopper normal operation control process). It is designed to For 3.7 seconds from the opening start timing of the lid of the first big prize winning opening C10, the motor is driven to the initial position (upper position), and after 3.7 seconds the motor is driven to the movable position ( lower position). After 3.7 seconds have passed at the movable position (lower position), the motor is driven to move to the initial position (upper position). After 5.4 seconds have passed at the initial position (upper position), the motor is driven to move to the movable position (lower position). After 4.3 seconds have passed at the movable position (lower position), the motor is driven to move to the initial position (upper position). After 1.7 seconds have passed at the initial position (upper position), the motor is driven to move to the movable position (lower position). After 2.5 seconds have passed at the movable position (lower position), the motor is driven to move to the initial position (upper position). One cycle of the stopper is 3.7 seconds (initial position)→3.7 seconds (movable position)→5.4 seconds (initial position)→4.3 seconds (movable position)→1.7 seconds (initial position) → 21.3 seconds of 2.5 seconds (movable position).

When the discharge waiting timer is 0, or when all the game balls entering the first big winning hole C10 are discharged, the stopper normal operation control process, which is the small hit operation of the stopper C12-8, is completed. is configured to If the stopper C12-8 is not positioned at the initial position at the timing when the ejection waiting timer becomes 0 or at the timing when all the game balls entering the first big winning hole C10 are ejected, the stopper C12-8 to the initial position and return (return processing). In addition, at the initial position, after the timing when the ejection waiting timer becomes 0 or the timing when all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are ejected, one cycle of the stopper repeat operation pattern ends. By doing so, it is configured to return to the initial position. Also, at the timing when the discharge waiting timer becomes 0, or at the timing when all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole C10 are discharged, if the stopper normal operation control process for one cycle has not been completed , the operation pattern executed in the stopper normal operation control process for one cycle is executed as the stopper end operation control process.

Next, operation timing of the shutter C12-3-1 will be described. First, the shutter C12-3-1 is configured to operate using an open/close motor for opening and closing the shutter C12-3-1, which is different from the motor for rotationally driving the rotor C17. Further, as a mechanism for opening and closing the shutter C12-3-1, there is provided a connecting shaft that passes through the rotating shaft of the rotating body C17. , and the shutter C12-3-1 is configured to open and close independently of the rotation of the rotating body C17 driven by the motor. At the end opposite to the end where the rack, which is the driving mechanism of the connecting shaft, is provided, actuating ribs of different lengths are formed so as to sequentially close (open) the shutters. When the connecting shaft moves upward (downward), the operating rib of the connecting shaft acts on one end of the rotary shaft of the shutter to close (open) the shutter. The connecting shaft rotates integrally with the rotating body C17 in conjunction with the rotation of the motor for rotating the rotating body C17, while the rack and pinion move the connecting shaft up and down while holding the connecting shaft rotatably. Connected as possible.

The shutter C12-3-1 changes from the general area C12-3-1→general area C12-3-2→general area C12-3-3→general area C12-3- according to the amount of rotation of the open/close motor in the CW direction. 4, and by closing the general area with the shutter C12-3-1, the ball-entering probability of the specific area is changed. Further, the shutter C12-3-1 changes from the general area C12-3-4→general area C12-3-3→general area C12-3-2→general area C12- according to the amount of rotation of the open/close motor in the CCW direction. It is configured such that the general area is not blocked in the order of 3-1.

When a 1/5 image object is displayed (when a 1/5 pattern V challenge operation is set as the shutter normal operation pattern), one general area out of four general areas of the body of rotation C17 C12-3-1 is blocked and the general area is changed to 3 (the probability of entering the specific area is 2/5), so that the general area returns to 4 is configured to

When the V challenge operation of the 1/5 pattern is executed, the mode of the small winning pattern is during the small winning game when the small winning in the small winning symbols of the 1st_4R symbol 1 and the 2nd_10R symbol 3 of the A group is won. is configured to run on During the small winning game, the 1/5 image is disguised to display the 2/5 image object on the effect display device SG at the timing when the entry of the game ball of the 5th count into the first big winning hole C10 is detected. configured to display objects. In addition, in accordance with the timing when the 2/5 image object is displayed, that is, at the timing when the entry of the game ball into the first big winning opening C10 at the fifth count is detected, the open/close motor is rotated in the CW direction, One shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 is operated from the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked) to the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked), and one Control to close the general area C12-3-1 with the shutter (control to move the shutter to the movable position), and rotate the open/close motor in the CCW direction in accordance with the timing of the display to return to the 1/5 image object, One shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 is operated from the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked) to the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked), and the shutter is closed. Control (control to operate the shutter to the initial position) is performed so that the one general area C12-3-1 that has been removed is returned to the state in which it is not closed by the shutter (0 closed).

The rotating body C17 stays in one specific area C12-2 for a period until all the game balls that entered the first big winning hole are discharged, or for a period of 240 seconds after the first big winning hole is opened. , and four general areas C12-3-1 to C12-3-4. Shutter end operation based on the fact that all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole have been discharged (complete ball discharge), or that a period of 240 seconds has elapsed since the first big prize hole was opened. The 1/5 end pattern is set as the pattern, the opening/closing motor is rotated in the CW direction, and the four general areas C12-3-1 to C12-3-4 are controlled to block the shutters, and then the opening/closing motor is rotated in the CCW direction. are controlled so that the four general areas C12-3-1 to C12-3-4 blocked by the shutter are returned to the state (state of the initial position) where they are not blocked by the shutter.

When a 2/5 image object is displayed (when a 2/5 pattern V challenge operation is set as the shutter normal operation pattern), four general areas C12-3-1 to 4, one general area C12-3-1 is closed by the shutter, and there are three general areas C12-3-2 to C12-3-4 (the probability of entering a specific area is 2/ 5).

When the 2/5 pattern V challenge operation is executed, the mode of the small winning pattern is during the small winning game when the small winning in the small winning symbols of the 1_4R symbol 2 and the 2_10R symbol 4 of the B group is won. is configured to run on During the small winning game, at the timing when the fourth count game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is detected, a 2/5 image object (1/5 ⇒ 2/5 rank up) is displayed on the effect display device SG. may be displayed as In addition, in accordance with the timing when the 2/5 image object is displayed, that is, at the timing when the entry of the game ball into the first big winning opening C10 at the fourth count is detected, the open/close motor is rotated in the CW direction, One shutter C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 is operated from the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked) to the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked), and one Control is performed so that the general area C12-3-1 is closed with the shutter.

The rotating body C17 stays in one specific area C12-2 for a period until all the game balls entering the first big winning opening are discharged, or for a period of 240 seconds after the opening of the first big winning opening. , a holding state (one shutter C12-3 is held at a movable position (a position that blocks a specific area)). Shutter end operation based on the fact that all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole have been discharged (complete ball discharge), or that a period of 240 seconds has elapsed since the first big prize hole was opened. The 2/5 end pattern is set as the pattern, and the open/close motor is rotated in the CW direction, and the three general areas C12-3-2, C12-3-3, and C12-3-4 are shuttered. After closing the four general areas C12-3-1 to C12-4 with the shutters, the opening/closing motor is rotated in the CCW direction to open the four general areas C12-3-4 closed by the shutters. 3-1 to 4 are controlled so as to return to the state where they are not closed by the shutter (the state of the initial position).

When a 3/5 image object is displayed (when a 3/5 pattern V challenge operation is set as the shutter normal operation pattern), four general areas C12-3-1 to 4, two general areas C12-3-1 and C12-3-2 are blocked by the shutters, and two general areas C12-3-3 and C12-3- 4 (a mode in which the ball-entering probability in the specific area is 3/5).

When the 3/5 pattern V challenge operation is executed, the mode of the small winning symbol is during the small winning game when the small winning with the small winning symbols of the 1_4R symbol 3 and the 2_10R symbol 5 of the C group is won. is configured to run on During the small winning game, at the timing when the third count game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is detected, a 3/5 image object (1/5 ⇒ 2/5 ⇒ 3/ 5) is displayed. In addition, at the timing when the 3/5 image object is displayed, that is, at the timing when the game ball entering the first big prize opening C10 for the third count is detected, the opening/closing motor is rotated in the CW direction, The two shutters C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1 and the general area C12-3-2 are sequentially moved from the initial position (the position where the specific area is not blocked) to the movable position (the specific area is blocked). position) to close the two general areas C12-3-1 and C12-3-2 with the shutter.

The rotating body C17 stays in one specific area C12-2 for a period until all the game balls entering the first big winning opening are discharged, or for a period of 240 seconds after the opening of the first big winning opening. , two general areas C12-3-3 and C12-3-4, and two general areas C12-3-1 and C12-3-2 closed by two shutters. (the state in which the two shutters C12-3 are held at the movable position (the position in which the specific area is closed)). Shutter end operation based on the fact that all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole have been discharged (complete ball discharge), or that a period of 240 seconds has elapsed since the first big prize hole was opened. The 3/5 end pattern is set as the pattern, and the open/close motor is rotated in the CW direction, and the two general areas, C12-3-3 and C12-3-4, are controlled to be closed with the shutter. Then, the four general areas C12-3-1 to C12-3-4 are closed by the shutters, and then the open/close motor is rotated in the CCW direction to open the four general areas C12-3-1 to C12-3-4 closed by the shutters. 4 is not closed by the shutter (initial position state in which the rotating body is composed of one specific area C12-2 and four general areas C12-3-1 to C12-3-4). control to return.

When a 4/5 image object is displayed (when a 4/5 pattern V challenge operation is set as the shutter normal operation pattern), four general areas C12-3-1 to 4, three general areas C12-3-1, general area C12-3-2, and general area C12-3-3 are blocked, and the general area is one general area C12-3-4. (a mode in which the probability of entering a ball in a specific area is 4/5).

When the 4/5 pattern V challenge operation is executed, the mode of the small winning pattern is during the small winning game when the small winning with the small winning symbols of the 1_4R symbol 4 and the 2_10R symbol 6 of the D group is won. is configured to run on During the small winning game, at the timing when the second count game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is detected, a 4/5 image object (1/5 ⇒ 2/5 ⇒ 3/ 5⇒4/5, which may be ranked up and displayed). In addition, in accordance with the timing when the 4/5 image object is displayed, that is, at the timing when the game ball entering the first big prize opening C10 for the second count is detected, the open/close motor is rotated in the CW direction, Move the three shutters C12-3 corresponding to the general area C12-3-1, general area C12-3-2, and general area C12-3-3 in order from the initial position (the position where the specific area is not blocked) The shutter is moved to the position (the position where the specific area is closed) and controlled to close the three general areas C12-3-1 to C12-3.

The rotating body C17 stays in one specific area C12-2 for a period until all the game balls entering the first big winning opening are discharged, or for a period of 240 seconds after the opening of the first big winning opening. , general area C12-3-4, which is one general area, and general area C12-3-1, general area C12-3-2, and general area C12-3-3 closed by three shutters. (the state in which the three shutters C12-3 are held at movable positions (positions in which the specific area is closed)). Shutter end operation based on the fact that all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole have been discharged (complete ball discharge), or that a period of 240 seconds has elapsed since the first big prize hole was opened. A 4/5 end pattern is set as the pattern, the opening/closing motor is rotated in the CW direction, and control is performed so that one general area C12-3-4 is closed with the shutter, thereby creating four general areas. C12-3-1 to C12-3-4 are closed by the shutter, and then the open/close motor is rotated in the CCW direction to open the four general areas C12-3-1 to C12-3-4 closed by the shutter. It is controlled to return to the non-existent state (initial position state).

When a 5/5 image object is displayed (when a 5/5 pattern V challenge operation is set as the shutter normal operation pattern), four general areas C12-3-1 to 4 are closed by shutters, and the general area is set to 0 (the specific area has a probability of entering a ball of 5/5).

When the V challenge operation of the 5/5 pattern is executed, the mode of the small winning pattern is during the small winning game when the small winning with the small winning symbols of the 1_4R symbol 5 and the 2_10R symbol 7 of the D group is won. is configured to run on In addition, the mode of the small winning pattern is the F group 2_3R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 1, 2_6R pattern 2, 2_7R pattern 1, 2_7R pattern 2, 2_8R pattern 1, 2_8R pattern 2, 2_10R pattern 1 , 2_10R symbol 2 is configured to be executed even during the small winning game when the small winning in the small winning symbol 2 is won. During the small winning game, at the timing when the first count game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is detected, the effect display device SG displays a 5/5 image object (1/5 ⇒ 2/5 ⇒ 3/ 5 ⇒ 4/5 ⇒ 5/5). In addition, in accordance with the timing when the 5/5 image object is displayed, that is, at the timing when the game ball entering the first big prize opening C10 for the first count is detected, the open/close motor is rotated in the CW direction, The four shutters C12-3 corresponding to the general areas C12-3-1 to C12-4 are operated in order from the initial position (the position in which the specific area is not blocked) to the movable position (the position in which the specific area is blocked). , four general areas C12-3-1 to C12-3-4 are closed with the shutters.

The rotating body C17 stays in one specific area C12-2 for a period until all the game balls entering the first big winning opening are discharged, or for a period of 240 seconds after the opening of the first big winning opening. and general areas C12-3-1 to C12-4 closed by four shutters (the four shutters C12-3 are movable positions (positions in which the specific area is closed)) state). Shutter end operation based on the fact that all the game balls that entered the first big prize hole have been discharged (complete ball discharge), or that a period of 240 seconds has elapsed since the first big prize hole was opened. A 5/5 end pattern is set as the pattern, and the open/close motor is rotated in the CW direction by the motor drive amount for driving one shutter. After that, the open/close motor is rotated in the CCW direction to control the four general areas C12-3-1 to C12-3-4 to return to the state (initial position state) where they are not closed by the shutter.

It should be noted that in step 1600-1-3 during the normal game of the big winning mouth control process in FIG. 140, when the game ball passes through the specific area C12-1 and the specific area C12-2, this passage is regarded as an invalid entry ball. However, when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, or when the RAM clear button is operated to switch to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, it indicates that the RAM clear process is being executed when the settings are changed. When the motor initial operation determination flag is on and the value of the motor initial operation timer (240-second timer) in the motor control process of FIG. When a game ball passes through, this passage is configured to be an invalid entry ball.

In a pachinko game machine (a game machine with a small win V) that develops into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a general small win game, a predetermined period from the end of the small win game as the discharge waiting state period. (time of about several seconds) is set, and the structure of the big winning hole is such that the game balls that enter during this period are discharged. is provided, and a structure that has a very long period until the game ball flows down to the specific area C12-2 and is discharged to the outside Therefore, when executing the V challenge operation, the game ball that entered the first big winning hole C10 is not discharged for a long time, so the discharge standby state period is exceeded and the discharge error There is a problem that it becomes In addition, when power is cut off in the discharge standby state, RAM clear processing is performed when the power is restored, and if there are remaining balls in the big winning opening C10, the remaining balls will be a big hit when the next small winning game occurs. There is a possibility that the lottery related to execution will be affected.

Therefore, in a pachinko gaming machine that can give a big hit game after the end of the small win game when a game ball enters a specific area in a small win game (in the case of a game machine with a small win V), the first big In the process until the game ball entering the winning opening C10 flows down to the specific area C12-2, the interference member C12-6, the rotating drum C12-7, the stopper C12-8, etc. that affect the flow of the game ball It is configured to provide one or a plurality of movable bodies. Then, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the motor control processing as the initialization operation of the movable body is executed for 240 seconds, the remaining balls are discharged, and at least the initialization operation period is 240 seconds. When the game ball enters the specific area C12-2 before the second elapses, the jackpot game is not awarded and the error is not controlled as an abnormal ball entry.

By configuring in this way, when the RAM is cleared in a state where there are remaining balls in the flow path up to the specific area C12-2, and if a small hit is won after that, the remaining balls are placed in the specific area C12-2. There is a possibility that the ball will enter, but even if the ball enters the specific area C12-2, the process of invalidating the ball entering the specific area is executed so as not to generate an unnecessary jackpot game. can be configured to In addition, by setting a relatively long period of 240 seconds as the execution period of the initialization operation, it is possible to execute the initialization operation of ejecting the remaining balls to the outside when the RAM is cleared, compared to the conventional game machine.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine (V probability variable game machine) that can give a high probability state after a big hit game by entering a game ball in a specific area in a V round game during a big hit game, the discharge standby state As the period, a predetermined period (about several seconds) is set after the end of the V-round game, and the structure of the big winning opening is such that the game balls entered during this period are discharged. , a structure in which a plurality of movable bodies are provided inside the large winning opening, and a game ball flows down to the specific area C12-2 and has a very long period of time until it is discharged outside (especially due to interference of the game ball by the interference member It takes a long time to flow downstream), so when the V challenge operation is executed, the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 is not discharged for a long time. , there is a problem that an ejection error occurs when the period of the ejection standby state is exceeded. In addition, when power is cut off in the discharge standby state, RAM clear processing is performed when recovery is performed, and if there are remaining balls in the big winning opening C10, the remaining balls will be in the specific area during the execution of the next big win game. There is a risk that the ball will enter C12-2 and be given a high probability state.

When applied to such a gaming machine, when a game ball enters a specific area in a V round game (in the case of a V probability variable gaming machine), after the V round gaming machine and after the end of the big hit game In a pachinko game machine capable of imparting a high probability state, an interference member that affects the flow of the game ball in the process until the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 flows down to the specific area C12-2. One or a plurality of movable bodies such as C12-6, rotary drum C12-7, and stopper C12-8 are provided. Then, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the motor control processing is executed as the initialization operation of the movable body for 240 seconds, the remaining balls are discharged, and at least the initialization operation is in progress 240 When the game ball enters the specific area C12-2 before the second elapses, the high probability state is not given and the error state is not controlled.

By configuring in this way, when the RAM is cleared in a state where there are remaining balls in the passage up to the specific area C12-2, and a big hit is won, the remaining balls enter the specific area C12-2. However, even if the ball enters the specific area C12-2, the process of invalidating the ball entering the specific area is executed so that unnecessary high-probability games do not occur. can do. In addition, by setting a relatively long period of 240 seconds as the execution period of the initialization operation, it is possible to execute the initialization operation of ejecting the remaining balls to the outside when the RAM is cleared, compared to conventional game machines.

While normal RAM clearing or RAM clearing based on setting change is being executed, the game is stopped state B, and the movable body (storage part, direct V shutter, interference member, rotating drum, stopper, rotating body) in the first big winning opening C10 , shutter). In the game stop state B, processing is different from that in the game stop state A such as a game stop error. It is In the game stop state A, timer subtraction is not performed. In the game stop state B, timer subtraction for initialization operation is configured to be executed within the motor control process. When the RAM is cleared, the movable bodies (interference members, rotating drums, stoppers, rotating bodies) that are repeatedly controlled are configured to reset the time value of the motor operation pattern and operate from the beginning. It is During the initialization operation of the movable body when the RAM clear is executed, the initialization of the movable body (storage section, direct V shutter, interference member, rotating drum, stopper, rotating body, shutter) in the first large winning opening C10 Except for the initialization operation, the game is the same as the game stop state A, and even if the remaining ball enters the specific area C12-2 during the initialization operation of the movable body, the entry into the specific area is invalidated. It is configured to execute a process that In addition, the shutter C12-3-1, which operates according to the number of balls entering the first big winning hole C10 and the timing of the ball entering, may set an initialization pattern, which is a dedicated operation pattern, during the initialization operation. By doing so, the initialization operation can be executed without being based on an abnormal entry of the ball into the first big winning hole C10.

In this example, since the initialization operation is executed when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the game is stopped for 240 seconds immediately after the RAM clearing process or after the setting change etc. is completed. Although the state B occurs, in the game stop state B, when a predetermined operation is performed, such as the operation of the RAM clear button or the handle touch operation in the open state of the front frame, the game stop state B may be configured to be releasable. Incidentally, when it is confirmed that there are no remaining balls in the big winning hole, it is preferable to cancel the game stop state B before 240 seconds elapse in this manner. By configuring in this way, if the game is possible, the game can be immediately brought into the game-ready state without waiting for the elapse of 240 seconds.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the first embodiment (this embodiment), the movable body is actuated based on the count number of game balls entering the first big winning hole C10 during the small winning game. The configuration is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration related to a movable body different from that of the first embodiment will be described in detail below as a fourth embodiment. Moreover, the above-described embodiments should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be any combination. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described.

In addition, since the fourth embodiment is a small winning V gaming machine similar to the first embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in detail below.

<Action diagram related to small hit game>
First, FIG. 155 is a working diagram according to the small hit game in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, a case is illustrated in which a certain small winning symbol on the first main game side is won in a non-time shortening game state, and a small winning is executed. It should be noted that the drawing is only an example, and may be applied to a small win won in the time-reduced game state, or may be applied to a small win on the side of the second main game.

A certain small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time reduction game state, and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the small winning game is started and the small winning start demonstration time is started. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the period from the start of the small winning start demonstration time to the end of the small winning start demonstration time is called a small winning game.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, it is an effect that encourages the entry of the game ball into the specific area C12-2, which is executed by the effect display device SG during the small winning game. The V effect is configured to transition in the order of simulated ready-to-win effect → launch promotion effect → result notification effect, and the simulated ready-to-win effect is started at the timing of (1) in the figure. Details of the effect will be described later.

After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the small winning start demonstration time ends, and the first big winning opening C10 is briefly opened. The time value required for the short opening is a relatively short time value in which it becomes difficult (or impossible) for a game ball to enter the first big winning hole C10. Also, at the timing (2) in the figure, the shutter status changes from non-operating to operating. The shutter status is a general term for the direct V shutter C12-1-1, V shutter C12-2-1, and shutter C12-3-1, and is a status related to the operation status of the movable body. In some cases, if the mover is actuated and the shutter status is inactive, then the mover is not actuated. Although the movable body starts to operate at the timing (2) in the drawing, the timing for driving the movable body has not yet come, so the movable body is at the initial position. It should be noted that the fact that the shutter status changes from non-operating to operating is sometimes referred to as starting the operation of the movable body. As a modified example, the short opening may not be executed, and the first big winning opening C10 may remain closed until a specific opening, which will be described later, is started.

In addition, the small hit start demonstration time may be referred to as a start demonstration period. Also, the period during which the first big winning opening C10 can be opened after the small winning start demonstration time in the small winning game is over may be referred to as a unit game execution period. It should be noted that the unit game execution period is a period until the small winning end demonstration time starts.

In this example, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the shutter status changes from non-operating to operating, and the first prize winning opening C10 is opened. becomes active from non-operating, the first large prize winning opening C10 remains closed, and after a predetermined time such as 500 ms elapses after the shutter status changes from non-operating to operating, the first The large winning opening C10 may be configured to be open (for example, short opening as described above). By configuring in this way, the player can make it difficult to perceive the end timing of the small winning start demonstration time by visually recognizing the opening and closing of the first big winning opening C10.

Note that the non-operating shutter status may be referred to as the non-operating state of the movable body, and the operating shutter status may be referred to as the operating state of the movable body.

Next, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the first big winning opening C10 starts specific opening. Here, the specific opening means that the first big winning hole C10 is opened one or more times in an opening mode in which the ball is easily entered when the game ball is continuously shot toward the first big winning hole C10. For example, it is to open and close like "open for 800 ms→close for 500 ms→open for 800 ms→close". In addition, the time from the end of the small winning start demonstration time to the start of the specific opening of the first big winning opening C10 may be referred to as a long opening waiting time. Although the details will be described later, the long open waiting time is configured to be different depending on the small winning symbol that triggered the execution of the small winning game. For specific opening, for example, "300 ms open→500 ms closed→300 ms open→500 ms closed→300 ms open→500 ms closed→300 ms open→closed" or "300 ms open→700 ms closed→300 ms open→ 600 ms closed→300 ms open→400 ms closed→300 ms open→closed.

In addition, in the same figure, during the long waiting time for opening, the short opening of the first big prize opening C10 is configured to be executed once, but it is not limited to this, and the short opening is performed multiple times during the long waiting time for opening. It may be configured to perform opening. For example, during the long open standby time, five seconds before four movable bodies (shutters C12-3-1 to C12-3-4) described later are driven in the situation before the specific opening is performed. (It may be configured to perform one short release 5 seconds before each movable body is driven, ie up to four times).

Also, at the timing of (3) in the figure, as the V effect, the simulated ready-to-win effect ends, and the launch promotion effect is started.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, although not shown, it has a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration of the game machine, and when the vibration sensor detects an illegal vibration of the game machine, a vibration error is detected. is configured to determine that is occurring. Determining that a vibration error has occurred is sometimes referred to as occurrence of a vibration error. Conditions under which it can be determined that a vibration error has occurred include cases where the vibration sensor detects vibration greater than a threshold value, and where the vibration sensor is disconnected or short-circuited.

The fourth embodiment has a vibration error non-detection period and a vibration error detection period. While it is not determined that an error has occurred, it is configured to be able to determine that a vibration error has occurred when the conditions for determining that the vibration error has occurred are satisfied during the vibration error detection period. It is As shown in the figure, in the fourth embodiment, the vibration error detection period is configured to start at the timing (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the first big prize winning opening C10 starts the specific opening. there is In addition, although not shown, in a situation where a vibration error occurs, an error notification is configured to be executed. The effect lamp D26 is configured to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the vibration error, output a sound corresponding to the vibration error from the speaker D24, and the like.

The start timing of the vibration error detection period is not limited to the timing shown in the same figure, and the vibration error detection period starts from a predetermined timing before the specific opening of the first big prize winning opening C10 in (3) in the figure. may be configured to start. Further, when the vibration error detection period is configured to start at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, the timing of the specific opening of the first big winning opening C10 (long opening standby time from the end of the small winning end demonstration time to the specific opening) is configured to vary depending on the small winning pattern. Therefore, the predetermined timing (the time from the start of the small winning game to the predetermined timing) relating to the vibration error is also configured to differ depending on the stopped small winning pattern (the small winning game being executed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the start timing of the vibration error detection period according to the small winning symbol that triggered the small winning game.

It should be noted that the vibration error in this example is a vibration error that can occur when vibration is detected during a small hit game and before the game ball enters the specific area C12-2. It may have a vibration error that can occur when detecting a vibration error or a vibration error that can occur when detecting a vibration that occurs during normal play, and conditions that can be determined that a vibration error has occurred (for example, The number of vibration detections, the length of time the vibration is detected, different vibration sensors, etc.) may be different. Thus, since the number of vibration errors is not limited to one, vibration errors that can occur when vibration is detected during the small hit game in this example and before the gaming ball enters the specific area C12-2 are eliminated. Sometimes referred to as a predetermined vibration error.

Next, at the timing of (4) in the drawing, the movable body (shutter C12-3-1) is driven to block the general area (for example, general area C12-3-1). As described above, in this example, as the general area C12-3, there are four general areas C12-3-1, C12-3-2, C12-3-3, and C12-3-4. At the timing of (4) in the drawing, for example, the general area C12-3-1 is blocked by the movable body.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the same first big prize winning opening C10 as in the above-described embodiment is provided, and the operation mode of the movable body is different from that in the above-described embodiment. Specifically, the movable body according to the fourth embodiment starts operating at the timing when the small winning start demonstration time ends during the execution of the small winning game, and after that, the general area C12- The four movable bodies (shutters C12-3-1 to C12-3-4) are configured to be driven so as to close the shutters 3 in the order of "one→two→three→four".

Similar to the above-described embodiment, the rotating body C17 has a specific area C12-2 and four general areas C12-3 (five areas are provided in which game balls can win), and is movable. When the general area C12-3 is not blocked by the body, ⅕ of the game balls reaching the rotating body c17 enter the specific area C12-2. Further, when one general area C12-3 is blocked by the movable body, the game ball that reaches the rotating body enters the specific area C12-2 at 2/5, and the general area C12 is blocked by the movable body. When two -3 are blocked, the game ball that reaches the rotating body enters the specific area C12-2 at 3/5, and three general areas C12-3 are blocked by the movable body. , the game ball that reaches the rotating body enters the specific area C12-2 at 4/5, and when four general areas C12-3 are blocked by the movable body, the rotating body The game ball that has reached 5/5 enters the specific area C12-2. Note that the number of times the general area C12-3 is blocked by the movable body may be referred to as the shutter closing number.

In the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the more the general area C12-3 is blocked by the movable body, the higher the probability of the ball entering the specific area C12-2. Since the number of blocks in the general area C12-3 increases with the passage of time, the later the timing at which the game ball reaches the rotating body C17, the higher the probability of entering the specific area C12-2. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the long opening waiting time from the end of the small winning start demonstration time to the start of the specific opening of the first big winning C10 is stopped by configuring it so that it can be different depending on the stopped small winning symbol. The probability of entering the specific area C12-2 can be varied depending on the small winning pattern.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 155, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the specific opening of the first big prize winning opening C10 ends. In the small winning game being executed, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole C10 after the timing of (5) in the drawing.

Here, as shown in the figure, the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 during the specific opening from the timing (3) in the figure to the timing (5) in the figure is the first big winning hole. The design value (time value) is set so that the ball reaches the rotating body C17 when the number of shutter closures is 1 regardless of the timing of the ball entering C10. By configuring in this way, the ball entry probability to the specific area C12-2 when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 can be made constant by the small winning symbols. Also in other small winning games to be described later, when the game ball enters the period in which the first big winning hole C10 is in a specific opening, the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 regardless of the ball entering timing. The design value (time value) is set such that the number of times the shutter is closed (V ball-entering probability) is the same. In addition, the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 during the specific opening is designed to reach the rotor C17 within the range of 8 to 12 seconds (average 10 seconds). In addition, in an irregular situation such as when the game ball enters the first big winning hole C10 during the period when the first big winning hole C10 is specifically open, but the game ball stays in the first big winning hole C10 for some reason , but not limited to that.

Thus, in the same figure, when the game ball enters the first big winning hole C10 while the first big winning hole C10 is in the specific opening, the game ball enters the first big winning hole C10. Regarding a small winning game related to a certain small winning symbol on the first main game side configured with a design value (time value) such that the rotating body C17 is reached when the shutter closing number is 1 regardless of the ball timing. Although it is described in detail, in this example, when the small winning pattern that triggered the small winning game is different, the timing at which the first large winning opening C10 opens (after the small winning end demonstration time ends) Long waiting time until specific opening), the number of shutter closures when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17, etc. are configured to be different.

The game ball that entered the first big winning hole C10 reaches (near) the rotating body C17 is referred to as the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 flowing down toward the rotating body C17. There is a case that the game ball that entered the first big prize hole C10 reaches (near) the specific area C12-2, and the game ball that entered the first big prize hole C10 reaches the specific area C12-2 It is sometimes called flowing down toward

Incidentally, the shutter closing number when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 may simply be referred to as the shutter closing number, and may also be referred to as the substantial shutter closing number.

Also, at the timing of (5) in the figure, as the V effect, the firing promotion effect ends, and the result notification effect is started.

Next, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the movable body (shutter C12-3-2) is driven to close the general area (for example, general area C12-3-2), and the number of closed shutters becomes two. Next, at the timing of (7) in the figure, the movable body (shutter C12-3-3) is driven to close the general area (for example, general area C12-3-3), and the number of closed shutters becomes 3. Next, at the timing of (8) in the figure, the movable body (shutter C12-3-4) is driven to close the general area (for example, general area C12-3-4), and the number of closed shutters becomes 4.

It should be noted that the action after the timing of (8) in the figure (the timing of the movable body returning to the initial position after completion of its operation, etc.) is the same as in the third embodiment (see FIG. 154). Further, the end timing of the vibration error detection period may be the timing at which all the game balls have been discharged, the start timing of the small win end demonstration time, or the end timing of the small win end demonstration time. . Also, the end timing of the vibration error detection period may be referred to as specific timing.

Thus, in the fourth embodiment, when the small winning game is executed, the movable body in the first big winning opening C10 starts operating after the small winning start demonstration time ends, and the time elapses. It is configured such that the number of shutter closures increases as the number of shutters increases. From this, the later the timing of the specific opening at which the game ball can enter (easy to enter) the first big winning hole C10 during the small winning game (long opening waiting time after the end of the small winning game start demonstration time is longer), the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 increases.

By configuring in this way, without using the count number of game balls entering the first big winning hole C10, it is designed after entering the first big winning hole C10 at the time of specific opening according to the small winning pattern. The shutter closure number (also referred to as a substantial shutter closure number) when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 according to the value (time value) can be varied, and various shutter closure numbers can be varied. can perform the performance.

<Time value and effect to be executed during small winning game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, a detailed description will be given of the relationship between the time value relating to the small winning game and the effect to be executed in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, in the non-time shortening game state, only the case of winning the small hit on the first main game side is illustrated.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, as described above, there are a plurality of time values of the long open standby time, and the long open standby time is configured to be different depending on the small winning symbols to be stopped and displayed. Also, the small winning symbols that can be won in the fourth embodiment are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In addition, as described above, during the small winning start demonstration time and the long opening waiting time, the simulated ready-to-win effect is executed, and when the long opening waiting time elapses, the simulated ready-to-win effect ends and the launch promotion effect is executed. It will happen. As the simulated reach production, there are four simulated reach productions of penguin reach, sheep reach, lion reach, and giraffe reach. In this case, the average value of V ball entry probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is "Penguin Reach<Sheep Reach<Lion Reach<Giraffe Reach" in descending order. Penguin Reach, Sheep Reach, Lion Reach, and Giraffe Reach are respectively executed when a chance-up effect is executed (sometimes referred to as a chance-up effect) and when a chance-up effect is not executed (chance-up effect). When the same simulated reach effect is executed, the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is relatively higher with the chance up than without the chance up. getting higher. Here, if the reach title effect that is the introduction effect of the simulated reach effect (for example, if it is Lion Reach, the effect that the characters "Lion!" are displayed at the start of the effect) is white if there is no chance up, If there is a chance up, it is red or gold, that is, the red or gold reach title production is the chance up production. In addition, the number of animals appearing in the simulated reach production is one if there is no chance-up, and three or five animals if there is a chance-up. is. Note that the V ball entry probability may be referred to as the ball entry probability to the specific region C12-2. Further, the simulated ready-to-win production does not have to start at the start timing of the small winning start demonstration time, and may be configured to start at a predetermined timing after the start of the small winning starting demonstration time. Further, the simulated ready-to-win effect does not have to end at the end timing of the long waiting time for opening, and may end at a predetermined timing before the end of the long waiting time for opening. As described above, the simulated ready-to-win production can be executed over (spanning) the small winning start demonstration time and the long opening waiting time, and can be executed seamlessly from the small winning starting demonstration time to the long opening waiting time. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize when the small winning start demonstration time has ended.

Note that the chance-up effect may be called a special effect, the case without a chance-up may be called not executing the special effect, and the chance-up may be called executing a special effect.

It should be noted that the simulated ready-to-win effect, for example, is a effect including a effect mode such as a ready-to-win effect, with 7 symbols tense, and is different from the so-called ready-to-win effect that can be executed while the main game symbols are fluctuating. This is an effect that is executed over the small winning start demonstration time and the long opening standby time during the small winning game. As a modified example, when the main game symbols are stopped and displayed as small winning symbols, the performance display device SG performs a so-called ready-to-win effect, for example, 4 symbols are tenned, and characters such as "animal" are displayed in the medium symbols. is stopped, and then a small hit game starts, and an effect in which animals appear is executed (the decorative pattern is hidden at the start of the small hit game, or , while maintaining the stop display with a reduced combination of "4, animal, 4", a production that suggests the degree of expectation for V ball entry by the appearance of a sheep or a lion, which will be described later, is executed).

Here, as described above, since the rotating body C17 has one specific area and four general areas, when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17, when the number of shutter closures is 0 , the V-entering probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 1/5, and when the shutter closing number is 1 or more, the V-entering probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is "(1 + shutter closed number) / 5”, and as the shutter closure increases, the V-ball entry probability increases.

In the small winning game triggered by the 1st_4R pattern 1 of the symbol 1, the small winning start demonstration time is 50 seconds and the long open standby time is 10 seconds, and the small winning start demonstration time and the long open standby time are different. Over 60 seconds, as a simulated ready-to-win effect, no penguin reach chance increase is executed at a selection rate of 100%. Here, the selection ratio is the selection ratio of the simulated ready-to-win effect when one small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 2 of the symbol 2, the small winning start demonstration time is 40 seconds and the long open standby time is 20 seconds. As a simulated ready-to-win production for 60 seconds, penguin reach with chance up is executed at a selection rate of 50%, and sheep reach without chance up is executed at a selection rate of 50%.

Next, in the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 3 of the pattern 3, the small winning start demonstration time is 30 seconds and the long open standby time is 30 seconds. As the simulated ready-to-win production for 60 seconds, sheep reach with chance increase is executed at a selection rate of 50%, and lion reach without chance increase is executed at a selection rate of 50%.

Next, in the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 4 of the pattern 4, the small winning start demonstration time is 20 seconds and the long open standby time is 40 seconds. As a simulated ready-to-win production for 60 seconds, Lion reach with chance up is executed at a selection rate of 50%, and Kirin reach without chance up is executed at a selection rate of 50%.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 5 of the pattern 5, the small hit start demonstration time is 10 seconds and the long open standby time is 50 seconds. As a simulated ready-to-win production for 60 seconds, a giraffe ready-to-win chance up is executed at a selection rate of 100%.

Thus, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured so that the long open waiting time can be varied depending on the small winning symbol that triggered the execution of the small winning game. As described above, the longer the long open standby time is, the higher the probability of entering the specific area C12-2 is, so the 1_4R pattern 1 with a long open standby time of 10 seconds is triggered. In the small hit game, the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 1/5, and the long open waiting time is 20 seconds. In a small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 3 with a long open waiting time of 30 seconds, the V ball probability at the time of reaching the rotating body C17 is 3/5. In the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 4 with a long open standby time of 40 seconds, the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 4/5, and the long open standby time is 50 seconds. In the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 5, the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 5/5. The selection ratios of the 1_4R symbols 1 to 5 may be 60%, 25%, 10%, 4%, and 1%, respectively.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the execution time of the simulated ready-to-win effect in the same figure is all 60 seconds regardless of the small winning pattern that triggered the execution of the small winning game. In other words, as "1_4R pattern 1 → 1_4R pattern 2 → 1_4R pattern 3 → 1_4R pattern 4 → 1_4R pattern 5", the long open standby time becomes relatively long. , small winning start demonstration time is configured to be relatively short.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 more than the average value of the small winning starting demonstration time when the number of shutter closures when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 is N. The average value of the small win start demonstration time of the small win with M (M>N) shutter closed numbers is relatively short. In addition, the "average value" in the present specification, when there is only one type of value, is the average value of the one type of value. When there is only one winning start demonstration time of 5 seconds, the average value of the small winning starting demonstration time of the small winnings with N shutter closed numbers is 5 seconds. In addition, the average value may be the average value in the case of multiple trials, for example, if the average value in the case of 10 trials is taken as the average value, the number of shutter closures is N, and the start of the small win If there is only one type of demonstration time of 5 seconds, the total of the small win start demonstration time when the small win with the number of shutter closings of N is executed 10 times is divided by 10, which is the number of trials, 10 times×5 seconds/10=5 seconds” may be used as the average value. It should be noted that the terms "average value" and "average" in this specification can be interpreted in the same way.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 more than the average value of the small winning start demonstration time of the small winning having a V ball entry probability of N when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17. It is configured so that the average value of the small winning start demonstration time of the small winning having a V ball entry probability of M (M>N) is relatively short.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 more than the average value of the long open standby time of the small hit with the number of shutter closed when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17. It is configured so that the average value of the long open standby time of the small hits with M (M>N) shutter closed times is relatively short.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 more than the average value of the long open waiting time for the small hit with the V ball entry probability of N when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17. It is configured so that the average value of the long open standby time of the small hit with the V entry probability at the time of M (M>N) is relatively short.

Also, as shown in the figure, each simulated reach production is the same simulated reach production, compared with no chance up (a small winning game in which the simulated reach production without chance up is executed, the same applies hereinafter) , with a chance up (a small winning game in which a simulated ready-to-win effect with a chance up is executed, the same shall apply hereinafter) is configured so that the substantial number of shutter closures is one more. As a specific example, when there is no lion reach chance increase and when there is a lion reach chance increase, the latter is configured so that the actual number of shutter closures is increased by one. In addition, although there are some differences in the contents of the reach title production and the number of animals with and without the chance up, the meaning of the simulated reach production in which the lion appears is the same, so here it is treated as the same simulated reach production there is Further, when comparing the simulated reach performances without chance up, the simulated reach performance with one higher expectation is configured to increase the substantial number of shutter closures by one. As a specific example, it is configured such that the substantial number of shutter closures is one more when there is no chance increase for sheep reach than when there is no chance increase for penguin reach. Similarly, when comparing the simulated reach performances with chance up, the simulated reach performance with the degree of expectation higher by one is configured to substantially increase the number of closed shutters by one. As a specific example, it is configured such that the substantial number of shutter closures is one more when there is an increase in the chance of sheep reach than when there is an increase in chance of penguin reach. It should be noted that a high V-ball entry probability at the time of reaching the body of revolution C17 may be referred to as a high degree of expectation.

Because of this configuration, for example, the number of shutter closures is substantially the same between penguin reach chance increase and sheep reach chance increase not performed. That is, the substantial number of closed shutters with a chance increase in a certain simulated reach performance and the substantial number of closed shutters without a chance increase in a simulated reach performance with a higher expectation level than the simulated reach performance by one are the same. It's becoming In other words, the expected value of the actual number of shutter closures for a small hit in which a certain simulated reach effect with a chance increase is executed, and the simulated reach effect without a chance increase that is one level higher than the simulated reach effect. It is the same as the expected value of the actual shutter closing number of the small hit to be executed. In addition, the expected value of the actual shutter closing number of the small hit that is executed with a chance up of a certain simulated reach production, and the expected value of the simulated reach production that is one higher than the simulated reach production without a chance increase is executed. It may be substantially the same as the expected value of the substantial shutter closing number of the small hit. In addition, the same in this specification does not have to be exactly the same, and may be substantially the same.

In addition, the production execution time with a chance up for a certain simulated reach production and the production execution time without a chance up for a simulated reach production with a higher expectation than the simulated reach production by one (in the same figure, 60 seconds).

In the same figure, there is only one practical number of shutter closures for a combination of one simulated reach effect and the presence or absence of chance increase, such as no chance increase for penguin reach and chance increase for sheep reach. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, even when the penguin reach chance up is executed as a simulated reach effect, there are cases where the number of substantial shutter closures is one and two cases. may be configured. For example, in the case of only increasing the chance of the reach title production, the number of substantial shutter closures is 1, and in the case of only increasing the chance of the number of animals, the substantial number of closing the shutter is 1, and the number of substantial shutter closures is one. In the case of both the chance-up and the chance-up of the number of animals, the substantial number of shutter closures is two. It should be noted that other combinations of the simulated reach effects and the presence or absence of chance up may also be configured such that there are a plurality of types of substantial shutter closure numbers.

Even in the case of such a configuration, when the same simulated ready-to-win production is performed, the expected value of the shutter closing number when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 is higher with the chance up than without the chance up. is preferably high. 156, the expected value of the substantial number of shutter closures with a chance increase in a certain simulated reach effect, and the expected value of the simulated reach effect without a chance increase that is one higher than the simulated reach effect It may be configured to be the same as the expected value of the typical number of shutter closures.

In the fourth embodiment, the simulated ready-to-win effect is executed over the small winning start demonstration time and the long open standby time, but the effect to be executed is not limited to the simulated ready-to-win effect. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific area C12-2, three symbols are aligned on the effect display device SG, so it is called a simulated ready-to-win effect. It is supplemented that the simulated reach effect is a different effect from the so-called reach effect that can be executed during the fluctuation of the main game pattern (other simulated reach effects are exemplified. The same is true for the embodiment in which the

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the production|presentation during the small hit game in 4th Embodiment is explained in full detail.

"A: No Sheep Reach Chance Up" in the upper part of the figure shows the case where the 1_4R symbol 2, which is the small winning symbol on the first main game side, is stopped and displayed in the non-time shortening game state.

First, a small winning start demonstration time is started, 7 patterns are displayed on the performance display device SG, and a simulated ready-to-win performance is executed in a performance mode similar to a ready-to-win performance. Thereafter, when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small winning start demonstration time, one sheep is displayed on the performance display device SG. After that, when 30 seconds have passed, since 60 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning start demonstration time, the execution of the simulated ready-to-win performance is finished, and the first big prize opening C10 is opened in a specific manner, and the performance is performed as a launch promotion performance. is displayed on the display device SG. 3 seconds after the display of "Aim for V!!" By visually recognizing the display of "Aim for the V!", the player can recognize that the game situation is such that the game ball should be shot toward the first big winning hole C10. It should be noted that the execution start timing of the launch promotion effect may correspond to the timing of the specific opening of the first large prize winning opening C10 (start of the specific opening), and the specific opening timing of the first large prize winning opening C10. may be the execution start timing of the launch promotion effect, or a timing a predetermined time before the timing of the specific opening of the first big prize opening C10 may be the execution start timing of the launch promotion effect. In addition, the timing of the specific opening of the first big winning opening C10 (long opening standby time from the end of the small winning end demonstration time to the specific opening) is configured to vary depending on the small winning pattern. Therefore, the execution timing of the launch promotion effect is configured to be different depending on the small winning symbol.

After that, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 enters the specific area C12-2, the effect display device SG informs the player that three of the seven symbols will be aligned and that a big win will be executed ( or suggesting) will be executed. On the other hand, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 does not enter the specific area C12-2 but enters one of the general areas C12-3, three 7 symbols are displayed on the effect display device SG. As a result, a result notification effect is executed to notify (or suggest) to the player that the jackpot will not be executed due to the lack of matching. As a modification, as described above, when the main game symbols are stopped and displayed as small winning symbols, the performance display device SG performs a so-called ready-to-win effect, for example, 4 symbols are tenned, and the medium symbols are displayed as "animals". A special pattern with such characters as is stopped, and then a small winning game is started, so that the decorative pattern is hidden at the start of the small winning game, or is reduced to "4. Animal・In a state where the stop display is maintained in a combination such as 4”, a sheep appears and suggests the degree of expectation for V-ball entry (Suggests the degree of expectation for V-ball entry depending on the type of animal and whether or not there is a chance up effect) may be executed, and in such a configuration, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 enters the specific area C12-2, a large " "V" is displayed, and while the display is continued, the scene of the sheep being happy is displayed, and a result notification effect is executed to notify (or suggest) the player that a big win will be executed. On the other hand, when the game ball that has reached the rotating body C17 does not enter the specific area C12-2 but enters one of the general areas C12-3, the effect display device SG displays "Unfortunate". Then, while the display is continued, the dejected sheep is displayed, and a result notification effect is executed to notify (or suggest) to the player that the big win will not be executed.

Next, "B: No Penguin Reach Chance Up" at the bottom of the figure shows the case where the 1_4R symbol 1, which is the small winning symbol on the first main game side, is stopped and displayed in the non-reduced time gaming state. .

First, a small winning start demonstration time is started, 7 patterns are displayed on the performance display device SG, and a simulated ready-to-win performance is executed in a performance mode similar to a ready-to-win performance. After that, when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small winning start demonstration time, one penguin is displayed on the performance display device SG. After that, when 30 seconds have passed, since 60 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning start demonstration time, the execution of the simulated ready-to-win performance is finished, and the first big prize winning opening C10 is specifically opened, and the performance is performed as a launch promotion performance. is displayed on the display device SG. 3 seconds after the display of "Aim for V!!" By visually recognizing the display of "Aim for the V!", the player can recognize that the game situation is such that the game ball should be shot toward the first big winning hole C10.

After that, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 enters the specific area C12-2, the effect display device SG informs the player that three of the seven symbols will be aligned and that a big win will be executed ( or suggesting) will be executed. On the other hand, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 does not enter the specific area C12-2 but enters one of the general areas C12-3, three 7 symbols are displayed on the effect display device SG. As a result, a result notification effect is executed to notify (or suggest) to the player that the jackpot will not be executed due to the lack of matching. As a modification, as described above, when the main game symbols are stopped and displayed as small winning symbols, the performance display device SG performs a so-called ready-to-win effect, for example, 4 symbols are tenned, and the medium symbols are displayed as "animals". A special pattern with such characters as is stopped, and then a small winning game is started, so that the decorative pattern is hidden at the start of the small winning game, or is reduced to "4. Animal・In a state where the stop display is maintained in a combination such as 4”, a penguin appears and suggests the degree of expectation for V-ball entry (Suggests the degree of expectation for V-ball entry depending on the type of animal and whether there is a chance up) effect) may be executed, and in such a configuration, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 enters the specific area C12-2, a large " V" is displayed, the penguin's happy state is displayed while the display is continued, and a result notification effect is executed for informing (or suggesting) the player that a big win will be executed. On the other hand, when the game ball that has reached the rotating body C17 does not enter the specific area C12-2 but enters one of the general areas C12-3, the effect display device SG displays "Unfortunate". The disappointment of the penguin is displayed while the display is continued, and a result notification performance is executed to notify (or suggest) to the player that the big win will not be executed.

As detailed in FIG. 156, the end timing of the small winning start demonstration time differs between the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 1 and the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 2. However, as shown in FIG. 157, by setting the execution time of the simulated reach and the display timing of the sheep or the penguin to be the same, even if the player visually recognizes the simulated reach effect, the effect of the simulated reach is reduced. It becomes difficult to discriminate which is the V ball entry probability of the winning game, and the feeling of expectation for execution of the big win can be maintained until the performance informing the result is executed.

It should be noted that, during execution of the simulated ready-to-win effect, a button effect may be executed to prompt the player to operate the sub-input button SB. As a specific example, when the button effect is executed in the situation where the penguin reach is being executed as the simulated reach effect, and the sub-input button SB is operated, there are cases where the chance increases and cases where the chance increases. may be configured. For example, when the ready-to-win title effect is executed, the button image object is displayed, and when the sub-input button SB is operated, the white ready-to-win title effect is changed to the white ready-to-win title effect without chance up. When it becomes (when the white reach title effect remains) and when the red or gold reach title effect with chance up occurs, or when one animal appears, the button image object is displayed and the sub input button When the SB is operated, there are cases where one animal without chance up is displayed and cases where three or five animals with chance up are displayed. In addition, as the timing to start executing the button effect during the execution of the simulated reach effect, it may be executed at the small hit start demonstration time, or may be executed at the long open waiting time (that is, the button image object may be displayed at the timing during the small hit start demonstration time or the timing during the long open waiting time).

In addition, as described above, since the vibration error detection period is configured to start at the timing when the first big winning hole C10 starts the specific opening, the error notification of the vibration error allows the player to participate in the production. A vibration error detection period (according to the V ball probability) can be set according to the small winning pattern that triggered the small winning game without impairing the playability of the button presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize highly reliable fraud monitoring while ensuring the interest of the game during execution of the small winning game.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the relationship between the small winning start demonstration time and the long opening waiting time during execution of the small winning game was detailed, but the small winning starting demonstration time and the long opening waiting time are the fourth embodiment. It is not limited to only morphological configurations. Therefore, the configuration of the small winning start demonstration time and the long opening standby time, which is different from the fourth embodiment, will be described in detail below as a modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. Moreover, the above-described embodiments should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be any combination. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described.

<Time value and effect to be executed during small winning game>
First, with reference to FIG. 158, the relationship between the time value relating to the small winning game and the effect to be executed in the modified example 1 from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail. In the same figure, in the non-time shortening game state, only the case of winning the small hit on the first main game side is illustrated.

The difference from the fourth embodiment is the small winning start demonstration time, the small winning start demonstration time of the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 1 is 25 seconds, and the 1_4R pattern 2 is used as the execution trigger. The small-hit start demonstration time of the small-hit game is 20 seconds, the small-hit start demonstration time of the small-hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 3 is 15 seconds, and the small-hit start demonstration time of the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 4 is 15 seconds. The small winning start demonstration time of the winning game is 10 seconds, and the small winning start demonstration time of the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 5 is 5 seconds.

Since it is configured in this way, in the modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, the sum of the small winning start demonstration time and the long open standby time is different depending on the small winning pattern that triggered the small winning game. In other words, it is configured so that the execution time of the simulated ready-to-win effect can be different. Further, since the higher the V-entering probability when reaching the rotating body C17, the longer the long open standby time, the higher the V-entering probability when reaching the rotating body C17, the longer the execution time of the simulated reach effect. there is It should be noted that the small winning start demonstration time is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG.

Also, as in the fourth embodiment, when each simulated reach effect is the same simulated reach effect, the number of shutter closures with a chance increase is one more than that without a chance increase by one. is configured as follows. As a specific example, when there is no lion reach chance increase and when there is a lion reach chance increase, the latter is configured so that the actual number of shutter closures is increased by one. In addition, although there are some differences in the contents of the reach title production and the number of animals with and without the chance up, the meaning of the simulated reach production in which the lion appears is the same, so here it is treated as the same simulated reach production there is Further, when comparing the simulated reach performances without chance up, the simulated reach performance with one higher expectation is configured to increase the substantial number of shutter closures by one. As a specific example, it is configured such that the substantial number of shutter closures is one more when there is no chance increase for sheep reach than when there is no chance increase for penguin reach. Similarly, when comparing the simulated reach performances with chance up, the simulated reach performance with the degree of expectation higher by one is configured to substantially increase the number of closed shutters by one. As a specific example, it is configured such that the substantial number of shutter closures is one more when there is an increase in the chance of sheep reach than when there is an increase in chance of penguin reach.

Since it is configured in this way, for example, when there is a penguin reach chance increase and when there is no sheep reach chance increase, the substantial number of shutter closures is the same, and the execution time of the simulated reach effect (small hit The sum of the start demonstration time and the long open standby time) is the same. On the other hand, there is a substantial difference in the number of shutter closures between Penguin Reach without chance increase and Penguin Reach chance increase. ) are also different. In addition, when there is a chance up, the execution time of the simulated ready-to-win effect (the sum of the small win start demonstration time and the long opening waiting time) is longer by 5 seconds than when there is no chance up. For example, when the reach title effect is red or gold, the execution time of the simulated reach effect (small hit start demo time) is more important than when the reach title effect is white. and the long open standby time) is 5 seconds longer, or if the number of animals is 3 or 5, the production time is longer than if the number of animals is 1. Execution time of simulated ready-to-win performance (sum of small winning start demonstration time and long opening waiting time) is longer by 5 seconds.

That is, the substantial number of shutter closures and the execution time of the simulated reach performance with the chance increase of a certain simulated reach performance, and the virtual reach performance without the chance increase of the simulated reach performance with the expectation level one higher than the simulated reach performance The number of times the shutter is closed and the execution time of the simulated reach effect are the same. In other words, the expected value of the actual number of shutter closures with a chance increase for a certain simulated reach performance, the execution time of the simulated reach performance, and the simulated reach performance with a higher expectation than the simulated reach performance by one without the chance increase. is the same as the expected value of the substantial number of shutter closures and the execution time of the simulated reach effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the probability of V-ball entry depending on the effect mode of the simulated reach effect, the length of the small win start demonstration time, etc., and the player is encouraged to execute the big win. You can keep your hopes up.

Further, in FIG. 158, if the effect mode of the simulated reach effect to be executed does not increase the chance of penguin reach, the V-ball probability at the time of reaching the rotating body C17 is 1/5, and the simulated reach effect is executed. If the effect mode is sheep reach chance up, the V ball probability at the time of reaching the rotating body C17 is 3/5, and so on. and the V ball probability (which may be the number of shutter closures) correspond one-to-one, but it is not limited to this. There is a case of a small winning game with a V ball entry probability of 3/5 when the rotating body C17 is reached and a case of a small winning game with a V ball entry probability of 4/5 when the rotary body C17 is reached. may be configured as follows. For example, if there is a chance up and the ready-to-win title effect is red, it is a small winning game with a V ball probability of 3/5 when the rotating body C17 arrives, and if there is a chance up and the ready-to-win title effect is gold, the rotating body C17. It may be configured to be a small winning game with a V ball probability of 4/5 at the time of arrival. Further, for example, if the number of animals is 3 with an increased chance, the game is a small winning game in which the V-ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 3/5, and if the number of animals is 5 with an increased chance. may be configured to be a small winning game with a V ball probability of 4/5 when reaching the rotating body C17.

Even in the case of such a configuration, when the same simulated reach effect is performed, it is preferable to configure such that the expected value of the substantial number of shutter closures is higher with the chance increase than without the chance increase. is. Also, similar to FIG. 158, the expected value of the substantial number of shutter closures with a chance increase in a certain simulated reach production, and the expected value of the simulated reach production without a chance increase that is one higher than the simulated reach production It may be configured to be the same as the expected value of the typical number of shutter closures.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the production|presentation during the small hit game in the example 1 of a change from 4th Embodiment is explained in full detail.

"A: No Sheep Reach Chance Up" in the upper part of the figure shows the case where the 1_4R symbol 2, which is the small winning symbol on the first main game side, is stopped and displayed in the non-time shortening game state.

First, a small winning start demonstration time is started, 7 patterns are displayed on the performance display device SG, and a simulated ready-to-win performance is executed in a performance mode similar to a ready-to-win performance. After that, when 20 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning start demonstration time, the small winning starting demonstration time ends, the long open waiting time starts, and one sheep is displayed on the performance display device SG. After that, when 20 seconds have passed, the execution of the simulated ready-to-win effect is completed because 20 seconds, which is the long opening standby time, has passed, and the first big prize winning opening C10 is specifically opened, and the effect display device as a launch promotion effect. "Aim for the V!" 3 seconds after the display of "Aim for V!" By visually recognizing the display of "Aim for the V!", the player can recognize that the game situation is such that the game ball should be shot toward the first big winning hole C10.

After that, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 enters the specific area C12-2, the effect display device SG informs the player that three of the seven symbols will be aligned and that a big win will be executed ( or suggesting) will be executed. On the other hand, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 does not enter the specific area C12-2 but enters one of the general areas C12-3, three 7 symbols are displayed on the effect display device SG. As a result, a result notification effect is executed to notify (or suggest) to the player that the jackpot will not be executed due to the lack of matching. As a modification, as described above, when the main game symbols are stopped and displayed as small winning symbols, the performance display device SG performs a so-called ready-to-win effect, for example, 4 symbols are tenned, and the medium symbols are displayed as "animals". A special pattern with such characters as is stopped, and then a small winning game is started, so that the decorative pattern is hidden at the start of the small winning game, or is reduced to "4. Animal・In a state where the stop display is maintained in a combination such as 4”, a sheep appears and suggests the degree of expectation for V-ball entry (Suggests the degree of expectation for V-ball entry depending on the type of animal and whether or not there is a chance up effect) may be executed, and in such a configuration, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 enters the specific area C12-2, a large " "V" is displayed, and while the display is continued, the scene of the sheep being happy is displayed, and a result notification effect is executed to notify (or suggest) the player that a big win will be executed. On the other hand, when the game ball that has reached the rotating body C17 does not enter the specific area C12-2 but enters one of the general areas C12-3, the effect display device SG displays "Unfortunate". Then, while the display is continued, the dejected sheep is displayed, and a result notification effect is executed to notify (or suggest) the player that the big win will not be executed.

Next, "B: Penguin Reach Chance Up" at the bottom of the same figure shows the case where the 1_4R symbol 2, which is the small winning symbol on the first main game side, is stopped and displayed in the non-reduced time gaming state. .

First, a small winning start demonstration time is started, 7 patterns are displayed on the performance display device SG, and a simulated ready-to-win performance is executed in a performance mode similar to a ready-to-win performance. Thereafter, when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small winning start demonstration time, the small winning starting demonstration time ends and the long open waiting time starts, and one penguin is displayed on the performance display device SG. After that, when another 10 seconds have passed, three penguins are displayed on the effect display device SG because the simulated ready-to-win effect being executed has a chance up. As described above, the button effect is executed in the situation where one penguin is displayed, and if the sub-input button SB is operated during the valid period (or the valid period passes), the presence or absence of chance up is determined. may be configured to notify. More specifically, if there is no chance-up, one penguin will be displayed even after the button presentation is finished, and if there is a chance-up, three penguins will be displayed after the button presentation is finished. As a modification, a chance-up effect may be executed during the small winning start demonstration time. Also, as the chance-up effect, the aforementioned red or gold ready-to-win title effect may be executed.

When 10 seconds have elapsed after the three penguins are displayed, the execution of the simulated ready-to-win effect is completed, and the first prize-winning opening C10 is specifically opened, and the effect display device SG displays "V" as a launch promotion effect. Aim!!" is displayed (exactly, even if the player starts shooting the game ball after confirming the launch promotion effect, the ball will enter the first big winning hole C10 in time. Aim!!” is displayed, and a specific release is executed 3 seconds later). By visually recognizing the display of "Aim for the V!", the player can recognize that the game situation is such that the game ball should be shot toward the first big winning hole C10.

After that, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 enters the specific area C12-2, the effect display device SG informs the player that three of the seven symbols will be aligned and that a big win will be executed ( or suggesting) will be executed. On the other hand, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 does not enter the specific area C12-2 but enters one of the general areas C12-3, three 7 symbols are displayed on the effect display device SG. As a result, a result notification effect is executed to notify (or suggest) to the player that the jackpot will not be executed due to the lack of matching. As a modification, as described above, when the main game symbols are stopped and displayed as small winning symbols, the performance display device SG performs a so-called ready-to-win effect, for example, 4 symbols are tenned, and the medium symbols are displayed as "animals". A special pattern with such characters as is stopped, and then a small winning game is started, so that the decorative pattern is hidden at the start of the small winning game, or is reduced to "4. Animal・In a state where the stop display is maintained in a combination such as 4”, a penguin appears and suggests the degree of expectation for V-ball entry (Suggests the degree of expectation for V-ball entry depending on the type of animal and whether there is a chance up) effect) may be executed, and in such a configuration, when the game ball that reaches the rotating body C17 enters the specific area C12-2, a large " V" is displayed, the penguin's happy state is displayed while the display is continued, and a result notification effect is executed for informing (or suggesting) the player that a big win will be executed. On the other hand, when the game ball that has reached the rotating body C17 does not enter the specific area C12-2 but enters one of the general areas C12-3, the effect display device SG displays "Unfortunate". The disappointment of the penguin is displayed while the display is continued, and a result notification performance is executed to notify (or suggest) to the player that the big win will not be executed.

As detailed in FIG. 158, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 2, the small hit start demonstration time is 20 seconds, the long open standby time is 20 seconds, and the simulated reach effect is executed. The time is 40 seconds. Because of this configuration, the effect time is the same for sheep reach without chance increase and penguin reach chance increase. That is, the effect time is the same between a simulated ready-to-win effect with a chance increase and a simulated ready-to-win effect without a chance-up that has an expectation level (V ball entry probability) higher than the simulated ready-to-win effect by one.

By configuring in this way, for example, even when the player visually recognizes the penguin reach, the player can have a sense of expectation that the chance will be executed after that, and the V input of the small winning game being executed can be expected. It becomes difficult to determine which ball probability is which, and the feeling of anticipation for execution of the big win can be maintained until the performance informing the result is executed.

(Modification 2 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment and modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment, the relationship between the small winning start demonstration time and the long open waiting time during execution of the small winning game was detailed, but the small winning starting demonstration time and the long open standby time are not limited to the configurations of the fourth embodiment and the modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the small winning start demonstration time and the long opening waiting time, which is different from the fourth embodiment and the modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, will be described in detail as modification 2 from the fourth embodiment. Moreover, the above-described embodiments should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be any combination. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described.

<Time value and effect to be executed during small winning game>
First, with reference to FIG. 160, the relationship between the time value relating to the small winning game and the effect to be executed in the modified example 2 from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail. In the same figure, in the non-time shortening game state, only the case of winning the small hit on the first main game side is illustrated.

First, in the small hit game triggered by the 1 _ 4 R pattern 1 of the pattern 1, the small hit start demonstration time is 50 seconds, the long open standby time is 10 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 1/5. In addition, penguin ready-to-win chance-up 0 times is executed at a selection ratio of 100% as a simulated ready-to-win performance over 60 seconds including the small winning start demonstration time and the long open standby time. Here, in the modified example 2 from the fourth embodiment, since the simulated ready-to-win effect has 2 chances up, it is referred to as 0 chances up, 1 chances up, and 2 chances up. A chance increase of 0 times is synonymous with no chance increase, and a chance increase of 1 time (or a chance increase of 2 times) is synonymous with a chance increase. As a specific example, if there is no chance increase for reach title production and no chance increase for the number of animals, chance increase is 0 times, if there is only chance increase for reach title production, chance increase is 1 time, only chance increase for animal number. In the case of , the chance is increased once, and in the case of both the chance increase of reach title production and the chance increase of the number of animals, the chance is increased twice. It should be noted that the above-mentioned configuration having a chance-up and no chance-up as the simulated ready-to-win effect may also be configured to have two or more chance-ups. It is preferable to configure such that the expected value of the V-entering probability at the time of reaching the body of revolution C17 increases as the number increases.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 2A of the pattern 2A, the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 2B of the pattern 2B, and the small hit game triggered by the 4R pattern 2C The waiting time for opening is 20 seconds, and the V-entering probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 2/5. In the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 2A of the pattern 2A, the small hit start demo time is 40 seconds, and as a simulated reach production for 60 seconds, the penguin reach chance up 0 times is selected 100%. is executed in In addition, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 2B of the pattern 2B, the small hit start demonstration time is 50 seconds, and the chance up of sheep reach 0 times is selected as a simulated reach effect for 70 seconds. Runs at 100%. Also, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 2C of the pattern 2C, the small hit start demonstration time is 45 seconds, and the penguin reach chance up once is selected as a simulated reach effect for 65 seconds. Runs at 100%. It should be noted that in Modification 2 from the fourth embodiment, even if the same simulated reach is performed and the chance-up is 0 times (the chance-up is not performed), the V-entering probability at the time of reaching the rotating body C17 is There are cases where it is different. For example, when the penguin reach has a chance increase of 0 times, there are cases where the probability of V ball entry at the time of reaching the rotating body C17 is 1/5 and where it is 2/5.

Next, a small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 3A of the symbol 3A, a small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 3B of the symbol 3B, and a small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 3C of the symbol 3C In , the long open standby time is 30 seconds, and the V-entering probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 3/5. In the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 3A of the pattern 3A, the small hit start demo time is 40 seconds, and the penguin reach chance up 2 times is selected as a simulated reach effect for 70 seconds 50%. , and the sheep reach chance up 0 times is executed at a selection rate of 50%. In addition, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 3B of the pattern 3B, the small hit start demo time is 50 seconds, and as a simulated reach effect for 80 seconds, the chance up of Lion reach 0 times is selected. Runs at 100%. In addition, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 3C of the pattern 3C, the small hit start demonstration time is 45 seconds, and as a simulated reach effect for 75 seconds, one chance up of sheep reach is selected. Runs at 100%.

Next, a small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 4A of the symbol 4A, a small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 4B of the symbol 4B, and a small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 4C of the symbol 4C In , the long open standby time is 40 seconds, and the V-entering probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 4/5. In the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 4A of the pattern 4A, the small hit start demonstration time is 40 seconds, and as a simulated reach effect for 80 seconds, the chance up of sheep reach twice is selected at a rate of 50%. , and Lion Reach's chance up 0 times is executed at a selection rate of 50%. In addition, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 4B of the pattern 4B, the small hit start demonstration time is 50 seconds, and as a simulated reach effect for 90 seconds, the chance up of giraffe reach 0 times is selected. Runs at 100%. In addition, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 4C of the pattern 4C, the small hit start demonstration time is 45 seconds, and as a simulated reach production for 85 seconds, the chance up of Lion Reach is selected once. Runs at 100%.

Next, in the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 5A of the pattern 5A and the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 5B of the pattern 5B, the long open standby time is 50 seconds, and the rotating body C17 The V ball probability at the time of arrival is 5/5. In the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 5A of the pattern 4A, the small hit start demo time is 40 seconds, and as a simulated reach production for 90 seconds, the lion reach chance up twice is selected at a rate of 100%. is executed in In addition, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 5B of the pattern 5B, the small hit start demonstration time is 45 seconds, and as a simulated reach production for 95 seconds, one chance up of Kirin Reach is selected. Runs at 100%.

Thus, in the modification example 2 from the fourth embodiment, for example, the chance up of penguin reach 0 times is a small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 1 and a small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 2A Even if the same (same system) simulated reach effect is executed with and the same number of chances up, in a small hit game with a different V ball probability (substantial number of shutter closures) configured to be executed. In addition, the same (same system) simulated ready-to-win effect and the same number of times of chance up may be referred to as the same effect mode of the simulated ready-to-win effect.

As described above, the simulated ready-to-win effect may be the same simulated ready-to-win effect regardless of the number of chance-up times as long as the effect mode is the same. As an example, the penguin reach 0 chance increase and the penguin reach chance increase 1 time are the penguin reach of the same system, so the same simulated reach effect may be provided.

On the other hand, the simulated ready-to-win effect may be the same simulated ready-to-win effect when the effect mode is the same including the number of chance-up times. As an example, since the number of times of chance increase is different between Penguin Reach's 0 chance increase and Penguin Reach's chance increase of 1 time, the simulated reach effect may not be the same.

In addition, in the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 2A, the penguin reach chance increase is executed 0 times, and in the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 2C, the penguin reach chance increase is executed once. , etc., in a small winning game with the same substantial number of shutter closures, it is the same (same system) simulated reach effect, and is configured to have a case where the number of times of chance up is different. It should be noted that, in the small winning game with the same number of substantial shutter closures, the same (same system) simulated reach production, and if the number of chance ups is different, a small simulated reach production with a small number of chances up is executed. In the winning game, the small winning start demonstration time is relatively short. In addition, it is not limited to this, and in the small hit game with the same number of substantial shutter closures, the same (same system) simulated reach production, and when the number of chances up is different, the number of chances up is a simulation with less It may be configured such that the small winning start demonstration time is relatively longer in the small winning game in which the ready-to-win effect is executed.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the small winning start demonstration time may be relatively short for the small winning in which the simulated ready-to-win effect with a large number of chance-up times is executed.

In addition, in the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 2B, the sheep reach chance up is executed 0 times, and in the small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 2C, the penguin reach chance up is executed once. In such a small winning game with substantially the same number of shutter closures, different (different system) simulated reach performances are configured to have different chance-up times. In addition, in the small winning game with the same substantial number of shutter closings, if the simulated reach production is different (of a different system) and the number of chance-up times is also different, the small winning performance in which the number of chance-up times is small is executed. The game has a relatively longer demonstration time to start the small winning.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the small winning start demonstration time may be relatively short for the small winning in which the simulated ready-to-win effect with a large number of chance-up times is executed.

With this configuration, even when the player visually recognizes the simulated ready-to-win effect, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the V ball probability of the small winning game being executed, and the result notification effect is executed. The anticipation for the execution of the jackpot can be maintained until it is won.

(Modification 3 from the fourth embodiment)
In the second modification from the fourth embodiment to the fourth embodiment, the relationship between the small winning start demonstration time and the long open waiting time during the execution of the small winning game was detailed, but the small winning starting demonstration time and the long open waiting time are not limited to only the configuration of Modification 2 from the fourth embodiment to the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the small winning start demonstration time and the long opening standby time, which is different from the modification 2 from the fourth embodiment to the fourth embodiment, will be described in detail below as modification 3 from the fourth embodiment. Moreover, the above-described embodiments should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be any combination. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described.

<Time value and effect to be executed during the small hit game>
First, with reference to FIG. 161, the relationship between the time value relating to the small winning game and the effect to be executed in Modification 3 from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail. In the same figure, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, only the case of winning a small hit on the first main game side is exemplified.

First, in the small hit game triggered by the 1 _ 4 R pattern 1 of the pattern 1, the small hit start demonstration time is 50 seconds, the long open standby time is 10 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 1/5. In addition, over 60 seconds between the small winning start demonstration time and the long open standby time, as a simulated reach performance, 0 times of penguin reach chance up is executed at a selection rate of 50%, and 1 time of penguin reach chance up is selected rate. Runs at 50%.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 2 of the pattern 2, the small hit start demonstration time is 40 seconds, the long open standby time is 20 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The probability is 2/5. In addition, over 60 seconds between the small win start demonstration time and the long open standby time, as a simulated reach performance, one chance up of penguin reach is executed at a selection rate of 30%, and a chance up of sheep reach is 0 times. It is performed at 30%, and one chance up of sheep reach is performed at a selection rate of 40%.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 3 of the pattern 3, the small hit start demonstration time is 30 seconds, the long open standby time is 30 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The probability is 3/5. In addition, over 60 seconds between the small winning start demonstration time and the long open standby time, as a simulated reach performance, one chance up of sheep reach is executed at a selection rate of 30%, and a chance up of lion reach is performed at a selection rate of 0 times. It is executed at 30%, and one chance up of Lion Reach is executed at a selection rate of 40%.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 4 of the pattern 4, the small hit start demonstration time is 20 seconds, the long open standby time is 40 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The odds are 4/5. In addition, over 60 seconds between the small winning start demonstration time and the long open waiting time, as a simulated reach performance, one chance up of Lion Reach is executed at a selection rate of 30%, and a chance up of Kirin Reach 0 times is selected. It is executed at 30%, and Kirin Reach's chance up is executed at a selection rate of 40%.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 5 of the pattern 5, the small hit start demonstration time is 10 seconds, the long open standby time is 50 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The odds are 5/5. In addition, over 60 seconds of the small win start demonstration time and the long open standby time, one chance up of giraffe reach is executed at a selection rate of 100% as a simulated reach performance.

Thus, in the modification 3 from the fourth embodiment, for example, one penguin reach chance up is a small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 1 and a small winning game triggered by the 1_4R symbol 2 Even if the same (same system) simulated reach effect is executed with and the same number of chances up, in a small hit game with a different V ball probability (substantial number of shutter closures) configured to be executed. In the case of such a configuration, for example, as described above, by changing the mode of the chance-up production, the same (similar) simulated reach production is performed, and the number of chance-ups is the same (for example, 1 times), it can be executed in a small winning game with a different V ball entry probability (substantial shutter closing number). As a specific example, even if the penguin reach is the same, the number of substantial shutter closures is one more in the case of the golden reach title production than in the case of the red reach title production, and the animal (penguin ) in the case of 5 than in the case of 3, the actual number of shutter closures is increased by 1, so that the same (similar system) simulated reach effect can be achieved. Yes, even if the number of chance-ups is the same (for example, once), small winning games with different V-ball entry probabilities (substantial number of shutter closures) can be executed. In addition, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 1, the small hit start demonstration time is 50 seconds, the long open standby time is 10 seconds, and the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 2 The winning start demo time is 40 seconds and the long open waiting time is 20 seconds. That is, when comparing small hit games with different V ball ball probability (substantial number of shutter closures), which are the same (same system) simulated reach effect and the same number of chances up, the simulated reach effect While the execution time is the same, the small winning start demonstration time and the long opening standby time are configured to be different.

With this configuration, even when the player visually recognizes the simulated ready-to-win effect, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the V ball probability of the small winning game being executed, and the result notification effect is executed. The anticipation for the execution of the jackpot can be maintained until it is won.

As described above, various configurations can be applied to the time value and the effect to be executed during the small winning game. The configurations described in detail in Modification 3 from the fourth embodiment to the fourth embodiment may be combined into one configuration, and there is no problem in any combination. For example, it is possible to create configurations that have both features of one embodiment and features of another embodiment.

As an example, the feature configuration in the modification 2 from the fourth embodiment, the substantial shutter closing number (long open waiting time) is the same, but the small hit start demonstration time is different, and simulated reach to be executed It has a small winning pattern (for example, the 1_4R pattern 3B and the 1_4R pattern 3C) that differs in the number of times the production chance is increased, and the substantial shutter closing number ( (Long open waiting time) are different, but the execution time of the simulated reach production is the same, and the number of chance-up times of the simulated reach production to be executed is different. ).

Also, in each embodiment, the time value of the small winning start demonstration time, the time value of the long open standby time, and the configuration of the simulated ready-to-win effect to be executed are only examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed. For example, in Modified Example 2 from the fourth embodiment, the substantial number of shutter closures (long open waiting time) is the same, but the small hit start demonstration time is different, and the number of chances of the simulated reach effect to be executed is also increased. One of the different small winning symbols and the substantial number of shutter closures (long open waiting time) in Modification 3 from the fourth embodiment are different, but the execution time of the simulated ready-to-win effect is the same and is executed. It should be supplemented that it is possible to design one of the small winning symbols with different chance-up times of simulated ready-to-win production to be the same small winning symbol.

(Modification 4 from the fourth embodiment)
In the modification 3 from the fourth embodiment to the fourth embodiment, the relationship between the small winning start demonstration time and the long open waiting time during the execution of the small winning game was detailed, but the small winning starting demonstration time and the long open standby time are not limited to only the configuration of Modification 3 from the fourth embodiment to the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the small hit start demonstration time and the long opening standby time, which is different from the modification 3 from the fourth embodiment to the fourth embodiment, will be described in detail below as modification 4 from the fourth embodiment. Also, the above-described embodiments should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described.

<Time value regarding small hit game>
First, with reference to FIG. 162, the time value regarding the small hit game in the modification 4 from 4th Embodiment is explained in full detail. In the same figure, in the time shortening game state, the case where the small win on the first main game side is won and the case where the small win on the second main game side is won are illustrated. The symbols 1 to 5 are small winning symbols on the first main game side, and the symbols 6 to 11 are small winning symbols on the second main game side.

First, in the small hit game triggered by the 1st_4R pattern 1 of the pattern 1, the small hit start demonstration time is 25 seconds, the long open standby time is 10 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 1/5.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 2 of the pattern 2, the small hit start demonstration time is 20 seconds, the long open standby time is 20 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The probability is 2/5.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 3 of the pattern 3, the small hit start demonstration time is 15 seconds, the long open standby time is 30 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The probability is 3/5.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 4 of the pattern 4, the small hit start demonstration time is 10 seconds, the long open standby time is 40 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The odds are 4/5.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 5 of the pattern 5, the small hit start demonstration time is 5 seconds, the long open standby time is 50 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The odds are 5/5.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 2_4R pattern 1 of the pattern 6, the small hit start demonstration time is 25 seconds, the long open standby time is 10 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The probability is 1/5.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 2_4R pattern 2 of the pattern 7, the small hit start demonstration time is 20 seconds, the long open standby time is 20 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The probability is 2/5.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 2_4R pattern 3 of the pattern 8, the small hit start demonstration time is 15 seconds, the long open standby time is 30 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The probability is 3/5.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 2_4R pattern 4 of the pattern 9, the small hit start demonstration time is 10 seconds, the long open standby time is 40 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The odds are 4/5.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 2_4R pattern 5 of the pattern 10, the small hit start demonstration time is 5 seconds, the long open standby time is 50 seconds, and the V ball when reaching the rotating body C17 The odds are 5/5.

Next, in the small winning game triggered by the 2_10R symbol 1 of the symbol 11, the small winning start demonstration time is 5 seconds and the long open standby time is 0 seconds, which is a direct V small winning symbol. As in the first embodiment, when the direct V small winning pattern is won, the game ball entering the first winning hole C10 flows down the direct V route and then enters the specific area C12-1. is almost certain.

Thus, when a small win is won in the time-reduced game state, in both cases of winning a small win on the first main game side and winning a small win on the second main game side, Small hit start demonstration time is 5 to 25 seconds. In addition, a small winning pattern other than the direct V, in other words, the small winning pattern of the V challenge described above (the game ball that entered the first big winning opening C10 flows down the V challenge route, and then enters the specific area C12-2. As for the small winning symbols with a probability of hitting a ball of 1/5 to 5/5), the small winning symbols with the same V ball entry probability (the number of shutter closures) when the rotating body C17 arrives are the small winning symbols on the first main game side. The small winning start demo time of the small winning game to be executed is the same between the winning symbols and the small winning symbols on the second main game side. Also, the small winning symbols with the same V ball entry probability (number of shutter closures) when reaching the rotating body C17 are executed with the small winning symbols on the first main game side and the small winning symbols on the second main game side. Since the long open standby time of the small winning game is also the same, the small winning symbols with the same V ball entry probability (number of shutter closures) when the rotating body C17 arrives are the small winning symbols on the first main game side and the second. The sum of the small winning start demonstration time and the long open standby time, which is the execution time of the simulated ready-to-win effect described above, is also the same for the small winning symbols on the second main game side. In addition, when a small win (especially a small win of V challenge) is won in the time reduction game state, the effect executed over the small win start demonstration time and the long open waiting time is not a simulated reach effect. A different production may be used. Specifically, it may be an effect such as "super M chance" shown in FIG. Also, as a modification, in the time shortening gaming state, the small winning start demonstration time of the small winning game corresponding to the 1_4R patterns 1 to 5 and the 2_4R patterns 1 to 5 may be uniformly set to 20 seconds. In addition, during the small win start demonstration time, a game explanation displaying "Determine the level of the rotating body with roulette" is executed, and during the long open standby time, after the game explanation is executed, it is used in the V challenge production. Execute a roulette effect that determines the mode of operation of the rotating body C17 (the longer the long open waiting time, the longer the effect time, and the longer the effect time, the higher the probability of V-ball entry). ) may be configured.

By configuring in this way, in the modification 4 from the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in the time-reduced game state, a right-hand shot is executed, and mainly the second main game symbols are varied. The game progresses, but even if the player accidentally hits to the left and wins the small win on the first main game side, the small win game on the first main game side. The middle effect (effect that is executed over the small win start demonstration time and the long open waiting time) is the second main game side where the V ball probability (number of shutter closures) when reaching the rotating body C17 is the same. By making the performance during the small winning game the same, an appropriate performance can be executed according to the situation, and the game can be progressed without the player being confused.

In addition, in FIG. 162, the case where a small win is won in the time shortening game state is illustrated, but in the small win symbols on the second main game side of symbols 6 to 11, the second main game in the non-time shortening game state Even when winning the small win on the side, the small win start demonstration time and the long open standby time may be set to the same time value. In other words, in the small win on the second main game side, when the small win symbols are the same, the small win start demonstration time and the small win start demonstration time are applied regardless of whether the winning is made in the time-reduced game state or in the non-time-reduced game state. It may be configured to be the same as the long open waiting time. By configuring in this way, even when the symbol variation for the number of times of time saving ends and the non-time shortening game state is entered, the symbol variation related to the remaining reservation on the second main game side is reduced again. When a win is won, the same performance as when a small win is won on the second main game side in the time shortening game state can be executed.

It should be noted that the configuration of the same figure may be combined with the configuration of part or all of the modification 3 from the fourth embodiment to the fourth embodiment described above. It is supplemented that the configuration of the embodiment may be adopted, and the configuration related to the time shortening game state may adopt the configuration of Modification 4 from the fourth embodiment.

(Fifth embodiment)
In the first embodiment (this embodiment), the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine (so-called small winning V gaming machine) that develops into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a small winning game is described in detail. The configuration of the small winning V game machine is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration of a small winning V game machine different from that of the first embodiment will be described in detail below as a fifth embodiment. Also, the above-described embodiments should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described.

In addition, since the fifth embodiment is a small winning V gaming machine similar to the first embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in detail below.

<Time saving times when passing V>
First, FIG. 163 is a table relating to the number of time reductions when passing through V. FIG. In the figure, during the small hit game, the game ball enters (V passes) the specific area C12-2 (or the specific area C12-1 which is the specific area of the direct V), and after the big hit is completed It illustrates about the number of times of reduced working hours to be given. Note that the specific region C12-2 and the specific region C12-1 may be generically referred to simply as a specific region.

The "big hit round" in the same figure is the number of rounds of the big hit that is executed after the game ball enters the specific area during the small game (the small game is 1R and is added to the number of rounds of the big hit. there). In addition, "low probability / low base state" in the same figure, when the game state winning the small hit is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state, it is the number of time reduction given after the end of the big win. , "low-probability/high-base state" is the number of times of time reduction given after the end of the big win when the game state in which the small win is won is the non-probability variable game state and the time-reduction game state.

During the small hit game triggered by the symbols 1 to 19 shown in FIG. 163, the game ball can enter the specific area. In other words, in the fifth embodiment, both the first main game side and the second main game side have a small winning game in which a game ball can enter a specific area.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, since it does not have a probability variable gaming state, only the case of the non-probability variable gaming state is shown in FIG. may be configured to have

First, symbols 1 to 5 are small winning symbols on the first main game side, all small winning symbols have a big winning round of 4R, and if a small winning is won in a low probability/low base state, all With the small winning patterns, the number of times of time saving given after the subsequent big winning is 4 times, and if the small winning is won in the low probability / high base state, all the small winning patterns will be given after the subsequent big winning. The number of time reductions given is 10 times. It should be noted that when a small win is won on the first main game side, symbols 1 to 5 are won at an equal rate (1/5 is won). As a modification, the selection ratios of patterns 1 to 5 may be 60%, 25%, 10%, 4%, and 1%, respectively.

Next, symbols 6 to 19 are small winning symbols on the second main game side. The jackpot round for patterns 6-12 is 10R, the jackpot round for patterns 13-14 is 8R, the jackpot round for patterns 15-16 is 7R, the jackpot round for patterns 17-18 is 6R, and the jackpot round for patterns 19-19. The jackpot round is 3R. In addition, when a small win is won in a low-probability/low-base state, the number of time-savings given after the subsequent big win is 10 for all the small-win patterns of patterns 6 to 19.例文帳に追加In addition, when a small win is won in a low-accuracy/high-base state, the number of time-savings given after the subsequent big win is 10 for all the small-win patterns 6 to 19.例文帳に追加It should be noted that when a small win is won on the second main game side, symbols 6 to 19 are won at an equal rate (1/14 is won).

Since the fifth embodiment is configured as described above, it has the following characteristic configuration.
(1) The average value of the number of times of time reduction after the end of the big hit triggered by the small win on the first main game side won in the non-time-reduced game state is the second main game won in the non-time-reduced game state. It is less than the average value of the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit on the side.
(2) The average value of the number of time reductions after the end of the big win triggered by the small win of the first main game side won in the time shortened game state, and the number of the second main game side won in the time shortened game state It is the same as the average value of the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit executed with the small hit as a trigger.
(3) The average value of the number of time reductions after the end of the big win triggered by the small win of the first main game side won in the time shortened game state, and the number of the second main game side won in the time shortened game state The difference (including 0) from the average value of the number of time-savings after the end of the big win triggered by the small win is the small win on the first main game side that was won in the non-time-reduced game state. It is smaller than the difference between the average value of the number of times of time saving after the end of the big win and the average value of the number of times of time saving after the end of the big win executed with the small win of the second main game side won in the non-time-reduced game state.

In the same figure, the number of times of time reduction after the end of the big win, which is triggered by the small win on the first main game side won in the non-time-reduced game state, is set to 4 times for all symbols 1 to 5. , is just an example and can be changed without any problem. In addition, in the same figure, the number of times of time reduction after the end of the big win, which is triggered by the small win of the first main game side won in the time reduction game state, is set to 10 times for all symbols 1 to 5, This is just an example and can be changed without any problem. In addition, in the same figure, the number of times of time reduction after the end of the big win, which is triggered by the small win of the second main game side won in the non-time reduction game state, is set to 10 times for all symbols 6 to 19. , is just an example and can be changed without any problem. In addition, in the same figure, the number of times of time reduction after the end of the big win executed triggered by the small win of the second main game side won in the time reduction game state is set to 10 times for all symbols 6 to 19, This is just an example and can be changed without any problem. In addition, even when the number of time reductions is changed from the figure, it may be configured to satisfy the above configurations (1), (2), and (3).

Also, as in the first embodiment, the number of time reductions on the first main game side (the number of time reductions related to the first main game pattern) and the number of time reductions on the second main game side (the number of time reductions related to the second main game pattern) are provided. However, the time reduction game state may be terminated when one of the number of times of time reduction becomes 0 times. Even when configured in this way, it may be configured to satisfy the configurations of (1), (2), and (3) above, or may be applied only to the number of time reductions on the first main game side, It may be applied only to the number of time reductions on the second main game side, or may be applied to the average value of the number of time reductions on the first main game side and the number of time reductions on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) of the fifth embodiment, relating to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. is. Since this figure is the same as that of FIG. 11, detailed description of the flowchart is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 164, in a game in which a small hit is won, the small hit symbol is stopped in the process of step 1423, and then the specific game end determination process is executed in the process of step 1450. FIG.

Next, FIG. 165 is a flow chart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 164 of the fifth embodiment. Since this figure is the same as that of FIG. 14, detailed description of the flowchart is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the specific game end determination process of step 1450 is executed when the fluctuation of the main game symbols is stopped, so the following effects are obtained.
(1) When a small hit is won in the variation before the final variation of the time shortening gaming state (for example, the variation in which the time shortening gaming state is the remaining three times), step 1423 in FIG. 164 After that, the specific game end determination process of step 1450 is executed, the process of step 1474 of FIG. 165 becomes No, and then the small hit game control process of step 1700 of FIG. 6 is executed do. Therefore, the time shortening game state is set even after the symbol variation is completed and during the execution of the small winning game.
(2) When a small hit is won in the final variation of the time reduction gaming state (symbol variation where the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c at the start of variation = 1), a small hit in the processing of step 1423 in FIG. The symbol is stopped, and then the specific game end determination process of step 1450 is executed, the process of step 1474 in FIG. is turned off (becomes a non-time shortening game state), and then executes the small hit game control process of step 1700 in FIG. Therefore, it becomes a non-time-reduced game state after the end of symbol variation, and is in a non-time-reduced game state even during execution of a small winning game.

Next, FIG. 166 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends in the fifth embodiment, according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, at step 1651-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game triggered by the ball entering the specific area (specific area C12-1 or specific area C12-2) has ended. do.

In the case of Yes in step 1651-1, in other words, after the end of the special game triggered by the stoppage of the big win pattern (after the end of the big win), in step 1656-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M wins the big win. The game state at the start of the pattern variation and the big hit pattern are referred to determine the number of times of time saving (predetermined number of times), the predetermined number of times is set to the time saving number counter value, and the process proceeds to step 1658 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1651-1, in other words, after the end of the big hit executed triggered by the game ball entering the specific area during the small win game (after the end of the special game triggered by the small win pattern ), in step 1657-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the game state at the start of the variation of the symbol variation in which the small winning is won and the symbol of the small winning, and determines the number of times of time saving (predetermined number of times). Then, a predetermined number of times is set in the time saving number counter value, and the process proceeds to step 1658 .

Next, at step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag. Next, at step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process (small hit game control process at step 1700).

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the game state at the start of variation of the main game symbols is referred to, and the number of times of time saving after the end of the big win is determined. More specifically, the number of time reductions after the execution of the jackpot triggered by the stop of the jackpot pattern refers to the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the pattern fluctuation that was won in the jackpot, and the game ball enters the specific area during the jackpot game. The number of times of time saving after the end of the big win, which is executed with the trigger of hitting the ball, is configured to refer to the game state at the start of the variation of the pattern variation in which the small win is won. By configuring in this way, when a small win is won in the final variation of the time shortening game state, as described above, the game becomes a non-time shortening game state during the small win game, and in the specific area during the small win game. When the game ball enters, the game ball enters the specific area in the non-time-reduced game state, but even in such a case, the game state at the start of the variation of the pattern variation that won the small hit. By determining the number of times of saving time with reference to, even if a predetermined small hit is won in the final variation of the time shortening gaming state, the variation before the final variation of the time shortening gaming state (for example, the number of remaining time saving is 3 times), the number of times of reduced working hours after the end of the big win can be made the same number of times, and the number of times of reduced time after the end of the big win is prevented from going down (downgrading). Thus, a gaming machine can be provided that does not cause a loss to the player.

In this way, when the game state at the start of pattern variation is referred to and the number of times of time reduction after the end of the big win is determined, the big win triggered by the small win won in the non-time-reduced game state. The number of time-savings after the end (or the average number of time-savings) is relative to the number of time-savings after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit won in the time-reduced game state (or the average number of time-savings). may be configured to be less. In addition, the number of time-savings after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit on the second main game side won in the non-time-reduced gaming state (or the average value of the number of time-savings) is the second time-saving game won in the time-reduced gaming state. It may be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of times of time saving after the end of the big win triggered by the small win on the main game side (or the average value of the number of times of time saving).

In addition, when the game state at the start of symbol variation is configured to determine the number of times of time reduction after the end of the big win, it is configured so that both the first main game side and the second main game side can win a small win. Then, a small hit is won in a non-time-reduced gaming state, and the number of times of time-saving after the end of the big hit, which is triggered by the fact that the game ball enters a specific area during the small-hit game, is 1 time (the time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a time-reduced gaming state after the first hit), and is executed when a small hit is won in the time-reduced gaming state and a game ball enters a specific area during a small winning game. The number of times of time saving after the end of the big win may be eight times. In the case of such a configuration, even if a small win is won with one pattern variation in which the time-reduced game state after the first win is won, the entry of the game ball into the specific area during the small win game is triggered. The number of time-savings after the end of the jackpot executed as above can be set to 8 times (instead of 1 time), and can be configured so that the player does not lose money.

The game state after the end of the big win triggered by the stoppage of the big win pattern may be determined based on the big win pattern regardless of the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the pattern variation of winning the big win.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when a small hit is won in the final variation of the time reduction game state (symbol variation where the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c at the start of variation = 1), the small win game starts In the previous (processing of steps 1476 and 1478 in FIG. 165), it was configured to be in a non-time shortening game state, but it is not limited to this, and when a small hit is won in the time shortening game state, At the start of the game (for example, at the start of the small winning start demonstration time), it may be configured to be in a non-time reduction game state. Even in the case of such a configuration, the number of times of time reduction after the execution of the big win triggered by the small win game is determined by referring to the game state (time reduction game state) at the start of the symbol variation in which the small win is won. By configuring to do so, it becomes a non-time shortening game state during the small winning game, but the number of times of time reduction after the end of the big winning executed triggered by the game ball entering the specific area during the small winning game. is determined by referring to the game state (time-reduced game state) at the start of the pattern variation that won the small hit, so it is possible to reduce the number of times corresponding to the time-reduced game state, and the player loses. can be configured to prevent In addition, in the case of such a configuration, even if a small hit is won in the final variation of the time reduction game state (symbol variation where the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c at the start of variation = 1), the time is shortened. Even if a small hit is won in a pattern variation before the final variation of the game state (a pattern variation in which the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c at the start of variation>1), at the start of the small winning game (for example, a small At the start of the winning start demonstration time), it will be in a non-time reduction game state.

(Sixth embodiment)
In the first embodiment (this embodiment), the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine (so-called small winning V gaming machine) that develops into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a small winning game is described in detail. The configuration of the small winning V game machine is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration of a small winning V gaming machine different from that of the first embodiment will be described in detail below as a sixth embodiment. Also, the above-described embodiments should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described.

In addition, since the sixth embodiment is a small winning V gaming machine similar to the first embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, with reference to FIG. 167, the time value relating to the small winning game in the sixth embodiment will be described in detail. In the same figure, in the non-reduced time gaming state, the case of winning a small win on the first main game side and the case of winning a small win on the second main game side are exemplified. The symbols 1 to 5 are small winning symbols on the first main game side, and the symbols 6 to 19 are small winning symbols on the second main game side.

Further, the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment determines that an illegal ball entry error has occurred when an illegal ball entry into the specific area C12-2 or the general area C12-3 in the first big prize opening C10 is detected. is configured as follows. Determining that an illegal ball entry error has occurred is sometimes referred to as occurrence of an illegal ball entry error. Illegal entry into the specific area C12-2 or general area C12-3 means that a game ball enters the specific area C12-2 or general area C12-3 at a timing that cannot occur in normal game progress. Specifically, when the game ball enters during the period when the first big winning hole C10 is specifically opened, regardless of the ball entry timing, the shutter when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 The number of closings (V ball entry probability) is configured to be the same design value (time value), but the game ball enters during the period when the first big winning hole C10 is specifically open. However, it was identified after an irregular situation occurred, such as when the game ball stayed in the first big winning hole C10 due to some influence (such as cheating by tilting the game machine to prevent the game ball from flowing down). Entering the area C12-2 or the general area C12-3. If the game ball enters the specific area C12-2 or the general area C12-3 after the illegal entry error non-judgment time has elapsed, an illegal entry error occurs. is configured to determine that is occurring. As described above, four general areas C12-3 are provided in the first big prize winning opening C10, and all of the general areas C12-3 are subject to determination of an illegal ball entry error.

Illegal entrance error non-judgment time is the elapsed time after the end of the small hit start demonstration time, and after the illegal entrance error non-judgment time has passed, the specific area C12-2 or general area C12-3 It is configured to determine that an illegal ball entry error has occurred when a game ball is entered. In addition, in the small winning game with direct V and the small winning game with a V ball entry probability of 5/5 at the time of reaching the rotating body C17, it is assumed that the game ball is entered, so an illegal ball entry error occurs. No (Illegal entry error non-judgment time itself is not provided). Note that the specific area where it is determined that an illegal ball entry error has occurred when a game ball enters after the illegal ball entry error non-determination time has passed may be only the specific area C12-2, Both the specific area C12-1 and the specific area C12-2 may be configured to be subject to the illegal entry error (also in the specific area C12-1, after the illegal entry error non-determination time has passed When a game ball is entered, it is determined that an illegal ball entry error has occurred).

In the sixth embodiment, it has an illegal entry error non-determination time, and satisfies the condition that it can be determined that an illegal entry error has occurred in the illegal entry error non-determination time (specific area C12- 2 or even if the game ball enters the general area C12-3), it is not determined that an illegal ball entry error has occurred, but after the illegal ball ball error non-determination time has elapsed (illegal ball ball error judgment time and ), it is determined that an illegal ball entry error has occurred when the conditions for determining that an illegal ball ball entry error has occurred are satisfied. In addition, during the small winning game, it satisfies the condition that it can be determined that an illegal ball entry error has occurred even at the small winning start demonstration time (the game ball enters the specific area C12-2 or the general area C12-3) It is configured not to determine that an illegal entry error has occurred even if it is, and the sum of the small winning start demonstration time and the above-mentioned illegal entry error non-judgment time is the illegal entry error non-judgment time. may be called. Thus, in the sixth embodiment, during the small winning game in which the illegal entry error non-judgment time is set, the period from the start of the small winning start demonstration time to the end of the illegal entry error non-judgment time is , it is determined that an illegal ball entry error has occurred even if the conditions for determining that an illegal ball entry error has occurred are satisfied (a game ball enters the specific area C12-2 or general area C12-3). It is a period that does not occur, and if the conditions for determining that an illegal ball entry error has occurred are satisfied after the illegal ball ball error non-judgment time has expired, it is determined that an illegal ball ball error has occurred. period.

In addition, it is configured such that an error notification is executed in a situation where an illegal ball entry error has occurred. D26 is configured to emit light in a lighting mode corresponding to an illegal ball-entering error, output a sound corresponding to an illegal ball-entering error from a speaker D24, and the like. The notification mode of the error notification is different from the vibration error described above, and the display of the effect display device SG, the light emission of the game effect lamp D26, and the sound from the speaker D24 may all be different. , may be partially different.

As shown in FIG. 167, first, in the small hit game triggered by the 1 _ 4R pattern 1 of the pattern 1, the small hit start demonstration time is 25 seconds, the long open standby time is 10 seconds, and the V when reaching the rotating body C17 The ball entry probability is 1/5, and the illegal ball entry error non-judgment time is 30 seconds.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 2 of pattern 2, the small hit start demo time is 20 seconds, the long open standby time is 20 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 2/ 5. The illegal entry error non-judgment time is 40 seconds.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 3 of the pattern 3, the small hit start demo time is 15 seconds, the long open standby time is 30 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 3/ 5. The illegal entry error non-judgment time is 50 seconds.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 4 of the pattern 4, the small hit start demo time is 10 seconds, the long open standby time is 40 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 4/ 5. The illegal entry error non-judgment time is 60 seconds.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 1_4R pattern 5 of the pattern 5, the small hit start demonstration time is 5 seconds, the long open standby time is 50 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 5/ 5. The illegal entry error non-judgment time is not provided because the V entry probability is 5/5.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 2_10R pattern 1 of the pattern 6 and the 2_10R pattern 2 of the pattern 7, the small hit start demonstration time is 5 seconds, the long open standby time is 0 seconds, and the direct V is small. It is a hit game. Illegal entry error non-determination time is not provided because it is a small hit game that becomes straight V.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 2_10R pattern 3 of pattern 8, the small hit start demonstration time is 25 seconds, the long open standby time is 10 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 1/ 5. The illegal entry error non-judgment time is 30 seconds.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 2_10R pattern 4 of pattern 9, the small hit start demonstration time is 20 seconds, the long open standby time is 20 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 2/ 5. The illegal entry error non-judgment time is 40 seconds.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 2_10R pattern 5 of the pattern 10, the small hit start demo time is 15 seconds, the long open standby time is 30 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 3/ 5. The illegal entry error non-judgment time is 50 seconds.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 2_10R pattern 6 of the pattern 11, the small hit start demonstration time is 10 seconds, the long open standby time is 40 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 4/ 5. The illegal entry error non-judgment time is 60 seconds.

Next, in the small hit game triggered by the 2_10R pattern 7 of the pattern 12, the small hit start demonstration time is 5 seconds, the long open standby time is 50 seconds, and the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 5/ 5. The illegal entry error non-judgment time is not provided because the V entry probability is 5/5.

Next, in the small winning game triggered by the small winning symbols on the second main game side of symbols 13 to 19, the small winning start demonstration time is 5 seconds, the long open standby time is 0 seconds, and the small winning is direct V. It is a game. Illegal entry error non-determination time is not provided because it is a small hit game that becomes straight V.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the game ball entering the first large winning opening C10 immediately after the start of the specific opening of the first large winning opening C10 reaches the rotating body C17 (reaches the specific area C12-2 ) The design value is within the range of 8 to 12 seconds (10 seconds on average). That is, the game ball that entered the first big winning hole C10 immediately after the start of the specific opening, after the end of the small hit start demonstration time, the rotating body at the timing obtained by adding 8 to 12 seconds to the long opening waiting time Designed to reach C17. In addition, the number of shutter closures is as follows: "When the small hit start demonstration time ends, the operation of the movable body starts → The number of shutter closures changes from 0 to 1 after 27 seconds from the start of operation of the movable body → 37 from the start of operation of the movable body. The number of closed shutters changes from 1 to 2 in seconds → The number of closed shutters changes from 2 to 3 in 47 seconds after the start of operation of the movable body → The number of closed shutters changes from 3 to 4 in 57 seconds after the start of operation of the movable body It is configured to be In addition, the long open standby time is 10 seconds for a small hit in which the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 1/5, and a small hit in which the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 2/5. 20 seconds for a hit, 30 seconds for a small hit with a V ball probability of 3/5 when reaching the rotating body C17, and a small hit with a V ball probability of 4/5 when reaching the rotating body C17 is 40 seconds. Also, the specific opening time is 2100 ms. It should be noted that these time values are merely examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed.

Because of this configuration, for example, in the small win on the first main game side of symbol 1, which is a small win in which the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 1/5, the small win starts. The first big winning hole C10 performs a specific opening in a period of 10 to 12.1 seconds from the end of the demonstration time, and the game ball entering the first big winning hole C10 during the specific opening is the small hit start demonstration time It reaches the rotating body C17 in a period of 18 to 24.1 seconds from the end of . Here, in the small hit on the first main game side of symbol 1, it is designed so that the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 with the shutter closing number being 0, and the shutter closing number is the small winning start demonstration time. changes from 0 to 1 at a timing 27 seconds after the end of . Because of this configuration, if the game ball flows down as designed, regardless of the ball entry timing into the first big winning hole C10, the game ball hits the rotating body C17 with the number of shutter closures being 0. It reaches the timing when 30 seconds or more, which is the illegal entry error non-judgment time, has passed since the end of the small hit start demonstration time (for example, from the timing when the game ball entered during the specific opening can reach the rotating body C17 If the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 at a timing exceeding 10 seconds or more), the number of shutter closures is increased by 1 or more from the original design value, and unintended V ball entry due to design may occur. Therefore, there is a possibility of fraud. Therefore, the illegal entry error non-determining time is set to the timing 20 seconds after the end of the long open waiting time corresponding to each small winning symbol.

It should be noted that in a small hit or a direct V small hit in which the V ball entry probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 5/5, if a game ball enters during the specific opening of the first big winning hole C10, it will always be V Since it is designed to enter the ball, the game ball rotates at the irregular timing as described above (timing 10 seconds or more after the timing at which the game ball entered during the specific opening can reach the rotating body C17) Even if the ball reaches the body C17, the V-ball will always be entered.

In addition, it may be configured to have an error other than the errors illustrated in this example. Even if a much longer time than the time has passed, the entry of the game ball into the specific area C12-2 and the general area C12-3 is not detected, or 10000 seconds after the small hit start demonstration time ends, etc. A specific error occurs when a game ball is detected entering the specific area C12-2 or the general area C12-3 after a time much longer than the illegal entry error non-judgment time. It may be configured so that it can be determined that it has been done. In addition, a specific error can be determined to be an illegal ball entry error, and can occur (determine) in a small hit where the V ball probability when reaching the rotating body C17 is 1/5 to 4/5. It may be configured, and it is not determined that it is an illegal ball entry error, and it can occur (determine) with a small hit with a V ball probability of 5/5 when reaching the rotating body C17 or a direct V small hit. may be configured. Further, since the error is different from the specific error, the illegal ball entry error may be referred to as a predetermined error.

Thus, in the sixth embodiment, the long open standby time is different depending on the small winning pattern, and as in the fourth embodiment, the longer the long open standby time, the longer the rotating body C17 reaches. It is configured so that the probability of entering the V ball is high (the number of times the shutter is closed is large). In other words, the execution start timing of the launch promotion effect is different according to the small winning pattern, and the execution start timing of the launch promotion effect (the time from the end of the small winning start demonstration time to the start of the launch promotion effect) is late. It is configured such that the V-ball entering probability at the time of reaching the rotating body C17 is higher (ie, the shutter is closed more frequently) as much as possible.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, it is configured so that the illegal entry error non-determination time can differ depending on the small winning pattern (depending on the V entry probability (shutter closing number) at the time of reaching the rotating body C17). More specifically, the longer the long open waiting time (or the higher the probability of V-ball entry when reaching the rotating body C17 (the higher the number of shutter closures), the more the illegal ball-entry error non-determination time is relative. It is configured to be relatively long. When the long opening standby time is long, the period from the end of the small winning start demonstration time to the specific opening of the first big winning opening C10 becomes relatively long, in other words, the first big winning opening. Since the timing at which it becomes easier to enter C10 is delayed, the illegal entry error non-judgment time is also set to a relatively long time, so that an error monitoring situation suitable for the type of small winning game can be constructed.

It should be noted that in the sixth embodiment, the long open standby time and the illegal entry error non-determination time correspond one-to-one. That is, regardless of whether it is a small win on the first main game side or a small win on the second main game side, if the long open standby time is the same, the illegal entry error non-judgment time is also the same. It is configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the types of time values for the long open waiting time and the illegal entry error, thereby reducing the data capacity. It should be noted that the long open waiting time and the illegal entry error non-judgment time may not correspond one-to-one, and the illegal entry error non-judgment time may be set for each small winning symbol.

Thus, in the sixth embodiment, the timing at which the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 during the small winning game is configured to be different depending on the small winning symbol that triggered the execution of the small winning game. Although it enhances the interest of the game, it is possible to appropriately execute error judgment and error notification according to the small winning pattern by changing the illegal entry error non-judgment time according to the small winning pattern. In addition, by not performing the same processing for small winning games that do not require error determination (small winning games that are direct V and small winning games that have a V ball probability of 5/5 when reaching the rotating body), Reduction in development man-hours and data volume can be realized.

<<Concrete example of configuration>>
The configurations relating to the display device described above may be combined in any way, and an example of combining one configuration or a plurality of configurations described above and the effects thereof will be described in detail below.

<Configuration 1>
During a predetermined small winning game, the operation of the movable body starts at the timing when the small winning start demonstration time ends.
During a predetermined small winning game, when the long opening standby time elapses from the timing when the small winning start demonstration time ends, the first big winning opening C10 performs a specific opening that makes it easier for the game ball to enter.
As the time elapses from the start of the operation of the movable body (the longer the long open waiting time is, the more the number of shutter closures increases, and the V ball is entered when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17. Probability (expected value) increases.
It has a plurality of types of long waiting time for opening, and can be different depending on the type of the small winning pattern that triggered the small winning game.

<effect>
Without using the count number of the game balls entering the first big winning hole C10, it is possible to change the substantial number of closed shutters according to the small winning pattern and to deal with various substantial numbers of closed shutters. Various effects can be performed by

<Configuration 2>
During a predetermined small winning game, a simulated ready-to-win performance (which may be called a specific performance) is executed from the start of the small winning start demonstration time to the end of the long open waiting time.
The shutter closing number when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 is M ( The average value of the small winning start demonstration times of M>N) is relatively short.
The shutter closing number when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17 is M (M >N), the average value of the long open waiting time of the small hit is relatively short.

<effect>
Without using the count number of the game balls entering the first big winning hole C10, it is possible to change the substantial number of closed shutters according to the small winning pattern and to deal with various substantial numbers of closed shutters. Various effects can be performed by

<Configuration 3>
It has a plurality of types of simulated reach effects (for example, four types of penguin reach, sheep reach, lion reach, and giraffe reach).
An expected value of a substantial number of shutter closures of a small hit in which a certain simulated reach performance with a chance increase is executed, and a simulated reach performance without a chance increase whose expectation is one higher than the certain simulated reach performance are executed. It is the same as the expected value of the actual shutter closing number of the small hit.
There is a difference between the execution time of a certain simulated reach performance without chance increase and the execution time of a certain simulated reach performance with chance increase.
The execution time of a certain simulated ready-to-win performance with chance up is the same as the execution time of the simulated ready-to-win performance with one higher expectation than the certain simulated ready-to-win performance without chance up.

<effect>
Without using the count number of the game balls entering the first big winning hole C10, it is possible to change the actual number of closed shutters according to the small winning pattern, and to deal with various actual numbers of closed shutters. Various effects can be performed by
Even when the player visually recognizes the simulated ready-to-win performance, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which is the V ball entry probability of the small winning game being executed, and until the result notification performance is executed, the player continues to execute the big win. can sustain the expectation of

<Configuration 4>
A small winning game in which the same (same system) simulated ready-to-win performance is performed in a small winning game having the same substantial number of shutter closures, and a simulated ready-to-win performance with a small number of chance-up times is executed when the number of times of chance up is different. In the case of , the small winning start demonstration time is relatively long.
When comparing small-hit games with different V-ball entry probabilities (number of shutter closures) that have the same (same system) simulated reach effect and the same number of chances, the execution time of the simulated reach effect is the same. On the other hand, the small winning start demonstration time and the long open waiting time are different.

<effect>
Without using the count number of the game balls entering the first big winning hole C10, it is possible to change the substantial number of closed shutters according to the small winning pattern and to deal with various substantial numbers of closed shutters. Various effects can be performed by
Even when the player visually recognizes the simulated ready-to-win performance, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which is the V ball entry probability of the small winning game being executed, and until the result notification performance is executed, the player continues to execute the big win. can sustain the expectation of

<Configuration 5>
Winning in a predetermined game state (for example, time-reduced game state), small hit start demo time related to a predetermined small win on the first main game side, and in a predetermined game state (for example, time-reduced game state) It is the same as the small win start demo time related to the predetermined small win on the second main game side that has been won. As a specific example of the predetermined small win, a small win in which the number of shutter closures when reaching the rotating body C17 is the same can be exemplified.
Winning in a predetermined game state (for example, time-reduced game state), a small hit start demo time related to a predetermined small win on the first main game side, and a specific game state (for example, non-time-reduced game state) It is different from the small win start demonstration time related to the predetermined small win on the first main game side, which is won by winning.
<effect>
Without using the count number of the game balls entering the first big winning hole C10, it is possible to change the actual number of closed shutters according to the small winning pattern, and to deal with various actual numbers of closed shutters. Various effects can be performed by
Appropriate performance can be executed according to the situation, and the game can be progressed without the player being confused.

<Configuration 6>
This pachinko game machine develops into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a small winning game (a so-called small winning V game machine).
Both the first main game side and the second main game side have a small winning game in which a game ball can enter a specific area.
The average value of the number of times of time reduction after the end of the jackpot triggered by the small win of the first main game side won in the non-time-reduced game state is the small win of the second main game side won in the non-time-reduced game state. It is less than the average value of the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot that was triggered by the hit.
The average value of the number of times of time saving after the end of the big win triggered by the small win of the first main game side won in the time shortened game state and the small win of the second main game side won in the time shortened game state It is the same as the average value of the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot executed as a trigger.
If a small win is won in a variation before the final variation of the time shortening game state (for example, a variation in which the time shortening game state is left and the number of times of time saving is three times remaining), the small win game is played even after the pattern variation is finished. The game is in a time-reduced game state even during execution.
When a small hit is won in the final variation of the time reduction game state (symbol variation where the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c at the start of variation = 1), it becomes a non-time reduction game state after the end of the symbol variation, and a small winning game Even during execution, the game is in a non-time reduction game state.

<effect>
Even when a predetermined small win is won in the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state, a predetermined small in the variation before the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state (for example, variation in which the number of remaining time-saving is 3 times). To provide a game machine capable of making the number of times of time saving after the end of a big win the same even when winning a prize, preventing the downgrade of the number of times of time saving after the end of a big win, and not causing a loss to a player. be able to.

<Configuration 7>
This pachinko game machine develops into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a small winning game (a so-called small winning V game machine).
The execution start timing of the launch promotion effect differs depending on the small winning pattern, and the later the execution start timing of the launch promotion effect (the time from the end of the small hit start demonstration time to the start of the launch promotion effect), the more rotation The probability of V ball entry when reaching body C17 is high (the number of times the shutter is closed is large).
If the game ball enters the specific area C12-2 or the general area C12-3 after the illegal entry error non-judgment time, which is the elapsed time after the small hit start demonstration time ends, illegal It is determined that a ball entry error has occurred.
Depending on the small winning pattern (depending on the V ball probability (shutter closing number) when reaching the rotating body C17), the illegal ball ball error non-determination time can be different.
In a small winning game with a direct V and a small winning game with a V ball probability of 5/5 at the time of reaching the rotating body C17, it is assumed that the game ball will enter, so an illegal ball entering error does not occur ( There is no illegal entry error non-judgment time).

<effect>
The timing at which the game ball reaches the rotator C17 during the small winning game can be changed according to the small winning pattern that triggered the execution of the small winning game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. By varying the illegal entry error non-determination time according to the small winning pattern, it is possible to appropriately execute error determination and error notification according to the small winning pattern, and a small winning game that does not require error determination. (Small winning games with direct V and small winning games with a V ball probability of 5/5 when reaching the rotating body) are not processed in the same way, thereby realizing reductions in development man-hours and data volume. can be done.

<Configuration 8>
This pachinko game machine develops into a special game when a ball enters a specific area during a small winning game (a so-called small winning V game machine).
During execution of the simulated ready-to-win performance (during the small win start demonstration time or during the long open waiting time), a button performance is executed to prompt the player to operate the sub-input button SB.
It has a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibrations of the gaming machine, and when the vibration sensor detects unauthorized vibrations of the gaming machine, it can be determined that a vibration error has occurred.
Error notification is executed in a situation where a vibration error occurs.
As the time elapses after the start of the operation of the movable body (the longer the long open standby time is, the more the number of shutter closures increases, and the V ball is entered when the game ball reaches the rotating body C17. Probability (expected value) increases.
It has a plurality of types of long waiting time for opening, and can be different depending on the type of the small winning pattern that triggered the small winning game.
It has a vibration error non-detection period and a vibration error detection period, and a vibration error occurs even if the conditions for determining that the vibration error has occurred are satisfied in the vibration error non-detection period. On the other hand, if the condition for determining that the vibration error has occurred is satisfied during the vibration error detection period, it can be determined that the vibration error has occurred.
During execution of the small winning game, the vibration error non-detection period from the start of the small winning start demonstration time to the predetermined timing before the end of the long opening waiting time (may be before the launch promotion effect is executed) , and the vibration error detection period is from the predetermined timing (after the long waiting time for opening has ended, or after the launch promotion effect has been executed) to a specific timing.
The timing of the specific opening of the first big prize opening C10 (long opening standby time from the end of the small winning end demonstration time to the specific opening) is configured to vary depending on the small winning pattern, The predetermined timing (the time from the start of the small winning game to the predetermined timing) relating to the vibration error is also configured to differ depending on the stopped small winning pattern (the small winning game being executed).

<effect>
It is possible to set the start timing of the vibration error detection period according to the small winning pattern that triggered the small winning game.
Vibration (according to the V ball probability) corresponding to the small winning pattern that triggered the small winning game without impeding the playability of the button performance, which is a player participation type performance, by the error notification of the vibration error. An error detection period can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize highly reliable fraud monitoring while securing the interest of the game during execution of the small winning game.

There is a problem that the control method needs to be further improved in order to improve interest.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (1) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
A first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporarily stopped display is possible. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the first performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first performance symbol is confirmed. A special stop display mode that is not displayed when temporarily stopped is configured to be temporarily stopped and displayed,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that the second effect symbols variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period. be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (1-2) is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous for the player;
A game information transmission means for transmitting necessary game information to the sub-game part side when the performance display is executed on the sub-game part side, and the second identification information is variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed. and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling the first performance symbols to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the second performance symbols in the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed in the performance display unit;
Both the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern can be variably displayed within the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. and is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the stop display of
When the second identification information is stop-displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the stop display of
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
The first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain effect period, and the temporary When the symbol for the first effect is stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the pattern for the first effect is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pattern for the first effect A special stop display mode that is not displayed when the symbol is definitely stop-displayed is configured to be temporarily stop-displayed,
A pachinko game characterized in that the second performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period are configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stop-displayed within the certain one performance period. machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (2) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying a plurality of types of first effect symbols on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), one type or a combination of multiple types of first effect symbols is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, first performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to stop display on the performance display device SG);
After variably displaying a plurality of types of second effect symbols on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), one type or a combination of a plurality of types of second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, Second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to stop display on the performance display device SG),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed within a certain one performance period, they are definitely stopped and displayed, and within the one certain performance period. is configured to deterministically stop display after the second production pattern is variably displayed,
A first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporarily stopped display is possible. When it is displayed, it is configured to be variably displayed again within the one effect period, and when the first effect pattern is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, at the time of the stop display A special stop display mode indicating that the special game will not be executed while indicating that there is a possibility of execution of the special game after that can be stop-displayed as the first effect symbol that is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. is composed of
A second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period cannot be temporarily stop-displayed before it is definitely stop-displayed within the certain effect period, or Even if the temporary stop display is performed before the definitive stop display within the period, the special stop display mode is used as the second effect symbol that is a combination of one type or a plurality of types. The special stop display mode is configured not to be stop-displayed as the second effect symbol that is a combination of one type or a plurality of types even when the second effect symbol is definitely stop-displayed and cannot be stop-displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (3) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
A first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporarily stopped display is possible. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the first performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first performance symbol is confirmed. A special stop display mode that is not displayed when temporarily stopped is configured to be temporarily stopped and displayed,
The second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period,
As the display state of the first effect symbols within a given effect period, there are a first display state in which the variably displayed first effect symbols are visible to the player, and a variably displayed first effect symbol. is hidden, or a second display state in which the symbols for the first effect are more difficult to see for the player than the first display state, and the second effect within a certain effect period The pattern for use is configured to be displayed at least in the second display state,
When the special stop display mode is temporarily stop-displayed as the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, a specification that cannot be included when the first effect symbol is definitely stop-displayed It is configured to be a first special stop display mode that includes the first effect symbol of the type or a second special stop display mode that does not include the first effect symbol of the specific type,
When the first effect symbol is temporarily stop-displayed within a certain effect period, the second special stop display mode is temporarily stopped rather than the first special stop display mode is temporarily stop-displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the execution expectation of the special game after the end of the one performance period is higher when the pachinko game machine is statically displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (4) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information are satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, symbol reservation means MJ32) that temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that the reservation occurs;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, a decision is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are made based on the result of the decision. game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). Display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and the design for performance can be variably displayed within a certain one performance period,
The performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the one performance period, and are temporarily stop-displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the design for performance is definitely or provisionally stopped and displayed, the definite or provisional stop While indicating that the special game will not be executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating the possibility of executing the special game after the definite or provisional stop display is definite or provisional It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed on
After the occurrence of a certain hold and before the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to the certain hold are satisfied, if the predetermined conditions are met, the certain hold is designated as a specific hold, and at the time when the certain specific hold occurs , if there is one or more holds that satisfy the conditions for starting variable display of identification information prior to the specific hold, the conditions for starting variable display of identification information related to the pending hold for earlier consumption exist. Within one effect period corresponding to the case of being satisfied, the special stop display mode is definitely stop-displayed as the effect symbol only when the effect symbol is definitely stop-displayed, while the identification related to the specific hold is Within one effect period corresponding to the condition for satisfying the variable display start condition of information, the special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect pattern only when the effect pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (5) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information are satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, suspension control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that suspension occurs;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, a decision is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are made based on the result of the decision. game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). Display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and the design for performance can be variably displayed within a certain one performance period,
The performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the one performance period, and are temporarily stop-displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the design for performance is definitely or provisionally stopped and displayed, the definite or provisional stop While indicating that the special game will not be executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating the possibility of executing the special game after the definite or provisional stop display is definite or provisional It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed on
If the special stop display mode is stop-displayed as the performance symbol when the performance symbols are definitely or provisionally stop-displayed within a certain performance period, at least one special performance symbol and the special It is configured to be combined with a plurality of normal production patterns that are different types from the production patterns,
After the occurrence of a certain hold and before the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to the certain hold are satisfied, if the predetermined conditions are met, the certain hold is designated as a specific hold, and at the time when the certain specific hold occurs , if there is one or more holds that satisfy the conditions for starting variable display of identification information prior to the specific hold, the conditions for starting variable display of identification information related to the pending hold for earlier consumption exist. When the special stop display mode is definitively or temporarily stop-displayed within one performance period corresponding to the case of being satisfied, the plurality of normal performance symbols cannot be of the same type, while the identification related to the specific suspension When the special stop display mode is definitively or provisionally stop-displayed within one performance period corresponding to the satisfaction of the information variable display start condition, the plurality of normal performance symbols can be of the same type. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (6) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state attached to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), and when displaced to the open state, the second start port (for example, the second A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult to enter the ball compared to the state where it is impossible to enter or in the open state;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
First game content determining means (e.g., game content decision means MN);
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is variably displayed and then the first identification information is displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
Second game content determining means (e.g., game content decision means MN);
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second identification information is displayed. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the second identification information;
After the winning judgment result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). Display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and the design for performance can be variably displayed within a certain one performance period. has been
The performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the one performance period, and are temporarily stop-displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the design for performance is definitely or provisionally stopped and displayed, the definite or provisional stop While indicating that the special game will not be executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating the possibility of executing the special game after the definite or provisional stop display is definite or provisional It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed on
Within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display, and within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the special stop The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display mode is configured so that the ratio of the fixed display or the provisional stop display is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (7) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information are satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, suspension control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that suspension occurs;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, a decision is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are made based on the result of the decision. game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
If there is a predetermined number of reservations at any timing within a certain production period, the first production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period are displayed within the certain production period. It is performed when the conditions for starting variable display of identification information related to any of the predetermined number of reservations are satisfied after the variable display is continued even after the end of the one performance period without being definitely stopped and displayed. Within one performance period, while the first performance symbol that is continuously displayed in a variable manner is definitely stopped and displayed,
Even if there is a predetermined number of reservations at any timing within a certain production period, the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period are displayed within the certain production period. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be definitely stopped and displayed at.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (8) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
There are a plurality of types of first performance symbols, and when the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the win/fail judgment is winning, the combination of the first performance symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the success/failure determination is non-winning, the combination of the first performance symbols that are not of the same type is stopped and displayed,
There are a plurality of types of second performance symbols, and when the second performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the winning judgment is winning, the combination of the second performance symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the success/failure determination is non-winning, when the second performance symbols are stopped and displayed, the combination of the second performance symbols that are not of the same type is configured to be stopped and displayed,
The combination of the second performance symbols that can be stop-displayed when the result of the win-or-fail judgment is non-winner is larger than the total number of combinations of the first performance symbols that can be stop-displayed when the result of the win-fail judgment is non-won. It is configured so that the total number is smaller,
The effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) has a plurality of types of effect display modes as effect display modes that are dependent when controlling the effect display contents displayed,
When displaying a certain first effect symbol among the plurality of types of first effect symbols, a display attribute related to the certain first effect symbol in a certain type of effect display mode, and a certain type Different from the display attribute related to the certain first effect pattern in a different type of effect display mode from the effect display mode,
When displaying a certain second effect symbol among the plurality of types of second effect symbols, a display attribute related to the certain second effect symbol in a certain type of effect display mode, and the certain type The display attribute of the certain second effect pattern in a different type of effect display mode is configured to be different from the effect display mode,
The result of the success/failure determination is non-won than the probability that the certain first performance symbol is included in the combination of the first performance symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the success/failure determination is non-win. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the combination of the second performance symbols that can be stop-displayed in any case has a higher probability that the certain second performance symbols are included.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (9) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first pending number image and the second pending number image,
A pachinko game characterized in that the first reserved image and the second reserved image are configured not to be displayed in the effect display unit in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (10) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation image and the second reservation image are configured to have different display modes,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to be different display modes. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (11) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
In the normal game state, the number of first pending images corresponding to the number of holdings of the first holding and the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of holdings of the second holding can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold is not displayed on the effect display unit, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold is displayed on the effect display unit. is viewable and
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first reserved number image and the second reserved number image can be displayed on the effect display section in both the normal game state and the specific game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (12) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
It is performed when the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reservations that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied Display of a variation-compatible image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is performed,
In the normal game state, when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image can be displayed, and when the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it does not.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (13) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved number image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the effect display unit, the second effect pattern and the first reserved image are configured so that they are not displayed in an overlapping manner,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the effect display part is configured so that the second effect pattern and the first reserved number image are not displayed in an overlapping manner.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (14) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The first pending number indicating the pending number of the first pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The second hold number indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operation state of the operation member while the variable display is stopped or during the variable display,
a volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display unit when the volume level can be adjusted;
The volume adjustment image, the first effect pattern, and the second effect pattern can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern, and the display priority of the second effect pattern is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern,
the volume adjustment image, the first pending image or the second pending image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image can be displayed simultaneously,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first reserved image or the second reserved image, and the display priority of the first reserved number image or the second reserved number image is the first reserved image or the second reserved image is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
While the fluctuation display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second effect pattern do not overlap,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the sound volume adjustment image and the pattern for second performance do not overlap even during the variable display.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (15) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second pending number when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold count image or the second hold count image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (16) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start port than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image when the display mode of the image is the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the specific display mode is more likely than the final display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image is the first reserved number immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the image is in a specific display mode,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image will be in the specific display mode as the final display mode is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of becoming a specific display mode as the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reservation number image when the first retention number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display is the variable display It is the same as the probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start It is a pachinko machine that features.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (17) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal game state is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific game state The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbols that can be displayed after the display mode becomes the special display mode is larger than the total number of combination patterns.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (18) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second start port,
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as a display update of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
When the execution of the pending image movement effect is started during execution of the pending image generation effect, the pending image generation effect and the pending image moving effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image generation effect being executed, and when execution of the pending image generation effect is started during execution of the pending image movement effect, the pending image movement effect and the pending image generation effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image movement effect being executed;
When a new variable display starts during the execution of the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image Execute a second update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image after the execution is finished,
When there is a new entry in the first start port or the second start port during the execution of the second update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first hold number image or the second The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image is executed after the execution of the second update display of the two reservation number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (19) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first pending number image and the second pending number image,
A pachinko game characterized in that the first reserved image and the second reserved image are configured not to be displayed in the effect display unit in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (20) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation image and the second reservation image are configured to have different display modes,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to be different display modes,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold count image or the second hold count image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (21) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
In the normal game state, the number of first pending images corresponding to the number of holdings of the first holding and the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of holdings of the second holding can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold is not displayed on the effect display unit, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold is displayed on the effect display unit. is viewable and
In both the normal game state and the specific game state, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to be displayed on the effect display unit,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (22) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A first area and a second area different from the first area are provided as game areas in which game balls can flow down,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
It is performed when the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reservations that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied Display of a variation-compatible image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is performed,
In the normal game state, when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image can be displayed, and when the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image is displayed. is configured not to
A first notification image for notifying that the game ball should be shot toward the first area can be displayed on the effect display unit,
A second notification image for notifying that the game ball should be shot toward the second area can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the first pending number image is updated in the specific game state, it is configured to display the second notification image,
The second notification image can be displayed overlapping with the first production pattern, while the second production pattern, the first reserved image, the second reserved image, the first reserved number image, the second reserved number image and is configured not to display duplicates,
Regardless of whether the first reserved number image is updated in the specific game state, the image should be different from the first notification image and the second notification image, and the game ball should be shot toward the second area side. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that a special notification image for notifying that a special notification image can be displayed on the effect display section.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (23) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved number image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the effect display unit, the second effect pattern and the first reserved image are configured so that they are not displayed in an overlapping manner,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the effect display part is configured so that the second effect pattern and the first reserved number image are not displayed in an overlapping manner.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (24) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). Second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start port than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operation state of the operation member while the variable display is stopped or during the variable display,
a volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display unit when the volume level can be adjusted;
The volume adjustment image, the first effect pattern, and the second effect pattern can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern, and the display priority of the second effect pattern is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern,
the volume adjustment image, the first pending image or the second pending image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image can be displayed simultaneously,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first reserved image or the second reserved image, and the display priority of the first reserved number image or the second reserved number image is the first reserved image or the second reserved image is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
While the fluctuation display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second effect pattern do not overlap,
It is configured so that the volume adjustment image and the pattern for the second effect do not overlap even during the variable display,
The total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the first performance symbols in the normal game state is configured to be greater than the total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the second performance symbols in the normal game state. It is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (25) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is one of the remaining first holds, is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that
The suspension change effect is executed during the variable display of the first identification information under the condition that the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and the plurality of first suspensions remain. In the case, while the display mode of the first pending image displayed corresponding to the change target pending can be changed, the display mode of the first pending number image is configured not to be changed,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (26) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start port than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image when the display mode of the image is the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the specific display mode is more likely than the final display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image is the first reserved number immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the image is in a specific display mode,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image will be in the specific display mode as the final display mode is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of becoming a specific display mode as the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reservation number image when the first retention number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display is the variable display It is the same as the probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first retention number image when the first retention number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the first performance symbols in the normal game state is configured to be greater than the total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the second performance symbols in the normal game state. It is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (27) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal game state is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific game state It is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbols that can be displayed after the special display mode as the display mode,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes depending on which effect display contents to be displayed in the effect display unit are determined,
The first display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first effect pattern corresponding to the first effect mode, and the second display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first effect pattern corresponding to the second effect mode, are different. It is configured to be a display mode,
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the first rendering mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the first rendering mode, the specific first rendering pattern, which is the first display mode, can be variably displayed. is configured to
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the second performance mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the second performance mode, the pattern for the specific first performance, which is the second display mode, can be variably displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (28) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
The number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending pending can be displayed in the first pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the second pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the number of remaining first holds, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the number of remaining second holds, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is one of the remaining first holds, is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that
The suspension change effect is executed during the variable display of the first identification information under the condition that the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and the plurality of first suspensions remain. In the case, while the display mode of the first pending image displayed corresponding to the change target pending can be changed, the display mode of the first pending number image is configured not to be changed,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second start port,
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as a display update of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
When the execution of the pending image movement effect is started during execution of the pending image generation effect, the pending image generation effect and the pending image moving effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image generation effect being executed, and when execution of the pending image generation effect is started during execution of the pending image movement effect, the pending image movement effect and the pending image generation effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image movement effect being executed;
When a new variable display starts during the execution of the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image Execute a second update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image after the execution is finished,
When there is a new entry in the first start port or the second start port during the execution of the second update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first hold number image or the second The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image is executed after the execution of the second update display of the two reservation number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (29) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to be different,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A notice effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured differently depending on the contents of the pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (30) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to be different,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be different depending on whether the type of is a look-ahead performance A or a look-ahead performance B.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (31) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
A case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, and a case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects. The probability that the specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the prefetching effect is relatively higher when M types of prefetching effects are executed among the types of prefetching effects. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (32) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
In a situation where a specific hold, which is a first hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, exists, a look-ahead effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the specific hold can be executed by the effect display unit,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
In the case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects are executed, and in the case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, a plurality of types of prefetching effects are executed. The probability of the special display mode being displayed in the variable display relating to the hold which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect is relatively higher when M types of look-ahead effect are executed among the types of look-ahead effect. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (33) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operation member, within one effect period, and the operation of the operating member is performed while the operation prompting effect is being displayed, thereby supporting a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
The probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the first operation promoting effect is displayed when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed when the second operation promoting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing after the timing at which the 2-operation promotion effect is displayed is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (34) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operation member, within one effect period, and the operation of the operating member is performed while the operation prompting effect is being displayed, thereby supporting a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
At least a first operation promoting effect and a second operation promoting effect are provided as types of the operation promoting effect, and when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, the timing is after the timing when the first operation promoting effect is displayed. and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation prompting effect is displayed when the second operation prompting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (35) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It has a plurality of types of development performances that are performances to be executed after establishment of ready-to-win, and has a plurality of types of post-reach performances that can occur after establishment of ready-to-win and before execution of development performance,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the probability of displaying a special display mode after the occurrence of the after-reach performance is different depending on which of the plurality of kinds of the after-reach performance has occurred. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (36) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes dependent upon determining the effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the second effect mode are configured to be different. ,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the second effect mode are configured to be the same. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (37) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to be different,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A notice effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. are configured differently depending on the content of
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of the specific display mode being displayed within a given effect period varies according to the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (38) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to be different,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, the specific display mode A is selected as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern from among the plurality of types of specific display modes, or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is selected as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. are configured differently depending on the type of
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of the specific display mode being displayed within a given effect period varies according to the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (39) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
A case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, and a case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects. The probability that the specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the prefetching effect is relatively higher when M types of prefetching effects are executed among the types of prefetching effects. and
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of the specific display mode being displayed within a given effect period varies according to the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (40) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It has a plurality of types of effect display formats, and when performing effect display on the effect display part, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the set effect display format,
Depending on which one of the plurality of types of effect display formats is set, whether or not the special display mode is displayed when the re-change is executed, or whether the re-change is executed It is configured so that the display mode of the special display mode displayed when it is displayed is different,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
A case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, and a case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects. It is constructed so that the probability of displaying the special display mode in the variable display related to the holding which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect is relatively higher when M types of look-ahead effect are executed out of the types of look-ahead effect. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (41) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The probability that the specific display mode is displayed within the certain effect period is different depending on the number of times it is displayed as the mode,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operation member, within one effect period, and the operation of the operating member is performed while the operation prompting effect is being displayed, thereby supporting a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
At least a first operation promoting effect and a second operation promoting effect are provided as types of the operation promoting effect, and when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, the timing is after the timing when the first operation promoting effect is displayed. and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation prompting effect is displayed when the second operation prompting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (42) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It has a plurality of types of effect display formats, and when performing effect display on the effect display part, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the set effect display format,
Depending on which one of the plurality of types of effect display formats is set, whether or not the special display mode is displayed when the re-change is executed, or whether the re-change is executed It is configured so that the display mode of the special display mode displayed when it is displayed is different,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operation member, within one effect period, and the operation of the operating member is performed while the operation prompting effect is being displayed, thereby supporting a plurality of types of operations. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
At least a first operation promoting effect and a second operation promoting effect are provided as types of the operation promoting effect, and when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, the timing is after the timing when the first operation promoting effect is displayed. and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation prompting effect is displayed when the second operation prompting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (43) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes depending on which effect display contents to be displayed in the effect display unit are determined,
Expectation level of execution of special game when special display mode is displayed N (N>0) times within one rendering period in first rendering mode and special display mode within one rendering period in first rendering mode is displayed N+1 times, the difference in the execution expectation of the special game is the execution of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N>0) times within a given effect period in the second effect mode. It is configured to be smaller than the difference between the degree of expectation and the degree of expectation of execution of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N+1 times within one performance period in the second performance mode,
It has a plurality of types of development performances that are performances to be executed after establishment of ready-to-win, and has a plurality of types of post-reach performances that can occur after establishment of ready-to-win and before execution of development performance,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed after the occurrence of the after-reach performance, or the probability of displaying the special display mode, according to which of the plurality of types of after-reach performance has occurred. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (44) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, the special display mode A among the plurality of types of special display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the special display mode B among the types of special display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the special display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type of is prefetching effect A or prefetching effect B,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes dependent upon determining the effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit,
A switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the first effect mode and a switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the second effect mode are different,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the second effect mode are the same. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine (A1) according to aspect (45) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and after the performance symbols are variably displayed in the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the performance symbols is displayed on the performance display section. Control so that it can be displayed with
At least one or more production patterns are provided with numbers as constituent elements of the production patterns,
When a power failure occurs during the variable display of the identification information scheduled to stop and display the identification information in the predetermined manner, it is displayed when the variable display of the new identification information is started after recovery from the power failure. and new identification information after recovery from the power interruption in the event of a power interruption during variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stop-displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode. It is configured to be the same as the number combination of the production pattern displayed at the start of the variable display of
It has multiple types of production modes when special games are not executed,
A new identification after recovery from the power interruption in the event of a power interruption during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner under a situation in which a certain production mode is set. The number combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the information, and the identification information scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined mode under the condition that the certain performance mode is set. If the number combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information after recovery from the power failure in the event of a power failure during the variable display is the same. Also, in the situation where the certain production mode is set, when the identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, when the power is interrupted during the variable display of the identification information, after the power is restored from the interruption The display format of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information, and the schedule for the identification information to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode under the circumstances where the certain performance mode is set. In the case where the power is cut off during the variable display of the identification information, the display format of the performance pattern displayed when the variable display of the new identification information is started after recovering from the power cut can be different. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine (A2) according to aspect (46) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
Identification information display that, when the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, controls the identification information display section to display the identification information variably and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number related to the certain hold. a control means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and after the performance symbols are variably displayed in the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the performance symbols is displayed on the performance display section. Control so that it can be displayed with
It is possible to execute a final announcement effect for notifying, during the variable display of the identification information, that it is certain that the variable display of the identification information will be stop-displayed in the predetermined manner,
It is possible to execute a definite look-ahead effect for notifying that there is a winning suspension in which the execution of the special game is definite among the remaining suspensions, before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to the winning suspension is satisfied. can be,
When the power supply is interrupted during the variable display of the identification information in which the fixed advance notice effect is executed, and the power supply is recovered after that, the change display of the identification information that triggered the execution of the fixed advance notice effect is performed in the predetermined manner. The combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the execution of the special game executed by the stop display is the performance symbol combination A,
When a power failure occurs during the identification information variable display in which the confirmed look-ahead effect is executed, and then the power is restored from the power-off, the identification information variation display corresponding to the winning suspension that triggered the execution of the fixed look-ahead effect. is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, the combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the end of execution of the special game is the performance symbol combination B,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the performance symbol combination A and the performance symbol combination B are configured so that the performance symbol combinations are different.

The pachinko gaming machine (A3) according to aspect (47) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
The rendering movable body is capable of executing a predetermined rendering operation within the one rendering period, and visibility of rendering display contents displayed on the rendering display unit by the rendering movable body executing the predetermined rendering operation. is configured to reduce
The rendering movable body is configured to be able to perform a predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after power is restored,
When the movable body for performance executes the predetermined performance operation within the one performance period, the first design for performance is hidden, while the second design for performance can be displayed. ,
When the performance movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after the power supply is restored, both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be displayed. has been
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information in which the performance movable body is scheduled to perform the predetermined performance operation in the one performance period to the start of the execution of the predetermined performance operation is the power supply interruption. From the start of the execution of the predetermined initializing action in the case where the rendering movable body executes the predetermined initializing action within a predetermined period after returning from the start to the end of the execution of the predetermined initializing action The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be longer than the period of .

The pachinko gaming machine (A4) according to aspect (48) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
In the normal game state and when the combination of the symbols for the first effect is displayed outside the one effect period, when the power is cut off, the symbols for the first effect to be displayed after the power is turned off are displayed. The combination is configured so that the first performance symbols can be displayed in a display format different from the display format of the first performance symbols before the power interruption occurs,
In the specific game state and when the combination of the symbols for the first effect is displayed outside the one effect period, if the power is cut off, the symbols for the first effect to be displayed after the power is turned off will be displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the combination is configured to be the first performance symbols in the same display format as the first performance symbols before the power cutoff occurs.

The pachinko gaming machine (A5) according to aspect (49) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
Identification information display that, when the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, controls the identification information display section to display the identification information variably and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number related to the certain hold. a control means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and after the performance symbols are variably displayed in the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the performance symbols is displayed on the performance display section. Control so that it can be displayed with
If the power is cut off during the identification information change display in a situation where the identification information that triggers the transition from the specific game state to the normal game state is displayed and the change does not remain and does not occur again, the relevant When the combination of performance symbols is displayed after the power is turned off, the combination of performance symbols is displayed once in the display format corresponding to the specific game state, and then displayed in the display format corresponding to the normal game state. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to display a combination of performance symbols at the same time.

The pachinko gaming machine (A6) according to the aspect (50) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
In response to occurrence of a predetermined error, a predetermined error screen can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined error screen and the combination of the first effect symbols are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined error screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbols,
When the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first effect symbols and the combination of the second effect symbols are displayed at the same time, the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the first effect symbols overlap. is configured so that the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the second effect pattern do not overlap,
Even when the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first performance symbols and the combination of the second performance symbols are displayed at the same time, the volume adjustment screen is displayed based on the predetermined player operation to adjust the volume level. is adjustable and
When the combination of the volume adjustment screen, the first effect pattern and the combination of the second effect pattern are displayed at the same time, the display of the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect pattern,
When the combination of the volume adjustment screen, the first effect pattern and the combination of the second effect pattern are displayed at the same time, the display area of the volume adjustment screen and the display area of the first effect pattern overlap, but the volume adjustment screen This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display area and the display area of the pattern for second performance are configured so as not to overlap each other.

The pachinko gaming machine (A7) according to aspect (51) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
It is possible to display an operation instruction effect to prompt the operation of a predetermined operation member within the one effect period on the effect display unit, and it is possible to detect that the predetermined operation member is operated under the situation where the operation instruction effect is displayed. Correspondingly, a predetermined effect can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the operation instruction effect and the first effect symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the operation instruction effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol,
In a situation in which the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member under the condition in which the operation instruction effect is displayed, the predetermined effect, the first effect pattern, and the second effect. When the symbols are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect pattern, while the display of the predetermined effect is higher than the second effect symbol. display priority is lower than the display of ,
The display area for the predetermined effect is larger than the display area for the operation instruction effect, and while the display area for the operation instruction effect and the display area for the first effect pattern may overlap, the display area for the operation instruction effect and the display area for the first effect pattern may overlap. It does not overlap with the display area of the second production pattern,
In the situation in which the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member under the condition in which the operation instruction effect is displayed, the display area of the predetermined effect is the first effect symbol. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display area and the display area of the pattern for second performance are overlapped.

The pachinko gaming machine (A8) according to the aspect (52) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
Under the specific game state, the first change state and the first change state have at least a second change state in which the selection tendency of the change display time of the identification information is different, and under the normal game state. Both the first variation state and the second variation state have at least a normal variation state in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different,
It is possible to shift from the specific game state and the first fluctuation state to the specific game state and the second fluctuation state, and from the specific game state and the second fluctuation state to the normal game state and the normal fluctuation state.
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
The display format of the first effect symbols when the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state, and the combination of the first effect symbols in the specific game state and the second variation state The display format is the same as the display format of the symbols for the first effect when displayed, but for the first effect when the combination of the symbols for the first effect is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state. As for the display format of the symbols, when the combination of symbols for the first effect is displayed in the specific game state and the second variation state, the display format of the first effect symbols is also the first effect in the normal game state and the normal variation state. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display format of the symbols for first performance when the combination of symbols for use is displayed is different from that of the symbols for first performance.

The pachinko gaming machine (A9) according to the aspect (53) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
It has at least a production mode A and a production mode B as production modes when the special game is not executed,
Regarding the first performance symbols that are variably displayed within the one performance period under the situation where the performance mode A is set, the first performance is performed before the final combination of the first performance symbols is displayed. When the provisional display mode of the design for use can be displayed and the provisional display mode of the design for the first performance is displayed, the re-variation is executed to variably display the design for the first performance again within the one performance period. possible, and when the temporary display mode of the first effect pattern is displayed, a special display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first effect pattern is configured to be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed for the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within the one effect period under the condition that the effect mode B is set,
The final combination of the first performance symbols is displayed within the one performance period corresponding to the stop display of the identification information in a manner other than the predetermined mode under the condition that the performance mode A is set. In such a case, a specific combination may be displayed, but under the situation where the presentation mode B is set, the first display is performed within the one presentation period corresponding to the stop display of the identification information in a mode other than the predetermined mode. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the specific combination is not displayed when the final combination of performance symbols is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (A10) according to the aspect (54) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
At least one or more first effect symbols are provided with numbers as constituent elements of the first effect symbols,
At least one or more second effect symbols are provided with numbers as constituent elements of the second effect symbols,
In the event that a power failure occurs while the identification information is to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, the identification information is displayed when the identification information starts to be changed and displayed again after the power is restored from the power failure. In the event that a power failure occurs during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode, the combination of the symbols for the first effect that has been performed and the identification information has been recovered from the power failure. is configured to be the same as the combination of the first effect symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information,
When a power failure occurs during the variable display of the identification information scheduled to stop and display the identification information in the predetermined manner, it is displayed when the variable display of the new identification information is started after recovery from the power failure. and a combination of the numbers of the symbols for the second effect that is present, and the identification information is to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode. is configured to be the same as the number combination of the second effect symbol displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information,
It has multiple types of production modes when special games are not executed,
When a power failure occurs during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode under a situation in which a certain production mode is set, the new power supply after the power failure is recovered. The identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode under the circumstances where the combination of the first effect symbol displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information and the certain effect mode is set. The combination of the first performance symbols displayed at the start of the new identification information fluctuation display after recovery from the power interruption in the event of a power interruption during the identification information fluctuation display is the same. Even if it becomes, the display format of the first production pattern is configured to be different,
A new identification after recovery from the power interruption in the event of a power interruption during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner under a situation in which a certain production mode is set. The number combination of the second effect symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of information, and the identification of the scheduled display of the identification information to be stopped in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode under the circumstances in which the certain effect mode is set. The number combination of the second performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information after recovering from the power failure in the event of power failure during the variable display of information becomes the same. Even in such a case, when the power is cut off during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stop-displayed in the predetermined manner under the circumstances where the certain production mode is set The display format of the second effect pattern displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information after returning, and the identification information in a situation other than the predetermined mode under the condition that the certain effect mode is set In the event that a power failure occurs during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed, the display of the second effect pattern that is displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information after recovery from the power failure. The format is configured to be the same as
With respect to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display mode can be displayed. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be displayed in a variable manner again within the one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, the last of the first effect symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as a display mode can be displayed,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the special display mode is not displayed within a certain one performance period for the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain one performance period.

The pachinko gaming machine (A11) according to the aspect (55) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
Identification information display that, when the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, controls the identification information display section to display the identification information variably and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number related to the certain hold. a control means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
For the first performance symbols variably displayed within one performance period, the provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In some cases, when a specific display mode not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed, one of the plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. and
Among the plurality of types of specific display modes in which the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, the specific display mode A is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, or Contents of the advance notice effect displayed before the specific display mode is displayed with the probability that the specific display mode B among the specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect. are configured differently depending on the
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type of is prefetching effect A or prefetching effect B,
It is possible to execute a final announcement effect for notifying, during the variable display of the identification information, that it is certain that the variable display of the identification information will be stop-displayed in the predetermined manner,
It is possible to execute a definite look-ahead effect for notifying that there is a winning suspension in which the execution of the special game is definite among the remaining suspensions, before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to the winning suspension is satisfied. can be,
When the power supply is interrupted during the variable display of the identification information in which the fixed advance notice effect is executed, and the power supply is recovered after that, the change display of the identification information that triggered the execution of the fixed advance notice effect is performed in the predetermined manner. The combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the execution of the special game executed by the stop display is the performance symbol combination A,
When a power failure occurs during the identification information variable display in which the confirmed look-ahead effect is executed, and then the power is restored from the power-off, the identification information variation display corresponding to the winning suspension that triggered the execution of the fixed look-ahead effect. is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, the combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the end of execution of the special game is the performance symbol combination B,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the performance symbol combination A and the performance symbol combination B are configured so that the performance symbol combinations are different.

The pachinko gaming machine (A12) according to aspect (56) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
The rendering movable body is capable of executing a predetermined rendering operation within the one rendering period, and visibility of rendering display contents displayed on the rendering display unit by the rendering movable body executing the predetermined rendering operation. is configured to reduce
The rendering movable body is configured to be able to perform a predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after power is restored,
When the movable body for performance executes the predetermined performance operation within the one performance period, the first design for performance is hidden, while the second design for performance can be displayed. ,
When the performance movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after the power supply is restored, both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be displayed. has been
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information in which the performance movable body is scheduled to perform the predetermined performance operation in the one performance period to the start of the execution of the predetermined performance operation is the power supply interruption. From the start of the execution of the predetermined initializing action in the case where the rendering movable body executes the predetermined initializing action within a predetermined period after returning from the start to the end of the execution of the predetermined initializing action is configured to be longer than the period of
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns of the final combination of first performance symbols is configured to be greater than the total number of patterns of the final combination of second performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A13) according to aspect (57) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
In the normal game state and when the combination of symbols for the first performance is displayed outside the one performance period, when the power is cut off, the combination of the symbols for the first performance is restored after the power is cut off. When is displayed, it is configured so that the display format can be different from the display format of the first effect symbol before the power failure occurs,
In the specific game state, when the power supply is interrupted under the condition that the combination of symbols for the first effect is displayed outside the one effect period, the combination of the symbols for the first effect is performed after the power is recovered from the power loss. When is displayed, it is configured to be the same display format as the display format of the first production pattern before the power failure occurs,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes depending on which effect display contents to be displayed in the effect display unit are determined,
The first display format, which is the display format of the specific first performance symbols corresponding to the first performance mode, and the second display format, which is the display format of the specific first performance symbols corresponding to the second performance mode, are different. It is configured to be a display format,
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the first presentation mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the first presentation mode, the pattern for the specific first presentation, which is the first display format, can be variably displayed. is configured to
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the second performance mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the second performance mode, the pattern for the specific first performance, which is the second display format, can be variably displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine (A14) according to aspect (58) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second 2 main game start gate B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
Identification information display that, when the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, controls the identification information display section to display the identification information variably and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number related to the certain hold. a control means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a starting hole than in the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the game is controlled to be in the specific game state after execution of the special game is finished. game state control means;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
If a power outage occurs during the variable display of identification information that is scheduled to transition from a specific game state to a normal game state and does not remain pending, the design for production will be displayed after returning from the power outage. When the combination is displayed, the combination of performance symbols is once displayed in the display format corresponding to the specific game state, and then the combination of performance symbols is displayed in the display format corresponding to the normal game state. has been
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
A specific advance notice effect can be displayed on the effect display unit within a certain effect period,
In the effect display section, the shooting notification effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol, and the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol. ,
In the effect display section, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect pattern, while the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second effect pattern. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine (A15) according to aspect (59) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
In response to occurrence of a predetermined error, a predetermined error screen can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined error screen and the combination of the first effect symbols are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined error screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbols,
When the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first effect symbols and the combination of the second effect symbols are displayed at the same time, the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the first effect symbols overlap. is configured so that the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the second effect pattern do not overlap,
Even when the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first performance symbols and the combination of the second performance symbols are displayed at the same time, the volume adjustment screen is displayed based on the predetermined player operation to adjust the volume level. is adjustable and
When the combination of the volume adjustment screen, the first effect pattern and the combination of the second effect pattern are displayed at the same time, the display of the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect pattern,
When the combination of the volume adjustment screen, the first effect pattern and the combination of the second effect pattern are displayed at the same time, the display area of the volume adjustment screen and the display area of the first effect pattern overlap, but the volume adjustment screen The display area of and the display area of the second effect pattern are configured so as not to overlap,
For the first performance symbols variably displayed within one performance period, the provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In some cases, when a specific display mode not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed, one of the plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. and
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A notice effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. are configured differently depending on the content of
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type of is prefetching effect A or prefetching effect B,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns of the final combination of first performance symbols is configured to be greater than the total number of patterns of the final combination of second performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A16) according to the aspect (60) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
It is possible to display an operation instruction effect to prompt the operation of a predetermined operation member within the one effect period on the effect display unit, and it is possible to detect that the predetermined operation member is operated under the situation where the operation instruction effect is displayed. Correspondingly, a predetermined effect can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the operation instruction effect and the first effect symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the operation instruction effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol,
In a situation in which the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member under the condition in which the operation instruction effect is displayed, the predetermined effect, the first effect pattern, and the second effect. When the symbols are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect pattern, while the display of the predetermined effect is higher than the second effect symbol. display priority is lower than the display of ,
The display area for the predetermined effect is larger than the display area for the operation instruction effect, and while the display area for the operation instruction effect and the display area for the first effect pattern may overlap, the display area for the operation instruction effect and the display area for the first effect pattern may overlap. It does not overlap with the display area of the second production pattern,
In the situation in which the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member under the condition in which the operation instruction effect is displayed, the display area of the predetermined effect is the first effect symbol. It is configured to overlap both the display area and the display area of the second effect pattern,
For the first performance symbols variably displayed within one performance period, the provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In some cases, when a specific display mode not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed, one of the plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. and
With respect to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display mode can be displayed. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be displayed in a variable manner again within the one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, the last of the first effect symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as a display mode can be displayed,
The display mode is different from the specific display mode and the special display mode,
At least a first operation instruction presentation and a second operation instruction presentation are provided as types of operation instruction presentation, and when the first operation instruction presentation is displayed, the timing is later than the timing when the first operation instruction presentation is displayed. and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation instruction effect is displayed when the second operation instruction effect is displayed. configured differently,
The probability that the special display mode is displayed at the timing after the timing at which the first operation instruction effect is displayed when the first operation instruction effect is displayed, and the probability that the special display mode is displayed when the second operation instruction effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of displaying the special display mode is different at the timing after the timing when the 2-operation instruction performance is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (A17) according to the aspect (61) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
Under the specific game state, the first change state and the first change state have at least a second change state in which the selection tendency of the change display time of the identification information is different, and under the normal game state. Both the first variation state and the second variation state have at least a normal variation state in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different,
It is possible to shift from the specific game state and the first fluctuation state to the specific game state and the second fluctuation state, and from the specific game state and the second fluctuation state to the normal game state and the normal fluctuation state.
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
The display format of the first effect symbols when the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state, and the combination of the first effect symbols in the specific game state and the second variation state The display format is the same as the display format of the symbols for the first effect when displayed, but for the first effect when the combination of the symbols for the first effect is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state. As for the display format of the symbols, when the combination of symbols for the first effect is displayed in the specific game state and the second variation state, the display format of the first effect symbols is also the first effect in the normal game state and the normal variation state. It is configured to be different from the display format of the first production pattern when the combination of patterns is displayed,
For the first performance symbols variably displayed within one performance period, the provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In some cases, when a specific display mode not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed, one of the plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. and
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A notice effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. are configured differently depending on the content of
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type of is prefetching effect A or prefetching effect B,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns of the final combination of first performance symbols is configured to be greater than the total number of patterns of the final combination of second performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A18) according to the aspect (62) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
It has at least a production mode A and a production mode B as production modes when the special game is not executed,
Regarding the first performance symbols that are variably displayed within the one performance period under the situation where the performance mode A is set, the first performance is performed before the final combination of the first performance symbols is displayed. When the provisional display mode of the design for use can be displayed and the provisional display mode of the design for the first performance is displayed, the re-variation is executed to variably display the design for the first performance again within the one performance period. possible, and when the temporary display mode of the first effect pattern is displayed, a special display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first effect pattern is configured to be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed for the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within the one effect period under the condition that the effect mode B is set,
The final combination of the first performance symbols is displayed within the one performance period corresponding to the stop display of the identification information in a manner other than the predetermined mode under the condition that the performance mode A is set. In such a case, a specific combination may be displayed, but under the situation where the presentation mode B is set, the first display is performed within the one presentation period corresponding to the stop display of the identification information in a mode other than the predetermined mode. The specific combination is configured not to be displayed when the final combination of the performance symbols is displayed,
While the variable display format of the first performance symbols in the performance mode A and the variable display format of the first performance symbols in the performance mode B are different,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the variable display format of the second performance symbols in the performance mode A and the variable display format of the second performance symbols in the performance mode B are the same.

The pachinko gaming machine (B1) according to the aspect (63) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the certain one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
At least a first element (e.g., character) and a second element (e.g., number) are included as elements of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a state where no hold remains,
The first swing motion is a mode in which the first element and the second element swing, and the second swing motion is a mode in which the first element swings while the second element does not swing. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be.

When the first production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during pattern fluctuation), the swinging action of the first production pattern is changed to a variable standby state in which the first production pattern is definitely stopped and displayed. By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen in which the design for production is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to give movement to the liquid crystal screen. Only the second element (number) is fixedly displayed without performing a swinging motion, so that an effect can be provided that does not make the player misunderstand that the pattern is fluctuating.

The pachinko gaming machine (B2) according to the aspect (64) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the certain one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a state where no hold remains,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the predetermined time is longer than the variable fixed time.

While securing the time for indicating the definitive stop display of the first effect pattern as a variable fixed time, when the first effect pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during pattern fluctuation), the first By applying the swaying motion of the performance pattern even during the variable standby state in which the first performance symbol is definitely stopped and displayed, a dull screen is displayed even in the game standby state after the variable fixed time elapses ( In the case of a configuration that avoids making a screen where the production pattern is just stopped (giving movement on the liquid crystal screen), it is necessary to start the shaking action after at least the time of the fixed fluctuation time. By configuring it, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the next fluctuation has started.

The pachinko gaming machine (B3) according to aspect (65) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a speaker (for example, a speaker D24) that outputs a production sound;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied when the random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the certain one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
In a situation where a predetermined effect mode is set when the special game is not executed, the effect sound can be output at least during the variable display of the effect symbols,
The standby demo screen can be displayed on the effect display unit when a specific time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a situation where no hold remains,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined time, which is shorter than the specific time, elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a situation where no suspension remains. and
The second shaking motion can be executed even after the display of the standby demo screen ends in a situation where no pending state remains,
When the second shaking motion is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information was stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a situation where no suspension remains, the second shaking motion is started at the timing of starting the second shaking motion. While directing sound can be output,
A second wobbling action to be performed after the display of the standby demo screen ends in a situation where no pending remains The pachinko game machine is characterized in that during the execution of the third swinging motion, which is the swinging motion of (1), the effect sound is not output.

When the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during symbol fluctuation), the swinging action of the first effect symbol is changed to the variable standby state in which the first effect symbol is definitely stopped and displayed. By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen in which the design for production is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to give movement to the liquid crystal screen. When the shaking motion (second shaking motion) is first started in the variable standby state, the production sound (stage BGM) is continued to be output to appeal to the game machine, while the standby demo screen (standby movie) is displayed. If the shaking motion is performed after the display (for example, the second shaking motion or the third shaking motion that is the second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen ends), power saving Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate effect output mode according to the variable standby state, such as stopping (muting) the output of the effect sound.

The pachinko gaming machine (B4) according to aspect (66) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
The predetermined action includes at least a special action (for example, tenpai action) that can be executed when the design for production forms a ready-to-win state,
The performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows are configured to be capable of executing a special action, while the performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows of the predetermined performance symbol rows. is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to execute special actions.

One display row (first production pattern in the left column, first production pattern in the right column) other than the other display row (first production pattern in the middle row, which is the final By preparing an action that may be performed only with the first performance pattern of one performance pattern), the first performance pattern of other display rows (the first performance pattern of the middle row, which is the last row) It is possible to visually notify the notable tenpai in the process until the pattern stops.

The pachinko gaming machine (B5) according to aspect (67) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
After the reach state or the non-reach state is formed, it is configured to be able to execute re-variation of the performance symbols,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
An operation pattern related to a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the ready-to-win state is formed, and a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the non-reach state is formed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so that the operation pattern is different from the related operation pattern.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B5) according to aspect (67) is
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the motion pattern associated with the predetermined motion is the number and/or combinations of the predetermined motion types.

In recent years, when popular effects such as pseudo-continuous effects (effects with re-fluctuation) are performed, depending on the effect process (the first effect pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed) until the pseudo-continuous is performed, To diversify the flow of conventional uniform quasi-continuous performance by different modes of visual first performance patterns by varying the chronological contents of the action of the first performance patterns. can be done.

The pachinko gaming machine (B6) according to aspect (68) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
The predetermined motion includes at least a fixed position motion that can be executed when the design for performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display section,
When the final combination of the performance symbols indicating that the special game is not executed after the ready-to-win state is formed is temporarily stopped and displayed, the performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows. A pachinko game machine characterized in that the symbols are configured so as to be capable of performing a fixed position operation, while the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol sequence are configured not to perform a fixed position operation. is.

In addition, the pachinko game machine (B6) according to the aspect (68), as shown in FIG.
When the final combination of the performance symbols indicating that the ready-to-win state is not formed and the special game is not executed is temporarily stopped and displayed, the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row (for example, the middle row). A pachinko machine characterized in that both the performance symbols corresponding to the columns (for example, the left row and the right row) and the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol rows are configured to be able to perform fixed position operations. It is a game machine.

By configuring in this way, by performing a fixed position operation even in the first production pattern of the display row (middle row) that does not form a reach state if the normal pattern variation of the loss or the normal reach variation of the loss is temporarily On the other hand, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the unsuccessful super ready-to-win effect and perform a fixed position operation further, so that the fixed position operation is omitted. A seamless movement of the pattern for the first production can be realized according to the production through the .

The pachinko gaming machine (B7-1) according to aspect (69) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows among the plurality of performance symbol rows. cage,
Having at least a first element and a second element as components of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
In the pattern variation in which the ready-to-win state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that is variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row that is temporarily stopped and displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is constructed so that the pattern for performance corresponding to the row can be overlapped at a predetermined timing when a ready-to-win state is formed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B7-1) according to aspect (69) is
The ratio of overlap between the first element of the performance symbol of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of the other performance symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol fluctuation forming the ready-to-win state is It is larger than the overlap ratio of overlapping of the first element of the performance pattern of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of the other performance symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol fluctuation to be in the non-reach state. The pachinko game machine is characterized by:

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B7-2) according to aspect (70) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
Having at least a first element and a second element as components of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
At a predetermined timing within one performance period, the performance symbols of one performance pattern row and the performance symbols of the other performance symbol rows are configured to overlap,
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the performance pattern of one performance pattern row overlaps with the first element of the performance pattern of another production pattern row, but the first element of the performance pattern of the other performance pattern row The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second element of the performance pattern of the pattern row and the second element of the performance pattern of the other performance pattern row are configured so as not to overlap each other.

In this way, when adding movement to the pattern for the first production, while the character as the first element is allowed to overlap adjacent characters in order to give a sense of dynamism, it is possible to determine which number will stop. By configuring the number as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it will be a (big hit, small hit) mode so that it does not overlap, while diversifying the movement of the pattern itself for the first effect, It is possible not to deviate from the original purpose of the symbol, which is to notify whether the symbol is a hit (big win, small win) or a loss.

The pachinko gaming machine (B8) according to the aspect (71) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
In a situation where there is a specific hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, the execution expectation degree of the special game related to the specific hold is suggested or notified using the production pattern. ) can be executed in the effect display unit,
When a specific hold is triggered by a ball entering a starting hole during pattern fluctuation under a situation where no hold remains, is there any hold that is digested prior to the specific hold during the pattern fluctuation? Depending on whether or not, and/or depending on how many reserves are digested prior to the specific reserve during the pattern fluctuation, the production mode of the design prefetching production for production is configured to be different. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

By configuring in this way, the player can recognize or guess that a specific hold (trigger hold) has occurred when executing the look-ahead performance (chance look-ahead look-ahead performance) suggested or notified using the first performance pattern. By allowing the player to select whether or not to accumulate the reserves at the timing, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as making the subsequent performance mode different.

The pachinko gaming machine (B9) according to the aspect (72) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and a predetermined number of performance patterns (for example, three first performance patterns of the left row, the middle row, and the right row) are produced in the one production period. a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit after the variable display is performed on the display unit;
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
In the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the number of suspensions is the first number and the variable display is started, and the number of suspensions is the second number that is larger than the first number. While the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the display is started is different, in the specific game state, the number of suspensions is the first number and the predetermined number when the display is started The order of stop display of the number of performance symbols is the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols in the case where the number of reservations starts to change with the second number. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

By configuring in this way, in the normal game state (non-time shortened game state) that emphasizes production rather than the variation efficiency, and the specific game state (time shortened game state) that emphasizes the variation efficiency, the first production pattern is shown. By differentiating the direction, the player can recognize in which state the variation occurs, and the pattern variation of the first performance symbol can be made suitable for each state.

The pachinko gaming machine (B10) according to the aspect (73) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the first random number obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the variable display time of the first identification information is selected, and the first identification information is displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed by the first identification information display unit. first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the variable display time of the second identification information is selected, and the second identification information is displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed by the second identification information display unit. a second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display;
Special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a second starting port than the normal game state as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is regarded as one performance period, and a predetermined number of performance symbols (for example, the left column, the middle column, and the right column) are displayed within the one performance period. a performance pattern display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of the performance symbols in the performance display unit after variably displaying the performance symbols in the performance display unit;
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
When the first identification information is variably displayed in the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of first reservations is the first number and the variable display is started, and the number of first reservations While the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols is different when the variable display is started with the second number larger than the first number, the first identification information is variable display in the specific game state. In the case where the number of first reservations is the first number and the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the variable display is started, and the number of the first reservations is the second number When the number of first reservations is the second number is configured to be the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols in
When the second identification information is variably displayed in the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the number of second reservations starts to be variably displayed with the first number, and the number of second reservations is configured to be the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the variable display is started with the second number, and when the second identification information is variable and displayed in the specific game state, the second The order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of second reservations starts to be displayed fluctuating with the first number, and the predetermined number when the number of second reservations starts fluctuating display with the second number The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the stop display order of the performance symbols is the same as that of the .

By configuring in this way, the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state) or the specific game state (time-reduced game state) after the end of the second identification information for the first production pattern corresponding to the change, Since it is possible to return to the game on the side of the first identification information, which is the main game of the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state), which is the original game property, by configuring it to be consumed immediately, the mode of the first effect symbol While the is simple, by performing the minimum actions corresponding to the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state), it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably transition to the game on the side of the first identification information. .

The pachinko gaming machine (B11) according to the aspect (74) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the certain one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
At least a first element (e.g., character) and a second element (e.g., number) are included as elements of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
The predetermined motion includes at least a swinging motion of the design for production,
As a swing motion,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a state other than the predetermined mode in a state where no hold remains,
The first swing motion is a mode in which the first element and the second element swing, and the second swing motion is a mode in which the first element swings while the second element does not swing. is configured to be
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the execution time of one predetermined motion other than the swing motion is shorter than the execution time of the swing motion in one performance period.

When the first production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during pattern fluctuation), the swinging action of the first production pattern is changed to a variable standby state in which the first production pattern is definitely stopped and displayed. By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen in which the design for production is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to give movement to the liquid crystal screen. Only the second element (number) is fixedly displayed without performing a swinging motion, so that an effect can be provided that does not make the player misunderstand that the pattern is fluctuating.

The pachinko gaming machine (B12) according to the aspect (75) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the certain one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
The predetermined motion includes at least a swinging motion of the design for production,
As a swing motion,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a state other than the predetermined mode in a state where no hold remains,
The predetermined time is configured to be longer than the variable fixed time,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total execution time of a predetermined motion other than a swinging motion is longer than the variable fixed time within a given performance period.

While securing the time for indicating the definitive stop display of the first effect pattern as a variable fixed time, when the first effect pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during pattern fluctuation), the first By applying the swaying motion of the performance pattern even during the variable standby state in which the first performance symbol is definitely stopped and displayed, a dull screen is displayed even in the game standby state after the variable fixed time elapses ( In the case of a configuration that avoids making a screen where the production pattern is just stopped (giving movement on the liquid crystal screen), it is necessary to start the shaking action after at least the time of the fixed fluctuation time. By configuring it, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the next fluctuation has started.

The pachinko gaming machine (B13) according to the aspect (76) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a speaker (for example, a speaker D24) that outputs a production sound;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the certain one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
In a situation where a predetermined effect mode is set when the special game is not executed, the effect sound can be output at least during the variable display of the effect symbols,
The standby demo screen can be displayed on the effect display unit when a specific time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a situation where no hold remains,
The design for production can execute a predetermined operation,
The predetermined motion includes at least a swinging motion of the design for production,
As a swing motion,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined time shorter than the specific time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a state other than the predetermined mode in a state where the suspension does not remain. cage,
The second shaking motion can be executed even after the display of the standby demo screen ends in a situation where no pending state remains,
When the second shaking motion is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information was stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a situation where no suspension remains, the second shaking motion is started at the timing of starting the second shaking motion. While directing sound can be output,
A second wobbling action to be performed after the display of the standby demo screen ends in a situation where no pending remains During the execution of the third shaking motion, which is the shaking motion of the
The execution time of one predetermined motion other than the swinging motion is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the swinging motion within one performance period,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total execution time of predetermined motions other than swinging motions is longer than the variable fixed time within a given performance period.

When the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during symbol fluctuation), the swinging action of the first effect symbol is changed to the variable standby state in which the first effect symbol is definitely stopped and displayed. By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen in which the design for production is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to give movement to the liquid crystal screen. When the shaking motion (second shaking motion) is first started in the variable standby state, the production sound (stage BGM) is continued to be output to appeal to the game machine, while the standby demo screen (standby movie) is displayed. If the shaking motion is performed after the display (for example, (for example, the second shaking motion, or the third shaking motion that is the second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen ends)) , the output of the effect sound is stopped (silenced) for power saving, and an appropriate effect output mode can be set according to the variable standby state.

The pachinko gaming machine (B14) according to aspect (77) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
Having at least a first element and a second element as components of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
The predetermined action includes at least a special action (for example, tenpai action) that can be executed when the design for production forms a ready-to-win state,
The performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows are configured to be capable of executing a special action, while the performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows of the predetermined performance symbol rows. is configured not to perform any special actions,
In the pattern variation in which the ready-to-win state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that is variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row that is temporarily stopped and displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is constructed so that the pattern for performance corresponding to the row can be overlapped at a predetermined timing when a ready-to-win state is formed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B14) according to aspect (77) is
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the effect pattern of one display row and the first element of the effect pattern of the other display row overlap, but the effect symbol of the one display row overlaps. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second element of and the second element of the performance pattern of another display row are configured so as not to overlap.

One display row (first production pattern in the left column, first production pattern in the right column) other than the other display row (first production pattern in the middle row, which is the final By preparing an action that may be performed only with the first performance pattern of one performance pattern), the first performance pattern of other display rows (the first performance pattern of the middle row, which is the last row) It is possible to visually notify the notable tenpai in the process until the pattern stops.

The pachinko gaming machine (B15) according to aspect (78) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows among the plurality of performance symbol rows. cage,
After the reach state or the non-reach state is formed, it is configured to be able to execute re-variation of the performance symbols,
At least a first element and a second element are included as components of the production pattern,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
The start operation when the production pattern starts the variable display,
A fixed position operation that can be executed when the design for performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
An operation pattern related to a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the ready-to-win state is formed, and a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the non-reach state is formed. It is configured to be different from the related operation pattern,
In the pattern variation in which the ready-to-win state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that is variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row that is temporarily stopped and displayed. Designs for production corresponding to the row are configured to be able to overlap at a predetermined timing when the ready-to-win state is formed,
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be executed, while the shaking motion is configured to be executed. It is a pachinko machine.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B15) according to aspect (78) is
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the effect pattern of one display row overlaps with the first element of the effect pattern of another display row, but the effect symbol of one display row overlaps. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second element of the second element and the second element of the effect pattern of another display row are configured so as not to overlap each other.

In recent years, when popular effects such as pseudo-continuous effects (effects with re-fluctuation) are performed, depending on the effect process (the first effect pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed) until the pseudo-continuous is performed, To diversify the flow of conventional uniform quasi-continuous performance by different modes of visual first performance patterns by varying the chronological contents of the action of the first performance patterns. can be done.

The pachinko gaming machine (B16) according to aspect (79) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode; a game state control means for controlling the specific game state in which the ball is easily entered into the winning opening, and the specific game state after execution of the special game is completed;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
A start operation when the production pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
When the final combination of the performance symbols indicating that the special game is not executed after the ready-to-win state is formed is temporarily stopped and displayed, the performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows. While the symbols are configured to be capable of performing a fixed position operation, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row are configured not to perform a fixed position operation,
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be executed, while the shaking motion is configured to be executed. It is a pachinko machine.

By configuring in this way, by performing a fixed position operation even in the first production pattern of the display row (middle row) that does not form a reach state if the normal pattern variation of the loss or the normal reach variation of the loss is temporarily On the other hand, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the unsuccessful super ready-to-win effect and perform a fixed position operation further, so that the fixed position operation is omitted. A seamless movement of the pattern for the first production can be realized according to the production through the .

The pachinko gaming machine (B17-1) according to aspect (80) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode; a game state control means for controlling the specific game state in which the ball is easily entered into the winning opening, and the specific game state after execution of the special game is completed;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows among the plurality of performance symbol rows. cage,
Having at least a first element and a second element as components of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
A start operation when the production pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
In the pattern variation in which the ready-to-win state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that is variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row that is temporarily stopped and displayed. Designs for production corresponding to the row are configured to be able to overlap at a predetermined timing when the ready-to-win state is formed,
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be performed, while the shaking motion is configured to be performed. It is a pachinko machine.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B17-1) according to aspect (80)
The overlapping ratio of the first element of the performance pattern of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of the other performance symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol fluctuation that forms the ready-to-win state is It is larger than the overlap ratio of overlapping of the first element of the performance pattern of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of the other performance symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol fluctuation to be in the non-reach state. The pachinko game machine is characterized by:

The pachinko gaming machine (B17-2) according to aspect (81) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode; a game state control means for controlling the specific game state in which the ball is easily entered into the winning opening, and the specific game state after execution of the special game is completed;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
Having at least a first element and a second element as components of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
A start operation when the production pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
In the pattern variation in which the ready-to-win state is formed, at a predetermined timing when the ready-to-win state is formed, the effect symbols corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row which is being variably displayed and the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped are displayed. It is configured so that the production pattern corresponding to the production pattern row other than the predetermined production pattern row can be overlapped,
At a predetermined timing within one performance period, the performance symbols of one performance pattern row and the performance symbols of the other performance symbol rows are configured to overlap,
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the performance pattern of one performance pattern row overlaps with the first element of the performance pattern of another production pattern row, but the first element of the performance pattern of the other performance pattern row The second element of the design pattern of the pattern row and the second element of the design pattern of the other pattern row are configured so as not to overlap,
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be executed, while the shaking motion is configured to be executed. It is a pachinko machine.

In this way, when adding movement to the pattern for the first production, while the character as the first element is allowed to overlap adjacent characters in order to give a sense of dynamism, it is possible to determine which number will stop. By configuring the number as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it will be a (big hit, small hit) mode so that it does not overlap, while diversifying the movement of the pattern itself for the first effect, It is possible not to deviate from the original purpose of the symbol, which is to notify whether the symbol is a hit (big win, small win) or a loss.

The pachinko gaming machine (B18) according to the aspect (82) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
After the reach state or the non-reach state is formed, it is configured to be able to execute re-variation of the performance symbols,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
An operation pattern related to a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the ready-to-win state is formed, and a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the non-reach state is formed. It is configured to be different from the related operation pattern,
In a situation where there is a specific hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, the performance display unit executes a performance symbol prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the specific suspension using the performance symbol. is possible and
When a specific hold is triggered by a ball entering a starting hole during pattern fluctuation under a situation where no hold remains, is there any hold that is digested prior to the specific hold during the pattern fluctuation? Depending on whether or not, and/or depending on how many reserves are digested prior to the specific reserve during the pattern fluctuation, the production mode of the design prefetching production for production is configured to be different. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

By configuring in this way, the player can recognize or guess that a specific hold (trigger hold) has occurred when executing the look-ahead performance (chance look-ahead look-ahead performance) suggested or notified using the first performance pattern. By allowing the player to select whether or not to accumulate the reserves at the timing, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as making the subsequent performance mode different.

The pachinko gaming machine (B19) according to the aspect (83) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and a predetermined number of performance patterns (for example, three first performance patterns of the left row, the middle row, and the right row) are produced in the one production period. a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit after the variable display is performed on the display unit;
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
A start operation when the production pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
In the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the number of suspensions is the first number and the variable display is started, and the number of suspensions is the second number that is larger than the first number. While the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the display is started is different, in the specific game state, the number of suspensions is the first number and the predetermined number when the display is started The order of stop display of the number of performance symbols is the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the number of pending is the second number and the variable display is started,
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be executed, while the shaking motion is configured to be executed. It is a pachinko machine.

By configuring in this way, in the normal game state (non-time shortened game state) that emphasizes production rather than the variation efficiency, and the specific game state (time shortened game state) that emphasizes the variation efficiency, the first production pattern is shown. By differentiating the direction, the player can recognize in which state the variation occurs, and the pattern variation of the first performance symbol can be made suitable for each state.

The pachinko gaming machine (B20) according to the aspect (84) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the first random number obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the variable display time of the first identification information is selected, and the first identification information is displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed by the first identification information display unit. first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the variable display time of the second identification information is selected, and the second identification information is displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed by the second identification information display unit. a second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display;
Special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a second starting port than the normal game state as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is regarded as one performance period, and a predetermined number of performance symbols (for example, the left column, the middle column, and the right column) are displayed within the one performance period. a performance pattern display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of the performance symbols in the performance display unit after variably displaying the performance symbols in the performance display unit;
It has a plurality of performance pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the performance symbols in each of the plurality of production pattern rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
A start operation when the production pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
When the first identification information is variably displayed in the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of first reservations is the first number and the variable display is started, and the number of first reservations While the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols is different when the variable display is started with the second number larger than the first number, the first identification information is variable display in the specific game state. In the case where the number of first reservations is the first number and the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the variable display is started, and the number of the first reservations is the second number When the number of first reservations is the second number is configured to be the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols in
When the second identification information is variably displayed in the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the number of second reservations starts to be variably displayed with the first number, and the number of second reservations is configured to be the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the variable display is started with the second number, and when the second identification information is displayed variable in the specific game state, the second The order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of second reservations starts to be displayed fluctuating with the first number, and the predetermined number when the number of second reservations starts fluctuating display with the second number It is configured so that the stop display order of the production patterns is the same as
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be performed, while the shaking motion is configured to be performed. It is a pachinko machine.

By configuring in this way, the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state) or the specific game state (time-reduced game state) after the end of the second identification information for the first production pattern corresponding to the change, Since it is possible to return to the game on the side of the first identification information, which is the main game of the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state), which is the original game property, by configuring it to be consumed immediately, the mode of the first effect symbol While the is simple, by performing the minimum actions corresponding to the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state), it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably transition to the game on the side of the first identification information. .

The pachinko gaming machine (342) according to the aspect (85) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous for the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
A game information transmission means for transmitting necessary game information to the sub-game part side when the performance display is executed on the sub-game part side, and the second identification information is variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed. and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
A specific advance notice effect can be displayed on the effect display unit within a certain effect period,
In the effect display section, the shooting notification effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol, and the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol. ,
In the effect display section, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect pattern, while the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second effect pattern. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine (187) according to the aspect (86) is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous for the player;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display areas or display positions are different, even if the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display area or the display position of the second effect pattern is the same even if the second effect pattern is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (2342) according to the aspect (87) is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the first identification information;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the second identification information;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous for the player;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
The number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending pending can be displayed in the first pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the second pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the number of remaining first holds, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the number of remaining second holds, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
When a new first hold occurs, the display content displayed in the first hold image display area can be changed, and a new first hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information The display content displayed in the first reserved image display area can be changed without the occurrence of
When a new second hold occurs, the display content displayed in the second hold image display area can be changed, and a new second hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information The display content displayed in the second reserved image display area can be changed without the occurrence of
When a new first hold occurs, the display content displayed in the first hold number display area can be changed, and a new first hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information If there is no occurrence, it is configured not to change the display contents displayed in the first pending number display area,
When a new second hold occurs, the display content displayed in the second hold number display area can be changed, and a new second hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information If there is no occurrence, it is configured not to change the display contents displayed in the second pending number display area,
When changing the display content displayed in the first reserved image display area, the number of first reserved images displayed in the first reserved image display area is not changed. changing the display mode of at least one of the first reserved images displayed by
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first reserved image is displayed in the first reserved image display area. While the first reserved image is not displayed when the second effect display format is displayed, the plurality of types of effect displays are displayed even when the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to display a first reserved number in a first reserved number display area even if a second effect display form of the forms is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (536) according to the aspect (88) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous for the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
A specific advance notice effect can be displayed on the effect display unit within a certain effect period,
In the effect display section, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position where it can overlap with the first effect symbol during variable display, and the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the first effect symbol during variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position to obtain,
In the effect display unit, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect symbol during variable display, while the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the second effect symbol during variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position to obtain,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display mode or the display position of the pattern for the first effect is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second effect pattern or the display position of the second effect pattern is configured to be the same,
The display size of the first effect pattern when the final display mode of the first effect pattern is displayed on the effect display unit is the second size when the final display mode of the second effect pattern is displayed on the effect display unit. It is configured to be larger than the display size of the design for production,
A first display mode, which is a display mode of a specific first effect pattern corresponding to the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats, and the specific first effect corresponding to the second effect display format. It is configured to be a different display mode from the second display mode, which is the display mode of the pattern for
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the first effect display format and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the first effect display format, the specific first effect symbol that is the first display format is configured so that it can be displayed variably,
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the second effect display format and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the second effect display format, the specific first effect symbol that is the second display format The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to variably display the .

The pachinko gaming machine (806) according to the aspect (89) is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number until a condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied when the random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means, and performing control so that suspension occurs;
a game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on the random number related to a certain hold, and determining a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player after the identification information is stop-displayed after winning is determined as a result of winning/failure determination based on the random number;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second effect pattern display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect pattern to be displayed by the effect display unit after the second effect pattern is variably displayed by the effect display unit;
The game information receiving means has at least prefetching effect display contents A and prefetching effect display contents B different from the prefetching effect display contents A as prefetching effect display contents to be displayed based on the information about the suspension received by the game information receiving means. When the information about the hold is received by, when the received information about the hold satisfies a predetermined condition, the effect display unit displays the prefetch effect display content A that suggests or notifies the existence of the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition and a look-ahead effect display control means for controlling so that it can be displayed at
During the period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display, the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern can be variably displayed,
When the identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the variation of the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to display,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode,
The period from the start of variable display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured to display a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display areas or display positions are different, even if the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. However, the display area or display position of the second effect pattern is configured to be the same,
The timing at which the display of the look-ahead effect display content A is started is the timing at which the variable display of the identification information is started after the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition has occurred,
If the prefetch effect display content A is displayed in a situation where there is a pre-hold that satisfies the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information before the pre-hold that satisfies the predetermined condition, identification related to the pre-hold A pachinko game machine characterized in that the special display mode is not displayed during one performance period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display performed when a condition for starting the variable display of the information is satisfied. is.

The pachinko gaming machine (537) according to the aspect (90) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the first identification information;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the second identification information;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous for the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
A specific notice effect can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In the effect display section, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position where it can overlap with the first effect symbol during variable display, and the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the first effect symbol during variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position to obtain,
In the effect display unit, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect symbol during variable display, while the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the second effect symbol during variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position to obtain,
The number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending pending can be displayed in the first pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the second pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the number of remaining first holds, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the number of remaining second holds, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first reserved image is displayed in the first reserved image display area. While the first reserved image is not displayed when the second effect display format is displayed, the plurality of types of effect displays are displayed even when the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to display a first reserved number in a first reserved number display area even if a second effect display form of the forms is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (538) according to the aspect (91) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the first identification information;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the second identification information;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous for the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display mode or the display position of the pattern for the first effect is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second effect pattern or the display position of the second effect pattern is configured to be the same,
The number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending pending can be displayed in the first pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the second pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the number of remaining first holds, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the number of remaining second holds, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first reserved image is displayed in the first reserved image display area. While the first reserved image is not displayed when the second effect display format is displayed, the plurality of types of effect displays are displayed even when the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to display a first reserved number in a first reserved number display area even if a second effect display form of the forms is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (343) according to the aspect (92) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous for the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display mode or the display position of the pattern for the first effect is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second effect pattern or the display position of the second effect pattern is configured to be the same,
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
A specific advance notice effect can be displayed on the effect display unit within a certain effect period,
In the effect display section, the shooting notification effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol, and the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol. ,
In the effect display section, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect pattern, while the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second effect pattern. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine (761) according to the aspect (93) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section in accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous for the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display mode or the display position of the pattern for the first effect is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second effect pattern or the display position of the second effect pattern is configured to be the same,
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
In the effect display unit, the firing notification effect is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the first effect pattern and does not overlap with the second effect pattern,
Expectation degree of execution of a special game when ready-to-win display is achieved using the first performance symbols that are the first display mode and special in the case of ready-to-win display using the first performance symbols that are the second display mode It is configured to be different from the execution expectation of the game,
While the first performance pattern is being variably displayed within a certain performance period, when the ready-to-win display is performed using the first performance pattern, the ready-to-win display using the second performance pattern is performed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it does not occur.

The pachinko gaming machine (C1) according to the aspect (94) is
A main game start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10),
Acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on the ball entering the main game start port;
advance determination means for determining whether or not the game will be a variable winning opening open game based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
advance determination means for determining whether or not a special game will be played based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Auxiliary game start opening (for example, auxiliary game start opening H10) where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined ball entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance or compared with the closed state. A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, specific areas C12-1, C12-2) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning hole can enter,
a main game identification information display unit capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, first main game symbols, second main game symbols);
Auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information (for example, auxiliary game pattern),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that assists the progress of the game,
The main game department
storage means for temporarily storing the acquired main game information until the condition for starting the variable display of the main game identification information is satisfied when the main game information is acquired by the acquisition means;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the main game information when the variable display start condition is satisfied;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a variable winning opening opening game based on main game information when a variable display start condition is satisfied;
a main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information display section to display the main game identification information variably and then stop displaying the main game identification information based on the main game random number obtained by the obtaining means;
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a jackpot stop display mode), variable winning until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period elapses. It is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times that can make the mouth an advantageous state for the player, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode (for example, a stop display mode for a small win). After that, a variable winning opening opening game (for example, , a special game control means capable of executing a small game),
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start port;
Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information in the auxiliary game identification information display unit;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the variable member can be displaced. or an easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that is performed multiple times,
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state (for example, a shortened game state) in which the variable member is easier to open than in the normal game state,
As the stop display mode of the specific mode, it has a first specific mode (for example, 1_4R pattern 1) and a second specific mode (for example, 1_4R pattern 2),
As aspects related to the ease of entry of a game ball into a specific area, the first ease of entry (for example, the probability of entering a ball is 1/5) and the ease of entry is higher than the first ease of entry. has a second ease of entry (for example, a probability of entry is 2/5),
Based on the fact that the main game identification information is scheduled to be stopped or displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode (eg, 1_4R symbol 1), the first specific effect (eg, SP reach (M chance) 1/5) is executed, and the second specific effect (for example, , SP reach (M chance) 2/5),
Based on the fact that the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode (for example, 1_4R symbol 1), the mode related to the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is the first ease of entry. mode, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the second specific mode (for example, 1_4R symbol 2). This pachinko game machine is characterized by being in an easy mode.

The pachinko gaming machine (C2) according to aspect (95) is
A main game start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10),
Acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on the ball entering the main game start port;
advance determination means for determining whether or not the game will be a variable winning opening open game based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
advance determination means for determining whether or not a special game will be played based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Auxiliary game start opening (for example, auxiliary game start opening H10) where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined ball entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance or compared with the closed state. A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, specific areas C12-1, C12-2) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning hole can enter,
a main game identification information display unit capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, first main game symbols, second main game symbols);
Auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information (for example, auxiliary game pattern),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that assists the progress of the game,
The main game department
storage means for temporarily storing the acquired main game information until the condition for starting the variable display of the main game identification information is satisfied when the main game information is acquired by the acquisition means;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the main game information when the variable display start condition is satisfied;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a variable winning opening opening game based on main game information when a variable display start condition is satisfied;
a main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information display section to display the main game identification information variably and then stop displaying the main game identification information based on the main game random number obtained by the obtaining means;
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a jackpot stop display mode), variable winning until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period elapses. It is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times that can make the mouth an advantageous state for the player, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode (for example, a stop display mode for a small win). After that, a variable winning opening opening game (for example, , a special game control means capable of executing a small game),
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start port;
Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information in the auxiliary game identification information display unit;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the variable member can be displaced. or an easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that is performed multiple times,
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state (for example, a shortened game state) in which the variable member is easier to open than in the normal game state,
As the stop display mode of the specific mode, it has a first specific mode (for example, 1_4R pattern 1) and a second specific mode (for example, 1_4R pattern 2),
As aspects related to the ease of entry of a game ball into a specific area, the first ease of entry (for example, the probability of entering a ball is 1/5) and the ease of entry is higher than the first ease of entry. has a second ease of entry (for example, a probability of entry is 2/5),
Based on the fact that the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode (for example, 1_4R symbol 1), the mode related to the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is the first ease of entry. mode, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the second specific mode (for example, 1_4R symbol 2). It is configured to be the ease mode,
Under the situation where the result of the preliminary determination satisfies the first condition (for example, under the situation where the main game identification information is the 1_4R symbol 1, which is the stop display mode of the first specific mode, there is a trigger hold), the main It is possible to execute a first look-ahead effect (for example, button vibe look-ahead effect) that suggests or notifies in advance that the game identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode,
Under the circumstances where the result of the prior determination satisfies the second condition (for example, under the circumstances where the main game identification information is the 1_4R pattern 2 which is the stop display mode of the second specific mode, there is a trigger pending), the main It is possible to execute a second look-ahead effect (for example, a button pop-out look-ahead effect) that suggests or notifies in advance that the game identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the second specific mode,
This pachinko game machine is characterized by restricting the execution of a second look-ahead effect under a situation where a first condition is satisfied.

The pachinko gaming machine (C3) according to the aspect (96) is
A main game start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10),
Acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on the ball entering the main game start port;
advance determination means for determining whether or not the game will be a variable winning opening open game based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
advance determination means for determining whether or not a special game will be played based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Auxiliary game start opening (for example, auxiliary game start opening H10) where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined ball entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance or compared with the closed state. A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, specific areas C12-1, C12-2) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning hole can enter,
a main game identification information display unit capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, first main game symbols, second main game symbols);
Auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information (for example, auxiliary game pattern),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that assists the progress of the game,
The main game department
storage means for temporarily storing the acquired main game information until the condition for starting the variable display of the main game identification information is satisfied when the main game information is acquired by the acquisition means;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the main game information when the variable display start condition is satisfied;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a variable winning opening opening game based on main game information when a variable display start condition is satisfied;
a main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information display section to display the main game identification information variably and then stop displaying the main game identification information based on the main game random number obtained by the obtaining means;
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a jackpot stop display mode), variable winning until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period elapses. It is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times that can make the mouth an advantageous state for the player, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode (for example, a stop display mode for a small win). After that, a variable winning opening opening game (for example, , a special game control means capable of executing a small game),
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start port;
Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information in the auxiliary game identification information display unit;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the variable member can be displaced. or an easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that is performed multiple times,
A period from the start of the variable display of the main game identification information to the stop display is set as one period, and after the performance symbols are variably displayed on the performance display part in the one period, the final mode of the performance symbols is stopped on the performance display part. and a production pattern display control means for controlling to display,
A unit game capable of putting a variable winning hole in an advantageous state for a player is executed a plurality of times until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning hole or a predetermined period elapses from the start to the end of execution of the special game. is configured as
As the stop display mode of the specific mode, it has a first specific mode (for example, 2_10R symbol 3) and a second specific mode (for example, 2_10R symbol 2),
When the ball enters the specific area during the execution of the variable winning opening open game executed based on the main game identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode, a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) unit game is configured to execute a special game,
When the ball enters the specific area during the execution of the variable winning opening open game executed based on the main game identification information being stopped and displayed in the second specific mode stop display mode, a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) unit game is configured to execute a special game,
As aspects related to the ease of entry of a game ball into a specific area, the first ease of entry (for example, the probability of entering a ball is 1/5) and the ease of entry is higher than the first ease of entry. a second ease of entry (for example, a ball entry probability of approximately 100% or a ball entry probability of 5/5),
Based on the fact that the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode (for example, 2_10R symbol 3), the mode related to the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is the first ease of entry. mode, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the second specific mode (for example, 2_10R symbol 2). It is configured to be the ease mode,
In a situation where the power supply is interrupted during the variable display of the main game identification information, and then the power is restored and the variable display of the main game identification information is resumed, the restarted variable display of the main game identification information is completed. When the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode (eg, 2_10R symbol 3), the final mode of the effect symbol is set to the first mode (eg, "537"), When the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the second specific mode (for example, 2_10R symbol 2) by the end of the variable display of the restarted main game identification information, the final mode of the effect symbol A pachinko game machine characterized by a second mode (for example, "777").

The pachinko gaming machine (C4) according to aspect (97) is
A main game start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10),
Acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on the ball entering the main game start port;
advance determination means for determining whether or not the game will be a variable winning opening open game based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
advance determination means for determining whether or not a special game will be played based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Auxiliary game start opening (for example, auxiliary game start opening H10) where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined ball entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance or compared with the closed state. A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, specific areas C12-1, C12-2) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning hole can enter,
a main game identification information display unit capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, first main game symbols, second main game symbols);
Auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information (for example, auxiliary game pattern),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that assists the progress of the game,
The main game department
storage means for temporarily storing the acquired main game information until the condition for starting the variable display of the main game identification information is satisfied when the main game information is acquired by the acquisition means;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the main game information when the variable display start condition is satisfied;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a variable winning opening opening game based on main game information when a variable display start condition is satisfied;
a main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information display section to display the main game identification information variably and then stop displaying the main game identification information based on the main game random number obtained by the obtaining means;
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a jackpot stop display mode), variable winning until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period elapses. It is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times that can make the mouth an advantageous state for the player, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode (for example, a stop display mode for a small win). After that, a variable winning opening opening game (for example, , a special game control means capable of executing a small game),
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start port;
Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information in the auxiliary game identification information display unit;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the variable member can be displaced. or an easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that is performed multiple times,
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state (for example, a shortened game state) in which the variable member is easier to open than in the normal game state,
As the stop display mode of the specific mode, it has a first specific mode (for example, 1_4R pattern 1) and a second specific mode (for example, 1_4R pattern 2),
As aspects related to the ease of entry of a game ball into a specific area, the first ease of entry (for example, the probability of entering a ball is 1/5) and the ease of entry is higher than the first ease of entry. has a second ease of entry (for example, a probability of entry is 2/5),
Based on the fact that the main game identification information becomes the stop display mode of the first specific mode (for example, 1_4R symbol 1), the mode related to the ease of entering the game ball into the specific area becomes the first ease of entering the ball, and the main Based on the fact that the game identification information becomes the stop display mode of the second specific mode (for example, the 1_4R symbol 2), the mode related to the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is configured to be the second ease of entry mode. has been
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a rotating body icon effect) during the variable display of the main game identification information,
Based on the stop display mode of the specific mode, it is configured so that the mode regarding the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is different,
A first element (for example, the number of "V" holes) and a second element (for example, the degree of cracking of the rotating body icon, the color of light emitted from the cracks of the rotating body icon) are included as elements of the display mode of the specific effect. and
The display mode of the first element is configured to suggest the degree of ease of entry of a game ball into a specific area,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display mode of the second element suggests the degree of expectation that the main game identification information will be in the specific mode of the stop display mode.

The pachinko gaming machine (C5) according to aspect (98) is
A main game start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10),
Acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on the ball entering the main game start port;
advance determination means for determining whether or not the game will be a variable winning opening open game based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
advance determination means for determining whether or not a special game will be played based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Auxiliary game start opening (for example, auxiliary game start opening H10) where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined ball entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance or compared with the closed state. A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, specific areas C12-1, C12-2) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning hole can enter,
a main game identification information display unit capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, first main game symbols, second main game symbols);
Auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information (for example, auxiliary game pattern),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that assists the progress of the game,
The main game department
storage means for temporarily storing the acquired main game information until the condition for starting the variable display of the main game identification information is satisfied when the main game information is acquired by the acquisition means;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the main game information when the variable display start condition is satisfied;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a variable winning opening opening game based on main game information when a variable display start condition is satisfied;
a main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information display section to display the main game identification information variably and then stop displaying the main game identification information based on the main game random number obtained by the obtaining means;
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a jackpot stop display mode), variable winning until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period elapses. It is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times that can make the mouth an advantageous state for the player, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode (for example, a stop display mode for a small win). After that, a variable winning opening opening game (for example, , a special game control means capable of executing a small game),
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start port;
Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information in the auxiliary game identification information display unit;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the variable member can be displaced. or an easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that is performed multiple times,
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there is a normal game state and a specific game state (for example, a shortened game state) in which the variable member is easier to open than in the normal game state, and after execution of the special game. It is configured to be in a specific game state in
One unit is from the start of the variable display of the main game identification information to the stop display, and the specific game state is maintained until one unit is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the end of execution of the special game. After one unit is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) in the specific game state, it is configured to change from the specific game state to the normal game state,
A variable display related to the main game information acquired during the execution of the specific game state is executed in the normal game state after the specific game state, and the main game information is changed by the special game determination means to open the variable winning opening. When it is determined that the information is for playing a game, it is possible to execute a result effect (for example, a result screen) related to the variable winning opening opening game during execution of the variable winning opening opening game,
A variable display related to the main game information acquired during the execution of the specific game state is executed in the normal game state after the specific game state, and the main game information is changed by the special game determination means to open the variable winning opening. This pachinko game machine is characterized by executing a result performance (for example, a result screen) relating to a variable winning opening opening game during variable display relating to the main game information when it is determined that the information does not play the game.

The pachinko gaming machine (C6) according to the aspect (99) is
A main game start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10),
Acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on the ball entering the main game start port;
Pre-determination means for determining whether or not a winning game (variable winning opening opening game, special game) will be performed based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Auxiliary game start opening (for example, auxiliary game start opening H10) where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined ball entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance or compared with the closed state. A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessories B11d),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, specific areas C12-1, C12-2) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning hole can enter,
a main game identification information display unit capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, first main game symbols, second main game symbols);
Auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information (for example, auxiliary game pattern),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that assists the progress of the game,
The main game department
storage means for temporarily storing the acquired main game information until the condition for starting the variable display of the main game identification information is satisfied when the main game information is acquired by the acquisition means;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the main game information when the variable display start condition is satisfied;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a variable winning opening opening game based on main game information when a variable display start condition is satisfied;
a main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information display section to display the main game identification information variably and then stop displaying the main game identification information based on the main game random number obtained by the obtaining means;
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a jackpot stop display mode), variable winning until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period elapses. It is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times that can make the mouth an advantageous state for the player, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode (for example, a stop display mode for a small win). After that, a variable winning opening opening game (for example, , a special game control means capable of executing a small game),
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start port;
Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information in the auxiliary game identification information display unit;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the variable member can be displaced. or an easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that is performed multiple times,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect based on the result of the preliminary determination over multiple variations,
It is possible to execute non-prefetching effects that are not based on the results of pre-determination over multiple variations,
If the result of the pre-judgment satisfies a predetermined condition during the execution of the non-prefetching production (for example, if a specific hold occurs), the production content of the non-prefetching production being executed (for example, if the prefetching lottery is not won) This pachinko game machine is characterized by changing a performance scenario of continuous performance) to performance contents of prefetch performance (for example, performance scenario of continuous performance when winning a prefetch lottery).

The pachinko gaming machine (C7) according to the aspect (100) is
A main game start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10),
Acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on the ball entering the main game start port;
advance determination means for determining whether or not the game will be a variable winning opening open game based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
advance determination means for determining whether or not a special game will be played based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means, advance determination means (for example, pre-reading determination of the sub control unit) for determining in advance whether or not the information will be a variable winning opening opening game;
Auxiliary game start opening (for example, auxiliary game start opening H10) where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined ball entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance or compared with the closed state. A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, specific areas C12-1, C12-2) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning hole can enter,
a main game identification information display unit capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, first main game symbols, second main game symbols);
Auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information (for example, auxiliary game pattern),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that assists the progress of the game,
The main game department
storage means for temporarily storing the acquired main game information until the condition for starting the variable display of the main game identification information is satisfied when the main game information is acquired by the acquisition means;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the main game information when the variable display start condition is satisfied;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a variable winning opening opening game based on main game information when a variable display start condition is satisfied;
a main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information display section to display the main game identification information variably and then stop displaying the main game identification information based on the main game random number obtained by the obtaining means;
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a jackpot stop display mode), variable winning until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period elapses. It is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times that can make the mouth an advantageous state for the player, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode (for example, a stop display mode for a small win). After that, a variable winning opening opening game (for example, , a special game control means capable of executing a small game),
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start port;
Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information in the auxiliary game identification information display unit;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the variable member can be displaced. or an easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that is performed multiple times,
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state (for example, a shortened game state) in which the variable member is easier to open than in the normal game state,
When it is determined that information for a variable winning opening opening game (for example, information for a small hit) is stored by prior determination at a certain timing (for example, during the N-th special game), the special game is being executed. , it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, a reservation prefetch effect) that notifies that information for a variable winning opening game is stored,
Even if a plurality of information for the variable winning opening opening game are stored at a certain timing, only one of the plurality of information for the variable winning opening opening game can be notified in the special effect. cage,
For the information of the variable winning opening open game that is the target of notification in the special effect executed based on the prior determination of a certain timing, the timing after the certain timing (for example, the N + 1th special game Medium) is not subject to pre-determination, but for information that becomes a variable winning opening open game that was not subject to notification in the special effect, pre-determination of timing after the certain timing The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it can be used as a judgment target.

The pachinko gaming machine (C8) according to the aspect (101) is
A main game start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10),
Acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on the ball entering the main game start port;
advance determination means for determining whether or not the game will be a variable winning opening open game based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
advance determination means for determining whether or not a special game will be played based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Auxiliary game start opening (for example, auxiliary game start opening H10) where game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a predetermined ball entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entrance or compared with the closed state. A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessories B11d),
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, specific areas C12-1, C12-2) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning hole can enter,
a main game identification information display unit capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, first main game symbols, second main game symbols);
Auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information (for example, auxiliary game pattern),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that assists the progress of the game,
The main game department
storage means for temporarily storing the acquired main game information until the condition for starting the variable display of the main game identification information is satisfied when the main game information is acquired by the acquisition means;
special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a winning game (special game, variable winning opening opening game) based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means when the variable display start condition is satisfied;
a main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information display section to display the main game identification information variably and then stop displaying the main game identification information based on the main game random number obtained by the obtaining means;
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a jackpot stop display mode), variable winning until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period elapses. It is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game is executed a plurality of times that can make the mouth an advantageous state for the player, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode (for example, a stop display mode for a small win). After that, a variable winning opening opening game (for example, , a special game control means capable of executing a small game),
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start port;
Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information in the auxiliary game identification information display unit;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the variable member can be displaced. or an easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that is performed multiple times,
As game states related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state (for example, a shortened game state) in which the variable member is easier to open than in the normal game state, and execution of the special game ends. It is configured to be in a specific game state later,
As main game identification information, it has first main game identification information (for example, first main game pattern) and second main game identification information (for example, second main game pattern),
When the specific game state is entered after the execution of the special game is finished, one unit is from the start of the variable display of the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information to the stop display,
The specific game state is maintained until one unit of the first main game identification information is played the first number of times (for example, six times) after the end of execution of the special game,
The specific game state is maintained until one unit of the second main game identification information is played the second number of times (for example, 10 times) after the execution of the special game is finished,
Based on the fact that one unit of the second main game identification information is played in the specific game state, the information related to the second number (for example, display indicating the number of times the time-reduced game state is executed, subtraction display, etc.) is updated and displayed. is configured as
After the execution of the special game is completed and before one unit of the first main game identification information is played the first number of times, the information related to the second number of times is not updated and displayed even if one unit of the first main game identification information is played. , If one unit of the first main game identification information is played the first number of times after the execution of the special game is completed, before one unit of the second main game identification information is played the second number of times after the execution of the special game is completed Even so, the pachinko game machine is characterized by updating and displaying information related to the second number of times.

The pachinko gaming machine (C9) according to the aspect (102) is
A first main game start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start opening (for example, a second main game start opening B12) into which a game ball can enter;
Auxiliary game start opening (for example, auxiliary game start opening H10) where game balls can enter,
A sorting ball entrance into which gaming balls can enter (for example, a sorting ball entrance C30);
A variable member that is attached to the first main game start port and is capable of being displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the first main game start port or compared with the closed state. The first variable member (e.g., the second 1 non-electric accessory A12hd),
A variable member that is attached to the second main game start port and is displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second main game start port or compared with the closed state. A second variable member (e.g., second 2 non-electric accessories B12hd),
A variable member attached to the sorting ball entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the sorting ball entrance or compared with the closed state. A third variable member (e.g., second main game Starter electric accessory B11d),
The flow direction of the game ball that entered the distribution ball entrance is either the first opening (for example, the first opening ball entrance C32) or the second opening (for example, the second opening ball entrance C33) A member that changes direction, and when displaced to the first mode, it is easy for game balls to enter the first open port, and when displaced to the second mode, it is easy for game balls to enter the second open port. a distribution member (e.g., distribution member C34) configured to be
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
a specific area in which a game ball entering a variable winning slot can enter with a first probability;
a first main game identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
a second main game identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first main game start opening;
After the first main game identification information is variably displayed on the first main game identification information display unit based on the first random number obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed. one main game identification information display control means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second main game start port;
After the second main game identification information is variably displayed on the second main game identification information display unit based on the second random number obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the second main game identification information is controlled to be stopped and displayed. two main game identification information display control means;
After the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first mode (for example, the jackpot mode), it is variable until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period of time elapses. a first special game control means capable of executing a first special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times in which the winning opening can be brought into an advantageous state for the player;
After the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the second mode (for example, a small win mode), until a specified number of balls enter the variable winning slot or a specified period elapses. It is possible to execute a variable winning opening opening game that executes a unit game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player, and when a ball enters a specific area during execution of the variable winning opening opening game, the variable A second special game control means capable of executing a second special game after the winning opening opening game is completed;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
Auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that assists the progress of the game;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, it is variable until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period of time elapses. A special game control means capable of executing a special game that executes a unit game that can make the winning opening an advantageous state for the player; game random number acquisition means;
Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information in the auxiliary game identification information display unit;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the first variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the first variable member can be displaced, and then displaced to the closed state. a first easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that performs the action to make one or more times;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the second variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the second variable member can be displaced, and then displaced to the closed state. a second easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that performs the action of causing one or more times,
It is configured so that the first variable member can be opened by entering the ball into the first opening,
It is configured so that the second variable member can be opened by entering the ball into the second opening,
As game states related to the ease of opening the first variable member and the second variable member, the normal game state and the first specific game state in which the first variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state (for example, the time reduction game state A ), and a second specific game state (for example, time shortening game state B) in which the second variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
The first specific game state is configured to be set more easily after the first special game than after the second special game,
The second specific game state is configured to be set more easily after the second special game than after the first special game,
After the variable display of the first main game identification information is performed the first number of times (for example, 100 times) in the first specific game state, the first specific game state is changed to the normal game state,
After the variable display of the second main game identification information is performed for the second number of times (for example, 7 times) in the second specific game state, the second specific game state is changed to the normal game state,
The first number of times is a number greater than the second number of times,
The first probability (for example, 1/1) that the game ball entering the variable winning hole enters the specific area is the second probability (for example, 1/7) that the second main game identification information is the second mode. ) is a pachinko game machine characterized by being higher than

The pachinko gaming machine (C10) according to the aspect (103) is
A first main game start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A12) into which a game ball can enter;
A second main game start opening (for example, a second main game start opening B12) into which a game ball can enter;
Auxiliary game start opening (for example, auxiliary game start opening H10) where game balls can enter,
A sorting ball entrance into which gaming balls can enter (for example, a sorting ball entrance C30);
A variable member that is attached to the first main game start port and is capable of being displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the first main game start port or compared with the closed state. The first variable member (e.g., the second 1 non-electric accessory A12hd),
A variable member that is attached to the second main game start port and is displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second main game start port or compared with the closed state. A second variable member (e.g., second 2 non-electric accessories B12hd),
A variable member attached to the sorting ball entrance and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the sorting ball entrance or compared with the closed state. A third variable member (e.g., second main game Starter electric accessory B11d),
The flow direction of the game ball that entered the distribution ball entrance is either the first opening (for example, the first opening ball entrance C32) or the second opening (for example, the second opening ball entrance C33) A member that changes direction, and when displaced to the first mode, it is easy for game balls to enter the first open port, and when displaced to the second mode, it is easy for game balls to enter the second open port. a distribution member (e.g., distribution member C34) configured to be
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
a specific area in which a game ball entering a variable winning slot can enter with a first probability;
a first main game identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information;
a second main game identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information;
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first main game start opening;
After the first main game identification information is variably displayed on the first main game identification information display unit based on the first random number obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed. one main game identification information display control means;
a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second main game start port;
After the second main game identification information is variably displayed on the second main game identification information display unit based on the second random number obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the second main game identification information is controlled to be stopped and displayed. two main game identification information display control means;
After the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first mode (for example, the jackpot mode), it is variable until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period of time elapses. a first special game control means capable of executing a first special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times in which the winning opening can be brought into an advantageous state for the player;
After the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the second mode (for example, a small win mode), until a specified number of balls enter the variable winning slot or a specified period elapses. It is possible to execute a variable winning opening opening game that executes a unit game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player, and when a ball enters a specific area during execution of the variable winning opening opening game, the variable A second special game control means capable of executing a second special game after the winning opening opening game is completed;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
Auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that assists the progress of the game;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, it is variable until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined period of time elapses. A special game control means capable of executing a special game that executes a unit game that can make the winning opening an advantageous state for the player; game random number acquisition means;
Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information in the auxiliary game identification information display unit;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the first variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the first variable member can be displaced, and then displaced to the closed state. a first easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that performs the action to make one or more times;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the second variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period, which is the period in which the second variable member can be displaced, and then displaced to the closed state. a second easy-to-enter game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter game that performs the action of causing one or more times,
It is configured so that the first variable member can be opened by entering the ball into the first opening,
It is configured so that the second variable member can be opened by entering the ball into the second opening,
As game states related to the ease of opening the first variable member and the second variable member, the normal game state and the first specific game state (for example, the time reduction game state A ), and a second specific game state (for example, time shortening game state B) in which the second variable member is more likely to be opened than in the normal game state,
The first specific game state is configured to be set more easily after the first special game than after the second special game,
The second specific game state is configured to be set more easily after the second special game than after the first special game,
The first probability (for example, 1/10) that the game ball entering the variable winning hole enters the specific area is the second probability (for example, 1/1) that the second main game identification information is the second mode. ) is a pachinko game machine characterized by being lower than

The gaming machine (D1) according to aspect (104) is
A main game start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, specific areas C12-1, C12-2) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning hole can enter,
a main game identification information display unit capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, first main game symbols, second main game symbols);
Acquisition means for acquiring main game information based on the ball entering the main game start port;
When the variable display start condition is satisfied, based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means, an open game (for example, a small winning game in the case of a small winning V gaming machine, a big winning game in the case of a V probability variation gaming machine A special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a V round game);
a main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information display unit to display the main game identification information variably and then stop displaying the main game identification information based on the main game information obtained by the obtaining means;
After the main game identification information is variably displayed in the main game identification information display unit, it is controlled to be stopped and displayed, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a stop display mode for a small win, a stop for a big win) display mode), open game that can put the variable winning port in an advantageous state Round game) can be executed, and if a game ball enters a specific area during execution of an open game, a game profit after the end of the open game (for example, in the case of a small win V gaming machine, a big hit game a game profit imparting means capable of imparting a high base state and a high probability state in the case of a gaming machine with variable V probability);
A movable body (for example, an interference member C12-6) that affects the flow of the game ball until the game ball that entered the variable winning hole flows down to the specific area,
When the power is turned on with an initialization operation (for example, RAM clear operation), the movable body initialization operation (for example, motor control processing) is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 240 seconds),
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to award a gaming profit when a gaming ball enters a specific area at least within a predetermined period.

The gaming machine (D2-1) according to aspect (105) is
Movable body operating means (for example, shutter C12-3-1) for operating a movable body (for example, shutter C12-3-1) based on the setting of a predetermined action pattern triggered by a predetermined game action (for example, opening of a large winning opening) shutter normal operation control process);
a storage area (e.g., timer storage area) for storing information (e.g., timer data) for controlling progress according to a set predetermined operation pattern,
After moving the movable body from the first position (eg, initial position) to the second position (eg, movable position) based on the setting of the first operation pattern (eg, normal shutter operation pattern), the second It is configured to be in a holding state in which it is held in position,
The holding state is released with a specific game action (for example, end trigger action) different from the predetermined game action as a trigger,
This gaming machine is characterized in that information in a storage area is maintained as specific information (for example, FFFF) when the movable body is in the held state.

The gaming machine (D2-2) according to aspect (106) is
A movable body that operates a movable body (eg, an interference member C12-6, a rotating drum 12-7) based on a predetermined action pattern being set with a predetermined game action (eg, opening of a large winning opening) as a trigger. Operation means (for example, interference member normal operation control processing, rotary drum normal operation control processing);
a storage area (e.g., timer storage area) for storing information (e.g., timer data) for controlling progress according to a set predetermined operation pattern,
The movable body is moved from a first position (eg, initial position) to a second position (eg, movable position) based on the setting of a first motion pattern (eg, interference member normal motion pattern, rotary drum normal motion pattern). It is configured to be in a repetitive state (for example, reciprocating state, loop state) in which the pattern to operate is repeatedly executed,
Triggered by a specific game action different from a predetermined game action (for example, an end trigger action), the repeated state is canceled,
The gaming machine is characterized in that information in a storage area is maintained as specific information (for example, FFFF) when the movable body is in the repeating state.

The gaming machine (D3-1) according to aspect (107) is
Movable body operating means (for example, shutter C12-3-1) for operating a movable body (for example, shutter C12-3-1) based on the setting of a predetermined action pattern triggered by a predetermined game action (for example, opening of a large winning opening) shutter normal operation control process);
a storage area (e.g., timer storage area) for storing information (e.g., timer data) for controlling progress according to a set predetermined operation pattern;
After moving the movable body from the first position (eg, initial position) to the second position (eg, movable position) based on the setting of the first operation pattern (eg, normal shutter operation pattern), the second It is configured to be in a holding state in which it is held in position,
The holding state is released with a specific game action (for example, end trigger action) different from the predetermined game action as a trigger,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to move the movable body at the second position to the first position after the held state is released.

The gaming machine (D3-1) according to aspect (107) is
When the holding state is released, the movable body at the second position is moved to the first position based on the setting of the second movement pattern (for example, the shutter termination movement pattern) for moving the movable body to the first position. The game machine is characterized in that it is configured to operate to a position.

The gaming machine (D3-2) according to aspect (108) is
Movable body (eg, interference member C12-6, stopper C12-8, rotary drum 12-7) based on the setting of a predetermined operation pattern triggered by a predetermined game operation (eg, opening of the big winning opening) (for example, interference member normal operation control processing, stopper normal operation control processing, rotary drum normal operation control processing),
a storage area (e.g., timer storage area) for storing information (e.g., timer data) for controlling progress according to a set predetermined operation pattern,
The movable body is moved from a first position (eg, initial position) to a second position (eg, , movable position) are repeatedly executed (for example, reciprocating state, loop state),
Triggered by a specific game action different from a predetermined game action (for example, an end trigger action), the repeated state is canceled,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the movable body is moved to the first position after the repeated state is released.

The gaming machine (D3-2) according to aspect (108) is
If the movable body is not at the first position when the repeated state is canceled, the movable body is moved to the first position by canceling the set first movement pattern. It is a gaming machine characterized by

The gaming machine (D3-2) according to aspect (108) is
A first detection means for detecting that the movable body is positioned at the first position,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the repeated state is canceled and the movable body is not located at the first position, the movable body is operated until the first position is detected by the first detection means. be.

The gaming machine (D4) according to aspect (109) is
A main game start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, specific areas C12-1, C12-2) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning hole can enter,
a main game identification information display unit capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, first main game symbols, second main game symbols);
Acquisition means for acquiring main game information based on the ball entering the main game start port;
When the variable display start condition is satisfied, based on the main game information acquired by the acquisition means, an open game (for example, a small winning game in the case of a small winning V gaming machine, a big winning game in the case of a V probability variation gaming machine A special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a V round game);
a main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information display unit to display the main game identification information variably and then stop displaying the main game identification information based on the main game information obtained by the obtaining means;
After the main game identification information is variably displayed in the main game identification information display unit, it is controlled to be stopped and displayed, and the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a stop display mode for a small win, a stop for a big win) display mode), open game that can put the variable winning port in an advantageous state Round game) can be executed, and if a game ball enters a specific area during execution of an open game, a game profit after the end of the open game (for example, in the case of a small win V gaming machine, a big hit game a game profit imparting means capable of imparting a high base state and a high probability state in the case of a gaming machine with variable V probability);
A movable body (for example, an interference member C12-6) that affects the flow of the game ball until the game ball that entered the variable winning hole flows down to the specific area,
As the specific region, it has a first specific region (eg, specific region C12-1) and a second specific region (eg, specific region C12-2) arranged downstream from the first specific region,
A first movable piece (for example, a straight V shutter C12-1-1) is operated in an easy-to-enter state and a difficult-to-enter state to change the ease of entering a game ball into a first specific area. changing means (for example, direct V shutter operation control processing);
Second changing means (for example, shutter normal operation control processing for stepwise changing the ease of entry of the game ball into the second specific area by operating the second movable piece (for example, shutter C12-3-1) ) and
The game machine is characterized in that when the first movable piece is operated in the easy-to-ball-enter state, the second movable piece is configured to maximize the ease with which a game ball enters the second specific region. .

The gaming machine (E1) according to the aspect (110) is
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode in the main game identification information display part, a variable winning hole opening game capable of making the variable winning hole advantageous can be executed. A special game control means capable of executing a special game when a game ball enters a specific area during execution of an open game,
The execution period of the variable winning opening open game includes a start demonstration period that is a waiting period and a unit game execution period that is a period during which the variable winning opening can be opened,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed, the starting demonstration period starts from the start of the variable winning opening opening game, and when the starting demonstration period ends, the unit game execution period starts,
When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the unit game execution period, the variable winning opening is configured to perform a specific opening that facilitates entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening,
The predetermined period includes at least a first predetermined period and a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period,
Having at least a first specific mode and a second specific mode as the stop display mode of the specific mode,
It has a movable body that affects the ease of entering a game ball into a specific area,
It has an operating state and a non-operating state as states related to the driving of the movable body,
When the unit game execution period starts, the movable body changes from the non-operating state to the operating state,
When the movable body changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, it is configured to operate in a predetermined operating mode,
It has at least a first mode and a second mode as modes that can be taken when the movable body is in the operating state,
When the movable body is in the second mode, the ease of entering the game ball into the specific area is higher than in the case of the first mode,
In the variable winning opening opening game that is executed after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode, the specific opening is performed when the first predetermined period elapses after the start of the unit game execution period. is executed, and when the game ball enters the variable winning hole in the specific opening, the game ball is configured to flow down toward the specific area in the state of the first aspect of the movable body,
In the variable winning opening opening game that is executed after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the second specific mode, the specific opening is performed when the second predetermined period elapses after the start of the unit game execution period. It is characterized in that, when the game ball enters the variable winning hole in the specific opening, the game ball flows down toward the specific area in the state of the second mode of the movable body. It is a pachinko machine.

The gaming machine (E2) according to aspect (111) is
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode in the main game identification information display part, a variable winning hole opening game capable of making the variable winning hole advantageous can be executed. A special game control means capable of executing a special game when a game ball enters a specific area during execution of an open game,
The execution period of the variable winning opening open game includes a start demonstration period that is a waiting period and a unit game execution period that is a period during which the variable winning opening can be opened,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed, the starting demonstration period starts from the start of the variable winning opening opening game, and when the starting demonstration period ends, the unit game execution period starts,
The start demonstration period includes at least a first start demonstration period and a second start demonstration period longer than the first start demonstration period,
Having at least a first specific mode and a second specific mode as the stop display mode of the specific mode,
The start demonstration period of the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode in a predetermined game state is the second start demonstration period,
The start demonstration period of the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stop-displayed in the stop display mode of the second specific mode in a predetermined game state is the first start demonstration period,
The main game identification information is displayed in the second specific mode in a predetermined game state rather than the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode in the predetermined game state. The variable winning opening opening game that is executed after being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of is configured so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is relatively high,
The first specific effect is executed based on the main game identification information being stop-displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode, and the main game identification information is stop-displayed in the stop display mode of the second specific mode. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a second specific effect, which is a different effect mode from the first specific effect, based on.

The gaming machine (E3) according to the aspect (112) is
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode in the main game identification information display part, a variable winning hole opening game capable of making the variable winning hole advantageous can be executed. A special game control means capable of executing a special game when a game ball enters a specific area during execution of an open game,
The execution period of the variable winning opening open game includes a start demonstration period that is a waiting period and a unit game execution period that is a period during which the variable winning opening can be opened,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed, the starting demonstration period starts from the start of the variable winning opening opening game, and when the starting demonstration period ends, the unit game execution period starts,
At least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect are provided as effects that can be executed after the start of the start demonstration period in the variable winning opening opening game,
When the specific effect is executed, there are cases where the special effect is executed and cases where the special effect is not executed.
Ease of entry into a specific area in a variable winning opening opening game in which a first specific effect is executed in which a special effect is executed, and specification in a variable winning opening opening game in which a second specific effect is executed without a special effect. The ease of entry into the area is the same,
The effect execution time of the first specific effect in which the special effect is executed is the same as the effect execution time of the second specific effect in which the special effect is not executed,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the performance execution time of a first specified performance in which no special performance is executed is different from the performance execution time of a second specified performance in which no special performance is executed.

The gaming machine (E4) according to aspect (113) is
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode in the main game identification information display part, a variable winning hole opening game capable of making the variable winning hole advantageous can be executed. A special game control means capable of executing a special game when a game ball enters a specific area during execution of an open game,
The execution period of the variable winning opening open game includes a start demonstration period that is a waiting period and a unit game execution period that is a period during which the variable winning opening can be opened,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed, the starting demonstration period starts from the start of the variable winning opening opening game, and when the starting demonstration period ends, the unit game execution period starts,
When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the unit game execution period, the variable winning opening is configured to perform a specific opening that facilitates entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening,
It has a specific effect as an effect that can be executed at least after the start of the start demonstration period in the variable winning opening game,
When the specific effect is executed, there are cases where the special effect is not executed and cases where the special effect is executed one or more times.
In a predetermined game state, when the type of the specific mode that triggered the execution of the variable winning hole opening game is different, even if the length of the predetermined period is the same and the performance mode of the specific performance is the same, the special It is configured so that the number of times the performance is executed is different and the length of the start demonstration period may be different,
In a predetermined game state, if the type of the specific mode that triggered the execution of the variable winning opening opening game is different, even if the length of the predetermined period is different and the number of executions of the special effects is the same, the start demonstration period The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the lengths of the pachinko game machines are different and the execution time of the specific performance may be the same.

The gaming machine (E5) according to aspect (114) is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can be entered into the second starting port or compared to the closed state. A variable member configured to make it difficult to enter a game ball into the second starting port when it is easy and displaced to the closed state or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
After the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode in the first main game identification information display section, or the second main game identification information is specified in the second main game identification information display section After being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the mode, it is possible to execute a variable winning hole opening game capable of putting the variable winning hole into an advantageous state, and a game ball enters a specific area during execution of the variable winning hole opening game. A special game control means capable of executing a special game is provided when
The execution period of the variable winning opening open game includes a start demonstration period that is a waiting period and a unit game execution period that is a period during which the variable winning opening can be opened,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed, the starting demonstration period starts from the start of the variable winning opening opening game, and when the starting demonstration period ends, the unit game execution period starts,
When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the unit game execution period, the variable winning opening is configured to perform a specific opening that facilitates entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening,
As game states related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game. has been
A variable winning opening opening game that is executed after the first main game identification information that started variable display in the normal game state is stopped and displayed in a certain kind of specific mode stop display mode, and a variable winning opening game that changes in the specific game state. The length of the predetermined period is the same in the variable winning opening opening game that is executed after the first main game identification information that started to be displayed is stopped and displayed in the certain type of specific stop display mode. are configured to have different lengths of starting demo periods,
A variable winning opening opening game that is executed after the first main game identification information that started variable display in the specific game state is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the certain type of specific mode, and in the specific game state. In the variable winning opening opening game that is executed after the second main game identification information that started the variable display is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode of a type different from the certain type, the length of the predetermined period The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that the length of the start demonstration period is the same and the length of the start demonstration period is the same.

The gaming machine (E6) according to aspect (115) is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port that can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can be entered into the second starting port or compared to the closed state. A variable member configured to make it difficult to enter a game ball into the second starting port when it is easy and displaced to the closed state or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
After the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode in the first main game identification information display section, or the second main game identification information is specified in the second main game identification information display section After being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the mode, it is possible to execute a variable winning hole opening game capable of putting the variable winning hole into an advantageous state, and a game ball enters a specific area during execution of the variable winning hole opening game. A special game control means capable of executing a special game is provided when
The execution period of the variable winning opening open game includes a start demonstration period that is a waiting period and a unit game execution period that is a period during which the variable winning opening can be opened,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed, the starting demonstration period starts from the start of the variable winning opening opening game, and when the starting demonstration period ends, the unit game execution period starts,
When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the unit game execution period, the variable winning opening is configured to perform a specific opening that facilitates entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening,
As game states related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than in the normal game state, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game. has been
A specific game state is maintained from the start of the variable display of the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information to the stop display, and until one unit is performed a predetermined number of times after the execution of the special game is completed. has been
After one unit is played the predetermined number of times in the specific game state, it is configured to change from the specific game state to the normal game state,
After the end of the special game executed with the trigger of the variable winning opening opening game executed after the first main game identification information, which started variable display in the normal game state, is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode The variable winning opening is executed after the second main game identification information, which has started variable display in the normal game state, is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode than the average value of the predetermined number of times in the specific game state. The average value of the predetermined number of times of the specific game state after the end of the special game executed with the game as a trigger is larger,
After the end of the special game executed with the trigger of the variable winning opening opening game executed after the first main game identification information, which started variable display in the normal game state, is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode Opening of the variable winning opening executed after the first main game identification information that started variable display in the specific game state is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode more than the average value of the predetermined number of times in the specific game state. The average value of the predetermined number of times of the specific game state after the end of the special game executed with the game as a trigger is larger,
In the specific game state, when one unit that is less than the predetermined number of times has been executed after the execution of the special game is completed, the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode. During the execution of the variable winning opening open game, it is in a specific game state,
In the specific game state, when one unit that is less than the predetermined number of times has been executed after the completion of execution of the special game, the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode. During the execution of the variable winning opening open game, it is in a specific game state,
Executed after the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode in the case where the specified game is in the specific game state and one unit is executed the predetermined number of times after the execution of the special game is finished. During the execution of the variable winning opening game, it is in a normal game state,
Executed after the second main game identification information is stop-displayed in a specific stop display mode when the specific game state is set and one unit of the predetermined number of times is executed after the end of the execution of the special game. During the execution of the variable winning opening game, it is in a normal game state,
A specific game state after a special game executed triggered by a variable winning opening opening game executed after the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode. The predetermined number of times is determined by referring to the game state regarding the ease of opening the variable member when the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information starts the variable display, Even if the variable winning opening opening game that is executed after the first main game identification information that started variable display in the specific game state is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode is in the normal game state. , The average value of the predetermined number of times in the specific game state after the end of the special game executed with the variable winning opening game as a trigger is the first main game identification information that started the variable display in the normal game state is in the specific mode after the end of the special game executed with the trigger of the variable winning opening opening game executed after being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of . It is a pachinko machine.

The gaming machine (E7) according to aspect (116) is
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode in the main game identification information display part, a variable winning hole opening game capable of making the variable winning hole advantageous can be executed. A special game control means capable of executing a special game when a game ball enters a specific area during execution of an open game,
The execution period of the variable winning opening open game includes a start demonstration period that is a waiting period and a unit game execution period that is a period during which the variable winning opening can be opened,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed, the starting demonstration period starts from the start of the variable winning opening opening game, and when the starting demonstration period ends, the unit game execution period starts,
When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the unit game execution period, the variable winning opening is configured to perform a specific opening that facilitates entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening,
The predetermined period includes at least a first predetermined period and a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period,
Having at least a first specific mode, a second specific mode, and a third specific mode as the stop display mode of the specific mode,
The predetermined period of the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode in a predetermined game state is the first predetermined period,
The predetermined period of the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stop-displayed in the stop display mode of the second specific mode in a predetermined game state is the second predetermined period,
The main game identification information is displayed in the second specific mode in a predetermined game state rather than the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode in the predetermined game state. The variable winning opening opening game that is executed after being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of , has a higher easiness of entering the game ball into the specific area,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, it is not determined that a predetermined error has occurred even if the entry of the game ball into the specific area is detected before the specific period elapses after the start of the unit game execution period. , it is configured to be able to determine that the predetermined error has occurred when a game ball entering a specific area is detected after a specific period has passed since the unit game execution period started,
In the variable winning opening opening game in which the stop display mode of the specific mode is different, the specific period is configured to be different,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the third specific mode, even if the entry of the game ball into the specific area is detected, the predetermined This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured not to determine that an error has occurred.

The gaming machine (E8) according to aspect (117) is
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode in the main game identification information display part, a variable winning hole opening game capable of making the variable winning hole advantageous can be executed. A special game control means capable of executing a special game when a game ball enters a specific area during execution of an open game,
The execution period of the variable winning opening open game includes a start demonstration period that is a waiting period and a unit game execution period that is a period during which the variable winning opening can be opened,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed, the starting demonstration period starts from the start of the variable winning opening opening game, and when the starting demonstration period ends, the unit game execution period starts,
When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the unit game execution period, the variable winning opening is configured to perform a specific opening that facilitates entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening,
The predetermined period includes at least a first predetermined period and a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period,
Having at least a first specific mode and a second specific mode as the stop display mode of the specific mode,
The predetermined period of the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode in a predetermined game state is the first predetermined period,
The predetermined period of the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stop-displayed in the stop display mode of the second specific mode in a predetermined game state is the second predetermined period,
The main game identification information is displayed in the second specific mode in a predetermined game state rather than the variable winning opening opening game executed after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the first specific mode in the predetermined game state. The variable winning opening opening game that is executed after being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of , has a higher easiness of entering the game ball into the specific area,
Part of the period from the start of the start demo period to the end of the variable winning slot opening game, or part of the period from the start of the unit game execution period to the elapse of the predetermined period , is configured to be able to execute an operation presentation prompting the player to operate the operation member,
When the vibration is detected, it can be determined that a predetermined vibration error has occurred, and when it is determined that the predetermined vibration error has occurred, an error notification regarding the predetermined vibration error can be executed,
During execution of the variable winning opening opening game, it is not determined that a predetermined vibration error has occurred from the start of the unit game execution period to a first timing before the predetermined period elapses, while the first timing is not determined. After that, it is configured so that it can be determined that a predetermined vibration error has occurred,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that, in a variable winning opening opening game in which the stop display mode of the specific mode is different, the time from the start of the unit game execution period to the first timing can be different. be.

By a predetermined trigger, the fluctuation time of the pattern fluctuation of the main game pattern, the execution time of the special game (including special game start demo and special game end demo), the execution time of the small win game (small win game start demo, small win game end) demo) may be longer (extended). For example, if the reservation reserved during the pattern variation of the main game pattern is determined to be a hit (small hit, big win) by the prefetch determination, it is possible to extend the pattern variation of the main game pattern during the pattern variation. be. In such a configuration, the main control unit transmits a command indicating addition of the variation time to the sub control unit based on the decision to extend the symbol variation of the main game symbols. The sub-control part which received the command indicating addition of the variation time can extend the variation time of the symbol variation of the performance symbol based on the received command. At this time, the variation time of the symbol variation of the main game symbols is also extended. In addition, the main control unit transmits a command indicating addition of the fixed variable time from the main control unit to the sub-control unit based on the determination to extend the fixed variable time of the main game symbols. The sub-control unit that has received the command indicating addition of the variable fixed time can extend the fixed variable time (for example, from 500 ms to 10 seconds) when the design variation of the design for performance is stopped and displayed based on the received command. . At this time, it is configured such that the variable fixed time of the main game symbols is also extended.

In addition, when the hold reserved during the execution of the special game is determined to be a hit (minor win, big win) by the look-ahead determination, it is possible to extend the execution time of the special game. When configured in this way, the main control unit can extend the closing time of the big winning opening between rounds during the special game based on the result of the look-ahead determination. Also, the main control unit can extend the execution time of the special game start demonstration based on the result of the prefetch determination. Furthermore, the main control unit can extend the execution time of the special game end demonstration based on the result of the prefetch determination. Furthermore, the main control unit can change the opening pattern of the big winning opening during the special game based on the result of the prefetch determination. The changed opening pattern is a pattern in which the time period during which the big winning opening is closed is set to be long, and the opening time period is the same as the pattern before the change.

In addition, when the hold reserved during the execution of the small winning game is judged to be a winning (small winning, big winning) by the prefetch judgment, it is possible to extend the execution time of the small winning game. When configured in this way, the main control unit can change the opening pattern of the big winning opening during the small winning game based on the result of the prefetch determination. The changed opening pattern is a pattern in which the time period during which the big winning opening is closed is set to be long, and the opening time period is the same as the pattern before the change. Further, the main control unit can extend the execution time of the small winning game start demonstration based on the result of the prefetch determination. Furthermore, the main control unit can extend the execution time of the small winning game end demonstration based on the result of the prefetch determination.

Based on the stop display of a specific main game symbol, the time shortening game state and the time shortening game states A to E may be set. The specific main game symbols can be exemplified by small winning symbols, big winning symbols, and losing symbols. In the case of the small winning pattern, even if the game ball does not enter the specific area, the game may be shifted to the time shortening game state or the time shortening game states A to E. In addition, in the case of a lost pattern, a plurality of types of lost patterns (for example, 0 lost pattern, 1 lost pattern, and lost patterns A to G) are provided, and the lost pattern displayed in normal losing is lost pattern 0, shortening the time. A losing pattern that shifts to a game state is shifted to a losing pattern 1, a losing pattern that shifts to a time shortening game state A is a losing pattern A, a losing pattern that shifts to a time shortening game state B is shifted to a losing pattern B, and a losing pattern that shifts to a time shortening game state C is shifted to a time shortening game state C. A losing pattern can be set to a losing pattern C, a losing pattern to shift to the time shortening game state D can be set to a losing pattern D, and a losing pattern to shift to the time shortening game state E can be set to a losing pattern E.

Regarding the "stop display" so far, the expression of "stop display" simply "stop display" instead of "temporarily stop display" or "definitely stop display" It includes both the display mode and the definitely stop display mode.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entering ball determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B 2nd main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-H Auxiliary game entrance ball entrance determination means MJ11-C10 1st major winning entrance determination Means, MJ11-C20 2nd big winning entrance ball determination means MJ20 Random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-A First main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-B Second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-H Auxiliary Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 Reservation control means MJ31 Reservation digestion control means MJ31j Fluctuation start condition sufficiency determination means MJ32 Symbol reservation means MJ32-A First main game symbol reservation means MJ32b-A First main game symbol reservation information temporary Storage means MJ32-B Second main game symbol reservation means, MJ32b-B Second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol reservation means, MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MN Game content determination Means, MN10 Winner lottery means MN11-A First main game lottery means, MN11ta-A First main game lottery table MN11-B Second main game lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game success/failure lottery means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success/failure lottery table MN20 Special game transition determination means, MN40 Symbol content determination means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Fluctuation mode determination means , MN51-A First main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A First main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B Second main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery table , MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP Game progress means MP10 Display control means, MP11-C First and second main game symbol control means MP11t-C First and Second main game symbol variation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP20-B Second main game start opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP21-B Second main Game start gate electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means, MP2 2t-B 2nd main game start opening electric accessory opening timer MP30 special game control means, MP31 condition determination means MP32 special game content determination means, MP32ta special game content reference table MP33 special game execution means, MP33-C first and second 2 big winning mouth electric accessory opening and closing control means MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34 Special game time management means MP34t Special game timer, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Probability variation end condition determination means MP52 Time saving end condition determination means MP52c Time saving number counter, MB Game state temporary storage means MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C First and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H Auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB11b-H Auxiliary Game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b Special game related information temporary storage means MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control means MT10 Command transmission buffer MH Prize ball payout determination means A First main game peripheral device A10 First Main game start port, A12 1st main game start port, A12hd 1st non-electric accessory,
A11s 1st main game start entrance detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st main game symbol holding display unit B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game symbol display unit Game start opening B11s Second main game start opening ball detection device, B11d Second main game start electric accessory B12 Second main game start opening, B12hd Second non-electric accessory B20 Second main game pattern display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display part B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display part, C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device C10 1st big winning gate, C11s 1st big winning gate winning detection device C11d 1st big winning gate Electric accessory, C12-1 specific area, C12-2 specific area, C12-3 general area C12-1-1 direct V shutter, C12-3-1 shutter C12-5 reservoir, C12-6 interference member, C12- 7 Rotating drum, C12-8 Stopper C17 Rotating body C20 Second big prize opening C21s Second big prize opening winning detection device C21d Second big winning opening electric accessory C30d Electric electric accessory C30 Sorting ball entrance C32 1 open entrance, C33 2nd open entrance C32s 1st open entrance entrance detection device, C33s 2nd open entrance entrance detection device C34 distribution member H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game start Mouth H11s Auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game design display device H21g Auxiliary game design display unit, H21h Auxiliary game design reservation display unit S Sub-control board, SM Sub-game control means (sub-main control unit)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative pattern display control means SM21n design display content determination means, SM21ta lottery table for design variation content determination SM21ta-2 decorative design performance table, SM21b: design related information temporary storage means SM21t-1: first design change time management timer; SM22: design reservation information display control means;
SM22b Design pending information temporary storage means SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 Notice effect display control means SM24n Notice effect display content determination means SM24b Notice effect related information Temporary storage means SM25 Ready-to-win effect display control means SM25n Ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25b Ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM27 Right hitting display control means SM40 Information transmission/reception control means SS Effects display means (sub-sub control unit) SS10 Sub-information Transmission/reception control means SS20 Image display control means SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Effect display device SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative pattern display area SG12 First reservation display area SG13 Second reservation display area KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball dispensing device

Claims (1)

A starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
A sub game section that controls the performance display on the performance display section
with
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode;
with
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the plurality of first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit in the one performance period, the final first performance symbols are displayed. A combination is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit, and after variably displaying a plurality of second effect symbols on the effect display unit within the one effect period, the final design of the second effect pattern production pattern display control means for controlling the combination to be displayed on the production display unit;
with
In a situation where there is a specific hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, a performance symbol prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation degree of the special game related to the specific suspension using the first performance symbol is displayed on the performance display unit. and
When executing the performance symbol prefetch effect, the first performance symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination and a special performance can be executed for the first performance symbols, while the second performance symbols are displayed in the predetermined combination. and is configured so that the special effect is not executed for the second effect pattern,
Multiple holds are triggered by the ball entering the starting port during the execution of the variable display of identification information in a situation where no holds remain, and the hold other than the hold that is digested first among the multiple holds If one is a specific hold, and the first hold to be digested after the end of the variable display is completed, the number of holds to be digested before the specific hold is the first number of holds In the first symbol variation that can be executed, the first performance symbols can be displayed in the predetermined combination as the performance symbol look-ahead effect, and the number of suspensions to be digested before the specific suspension is the first. Even in the second pattern variation that can be executed under the condition that the second reservation number is larger than the reservation number, the first production pattern can be displayed in the predetermined combination as the production pattern look-ahead production, When the first performance symbols are displayed in the predetermined combination as the performance symbol look-ahead effect in the first symbol variation, the first performance symbols in the first symbol variation are the predetermined combination. A production process until display, and a first production in the second pattern fluctuation when the first production pattern is displayed in the predetermined combination as the production pattern look-ahead production in the second pattern fluctuation. The design is configured to be different from the production process until the symbols are displayed in the predetermined combination,
As game states during non-execution of the special game, there are a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
During the normal game state and during the variable standby in which the identification information is not variably displayed, the power cutoff occurs in a situation where the predetermined standby display is displayed on the effect display section, and then the power cutoff is displayed after the power cutoff. In the display mode of the design for one effect, and in the state where the predetermined standby display is displayed on the effect display part during the specific game state and the variable standby in which the identification information is not displayed, the power supply is cut off. It is configured to be different from the display mode of the first effect pattern displayed after the power is turned off,
In a situation where a predetermined effect mode is set when the special game is not executed, a predetermined effect sound can be output at least during the variable display of the first effect symbols,
A plurality of types of the predetermined effect sound are provided, and the type of the predetermined effect sound can be switched during the variable display of the identification information,
As the display mode of the first effect symbol when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode are provided, and the display mode of the first effect symbol is the first display mode. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the identification information was stopped and displayed, the display mode of the first effect pattern can be the second display mode different from the first display mode,
The predetermined standby display is started in a situation where the display mode of the first effect symbol is the second display mode, and even after the predetermined standby display is finished, the display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed. is configured to remain in the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first effect symbol is started to be displayed in the second display mode after the predetermined period has passed since the stop display of the identification information, the display mode of the first effect symbol is changed to the second display mode. While the predetermined effect sound is output for at least a specific period of the period from the start of the display to the start of the predetermined standby display, the displayed after the predetermined standby display ends The predetermined effect sound is not output during the display of the first effect pattern in the second display mode,
It is configured to be able to form a reach state with a plurality of first production patterns,
In a predetermined situation, it is configured to be able to form a superimposed state in which a certain first effect pattern and the certain first effect pattern are superimposed on each other,
The period during which the superimposed state is formed in the first variable display pattern, which is the pattern of the variable display that forms the ready-to-reach state, is longer than the period in which the superimposed state is formed in the second variable display pattern, which is the pattern of the variable display that does not form the ready-to-reach state. configured to be long,
The specific type of first effect pattern is configured to be displayable with a special element indicating that it is highly advantageous to the player in a specific situation,
The first effect pattern of a type different from the specific type of first effect pattern is configured not to be displayed with the special element attached in the specific situation,
The second effect pattern is configured not to be displayed with the special element attached in the specific situation, regardless of the type of the second effect pattern,
The final combination of the first effect pattern and the final combination of the second effect pattern are the final combination of the first effect pattern and Regardless of the display mode of the final combination of the second effect symbols, it is configured to be displayed in a predetermined display mode,
Having at least a specific display mode as the predetermined display mode related to the final combination of the first effect symbols,
The first effect pattern is configured to be displayed in combination with a specific display element and a predetermined display element,
The specific display element in a certain first performance pattern among the plurality of first performance symbols constituting the specific display mode after recovery from the power failure is set as the first display element, and the power failure occurs. The specific display element in a certain first effect pattern among the plurality of first effect patterns constituting the final combination of the preceding first effect patterns is defined as a second display element, and the first display element and the second display element are the same type of the specific display element, one of the plurality of first production patterns that constitute the specific display mode after power is restored Some of the plurality of first performance symbols constituting the final combination of the predetermined display element combined with the first display element in the design, and the first performance symbol before the power failure occurs. The predetermined display element combined with the second display element in the first effect pattern is configured to be of a different type.
A pachinko machine characterized by:

Images